JP7460171B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole have been provided in the gaming area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is held. If you win, the game machine that controls the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine) and the jackpot that changes to the open state when the ball enters the starting slot, and the jackpot opens. A gaming machine (a so-called two-type pachinko gaming machine) is known in which a jackpot gaming state is controlled on the condition that a game ball that enters the ball enters a specific area.

Furthermore, in order to improve the interest of the game, there are also so-called 1-type and 2-type pachinko game machines, which are a combination of a so-called 1-type pachinko game machine and a so-called 2-type pachinko game machine. known (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2009-178259

However, rather than simply combining the so-called Type 1 pachinko gaming machine with the so-called Type 2 pachinko gaming machine, there was a desire to create unprecedented gameplay and increase the entertainment value of the game.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine (e.g., the ninth pachinko gaming machine) according to the present invention includes a start variable display game execution means (e.g., the main CPU 201, etc.) capable of executing a start variable display game (e.g., variable display of special symbols, etc.) based on the passage of a gaming medium into a start area (e.g., the first start hole 9120 or the second start hole 9140), and a specific variable display game execution means capable of executing a specific variable display game (e.g., variable display of normal symbols, etc.) based on the passage of a gaming ball into a specific area (e.g., the normal symbol operation area 9126). a stage (e.g., main CPU 201, etc.), a determination means capable of determining the result of the start variable display game or the specific variable display game (e.g., main CPU 201 which performs a lottery for a special symbol or a lottery for a normal symbol), a displacement device operation control means (e.g., main CPU 201) capable of displacing a displacement device (e.g., normal electric role unit 9145) provided in a game area from a state in which it is difficult for a game medium to win to a state in which it is easy for a game medium to win when it is determined that the execution result of the specific variable display game satisfies a predetermined result based on the determination result of the determination means, a performance control means (e.g., sub-control circuit 300 and sub-CPU 301) which controls a performance execution means (e.g., display device 7, speaker 32 and LED group 46) capable of executing a performance, a game state control means (e.g., main CPU 201) capable of controlling a game state, a hold means (e.g., main RAM 203 having a special symbol start memory area) capable of holding the execution of the start variable display game for a predetermined number of times, and a variable display mode of the start variable display game (e.g., special symbol a start variable display mode determining means (e.g., the main CPU 201) capable of determining a variable display mode of the specific variable display game (e.g., a variable pattern of a normal symbol); a specific variable display mode determining means (e.g., the main CPU 201) capable of determining a variable display mode of the specific variable display game (e.g., a variable pattern of a normal symbol); and a special game state control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) capable of controlling the start variable display game to a special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state) in which a predetermined number of game values can be awarded to a player after the special result is established when the special result is satisfied,
The game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to any one of a normal game state and a specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state) having a different degree of advantage for a player from the normal game state,
The predetermined result includes at least a first predetermined result and a different second predetermined result (e.g., a long opening of the second starting hole 9140) that has a relatively longer time to facilitate the winning of the displacement device than the first predetermined result (e.g., a short opening of the second starting hole 9140),
The specific variable display mode determination means is capable of determining a first variable display mode (e.g., normal symbol variable pattern 13H-15H) that can vary over a first time (e.g., 15 seconds, 12 seconds, or 40 seconds) after the derivation of the first predetermined result when the execution result of the specific variable display game that has been previously changed is the first predetermined result, and is capable of determining a second variable display mode (e.g., normal symbol variable pattern 16H) that can vary over a second time that is longer than the first time (e.g., 60 seconds) after the derivation of the second predetermined result when the execution result of the specific variable display game that has previously changed is the second predetermined result;
The start-variation display mode determination means determines a third variable display mode (e.g., a first special symbol variable pattern 0AH) that can vary over a third time (e.g., 10 seconds) when the start-variation display game is not reserved by the reservation means when the start condition of the start-variation display game is established, and is capable of determining a fourth variable display mode (e.g., a second special symbol variable pattern 1AH) that can vary over a fourth time (e.g., 1 second) that is shorter than the third time when the start-variation display game is established and the start-variation display game is reserved by the reservation means;
The third time is longer than an average time required for the game medium launched from the launch device to reach the displacement device (for example, 5 seconds, which is the average arrival time of normal electricity),
the fourth time period is shorter than an average time period required for the game media launched from the launching device to reach the displacement device;
The presentation control means is characterized in that when the game medium passes through a special area while the special game state is being controlled by the special game state control means, it is capable of executing a special passing presentation for a predetermined time when the game medium passes through a special area while an earlier special game state is being executed in a case where multiple special game states can be executed, and it is capable of not executing a special passing presentation or of executing a special passing presentation for a time shorter than the predetermined time when the game medium passes through a special area while a later special game state that is executed after the earlier special game state is executed is being executed .

The present invention can improve the enjoyment of games.

FIG. 2 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. It is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the front right. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction. 1 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit of a first pachinko game machine. FIG. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit of the 1st pachinko game machine. 2 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine; This is an example of a game flow of a pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state. This is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximately) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 1A is an example of a special symbol stopping mode determination table in a first pachinko gaming machine; and FIG. 1B is an example of a decorative symbol stopping mode determination table in a first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is a modified example of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols of the first pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table for the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart (part 3) showing an example of the main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 4) showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a power cut process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of counter update processing of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time-saving counter update process of a 1st pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ceiling counter update process of a 1st pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a counter determination process of the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving transition determination process of a first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving transition process of a 1st pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving setting process of the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a big prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of setting confirmation processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a starting opening winning detection process in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a sub variable performance pattern determination table in the normal gaming state of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a winning combination occurs) in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when losing) in the first pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a flowchart showing a process for determining a pre-reading presentation pattern in a first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the jackpot-related look-ahead presentation format changes. This is an example of a look-ahead presentation pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and shows the process by which the time-saving hit look-ahead presentation form changes. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko gaming machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a common win-based look-ahead performance form to a jackpot-based look-ahead performance form. It is an example of the look-ahead performance pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a reserved image changes from a dedicated common winning look-ahead performance form to a jackpot-based look ahead performance form. It is an example of the look-ahead effect pattern of the first pachinko game machine, and is a diagram showing a process in which a pending image changes from a dedicated common winning look-ahead play form to a time-saving win look-ahead play form. 11 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a timing chart of the signal "prize ball information 1" among the signals outputted to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine. 11 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine depending on the gaming status. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the second pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols for a high start of the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a special pattern game determination process in the second pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the second pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the third pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a third pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the third pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display start process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big prize opening control process in the third pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the third pachinko game machine. An example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big prize opening and the opening timing of a specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, (A) Opening mode of the specific area FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a case where (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in an extended example. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an extended example. This is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, FIG. 3B is a diagram showing a case where the opening mode is the first opening mode and (B) a case where the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. An example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. FIG. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the special symbol hit determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in a normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the variation pattern table of special symbols in the C time-saving gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the special symbol variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the normal symbol type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the variation pattern table of normal symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display ending process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a limiter number update process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game end process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of V prize winning device release control processing in 1st Embodiment of the 4th Pachinko game machine. A flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the game state transition diagram which shows the transition of the game state in 1st Embodiment of the 4th pachinko game machine. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of a normal electric device in a normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of the normal electric accessory in the C time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table after a limiter function is activated in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the variation pattern table of normal symbols in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of a normal electric device in a normal game state or a C-time shortened game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the fifth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state in the fifth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol game ending process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation mode determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of an explanatory diagram explaining bonus time in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image explaining the effect of bonus time in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance when the 6th pachinko game machine is seen diagonally from the upper right in the front direction. It is an example of a conceptual diagram showing changes in the operation mode of the performance button device of the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the sixth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of a sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a winning type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in a sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a latter-stage change pattern table of special symbols in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a first half variation pattern table and a second half variation pattern table of special symbols in a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the grand prize opening preparation process in the 6th pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special prize opening control process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of variable normal symbol display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a presentation flow in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the performance flow of the right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table for a right-hit playing state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the second half icon number determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is an example of the first half icon number determination table in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a first half icon display scenario determination table for the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a first half icon collection order scenario determination table for the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a cherry blossom accumulation notification determination table in the normal game state of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a support icon display scenario determination table for showdown reach in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a lotus flower notice determination table for right-hand play in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a fan preview determination table for a jackpot game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation mode determination process in a sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of performance pattern determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 2 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the normal display image of the western mode and the eastern mode in the normal game state in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) explaining the cherry blossom accumulation announcement presentation in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) for explaining the performance of the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) for explaining a pseudo continuous effect in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image (Part 2) for explaining a pseudo continuous performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 3) explaining the pseudo consecutive performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) for explaining the performance of the road to the decisive battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image (part 2) illustrating the presentation of the road to the final battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating the performance of the road to the ultimate battle in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) explaining the presentation of a showdown reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) for explaining the showdown reach performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating a lotus flower preview performance in the sixth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image (part 1) for explaining a battle reach effect in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image (part 2) for explaining the performance of the battle reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a block diagram illustrating the configuration of the operation presentation time and reception time of the presentation button device of the Road to the Final Battle in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a timing chart of a signal of "external information 3" among the signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the seventh pachinko game machine. An example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in a time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a transition diagram of a special symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of data related to pre-reading of special symbols in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the opening pattern determination table of the normal electric accessory in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of the operation of a normal electric device in the first time-saving play state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a right-hit instruction period setting table for the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol variable display ending process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving management process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time-saving counter update process in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the seventh pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a small win game state setting process in the seventh pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a small win game state control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the grand prize opening preparation process in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening control process in the 7th pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot game state ending process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection process in the 7th pachinko game machine. It is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the presentation flow of the game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a symbol performance pattern determination table in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of the start time determination table of the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a symbol performance pattern determination table in the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table for the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table other than the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table at the time of final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a preview performance pattern determination table for a window preview in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the reservation notice performance pattern determination table of the reservation change notice of the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a winning notice performance pattern determination table for the flash notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a prohibition condition setting table for pre-read effects in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a small winning performance pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a V passing performance pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of the performance stage selection table after the end of the jackpot game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a presentation mode determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart (part 1) showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 2 is a flowchart (part 2) showing an example of a presentation pattern determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (Part 3) showing an example of performance pattern determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-read effect determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal display image in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image explaining the card performance and door performance in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating the production of a Sengoku entry chance in the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating selection of a production stage by a player in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image explaining the Sengoku time production when the male character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a display image explaining the Sengoku time production when the female character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating the performance performed when the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole in the small winning game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating the performance when Sengoku Time ends in the seventh pachinko game machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating the performance of a continuous battle in the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the eighth pachinko game machine. An example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of an eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the eighth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a small winning type determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a game status related setting table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in a normal game state or a special time-saving game state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the general time-saving gaming state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of data relating to pre-reading of special symbols in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a winning determination table for normal symbols in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a table for determining the opening pattern of a normal electric device in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a variation pattern table of normal symbols in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern variable display start process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of time saving management processing in the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit winning number update process in the 8th pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern game ending process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of processing during the closing of a small win game in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during opening of a small winning game in the 8th pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a large prize opening preparation process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening control process in the 8th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot game state termination processing in the eighth pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a limiter information update process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal pattern variable display start process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (Part 1) showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart (Part 2) showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a switch input detection process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a preview presentation pattern determination table for the time-saving game state in the eighth pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a sub-control circuit process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance mode determination processing in the 8th pachinko game machine. An example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of game states in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of the presentation flow of the game state in the eighth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating a battle presentation in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image explaining the card performance in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating the ending presentation in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a display image explaining the card performance in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a display image illustrating a preview performance in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. It is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit of the ninth pachinko game machine. An example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the ninth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the ninth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a small win type determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a game state related setting table in the ninth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state in the ninth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table in a time-saving game state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of data related to pre-reading special symbols in the ninth pachinko game machine. This is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the ninth pachinko game machine. 13 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is an example of a second starting hole opening pattern determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the ninth pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol control process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the 9th pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining whether to transition to the B time-saving gaming state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the ninth pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during small winning game closure in the 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during small winning game opening in the 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the grand prize opening preparation process in the 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big prize opening control process in the 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot game state termination processing in the ninth pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal pattern variable display start process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol per end processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. A flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection process in a 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of sub-control circuit processing in a 9th pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance mode determination processing in a 9th pachinko game machine. It is an example of the game state transition diagram which shows the transition of the game state in the 9th pachinko game machine. An example of an explanatory diagram of the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of a display device in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a display image illustrating a BONUS state effect in the ninth pachinko game machine.

As examples of gaming machines according to an embodiment of the present invention, a first pachinko gaming machine, a second pachinko gaming machine, and a third pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In this specification, unless otherwise specified, the front side of the pachinko game machine is the front direction, the back side of the pachinko game machine is the rear direction, and the left side when the pachinko game machine is viewed from the front is the left direction. The right side when looking at the machine from the front is the right direction, the top of the pachinko machine is up, the bottom of the pachinko machine is down, and the clockwise direction when looking at the pachinko machine from the front is the clockwise direction. , conversely, the counterclockwise direction is defined as the counterclockwise direction.

Both the first pachinko game machine and the second pachinko game machine are so-called type 1 pachinko game machines called digipachi. Among these, the first pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. On the other hand, the second pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a type 1/2 mixed machine, which is a combination of a type 1 gaming machine called a digital pachinko machine and a type 2 gaming machine called a feather mono. The third pachinko gaming machine described in this specification also has a first special symbol and a second special symbol, but this specification describes an example in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel, but only one of them is variably displayed. However, this is not intended to exclude type 1/2 mixed pachinko gaming machines in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel.

In addition, in this specification, when it is simply referred to as a "special symbol", it means both the first special symbol and the second special symbol unless otherwise specified.

In addition, the term "variable display" in this specification includes, for example, both "variable display" in which the pattern is displayed by changing, and "stop display" in which the pattern is displayed by stopping, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is called one "variable display". When the variable display pattern is stopped (hereinafter also referred to as "derivation"), the result of the special pattern hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "special pattern lottery") and the result of the normal pattern hit determination process (hereinafter also referred to as "normal pattern lottery") described later are determined. Note that although the pattern appears to be stopped, there are cases where the pattern is displayed in a state where the result of the special pattern hit determination process or the normal pattern hit determination process is not determined (for example, a state where it is temporarily stopped), and such a state is included in the variable display. Note that even if the pattern is temporarily stopped, for example, the result of the special pattern hit determination process or the normal pattern hit determination process is not determined at this point, so the pattern can be displayed again by changing.

In addition, in this specification, when describing the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, all of them have two special symbols (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, This will be explained using the case of (design) as an example. However, for the first pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, the number of special symbols may be one.

[1. The first pachinko game machine]
First, the first pachinko gaming machine will be described.

As a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed in parallel and only one of them is variably displayed, the first special symbol is variablely displayed and the second special symbol is variable. A pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine") in which, for example, the starting condition for a second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition for the first special symbol when the display is on hold; There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "sequential variable machine") in which a starting condition is established in the order of winnings, including a starting opening and a second starting opening.

In a priority variable machine, the start conditions for the first special symbol are met when certain requirements are met, such as neither the first nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the game is not in a jackpot game state, the variable display of the second special symbol is not on hold, and the variable display of the first special symbol is on hold. Also, in a priority variable machine, the start conditions for the second special symbol are met when certain requirements are met, such as neither the first nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the game is not in a jackpot game state, and the variable display of the second special symbol is on hold.

In a sequential variable machine, the start conditions for the first special symbol are met when at least all of the following are met: neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the game is not in a jackpot game state, the variable display of the first special symbol is on hold, and the earliest reserved symbol is the reserved variable display of the first special symbol. In a sequential variable machine, the start conditions for the second special symbol are met when at least all of the following are met: neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the game is not in a jackpot game state, the variable display of the second special symbol is on hold, and the earliest reserved symbol is the reserved variable display of the second special symbol.

The following explains using a priority variable machine as an example.

[1-1. Exterior configuration]
FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction. FIG. 3 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of the first pachinko game machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the rear direction.

[1-1-1. Basic configuration
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the first pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame 2, a base door 3, a glass door 4, a tray unit 5, a launching device 6, a display device 7 (see FIG. 2), a payout unit, and a payout unit. 8 (see FIG. 2 and FIG. 3), a board unit 9 (see FIG. 2 and FIG. 3), and a game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2). 160 (see FIG. 2). Here, the outer frame 2, the base door 3, the glass door 4, the tray unit 5, the launching device 6, the display device 7, the dispensing unit 8 and the base unit 9 will be briefly described. The game board unit 10 and the LED unit 160 will be described in detail below. Note that the above parentheses indicate reference drawings for configurations that are not shown in FIG.

(outer frame)
The outer frame 2 is a generally rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and has an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. This outer frame 2 is fixedly attached to the island equipment of the game hall. A hinge (no reference numeral) is provided on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2, for example, and the base door 3 is pivotally supported on this hinge. By doing so, it is possible to rotate the base door 3 forward with respect to the outer frame 2 about the hinge.

Note that the outer frame 2 supports a number of members such as a payout unit 8, a board unit 9, a display device 7, a game board unit 10, a glass door 4, and a tray unit 5, which will be described later, through the base door 3. High strength is required. On the other hand, for the purpose of enhancing the presentation effect, for example, the display device 7 (see FIG. 2) and the game board unit 10 are required to be made larger. Therefore, by constructing the outer frame 2 from, for example, a thin metal plate, it is possible to increase the size of the display device 7 and the game board unit 10 while maintaining high strength. In particular, if the outer frame 2 is made of aluminum, it is possible to reduce the weight.

(Base door)
The base door 3 has, for example, a dispensing unit 8 and a base unit 9 attached to its back side and supports these.

A game board unit 10 is fitted onto the front side of the base door 3. In addition, hinges (not referenced) are provided at the top end, the middle part below the vertical center, and the bottom end, for example on the front side of the left end of the base door 3, and the glass door 4 is journaled on the hinges at the top end and the middle part, and the plate unit 5 is journaled on the hinges at the middle part and the bottom end. In this way, the glass door 4 and the plate unit 5 can be rotated forward, either together or individually, relative to the base door 3, with the hinges as an axis.

Further, a firing device 6 is fixedly attached to the surface side of the base door 3, for example, on the lower right side, and speakers 32 (see FIG. 2) are fixedly attached, for example, to each of the left and right sides of the upper side. There is. The speaker 32 outputs, for example, audio effects such as characters displayed on the display device 7, music, sound effects, audio announcements, error notifications, and other effects.

Furthermore, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the side of the base door 3 opposite the hinge (i.e., the right end). This locking device has the function of locking the base door 3 to the outer frame 2 and locking the glass door 4 to the base door 3.

(Glass door)
The glass door 4 is a frame-shaped member in which an opening 41 is formed. A transparent protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the opening 41 from the rear side. When the glass door 4 is closed to the base door 3, the protective glass 43 faces a game area 105 (see FIG. 4 described later) formed in the game board unit 10. In this way, when the glass door 4 is closed to the base door 3, the game area 105 can be viewed from the front, and game balls flowing down the game area 105 can be prevented from flying out forward.

Note that the protective glass 43 may be one in which a plurality of glasses (for example, two glasses) are attached with a gap between them, or a unit made of a plurality of glasses with a gap between them. It's okay. Furthermore, in the case of a unitized structure, a light guide plate may be provided between the glasses. The above-mentioned protective glass 43 is not limited to glass, and may be made of transparent resin, for example.

In addition, an operation unit 66 is provided at the bottom of the glass door 4, which can be operated by, for example, a player to receive a gaming information service (for example, "UniMemo (registered trademark)"). This operation unit 66 can also function as an operation unit that can be operated by an arcade manager or the like on the hall menu screen.

A speaker cover 45 is provided on the top of the glass door 4, located in front of the speaker 32. A large number of LED groups 46 used for light-emitting effects and the like are arranged around the periphery of the opening 41 of the glass door 4, and an LED cover is provided in front of these LED groups 46. Strictly speaking, the reference numeral 46 shown in Figs. 1 and 2 is an LED cover, but for convenience, it will be described as an LED group 46. The LED group 46 is, for example, a light-emitting means for use in light announcements and light-emitting effects in various variations, but is not limited to LEDs as long as it can perform such light-emitting effects and the like, and may be, for example, liquid crystal or a lamp.

(Plate unit)
The plate unit 5 is a unit made up of an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52. The pan unit 5 is disposed at the front lower part of the base door 3 and below the glass door 4. The tray unit 5 is configured so that it can be rotated relative to the base door 3 to open and close, as described above, so that, for example, when a ball jam occurs, an employee at the game parlor or the like can clear the ball jam. Note that the plate unit 5 does not necessarily need to be provided with an upper plate 51 and a lower plate 52, and may be configured as an integrated plate.

The upper tray 51 is provided to be able to store game balls, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 are fired from the firing device 6 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). The upper tray 51 is provided with a payout opening 53, a presentation button 54, and the like. Game balls to be lent out and game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout opening 53 onto the upper tray 51. The effect button 54 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button", or the like. The performance button 54 may have a predetermined performance function in addition to the operation function operated by the player. The predetermined performance function includes, for example, a function that vibrates or protrudes upward based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Further, the function of the operation section 66 may also be used.

The lower tray 52 is primarily intended to store game balls that have spilled over from the upper tray 51. The lower tray 52 is provided with a payout outlet 55 that communicates with the upper tray 51, and game balls that have spilled over from the upper tray 51 are paid out from the payout outlet 55 to the lower tray 52.

An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the bottom of the lower tray 52, which can be opened and closed by the player's operation. When the opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 52 is opened, the game balls stored in the lower tray 52 can be transferred to the ball box placed below the lower tray 52. In addition, if each machine is equipped with a so-called individual counting system, not only is there no need for a ball box, but the game balls counted by each machine counting system can be stored and the stored game balls can be recycled again. It can also be used for games.

(launching device)
The firing device 6 is for firing the game balls stored in the upper tray 51 toward the game area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). The firing device 6 is disposed at the front lower right of the base door 3 and at the lower right of the dish unit 5. The firing device 6 includes a panel body 61, a drive device (not shown), and a firing handle 62.

The panel body 61 is arranged so that when the plate unit 5 is closed relative to the base door 3, the plate unit 5 and the launching device 6 fixedly attached to the base door 3 appear integrated in appearance.

The launch handle 62 is configured to be rotatable clockwise or counterclockwise, and is disposed on the front side of the panel body 61. The drive device is disposed on the back side of the panel body 61, and is configured, for example, by a launch solenoid (not shown). When the player operates the launch handle 62, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device. Note that when operating the launch handle 62, the greater the amount of clockwise rotation (amount of operation), the stronger the launch strength of the game ball.

A game ball fired from a firing device 6 placed at the lower right side of the dish unit 5 passes through a firing rail (not shown) and rolls in an arc along a guide rail 110 (see FIG. 4 described later) to play the game. It is launched into area 105 (see FIG. 4, which will be described later). Note that the placement position of the firing device 6 is not limited to the lower right side of the dish unit 5, but may be at the lower left side of the dish unit 5. In this case, the above-mentioned launch rail becomes unnecessary, the area below the glass door 4 can be effectively utilized, and versatility can be increased.

(display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 2) has a display area for displaying various performance images related to the game, and is attached so that the display area faces the opening of the game panel 100. The display device 7 may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a 7-segment display device, a dot matrix display device, a display device configured with electroluminescence, or one that projects images using a projection device such as a projector. It may be. In the display area of the display device 7, for example, presentation identification patterns (for example, decorative patterns) may be variably displayed to display the result of the special pattern hit determination process, or the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be displayed. A performance image, a performance image during a jackpot game state, a demonstration performance image, a performance image showing a pending status of variable display of special symbols, etc. are displayed. In this embodiment, the display device 7 is attached to the game board unit 10, but if the display area of the display device 7 is arranged to face the opening of the game panel 100, the display device 7 can be attached to the base door 3. It may also be possible to attach it.

In this embodiment, one display device 7 is provided to display the various performance images described above, but multiple display devices (e.g., two) may be provided and the performance images may be displayed using these multiple display devices.

(Payout unit)
The dispensing unit 8 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) is arranged on the back side of the base door 3, and is composed of a ball passage 81, a dispensing device 82, and the like. Game balls are supplied to the ball passage 81 from a storage tank 80 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). Note that game balls are supplied to the storage tank 80 from an island facility (not shown). When the payout condition is satisfied, the payout device 82 pays out a predetermined number of game balls from among the game balls supplied from the storage tank 80 to the ball passage 81, onto the upper tray 51, for example. Furthermore, a power switch 95 is provided on the back side of the payout unit 8, as shown in FIG.

(Board unit)
The board unit 9 (see Figs. 2 and 3) is disposed on the rear side of the base door 3. The board unit 9 is provided with various control boards and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the board unit 9 is provided with a main control board 91 on which a main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6 described below) is mounted, a sub-control board 92 on which a sub-control circuit 300 (see FIG. 6 described below) is mounted, a payout/launch control board 93 on which a payout/launch control circuit 400 (see FIG. 6 described below) that controls the payout/launch of game balls is mounted, and a power supply board on which a power supply circuit 450 (see FIG. 6 described below) that supplies power is mounted.

In addition, in FIG. 3, for convenience, the main control board 91, the sub-control board 92, the payout/launch control board 93, and the power supply board 94 are shown as reference numerals, but these boards are all housed in the board case. ing.

In addition, in this embodiment, the sub-control board 92 is configured as a one-board board (a board on which one control LSI or multiple LSIs are provided). However, this is not limited to this, and the sub-control board 92 may be configured with multiple boards, for example, by making all or part of the display control circuit 304, audio control circuit 305, LED control circuit 306, and role control circuit 307 (all of which are shown in FIG. 6, described below) separate boards.

[1-1-2. Game board unit]
4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 10 included in the first pachinko game machine. A game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 10, in which the launched game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board unit 10 mainly includes a game panel 100 in which a game area 105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down, a guide rail 110, and approximately the center of the game area 105. A center accessory 115 arranged in the section, a first starting opening 120, a general prize opening 122, a passing gate unit 125, a special electric accessory unit 130, a second starting opening 140, and a normal electric accessory unit. 145, an LED unit 160, an outlet 178, and a back unit (not shown) arranged at the rear of the game board unit 10. Note that, as described above, the LED unit 160 will be described later.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 7. A guide rail 110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 100, and gaming pegs (no reference number) and the like are planted therein. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 110 toward the gaming area 105, collides with the gaming pegs, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 105 while changing its direction of travel.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is disposed behind the gaming panel 100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 100 is constructed of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 100 may be constructed of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts of the gaming panel 100 where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be constructed of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 100 may be constructed of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

In this embodiment, the game panel 100 is made of transparent resin so that the back unit can be viewed from the front, but the game panel 100 may be entirely transparent or only a portion thereof may be transparent. .

(guide rail)
The guide rail 110 is composed of an arcuate outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are given). The game area 105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 6 (see FIG. 6 described later) to the upper part of the game area 105.

(center role)
The center accessory 115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 above. The game balls launched towards the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

In this first pachinko game machine, in the game area 105, an area to the left of the center accessory 115 is referred to as a left area 106, and an area to the right of the center accessory 115 is referred to as a right area 107. The definitions of the left area and the right area are the same for a second pachinko game machine and a third pachinko game machine, which will be described later.

The game ball fired toward the game area 105 by the firing device 6 flows down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107. The game balls flowing down the left side area 106 or the right side area 107 flow downward while changing the direction of travel due to collisions with game nails etc. planted in the game panel 100. When the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) is small, the fired game ball flows down the left side area 106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the firing handle 62 (see FIG. 1) is large, the fired game ball flows down the right side area 107.

In this specification, the manner in which the launch handle 62 is operated (hitting style) is referred to as a "left hit" when the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left side area 106, and as a "right hit" when the game ball is launched so that it flows down the right side area 107. In this way, the player can choose to hit the game ball toward either the left side area 106 or the right side area 107.

The center device 115 also has a warp entrance 117 formed on the outer periphery on the left side, through which game balls flowing down the left area 106 can enter. Game balls that enter the warp entrance 117 are configured to be guided to a stage 118 formed in the center device 115. The stage 118 is formed in front of the lower edge of the display area of the display device 7 so that the game balls can roll in the left-right direction. The stage 118 may be formed in multiple stages, such as an upper stage and a lower stage, for example.

A chance entrance 119 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the stage 118 at the center in the left-right direction. It is composed of Therefore, a game ball that entered the chance entrance 119 has a higher probability of starting the first start compared to a game ball that did not enter the warp entrance 117 or a game ball that entered the warp entrance 117 but did not enter the chance entrance 119. It is designed to win (pass) at 120 points.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 7, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later). It is also possible that a game ball hit from the right can win in the first starting hole 120. Also, instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting hole 120, a first starting hole that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win) may be provided.

When the first start hole switch 121 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 120, various data related to the first special symbol (for example, various random numbers such as a random number value for determining a big win of the first special symbol, a random number value for the symbol of the first special symbol, a random number value for determining the reach of the first special symbol, and a random number value for selecting the performance of the first special symbol) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition of the first special symbol (also referred to as the "variation start condition of the first special symbol" in this specification) is established, the stored various data is used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol. When a game ball enters the first start hole 120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 120 is not limited to this.

In this specification, the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 120 is referred to as the starting entry of the first special pattern, and various data related to the first special pattern (for example, various random number values such as the random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special pattern, the pattern random number value for the first special pattern, the random number value for determining reach for the first special pattern, and the random number value for selecting effects for the first special pattern) are referred to as the starting information of the first special pattern. In addition, storing the starting information of the first special pattern until the starting conditions are met is referred to as holding. The same applies to the second special pattern.

(General prize entry)
The general winning openings 122 are arranged in a plurality of general winning openings 122 at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and are arranged so that a game ball hit from the left can win a prize (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot win a prize). When a game ball wins in any of the general winning openings 122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later).

When the general winning hole switch 123 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects that a game ball enters (passes) the general winning hole 122, for example, four prize balls are paid out. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 125 is disposed in the right side area 107, and includes a passage gate 126 configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126. 127 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later).

When the passing gate switch 127 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 126, various data related to the normal symbols (e.g., random number values for determining whether the normal symbols are winning) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (e.g., up to four). The stored various data are used in the process of determining whether the normal symbols are winning. Note that even if the passing gate switch 127 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 126, no prize balls are paid out. The passing gate unit 125 may be located in the left area 106 instead of or in addition to the right area 107.

In this specification, the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 is referred to as starting passage, and various data related to the normal symbols extracted by the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 (for example, the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbols) etc.) is called normal symbol starting information. Further, storing the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is satisfied is called suspension.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric device unit 130 is a unit body that integrates a big winning opening 131, a count switch 132 (see FIG. 6 described later) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the big winning opening 131, and a special electric device 133. The special electric device unit 130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 125 in the right side area 107.

The large prize opening 131 is arranged so that game balls hit from the right can win (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or difficulty winning). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the large prize opening 131 described above, a large prize opening that can win game balls hit from the left may be arranged, or a large prize opening that can win game balls may be arranged above the center gimmick 115.

Moreover, the big winning opening 131 is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass) when the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It is a winning opening. When the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6, which will be described later) detects that a game ball has entered the big prize opening 131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the grand prize opening 131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric device 133 includes a special electric shutter 134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 135 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 134. The special electric device 133, i.e., the special electric shutter 134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for game balls to enter (pass) through the large prize opening 131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for game balls to enter (pass) through the large prize opening 131. In addition, in the big win game state, the transition from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the big win game state is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by performing a round game in which the large prize opening 131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period over multiple rounds.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 140 is arranged in the left region 106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting port 120). However, the second starting port 140 is designed such that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to win a prize, and a game ball hit to the right can win a prize. It is configured to be guided to the vicinity of. However, it is not essential that the second starting port 140 has such a configuration, and it may be provided in the right side region 107, for example. Further, the second starting port 140 may be configured so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize.

When the second start hole switch 141 (see FIG. 6 described later) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start hole 140, various data related to the second special symbol (for example, various random numbers such as a random number value for determining a big win of the second special symbol, a random number value for the symbol of the second special symbol, a random number value for determining the reach of the second special symbol, and a random number value for selecting the performance of the second special symbol) are extracted, and the extracted various data are stored up to a predetermined number (for example, up to 4). When the start condition of the second special symbol (also referred to as the "variation start condition of the second special symbol" in this specification) is established, the stored various data is used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol. When a game ball enters the second start hole 140, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 140 is not limited to this.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 145 is disposed in the left area 106 (more specifically, below the left side of the first starting hole 120), and is a unit body that integrates a winning hole through which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through) the winning hole, a switch that detects the entry of the game ball into the winning hole, and the normal electric accessory 146. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second starting hole 140, and the switch is the second starting hole switch 141.

The ordinary electric accessory 146 includes a general electric movable member 147 made of a blade member, for example, called an electric chew, and a general electric solenoid 148 (see FIG. 6 described later) that operates the ordinary electric movable member 147. . The normal electric accessory 146, that is, the movable member 147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 140, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 140. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state that is possible or difficult. In addition, the movable member 147 for general electric power includes a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, and the like.

(Out port)
The out port 178 is used to enter any of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 120, the second starting port 140, the large winning port 131, the general winning port 122, etc.) that are fired toward the gaming area 105. This is to eject missing game balls from the machine. This out port 178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned out port 178, an out port is provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between the plurality of general winning ports 122, and the game balls flowing down the game area 105 are discharged to the outside of the machine. You can also do this.

(Back unit)
The back unit (not shown) is for decorating the game board unit 10, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 100. This back unit includes a group of performance-use props 58 (see FIG. 6 described later) such as movable props controlled by the sub-control circuit 300. The group of performance-use props 58 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 7. At least one of the props or prop-use prop component members constituting the props among the group of performance-use props 58 functions as a performance-use prop that can be operated based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol.

[1-1-3. LED unit]
The LED unit 160 is disposed in the lower right portion of the game board unit 10, outside the game area 105 (see, for example, FIG. 4). The LED unit 160 is a unit body in which various display sections are integrated.

FIG. 5 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit 160 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, the LED unit 160 includes a normal symbol display section 161, a normal symbol reserve display section 162, a first special symbol display section 163, a second special symbol display section 164, and a first special symbol reserve display section. section 165, a second special symbol reservation display section 166, a probability change notification display section 167, and a time saving notification display section 168.

(Normal pattern display section)
The normal symbol display unit 161 displays the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process, and includes normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b. When the conditions for starting the variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "normal symbol starting conditions") are met, the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b start to alternately turn on and off to start the variable display of the normal symbol. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the normal symbol started, the variable display of the normal symbol stops, and the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process is derived.

When the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b becomes a specific stop display mode. For example, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the normal symbol display LED 161a lights up and the normal symbol display LED 161b goes out. On the other hand, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, for example, the normal symbol display LED 161a turns off and the normal symbol display LED 161b lights up. However, the stop display mode of the normal symbol display LEDs 161a and 161b indicating the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is not limited to this. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is decided to operate the normal electric accessory 146, the normal electric movable member 147 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the second starting port 140 It becomes easy for the game ball to enter (pass) the prize.

(Regular pattern reserved display section)
The reserved display unit 162 for normal symbols displays the number of reserved variable displays of normal symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number of normal symbols") when the start information of the normal symbols, i.e., the variable display, is reserved, and is equipped with reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b for normal symbols. The above "variable display of normal symbols is reserved" refers to the state from when the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 126 is detected and various data related to the normal symbols (for example, random number values for determining whether the normal symbols are hit, etc.) are extracted until the start condition of the normal symbols is established. The start condition of the normal symbols is established when at least the following is satisfied: the normal symbols are not being variable displayed, and the variable display of the normal symbols is reserved.

The normal symbol reserved display unit 162 displays the number of reserved normal symbols by a combination of the on/off state of the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b. For example, when the number of reserved normal symbols is one, the normal symbol reserved display LED 162a is lit and the normal symbol reserved display LED 162b is turned off. When the number of reserved normal symbols is two, both the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b are lit. When the number of reserved normal symbols is three, the normal symbol reserved display LED 162a flashes and the normal symbol reserved display LED 162b is lit. When the number of reserved normal symbols is four, both the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b flash. However, the display mode of the normal symbol reserved display LEDs 162a and 162b, which indicate the number of reserved normal symbols, is not limited to this.

(Special design display section)
The special symbol display unit displays the result of the special symbol winning determination process, and includes a first special symbol display unit 163 and a second special symbol display unit 164. The first special symbol display unit 163 includes a first special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 163a to 163h. Similarly, the second special symbol display unit 164 includes a second special symbol display LED group consisting of, for example, eight LEDs 164a to 164h.

When the conditions for starting the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "initiation conditions for the first special symbol") are met, the variable display of the first special symbol begins, in which all or some of the eight LEDs 163a-163h that make up the first special symbol display unit 163 alternately or mutually turn on and off. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of the first special symbol began, the variable display of the first special symbol stops, and the result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol is derived.

If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the combination of on/off of the eight LEDs 163a-163h that make up the first special symbol display section 163 will be a specific stop display mode. Then, when the first special symbol display section 163 is displayed as stopped in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

When the conditions for starting variable display of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "starting conditions for the second special symbol") are satisfied, all of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h constituting the second special symbol display section 164 Alternatively, a variable display of the second special symbol, some of which alternately or mutually repeat lighting and extinguishing, is started. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is derived.

If the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, the combination of on/off of the eight LEDs 164a-164h that make up the second special symbol display section 164 will be a specific stop display mode. Then, when the second special symbol display section 164 is displayed as stopped in a specific stop display mode, a transition to a jackpot game state is determined.

(Special design reserved display section)
The special pattern reserve display unit displays the number of reserved special pattern variable displays (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number of special patterns") when start information for a special pattern, i.e., a variable display, is reserved, and is provided with a first special pattern reserve display unit 165 and a second special pattern reserve display unit 166.

The first special symbol reservation display section 165 displays the number of reservations for the first special symbol when the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended, and the first special symbol reservation display LED 165a, 165b Equipped with. "The variable display of the first special symbol is suspended" means that the first special symbol is displayed after the winning (passage) of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is detected and the starting information of the first special symbol is extracted. This refers to the state until the special symbol starting conditions are met.

The first special symbol reservation display section 165 displays the number of reservations of the variable display of the first special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b. For example, when the number of reservations for the first special symbol is one, the reservation display LED 165a for the first special symbol lights up and the reservation display LED 165b for the first special symbol goes out. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is two, both of the reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol are lit. Moreover, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is three, the reservation display LED 165a for the first special symbol blinks and the reservation display LED 165b for the first special symbol lights up. Furthermore, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol is four, both of the reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b for the first special symbol blink. However, the display mode of the first special symbol reservation display LEDs 165a and 165b indicating the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not limited to this.

The second special symbol reservation display section 166 displays the number of reservations for the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, and the second special symbol reservation display LED 166a, 166b Equipped with. "The variable display of the second special symbol is on hold" means that the second special symbol is displayed after the winning (passing) of the game ball to the second starting port 140 is detected and the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted. This refers to the state until the special symbol starting conditions are met.

The second special symbol reservation display section 166 displays the number of reservations of the variable display of the second special symbol by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b. For example, when the number of reservations for the second special symbol is one, the reservation display LED 166a for the second special symbol lights up and the reservation display LED 166b for the second special symbol goes out. Further, when the number of second special symbols reserved is two, both of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b are lit. Further, when the number of second special symbols on hold is three, the second special symbol hold display LED 166a blinks and the second special symbol hold display LED 166b lights up. Furthermore, when the number of second special symbols on hold is four, both of the second special symbol hold display LEDs 166a and 166b blink. However, the display mode of the second special symbol reservation display LEDs 166a and 166b indicating the number of second special symbols reserved is not limited to this.

(Display unit for probability change notification)
The probability change notification display unit 167 can be turned on while the probability change control described below is being executed, and is composed of, for example, an LED or a lamp.

The probability change notification display unit 167 may be lit while probability change control is being executed, but it may also be configured not to light up so that it is not possible to tell from the outside that probability change control is being executed, thereby concealing the fact that probability change control is being executed.

However, when the power is cut off while the special rate control is being executed, the data indicating that the special rate control is being executed is not lost due to the function of the backup capacitor 207 described below. Therefore, if the power is cut off while the special rate control is being executed and then turned on, the special rate notification display unit 167 lights up in a manner that allows the user to know from the outside that the special rate control is being executed.

Even if whether or not the special rate control is being executed is kept secret before the power is cut off, when the power is turned on, the special rate control display unit 167 is turned on, so that it is possible to know that the special rate control is being executed.

(Time-saving notification display unit)
The time-saving notification display unit 168 can be turned on while the time-saving control described below is being executed, and is configured with, for example, an LED or a lamp.

In this embodiment, the time saving notification display section 168 includes, for example, a first time saving notification display section 168a and a second time saving notification display section 168b, but the number of time saving notification display sections 168 is limited to this. Not limited.

Although details will be described later, the time-saving gaming state includes an A time-saving gaming state, a B time-saving gaming state, and a C time-saving gaming state. For example, it is configured such that it is possible to grasp which time-saving game state the game is in by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the first time-saving notification display section 168a and the second time-saving notification display section 168b.

The time-saving notification display unit 168 may light up the first time-saving notification display unit 168a and/or the second time-saving notification display unit 168b depending on the time-saving control being executed, but may be turned on or off in a manner that makes it impossible to know from the outside whether or not time-saving control is being executed or the type of time-saving control being executed (for example, all lights off, all lights on, or a manner unrelated to the time-saving control being executed), thereby concealing the fact that time-saving control is being executed or the type of time-saving control being executed. In particular, while it may be possible to know from the outside whether or not time-saving control is being executed, it may be difficult to know from the outside which time-saving control is being executed, so by concealing the type of time-saving control being executed, it is possible to increase interest.

However, when the power supply is cut off while time-saving control is being executed, due to the function of the backup capacitor 207 described below, not only the data indicating that time-saving control is being executed, but also the data indicating the type of time-saving control being executed is not lost. Therefore, if the power supply is cut off while time-saving control is being executed and then the power supply is turned on again, the time-saving notification display unit 168 turns on or off in a manner that allows the user to know from the outside that time-saving control is being executed and the type of time-saving control being executed.

Note that even if the time-saving control is being executed before the power is turned off, or the type of time-saving control being executed is hidden so that it cannot be seen from the outside, the power is turned on. In such a case, the time saving notification display unit 168 is configured to turn on and/or turn off in such a manner that the time saving control is being executed and the type of time saving control being executed can be visually recognized.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Fig. 6 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 6, the first pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch. It is composed of a control circuit 400 and a power supply circuit 450.

[1-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 controls, for example, processing executed when the power is turned on, processing related to gaming operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 201, a main ROM 202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 204, a backup capacitor 207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 202, a main RAM 203, an initial reset circuit 204, etc. are connected to the main CPU 201. The main CPU 201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the first pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 202.

The main RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for playing the game. The main RAM 203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 201 and has the function of storing various flags and variable values. Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 204 monitors the main CPU 201 and outputs a reset signal when necessary.

The backup capacitor 207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 200 also includes an I/O port 205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 200. For example, the above-mentioned normal symbol display unit 161, normal symbol reserved display unit 162, first special symbol display unit 163, second special symbol display unit 164, first special symbol reserved display unit 165, second special symbol reserved display unit 166, probability change notification display unit 167, time reduction notification display unit 168, normal power solenoid 148, and special power solenoid 135 are connected to the main control circuit 200. In addition to these, the performance display monitor 170 and error notification monitor 172 are also connected to the main control circuit 200. The main control circuit 200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 205.

The performance display monitor 170 displays performance display data and setting values (described later) under the control of the main CPU 201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc., in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, which will be described later. Note that the setting change code may be configured to display a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress).

Also connected to the main control circuit 200 are a first starting port switch 121, a second starting port switch 141, a passage gate switch 127, a count switch 132, and a general winning port switch 123. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 200 via I/O port 205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 200 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 184 used to send data to a hall computer 186 that manages the pachinko machines in the hall, a setting key 174 that is operated to change or check the setting value in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function described later, and a backup clear switch 176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 203 in response to the operation of the gaming center manager. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 176 also serves as a switch for changing the setting value described later, but is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the setting value may also be provided.

The setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the arcade manager. "Inside a specified case" does not only mean a case in which the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176, so that the arcade manager can touch the setting key 174 and/or the backup clear switch 176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the arcade manager to expose the back.

In this embodiment, the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are connected to the main control circuit 200, but this is not limited thereto, and they may be configured to be connected to the payout/launch control circuit 400 or the power supply circuit 450, for example. In this case, too, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the arcade manager from easily touching the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176.

[1-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 includes a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a role control circuit 307, and a command input port 308. The sub-control circuit 300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to commands from the main control circuit 200. Although not shown in Fig. 6, the sub-control circuit 300 is also connected to effect buttons 54 (see Fig. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the first pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 302. In particular, the sub CPU 301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

The work RAM 303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 301.

The display control circuit 304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 7. The display control circuit 304 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and an image data processor. It is equipped with a D/A converter etc. that converts the image signal into an image signal.

The display control circuit 304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 7 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub CPU 301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 7 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data indicating decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 7 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the display device 7, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 7. In this way, the display control circuit 304 can control the display device 7 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 32. The audio control circuit 305 includes a sound source IC for controlling the audio, an audio data ROM for storing various types of audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as an AMP) for amplifying the audio signal, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 32. In response to a sound generation command from the sub-CPU 301, the sound source IC selects one piece of sound data from multiple pieces of sound data stored in the sound data ROM. The sound source IC also reads the selected sound data from the sound data ROM, converts the sound data into a specified sound signal, and supplies the converted sound signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies signals such as sound and sound effects output from the speaker 32.

The LED control circuit 306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 46, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 58). The accessory control circuit 307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

The reel control circuit 307 selects one of the multiple operation patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a reel operation command from the sub-CPU 301. The selected operation pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is then supplied to control the mechanical operation of each reel. The lighting circuit selects one of the multiple lighting patterns stored in the reel data ROM in response to a lighting command from the sub-CPU 301. The selected lighting pattern is then read from the reel data ROM, and a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is then supplied to control the lighting operation of each reel.

The command input port 308 is connected to the command output port 206 and receives various commands sent from the main control circuit 200.

[1-2-3. Payout/fire control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls, and the payout/launch control circuit 400 includes a payout device 82 that can pay out game balls, and a payout device 82 that can shoot game balls. A firing device 6 capable of controlling the player, a card unit 180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

When the payout/launch control circuit 400 receives the prize ball control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 82 and controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls. .

The card unit 180 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 182. The ball lending operation panel 182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 180. The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout device 82 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 180. The operation panel 182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 180 side.

Further, based on the fact that the firing handle 62 is rotated clockwise, the dispensing/firing control circuit 400 applies electric power to a firing solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). Controls the supply and firing of game balls.

[1-2-4. Power supply circuit]
The power supply circuit 450 is a power supply circuit created in order to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing the game to the main control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 300, the payout/shooting control circuit 400, etc.

The power supply circuit 450 is connected to a power switch 95 and other components. The power switch 95 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, the payout/launch control circuit 400, etc.).

[1-3. Game flow]
Next, an example of a game flow will be described with reference to Fig. 7 and Fig. 8. Fig. 7 is an example of a game flow. Fig. 8 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of a game state. Note that the game flow shown in Fig. 7 is not a control flow, but a flow that can be grasped from the outside.

As shown in FIG. 7, in a pachinko game, a game ball is fired by a user operation such as a player, and when the game ball enters various winning holes (for example, the first starting hole 120 etc.), the game ball is released. Payout control processing is performed. Pachinko games include "special symbol games" that use special symbols and "normal symbol games" that use regular symbols. The special symbol game is, for example, a game in which a special symbol hit determination process is executed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting hole 120, 140, and it is determined whether or not to shift to a jackpot game state. In addition, the normal symbol game means, for example, that the normal symbol hit determination process is executed based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126, and the normal electric accessory 146 is activated to win the prize opening (in this embodiment, the second This is a game in which it is decided whether or not to open the starting port 140). In addition, in this specification, "special symbol games" are sometimes referred to as "games," but "games" is a term used with a broad concept. For example, games that use games (see FIG. 1) are also included in "games."

In addition, in this specification, one special pattern game is defined as the period from when the variable display of the special pattern begins until this variable display ends and the result of the special pattern hit determination process is definitively displayed (derived) (more specifically, until the special pattern determination time has passed). However, if the game is controlled to a big hit game state after the result of the special pattern hit determination process is derived, one special pattern game is defined as the period until the end of the big hit game state. Note that in the first pachinko game machine, small hits are not included in the result of the special pattern hit determination process, but in the pachinko game machine in which small hits are included in the result of the special pattern hit determination process, one special pattern game is defined as the period until the end of the small hit game state after the result of the special pattern hit determination process is derived and the game is controlled to a small hit game state.

When a stop display mode indicating a jackpot in a special symbol game is output to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the special electric device 133 is operated to keep the jackpot winning hole 131 open for a predetermined time (for example, up to 30,000 msec), and the possibility of winning in the jackpot winning hole 131 is relatively increased.

In addition, when a stop display mode indicating a normal symbol win is output to the normal symbol display unit 161 in a normal symbol game, the normal electric device 146 is activated to open the winning hole (for example, the second starting hole 140 in this embodiment), and the possibility of winning through the second starting hole 140, for example, is relatively increased.

Note that the games that can be executed in the pachinko game are not limited to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, and a new game other than these may be executable.

Hereinafter, an overview of the game flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be explained.

[1-3-1. Special design game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the special symbol game mainly includes a special symbol starting winning process that is carried out when there is a winning (passing) to the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140, and the special symbol winning process. This includes special symbol control processing that is performed based on the establishment of the starting conditions.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 120 or the second starting hole 140, a special symbol starting winning process is performed. In this special symbol start winning process, various data related to the special symbol (for example, random value for jackpot determination, random symbol value, reach determination) are transferred from various counters for special symbols (for example, jackpot determination counter, symbol determination counter, etc.). random values, various random values such as random values for effect selection, etc.) are extracted (obtained). Each extracted random value is retained as starting information. This special symbol starting winning process is performed even during execution of the special symbol control process.

In addition, in the special symbol control process, it is determined whether or not the start conditions for the special symbol are met. When the start conditions for the special symbol are met, a special symbol hit determination process is performed to determine whether or not there is a "jackpot" by referring to the random number value for jackpot determination extracted from the special symbol's jackpot determination counter. After that, a stop symbol determination process is performed to determine the stop symbol. In the stop symbol determination process, the special symbol to be stopped is determined by referring to the random number value for pattern determination extracted from the special symbol's pattern determination counter and the result of the special symbol hit determination process.

In this embodiment, if the probability variable flag is on, the probability variable control is executed. In the hit determination process for the special symbol described above, if the probability variable flag is off, it is determined to be a "jackpot" with a relatively low probability, and if the probability variable flag is on, it is determined to be a "jackpot" with a relatively high probability. Hereinafter, in this specification, the probability of being determined to be a "jackpot" is referred to as the "jackpot probability."

The high probability flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not high probability control is executed. When the high probability flag is on, the game proceeds in a game state in which high probability control is executed (for example, in this embodiment, a high probability time-saving game state). On the other hand, when the high probability flag is off, the game proceeds in a game state in which high probability control is not executed (for example, a normal game state or a low probability time-saving game state).

Next, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the counter for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value, the result of the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination processing, and the above-mentioned special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is (variable display pattern) is determined. Then, a special symbol variable display control process is performed based on the result of the special symbol variation pattern determination process.

Once the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined, a presentation pattern determination process is then performed to determine the presentation pattern. Then, based on the results of the presentation pattern determination process, presentation control process is performed for display presentation such as decorative symbols and character presentations displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and sound presentation such as voice and sound effects output from the speaker 32. The presentation control process is performed by the sub-CPU 301.

Then, when the special pattern variable display control process and presentation control process are completed and a jackpot has been hit, a jackpot game control process is carried out. The jackpot game control process is a process executed in the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state ends, the special pattern game ends, and a game state transition control process to a non-jackpot game state is carried out. In this case, the game state transitions depending on the type of jackpot. For example, if the jackpot type is one in which both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are set to on, a transition to a high-probability time-saving game state occurs after the jackpot game state ends.

On the other hand, if there is no big win, i.e., if it is a miss, the special symbol game ends. Note that in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small win, but in pachinko gaming machines in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small win, a small win game control process is performed when a small win is won. Also, if there is no big win but a time-saving hit, which will be described later, the game will transition to a time-saving game state.

Then, each time the conditions for starting the special symbol are met, the various processes of the special symbol control process described above are repeated.

If a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 during the special symbol control process, the special symbol starting award process is executed. In addition, the starting information of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 (for example, the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol design, the random number for reach determination, and the random number for performance selection) Various data such as various random values such as numerical values, etc.) are held until the starting conditions of the special symbol are satisfied.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a maximum of eight pieces of start information for special patterns can be reserved, consisting of four pieces of start information for the first special pattern and four pieces of start information for the second special pattern, but the number of start information for special patterns that can be reserved is not limited to this. For example, more start information for the first special pattern may be reserved than start information for the second special pattern, or more start information for the second special pattern may be reserved than start information for the first special pattern.

Although not shown in FIG. 7, the game ball is extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the starting hole 120, 140 between when the special symbol starts winning and until the special symbol's starting conditions are met. A pre-read judgment (for example, see S396 in FIG. 52 described later) is performed to determine the winning/losing (presence or absence of a "jackpot" win) and fluctuation pattern based on the start information obtained prior to the special symbol winning judgment process. It may be provided with a pre-read performance function that performs a predetermined performance based on the result. In addition, the above-mentioned pre-reading determination may be performed before the starting information extracted by winning a game ball to the starting opening 120, 140 is held, or may be performed after being held.

[1-3-2. Normal symbol game]
As shown in FIG. 7, the normal symbol game mainly includes a normal symbol start passing process that is performed when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, and a normal symbol start passing process that is performed when the normal symbol starting condition is satisfied. This includes normal symbol control processing that is performed based on this.

When a game ball passes through the passage gate 126, a normal symbol start passage process is executed. In this normal symbol starting passing process, the starting information of the normal symbol (for example, the random number value for determining the winning of the normal symbol, etc.) is extracted (obtained) from the counter for determining the winning of the normal symbol, and the extracted starting information is held.

In addition, in the normal symbol control process, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not the start condition for the normal symbol has been met. When starting the variable display of the normal symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit judgment random number value extracted from the hit judgment counter for the normal symbol, executes the normal symbol hit judgment process to determine whether or not the "normal symbol hit" has occurred, and then executes the variation pattern determination process. In this process, the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the main CPU 201 refers to the result of the winning determination process for the normal symbol and the determined variation pattern of the normal symbol, and executes a variable display control process that controls the variable display of the normal symbol, and a performance control process that performs a predetermined performance. Note that there are cases in which the performance control process is not executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the performance control process of the normal symbol are completed, the main CPU 201 judges whether or not a normal winning symbol indicating a "normal winning symbol" has been derived to the normal symbol display unit 161 (see FIG. 5 and FIG. 6). When it is judged that a stop display mode indicating a normal winning symbol has been derived, the main CPU 201 executes a normal symbol winning game control process. In this normal symbol winning game control process, the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) is operated, and the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)) is opened so that the winning ball can enter (pass through) the winning hole or the opening state is easily opened. On the other hand, when it is judged that a stop display mode indicating a normal winning symbol has not been derived, the main CPU 201 does not execute the normal symbol winning game control process and ends the normal symbol control process.

In addition, in a game state where the time-saving control is not executed (for example, a normal game state), the probability that a stop display mode indicating a normal win will be derived may be set to 0. The time-saving control corresponds to at least one of the following controls: special symbol shortening control, which shortens the variable display time of the special symbol, and electric support control, which operates the normal electric role device 146 to increase the frequency with which the winning port (for example, the second starting port 140 (see FIG. 4) in this embodiment) is opened, compared to when the time-saving control is not executed. This time-saving control may be a control that performs both the special symbol shortening control and the electric support control, or a control that performs only one of the special symbol shortening control and the electric support control.

The electric support control improves the time-saving performance of at least one of the winning probability of "per normal symbol", the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the ordinary electric accessory 146. This is a control that allows The time-saving performance is a performance that changes the ease of winning a game ball to a winning opening (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting opening 140 (see FIG. 4)), and is a performance that changes the winning probability of "normal symbol". , the variable display time of the normal symbol, or/and the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric accessory 146, etc. In addition, improving the time-saving performance means, for example, making it easier to enter the game ball into the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)). In other words, when the electric support control is executed, compared to the case where the electric support control is not executed, the probability of winning "per normal symbol" increases, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and/or the ordinary electric accessory 146 makes winning easier (increasing the number of openings, extending opening time, shortening wait time, etc.).

Then, each time the starting condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, the various processes of the normal symbol control process described above are repeated.

In addition, when a game ball passes through the passage gate 126 during the normal symbol control process, the normal symbol start passing process is executed. In addition, starting information of the normal symbol (for example, a random number value for determining a hit of the normal symbol, etc.) extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 is held until the starting condition of the normal symbol is satisfied.

In addition, the start of the variable display of the normal symbols is performed in the order in which they are put on hold, and when the starting conditions for the normal symbols are met, the variable display of the starting information that was held first among the starting information of the normal symbols that are on hold will be started. Execute.

The method for extracting various random numbers (for example, the random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is a jackpot, the design random number value for the first special symbol, the random number value for determining whether the first special symbol is in reach, the random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is a jackpot, the design random number value for the second special symbol, the random number value for determining whether the second special symbol is in reach, and the random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is in reach, etc.) may be a soft random number method that generates random numbers within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 201, or a hard random number method that extracts random numbers from a counter in a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle.

[1-3-3. Game state transition]
As shown in FIG. 8, the gaming state can be roughly divided into a non-jackpot gaming state and a jackpot gaming state. In the non-jackpot gaming state, the special symbol game is executed as described above, and when a jackpot is derived as a result of the special symbol winning determination process, the non-jackpot gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot game state, the round game is executed as described above, and the variable display of special symbols is not executed. However, the variable display of normal symbols can be executed even in the jackpot game state. It should be noted that a description of the small winning game state will be omitted.

Non-jackpot game states can be broadly divided into low-probability states in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively low, and high-probability game states in which the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol hit determination process is relatively high.

The high probability game state includes a high probability time-saving game state (high probability, high base) in which time-saving control is executed. Note that, although not included in the high probability game state in the first pachinko game machine, a high probability non-time-saving game state (high probability, low base state) in which time-saving control is not executed may also be included in the high probability game state, as shown in FIG. 8.

The low probability state includes a normal game state (low probability, low base) in which time-saving control is not executed, and a time-saving game state (low probability, high base) in which time-saving control is executed.

Furthermore, the time-saving play state includes time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, and time-saving play state C.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to after a specific jackpot gaming state ends, and when a specified number of special symbol games are executed or transitioning to the jackpot gaming state, the A time-saving gaming state is switched to. finish. When the A time-saving game state ends by executing the special symbol game a specified number of times, the game mode shifts to the normal game state in principle.

The B time-saving game state is a time-saving game state to which a player can enter when, for example, a jackpot game state ends and the variable display of special symbols begins in a non-high probability game state (i.e., a game state in which the probability flag is off), or when the number of times the special symbols are variable displayed (e.g., a ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (e.g., 1,000 times), starting from when the RAM is cleared (described below). The B time-saving game state ends when a specified number of special symbol games are played or when a transition is made to the jackpot game state. When the B time-saving game state ends as a result of a specified number of special symbol games being played, the game will generally transition to the normal game state.

C time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that can be transitioned to when the result of the special symbol hit determination processing performed in the low probability state is "time-saving winning" and the display mode of "time-saving winning" is derived. When the special symbol game is executed a predetermined number of times determined by winning the "Time-saving win" or when the state shifts to the jackpot game state, the time-saving game state C ends. When the C time-saving game state ends by executing the above specified number of special symbol games, in principle, the game shifts to the normal game state. For example, if a plurality of time-saving game states overlap, even if the special symbol game is executed the specified number of times, the time-saving game state C continues instead of shifting to the normal game state.

In this specification, regardless of whether multiple time-saving gaming states are executed overlappingly or not, the conditions for transition to the time-saving gaming state are satisfied in the time-saving gaming state, or the conditions for transitioning to multiple time-saving gaming states are satisfied simultaneously. This is called "overlapping" of time-saving gaming states. When a plurality of time-saving gaming states overlap, the main CPU 201 controls to internally activate any of the overlapping time-saving gaming states, that is, internally operating the plurality of overlapping time-saving gaming states. Operating in parallel is called "executing in parallel." However, even if the main CPU 201 internally executes a plurality of time-saving game states in a stacked manner, the time-saving control that is actually executed is only the time-saving control corresponding to one of the time-saving game states. That is, even if a plurality of time-saving gaming states are being executed overlappingly, the player understands that the game is being controlled to any one of the plurality of time-saving gaming states.

Next, we will explain how the game state changes.

Even when controlled in the normal gaming state, time-saving gaming state (A working-time saving gaming state, B working-time saving gaming state, C working-time saving gaming state), and high-accuracy gaming state (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), the special symbol If the result of the hit determination process is a jackpot, the game shifts to a jackpot game state.

When the jackpot game state ends, depending on the game specifications, it is possible to transition to any of the following game states: normal game state, time-saving game state, and high-probability game state (e.g. high-probability time-saving game state). However, the time-saving game state to which you can transition when the jackpot game state ends is limited to the A time-saving game state.

When controlled to a high probability game state, there is no transition from the high probability game state to a time-limited game state or a normal game state, except for some pachinko game machines such as so-called ST machines and loop machines. Similarly, there is no transition from the time-limited game state or the normal game state to the high probability game state unless the jackpot game state is passed through.

When controlled to the normal game state, it is possible to transition to the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C, but it is not possible to transition to the time-saving game state A without passing through the jackpot game state. However, when a specified number of special symbol games are played in the time-saving game state A, the game transitions to the normal game state, so it is possible to transition from the time-saving game state A to the normal game state. Note that, regardless of whether the game is controlled to the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C, the game transitions to the normal game state when a specified number of special symbol games are played, so it is also possible to transition from the time-saving game state B or time-saving game state C to the normal game state.

Next, we will explain how to transition between time-saving play states.

When controlled in the time-saving game state A, the number of time-saving plays that can be performed in the time-saving game state A is set to a number less than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition for the time-saving game state B, so there is no transition from the time-saving game state A to the time-saving game state B. Also, since the time-saving game state A is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the time-saving game state B to the time-saving game state A. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the time-saving game state A is a "time-saving hit," the transition condition for the time-saving game state C is met, so the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state C may overlap. However, as described above, since the time-saving game state A is controlled via the jackpot game state, there is no transition from the time-saving game state C to the time-saving game state A.

When controlled in the B time saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the condition for transition to the C time saving gaming state is established, and the B time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state are Can overlap. Also, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state may overlap.

When controlled in the C time-saving gaming state, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the condition for transition to the C-time-saving gaming state is established, and the C-time-saving gaming state and the C-time saving gaming state are Can overlap.

More details about overlapping time-saving game modes will be provided later.

[1-4. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 9 to 19.

The first pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state in which neither probability variable control nor time-saving control is executed, a high-precision time-saving gaming state in which both probability variable control and time-saving control are executed, and a high-precision time-saving gaming state in which probability variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed. Low-probability time-saving game states to be executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is able to proceed with the game in any one of these game states. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed playing is the normal game mode in the high-accuracy time-saving game state and the low-accuracy time-saving game state. The sub CPU 301 executes control to display, for example, the display area of the display device 7 in a manner of playing that is considered to be a normal game mode. Note that the "regular game mode" corresponds to a game mode that is least disadvantageous to the player (advantageous to the player) among a plurality of game modes (eg, firing mode).

[1-4-1. Jackpot probability for each setting value]
FIG. 9 is an example of a table showing the jackpot probability (approximately) for each set value in the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first pachinko game machine, a plurality of setting values such as settings 1 to 6 can be changed using the above-mentioned setting key 174, backup clear switch 176 (both shown in FIG. 6), etc. It can be set to one of these settings. In the case of such a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value, and the main CPU 201 executes special symbol hit determination processing based on the set value.

Specifically, the probability of winning in a game state where the probability variable flag is off and the probability variable control is not executed (for example, in the normal game state and the low probability time-saving game state in this embodiment), regardless of whether the first special symbol hit determination process or the second special symbol hit determination process is executed, is, for example, about 1 in 319 in setting 1, about 1 in 314 in setting 2, about 1 in 309 in setting 3, about 1 in 304 in setting 4, about 1 in 299 in setting 5, and about 1 in 294 in setting 6. In addition, the probability of winning in a game state where the probability variable flag is on and the probability variable control is executed (for example, in the high probability time-saving game state in this embodiment), is about 1 in 77 in setting 1, about 1 in 76 in setting 2, about 1 in 75 in setting 3, about 1 in 74 in setting 4, about 1 in 73 in setting 5, and about 1 in 72 in setting 6.

The probability of a time-saving hit is the same for all settings, unlike the probability of a jackpot. For example, the probability of a time-saving hit when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed is 1 in 160, and the probability of a time-saving hit when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed is 1 in 240. The probability of a time-saving hit may be different when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is executed and when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is executed, or it may be the same.

However, even if the probability of a time-saving hit is the same for all setting values, the time-saving continuation rate (e.g., the number of time-saving times set) may be different depending on the setting value. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times may be set to 50 for setting 1, and 100 for setting 6.

Note that in the first pachinko game machine, small wins are not included in the lottery targets, but small wins may be included in the lottery targets. When a small win is included in the lottery target, the small win probability may be set to be a common probability for all set values. In addition, if a small hit is included in the lottery, the small hit will only be won if the hit determination process for one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) is performed. You can also make it wet. In this case, in the hit determination process for the other special symbol (for example, the first special symbol), in addition to not determining whether or not a small hit has been won, the probability of a small win is set to 0, and whether or not a small win has been won is determined. It may be an aspect in which the determination is made.

The short-time winning probability and the small winning probability when the lottery includes the above-mentioned short winning probability are the same probabilities for all setting values as described above, but they are not limited to this, and may vary depending on the setting value. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot probabilities are different for all setting values, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot probability is common between setting 1 and setting 2, and the jackpot probability is common between setting 3 and setting 4. The jackpot probability may be the same for a plurality of setting values, such as a jackpot probability or a common jackpot probability between settings 5 and 6.

Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot probability varies depending on the set value, but if the degree of advantage for the player varies depending on the set value, the target that differs depending on the set value is not necessarily limited to the jackpot probability. For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state when a game ball enters a specific winning opening, the probability of winning a prize in a specific winning opening may be varied depending on a set value. Note that it is not essential that the pachinko game machine be a pachinko game machine with a setting function.

[1-4-2. Special symbol winning judgment table]
10 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 10 is an example of the case of setting 1 shown in FIG.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the special symbol hit determination process, that is, the "time-saving hit" is based on the random numerical value for jackpot determination extracted when a game ball enters the starting opening 120, 140. , is a table that is referred to when determining a "jackpot" or "loss" by lottery. In this embodiment, the lottery targets are "time saving win", "big hit", and "loss", and other lottery targets (for example, small win) are not included, but the first starting opening 120 or/and When a game ball enters the second starting hole 140, it may be determined as another lottery target.

The random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process, as described above. In this embodiment, the random number value for jackpot determination is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. The hit determination table of the first special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value for each value of the probability variable flag (0 or 1). Relationship with data, relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and range of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "loss" (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this specification, when the value of the probability variation flag is "0", the probability variation flag is off, and when the value of the probability variation flag is "1", the probability variation flag is on.

In addition, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether the result is a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination, just as in the hit determination process for the first special symbol. In the hit determination table for the second special symbol, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data are specified.

In this embodiment, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 executes the "time-saving hit". ”, and the winning/losing judgment value data is determined as “time-saving winning judging value data”. In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 409 to 613, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and that it is a win. The judgment value data is determined as "jackpot judgment value data." Further, if the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 614 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that the game is a "lose" and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data."

For example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 408, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." If the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". The judgment value data is determined as "time saving judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 273 to 477, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 478 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines The value data is determined as "loss determination value data."

For example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 0 to 272, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 273 to 1123, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any one of 1124 to 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

In this embodiment, for example, of the random numbers for determining a jackpot that are generated in the range of 0 to 65535, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 408 for the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data) excluding the jackpot determination value data and the miss determination value data. Also, the end of the predetermined range (for example, 614 to 65535 if the probability variable flag is off during the hit determination process of the first special symbol) is assigned to the miss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and the miss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing this, for example, when the probability variable flag goes from off to on (or on to off), it is possible to change the jackpot probability without changing the range of other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data) by simply narrowing (or widening) the width of the miss determination value data by the amount that the width of the jackpot determination value data is widened (or narrowed).

In addition, in this example, the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, and the "time-saving win" winning probability when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. By making the probabilities different, it is possible to give variation to the game and suppress a drop in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 10, by making the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed higher than the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become monotonous.

However, the probability of winning a "time-saving win" when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed is higher than the winning probability of "time-saving win" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed. It's okay. In this case, for example, if you win a "time-saving win" in the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is executed repeatedly, so that if you win the "time-saving win" just before the end of the time-saving game state, the time-saving game state This will effectively extend the period, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

As shown in FIG. 10, in this embodiment, a "time-shortened win" can be won whether the special chance flag is on or off. However, when the special chance flag is off (normal game state, time-shortened game state), the main CPU 201 controls the game to the time-shortened game state if the result of the win determination process is a "time-shortened win", but when the special chance flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control the game to the time-shortened game state even if the result of the win determination process is a "time-shortened win".

[1-4-3. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 11 shows an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 120, 140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a "symbol designation command". The "select symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the variable display stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 70 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, any of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 9, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 10 and 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 60 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses the selected symbol command as Select "z6" and select "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 201 selects "z7" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA8" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z10" as the selection symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 uses the selected symbol command as Select "z11" and select "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the win/loss judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random value for jackpot judgment with reference to the special symbol hit judgment table (see Fig. 10), and then the special symbol judgment table (see Fig. 10) is determined. 11), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the winning or losing of the special symbol, the selection symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

[1-4-4. Special symbol stop mode determination table]
FIG. 12(A) is an example of a special symbol stop mode determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is led out to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 5) when the variable display of the special symbol stops. It is referred to when making a decision according to the symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 12(A), the stopping mode of the special symbol output to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 5) is composed of a 1-byte control signal composed of areas 0 to 7, for example. Each of the areas 0 to 7 of the first special symbol corresponds one-to-one to one of the eight LEDs 163a to 163h (see FIG. 5) that compose the first special symbol display unit 163. For example, area 0 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163a, area 1 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163b, area 2 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163c, area 3 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163d, area 4 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163e, area 5 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163f, area 6 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163g, and area 7 of the first special symbol corresponds to 163h.

Similarly, each of the areas 0 to 7 of the second special symbol corresponds one-to-one to one of the eight LEDs 164a to 164h (see FIG. 5) that make up the second special symbol display unit 164. For example, area 0 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164a, area 1 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164b, area 2 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164c, area 3 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164d, area 4 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164e, area 5 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164f, area 6 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164g, and area 7 of the second special symbol corresponds to 164h.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the display mode (time-saving hit display mode) of the LEDs output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0," the main CPU 201 determines to stop displaying the first special symbol display unit 163 by turning on LED 163a corresponding to area 0 of the first special symbol and LED 163h corresponding to area 7 of the first special symbol, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol, the LED 163b corresponding to the area 1 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 determines to display the first special symbol display unit 163 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 163a corresponding to the area 0 of the first special symbol, the LED 163c corresponding to the area 2 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol, among the eight LEDs constituting the first special symbol display unit 163, and turning off the other LEDs. Also, when the selected symbol command is "z7", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164a corresponding to the second special symbol area 0, the LED 164b corresponding to the second special symbol area 1, and the LED 164h corresponding to the second special symbol area 7, among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs. When the selected symbol command is "z8", the main CPU 201 determines to display the second special symbol display unit 164 in a stopped state by turning on the LED 164a corresponding to the second special symbol area 0, the LED 164c corresponding to the second special symbol area 2, and the LED 164h corresponding to the second special symbol area 7, among the eight LEDs constituting the second special symbol display unit 164, and turning off the other LEDs.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the display mode of the LEDs (jackpot display mode) derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163, and the first special symbol It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 should be stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163e corresponding to the region 4 of the first special symbol and the LED 163g corresponding to the region 6 of the first special symbol are turned on and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 163f corresponding to 5 and the LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selection symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 163d corresponding to the area 3 of the first special symbol and the area of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163. The first special symbol is displayed in such a manner that the LED 163e corresponding to the area 5 of the first special symbol, the LED 163f corresponding to the area 5 of the first special symbol, and the LED 163g corresponding to the area 6 of the first special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. It is determined that the section 163 is to be displayed in a stopped state. When the selected symbol command is "z9", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area among the eight LEDs configuring the second special symbol display section 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED 164e corresponding to the area 6 of the second special symbol and the LED 164g corresponding to the area 6 of the second special symbol are turned on, and the other LEDs are turned off. When the selection symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 selects the LED 164d corresponding to the second special symbol area 3 and the second special symbol area from among the eight LEDs configuring the second special symbol display section 164. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is to be displayed in a stopped state in such a manner that the LED 164f corresponding to 5 is turned on and the other LEDs are turned off.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose", the display manner of the LEDs (the display manner of loss) derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164 is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 163h corresponding to the area 7 of the first special symbol among the eight LEDs configuring the first special symbol display section 163, and lights up the other LEDs. It is determined that the first special symbol display section 163 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the LED is turned off. When the selected symbol command is "z11", the main CPU 201 lights only the LED 164h corresponding to the area 7 of the second special symbol out of the eight LEDs forming the second special symbol display section 164, and lights up the other LEDs. It is determined that the second special symbol display section 164 is stopped and displayed in such a manner that the light is turned off.

When the main CPU 201 determines the stopping mode of the special symbol based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 sends a control signal corresponding to the determined mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. It outputs to each LED constituting and controls the stop mode of the special symbol derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164.

In addition, in FIG. 12(A), the display mode of the LED led to the first special symbol display section 163 and the display mode of the LED guided to the second special symbol display section 164 are shown in the same table for convenience. ing. However, it is preferable that the control signals are transmitted separately to the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164.

Figure 12 (B) is an example of a decorative symbol stop mode determination table stored in the program ROM of the sub-control circuit 300 provided in the first pachinko gaming machine. The decorative symbol stop mode determination table is referenced when determining the stop mode (symbol combination) of the decorative symbols derived when the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the display device 7 stops in response to a symbol designation command. Note that the "Notes" column shown in Figure 12 (B) is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

In the first pachinko gaming machine, since only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed, the sub-CPU 1301 controls the display device 7 to perform a display effect for the variably displayed special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, it is preferable for the sub-CPU 301 to perform the display effect in a manner that allows the player to know whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the decorative patterns displayed on the display device 7 include a left pattern consisting of 9 symbols 1 to 9, and a middle pattern consisting of 10 symbols 1 to 9 and a time-saving pattern. , the right symbol is composed of nine symbols 1 to 9, for example. The time-saving symbol is a symbol that is stopped and displayed when the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, for example, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a time-saving win. By stopping and displaying the medium symbol as a time-saving symbol, the player can understand that he has won the time-saving prize. Further, in this embodiment, odd numbered symbols are defined as symbols having a higher degree of advantage for the player than even numbered symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this.

In the first pachinko game machine, the result of the special pattern lottery does not include a small win, but if the result of the special pattern lottery includes a small win, for example, the patterns that make up the middle pattern may include a small win pattern (a pattern that stops and is displayed when the result of the special pattern lottery is a small win). In this case, if the result of the special pattern lottery is a small win, the sub-CPU 301 stops and displays the middle pattern as a small win pattern, so that the player can know that he or she has won a small win.

As shown in FIG. 12(B), when the symbol designation command is "zA1" or "zA6" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 determines the stop mode of the decorative symbol. For example, the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at an even number symbol, and the middle symbol is stopped at a time saving symbol.

When the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "time-saving hit"), the sub CPU 301 sets the left symbol and the right symbol to an odd number as the stop mode of the decorative symbol, for example. It is stopped at a symbol, and the middle symbol is stopped at a time-saving symbol. In addition, when the symbol designation command is "zA2" or "zA7" (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"), as you can see from FIG. 13 described later, the symbol designation command is " Compared to the case where the symbol command is ``zA1'' or ``zA6'' (when the selected symbol command is ``z0'', ``z1'' or ``z7''), the number of time savings set is greater, and the degree of advantage for the player is high.

When the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub-CPU 301 stops the decorative symbols, for example, by stopping the left symbol, right symbol, and center symbol in a matching odd-numbered pattern (double number).

When the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "jackpot"), the sub CPU 301 selects, for example, the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol as the stop mode of the decorative symbol. Stops at an even number of even symbols. In addition, as can be seen with reference to FIG. 13 described later, the symbol designation command "zA4" is used when the probability change flag is set to on after the end of the jackpot game state (when the selected symbol command is "z4"), There are cases where the probability change flag is not set on (when the selected symbol command is "z5"). Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the selected symbol command is "z4" or "z5", the sub-CPU 301 controls the decorative symbols to stop at the even-numbered symbols (matched), In the jackpot game state, it is preferable to perform a promotion effect indicating that it is a probability variable win (a win in which the probability variable flag is set to ON).

Furthermore, as can be seen from FIG. 13 described later, when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9", as can be seen from FIG. 13 described later, when the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8" '', the expected value of the probability change flag being set on after the end of the jackpot game state is smaller. In this respect, when the symbol designation command is "zA3" or "zA8", it is more advantageous for the player than when the symbol designation command is "zA4" or "zA9".

In addition, when the symbol designation command is "zA5" or "zA10" (when the result of the special symbol lottery is "lose"), the sub CPU 301 stops the decorative symbol at a random spot. The loose pattern corresponds to, for example, a stopping mode in which at least one of the left symbol, right symbol, and middle symbol is different from the other symbols.

Figure 12 (B) shows an example of the stopping mode of the decorative pattern according to the pattern designation command (for example, when the pattern designation command is "zA1", the left pattern is "2", the middle pattern is "time saving", and the right pattern is "4"), but the stopping modes shown in the decorative pattern stopping mode column in Figure 12 (B) are merely examples and are not limited to these.

[1-4-5. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 13 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine. The hit type determination table determines the aspect of the jackpot gaming state (more specifically, the number of rounds, for example) and/or the aspect of the subsequent gaming state, according to the selection symbol command determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the special symbol. Referenced when making decisions. The mode of the gaming state after that indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C-time-saving gaming state is controlled without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, so the subsequent gaming state will be the C-time-saving gaming state. Indicates the mode.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the aspect of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON, and decides to set the number of time saving times to 10 times. When the selected symbol command is "z1" and "z7", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 50. Determine. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8", the main CPU 201 decides to set only the time saving flag of the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON, and sets the number of time saving times to 100. Determine. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned time-saving win display mode to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164, and then Without controlling to the jackpot game state, the time saving flag is set on and the determined number of time saving times is set, thereby making it possible to control to the C time saving gaming state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the jackpot gaming state is not controlled, so the mode of the jackpot gaming state is not determined. In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time saving win", the set time saving number is the same regardless of the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. It is said that However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the set time saving number may be varied depending on the gaming state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times to be set is determined according to the selection symbol command determined based on the symbol random value of the special symbol. are different. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", it is possible to have variations in the subsequent progress of the game, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. It becomes possible.

As described above, when the probability variable flag is on, the main CPU 201 does not control to the time-saving game state even if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit." For example, even if the probability variable flag is on (high probability game state), the main CPU 201 may draw a "time-saving hit" as shown in FIG. 10, and when the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 201 may derive a time-saving hit display mode indicating that a "time-saving hit" has been won on the special pattern display units 163, 164, but may continue the high probability game state without controlling to the C time-saving game state.

The main CPU 201 may also draw a "time-saving hit" when the probability-changing flag is on, and forcibly derive a losing display mode to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 even if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-saving hit."

Furthermore, when the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving hit determination value data is not assigned to the random number value for jackpot determination, i.e., a hit determination process may be performed that does not include "time-saving hit" in the lottery result (the result of the hit determination process for the special pattern). In this case, when the probability variable flag is off, the time-saving hit determination value data is assigned to the random number value for jackpot determination, and when the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving hit determination value data is not assigned. Therefore, the range of random numbers that was assigned to the time-saving hit determination value data when the probability variable flag is off is assigned to miss determination value data, jackpot determination value data, or both miss determination value data and jackpot determination value data, instead of the time-saving hit determination value data.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state where the time-saving flag is off even if the probability change flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving win", It may be possible to shift to a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the form of the winning game state and the form of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" and "z9", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and it is decided to set both the probability variation number and the time saving number to 10,000. In these cases, the main CPU 201 can control the jackpot game state after deriving the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164, and after the jackpot game state ends, control the machine to a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state. becomes.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z4", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set both the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to ON, and it is decided to set both the probability variation number and the time saving number to 10,000. In this case, the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 163, and then controls the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, it is possible to control the jackpot gaming state to a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state. Become.

Furthermore, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 4 rounds. Furthermore, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines that only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag is set to on. It also determines that the number of time-saving times to be set is set to, for example, 200 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 controls the jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 163, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control it to the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state controlled here is the A time-saving game state.

Further, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state. Moreover, as a mode of the subsequent gaming state, it is decided to set only the time saving flag among the probability change flag and the time saving flag to ON. Also, it is decided to set the number of time saving times to, for example, 300 times. In this case, the main CPU 201 derives the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the second special symbol display section 164, and then controls the jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control to the time-saving game state. The time-saving gaming state controlled here is also the A-time-saving gaming state.

It is preferable that the time-saving performance in the high-probability time-saving game state is the same as the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state, but it may be different from the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z11"), the main CPU 201 does not set either the state of the big win game state or the state of the game state thereafter. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 201 does not change the game state, but continues to control the game state up to that point.

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z6" or "z11"), neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is set as described above, so there is no need to illustrate this in the hit type determination table of FIG. 13. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is illustrated in FIG. 13 to clearly show that neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss".

Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table of Fig. 10, determines the hit/lose determination value data based on the jackpot determination random number value extracted when the game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140 (performs a hit/lose determination), and determines the hit/lose ("time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss"). After that, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol determination table of Fig. 11, determines the selected symbol command based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first start hole 120 or the second start hole 140 and the hit/lose determination value data, and determines the type of display mode (type of time-saving hit or type of jackpot) to be derived to the special symbol display units 163, 164. Note that the above winning/losing judgment and selection of the symbol command are performed when the variable display of the special symbol begins, but this does not exclude the possibility of performing this between the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the final display.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of the big win game state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5") or 300 times (when the selected symbol command is "z10"). In contrast, the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state that is controlled when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7"), or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). In other words, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state. In this way, the positioning of the "big win" can be increased by making the A time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the C time-saving game state.

In addition, instead of making the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state, for example, as shown in FIG. 14, the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state may be made higher than the expected value of the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state. FIG. 14 is a modified example of the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 13. In this FIG. 14, the number of time-saving times in the A time-saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). In contrast, the number of time-saving times in the C time-saving game state is, for example, 50 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z7"), or 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z8"). In this way, by making the C time-saving game state more advantageous for the player than the A time-saving game state, the positioning of the "time-saving win" can be increased. For example, even if a long period of time passes without a "jackpot" being won, if a "time-saving hit" is won, the player will be controlled to the relatively advantageous C time-saving game state, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

In this specification, as with the special bonus flag, when the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the time-saving flag is off, and when the value of the time-saving flag is "1", the time-saving flag is on.

The time-saving flag, like the probability change flag, is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 203, and is a flag for managing whether or not to execute time-saving control.

Moreover, the number of times of time saving is a variable number of display times of special symbols that can be continuously executed for time saving control. That is, for example, if the number of time-saving games is determined to be "50," and the special symbol is variablely displayed 50 times without winning a jackpot in this time-saving game state, this time-saving game state ends and the non-time-saving game ends. state (for example, normal gaming state).

In addition, the number of probability variations and the number of time reductions of "10000" shown in FIG. 13 etc. are intended to allow the probability variation control to be executed continuously after the end of the jackpot gaming state until it is determined that it is a jackpot (that is, the next jackpot). .

[1-4-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 15 is an example of a variation pattern table of a special symbol of the first pachinko game machine. The "Notes" column in FIG. 15 is shown for convenience in order to make it easier to understand. The time-saving hit-type reaches A, B, and C shown in the "Notes" column in FIG. 15 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be a time-saving hit (no possibility of a jackpot). Similarly, the jackpot-type reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot (no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, the common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is likely to be both a time-saving hit and a jackpot. Note that FIG. 15 is a variation pattern table of a special symbol when the probability variable flag is off, and the illustration of the variation pattern table of a special symbol when the probability variable flag is on is omitted.

The main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 120, and determines the variation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 140. The special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 15 is a table that is referenced when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process of S96 in FIG. 28 described below.

As shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern of the special symbol is based on the type of the special symbol, the result of the special symbol's hit determination process (win or loss), the value of the time saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination, or / And, although it is determined based on a random value for performance selection, etc., it is not limited to this, and it may be determined based on other values, etc. instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 sets a prefetch flag when the random number value for performance selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 301 which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201 performs a pre-read effect if the pre-read flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 sets the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is off, and does not set the look-ahead flag when the time-saving flag is on or the probability bonus flag is on.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 decides whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU 301 may decide.

Note that the main CPU 201 may also set the prefetch flag (so that the prefetch effect is performed) when the time saving flag is on or when the probability change flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a prefetch flag may be set (so that a prefetch effect is performed).

When the time saving flag is on, the determined special symbol variation pattern has a smaller expected value of the number of changes per unit time than when the time saving flag is off. That is, the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is on tends to be shorter than the variation time of the special symbol when the time saving flag is off.

The determined variation pattern information is transmitted from the main CPU 201 to the command input port 308 of the sub CPU 301 via the command output port 206. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Although not shown in FIG. 15, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbol that is determined may be different for each setting value, for example by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for example, if the result of the hit determination process is a loss, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined depending on whether or not the time saving flag is on, regardless of the type of time saving. , but not limited to this. For example, the expected value of the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed per unit time may vary depending on the type of time saving. For example, the expected value of the variable display frequency of the special symbol per unit time may be made to be different in the A time saving game state, the B time saving game state, and the C time saving game state.

[1-4-7. Time-saving gaming state]
As described above, in this embodiment, the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, and the C working time saving gaming state are prepared as the time saving gaming states. These time-saving gaming states will be explained below.

A time-saving gaming state is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the selected symbol command is, for example, "z5" or "z10". It is. That is, in this embodiment, the condition for transition to the A time-saving gaming state is to win a jackpot (a jackpot where the selected symbol command is "z5" or "z10"). However, even if the conditions for transitioning to the A time-saving gaming state are met, the transition to the A-time saving gaming state does not always occur, but if a condition that prevents the transition to the A-time saving gaming state is satisfied (for example, if the backup is cleared) etc.), the A time-saving game state is not entered.

In addition, the conditions for ending the A time-saving gaming state are determined in accordance with the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and in response to the selection symbol command. When the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) of the number of times saved (hereinafter referred to as "A prescribed number of times saved") is executed (see the "Number of hours saved" column in Figure 13) This is the case when any of the following conditions are met.

The B time-saving gaming state starts, for example, when the jackpot gaming state ends and the variable display of special symbols in the non-high-probability gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state and the low-probability time-saving gaming state in this embodiment) starts. This is a time-saving gaming state that is controlled when the ceiling counter is updated (increased by 1) and the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. That is, the condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state is that the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. B The transition to the time-saving gaming state may be performed when the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling final variation") starts when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, or when the ceiling final variation ends. Alternatively, it may be set when the variable display of the special symbol next to the final ceiling change starts. That is, the transition timing to the B time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the final ceiling fluctuation and the start of the variable display of the next special symbol. In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling variation is "lose", the display mode of "lose" is derived on the special symbol display sections 163, 164, but the transition to the B time-saving gaming state is made. Become. In this case, the sub CPU 301 displays a display effect (for example, changing the decorative pattern to a special symbol) to show the player that the condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state has been met (for example, in this embodiment, the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value). Control may be performed to display on the display device 7 a special effect by a character, or an effect in which both of these are performed. Note that even if the conditions for transition to the B time-saving gaming state are met, the transition to the B time-saving gaming state does not always occur, but when conditions that prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state are met (for example, a special situation in the final ceiling fluctuation) If the result of the symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, etc.), the transition to the B time-saving game state is not made.

The ceiling counter is not updated when the probability variable flag is on, and when the probability variable flag is off, it is always counted regardless of whether the time-saving flag is on or off. When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is controlled to the B time-saving game state unless the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "big hit". In a pachinko game machine in which the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol includes a small hit, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small hit", the B time-saving game state may be started when the display mode of the small hit is derived to the special symbol display unit 163, 164, or the B time-saving game state may be started after the small hit game state ends. In other words, if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "small hit", only the display mode of the small hit is displayed on the special symbol display unit 163, 164, and no display effect is displayed to indicate to the player that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value as described above. In addition, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the ceiling value may be different depending on the setting value. Also, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value is a "jackpot," the machine is controlled to the jackpot game state without being controlled to the B time-saving game state.

In addition, the ceiling counter is activated by the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on, when the jackpot game state is controlled, and when the work area (volatile area) in the RAM 203 is cleared (backup clear process). If a switch other than that (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, or if the high probability of winning a normal symbol ends in a gaming machine that can change the probability of winning a normal symbol, a predetermined It is reset when the following conditions are met. Then, if updating of the ceiling counter is permitted, the ceiling counter is updated every time the variable display of the special symbol is executed. For example, when the probability change flag is on, updating of the ceiling counter is not allowed.

After clearing the ceiling counter, the main CPU 201 starts counting the ceiling counter from the next variable display of the special symbol. The ceiling value may be set by the main CPU 201 each time the ceiling counter is cleared, or may be predetermined as a value specific to the pachinko game machine rather than being set each time.

When the ceiling counter is cleared due to control to the jackpot gaming state, if the probability variable flag is not on after the jackpot gaming state ends, the main CPU 201 updates (+1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern. Also, if the probability variable flag is on after the jackpot gaming state ends, the ceiling counter is not updated even if the variable display of the special pattern is performed, but for example, in the case of an ST machine or a specification that performs a probability variable drop lottery, the ceiling counter is updated at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the probability variable flag is turned off. Note that in the case of a specification that performs a probability variable drop lottery, the probability variable flag is changed from on to off at the start of the variable display of the special pattern, so when updating the ceiling counter at the end of the variable display of the special pattern, if the probability variable flag is off at the end of the variable display of the special pattern, the ceiling counter may be updated.

In the case of a pachinko game machine in which the main CPU 201 performs a lottery for changing into a high probability state, it is preferable that the sub-CPU 301, upon receiving a command sent from the main CPU 201, does not perform any effects suggesting that the lottery for changing into a high probability state has been won or any effects suggesting a transition from a high probability state to a low probability state. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the start point of the count by the ceiling counter, i.e., the timing of the transition to the B time-saving game state, based on the display effects displayed on the display device 7, making it possible to provide an interesting game. If it is difficult to grasp the timing of the transition to the B time-saving game state, for example, a countdown effect suggesting the timing of the transition to the B time-saving game state or a false countdown effect can be displayed on the display device 7 under the control of the sub-CPU 301, thereby making it possible to further increase interest.

In addition, when a clearing process (backup clearing process) is performed on the working area (volatile area) in RAM 203, the main CPU 201 updates (increments by 1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special pattern after the clearing process of the working area in RAM 203.

Furthermore, if a switch other than the backup clear switch 176 (for example, the setting key 174 or a dedicated switch) is operated, the main CPU 201 updates (increments by 1) the ceiling counter at the start or end of the first variable display of the special symbol after the other switch is operated.

In addition, the conditions for ending the B time-saving gaming state are the case where the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state based on the "jackpot" is started, and the case where a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot") is started based on the "jackpot". This is a case where either condition is satisfied among a case where variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) for a number of times (referred to as "B time saving specified number of times") is executed. One of the conditions for ending the B time saving game state, ``When the variable display of the special symbol for the prescribed number of B time saving is executed'', the variable display of the special symbol for the prescribed number of B time saving (hereinafter referred to as ``B time saving final variation'') '') is started, or when the B time saving final variation ends. That is, the end timing of the B time saving game state may be any time between the start of the B time saving final variation and the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this B time saving final variation.

The C time-saving game state is a time-saving game state that is controlled when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a "time-saving hit". In other words, the condition for transitioning to the C time-saving game state is that a time-saving hit (a selected symbol command of "z0" to "z2", "z7" or "z8" is won) is won, and the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived (determined display) on the special symbol display unit 163, 164. Note that even if the transition condition to the C time-saving game state is met, the game does not necessarily transition to the C time-saving game state. If a condition that prevents the transition to the C time-saving game state is met (for example, when the specifications are such that the B time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state are not executed at the same time (details will be described later), and the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the B time-saving game state is a "time-saving hit", etc.), the game will not transition to the C time-saving game state. In addition, if the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving game state are met but a condition preventing transition to the C time-saving game state is met, the main CPU 201 executes control to derive the display mode of the time-saving win to the special pattern display units 163, 164, even though it does not transition to the C time-saving game state.

The end condition of the C time-saving game state is when either of the following conditions is met: the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a "jackpot" and a jackpot game state based on the "jackpot" is started; or the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) for the number of time-saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as the "prescribed number of C time-saving times") is executed (see the "number of time-saving times" column in FIG. 13). The prescribed number of C time-saving times, which is one of the end conditions of the C time-saving game state, may be when the variable display of the special symbol for the number of time-saving times determined in response to the selected symbol command (hereinafter referred to as the "final C time-saving change") starts, or when the final C time-saving change ends. In other words, the end timing of the C time-saving game state may be any time between the start of the final C time-saving change and the end of the variable display of the special symbol related to this final C time-saving change.

Note that the time saving performance may be different between the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state and the C time saving gaming state. In addition, the time-saving performance of two time-saving gaming states is the same among the A-time saving gaming state, B-time-saving gaming state, and C-time-saving gaming state, and the time-saving performance of these two time-saving gaming states and the other one time-saving gaming state are The time saving performance may be different. Furthermore, the time saving performance of the A time saving gaming state, the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state, and the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state may be made to be the same.

In addition to the above, the conditions for ending the A time saving gaming state, the ending condition for the B time saving gaming state, and the ending condition for the C time saving gaming state include, for example, the fact that the number of variable display times of the second special symbol has reached the specified number of times. Alternatively, the information may include that the normal electric accessory 146 has been opened a predetermined number of times, that a specific opening mode has been selected as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 146, etc. In addition, in a pachinko game machine in which a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the above-mentioned termination condition may include the fact that the number of small wins has reached a specified number of times. Furthermore, the above-mentioned termination condition may include the fact that a time-saving fall lottery has been conducted and that the time-saving fall lottery has been won.

[1-4-8. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 16 is an example of a normal symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the game state and the normal symbol hit determination extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). This is a table that is referred to when determining a "normal symbol win" or "loss" by lottery based on the random number value (that is, when executing the normal symbol game determination process in S295 of FIG. 43, which will be described later). .

As described above, the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is a random number value used in the process of determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 selects the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, in the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines a "normal symbol win" or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol. The normal symbol hit determination table includes the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination determined for "normal symbol hit" and the corresponding normal symbol hit determination value data for each time saving type. The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol determined to be a "loss" and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In this embodiment, in a non-time-saving gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state), the main CPU 201 determines that a "normal symbol hit" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 0 and 79. Then, the winning/losing judgment value data is determined as "normal symbol winning judging value data". In addition, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has won a normal symbol if the random number value for hit determination is between 0 and 98, and changes the winning/losing determination value data to "normal". "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning determination random number value of the extracted normal symbol is 99, and determines it as a "loss", and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol is one of 0 to 79 as a “normal symbol hit”, and changes the win/loss determination value data to “normal symbol hit”. "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol is one of 0 to 79 as a “normal symbol hit”, and changes the win/loss determination value data to “normal symbol hit”. "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 80 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In this way, in this embodiment, the probability of winning on a normal symbol in the time-saving game state A (selection rate (estimated) shown in Figure 16) is the highest among the non-time-saving game state, the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, and the time-saving game state C.

In addition, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the B time-saving game state (selection rate (estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability of a normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state. Similarly, the winning probability of a normal symbol in the C time-saving game state (selection rate (estimate) shown in FIG. 16) is the same as the winning probability of a normal symbol in the non-time-saving game state. Therefore, even if the game state shifts between the non-time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of a normal symbol will not change.

The winning probability for a normal symbol may be the same in the non-time-saving play state, the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state. In this case, the winning probability for a normal symbol does not change, and the ratio of the types of normal symbols described below only needs to be varied for each state, simplifying the control process.

[1-4-9. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 17 is an example of a normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is based on the type of time saving, the aforementioned winning/losing determination value data, and the symbol random number value of the regular symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 126 (see FIG. 4). This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" that determines the stop symbol of the normal symbol. "Select symbol command when normal symbol hits" is a command to specify the winning symbol of the normal symbol determined according to the type of normal symbol when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be. The symbol random number value of the normal symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 17, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit select symbol command is selected as follows. Ru.

For example, in a non-time-saving gaming state, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 will , "fz0" is selected as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits normally.

In addition, in the A time-saving gaming state, if normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz1" as the selection symbol command when a symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz2" as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits, and select the symbol random number of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is between 70 and 99, "fz3" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In addition, in the B time-saving gaming state, when normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz4" as the selection symbol command when a symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz5" as the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits, and select the symbol randomness of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is between 70 and 99, "fz6" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, when normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process, the main CPU 201 determines that if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29, it is normal. Select "fz7" as the selected symbol command when a symbol hits, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz8" as the selected symbol command when the normal symbol hits, and select the symbol random number of the normal symbol. If the numerical value is between 70 and 99, "fz9" is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 16) to determine the winning/losing judgment value data based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 17) to determine the pattern command selected when the normal pattern is a winning pattern based on the pattern random number value of the normal pattern, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing of the normal pattern and the pattern command selected when the normal pattern is a winning pattern may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

[1-4-10. Normal pattern type determination table]
18 is an example of a normal symbol winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first pachinko game machine. The normal symbol winning type determination table is referenced when determining the opening pattern, which is the operation mode of the normal electric role 146 (see FIG. 4), in response to the normal symbol winning time selection symbol command determined in response to the normal symbol random number value (i.e., when executing the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric role 146 executed in the variable display start process of the normal symbol in S293 in FIG. 43 described later).

In this embodiment, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit type is determined as follows. For example, if the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz0", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4), to be a first opening time of 1000 msec, no wait time, and no second opening. In other words, the opening pattern is determined to be one in which the normal electric device 146 is opened only once for 1000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz1", the main CPU 201 selects the opening pattern which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a wait time of 200 msec. The second opening time is determined to be 2000 msec.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz2", the main CPU 201 sets the opening pattern which is the operation mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) with a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, The second opening time is determined to be 2500 msec.

In addition, when the selected symbol command when a normal symbol is hit is "fz3", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 3000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 3000 msec.

In addition, when the selected pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz4" or "fz7", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, no wait time, and no second opening.

In addition, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz5" and "fz8", the main CPU 201 changes the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4), to the first opening time. 2000 msec, wait time 600 msec, and second release time 2000 msec.

In addition, when the selected pattern command when a normal pattern is hit is "fz6" or "fz9", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the operating mode of the normal electric role device 146 (see Figure 4), to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 600 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the non-time-saving play state is "normal symbol hit," the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (see FIG. 4) will be the most unfavorable mode among the opening patterns of the normal electric device 146 in the non-time-saving play state, the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, and the C time-saving play state.

The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball into the second starting opening 140 when the ordinary electric accessory 146 is opened.

If the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the A time-saving gaming state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) is non-time-saving gaming state, A time-saving gaming state, B time-saving This mode has the most advantageous degree among the opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 146 in the game state and the time-saving game state C.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 (see FIG. 4) when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process in the B time-saving game state is "normal symbol hit" is the normal symbol hit determination process in the C time-saving game state. Although the degree of advantage is the same as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 when the processing result is "normal symbol hit", it is not limited to this.

[1-4-11. Normal pattern variation table]
FIG. 19 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table of the first pachinko game machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table is referred to when determining the normal symbol variation pattern (i.e., when executing the normal symbol variation pattern determination process executed in the normal symbol variable display start process of S293 in FIG. 43 described later). The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the normal symbol variation pattern based on the game state and the normal symbol effect selection random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 126 (see FIG. 4). The normal symbol effect selection random number value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the variable display time of the normal symbols is determined to be 300,000 msec, for example, regardless of the random number value for normal symbol performance selection from 0 to 99. The variable display time of the normal symbols in the non-time-saving gaming state is the longest among the non-time-saving gaming state, the A-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state.

In addition, in the A time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 89, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 90 to 99. In either case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

In addition, in the B time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 500 msec, for example, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 40 to 79. If either of these is the case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. Ru.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 40 to 79. If either of these is the case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. Ru.

In this way, the variable display time of the normal symbol per variable display is the variable display time of the normal symbol in the non-time saving gaming state, the A time saving gaming state, the B time saving gaming state, and the C time saving gaming state. The expected value of the variable display time of normal symbols in the time-saving game state is the shortest. Therefore, in the A time-saving game state, the time required for the normal electric accessory 146 to be released is the shortest among the non-time-saving game state, A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state.

Further, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the B time-saving game state is the same as the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbols in the C time-saving game state, but is not limited to this.

[1-5. Details of processing related to time-saving gaming state]
[1-5-1. Number of time-saving times set when time-saving hits]
In the above description, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times to be set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times to be set when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" may be determined according to the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

Further, even in a high probability gaming state where the probability change flag is set to ON, "time saving win" may be included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process. In this case, the main CPU derives the display mode of the time-saving game on the special symbol display section, but does not execute the control to shift to the time-saving gaming state, and continues to control the high-precision gaming state. By the way, there is known a game machine, such as a pachinko game machine called a so-called ST machine, which turns a probability change flag from on to off when a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times. In such an ST machine, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process performed in the final game as a high-probability gaming state is "time-saving hit", the time-saving win is displayed rather than the process of turning off the probability change flag. When the process of deriving the mode is carried out later, the main CPU may control the time saving game state C after deriving the display mode per time saving.

[1-5-2. Overlapping of time-saving game states]
When multiple time-saving game states are provided, the time-saving game states may overlap. For example, in the A time-saving game state, when the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is "time-saving hit", the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state will overlap. Also, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state, the C time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state will overlap. When the time-saving game states overlap in this way, the time-saving game states may be executed in an overlapping manner, or the time-saving game states may not be overlapped (i.e., the "time-saving hit" may be ignored). In order to prevent the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state from overlapping, the A time-saving prescribed number of times, which is the end condition of the A time-saving game state, is specified to be smaller than the ceiling value, which is the transition condition to the B time-saving game state.

When the time-saving game states overlap, a mode in which the time-saving game states are executed in duplicate and a mode in which the time-saving game states are not overlapped will be explained below.

[1-5-2-1. A mode of repeatedly executing time-saving gaming states]
When the time-saving game states overlap, the time-saving game states are executed in duplicate.If the time-saving game state is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C. Possible modes include a mode in which the C time-saving game state is executed overlappingly, and a mode in which the B-time saving game state is executed in a layered manner when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-1. Mode of executing C time-saving gaming state on one time-saving gaming state]
When a "time-saving win" is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode of the time-saving win on the special symbol display units 163 and 164. In this case, the main CPU 201 adopts, as the number of times of time-saving, the state which has the greater number of variable displays of the special symbols that can be executed until the end condition of the time-saving game state is established, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the one time-saving game state.

For example, if a "time-saving hit" is won in the A time-saving game state, and the remaining number of time-saving plays in the A time-saving game state is greater than the number of time-saving plays that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 will control the time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving plays in the A time-saving game state is consumed, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if a "time-saving hit" is won when the remaining number of time-saving plays in the A time-saving game state is 200, and the number of time-saving plays that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is 50, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived on the special pattern display units 163 and 164, but the number of time-saving plays from this point on will be 200, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. Therefore, even if a "time-saving hit" is won in one of the time-saving game states A, B, or C, the appearance of the number of time-saving hits and time-saving performance will be the same as if the time-saving game state A had not been won and the game continued.

On the other hand, for example, if a "time-saving hit" is won in the A time-saving game state, and the number of time-saving times that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is greater than the number of time-saving times remaining in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 controls the time-saving game state until the number of time-saving times set based on the "time-saving hit" is consumed, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if a "time-saving hit" is won when the number of time-saving times remaining in the A time-saving game state is 20, and the number of time-saving times that can be executed based on this "time-saving hit" is 50, the number of time-saving times from this point on will be 50, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state, unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special pattern is executed for 20 times, which is the number of time-saving times remaining in the A time-saving game state, the variable display of the special pattern is then further executed for 30 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time-saving performance of the A time-saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-2. A mode of executing B time saving gaming state overlapping C time saving gaming state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 controls the display mode according to the display mode (that is, the result of the special symbol hit determination process) derived to the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 in the final ceiling fluctuation. Execute control.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but in the following, the case where a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process will be explained. .

First, a case will be described in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit" or a "loss" in the final ceiling fluctuation.

When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving gaming state, if the remaining number of time saving in the C time saving gaming state is greater than the prescribed number of B time saving gaming states, the main CPU 201 maintains the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state. , unless a "jackpot" is derived, the time-saving game state is controlled until the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state C is exhausted. To explain using specific numbers, for example, if the remaining number of time-saving games in C-time saving game state is 300, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and if the prescribed number of B-time-saving games is 200, then C-time saving game state While maintaining the time-saving performance of , the number of time-savings from this point on is 300 times unless a "jackpot" is derived. Therefore, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time saving gaming state, the appearance of the number of time saving times and the time saving performance is the same as when the C time saving gaming state continues without the ceiling counter reaching the ceiling value. .

On the other hand, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving gaming state, if the prescribed number of B time-savings is greater than the remaining number of time-savings in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state. However, unless a "jackpot" is derived, the time-saving game state is controlled until the B time-saving specified number of times is exhausted. To explain with specific numbers, for example, when the remaining number of time savings in C time saving gaming state is 20, the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, and the number of time saving times that can be executed as B time saving gaming state is 300. In this case, while maintaining the time saving performance of the time saving game state C, the number of time saving times from this point on is 300 unless a "jackpot" is derived. In other words, even if the variable display of the special symbol is executed 20 times, which is the remaining number of times in the C time-saving gaming state, the special symbol will be displayed 280 times, which is the difference between the two, while maintaining the time-saving performance in the C time-saving gaming state. A variable display of is further executed.

When the variable display of the special symbol ends during the final ceiling variation, the main CPU 201 derives a display mode in the special symbol display sections 163, 164 according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process. That is, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", a small hit display mode is derived, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss", a miss display mode is derived. When the small hit display mode is derived, control is given to the small hit game state, but the main CPU 201 keeps the time-saving flag on even during the small hit game state.

Next, we will explain the case where the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol at the final ceiling fluctuation is a "time-shortened hit," that is, the case where the transition condition to the B time-shortened play state and the transition condition to the C time-shortened play state are met at the final ceiling fluctuation. In this case, the main CPU 201 can execute different controls depending on whether it starts control of the B time-shortened play state before the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164 or whether it starts control of the B time-shortened play state after the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164.

First, if control of the B time-shortened game state is started before the result of the special symbol hit determination process is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164, the game is already controlled to the B time-shortened game state at the time the display mode of the time-shortened hit is output to the special symbol display units 163, 164. Therefore, while maintaining the time-shortened performance of the B time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 controls the game to the time-shortened game state until the greater of the B time-shortened prescribed number of times or the C time-shortened game state number of times is consumed, unless a "jackpot" is output.

Next, when control of the B time-saving gaming state is started after the result of the special symbol hit determination process is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164, the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164. At the time when the B time-saving game state is not yet controlled. Therefore, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving gaming state while satisfying the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state (for example, deriving the display mode of a jackpot, deriving a display mode of a small win or a specific small win, etc.). Unless otherwise specified, the time saving game state is controlled until the larger of the prescribed number of time saving times B and the number of time saving times in the time saving game state C is exhausted. In this case, when the conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving performance is maintained or executed are satisfied, the time-saving gaming state may be ended.

In addition, in the final ceiling fluctuation, when the conditions for transition to the B time-saving gaming state and the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving gaming state are satisfied, the sub CPU 301 executes the B time-saving game that is performed when only the transition condition to the B time-saving gaming state is satisfied. A special display performance that is different from the transition display performance and the C time-saving shift display performance that is performed when only the conditions for transition to the C time-saving gaming state are satisfied may be performed. In addition, instead of this, for example, if the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state is maintained, a B time saving transition display effect is performed, and if the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state is maintained, a C time saving transition display effect is performed. Either one of the B time saving transition display performance and the C time saving transition display performance may be performed with priority.

In addition, if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the C time-saving game state and the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a "jackpot," the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and controls the game state to the jackpot game state without also controlling the game state to the B time-saving game state.

[1-5-2-1-3. Time-saving performance when executing multiple time-saving gaming states at the same time]
Above, the mode in which the C time-saving game state is executed in a superimposed manner on the first time-saving gaming state, and the mode in which the B time-saving gaming state is executed in a superimposed manner on the C time-saving gaming state have been explained.

When multiple time-saving game states can be executed in a superimposed manner, the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state is maintained. In a pachinko game machine with such specifications, the time-saving performance of the multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in a superimposed manner may be different, but it is preferable to make the time-saving performance of the multiple time-saving game states that can be executed in a superimposed manner the same.

For example, if the specification is such that the C time saving game state can be executed overlapping the first time saving game state, it is preferable that the time saving performance of the first time saving game state and the time saving performance of the C time saving game state be the same. In addition, if the specification is such that the B time saving game state can be executed overlapping the C time saving gaming state, it is preferable that the time saving performance of the C time saving gaming state and the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state be the same.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine with specifications that allow multiple time-saving gaming states to be executed in succession, the time-saving gaming state that can be executed later on top of the time-saving gaming state that has been executed first is, for example, It may be provided with one time-saving performance that is the same as the current time-saving gaming state and another time-saving performance that is different from this one time-saving performance. Then, when executing a time-saving game state over the time-saving game state that has been executed first, the first time-saving performance is activated, and the time-saving game state is activated as in the case of activating the time-saving game state in the normal game state. If you do not want to repeat this, you may activate other time-saving abilities.

For example, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine with specifications that allow the B time saving gaming state to be executed in the C time saving gaming state, the time saving performance of the B time saving gaming state can be set to the same time saving performance as the C time saving gaming state, and this one time saving performance. For example, two time-saving performances are provided with other time-saving performances different from the performance. Then, in the C time-saving game state, for example, if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, one time-saving performance is activated, and in the normal game state, which is not any time-saving game state, for example, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, another time-saving performance is activated. may be activated.

[1-5-3. Mode in which time-saving gaming states are not executed in succession]
As a mode in which the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner, there are a mode in which a hit determination process is performed so that the "time-saving hit" is not included in the lottery object in the time-saving game state, and a mode in which a hit determination process is performed so that the "time-saving hit" is included in the lottery object in the time-saving game state, and even if the time-saving game state is overlapped, the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner (hereinafter referred to as the "latter mode"). As the latter mode, there are two modes in which even if a time-saving hit is won in any one of the time-saving game states A, B, and C, the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner by ignoring this, and even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value in the time-saving game state C, the time-saving game state is not executed in a superimposed manner by ignoring this. The above two modes considered as the latter mode will be described below.

[1-5-3-1. A mode in which the time-saving game state C is not executed in combination with the time-saving game state 1]
If you win a "time saving win" in any one of the A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state and C working time saving gaming state, as described above, the main CPU 201 displays the special symbol display parts 163 and 164. , derive the display mode per time saving. However, the main CPU 201 does not control to the C time saving gaming state based on the "time saving winning" unless the last special symbol in the first time saving gaming state is variablely displayed (hereinafter referred to as "time saving final variation"). Control is performed to one time-saving game state until the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving game state is exhausted. In this case, being controlled to one time-saving gaming state (excluding the final time-saving variation) is a condition that prevents the transition to the C-time saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if a "time saving win" is won in the time saving final variation in the first time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the first time saving gaming state is Different controls can be executed depending on the case where one time-saving game state ends and the case where one time-saving game state ends when the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived to the special symbol display sections 163, 164.

First, if one time-saving game state ends before the display mode of the time-saving hit is derived on the special pattern display units 163 and 164, the main CPU 201 will derive the display mode of the time-saving hit and then start controlling the C time-saving game state.

Next, if one time-shortened game state ends when the display mode of the time-shortened win is derived on the special symbol display units 163, 164, i.e., if the derivation of the display mode of the time-shortened win and the end of one time-shortened game state are performed within the same interrupt process, the main CPU 201 may or may not start control of the C time-shortened game state depending on the program processing. Specifically, if the process of deriving (determined display) the display mode of the time-shortened win is performed before the end process of one time-shortened game state, the main CPU 201 ends one time-shortened game state without controlling it to the C time-shortened game state. In this case, performing the process of deriving the display mode of the time-shortened win before the end process of one time-shortened game state is a condition that prevents transition to the C time-shortened game state.

On the other hand, if the process of deriving the display mode per time saving (determined display) is performed after the end processing of the first time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 ends the first time saving gaming state and controls the time saving gaming state C. do. In this case, the main CPU 201 does not maintain the time-saving performance of the first time-saving game state, but maintains the time-saving performance of the C time-saving game state. That is, the main CPU 201 ends the first time-saving game state without controlling to the C-time-saving game state, if the end processing of the first time-saving game state has not been processed at the time when the display mode per time-saving game is derived, If the end processing of the first time-saving game state has already been performed, control is performed to the time-saving game state C.

[1-5-3-2. Mode in which the B time-saving gaming state is not executed in parallel with the C time-saving gaming state]
When the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value during the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 executes control according to the display mode (i.e., the result of the special pattern hit determination process) output to the special pattern display sections 163, 164 during the final ceiling fluctuation.

First, we will explain the cases where the result of the special symbol hit determination process during the final ceiling fluctuation is a "time-saving hit," "small hit," or "miss."

In the C time-saving play state, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a "time-saving hit," "small hit," or "miss," the main CPU 201 controls the game to the C time-saving play state until the remaining number of times the time-saving play in the C time-saving play state is consumed.

However, when the remaining number of time-saving games in the time-saving gaming state C is 0 in the final ceiling fluctuation, the main CPU 201 may or may not start controlling the time-saving gaming state B, depending on the processing of the program. Specifically, when the end processing of the C time-saving game state is performed before the start processing of the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state and controls to the B time-saving game state. On the other hand, when the end processing of the C time-saving game state is performed after the start processing of the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving game state without controlling to the B time-saving game state. That is, at the time when the main CPU 201 is about to start the B time saving gaming state, if the end processing of the C working time saving gaming state has not been processed, the main CPU 201 ends the C working time saving gaming state without controlling to the B working time saving gaming state, and ends the C working time saving gaming state. If the game state termination process has already been performed, control is made to the B time-saving game state. In this case, performing the end processing of the C time saving gaming state after the start processing of the B working time saving gaming state becomes a condition that prevents the transition to the B time saving gaming state.

In addition, in the ceiling final variation, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the main CPU 201 ends the C time-saving gaming state and starts controlling the jackpot gaming state.

[1-6. Main control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 will be explained.
[1-6-1. Main control main processing]
First, the main processing (main control main processing) executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23. 20 to 23 are flowcharts showing an example of main control main processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the power interruption signal is at High level (S11). Although not shown, it goes without saying that the main CPU 201 sets the stack pointer and the address of the interrupt vector table prior to S11.

If it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is not at a high level (if S11 is determined as NO), the main CPU 201 repeats the determination process of S11.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S11 that the power interruption signal is at a high level (if S11 is judged as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S12.

In S12, the main CPU 201 performs flag management processing for the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 (S12). In this processing, a process of saving the on/off state of the backup clear switch 176 and the on/off state of the setting key 174 is performed. In other words, the on/off state of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is stored in the start control flag area in the main RAM 203. Also, in this processing, the play permission flag is set to off. After executing the processing of S12, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S13.

In S13, the main CPU 201 performs wait processing. In this process, the sub control circuit 300 side waits for startup. The activation waiting time (wait period) in this case is, for example, 12000.07 msec. After executing the process in S13, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S14.

Note that while the sub-control circuit 300 side is waiting for startup, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, processing for checking the interrupt request signal, processing for outputting the WDT when the interrupt request signal is generated, and initializing various sensors at predetermined timings. It is also possible to perform processing for outputting the converted signal.

In S14, the main CPU 201 determines whether the power interruption before startup (the previous time) was normal or not. In this process, it is determined whether the power interruption was normal or abnormal based on the value stored in the power interruption detection flag area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S14 that the power outage was not normal (NO determination in S14), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S18.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S14 that the power interruption was normal (YES in S14), the main CPU 201 calculates the checksum value of the work area stored in the main RAM 203 (S15), and then performs a comparison process of the checksum value of the work area (S16). After executing the process of S16, the main CPU 201 proceeds to S17.

In S17, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the verification result is abnormal.

If it is determined in S17 that the verification result is not abnormal, that is, normal (NO determination in S17), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22. Note that the processing after S22 will be described later.

On the other hand, if the comparison result is determined to be abnormal in S17 (YES in S17), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S18.

In S18, the main CPU 201 determines whether at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off. In other words, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, the result is NO. If both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, or if either the setting key 174 or the backup clear switch 176 is off, the result is YES.

If it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is not off, that is, both are on (NO in S18), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S21. Note that the process of S21 will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S18 that at least one of the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 is off (YES in S18), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S19.

In S19, the main CPU 201 sets the security signal of the external terminal to ON. After executing the process of S19, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S20.

In S20, the main CPU 201 performs an error display process on the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6). This process sets data for displaying an error to the output port of the I/O port 205 that outputs a signal to the performance display monitor 170. This causes a specified LED in the performance display monitor 170 to light up, displaying an error. After executing the process of S20, the main CPU 201 enters an endless loop.

In this way, if the previous power outage was not normal, or if the checksum value of the working area stored in the main RAM 203 does not match the normal value, the first pachinko game machine will not be able to play the game until it is determined that both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on.

Next, the process of S21 will be described. In S21, the main CPU 201 stores a value indicating a setting change in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. This process is performed upon abnormal startup, and is intended to store again the value indicating a setting change. After executing the process of S21, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S22.

In S22, the main CPU 201 clears the XINT detection flag area and the power failure detection flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S22, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S23.

In S23, the main CPU 201 performs a startup state determination process. In this process, the current startup state (power outage recovery/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear) is determined based on the value of the startup control flag stored in the startup control flag area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S23, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S24.

In S24, the main CPU 201 performs RAM setting processing at startup. In this process, the work area (volatile area) in the main RAM 203 that manages flags and the like is cleared (for example, work area construction, address setting, etc.). Note that this process is performed both at the time of recovery from power failure and at the time of initialization, and the backup area is not cleared. After executing the process of S24, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S25.

In S25, the main CPU 201 performs startup initialization processing. In this processing, initial setting processing is performed according to the current startup state (recovery from power failure/setting change/setting confirmation/RAM clear). Note that details of the startup initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. After executing the process of S25, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S26.

In S26, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt inhibition processing. After executing the processing of S26, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S27.

In S27, the main CPU 201 performs a power cut process. After executing the process of S27, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S28. Details of the power cut process will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

In S28, the main CPU 201 performs an initial value random number update process. In this process, initial value random numbers of various random number counters (for example, special symbol jackpot determination random number counters, etc.) are updated. After executing the process of S28, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S29.

In S29, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. This determination process is performed based on the value of the game permission flag.

If it is determined in S29 that play is not permitted (if S29 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S30.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S29 that play is permitted (if S29 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S31.

In S30, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the processing of S30, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to S26 and performs the processing from S26 onward.

In S31, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. After executing the process of S31, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S32.

In S32, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor aggregation calculation processing. In this process, various base values are calculated and updated. Further, this processing is performed using an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S32, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S33.

In S33, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S31. After executing the process of S33, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S34.

In S34, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process of S34, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S35.

In S35, the main CPU 201 determines whether the system cycle time has elapsed. The system cycle time is, for example, 6 msec, which is three times the interrupt cycle (for example, 2 msec).

If it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has not elapsed (NO in S35), the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S35 that the system cycle time has elapsed (if S35 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S36.

In S36, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the interrupt counter stored in the interrupt counter area of the main RAM 203 three times. This process resets the value of the interrupt counter that manages the interrupt prohibited section in the main control main process. After executing the process of S36, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S37.

In this embodiment, within the main control process, an interrupt prohibition section (processing section S26 to S35) of, for example, 6 msec is provided before various processes related to game control (for example, processes S37 to S44) described below are executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, various processes related to game control (described below) are executed, for example, every 6 msec (every system cycle). In this embodiment, an example has been described in which the interrupt prohibition section is three times the interrupt cycle, but this is not limited to this.

In S37, the main CPU 201 performs a system timer update process. The system timer is a timer that manages the system cycle (for example, 6 msec). The value of the system timer is stored in the system cycle management timer area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S37, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S38.

In S38, the main CPU 201 performs main control command transmission/reception processing. In this processing, payout control command transmission/reception processing is mainly performed. After executing S38, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S39.

In S39, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the special symbol game is performed. Details of this special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26. After executing the process of S39, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S40.

In S40, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol control processing. In this processing, processing related to the normal symbol game is performed. Details of this normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. After executing the process of S40, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S41.

In S41, the main CPU 201 performs a game action display unit control process. In this process, a process for setting the display data to be output to each display section of the LED unit 160 (e.g., the first special symbol display section 163, the second special symbol display section 164, etc.) is performed. After executing the process of S41, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S42.

In S42, the main CPU 201 performs a game information data generation process. In this process, control of the external terminal board pulse signal, setting of output data, generation of a test firing signal, etc. are performed. Note that the generation of the test firing signal is performed using an area separate from (outside) the working area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S42, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S43.

In S43, the main CPU 201 performs a port output process. In this process, output data is set (transferred) to the command output port 206 (see FIG. 6). After executing the process of S43, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S44.

In S44, the main CPU 201 performs a status monitoring process. In this process, a launch position determination process, a game abnormality detection determination process, a payout abnormality detection determination process, and the like are performed. In the launch position determination process, if there is a change in the launch position (e.g., right hit or left hit), a launch position command is reserved for transmission. In the game abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a game abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. In the payout abnormality detection determination process, if there is an abnormality, a payout abnormality detection command is reserved for transmission. After executing the process of S44, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S26 and performs the processes from S26 onwards.

[1-6-2. Initial setting processing at startup]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the startup initial setting process performed in S25 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of initial setting processing at startup in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a process to load the start control flag (S51). After executing the process of S51, the main CPU 201 proceeds to S52.

In S52, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating power recovery.

If it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating recovery from power failure (NO determination in S52), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S54.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S52 that the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating recovery from power failure (YES in S52), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S53.

In S53, the main CPU 201 performs a second normal game pre-processing. Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. When the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the process of S53, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S54, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag indicates a setting change or setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S54 that the value of the startup state flag is not a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation, that is, a value indicating RAM clearing (NO in S54), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S56.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S54 that the value of the activation state flag is a value indicating a setting change or setting confirmation (YES in S54), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S55.

In S55, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the setting operation command. The setting operation command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S336 in FIG. 46 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S55, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In S56, the main CPU 201 performs a first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. When the first normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the process of S56, the main CPU 201 ends the startup initial setting process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

[1-6-3. Power outage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the power cutoff process performed in S27 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of power cutoff processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the XINT detection flag is on (S61).

If it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is not on (if S61 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the power cut processing and returns processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S61 that the XINT detection flag is on (if S61 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S62.

In S62, the main CPU 201 performs checksum value calculation processing. After executing the process of S62, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S63.

In S63, the main CPU 201 stores the checksum value and the value of the power failure detection flag in corresponding predetermined storage areas in the main RAM 203. In this case, it is stored in the backup area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S63, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S64.

In S64, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the XINT detection flag. After executing the process of S64, the main CPU 201 performs a RAM access prohibition value setting process (S65). After executing the process of S65, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S66.

In S66, the main CPU 201 repeats the CPU reset wait process until power is cut off.

[1-6-4. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 26, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S71. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S71, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S72.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S71.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 also performs a process to check the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. Then, if the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are both "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a process to reserve the transmission of a demo display command. Note that the demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later). Then, when the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance.

In S72, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S71 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (if S72 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S75.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S72 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S72), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S73.

In S73, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol has not started to be variable displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is not pending (if S73 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S74.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S73 that the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is pending (if S73 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S75.

In S74, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is a variable display start, that is, whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol does not start variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol is not held (NO determination in S74), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process. , returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S74 that the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is pending (if S74 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S75.

In S75, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27. After executing the process of S75, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S71 to S75) within the interrupt prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, as the first pachinko gaming machine, if the start information of the second special symbol is pending, the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is pending, it may be a priority changing machine in which the special symbol management process (S75) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variable machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winnings to the second starting port 140.

[1-6-5. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 at S75 in the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is "0", the special symbol management process is such that when the process of S73 (see FIG. 26) is YES, the second special symbol is the processing target, and the process of S74 (see FIG. 26) is the second special symbol to be processed. ) is YES, the first special symbol is the processing target. In addition, when the control state number is not "0", the special symbol management process targets the special symbol being executed.

The numbers ("0" to "5") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 27 are the control state numbers for the special symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern is 0 (S81).

If it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is not 0 (if S81 is determined to be NO), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S81 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S81 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S82.

In S82, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S82, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S83. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S83 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S82.

In S83, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S83 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 28. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S84.

In S84, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display end process. This S84 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 29. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S85.

In S85, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S85 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S86.

In S86, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S86 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S87.

In S87, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S87 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S88.

In S88, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. This process in S88 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

After completing steps S83 to S88, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 26).

[1-6-6. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S83 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 28, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S91).

If it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S91 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S91 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S91 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S92.

In S92, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the special symbol. After executing the process of S92, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S93.

In S93, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, and sets the jackpot flag to ON when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. do. In the first pachinko game machine, a small hit is not included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, but if it is a pachinko game machine in which a small win is included in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, a special symbol win is included. If the result of the determination process is a small win, a small win flag is set on. After executing the process of S93, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S94. It should be noted that the time saving winning flag is turned off at the time of transition to the C time saving gaming state, and the jackpot flag is turned off at the start of the jackpot gaming state. If the pachinko game machine includes a small win in the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the small win flag is turned off at the start of the small win game state.

In the special symbol hit determination process (see S93), first, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in this process, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a time-saving hit. If it is determined in this process that it is not a time saving win, it is determined that the game is a loss.

In S94, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol that corresponds to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93) (e.g., a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a miss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 11) is referenced, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "select symbol command" or "symbol designation command." After executing the process of S94, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S95.

In S95, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S94) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 13). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but there may be only one type of jackpot, and there may be one type of time-saving winning. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of wins, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. In addition, in this embodiment, the result of the special symbol hit determination process does not include a small hit, but the result of the special symbol hit determination process may include a small hit, and multiple types of such small hits may be provided. good. After executing the process of S95, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S96.

In S96, the main CPU 201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15) is referenced, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, for example, according to the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S93), the value of the time-saving flag (0 or 1), the random number value for reach determination and/or the random number value for effect selection. Note that the variation pattern table referenced when performing the variation pattern determination process of the special symbol may differ depending on the game state, etc. After executing the process of S96, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S97.

In S97, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 15), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S96) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process of S97, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S98.

In S98, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S84 in FIG. 27) is performed. After executing the process of S98, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S99.

In S99, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state (e.g., the number of times remaining in the special mode and the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed. After executing the process of S99, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S100.

In S100, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs update processing of various flags related to the management of the game status (e.g., probability bonus flag, time-saving flag, etc.). After executing the processing of S100, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S101.

In S101, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process.

The main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited period, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management process (S100) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S101)) during the interrupt-prohibited period. It is preferable to do it inside.

[1-6-7. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S84 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Fig. 29 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S111).

If it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO in S111), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 27). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S111), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S112.

In S112, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol variable display end process, the special symbol game determination process (S85 in FIG. 27) ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S113.

In S113, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S113, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S114.

In S114, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. The determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times the special symbol game has been played), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided for managing the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of remaining times of the special symbol game or the number of remaining times of the time-saving game, or the determined symbol counter may be used to manage the number of games of the special symbol game played under a specific state. After executing the process of S114, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-6-8. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S85 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S121).

If it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S121 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S121), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S122.

At S122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S122 that a jackpot has been reached, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display pattern that indicates a jackpot (if S122 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S123.

On the other hand, in S122, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S122), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S130.

In S123, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for the jackpot game control process. In this process, a signal (for example, a jackpot signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process of S123, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S124. Note that signals output to, for example, the hall computer 186 and the island computer via the external terminal board 184 will be described later.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control in S123, the main CPU 201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the special chance flag, special chance counter, time-saving flag, and time-saving counter.

In S124, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs, for example, a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening 131 (S125), a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 184 (S126), and setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3". (S127), a gaming state designation parameter setting process (S128), and a transmission reservation process for a jackpot start display command (S129). In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S127) and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the big winning opening preparation process (see FIG. 27) is performed. (see S86) will be performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S130, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 31. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S121 to S130) within the interrupt prohibited period.

[1-6-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S130 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs time saving management processing (S131). Details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 for the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process in S131, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S132.

In S132, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S133.

In S133, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting game state designation parameters for the special symbol. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving transmission of a special symbol game end command (S134). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later). Then, after processing S134, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 30).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28) is a miss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the probability hit flag or the time-saving flag. Therefore, even if a miss display mode is derived, the game state does not change.

[1-6-10. Time-saving management process]
Next, the time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S131 during the special symbol game ending process (see Fig. 31) in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs counter update processing (S141). Details of this counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. After executing the process of S141, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S142.

In S142, the main CPU 201 performs a counter determination process. Details of this counter determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. After executing the process of S142, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol game end process (see FIG. 31).

[1-6-11. Counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the counter updating process executed by the main CPU 201 in S141 during the time saving management process (see FIG. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time-saving counter update process (S151). Details of this time-saving counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. After executing the process of S151, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S152.

In S152, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing. Details of this ceiling counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. 35. After executing the process of S152, the main CPU 201 ends the counter update process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-12. Time-saving counter update process]
Next, a time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S151 during the counter update process (see Fig. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The time-saving counter update process shown in FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the process when multiple time-saving game states overlap and multiple time-saving game states are executed at the same time.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0 (S161). In this process, a YES determination is made when both the time saving flag is on and the time saving counter is greater than 0, and a NO determination is made when either one is not satisfied.

The time-saving flag is set to ON when transitioning to time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, or time-saving play state C. When transitioning to a high probability play state, the probability change flag is set to ON.

The time-saving counter indicates the number of time-saving operations executed in the A time-saving play state, the B time-saving play state, or the C time-saving play state.

When the conditions for transitioning to time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B and/or time-saving play state C are met, the time-saving counter for the time-saving play state for which the transition conditions are met is set.

In addition, in this embodiment, a subtraction method is adopted in which the time-saving counter is subtracted when the variable display of the special symbol ends, and the time-saving gaming state is ended when the time-saving counter reaches 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, an addition method may be adopted in which a time-saving counter is incremented when the variable display of special symbols is finished, and the time-saving game state is ended when the time-saving counter reaches a set number of time-savings. Also, instead of updating (subtracting or adding) the time-saving counter when the variable display of the special symbol ends, the time-saving counter is updated at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and when the time-saving counter reaches 0 ( The time-saving game state may be ended when the time-saving counter reaches the set number of time-savings (in the case of the subtraction method) or when the time-saving counter reaches the set time-saving number (in the case of the addition method).

If it is determined in S161 that both the time-saving flag on and the time-saving counter are not greater than 0 (if S161 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (Figure 33).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S161 that the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is greater than 0 (YES in S161), the main CPU 201 performs a process to subtract 1 from the time-saving counter (S162). After executing the process of S162, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S163.

In S163, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving mode is 3 and the C time-saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time-saving mode is 3 and the C time-saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If a YES determination is made in S163, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S164.

The C time-saving counter is a counter that is set when the conditions for transitioning to the C time-saving game state are met during the time-saving game state. Although this C time-saving counter is not shown in the flowchart, it is reset by the main CPU 201 when the B time-saving counter described below is set.

The time-saving mode is a flag that is set when multiple time-saving game states are executed in overlapping fashion. In this embodiment, the time-saving mode is configured, for example, with 2 bits, and is set to "time-saving mode = 3" when time-saving game state C is executed in overlapping fashion with a previously executed time-saving game state. Also, when time-saving game state B is executed in overlapping fashion with a previously executed time-saving game state, it is set to "time-saving mode = 2."

On the other hand, if it is determined in S163 that both the time-saving mode = 3 and the C time-saving counter is not greater than 0 are not satisfied (if S163 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S165.

In S164, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the C time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S164, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S165.

In S165, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving mode=2 and the B time saving counter is greater than 0. In this process, if the time saving mode=2 and the B time saving counter is greater than 0, a YES determination is made. If the determination in S165 is YES, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S166.

The B time-saving counter is a counter that is set when the conditions for transitioning to the B time-saving game state are met during the time-saving game state (in this embodiment, during the C time-saving game state). Although this B time-saving counter is not shown in the flowchart, it is reset by the main CPU 201 when the C time-saving counter is set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S165 that both the time saving mode = 2 and the B time saving counter being greater than 0 are not satisfied (NO in S165), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter updating process. , returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

In S166, the main CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the B time saving counter. This process may also adopt an addition method instead of a subtraction method. After executing the process of S166, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

Although not shown, if the C time saving counter = 0 as a result of performing the process in S164, or if the B time saving counter = 0 as a result of performing the process in S166, the main CPU 201 executes the time saving counter. Set the mode to off (=0).

When multiple time-saving game states are executed in an overlapping manner, it is not limited to overlapping two time-saving game states, but three or more time-saving game states may be executed in an overlapping manner. In this case, as described above, the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state do not overlap, so a case in which three or more time-saving game states overlap corresponds to a case in which the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state overlaps with two or more C time-saving game states, and a case in which three or more C time-saving game states overlap.

[1-6-13. Ceiling counter update process]
Next, the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 35. Fig. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the ceiling counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S152 during the counter update process (see Fig. 33) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the ceiling count prohibition flag is off (S171). The ceiling count prohibition flag is a flag that is set on when the probability variable flag is set on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In other words, when the probability variable flag is off and the ceiling counter has not reached the ceiling value, the ceiling count prohibition flag is off. The value of the ceiling counter is saved in the main RAM 203.

Note that the ceiling value is predetermined as a value unique to the pachinko gaming machine as a condition for transition to the B time-saving gaming state. However, instead of this, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling value when the jackpot gaming state ends, when the backup clear process is performed, when a special operating means for resetting the value of the ceiling counter is operated, etc. Processing may also be performed.

In S171, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO determination in S171), that is, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (Fig. 33).

If the ceiling count prohibition flag is off in S171 (if S171 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S172.

In S172, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S172, the main CPU 201 ends the ceiling counter update process and returns the process to the counter update process (see FIG. 33).

[1-6-14. Counter Determination Process]
Next, the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 36. Fig. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the counter determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S142 during the time-shortening management process (see Fig. 32) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a time-saving transition determination process (S181). Details of this time-saving transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37. After executing the process of S181, the main CPU 201 advances the process to S182.

In S182, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving transition process. Details of this time-saving transition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38. After executing the process of S182, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S183.

In S183, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving counter is less than 1.

If it is determined in S183 that the time-saving counter is not less than 1 (NO in S183), i.e., the time-saving counter is 1 or greater, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S185.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S183 that the time saving counter is smaller than 1 (YES determination in S183), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S184.

In S184, the main CPU 201 turns off the time saving flag. After executing the process in S184, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S185.

If the time-saving counter is judged to be less than 1 in S183 (if S183 is judged YES), both the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter should be less than 1 (i.e., 0). However, in consideration of the possibility that some malfunction may occur in the execution of processing by the main CPU 201, for example, if the B time-saving counter or the time-saving counter is 1 or more despite the judgement of YES in S183, an abnormality process such as outputting an abnormality warning may be executed. Also, instead of or in addition to this abnormality process, when the judgement of YES in S183 is made, not only the time-saving flag may be turned off (see S184), but also the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter may be reset to ensure consistency between the time-saving counter, the B time-saving counter, and the C time-saving counter.

In S185, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing (S186) for the time saving shift command. In addition, the time saving transition command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S186, the main CPU 201 ends the counter determination process and returns the process to the time saving management process (see FIG. 32).

[1-6-15. Time-saving transition determination process]
Next, the time-saving transition judgment process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described with reference to Fig. 37. In this process, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, a judgment process for transitioning to the B time-saving game state is performed. Fig. 37 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving transition judgment process executed by the main CPU 201 in S181 during the counter judgment process (see Fig. 36) in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the probability change flag is off (S191).

In S191, if it is determined that the variable probability flag is not off (NO in S191), that is, if the variable probability flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process and transfers the process to the counter determination process (Fig. 36). That is, when the probability change flag is on, it is possible to prevent the transition to the B time-saving gaming state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S191 that the probability change flag is off (YES in S191), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S192.

In S192, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value.

If it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is not at the ceiling value (NO in S192), the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S192 that the ceiling counter is at the ceiling value (if S192 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S193.

In S193, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling count prohibition flag to ON. After executing the process of S193, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S194.

In S194, the main CPU 201 sets the ceiling flag to ON. The ceiling flag is a flag that indicates that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value. After executing the process of S194, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S195.

In S195, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter. After executing the process of S195, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving transition determination process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-16. Time-saving migration process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the time saving migration process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving transition process executed by the main CPU 201 in S182 during the counter determination process (see FIG. 36) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the probability change flag is off (S202).

In S202, if it is determined that the probability variation flag is not off (NO in S202), that is, if the probability variation flag is on, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and converts the process to the counter determination process (FIG. 36). ). By doing so, when the probability change flag is on, it is possible to prevent either the B time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state from being started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S202 that the probability variation flag is off (YES determination in S202), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S203.

In S203, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling flag is ON.

If it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is not on (if S203 returns a NO judgment), i.e., if the ceiling flag is off, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S203 that the ceiling flag is on (YES in S203), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S205.

In S205, the main CPU 201 executes a B time-saving control mode determination process as a process related to transition to the B time-saving game state. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines the number of time-saving times to be set in the B time-saving counter, whether the time-saving mode is set to 2, and the time-saving performance, etc. After executing the process of S205, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S208.

The number of time-saving times set in the B time-saving counter is a predetermined number. Among the time-saving performances, the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). Among the time-saving performances, the opening pattern (number of times opening, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric device 146 is as shown in the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17) and the normal symbol hit type determination table (see FIG. 18). Among the time-saving performances, the variable display time of the normal symbol is as shown in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S206, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time saving flag is on.

In S206, if it is determined that the time-saving flag is not on (NO in S206), that is, if the time-saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving shift process and transfers the process to the counter determination process ( (see Figure 36).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S206 that the time saving flag is on (YES determination in S206), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S207.

In S207, the main CPU 201 executes a C time-saving control mode determination process as a process related to the transition to the C time-saving game state. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines the number of time-saving times to be set in the C time-saving counter, whether the time-saving mode is set to 3, and the time-saving performance, etc. After executing the process of S207, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S208.

In addition, the number of time saving times set in the C time saving counter is determined according to the selected symbol command with reference to the hit type determination table (for example, see FIG. 13). In addition, among the time-saving performance, the winning probability of "normal symbol win" is as shown in the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 16). In addition, among the time-saving performance, the opening pattern (number of openings, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric accessory 146 is shown in the normal symbol determination table (see Figure 17) and the normal symbol per type determination table (see Figure 18). It is as it appears. Furthermore, among the time-saving performance, the variable display time of the normal symbols is as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19).

In S208, the main CPU 201 performs time saving setting processing. Details of this time saving setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S208, the main CPU 201 ends the time saving transition process and returns the process to the counter determination process (see FIG. 36).

[1-6-17. Time-saving setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving setting process executed by the main CPU 201 in S208 during the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38) in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the time saving flag is on (S211).

In S211, if it is determined that the time saving flag is on (YES in S211), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S212.

When S211 judges YES, this corresponds to the case where the sure-change flag is off and, for example, the time-saving play state B is executed in addition to the time-saving play state C being executed first (when the ceiling counter = ceiling value), or the time-saving play state A, time-saving play state B, or time-saving play state C is executed in addition to the time-saving play state C being executed first (when a "time-saving win" is won).

Although not shown, when executing the B time saving gaming state in a state where the C time saving gaming state has been executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 2" and also sets the time saving gaming state determined in S205. B Set the time saving counter. In addition, when executing the C time saving gaming state in a state in which the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C working time saving gaming state is executed first, the main CPU 201 sets "time saving mode = 3". At the same time, the C time saving counter determined in S207 is set.

If it is determined in S211 that the time-saving flag is not on (S211 is a NO determination), i.e., if the time-saving flag is off, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S214.

In S212, the main CPU 201 compares the current time-saving counter (the remaining number of time-savings in the previously executed time-saving game state) with the new time-saving number (the number of time-savings determined in S205 or S207), and It is determined whether the time saving counter is smaller than the new number of time saving times.

In S212, if it is determined that the current time-saving counter is not smaller than the new number of time-savings (NO in S212), that is, if the current time-saving counter is larger than the new number of time-savings, the main CPU 201 The setting process is ended and the process returns to the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S212 that the current time-saving counter is greater than the new number of time-saving times (if S212 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S213.

In S213, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving counter reset process. In this process, when the time-saving game state B is executed while the time-saving game state C is executed first, or when the time-saving game state C is executed while the time-saving game state A, the time-saving game state B, or the time-saving game state C is executed first, the larger of the current time-saving counter value (i.e., the remaining number of time-saving times) and the new number of time-saving times is reset as the new time-saving counter. However, even if the time-saving counter reset process (S213) is performed, the main CPU 201 does not reset the time-saving counter B and the time-saving counter C. After executing the process of S213, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process and returns the process to the time-saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In addition, when the B time saving gaming state is executed in a state where the C time saving gaming state is executed first, or when the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, or the C time saving gaming state is being executed first. When executing the C time-saving gaming state over and over again, the main CPU 201 maintains the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving gaming state. In other words, changing the time-saving performance of the previously executed time-saving game state to the time-saving performance of a new time-saving game state, or performing a time-saving game corresponding to the greater number of time-savings between the current time-saving counter and the new number of time-savings. The time-saving performance of the state will not be changed.

As described above, the time-saving performance is the performance that changes the ease with which the game ball can enter the winning hole (for example, in this embodiment, the second starting hole 140 (see FIG. 4)), and refers to the winning probability of a "normal symbol hit", the variable display time of the normal symbol, and/or the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 (number of openings, opening time, wait time, etc.).

In this embodiment, the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter are provided to allow management of two overlapping time-saving game states internally. In the above-mentioned time-saving counter resetting process (S213), the larger of the current time-saving counter value and the new number of time-saving times is reset as the new time-saving counter. However, even if two time-saving game states are overlapping internally, the time-saving performance that appears on the surface (that the player can grasp) is only the time-saving performance of one of the two time-saving game states that are overlapping internally. Therefore, when multiple time-saving game states are overlapping without managing the fact that two time-saving game states are overlapping internally (i.e., without providing the B time-saving counter and the C time-saving counter), the larger of the current time-saving counter value and the new number of time-saving times may be reset as the new time-saving counter.

In S214, the main CPU 201 performs time saving mode setting processing. This process is executed when S211 is NO, that is, when the non-time-saving gaming state is transferred to the B-time-saving gaming state (ceiling counter = ceiling value), or from the non-time-saving gaming state to the C-time-saving gaming state. This is the process that is performed when the game is moved to and executed (when the "time saving win" is won). In this process, the number of time saving times and the time saving performance determined in the B time saving control mode determination process (S205) or the C time saving control mode determining process (S207) are set. After executing the process in S214, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S215.

In S215, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving flag to ON. After executing the process of S215, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving setting process and returns the process to the time-saving transition process (FIG. 38).

In this way, in the above-mentioned time-saving management processing explained with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 executes the transition processing to the B-time-saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbol as the final ceiling variation is completed. I'm going to In this embodiment, the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol does not include a small hit, but in the case of a pachinko game machine where the result of the hit determination process includes a small hit, the first special symbol in the final fluctuation of the ceiling does not include a small hit. A case may occur in which the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit. In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol in the final ceiling fluctuation is a small hit, the main CPU 201 executes the process of transitioning to the B time-saving gaming state based on the completion of the small winning gaming state. It's good to do.

In the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figures 32 to 39, the main CPU 201 performs the transition process to the B time-saving game state when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation ends, but this is not limited to this, and the transition process to the B time-saving game state may be performed based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation. In particular, in the first pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variable displayed in parallel, it is preferable to perform the transition process to the B time-saving game state based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation. This is because, if the transition to the B time-saving game state is made when the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final variation ends, if the variable display of one of the special symbols as the ceiling final variation begins during the variable display of the other special symbol, the benefit of the variable display of the other special symbol as the B time-saving game state cannot be obtained, and there is a risk of reducing interest. In the first pachinko game machine, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed with a long fluctuation of, for example, 600,000 msec. However, in a pachinko game machine in which the variable display of the special symbol can be performed with such a long fluctuation, by performing a transition process to the B time-saving game state based on the start of the variable display of the special symbol as the ceiling final fluctuation, it is possible to avoid a delay in the start of the B time-saving game state even if the variable display of the special symbol, which is the ceiling final fluctuation, is performed with a long fluctuation.

In addition, in the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figures 32 to 39, the B time-saving control mode determination process (S205) as the process related to the transition to the B time-saving play state is performed with priority over the C time-saving control mode determination process (S207) as the process related to the transition to the C time-saving play state (see S203 to S207 in Figure 38), but this is not limited to this. For example, the C time-saving control mode determination process (S207) as the process related to the transition to the C time-saving play state may be performed with priority over the B time-saving control mode determination process (S205) as the process related to the transition to the B time-saving play state.

Furthermore, in the ceiling counter update process described with reference to FIG. 35, if the ceiling count prohibition flag is not off (NO determination in S171 of FIG. 35), the ceiling counter is not updated. I can't do it. For example, in an ST machine or a pachinko game machine that performs a variable probability falling lottery, the ceiling counter may be updated when a special symbol is variably displayed even when the variable probability flag is on. In this case, even if the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time-saving gaming state may not be made, but the transition to the B time-saving gaming state may be made when the difference between the ceiling counter and the probability change counter reaches the ceiling value. . In this case, the main CPU 201 does not shift to the B time-saving gaming state just when the "ceiling counter = ceiling value", but shifts to the B time-saving gaming state when the difference between the ceiling counter and the variable probability counter reaches the ceiling value. Processing will be carried out.

The ceiling value, which is the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state, is preferably within a predetermined range of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the special symbol flag is off (for example, 2.5 to 3.0 times). In this embodiment, as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 10), for example, the jackpot probability when the special symbol flag is off is 1 in 319 (when the setting value is 1), so the ceiling value is preferably within the range of 319 x 2.5 to 319 x 3.0 (times).

Further, it is preferable that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B time saving, which is a condition for ending the B time saving gaming state, be up to a specified multiple (for example, 3.8 times) of the denominator of the jackpot probability when the probability change flag is off. Similarly, the upper limit of the prescribed number of C time-savings, which is the condition for ending the C-time-saving gaming state, is up to the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off by the specified number (for example, 3. (up to 8 times) is preferred. In this example, since the jackpot probability when the variable probability flag is off is 1/319 (in the case of setting value 1), the prescribed number of times B and C are both approximately 1212 (319× It is preferable to set the upper limit to 3.8). Note that it is not essential that the upper limit of the specified number of times of B-time reduction and the upper limit of the specified number of times of C-time reduction be the same value.

In the case of a pachinko machine like the first one, which can be set to any one of a number of settings with different jackpot probabilities, such as settings 1 to 6, the time-saving hit probability is the same for all settings, as described above. In such a case, if the ceiling value, which is the condition for transitioning to the B time-saving game state, is set to a value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability flag is off) by a specified number (for example, 3.0) regardless of the setting value, the ceiling value will differ depending on the setting value, and there is a risk that the set setting value will be discovered by the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is preferable to set the ceiling value to the same value regardless of the setting value, regardless of the set setting value, rather than determining it by multiplying the denominator of the jackpot probability (when the probability flag is off) by a specified number.

[1-6-18. Modifications related to time-saving management processing]
In the time-saving management process described above with reference to Figs. 32 to 39 (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving management process of this embodiment"), the ceiling counter update process (see Fig. 35) is executed in the special symbol game end process (see Fig. 31). In addition, the process related to the transition to the B time-saving game state is performed with priority over the process related to the transition to the C time-saving game state. Furthermore, a transition flag (ceiling flag) to the B time-saving game state and a transition flag (time-saving hit flag) to the C time-saving game state are separately provided, and when the ceiling flag is on, the game is transitioned to the B time-saving game state, and when the time-saving hit flag is on, the game is transitioned to the C time-saving game state. However, the execution timing of the time-saving management process including the ceiling counter update process, the priority order between the transition to the B time-saving game state and the transition to the C time-saving game state, and whether the transition flag to the B time-saving game state and the transition flag to the C time-saving game state are separate or common are not limited to the above, and the time-saving management process can be performed with various variations.

For example, the execution timing of the time-saving management process that includes the ceiling counter update process is set to the time when fluctuation is stopped, the processing at the time of transition is set to give priority to the B-time-saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B-time-saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C-time-saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the time of fluctuation stop, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided separately.

In addition, even if the execution timing of the time saving management process that includes the ceiling counter update process is set to the time when the fluctuation stops, and when the ceiling is reached, it is confirmed that the "time saving hit" is not won, and then the transition to the B time saving gaming state is made. good.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the B time-saving play state, with a transition flag to the B time-saving play state and a transition flag to the C time-saving play state being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, and the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving play state C, with a transition flag to the time-saving play state B and a transition flag to the time-saving play state C being set separately.

In addition, the timing for executing the time-saving management process, which includes the ceiling counter update process, may be set to the start of fluctuation, the process at the time of transition may be prioritized to the time-saving B play state, and the transition flag to the time-saving B play state and the transition flag to the time-saving C play state may be set as a common flag.

In addition, the execution timing of the time saving management process including the ceiling counter update process is set to the start of fluctuation, the processing at the time of transition is given priority to the C time saving gaming state, and the transition flag to the B time saving gaming state and the transition flag of the C time saving gaming state are set. may be provided as a common flag.

Furthermore, if multiple time-saving game states are not executed in parallel, the main CPU 201 performs processing to subtract 1 from the time-saving counter when the time-saving flag is on and the time-saving counter is larger than 0, and in other cases, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the time-saving counter. It is best not to subtract .

[1-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 40, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S86 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 27) will be described. Fig. 40 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the first pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S251).

If it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S251 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S251 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S251), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S252.

In S252, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S252, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S253.

In S253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of times the jackpot opening has been opened is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of times the round play has been performed in the jackpot play state is the upper limit.

When it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit value (YES in S253), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S254. On the other hand, if it is determined in S253 that the number of openings of the big winning opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S253), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S257.

In S254, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by switching the control state number by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S254), the jackpot end process (see S88 in FIG. 27) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S254, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S255.

In S255, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command (S256). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S256, the main CPU 201 ends the grand prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

In S257, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing the processing of S257, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S258.

In S258, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the grand prize opening 131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 131, the maximum number of prizes to be won to the major prize opening 131, the number of prize balls at the time of winning to the grand prize opening 131, etc. are set. . The number of openings of the big prize opening 131 corresponds to the number of rounds. It should be noted that this does not mean to exclude cases where the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes. After executing the process of S258, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S259.

In S259, the main CPU 201 performs a special prize opening/closing control process. In this process, the main CPU 201 generates data for controlling the opening/closing of the special prize opening 131. After executing S259, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S260.

In S260, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S260) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S87 in FIG. 27) will be performed. After executing the process of S260, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S261.

In S261, the main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S261, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S262.

In S262, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large winning hole opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45, which will be described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S262, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-1. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S87 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S271).

If it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S271 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S271), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S272.

In S272, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have won in the big winning hole 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the count switch 132 (see FIG. 6) that counts the number of winning game balls into the big winning opening 131 is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the big winning opening winning counter counted by the count switch 132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S272 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 131 is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S272 returns NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S273.

On the other hand, in S272, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 131 is the maximum number of winnings (YES in S272), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S274.

In S273, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the special prize opening 131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the special prize opening related various setting process (see S258 in FIG. 40) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 131 has not elapsed (NO in S273), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process ( (see Figure 27).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S273 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 131 has elapsed (if S273 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S274.

In S274, the main CPU 201 performs closing setting processing for the big prize opening 131. After executing the process of S274, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S275.

In S275, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S275) and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning hole opening control process, preparations for opening the big winning hole are made again. Processing (see S86 in FIG. 27) will be performed. After executing the process of S275, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S276.

In S276, the main CPU 201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing S276, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S277.

In S277, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45 described later) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S277, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

[1-7-2. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S88 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S281).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S281 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 27).

If it is determined in S281 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S281 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S282.

In S282, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this process, various flags (e.g. probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) are set, and values of various counters (e.g. probability change counter, time saving counter, symbol confirmed number counter, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set. Or a reset process is performed. After executing the process of S282, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S283.

In S283, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the processing of S283, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end processing and returns to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 27).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[1-7-3. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 43, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting conditions for the normal symbol are satisfied, similarly to the special symbol control process.

Figure 43 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 43 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that, for convenience, each process shown in Figure 43 is not shown as a subroutine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S291).

If it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0 (if S291 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 (see FIG. 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (YES in S291), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S292.

In S292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S292, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S293. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S293 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S292.

In S293, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for normal symbols. This process of S293 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start processing, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing, normal symbol variation pattern determination processing, and normal symbol hit determination processing when the result of the normal symbol hit determination processing is a normal symbol hit. 146 opening patterns (number of openings, opening time, wait time) setting processing is performed. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S294.

In S294, the main CPU 201 performs processing to end the variable display of the normal symbol. This processing of S294 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". In this processing, the main CPU 201 performs various processing when ending the variable display of the normal symbol. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S295.

In S295, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol gameplay determination process. This S295 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In this normal symbol gameplay determination process, a determination process is performed of the derived result of the normal symbol (for example, whether the normal symbol is a hit or a miss). Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S296.

In S296, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric role release process. This S296 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In this process, for example, the normal electric role 146 is released in a predetermined manner. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S297.

In S297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This process of S297 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol per end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this embodiment, as shown in the winning judgment table for normal symbols (see FIG. 16), the random numbers for winning judgment for normal symbols are generated in a range (width) of, for example, 0 to 99, and the winning judgment value data for normal symbols is, for example, 0 to 79 (in the case of a non-time-saving game state). The winning probability of normal symbols is determined by the number of winning judgment value data for normal symbols relative to the total random numbers for winning judgment for normal symbols, so that, for example, the winning probability of normal symbols is 80/100 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, this winning probability of normal symbols is different when time-saving control is executed and when time-saving control is not executed, but may be the same or approximately the same. In addition, the variable display of normal symbols is executed for a relatively long time, for example, 600,000 msec, in a non-time-saving game state in which time-saving control is not executed, whereas it is executed for a relatively short time, for example, 1,000 msec, in a game state in which time-saving control is executed. In this way, when time-saving control is executed, the frequency with which the normal electric device opening process is executed, i.e., the frequency with which game balls enter the second starting hole 140, is increased.

[1-7-4. External maskable interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the external maskable interrupt processing executed under the control of the main CPU 201 will be described. This process is an interrupt process performed in response to an external interrupt request that occurs, for example, during a power outage. Note that FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of external maskable interrupt processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

First, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving the protection register (S301). After executing the process of S301, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S302.

In S302, the main CPU 201 reads the status of a predetermined input port of the I/O port 205. The above predetermined input ports set the status of, for example, the power failure detection line, backup clear switch line, sensor abnormality detection line, radio wave sensor line, open detection line, magnetic sensor line, vibration sensor line, solenoid monitoring sensor line, etc. This is the input port that will be used. After executing the process in S302, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S303.

In S303, the main CPU 201 determines whether a power outage has been detected.

If it is determined in S303 that a power outage is not detected (NO determination in S303), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S305. On the other hand, if it is determined in S303 that a power outage has been detected (YES in S303), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S304.

In S304, the main CPU 201 sets (turns on) the XINT detection flag. The XINT detection flag is a flag indicating that power is cut off, and the value of the XINT detection flag is stored in the XINT detection flag area in the work area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S304, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S305.

In S305, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the protection register that was saved in S301. After executing the process of S305, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S306.

In S306, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the external maskable interrupt process.

[1-7-5. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing executed in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first performs a protection register backup process (S311).

Next, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off (S312). If it is determined that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, a power outage is detected) (NO determination in S312), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326. On the other hand, if it is determined that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, no power interruption is detected) (YES in S312), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S313.

In S313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reading the state of the input port of the I/O port 205 (S314), and moves the process to S315.

In S315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not play is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not play is permitted based on, for example, the value of the startup control flag. The startup control flag is a flag for determining whether the startup state when the power is turned on is one of power failure recovery, setting change, setting check, RAM clear, etc. For example, if power failure recovery is selected, it is determined that play is permitted, and if setting change, setting check, RAM clear, etc. is selected, it is determined that play is not permitted.

The startup control flag is composed of a combination of on/off information for the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 when the power is turned on. For example, when the power is turned on, if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are off, it is determined that power has been restored; if both the setting key 174 and the backup clear switch 176 are on, it is determined that settings have been changed; if the backup clear switch 176 is off and the setting key 174 is on, it is determined that settings have been confirmed; and if the backup clear switch 176 is on and the setting key 174 is off, it is determined that the RAM has been cleared.

If it is determined in S315 that the game is not permitted (NO determination in S315), the main CPU 201 performs a setting control process (S316). In this setting control process, a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is performed. That is, in this embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process are performed within the system timer interrupt process, which is performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example, and are performed when the game is not permitted, that is, when the game is not permitted. After executing the setting control process (S316), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326. Note that details of the setting control process in S316 will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

Note that if the game is not permitted (NO determination in S315), the main CPU 201 prohibits the firing of game balls from the firing device 6 (see FIG. 6), and controls specific switches (for example, the setting key 174, the backup clear switch 176). It is preferable to disable various switches other than those (such as the above) and to prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S315 that play is permitted (if S315 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S317.

In S317, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt-disabled section during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is based on the number of interrupts in the work area of the main RAM 203. Stored in the counter area. After executing the process in S317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S318.

In S318, the main CPU 201 performs an update process for the interrupt cycle timer. After executing the process of S318, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S319. Note that the interrupt cycle timer is a timer for managing the interrupt cycle (e.g., 2 msec), and the count value of the interrupt cycle timer is stored in the interrupt cycle management timer area in the working area of the main RAM 203.

In S319, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a jackpot for a special symbol) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are an important factor in determining the number of balls dispensed. After executing the process of S319, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S320.

In S320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 51. After executing the process of S320, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S321.

In S321, the main CPU 201 performs winning information command setting processing. In this process, winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing the process of S321, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S322.

In S322, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, a command reserved for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process in S322, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S323.

In S323, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing S323, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S324.

In S324, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor control process. In this process, game judgment process, prize ball addition judgment process, display content update process of the performance display monitor 170 (see FIG. 6), etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area (outside the area) separate from the working area in which data necessary for the progress of the game is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up and where the data is not cleared even if, for example, the RAM is cleared. After executing the process of S324, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S325.

In S325, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S323. After executing the process of S325, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S326.

In S326, the main CPU 201 performs a process to restore the protection register saved in S311, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[1-7-6. Setting control process]
Next, the setting control process performed in S316 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described with reference to Fig. 46. Fig. 46 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting control process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 46, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the value of the activation control flag is a value indicating a setting change (S331).

If it is determined in S331 that the value of the launch control flag is a value indicating a setting change (if S331 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 performs a setting change process (S332). Details of this setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47. After executing the setting change process (S332), the main CPU 201 advances the process to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S331 that the value of the activation control flag is not a value indicating a setting change (NO determination in S331), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S333.

At S333, the main CPU 201 determines whether the value of the startup control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation.

If it is determined in S333 that the value of the launch control flag is a value indicating setting confirmation (if S333 is determined as YES), the main CPU 201 performs setting confirmation processing (S334). Details of this setting confirmation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After executing the setting confirmation processing (S334), the main CPU 201 advances the processing to S335.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S333 that the value of the startup control flag is not a value indicating setting confirmation, that is, if it is determined that the RAM is cleared (NO in S333), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S337.

In S335, the main CPU 201 executes a setting operation display process. In this process, the currently set setting value is displayed. After executing S335, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S336.

In S336, the main CPU 201 performs production control command transmission processing. In this process, commands (initialization commands, power failure recovery commands, or setting operation commands) reserved for transmission in the setting change process (S332), the setting confirmation process (S334), or the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 25) are used. is transmitted to the sub control circuit 300. After executing the process in S336, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S337.

In S337, the main CPU 201 performs output processing of a WDT (watchdog timer). In this process (WDT output process), a WDT clear register address read process, a WDT clear process, and a WDT restart process are performed in this order. Although not described in other processes, this WDT output process is performed as appropriate. After the process of S337, the main CPU 201 ends the setting control process and returns the process to the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45).

[1-7-7. Setting change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the setting change process performed at S332 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of a setting change process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (S341). This process is performed by reading the information set in the input port of the I/O port 205.

If it is determined in S341 that the backup clear switch 176 has not been pressed (if S341 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S343. On the other hand, if it is determined that the backup clear switch 176 has been pressed (if S341 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S342.

In S342, the main CPU 201 performs a process of updating the set value within the range. After executing the process of S342, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S343.

In this embodiment, the setting value can be changed by operating the backup clear switch 176 in the setting change process, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, a setting switch may be provided so that the setting value can be changed by operating this setting switch.

In S343, the main CPU 201 determines whether the setting key 174 has been turned off (S343).

If it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 has not been turned off (if S343 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, if it is determined in S343 that the setting key 174 has been turned off (if S343 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S344.

In S344, the main CPU 201 performs a first normal game pre-processing. Details of this first normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 49. As described above, when this first normal game pre-processing is performed, the play permission flag is set to ON, and the game is permitted. After executing the first normal game pre-processing (S344), the main CPU 201 ends the setting change processing, and returns the processing to the setting control processing (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-8. Setting confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the setting confirmation process performed in S334 in the setting control process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process in the first pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the setting key 174 is turned off (S351). This determination process is performed in the same manner as the process of S343 in the setting change process (see FIG. 47) described above.

If it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is not turned off (if S351 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S351 that the setting key 174 is turned off (YES in S351), the main CPU 201 performs the second normal game pre-processing (S352). Details of this second normal game pre-processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 50. As described above, when the second normal game pre-processing is performed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play. After executing the second normal game pre-process (S352), the main CPU 201 ends the setting confirmation process and returns the process to the setting control process (see FIG. 46).

[1-7-9. First normal game pre-processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 49, the first normal game pre-processing performed at S344 during the setting change processing (see Fig. 47) will be described. Fig. 49 is a flow chart showing an example of the first normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko game machine. Note that this first normal game pre-processing is also performed as the initial setting processing when the power failure recovery, setting change, and setting confirmation are not performed in the startup initial setting processing (see Fig. 24), that is, when the RAM is cleared.

The main CPU 201 first performs RAM setting processing during initialization (S361). In this process, an area in the main RAM 203 where backup data is stored in the event of a power outage (hereinafter referred to as a "backup area") is cleared (eg, construction of a work area, address setting, etc.). Note that the area where data is stored is not cleared in the performance display monitor control process (see S324 in FIG. 45). Further, in this process, initial data is generated, and each of the generated initial data is stored in the constructed work area in the main RAM 203. That is, data backed up at the time of power outage is erased, and the gaming state can be returned to the initialized state. Although not shown in the drawings, in this process, the gaming state is returned to the initialized state so that the game can be started, the gaming permission flag is set on, and the gaming permission state is entered. After executing the initialization RAM setting process (S361), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S362.

In S362, the main CPU 201 performs an initialization command transmission reservation process. The initialization command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the process of S362, the main CPU 201 ends the first normal game pre-process. When this first normal game pre-processing is completed, the game permission flag is set on, and the game is allowed to play.

[1-7-10. 2nd normal game pre-processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the second normal game pre-processing performed in S352 during the setting confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the second normal game pre-processing in the first pachinko gaming machine. It should be noted that this second normal game pre-processing is also executed as the initial setting process at the time of power failure recovery in the startup initial setting process (see FIG. 24).

The main CPU 201 first performs a RAM setting process upon power recovery (S371). In this process, for example, data stored in a backup area within the main RAM 203 is read out, and each of the read data is stored in a constructed work area within the main RAM 203. The above-mentioned data is, for example, various information necessary to proceed with the game, such as game status information, on/off status of winning flags of special symbols and normal symbols, and information on the number of reservations. That is, by restoring the data backed up at the time of power outage to the work area in the main RAM 203, it is possible to return to the same gaming state as before the power outage. Although not shown, in this process, the game can be started by returning to the same gaming state as before the power outage, and the game permission flag is set to ON, resulting in a game permission state. The main CPU 201 moves the process to S372 after executing the RAM setting process (S371) at the time of power failure recovery.

In S372, the main CPU 201 determines whether the probability of winning is increased or decreased. This process is performed by reading data stored in the working area of the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S372 that the special bonus flag is not on (if S372 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S374.

on the other hand. If it is determined in S372 that the probability change flag is on (YES in S372), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S373.

In S373, the main CPU 201 sets the probability change notification flag to ON. This is done to notify the state of the probability change flag at the time of recovery from power failure. When the probability change notification flag is on, the main CPU 201 controls, for example, a probability change notification LED (not shown) to be lit. This makes it possible to visually determine whether the probability change flag is on or not when the power is restored from a power failure. After executing the process in S373, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S374.

In S374, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for a power failure recovery command. The power failure recovery command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (S336) in the setting control process (see FIG. 46). After executing the process of S374, the main CPU 201 ends the second normal game pre-processing.

[1-7-11. Switch input detection processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of switch input detection processing by the main CPU 201. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in FIG. 51, the main CPU 201 executes the starting opening winning detection process (S381). After executing the process in S381, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S382. The starting opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 52.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes a general prize opening passage detection process (S382). In the general prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts etc. when a prize is won through the general prize opening 122 is set. After executing the process of S382, the main CPU 201 proceeds to S383.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (S383). In the grand prize opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the grand prize opening 131 is set. After executing the process of S383, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs ball passage detection processing (S384). In the ball passage detection process, various random values for normal symbols (random values for determining hit of normal symbols, etc.) are extracted based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 126 being detected by the passing gate switch 127. . In addition, the main RAM 203 stores various random numbers (random numbers for hit determination of normal symbols, etc.) extracted based on the passage of the game ball to the passage gate 126 for normal symbols that are held until the starting conditions for the normal symbols are satisfied. It has a starting storage area (1) to a normal symbol starting storage area (4). In the ball passage detection process, whether or not there is a free space in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (4), that is, based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 126, is extracted. It is also determined whether the number of reserved normal symbols is, for example, less than four. After completing this process, the main CPU 201 ends the switch input detection process.

[1-7-12. Start gate winning detection process]
52 is a flow chart showing an example of the start hole winning detection process by the main CPU 201. The start hole winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-mentioned switch input detection process.

As shown in FIG. 52, the main CPU 201 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start switch 121 (S391).

If it is determined that the first start switch 121 has not detected a game ball (if S391 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S398.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 121 (YES in S391), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S392.

In S392, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, a random number for jackpot determination of the first special symbol, a symbol random number for the first special symbol, a random number for reach determination of the first special symbol, and a random number for determining the reach of the first special symbol). Various random numbers, such as a random number for performance selection, etc.) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the first starting slot winning. After executing the process of S392, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S393.

In S393, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved first special symbols extracted based on winnings in the first starting hole 120 is less than four, for example. The main RAM 203 includes a first special symbol starting storage area (1) to a first special symbol starting memory that holds various random numbers extracted based on winning of a game ball to the first starting port 120 until a starting condition is satisfied. In this process, it is determined whether there is a free space in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4). In addition, the main RAM 203 also has a first special symbol starting storage area (0) in addition to the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved first special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit of 4 (if NO in S393), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved first special symbols is less than four (if S393 returns YES), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S394.

In S394, the main CPU 201 performs a process to increment the number of reserved first special symbols by 1. After executing the process of S394, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S395.

In S395, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random number values extracted based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting hole 120 in the main RAM 203 until the condition for starting the variation of the first special symbol is met. As a result, the display of the variation of the first special symbol for the extracted random number is suspended until the condition for starting the variation is met. After executing the process of S395, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S396.

In S396, the main CPU 201 performs a prefetch determination process. This process is a process in which, prior to the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in FIG. 28), the random number value extracted in S392 is used to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, perform the hit determination process, etc. It is also determined whether the prefetch flag is set.

The look-ahead determination process may be performed at any time between the extraction of the random number value in S392 and the execution of the special symbol winning determination process. However, considering that the sub-control circuit 300 performs the look-ahead performance before the variable display of the special symbol begins, it is preferable to perform the look-ahead determination process, for example, around the time of S395. After executing S396, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S397.

In S397, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a winning command for the first special pattern. The winning command for the first special pattern is a command that includes information for increasing the number of reserved first special patterns by 1, information on the variation pattern of the first special pattern (i.e., the variation pattern command for the special pattern), etc., and the winning command for the first special pattern reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45). After executing the process of S397, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S398.

In S398, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second starting port switch 141 detects a game ball.

If it is determined that a game ball is not detected by the second starting port switch 141 (NO in S398), the main CPU 201 ends the starting port winning detection process and changes the process to the switch input detection process (FIG. 51). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined that a game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 141 (YES in S398), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S399.

In S399, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, a random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, a symbol random number for the second special symbol, a random number for reach determination of the second special symbol, and a random number for determining the reach of the second special symbol). Various random numbers, such as a random number for performance selection, etc.) are extracted, and processing is performed to set payout information according to the second starting slot winning. After executing the process of S399, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S400.

In S400, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of reserved second special symbols extracted based on winning at the second starting hole 140 is, for example, less than four.

The main RAM 203 stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of a game ball into the second starting port 140 in a second special symbol starting storage area (1) to a second special memory area (1) for holding various random numbers extracted based on winning of a game ball to the second starting opening 140 until starting conditions are met. It has a symbol starting storage area (4), and in this process, it is determined whether there is a free space in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4). . In addition, the main RAM 203 also has a second special symbol starting storage area (0) in addition to the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), which will be described later.

If the number of reserved second special symbols is not less than 4, that is, the upper limit of 4 (NO in S400), the main CPU 201 ends the starting opening winning detection process and changes the process to the switch input detection process ( (see Figure 51).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved second special symbols is less than four (YES in S400), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S401.

In S401, the main CPU 201 performs a process to increment the number of reserved second special symbols by 1. After executing the process of S401, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S402.

In S402, the main CPU 201 performs a process of storing various random numerical values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting port 140 in the main RAM 203 until the second special symbol variation start condition is satisfied. As a result, the variable display of the second special symbol regarding the extracted random number is suspended until the variable start condition is satisfied. After executing the process of S402, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S403.

In S403, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the winning command for the second special symbol (S403). The second special symbol winning command is a command that includes information to increase the number of reserved second special symbols by 1, fluctuation pattern information of the second special symbol, etc. The winning command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S403, the main CPU 201 ends the starting opening winning detection process and returns the process to the switch input detection process (see FIG. 51).

[1-8. Sub-control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub-control circuit processing in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 53, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S501). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S502.

The above-mentioned initialization process (S501) is executed when the power is turned on or the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S502 to S508 described below are executed repeatedly.

In S502, the sub CPU 301 performs reading processing of the command input port 308 (see FIG. 6). In this process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 6) set to the command input port 308 is read out. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S503.

In S503, the sub-CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S502 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S504.

In S504, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, for example, based on the winning command transmitted from the main CPU 201, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7 (see FIGS. 4 and 6) and the appearance of the display effect that is output from the speaker 32 (see FIG. 6) are determined. The mode of sound production, etc. is determined.

In the production mode determination process (S504), the sub CPU 301 generates an animation request that includes specification information of production content, and based on the generated animation request, various requests (for example, drawing requests) for operating various production devices. , sound requests, lamp requests, accessory requests, etc.). After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S505.

In S505, the sub-CPU 301 executes a drawing control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 6). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S506.

In S506, the sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 6). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S507.

In S507, the sub-CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 6). Based on the message (LED request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or a portion of the LEDs that make up the LED group 46. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S508.

In S508, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307 (see FIG. 6). The accessory control circuit 307 controls performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the accessory objects forming the performance accessory group 58 based on the message (accessory request) sent from the sub CPU 301. Performs drive control for operation. When this process is finished, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit main process.

[1-9. Specific example of production mode determination processing by sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300 (more specifically, the sub-CPU 301) performs production mode determination processing (see S504 in FIG. 53) based on the winning command transmitted from the main control circuit 200.

As one of the various processes performed in the presentation mode determination process, the sub-CPU 301 performs, for example, a sub-variation presentation pattern determination process that determines the presentation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "sub-variation presentation pattern") of the sub-variation presentation corresponding to the current special symbol variation (hereinafter referred to as the "variation"), and a look-ahead presentation pattern determination process that determines the presentation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the "look-ahead presentation pattern") of the look-ahead presentation. In addition, the presentation mode determination process also performs determination processes of various presentation modes related to the progress of the game, such as the presentation mode of a countdown presentation that suggests that the ceiling counter is approaching the ceiling value, and the presentation mode of a B time-saving play state transition presentation that suggests that the ceiling counter has reached the ceiling value.

The sub-variation effect pattern determination process is performed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. The sub-variation performance pattern is a performance pattern (for example, a variation pattern of a decorative pattern or a character performance patterns, etc.).

In the sub-variable performance, depending on the sub-variable performance pattern being executed, it is possible to show that the expectation level for the result of the special symbol winning determination process is maintained or increased as time passes from when the variable display of the special symbol starts to when the special symbol stops.

For example, as shown in FIG. 54, which will be described later, the sub-variable performance patterns include short-time winning reaches A, B, C, jackpot reaching reaches A, B, C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, E, etc. is included. As mentioned above, time-saving hits A, B, and C are reaches where the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S93 in Figure 28) indicates that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). It's a performance. Jackpot-type reaches A, B, and C are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be both a short-time hit and a jackpot.

Note that, for example, if the execution timing of the countdown effect that suggests the timing of transition to the B time-saving gaming state and the execution timing of the reach effect overlap, the sub CPU 301 will prioritize execution of one of the effects. good.

The pre-reading performance pattern determination process is performed based on, for example, the variation pattern of the special symbol determined as a result of the pre-reading judgment process. The pre-reading performance is a performance pattern performed by the sub-CPU 301 in the display area of the display device 7 while in a pending state (i.e., after a winning entry into the first starting hole 120, until the starting information such as various random numbers extracted based on this winning entry is provided to the winning judgment process of the special symbol (the variable display of the special symbol begins)) as a performance indicating the degree of expectation for the result of the pre-reading judgment process.

Depending on the look-ahead performance pattern being executed, when in a pending state, the look-ahead performance can show that the expectation level for the result of the look-ahead determination process is maintained or increased as time passes (more specifically, as the variable display of the previously held start information progresses).

The preview effect is performed, for example, by using a pending image displayed on the display device 7. The pending image is an image that shows the current pending status.

The look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead winning type performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result type (whether it is a time-saving winning or a jackpot) of the look-ahead judgment process, i.e., the special pattern winning judgment process, and a look-ahead expectation value performance pattern that can suggest the expected value for the result of the special pattern winning judgment process being a winning (jackpot or time-saving winning). In other words, the look-ahead performance can suggest both or either of the expected value for the result type of the special pattern winning judgment process and the expected value for the result of the special pattern winning judgment process being a winning. In addition, in the look-ahead performance pattern determination process (see FIG. 59 described below), a look-ahead winning type performance pattern determination process (see S3006 in FIG. 59 described below) and a look-ahead expectation value performance pattern determination process (see S3008, S3009 in FIG. 59 described below) are performed. Specific examples of the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern, the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern, the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern determination process, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination process will be described later.

[1-9-1. Sub-variation performance pattern determination process]
First, the sub-variation effect pattern determination process will be explained. FIG. 54 is an example of a sub variable performance pattern determination table (detailed explanation is omitted) in a gaming state (normal gaming state) where the time saving flag is off (normal gaming state). This sub-variable effect pattern determination table is stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko game machine. Note that the program ROM 302 also stores a sub-fluctuation performance pattern determination table in a gaming state where the time-saving flag is on (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), but the explanation will be omitted here.

The sub-CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation presentation pattern determination table in the normal game state of FIG. 54, and determines the sub-variation presentation pattern (shown as "variation pattern" in FIG. 54) to be displayed on the display device 7 as the variation presentation pattern corresponding to the variation based on the variation pattern command of the special symbol sent from the main control circuit 200. As described above, in this embodiment, the sub-variation presentation patterns include time-saving hit type reaches A, B, and C, big hit type reaches A, B, and C, and common reaches A, B, C, D, and E.

The time-saving wins A, B, and C are reach performances that indicate that there is a possibility of a time-saving win as described above, and are also reach performances that can be understood from the appearance that there is a possibility of a time-saving win. Time-saving hit system reach A is a time-saving hit guaranteed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss or a jackpot, but is displayed only when it is a "time-saving hit" (Figure 15 reference). Although this time-saving hit type reach A is not a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading, it is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variation performance pattern for pre-reading mode. The time-saving winning type reach B and the time-saving winning type reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. However, while the time-saving hit type reach B is not a sub-variation performance pattern targeted for pre-reading, the time-saving hit-type reach C is a sub-variation performance pattern targeted for pre-reading (see the "pre-reading flag" column in Figure 15, Figure 54, and (See FIG. 55 below).

The jackpot-type reaches A, B, and C are reach performances that indicate that there is a possibility of a jackpot as described above, and are reach performances that can be understood from the appearance that there is a possibility of a jackpot. Jackpot type reach A is a jackpot confirmed reach effect that is not displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss or a "time-saving hit", but is displayed only when it is a "jackpot" (Figure 15 reference). Although this jackpot type reach A is not a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead, it is not limited to this, and may be a sub-variation performance pattern in a look-ahead manner. The jackpot type reach B and the jackpot type reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. However, while the jackpot type reach B is not a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead, the jackpot type reach C is a sub-variation performance pattern to be read ahead (see the column of “preread flag” in FIG. 15).

Common reaches A, B, C, D, and E are reach effects that indicate that there is a possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving hit as described above, and from the appearance, there is a possibility of a time-saving hit or a jackpot. This is a form of reach production that makes it difficult to grasp whether there is a Common reach A is a hit (jackpot, time-saving hit) guaranteed reach effect that is not displayed if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, but is displayed only if it is a jackpot or "time-saving hit". (See Figure 15). The common reach B and the common reach C have the same or substantially the same appearance appearance. Moreover, the common reach D is a performance that develops from the common reach C to the time-saving hit type reach C. Furthermore, the common reach E is a performance that develops from the common reach C to the jackpot type reach C. Note that common reach A and common reach B are not sub-variation performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading, whereas common reach C, common reach D, and common reach E are sub-variation performance patterns that are subject to pre-reading (see Figure 15). (see section ``Flags'').

In this way, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the sub-variation performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 54) and determines the sub-variation performance pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 201. Then, the sub-CPU 301 controls the display device 7 to display the determined sub-variation performance pattern.

[1-9-2. Ahead production pattern determination process]
Next, a description will be given of a prefetch per-type performance pattern determination process and a prefetch expected value performance pattern determination process, which are performed as the prefetch performance pattern determination process.

In addition, the work RAM 303 (see FIG. 6) is provided with the first sub-reserved area (0), the first sub-reserved area (1), the first sub-reserved area (2), the first sub-reserved area (3), and the first sub-reserved area (4) as areas corresponding to the first special symbol start memory area (0), the first special symbol start memory area (1), the first special symbol start memory area (2), the first special symbol start memory area (3), and the first special symbol start memory area (4) provided in the main RAM 203, respectively. Various reserved information related to the extracted random number value is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4) and the first sub-reserved area (1) to the first sub-reserved area (4). Also, the first special symbol start memory area (0) and the first sub-reserved area (0) store information corresponding to the fluctuation. When the sub-CPU 301 receives a winning command for the first start port winning, it stores the received information in the first sub-reserve area that corresponds to the current first special symbol start memory area.

In addition, the work RAM 303 includes a second special symbol starting storage area (0), a second special symbol starting storage area (1), a second special symbol starting storage area (2), and a second special symbol starting memory area (2) provided in the main RAM 203. The areas corresponding to the starting storage area (3) and the second special symbol starting storage area (4) are a second sub-reservation area (0), a second sub-reservation area (1), and a second sub-reservation area ( 2), a second sub-reservation area (3), and a second sub-reservation area (4).

In this embodiment, the pre-reading performance is performed for the first special symbol in the normal game state, but it is not limited to this and may be performed in other game states (e.g., high probability time-saving game state, low probability time-saving game state), or may be performed for the second special symbol.

The pre-reading performance is performed, for example, by using pending images displayed in the display area of the display device 7. The display area of the display device 7 has the following areas for displaying pending images: a zeroth area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (0), a first pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (1), a second pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (2), a third pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (3), and a fourth pending area corresponding to the first sub-pending area (4).

[1-9-2-1. [Table referenced in pre-reading type performance pattern determination processing]
The table referred to in the prefetch type performance pattern determination process will be explained.

The reserved image forms in which the pre-reading performance is executed with the determined pre-reading hit type performance pattern include a time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form that indicates that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit, a jackpot type pre-reading performance form that indicates that there is a possibility of a jackpot, and a common hit type pre-reading performance form that indicates that there is a possibility of both a time-saving hit and a jackpot.

The look-ahead hit type performance pattern changes the form of the pending image, for example, from a common win look-ahead look to a time-saving win look-ahead look, or from a common win look-ahead look to a jackpot look ahead look. This is a production pattern that can suggest a change in the expected value for the result type of the special symbol hit determination process.

FIG. 55 is an example of a prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination table. FIG. 55 shows only the prefetch target variation patterns among the variation patterns shown in FIG. 54. Further, FIG. 56 is an example of a pre-reading type performance pattern determination table. Note that these tables are stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 included in the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in the per-reading type effect pattern determination table number determination table of FIG. , based on the fluctuation pattern and the number of reservations. The number of reservations here includes start information of the prefetch target. That is, when the starting information extracted based on the winning to the first starting opening 120 is held, the number of holdings after holding corresponds to the number of holdings shown in FIG. 55.

For example, when the variation pattern is "03H" and the number of reservations is "3", the pre-read per type performance pattern determination table number is determined to be "3". Further, for example, when the variation pattern is "0EH" and the number of reservations is "2", the pre-read per type effect pattern determination table number is determined to be "22".

When the pre-reading type effect pattern determination table number is determined, the sub CPU 301 refers to the pre-reading type effect pattern determination table in FIG. 56 and determines the pre-reading type effect pattern. To be more specific, as shown in the pre-read per-type performance pattern determination table of FIG. It is determined.

In FIG. 56, for the sake of convenience, the "pre-reading winning type presentation pattern determination table number" is shown as the "SASPT number" and the "pre-reading winning type presentation pattern" is shown as the "SAS presentation pattern." The random number value 1 for sub-presentation selection is a random number value extracted by the sub-CPU 301 based on a specified trigger, such as when a special symbol variation pattern command is received.

For example, if the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is "3" and the extracted random number value 1 for selecting sub-presentation is "55", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be "07H". Also, if the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number is "7" and the extracted random number value 1 for selecting sub-presentation is "77", the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be "16H".

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the Notes (Reserved) column in Figure 56 indicate the first to fourth reserved areas, respectively.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the Notes (Reserved) in Figure 56, the "A" shown in correspondence with the look-ahead hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the random value 1 for sub-presentation selection indicates that the reserved image is displayed in a time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation format, which indicates that the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be a time-saving hit. When the reserved image is displayed in a time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the outside that there is a possibility of a time-saving hit.

In addition, in each column of “1” to “4” in the notes (holding support) in FIG. 56, “B” is , indicates that the pending image is displayed in a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a jackpot. When a pending image is displayed in a jackpot-type look-ahead presentation format, it can be seen from the appearance that there is a possibility of a jackpot.

In addition, in each of the "1" to "4" columns of the Notes (Reserved) in Figure 56, the "C" shown in correspondence with the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table number and the random value 1 for sub-presentation selection indicates that the reserved image is displayed in a common-hit pre-reading presentation format, which indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a time-saving hit or a jackpot. When the reserved image is displayed in a common-hit pre-reading presentation format, it is difficult to tell from the outside whether there is a possibility of a time-saving hit or a jackpot.

For example, if the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined to be "07H", the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" is displayed in the third reserved area, and the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" is also displayed in the second reserved area after shifting from the third reserved area. Then, when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area, the common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C" changes to the time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A", and the time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A" is displayed in the first reserved area.

Further, when the pre-reading per-type performance pattern is determined to be, for example, "16H", the common winning-type pre-reading performance form "C" is displayed in the third holding area. Then, when shifting from the third holding area to the second holding area, the common winning look-ahead performance form "C" changes to the jackpot look-ahead performance form "B", and the shift from the second holding area and the second holding area changes. After that, in the first holding area, a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form "B" is displayed.

That is, the pre-reading hit type performance pattern includes the following patterns A) to E) as shown in Fig. 56. In this embodiment, the pattern of changing from the big hit type pre-reading performance form "B" to the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form "A" and the pattern of changing from the time-saving hit type pre-reading performance form "A" to the big short hit pre-reading performance form "B" are not included in the pre-reading hit type performance pattern, but these patterns may be included in the pre-reading hit type performance pattern.
(i) A pre-reading time-saving hit presentation pattern in which a pre-reading presentation form for a time-saving hit is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and a pre-reading presentation form for a time-saving hit is displayed (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "09H").
(b) A pre-reading jackpot presentation pattern in which a jackpot-type pre-reading presentation form is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and the jackpot-type pre-reading presentation form is displayed (for example, pre-reading jackpot type presentation pattern "17H").
(c) At the time of being put on hold, a common hit type pre-reading presentation form is displayed, and then it changes to a time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form, pre-reading common hit presentation pattern A (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "24H").
ii) When placed on hold, it is displayed in a common win type pre-reading presentation format, and then changes to a jackpot type pre-reading presentation format, a pre-reading common win presentation pattern B (for example, pre-reading win type presentation pattern "12H").
(e) When the ball is put on hold, it is displayed in a common hit type pre-reading presentation format, and the presentation format does not change thereafter, and the common hit type pre-reading presentation format is displayed in a pre-reading common hit presentation pattern C (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "06H").

In this way, the sub CPU 301 refers to the per-reading type performance pattern determination table number determination table (for example, see FIG. ) to determine. Then, the sub CPU 301 refers to the per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 56), and based on the determined per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table number (SASPT number) and the random value 1 for sub-performance selection, A pre-read per type performance pattern (SAS performance pattern) is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 56, the time-saving winning type look-ahead performance form "A" is displayed at the time of suspension, and the look-ahead winning type performance pattern in which it changes to the jackpot type look-ahead performance form "B" after that is not shown. In this way, the sub-CPU 301 may determine the pre-read winning type presentation pattern that changes from the short-time winning pre-read presentation form "A" to the jackpot-based pre-read presentation form "B". By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest that can be given to the player by the look-ahead effect.

In addition, in Fig. 56, the big win type pre-reading performance form "B" is a big win type pre-reading performance form that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be a big win (i.e., there is also a possibility of a miss), as described above, but in addition to this, a big win confirmation pre-reading performance form that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big win confirmation may be displayed. In this case, the pre-reading hit type performance pattern determined by the sub-CPU 301 may include any or all of the following pre-reading type performance patterns E) to H).
(e) A pre-reading jackpot confirmed presentation form is displayed at the time of being put on hold, and the presentation form does not change thereafter, and the pre-reading jackpot confirmed presentation form is displayed.
(d) When the display is put on hold, other pre-reading presentation forms (for example, a time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form "A", a jackpot type pre-reading presentation form "B", a common hit type pre-reading presentation form "C", etc.) are displayed, and then the pre-reading jackpot confirmed presentation form changes to a jackpot confirmed pre-reading presentation form, a pre-reading jackpot confirmed presentation pattern B.
(c) At the time of being put on hold, another look-ahead presentation form (for example, a time-saving hit type look-ahead presentation form "A", a common hit type look-ahead presentation form "C", etc.) is displayed, then a big hit type look-ahead presentation form "B" is displayed, and then it changes to a look-ahead big hit confirmed presentation form C, which changes to a big hit confirmed look-ahead presentation form.

In addition, in FIG. 56, among the short-time winning look-ahead performance form “A”, the jackpot look-ahead performance form “B”, and the common winning look-ahead performance form “C”, the common winning look-ahead performance form “C” is suspended. Although "C" is displayed most frequently, it is not limited to this. For example, at the time it is put on hold, the display frequency of the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form “A” may be the highest, and at the time it is put on hold, the display frequency of the jackpot-type look-ahead presentation form “B” may be the highest. You can do it like this. Furthermore, at the time of suspension, the display frequency of the common win type look-ahead presentation form "C" may be the lowest.

In addition, in FIG. 56, a random number value of 1 for selecting sub-effects within a predetermined range is assigned to all "pre-reading winning type effect pattern determination table numbers (SASPT numbers)", but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to not assign a random number value for selecting sub-effects to only certain SASPT numbers (i.e., the allocation rate for certain SASPT numbers is set to 0 so that they are not selected).

[1-9-2-2. [Table referenced in the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination process]
Next, a table referred to in the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination process will be explained.

Figure 57 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a win occurs) that is referenced when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot." Also, Figure 58 is an example of a look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a miss occurs) that is referenced when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss.

By the way, the form of the pending image in which the look-ahead effect is executed according to the determined look-ahead expected value effect pattern differs depending on the expected value for a hit (time-saving hit, jackpot).

When a reserved image is displayed as a time-saving hit-reading performance format, for example, the reserved image, which is usually displayed as a triangle, can be changed in shape to show a change in expected value, such as "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star." In this case, the expected value is lowest when the reserved image is a square, and highest when the image is a star.

In addition, when a pending image is displayed as a jackpot-type look-ahead effect, for example, the pending image, which is normally displayed in white, may be changed to a color such as "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow." The change in expected value can be expressed by . In this case, when the pending image is blue, the expected value is the lowest, and when the pending image is a rainbow, the expected value is the highest.

In addition, although details will be described later, when the reserved image is displayed as a common win type pre-reading presentation format that indicates the possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving win, the reserved image may be displayed, for example, as both a color indicating the expected value level for a jackpot and a shape indicating the expected value level for a time-saving win, or it may be displayed in a dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation format.

Although the reserved image for which the look-ahead performance is performed can change from a performance form with a relatively low expected value to a performance form with a relatively high expected value, it is preferable not to change from a performance form with a relatively high expected value to a performance form with a relatively low expected value. Furthermore, when changing the performance form of the reserved image, it is not necessarily necessary to change one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star" or "blue < yellow < green < red < rainbow", but it may be changed, for example, from "pentagon → circle" or "yellow → rainbow". Furthermore, it is not necessarily necessary to start the reserved image form with a square or blue, which have the lowest expected value, but it may start with a circle or red, for example.

Note that "1" to "4" shown in the column of remarks (reservation correspondence) in FIG. 57 indicate the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area, respectively, similarly to FIG. 56.

In addition, in each column of "1" to "4" in the column of notes (holding support) in FIG. 57, " 0" to "5" indicate the high expected value for winning (time-saving winning, jackpot). For example, the above-mentioned "triangle" and "white" correspond to "0", the above-mentioned "square" and "blue" correspond to "1", and the above-mentioned "pentagon" and "yellow" correspond to "2". The above "hexagon" and "green" correspond to "3", the above "circle" and "red" correspond to "4", and the above "star" and "rainbow" correspond to "5". ”.

Hereinafter, in each column of "1" to "4" in the remarks (hold support) column of FIG. 57, " 0'' to ``5'' are referred to as expected value levels ``0'' to ``5''.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit" or "big hit", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is, for example, as shown in the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination table (at the time of win) in FIG. It is determined based on the number of reservations and the random number value 2 for sub performance selection. Similarly, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the pre-read expected value performance pattern is, for example, the number of reservations, as shown in the pre-read expected value performance pattern determination table (at the time of loss) in FIG. It is determined based on the random number value 2 for sub-effect selection. The random number value 2 for sub performance selection is a random number extracted by the sub CPU 301 based on a predetermined opportunity, such as when receiving a special symbol variation pattern command, for example. Note that in FIGS. 57 and 58, only the cases where the number of reservations is "1" to "3" are illustrated, and the illustration of the case where the number of reservations is "4" is omitted for convenience.

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the reserved number is "3", and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-effects is "750", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H". If the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "43H", for example, the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, the expected value level changes from "2" to "3" when shifting from the third reserved area to the second reserved area, and the expected value level changes from "3" to "5" when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the reserved number is "3", and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-effects is "680", the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "3FH". If the look-ahead expected value performance pattern is determined to be "3FH", for example, the expected value level is "2" in the third reserved area, the expected value level is "2" in the second reserved area, and when shifting from the second reserved area to the first reserved area, the expected value level changes from "2" to "4".

In this way, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a win occurs) (see FIG. 57) or the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern determination table (when a miss occurs) (see FIG. 58) based on the result of the special pattern hit determination process, and determines the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern based on the number of reserved numbers and the random number value 2 for selecting sub-presentations.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit" or "big hit", the distribution rate of each look-ahead expected value performance pattern is not limited to the distribution rate shown in FIG. 57, and can be changed as appropriate. It is.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss," a bias is created by increasing the selection rate of pre-reading expected value presentation patterns with relatively low expected value levels (for example, "01H" or "0BH"), but this is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate, for example by distributing them evenly.

In addition, in FIGS. 57 and 58, a random value 2 for sub-performance selection with a predetermined width is assigned to all "ahead expected value performance patterns", but this is not limited to a specific "ahead expected value performance pattern". It is also possible to not allocate the random value 2 for sub-effect selection only to `` (that is, to set the distribution rate of a specific ``look-ahead expected value effect pattern'' to 0 so that it is not selected).

[1-9-3. Ahead production pattern determination process]
Next, the prefetch effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 with reference to the tables of FIGS. 54 to 58 will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is an example of a flowchart showing the prefetch effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 301. Note that, as described above, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance pattern determination process only in the normal gaming state in which left-handed hitting is the normal gaming mode, but the invention is not limited to this.

The sub-CPU 301 first determines whether or not a winning command has been received from the main CPU 201 (S3001).

If no winning command has been received (if S3001 returns NO), the sub-CPU 301 ends the pre-reading performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a winning command has been received (if S3001 returns a YES judgment), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3002.

In S3002, the sub CPU 301 determines whether or not the pending target for pre-reading is not present, that is, whether or not a pre-reading effect is being executed for the current pending. If there are a plurality of pending images, the pre-reading effect may be performed on a plurality of pending images, but in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed only on one pending image.

If a look-ahead performance is being performed for the current hold (if S3002 is judged as NO), the sub-CPU 301 ends the look-ahead performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if a look-ahead performance is not being performed for the current hold (if S3002 returns YES), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3003.

In S3003, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the variation pattern information received in the winning command is subject to pre-reading (see FIG. 55).

If the variation pattern information received in the winning command is not subject to pre-reading (if S3003 is judged as NO), the sub-CPU 301 ends the pre-reading performance pattern determination process.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern information received in the winning command is to be prefetched (YES in S3003), the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3004.

In S3004, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than, for example, the upper limit number that can be reserved (for example, 4 or 8). This process is to avoid shifting to the B time-saving game state before the variable display of special symbols is executed for the reservation for which the pre-read effect has been performed, even though the pre-read effect has been performed. This makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3005.

In this embodiment, in S3004, it is determined whether the difference between the ceiling value and the ceiling counter is greater than the maximum number that can be reserved, but this is not limited to this, and if the fluctuation pattern information received in the winning command is a target for pre-reading (if S3003 is determined to be YES), it may be determined whether the difference is greater than the number of reserved balls including the target for pre-reading. In addition, the ceiling value and ceiling counter may receive information as a command from the main CPU 201, or may be managed by the sub-CPU 301 separately from the main CPU 201.

In S3005, the sub CPU 301 performs prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination processing. In this process, the per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table number is determined by referring to the per-prefetch type performance pattern determination table number determination table (see FIG. 55). After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S3006.

In S3006, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process for determining a pre-reading hit type presentation pattern. In this process, the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern is determined by referring to the pre-reading hit type presentation pattern determination table (see FIG. 56). After executing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3007.

In S3007, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit." In this process, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined based on the fluctuation pattern information received in the winning command sent from the main CPU 201, and a YES determination is made if the result is a "time-saving hit" or "jackpot". be done. However, the invention is not limited to this, and a "time-saving hit" or a "big hit" may be determined by transmitting winning/losing information of special symbols from the main CPU 201 to the sub CPU 301.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" or a "jackpot" (YES determination in S3007), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3008.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is neither a "time-saving hit" nor a "jackpot" (S3007 judges NO), the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S3009.

In S3008, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead expected value effect pattern (at the time of winning) determination process. In this process, a look-ahead effect pattern (at the time of a win) is determined by referring to the look-ahead expected value effect pattern determination table (at the time of a win) in FIG. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

Further, in S3009, the sub CPU 301 performs a look-ahead performance pattern determination process in case of loss. In this process, a look-ahead expected value performance pattern (when a loss occurs) is determined with reference to the look-ahead expected value performance pattern determination table (when a loss occurs) in FIG. After executing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the prefetch effect pattern determination process.

[1-9-4. Effects of pre-reading performance, examples of pre-reading performance extensions]
In the above-mentioned look-ahead performance, not only is it interesting to see whether the reserved image changes into a big win type look-ahead performance form or a time-saving hit type look-ahead performance form, but it is also possible to change the expected value level of a hit (big win, time-saving hit), and it is possible to increase interest by performing a new performance that has never been performed before. Note that the timing for changing the reserved image form is not limited to when the reserved image shifts, and may be during the variable display of the special pattern of the change, for example.

In addition, regarding the form of the held image performed as a pre-reading effect (for example, the form of the held image displayed within the range of the first sub-holding area (4) to the first sub-holding area (1)), the first starting port 120 The form of the pending image in the variable display of the special symbol may be determined at the time of starting the variable display of the special symbol.

By the way, when comparing the probability of being determined as a variation pattern in which a look-ahead performance is executed in a look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern (see, for example, "03H" and "0EH" in FIG. 54) with the probability of being determined as a variation pattern in which a look-ahead performance is executed in a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern (see, for example, "06H" and "11H" in FIG. 54), the former probability is higher (see, for example, FIG. 15). In other words, the execution rate of the look-ahead performance is higher in the look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern than in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern. Therefore, compared to conventional pachinko gaming machines in which a look-ahead performance is executed only when there is a possibility of a jackpot, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the look-ahead performance while suppressing the decrease in the expected value of a win, and to increase interest.

Note that the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern may be higher than the execution rate of the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead time-saving hit performance pattern. In this case, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the expected value for a jackpot is higher than the expected value for a time-saving hit, so it is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a game state where the probability change flag is off (in this embodiment, the normal game state and the low-probability time-saving game state), a "time-saving hit" can be won in the hit determination process of the special symbol (see FIG. 10). However, in this embodiment, a pre-reading performance is performed in the normal game state, but not in the low-probability time-saving game state. Even if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol in the low-probability time-saving game state is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving times is unlikely to increase in either the case where the time-saving game state C is superimposed on the time-saving game state A, or the case where the time-saving game state C is not superimposed on the time-saving game state A. Therefore, by making it as much as possible for the player to not know that there is a possibility of winning a "time-saving hit" in the time-saving game state A, it is possible to reduce the disappointment given to the player by winning a "time-saving hit," and to suppress a decrease in interest.

However, it is not essential to prevent the look-ahead effect from being performed in the low-accuracy time-saving game state, and it is necessary to ensure that the look-ahead effect is not performed not only in the normal game state but also in the low-accuracy time-saving game state and the high-accuracy low time-saving game state. It's okay. Further, in this embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed only for the first special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading effect may be performed for the second special symbol as well.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, a time-saving hit type reach, a jackpot type reach, or a common reach can be executed as the sub-variable performance pattern. In this embodiment, as can be seen from FIGS. 15 and 54 to 56, when the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead effect with the look-ahead time-saving hit effect pattern, the sub-CPU 301 executes the time-saving hit type reach as the sub-variable effect pattern. And do not execute jackpot type reach. Further, when the sub CPU 301 executes the pre-reading performance using the pre-reading jackpot performance pattern, the sub CPU 301 executes the jackpot-based reach as the sub-variable performance pattern, and does not execute the time-saving winning-based reach.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the sub CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance with the look-ahead time-saving winning performance pattern or the look-ahead common winning performance pattern, it is possible to execute the time-saving winning type reach as the sub variable performance pattern. However, when the sub-CPU 301 executes the look-ahead performance in the look-ahead jackpot performance pattern, it does not execute the time-saving hit type reach as the sub-variable performance pattern.

In addition, regardless of whether a pre-reading jackpot presentation pattern (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern (SAS presentation pattern) "37H" shown in FIG. 56), a pre-reading time-saving hit presentation pattern (for example, pre-reading hit type presentation pattern "29H" shown in FIG. 56), or a pre-reading common hit presentation pattern (for example, pre-reading presentation pattern (SAS presentation pattern) "27H" shown in FIG. 56) is executed, the sub-CPU 301 may execute a common reach (for example, the sub-variable presentation patterns "0AH" and "0BH" shown in FIG. 55) as a sub-variable presentation pattern.

Also, a presentation pattern may be set in which a time-saving hit type reach is executed, and after the time-saving hit type reach indicates a miss, a big win type reach is executed. In this case, the player can play with a sense of anticipation until the end, wondering whether or not a high-profit big win type reach will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 15, in the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "target variation") performed for start information in which a pre-reading effect has been executed, if a common reach E is executed, an effect common to the common reach C is displayed, and then it is possible to transition to an effect common to the jackpot reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed, it will not transition to the jackpot reach C. Similarly, in the target variation, if a common reach E is executed, an effect common to the common reach C is displayed, and then it is possible to transition to an effect common to the time-saving hit reach C. On the other hand, if no effect common to the common reach C is executed, it will not transition to the time-saving hit reach C.

In this embodiment, the look-ahead performance is performed only for one reserved image (see S3002). Therefore, even if a look-ahead performance mode (hereinafter referred to as a "jackpot look-ahead performance") that indicates that the result of the special pattern hit determination process may be a jackpot has already been performed, the sub-CPU 301 will not perform a new look-ahead performance. Note that even in a pachinko gaming machine in which look-ahead performance is performed for multiple reserved images, it is preferable not to perform a new look-ahead performance if a jackpot look-ahead performance has already been performed.

For example, an arbitrary hold (hereinafter referred to as "first hold") and another hold whose variable display of special symbols starts after this first hold (hereinafter referred to as "second hold") ), and if a look-ahead jackpot effect pattern (for example, look-ahead hit type effect pattern "17H" in Fig. 56) is executed in the first hold, the look-ahead effect is executed in the second hold. Even if it is executed, there is a possibility that the look-ahead effect in this second suspension will be meaningless. In particular, when a jackpot is derived for the first hold and the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, and after this jackpot gaming state ends, it is controlled to the A time-saving gaming state, for example, a "time-saving hit" is derived for the second hold. Even so, there is a possibility that the player will not be able to benefit from this "time saving", and in this case, the player's interest will be significantly reduced. Therefore, when the jackpot look-ahead effect has already been executed, it is preferable not to execute the look-ahead effect for a hold that will be expired later than the hold for which the jackpot look-ahead effect is being executed.

In addition, even if the first hold is a jackpot hold (a hold from which a jackpot is derived), if a look-ahead performance has not been performed for the first hold, the look-ahead performance may or may not be performed for the second hold.

Further, even when a fake jackpot look-ahead performance (for example, look-ahead hit type performance pattern "53H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, it is preferable not to perform the look-ahead effect in the second hold.

However, if a time-saving hit pre-reading effect (for example, the pre-reading hit type effect pattern "05H" in FIG. 56) is being executed in the first hold, a jackpot pre-reading effect or a time-saving hit pre-reading effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a time-saving hit is derived for the first hold, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot that is more profitable than that.

In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol does not include a small hit, but in a pachinko gaming machine in which the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol includes a small hit, even if a small hit pre-reading effect is executed in the first reserve, a big hit pre-reading effect or a time-saving hit pre-reading effect may be executed in the second reserve. This is because even if a small hit is derived for the first reserve, it is possible to make the player expect a big hit that is more profitable than that.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process includes a small hit, there is a look-ahead performance mode (hereinafter referred to as "small hit look-ahead performance") that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a small hit. ) is being executed in the first hold, a jackpot look-ahead effect or a time-saving hit look-ahead effect may be executed in the second hold. This is because even if a small win is derived for the first reservation, it is possible to make the player expect a small win with a higher degree of profit than that.

Further, when a prize is won in the first starting opening 120 and the starting information is suspended during execution of a jackpot type reach as a sub variable performance pattern, the sub CPU 301 does not perform a pre-reading performance regarding this suspension.

Further, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 executes the prefetch effect only in the normal gaming state. Therefore, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the starting information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the pre-read determination performed by the main CPU 201 is pending (this In this paragraph, this suspension is referred to as "specific suspension"), and regardless of whether a pre-reading effect is executed or a pre-reading effect is not executed for this specific pending, the sub CPU 301 will execute the system after the end of the jackpot gaming state. , If the game is not in the normal gaming state, the prefetch effect is not executed for the specific hold. However, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to perform the pre-read performance for the specific hold even if the game is in the normal game state after the end of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, even if the pachinko gaming machine executes a look-ahead effect in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), when the jackpot display mode is derived, If there is a hold, the sub CPU 301 may make it possible not to execute a pre-reading performance for the specific hold after the jackpot gaming state ends.

In addition, when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the jackpot display mode is derived, if the start information determined to be a "time-saving hit" by the pre-reading judgment made by the main CPU 201 is held (this hold is referred to as a "specific hold" in this paragraph), even if this specific hold is a hold for a "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 may not be controlled to the C time-saving play state based on the "time-saving hit" after the jackpot game state ends. For example, if the specification is such that multiple time-saving play states are not executed in overlap when the time-saving play states overlap, and the A time-saving play state is executed after the jackpot game state ends, the main CPU 201 will not execute the C time-saving play state based on the "time-saving hit" even if the specific hold is a hold for a "time-saving hit".

[1-10. Specific example of look-ahead production]
Specific examples of the look-ahead effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 64. In this embodiment, the sub CPU 301 is capable of executing a prefetch effect using a pending image based on a command sent from the main CPU 201.

[1-10-1. Specific examples of when a pre-reading performance is performed with a pre-reading jackpot performance pattern]
As described above, the look-ahead performance pattern includes a look-ahead winning type performance pattern and a look-ahead expectation value performance pattern. First, a specific example of a look-ahead performance in a look-ahead big win performance pattern as the look-ahead winning type performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are examples of look-ahead effect patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, in which the jackpot-type look-ahead effect pattern that indicates that there is a possibility of a jackpot changes. It is a diagram showing a process. Note that the pre-read per type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) correspond to "1CH", "3CH", "58H", or "78H" in FIG. 56. Further, the look-ahead expected value performance patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value performance patterns shown in FIGS. 60(a) to 60(f) are omitted from illustration in FIG.

As shown in Figures 60(a) to 60(f), the first hold area 411 to the fourth hold area 414 are displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7. As described above, the first hold area 411 to the fourth hold area 414 are areas that indicate whether hold information is stored in the first sub-hold area (1) to the first sub-hold area (4), respectively. In addition, the 0th area 410 is an area that corresponds to the first sub-hold area (0) in which information corresponding to the change is stored.

In this embodiment, when the reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area, the sub CPU 301 stores the reservation areas 411 to 414 corresponding to the first sub-reservation area where the reservation information is stored, as indicated by triangles. A pending image (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pending image") is displayed. Moreover, when no reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area, the sub CPU 301 does not display the reservation image, but displays only the frame of the reservation area.

In FIG. 60(a), the first holding area 411 to the third holding area 413 display normal holding images in which no prefetch effect is executed, and the fourth holding area 414 displays a holding image. Only the frame is displayed. This indicates that reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation areas (1) to (3) and that no reservation information is stored in the first sub-reservation area (4).

In FIG. 60(b), a new pending image is displayed in the fourth pending area 414, which is different from the state shown in FIG. 60(a). This indicates that new pending information has been stored in the first sub-pending area (4), which is different from the state shown in FIG. 60(a).

As described above, the sub CPU 301 displays the formats (for example, colors) of the pending images shown in the first pending area 411 to the fourth pending area 414 differently depending on the expected value for the jackpot. In this embodiment, except for rainbows, differences in colors are illustrated by shading of colors.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 60(b), the color of the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 is white (expected value level "0"), and the color shown in the fourth reserved area 414 is white (expected value level "0"). The color of the held image that is displayed is blue (expected value level "1").

Figure 60 (c) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (b), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in Figure 60 (b) has changed from blue to yellow (expected value level "2") when it is shifted to the third pending area 413.

Figure 60 (d) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (c), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in Figure 60 (c) has changed from yellow to green (expected value level "3") when it is shifted to the second pending area 412.

FIG. 60(e) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 60(d), and the color of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in FIG. 60(d) is , is an image showing that the color changes from green to red (expected value level "4") when shifted to the first reservation area 411.

Figure 60 (f) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 60 (e), and shows that the color of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in Figure 60 (e) has changed from red to rainbow (expected value level "5") when it is shifted to the zeroth area 410.

In addition, the color (expected value level) of the reserved image indicating the expected value for a jackpot does not necessarily need to change when the reserved image shifts, and may change during the variable display of the special pattern for that change, for example.

In addition, in FIG. 60, the jackpot-based pre-reading presentation form is changed to indicate a change in the expected value from which a jackpot is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, a pre-reading presentation that changes from a jackpot-based pre-reading presentation form to a jackpot confirmation pre-reading presentation form may be executed by the sub-CPU 301. In this case, if it is before the change to the jackpot confirmation pre-reading presentation form, the expected value level may also be changed accordingly.

[1-10-2. Specific example of a case where a look-ahead performance is performed using a look-ahead time-saving performance pattern]
Next, a specific example of a case where a look-ahead performance is performed in a look-ahead time-saving performance pattern as the above-mentioned look-ahead performance pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 61.

FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, in which a time-saving win type look-ahead performance pattern indicating that there is a possibility of a time-saving win is shown. It is a figure showing the process of change. It should be noted that the look-ahead time saving hit type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) correspond to "0EH", "2EH", "4AH", or "6AH" in FIG. 56. Furthermore, the look-ahead expected value performance patterns corresponding to the look-ahead expected value performance patterns shown in FIGS. 61(a) to 61(f) are omitted from illustration in FIG.

In FIG. 61(a), the first holding area 411 to the third holding area 413 display normal holding images in which no prefetch effect is executed, and the fourth holding area 414 displays a holding image. Only the frame is displayed.

In FIG. 61(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the fourth reserved area 414 from the state shown in FIG. 61(a). As described above, the sub-CPU 301 displays the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 in different forms (e.g. shapes) depending on the expected value for the time reduction.

As described above, in this embodiment, the expected value for a jackpot is represented by the color of the reserved image, and the expected value for a time-saving hit is represented by the shape of the reserved image.

In this embodiment, in FIG. 61(b), the shapes of the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the third reserved area 413 are triangular (expected value level "0"), and the shapes shown in the fourth reserved area 414 are triangular (expected value level "0"). The shape of the retained image is a rectangle (expected value level "1").

FIG. 61(c) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(b), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the fourth pending area 414 in FIG. 61(b) is , is an image showing that the shape changes from a quadrangle to a pentagon (expected value level "2") when shifted to the third reservation area 413.

Figure 61 (d) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (c), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in Figure 61 (c) has changed from a pentagon to a hexagon (expected value level "3") when it is shifted to the second pending area 412.

Figure 61 (e) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 61 (d), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the second pending area 412 in Figure 61 (d) has changed from a hexagon to a circle (expected value level "4") when it is shifted to the first pending area 411.

FIG. 61(f) is an image in which the pending image is shifted by one from the state shown in FIG. 61(e), and the shape of the pending image displayed in the first pending area 411 in FIG. 61(e) is , is an image showing that when shifted to the 0th area 410, the circle changes to a star (expected value level "5").

Note that the shape of the pending image indicating the expected value for time saving does not necessarily need to be changed one by one in the order of "square < pentagon < hexagon < circle < star"; for example, it may be changed from "pentagon → circle". You may let them.

In addition, the shape of the reserved image (expected value level) indicating the expected value for the time-saving win does not necessarily need to change when the reserved image shifts, and may change, for example, during the variable display of the special pattern for that change.

In addition, in FIG. 61, the time-saving winning type look-ahead effect is changed to show the change in the expected value from which the time-saving win is derived, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, the following look-ahead effect may be used. It may also be executed by the sub CPU 301. In this case, the expected value level may be changed at the same time before changing to the jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance mode.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a time-saving win type look-ahead performance form to a jackpot type look-ahead performance form.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a time-saving win type look-ahead performance to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance.
・A look-ahead performance that changes from a time-saving win type look-ahead performance form to a jackpot type look-ahead performance form, and then changes to a jackpot confirmed look-ahead performance form.

[1-10-3. Specific examples of when pre-reading effects are performed with pre-reading common winning effects patterns]
Next, a specific example of a pre-reading effect performed with a pre-reading common winning effect pattern as the above-mentioned pre-reading winning type effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG.

Figures 62(a) to 62(d) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the reserved image changes from a common win type look-ahead presentation form, which indicates that there is a possibility of either a jackpot or a time-saving win, to a jackpot type look-ahead presentation form. Changes in the common win type look-ahead presentation form include a change in the expected value level of a win (time-saving win, jackpot), and a change in the type of win to one that clearly indicates whether it is a jackpot or a time-saving win. The look-ahead type win presentation patterns shown in Figures 62(a) to 62(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in Figure 56, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern shown in Figures 62(a) to 62(d) corresponds to "43H" in Figure 57.

In this example, as a common win-based look-ahead presentation form that indicates that there is a possibility of both a jackpot and a time-saving hit, both a color indicating the expected value level for the jackpot and a shape indicating the expected value level for the time-saving hit are used. It is expressed by displaying.

In FIG. 62(a), the first pending area 411 and the second pending area 412 display normal pending images with no preview performance being performed, while the third pending area 413 and the fourth pending area 414 display only frames and no pending images.

In FIG. 62(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 62(a). The sub-CPU 301 displays the reserved images shown in the first reserved area 411 to the fourth reserved area 414 in different forms (e.g., color and shape) depending on the expected value for a hit (big hit or short-time hit). In this embodiment, when the pre-reading performance is not executed or the expected value for a hit is the lowest, the reserved image is displayed as a white triangle, and the expected value for a short hit increases in the following order: "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star."

In this embodiment, in FIG. 62(b), the shape of the reserved image shown in the first reserved area 411 and the second reserved area 412 is a white triangle (expected value level "0"), and the shape of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a yellow pentagon (expected value level "2").

Figure 62 (c) is an image in which the pending image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 62 (b), and shows that the shape of the pending image displayed in the third pending area 413 in Figure 62 (b) has changed from a yellow pentagon to a green hexagon (expected value level "3") when it is shifted to the second pending area 412.

Figure 62 (d) is an image in which the reserved image has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 62 (c), and shows that the shape of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 in Figure 62 (c) has changed from a green hexagon (a common win-type pre-reading presentation form with an expected value level of "3") to a rainbow triangle (a big win-type pre-reading presentation form with an expected value level of "5") when it is shifted to the first reserved area 411.

In other words, the look-ahead effect shown in FIGS. 62(b) and 62(c) determines whether the format of the pending image is a format that indicates the expected value for a jackpot or a format that indicates the expected value for a time-saving hit. This is a performance that is difficult to grasp from its form. On the other hand, in the look-ahead effect shown in FIG. 62(d), the format of the pending image indicates the expected value for a jackpot, and the expected value is extremely high (for example, expected value level "5"). It is possible to grasp something.

As described above, in this embodiment, depending on the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the look-ahead performance is divided into a look-ahead time-saving performance pattern that shows the expected value for a time-saving hit, and a look-ahead jackpot performance pattern that shows the expected value for the jackpot. , a pre-read common winning effect pattern indicating an expected value for a win (big hit or time-saving win). Then, when a look-ahead effect is executed using the look-ahead common winning effect pattern, the player is given an interesting idea of whether the pending image will change into a jackpot-type look-ahead effect form or a time-saving win-type look-ahead effect form. This makes it possible to increase interest.

The form of the reserved image showing the expected value for a time-saving hit does not necessarily have to change one by one in the order of "blue square < yellow pentagon < green hexagon < red circle < rainbow star" and may change, for example, from "yellow pentagon (common hit type pre-reading presentation form) → red triangle (big hit type pre-reading presentation form)" or from "green hexagon (common hit type pre-reading presentation form) → triangular star (time-saving hit type pre-reading presentation form)". Also, the form of the reserved image showing the expected value for a hit does not necessarily have to start from the blue square which has the lowest expected value and may start from, for example, a red circle.

Further, the form of the pending image indicating the expected value for winning does not necessarily need to be changed when the pending is shifted, and may be changed, for example, during the variable display of the special symbol of the change.

In addition, in Fig. 62, the common hit system pre-reading performance form is changed to change the expected value derived from any hit (big hit or time-saving hit) or to change the expected hit from an unknown state to a big hit, but instead of or in addition to this, for example, the pre-reading performance shown below may be executed by the sub-CPU 301. In this case, if it is before changing to the big hit confirmed pre-reading performance form, the expected value level may also be changed.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a common hit type pre-reading performance form to a guaranteed jackpot pre-reading performance form.
-A pre-reading performance that changes from a common hit type pre-reading performance form to a jackpot type pre-reading performance form, and then changes to a jackpot confirmed pre-reading performance form.

[1-10-4. Variations of the common winning look-ahead production format]
In addition, as the form of the pending image, the common winning look-ahead presentation form that indicates the possibility of both jackpot and time-saving winning does not necessarily include the color indicating the expected value for the jackpot and the shape indicating the expected value for the time-saving winning. It is not limited to the form expressed by both. Instead of this, for example, a dedicated common winning look-ahead presentation form may be provided. When creating a dedicated common win-based look-ahead performance format, it becomes possible to have expectations for both jackpots and time-saving hits, and since the expected value of each is unknown, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for both jackpots and short-time wins, and since the expected value of each is unknown, it will be possible to change the performance format in the future. The player can now play the game with a sense of anticipation, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Figures 63(a) to 63(d) are examples of look-ahead presentation patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, and show the process by which the reserved image changes from a dedicated common win look-ahead presentation to a big win look-ahead presentation. Note that the look-ahead winning type presentation patterns shown in Figures 63(a) to 63(d) correspond to "15H", "35H", "51H", or "71H" in Figure 56, and the look-ahead expected value presentation pattern shown in Figures 63(a) to 63(d) corresponds to "31H" in Figure 57 or Figure 58.

Further, FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) are examples of look-ahead performance patterns displayed in the display area 7a of the display device 7, ranging from a dedicated common winning look-ahead performance form to a time-saving winning look-ahead performance form. It is a figure which shows the process by which a pending image changes. Note that the pre-read per type performance patterns shown in FIGS. 64(a) to 64(d) correspond to "07H", "27H", "43H", or "63H" in FIG. ) to FIG. 64(d) correspond to “31H” in FIG. 57 or 58.

In Figures 63(a) and 64(a), the first pending area 411 and the second pending area 412 display a normal pending image in which no preview performance is being performed, and the third pending area 413 and the fourth pending area 414 display no pending image, only a frame.

In FIG. 63(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved area 413, following the state shown in FIG. 63(a).

Similarly, in FIG. 64(b), a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved area 413 from the state shown in FIG. 64(a).

In both Figures 63(b) and 64(b), the form of the reserved image shown in the third reserved area 413 is a dedicated common winning type pre-reading performance form, for example, a shining form. By changing the degree of brightness of the light, the expected value level can be changed.

Figure 63 (c) is an image in which the reserve has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 63 (b), and shows that the dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form displayed in the third reserve area 413 in Figure 63 (b) has been shifted in the same form to the second reserve area 412.

Similarly, Figure 64 (c) is an image in which the reserve has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 64 (b), and shows that the dedicated common win type pre-reading presentation form displayed in the third reserve area 413 in Figure 64 (b) has been shifted in the same form to the second reserve area 412.

Figure 63 (d) is an image in which the reserved position has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 63 (c), and shows that the form of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 in Figure 63 (c) has changed from a special common hit type pre-reading presentation form to a red triangle (expected value level of a jackpot "4") when it is shifted to the first reserved area 411.

On the other hand, Figure 64 (d) is an image in which the reserved position has been shifted by one from the state shown in Figure 64 (c), and shows that the form of the reserved image displayed in the second reserved area 412 in Figure 64 (c) has changed from a special common hit type pre-reading presentation form to a white circle (expected value level for time-saving hits of "4") when it is shifted to the first reserved area 411.

In this way, even if the look-ahead presentation form is expressed as a dedicated common win-based look-ahead presentation form, the dedicated common win-based look-ahead presentation form can be changed to the jackpot-based look-ahead presentation form and the time-saving winning look-ahead presentation form. It is possible to make the player find it interesting to see how the game will change, and it is possible to increase interest.

[1-11. Signals output to outside the device]
Next, a signal output from the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) to the outside of the first pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6), an island computer (not shown) provided on each island) will be described. Note that, in this embodiment, a signal output to the outside of the first pachinko game machine will be described, but it is also possible to input a signal from outside the first pachinko game machine.

In this embodiment, the external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. The signals output from each CH of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are, for example, various signals such as "prize ball information 1," "door/frame open," "external information 1" to "external information 8," "prize ball information 2," and "security." However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine are not limited to these, and there may be other signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, or the machine may be configured so that none of these signals are output.

Figure 65 is a table showing an example of the output conditions for signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine. As shown in Figure 65, a "prize ball information 1" signal is output from CN1, a "door/frame open" signal is output from CH2, signals for "external information 1" to "external information 8" are output from CH3 to CH10 respectively, a "prize ball information 2" signal is output from CH11, and a "security" signal is output from CH12. The output conditions for signals from the first pachinko gaming machine to the outside of the machine are as shown in Figure 65.

Next, an example of a timing chart of signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained using the "prize ball information 1" signal as an example. As shown in FIG. 65, in this embodiment, the "prize ball information 1" signal is output for 120 msec every time 10 prize balls are paid out.

FIG. 66 is an example of a timing chart of the "prize ball information 1" signal among the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 66, the payout detection switch (not shown) turns from off to on each time a prize ball is paid out. As described above, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the large prize opening 131 (see FIG. 4), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out, when a game ball enters a start opening (first start opening 120 or second start opening 140 (both see FIG. 4)), for example, 3 prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball enters the general prize opening 122 (see FIG. 4), for example, 4 prize balls are paid out.

Then, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) outputs the signal "prize ball information 1" to the outside of the first pachinko game machine for, for example, 120 msec each time 10 prize balls are paid out. More specifically, the main CPU 201 outputs the signal "prize ball information 1" for, for example, 120 msec, at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on, starting from the previous output of the signal "prize ball information 1". Note that outputting the signal "prize ball information 1" at the timing when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on is merely an example, and it may be any time between when the payout detection switch for the 10th prize ball is turned on and when it is turned off. Also, outputting the signal "prize ball information 1" each time 10 prize balls are paid out or for 120 msec is merely an example, and the output timing and output time of the signal "prize ball information 1" can be set appropriately.

Next, an example of a "security" signal, which is one of the signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine, will be explained. The "security" signal is a signal that is output mainly when an error occurs.

Figure 67 is a table showing an example of an overview of errors in the first pachinko gaming machine, and more specifically, for each error name, the table shows the trigger for the error in the main control circuit 200, the trigger for the error to be released in the main control circuit 200 (see Figure 6), the output time of the "security" signal (shown as "security signal" in Figure 67), and any notes.

Note that the first pachinko game machine does not have a large prize opening for small wins, but for the sake of convenience, Figure 67 also describes an abnormal prize winning error at the large prize opening for small wins. Also, in Figure 67, the large prize opening 131 is described as a large prize opening for big wins.

Note that the outline of errors shown in FIG. 67 is just an example, and only some of them may be determined to be errors, or, for example, those not shown in FIG. 67 may be determined to be errors. You can do it like this. Things that are not shown in FIG. 67 but are determined to be errors include, for example, a solenoid monitoring sensor error when a solenoid monitoring sensor (not shown) is on or off for a predetermined period of time or more, If there is a game ball that has not been ejected inside the winning hole or the big winning hole for small winnings, or if there is a prize in the big winning hole when the big winning hole is not open, the abnormal error in entering and discharging the big winning hole, the vibration sensor will be activated for a predetermined period of time. This corresponds to a vibration sensor error when the sensor is on for a long time. Also, for example, if a specific area is provided in the jackpot jackpot, and the probability change control is executed after the jackpot game control ends based on the game ball passing through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control. In addition, abnormality in passing to a specific area, or when a game ball passes through a specific area even though there are no unejected game balls inside the jackpot jackpot, will be judged as an error. It is preferable to configure this.

When the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an error has occurred, it sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub-CPU 301 (see FIG. 6). The sub-CPU 301, which receives the fraud detection-related command, executes notification control according to the content of the error.

The control by the main CPU 201 and the sub CPU 301 (both shown in FIG. 6) will be briefly described below, taking as an example a case where a jackpot abnormal prize winning error occurs.

As shown in FIG. 67, for example, after the initial power is turned on, if one winning is detected before the first big win opening is opened, the main CPU 201 (see FIG. 6) determines that an abnormal winning error has occurred at the big win opening, and outputs a "security" signal for 12 seconds. It also sends a fraud detection-related command to the sub-CPU 301 (see FIG. 6) indicating that an abnormal winning error has occurred at the big win opening.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 67, the output time of the "security" signal is 12 seconds regardless of the type of error, so that an external device (e.g., hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or island computer (not shown)) can know that an error has occurred by receiving the "security" signal, but cannot know the content of the error. However, this is not limited to the above, and for example, the output time of the "security" signal may be changed depending on the content of the error, so that an external device that receives the "security" signal can know the content of the error.

When the sub-CPU 301 (see Figure 6) receives a fraud detection-related command indicating, for example, an abnormal winning error at the large winning port for a jackpot, it executes all or part of the notification control shown below, and when, for example, 30 seconds have elapsed since receiving the fraud detection-related command, it terminates the notification control shown below.
Notification control for displaying, for example, the text "Abnormal winning error at large prize port" on the display device 7 (see, for example, FIG. 6) via the display control circuit 304.
- Notification control to output a voice such as "There is an abnormal winning error at the large prize port" from the speaker 32 (see, for example, Figure 6) via the voice control circuit 305.
Notification control for outputting, for example, a beep from the speaker 32 via the voice control circuit 305.
Notification control for lighting up all of the LEDs 46 (see FIG. 6, for example) in red via the LED control circuit 306.

Note that if there is a power outage before, for example, 30 seconds have passed since receiving the fraud detection related command, the sub CPU 301 ends the above-mentioned notification control.

In addition, for example, if the sub-CPU 301 receives a fraud detection-related command indicating an abnormal winning error at the large jackpot winning port while executing the above-mentioned notification control indicating the occurrence of an abnormal winning error at the large jackpot winning port, it will re-execute the above-mentioned notification control.

Next, signals output to the outside of the first pachinko gaming machine according to the gaming state will be explained with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a table showing an example of output conditions for signals output outside the machine according to the gaming state in the first pachinko gaming machine. In FIG. 68, signals that are output are indicated by ◯, and signals that are not output are indicated by ×.

As shown in FIG. 68, in this embodiment, the output signals differ depending on the state of the game controlled by the main CPU 201. For example, during the normal gaming state (other than jackpot/small winning, other than variable probability/time saving), no signal is output, and during the low probability time saving gaming state (other than jackpot, other than small winning), "External information 3" is output. ” and “external information 7” are output, and during high-accuracy time-saving gaming states (other than jackpots and small wins), “external information 3,” “external information 5,” and “external information 7” signals are output. Output. In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state, signals of "external information 3" and "external information 6" are output during the high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state (other than during jackpots and small wins). be done.

In this way, by outputting different signals according to the game status controlled by the main CPU 201, devices outside the machine that can receive the signals (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) can grasp the game status of the pachinko game machine that is the source of the external information.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the signal output during the small win game control process (during the normal game state) is It is the same as the signal output to the Similarly, the signal output during the small hit game control process (during the low probability time saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the low probability time saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot, other than the small winning), The signal that is output during the small winning game control process (during the high accuracy time saving game state) is the same as the signal that is output during the high accuracy time saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot, other than during the small winning), The signal output during the control process (during the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state) is the same as the signal output during the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state (other than during the jackpot or small win). In other words, a device outside the machine that can receive the signal (for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 6) or the island computer (not shown)) is used to control the execution of the small winning game control process in the pachinko machine that is the source of the external information. It is not possible to determine whether the However, instead of this, by making the signal that is output during the small winning game control process different from the signal that is output when the small winning game control process is not in progress, the small winning pachinko game machine that is the source of the external information can be It may be possible to determine whether or not the game control process is being executed by an external device that can receive the signal.

In addition, during the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. (during the time-saving game state) and during the small hit game control process (during the high-accuracy time-saving game state) are signals that are output during the execution of the time-saving control. In this case, time saving control may be in progress when both electric support control and special figure shortening control are being executed, or it may be the case that only electric support control is being executed among electric support control and special figure shortening control. The time saving control may be in progress when the time saving control is executed, or the time saving control may be in progress when only the special figure shortening control among the electric support control and the special figure shortening control is being executed.

In addition, in the above description of the first pachinko gaming machine, it is assumed that the main CPU can control the time-shortened game state A, the time-shortened game state B, and the time-shortened game state C (the time-shortened game state function A, the time-shortened game state function B, and the time-shortened game state function C are installed), but this is not limited to the above. For example, the pachinko gaming machine may be equipped with only one of the time-shortened game state functions A, B, and C, and not equipped with the other functions (for example, the time-shortened game state function B and the time-shortened game state function C). Also, the pachinko gaming machine may be equipped with only two of the functions of the time-saving play state A, the time-saving play state B, and the time-saving play state C (for example, the time-saving play state A function and the time-saving play state B or the time-saving play state C function), and not equipped with the other functions (for example, the time-saving play state B or the time-saving play state C function).

In addition, for example, in pachinko gaming machines called ST machines, where the probability of ...

[2. The second pachinko game machine]
Next, the second pachinko game machine will be described. As mentioned above, the second pachinko game machine is a so-called type one pachinko game machine called digital pachinko. However, the second pachinko game machine is different from the first pachinko game machine in that the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be displayed in parallel. Therefore, the game board unit and the electrical configuration are also different from the first pachinko game machine.

In the following description of the second pachinko gaming machine, we will omit as much as possible the description of the functions, shapes, and positions that are common to the first pachinko gaming machine, such as the basic configuration of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, and the signals output from the external terminal board 1184 (see FIG. 70 described below) to the outside of the second pachinko gaming machine (for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 described below) and the island computers (not shown) installed on each island).

In addition, when describing the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko gaming machine, using the same reference numbers and step numbers as the first pachinko gaming machine. However, when describing the configuration with reference to new drawings adopted in the description of the second pachinko gaming machine, the configuration will be described with reference to different reference numbers and step numbers than the first pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration has functions and the like in common with the first pachinko gaming machine.

By the way, as a pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are suspended, for example, A pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "priority variable machine") in which the starting condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the starting condition of the first special symbol, and the first starting hole and the second starting hole. There is a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "sequential variable machine") in which a starting condition is established in the order of winnings.

[2-1. Game board unit]
FIG. 69 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 1010 included in the second pachinko game machine. As shown in FIG. 69, a game area 1105 is formed in the game board unit 1010.

Note that the various components (e.g., first starting hole 1120, etc.) arranged in the play area 1105 of the second pachinko gaming machine share some in common with the various components arranged in the play area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine (see Figure 4), but will be explained in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 69, the game board unit 1010 mainly includes a game panel 1100 in which a game area 1105 is formed in which the launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 1110, a center role 1115 located approximately in the center of the game area 1105, a first start port 1120, a general winning port 1122, a passing gate unit 1125, a special electric role unit 1130, a second start port 1140A, 1140B, a normal electric role unit 1145, a small win unit 1150, an LED unit 1160, an outlet 1178, and a back unit (not shown) located behind the game board unit 1010. Note that the LED unit 1160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description of the LED unit 1160 of the second pachinko game machine will be omitted.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference numeral) is formed in the game panel 1100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 1007. Further, on the front side of the game panel 1100, a guide rail 1110 is provided and game nails (no reference numerals) etc. are planted. The game ball fired from the firing device 6 (see FIGS. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 1110 toward the game area 1105, collides with a game nail, etc., and changes its direction of travel while heading downwards in the game area 1105. It flows down.

In addition, a back unit (not shown) with decorative bodies is disposed behind the gaming panel 1100 to enhance the presentation effect. The gaming panel 1100 is made of transparent resin so that the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front. In this case, the entire gaming panel 1100 may be made of transparent materials, or, for example, only the parts where the decorative bodies on the back unit can be seen when viewed from the front may be made of transparent materials. In addition, the gaming panel 1100 may be made of materials that do not have transparent parts (for example, wood), and transparent materials may be provided in some parts to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 1110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are given). The game area 1105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 1110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 1006 (see FIG. 70 described later) to the upper part of the game area 1105.

(Center role)
The center device 1115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (without reference number) of the game panel 1100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 1116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 1105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 1116.

A game ball launched by the launching device 1006 toward the game area 1105 flows down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107. A game ball flowing down the left area 1106 or the right area 1107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 1100. If the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 1106. On the other hand, if the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 1107.

In addition, the center accessory 1115 has a warp entrance 1117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 1106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 1117 is configured to be guided to a stage 1118 formed on the center accessory 1115. The stage 1118 is formed so that the game ball can roll in the left-right direction at the lower front of the display area of the display device 1007. Note that the stage 1118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 1119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 1118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 1119 are configured to be released directly above the first start opening 1120. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 1119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start opening 1120 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 1117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 1117 but do not enter the chance entrance 1119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 1120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 1007, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 1120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later). It is also possible that a game ball hit from the right can win in the first starting hole 1120. Also, instead of or in addition to the first starting hole 1120 described above, a first starting hole that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win) may be provided.

When winning (passage) of a game ball to the first starting port 1120 is detected by the first starting port switch 1121 (see FIG. 70 described later), starting information of the first special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided to the first special symbol hit determination process when the starting condition is satisfied. When game balls enter the first starting port 1120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the first starting port 1120 is not limited to this.

(General Prize Winners)
The general winning openings 1122 are arranged in a plurality of locations on the lower left side of the display area of the display device 1007, and are arranged so that game balls hit from the left can win (game balls hit from the right have difficulty or no chance of winning). When a game ball wins in a general winning opening 1122, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 1123 (see FIG. 70 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 1122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 1122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning hole 1122 is arranged so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the right to win a prize, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of the general winning hole 1122 described above, Alternatively, in addition, a general winning hole may be provided in which a right-handed game ball can win.

(Passing gate unit)
The pass gate unit 1125 is located in the right area 1107 and is a unit that integrates a pass gate 1126 that is configured to allow almost all game balls hit to the right to pass through, and a pass gate switch 1127 (see Figure 70 described below) that detects the passage of the game ball through the pass gate 1126.

When the passing gate switch 1127 detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 1126, the start information of the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information of the normal pattern is reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, up to four). The reserved start information of the normal pattern is used for the winning determination process of the normal pattern. Note that even if the passing gate switch 1127 detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 1126, no prize balls are paid out. The passing gate unit 1125 may be arranged in the left area 1106 instead of or in addition to the right area 1107.

Further, the passage gate 1126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous activation device. That is, the condition for transitioning from a non-jackpot gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) to a jackpot gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device operate, but the stop display mode that indicates a jackpot When (symbol combination) is derived, it is possible to operate the condition device but not to operate the accessory continuous operation device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated when the game ball passes through the passage gate 1126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 1127 (see FIG. 70 described later). It may be activated to shift to a jackpot game state.

(Special electric accessory unit)
The special electric accessory unit 1130 includes a jackpot jackpot 1131, a jackpot jackpot count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described later) that detects winning (passage) of a game ball to the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131. , special electric accessories 1133 are integrated. The special electric accessory unit 1130 is arranged below the passage gate unit 1125 in the right side area 1107.

The jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 described above, a jackpot jackpot jackpot that can win a game ball hit to the left may be arranged, or a center accessory 1115 A jackpot prize opening for a jackpot in which a game ball can be won may be arranged in the upper part of the game machine.

The big jackpot winning opening 1131 is an opening that is opened to allow a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) to enter (pass through) when the machine is controlled to a big jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. When the big jackpot winning opening count switch 1132 (see FIG. 70 described below) detects the entry of a game ball into the big jackpot winning opening 1131, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the big jackpot winning opening 1131 is not limited to 10.

The special electric accessory 1133 includes a special electric shutter 1134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 1135 that operates the special electric shutter 1134 (see FIG. 70 described later). The special electric accessory 1133, that is, the special electric shutter 1134, is in an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131, and in an open state that allows the game ball to enter (pass through) the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131. ) is impossible or difficult, and the state is configured to be transitionable. The state transition of the jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131 from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. That is, in the jackpot game state, a large amount of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing a round game over multiple rounds in which the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 shifts from a closed state to an open state over a predetermined period of time. It is in a gaming state.

(Second starting hole)
In this embodiment, the second starting holes 1140A and 1140B are arranged in the game area 1105 as the second starting holes, and both of these second starting holes 1140A and 1140B are designed so that a game ball hit to the right can win (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win). However, this is not limited to this, and a game ball hit to the left may be able to win the second starting hole 1140A and/or the second starting hole 1140B.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141A (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, it is detected by the second starting port switch 1141B (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). Even if the game ball lands in either of the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B, it becomes a trigger for the second special symbol hit determination process.

When the second starting port switches 1141A, 1141B (see FIG. 70 described later) detect winning (passage) of the game ball to the second starting ports 1140A, 1140B, starting information of the second special symbol is extracted. A predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4 pieces) of start information that has been set is retained. The suspended starting information is provided to the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second starting port 1140B, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is not limited to this.

By the way, in this embodiment, on the downstream side as the flowing direction of the game ball that was hit to the right but did not enter the jackpot jackpot prize opening 1131, there are two vertically flowing paths 1107a and 1107b as the flowing path of the game ball. is formed. A game ball that is hit to the right and flows further downstream without entering the jackpot jackpot 1131 is sent to the upper flow path 1107a or the lower flow path 1107b by the branch nail 1108 shown in FIG. 69, for example. Can be sorted.

The second starting port 1140A is arranged so that game balls distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win prizes, and most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a can win prizes. However, it is not essential that most of the game balls flowing down the upper flow route 1107a land in the second starting port 1140A. Alternatively, it may be configured such that a prize can be won with a predetermined expected value (for example, approximately 1/3 to 1/5) of the game balls flowing down the upper flow path 1107a. In addition, the game balls that flowed down the upper flow path 1107a but did not enter the second starting port 1140A are configured to be discharged from the machine through the out port 1178.

The second starting hole 1140B is positioned so that the game balls distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can enter, but details will be given later in the explanation of the normal electric role unit 1145.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 1145 is arranged on the downward flow path 1107b side, and has a prize opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball wins (passes through), and a prize mouth to this prize mouth. It is a unit body that integrates a switch that detects winning of game balls and a normal electric accessory 1146. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 1140B, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 1141B. However, it is not essential that the above-mentioned winning opening be the second starting opening 1140B, and for example, the first starting opening may be the above-mentioned winning opening.

The normal electric device 1146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 1147 that can move back and forth, and a normal power solenoid 1148 (see FIG. 70 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 1147. The normal electric device 1146, i.e., the normal power shutter 1147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting hole 1140B, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 1140B. Note that instead of the above-mentioned normal power shutter 1147 that can move back and forth, a movable member made of, for example, a blade member, known as a so-called electric tulip, may be used. The movable member may also be a blade type, a door type, a protruding plate type, or the like.

(Small winning unit)
The small winning unit 1150 includes a small winning large winning opening 1151 and a small winning large winning opening count switch 1152 that detects winning (passing) of a game ball to the small winning large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 70 described later). It is a unit body that integrates a small hit shutter 1153 that can move forward and backward in the front and back direction, and a small hit solenoid 1154 that can operate this small hit shutter 1153.

By moving the small win shutter 1153 back and forth in the front and back direction, the small win shutter 1153 has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the small win large win opening 1151 and a game ball can enter the small win large win opening 1151. It is configured to be able to transition to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter a prize.

When a game ball wins when the small winning large winning opening 1151 is opened, the winning game ball is detected by the small winning large winning opening count switch 1152 (see FIG. 70, which will be described later). When a game ball is detected by the small winning big prize opening count switch 1152, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the small winning jackpot 1151 is not limited to ten.

Further, the small winning unit 1150 is arranged on the downstream side of the normal electric accessories unit 1145 in the lower flow path 1107b. Therefore, when the second starting port 1140B is opened by the operation of the normal electric accessory 1146, even if the small winning large prize opening 1151 is opened, the game ball flowing down the downward flow path 1107b is small. Before reaching the large winning opening 1151, the player enters the second starting opening 1140B provided on the upstream side, so it becomes difficult (or impossible) to win the small winning opening 1151.

In addition, in this embodiment, the big winning opening for jackpot 1131 and the big winning opening for small winning 1151 are provided separately, but the invention is not limited to this, and the big winning opening that is opened when the jackpot game control process is executed, The big winning hole opened at the time of execution of the small winning game control process may be the same big winning hole.

(Out port)
The out port 1178 is any of the various winning ports (for example, the first starting port 1120, the second starting port 1140A, 1140B, the jackpot jackpot 1131, the general winning port 1122, etc.) that are fired toward the gaming area 1105. This is to eject out of the machine any game balls that did not win. This out port 1178 is provided at the most downstream side of the gaming area 1105 so that both left-handed game balls and right-handed game balls can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 1178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, such as between the plurality of general winning openings 1122 or between the ordinary electric accessory unit 1145 and the small winning unit 1150, etc. The game balls flowing down the area 1105 may be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) has a decorative body, and is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100, as described above. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 1058 such as movable accessories controlled by a sub-control circuit 1300 (see FIG. 70 described later). The performance accessory group 1058 is arranged, for example, around the display area of the display device 1007. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 1058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[2-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 70 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the second pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the second pachinko game machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko game machine, they will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 70, the second pachinko gaming machine mainly includes a main control circuit 1200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 1300 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game, and a payout/launch. It is composed of a control circuit 1400 and a power supply circuit 1450.

[2-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 1200 controls, for example, processing executed when the power is turned on, processing related to gaming operations, etc., and includes a main CPU 1201, a main ROM 1202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 1203 (readable/writable memory), and an initial reset. It includes a circuit 1204, a backup capacitor 1207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 1202, a main RAM 1203, an initial reset circuit 1204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 1201. The main CPU 1201 has a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 1202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the second pachinko gaming machine by the main CPU 1201, various tables, etc. The main CPU 1201 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the main ROM 1202.

The main RAM 1203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for proceeding with the game. The main RAM 1203 serves as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 1201 and has a function of storing values of various flags and variables. Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 1201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 1204 monitors the main CPU 1201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 1207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 1203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 includes an I/O port 1205 that is connected to enable communication with various devices, and a command output port 1206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 1300 so as to output various commands. Also equipped.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 1200. For example, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to the normal symbol display unit 1161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 1162, the first special symbol display unit 1163, the second special symbol display unit 1164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 1165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 1166, the sure-change notification display unit 1167, the time-saving notification display unit 1168, the normal power solenoid 1148, the special power solenoid 1135, and the small win solenoid 1154. In addition to these, the main control circuit 1200 is also connected to the performance display monitor 1170 and the error notification monitor 1172. The main control circuit 1200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 1205.

The performance display monitor 1170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc., which will be described later, under the control of the main CPU 1201. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of game balls paid out in a game state other than the jackpot game state with respect to the firing of a predetermined number (for example, 60,000 game balls), and is also called a base value.

The error notification monitor 1172 displays an error code. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 1172 can also display a setting change code indicating that a setting change process is in progress, a setting confirmation code indicating that a setting confirmation process is in progress, etc., for example, in a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function described below. Note that the setting change code may be configured to display a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that a setting change is in progress).

In addition, the main control circuit 1200 includes a first starting port switch 1121, a second starting port switch 1141A, 1141B, a passing gate switch 1127, a big winning port count switch 1132 for jackpots, a general winning port switch 1123, and a large winning port switch for small winnings. A mouth count switch 1152 and the like are also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is output to main control circuit 1200 via I/O port 1205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 1200 is connected to a calling device (not shown) having functions such as calling a hall attendant and displaying the number of jackpots, an external terminal board 1184 used to send data to a hall computer 1186 that manages the pachinko machines in the hall, a setting key 1174 that is operated to change or check the setting value in the case of a pachinko machine with a setting function described later, and a backup clear switch 1176 that can clear the backup data stored in the main RAM 1203 in response to the operation of the gaming center manager. In this embodiment, the backup clear switch 1176 also serves as a switch for changing the setting value described later, but is not limited to this, and a setting switch for changing the setting value may also be provided.

The setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are preferably housed in a specified case so that they cannot be easily touched by third parties (e.g., players) other than the arcade manager. "Inside a specified case" includes not only a case in which the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 cannot be touched unless the case is opened, but also a case in which notches are provided only at the locations corresponding to the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176, so that the arcade manager can touch the setting key 1174 and/or the backup clear switch 1176 when the pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key managed by the arcade manager to expose the back.

Note that in this embodiment, the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176 are connected to the main control circuit 1200, but are not limited to this; It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent third parties other than the gaming parlor administrator from easily accessing the setting key 1174 and the backup clear switch 1176.

[2-2-2. Sub control circuit]
The sub control circuit 1300 includes a sub CPU 1301, a program ROM 1302, a work RAM 1303, a display control circuit 1304, an audio control circuit 1305, an LED control circuit 1306, an accessory control circuit 1307, a command input port 1308, and the like. The sub control circuit 1300 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in accordance with commands from the main control circuit 1200. Although not shown in FIG. 70, the sub-control circuit 1300 is also connected to an effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player.

The program ROM 1302 stores programs for controlling the game performance of the second pachinko game machine by the sub CPU 1301, various tables, and the like. The sub CPU 1301 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the program ROM 1302. In particular, the sub CPU 1301 performs control related to game performance according to various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 1200.

The work RAM 1303 has a function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 1301.

The display control circuit 1304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 1007. The display control circuit 1304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A that converts image data into an image signal. Equipped with converter etc.

The display control circuit 1304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 1301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 1007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 1304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 1007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 1007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 1007. In this way, the display control circuit 1304 can control the display device 1007 to display an image related to the game.

The audio control circuit 1305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 1032. The audio control circuit 1305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound output from the speaker 1032. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command from the sub CPU 1301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP is for amplifying signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 1032.

The LED control circuit 1306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 1046, which includes decorative LEDs. The LED control circuit 1306 includes a drive circuit for supplying LED control signals, a decoration data ROM in which multiple types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 1307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each accessory (for example, one or more of the accessory objects in the performance accessory group 1058). The accessory control circuit 1307 includes a drive circuit for supplying drive signals to each accessory, a lighting circuit for supplying lighting control signals, and an accessory data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored. Equipped with etc.

Furthermore, the accessory control circuit 1307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory operation command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 1301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 1308 is connected to command output port 1206 and receives various commands sent from main control circuit 1200.

The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls, and is connected to a payout device 1082 capable of paying out game balls, a launch device 1006 capable of launching game balls, a card unit 1180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 1400 receives a prize ball control command sent from the main control circuit 1200, it sends a predetermined signal to the payout device 1082 and controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls.

The card unit 1180 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 1182. The ball lending operation panel 1182 is provided with a ball lending button for receiving a ball lending, and a loan/return button for receiving the return of a ball lending card on which cache data is stored (neither is shown). For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a loan ball control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 1180. The payout/launch control circuit 1400 controls the payout device 1082 to pay out game balls based on the loan ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 1180. The operation panel 1182 is often provided on the pachinko game machine side, but may be provided on the card unit 1180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 1400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation), and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 1450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage necessary for playing the game to the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.

A power switch 1095 and the like are connected to the power supply circuit 1450. The power switch 1095 is turned on to supply the necessary power to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 1200, the sub-control circuit 1300, the payout/launch control circuit 1400, etc.).

[2-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 71 to 75. The second pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

In the second pachinko gaming machine, there is a normal gaming state in which neither probability variable control nor time-saving control is executed, a high-precision time-saving gaming state in which both probability variable control and time-saving control are executed, and a probability-variable control but time-saving control is executed. There are a high probability non-time saving gaming state in which the game is not executed, and a low probability time saving gaming state in which the probability change control is not executed but the time saving control is executed. It is now possible to proceed. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 1201 is not limited to this, and any gaming state among the normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy time-saving gaming state can be progressed. You may choose not to do so. For example, the game may be made to proceed in any one of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the game may be prevented from proceeding in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. good.

In this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal game mode in the normal gaming state, and right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The sub CPU 1301 executes control to display a normal game mode (for example, whether to play right or left) in the display area of the display device 1007, for example.

[2-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 71 shows an example of a special symbol winning determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table referenced in the hit determination process for the special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78 described later), that is, a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "time-saving hit", "small hit", "big hit" or "miss" is a hit based on a random number value for big hit determination extracted when a game ball enters the first start hole 1120 or the second start hole 1140A, 1140B. In this embodiment, the objects of the lottery in the hit determination process for the first special symbol are a "time-saving hit", a "big hit", and a "miss", and a "small hit" is not included in the objects of the lottery. In contrast, the objects of the lottery in the hit determination process for the second special symbol are a "time-saving hit", a "small hit", a "big hit", and a "miss". However, a "small hit" may be included in the objects of the lottery in the hit determination process for the first special symbol.

The random number value for jackpot determination is a random number value used for the special symbol hit determination process, as described above. In this embodiment, the random number value for jackpot determination is extracted from 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 determines "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "loss" based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination in the first special symbol hit determination process. The hit determination table of the first special symbol includes the range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined as "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value for each value of the probability variable flag (0 or 1). Relationship with data, relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" and the corresponding jackpot determination value data, and range of random numbers for jackpot determination determined as a "loss" (width) and the corresponding loss determination value data is defined.

In addition, in the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result is a "time-saving hit", "small hit", "big hit", or "miss" based on the extracted random number value for determining a big hit. In the hit determination table for the second special symbol, for each value of the probability change flag (0 or 1), the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "time-saving hit" and the corresponding time-saving hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "small hit" and the corresponding small hit determination value data, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "big hit" and the corresponding big hit determination value data, and the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a big hit determined as a "miss" and the corresponding miss determination value data are specified.

In this embodiment, for example, if the probability of a win flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for determining a jackpot is any value between 0 and 408, the main CPU 1201 determines that there is a "time-saving hit" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." Also, if the probability of a win flag is off during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for determining a jackpot is any value between 409 and 613, the main CPU 1201 determines that there is a "jackpot" and determines the hit/loss determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." Also, if the extracted random number value for determining a jackpot is any value between 614 and 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that there is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

For example, if the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any of 0 to 408, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and determines the determination value data as "time-saving hit determination value data." If the probability variable flag is on during the hit determination process for the first special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any of 409 to 1259, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines the determination value data as "jackpot determination value data." If the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is any of 1260 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "miss" and determines the determination value data as "miss determination value data."

Similarly, for example, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". The judgment value data is determined as "time saving judgment value data". In addition, when the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit", The judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 22118 to 22322, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 22323 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines The value data is determined as "loss determination value data."

Further, for example, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is between 0 and 272, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "time-saving hit". Then, the judgment value data is determined to be "time saving judgment value data". In addition, when the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 273 to 22117, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "small hit", The judgment value data is determined as "small hit judgment value data". In addition, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 22118 to 22968, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "jackpot" and determines The value data is determined as "jackpot determination value data". Furthermore, if the probability change flag is on during the hit determination process of the second special symbol and the extracted random number value for jackpot determination is one of 22969 to 65535, the main CPU 1201 determines that it is a "loss" and determines The value data is determined as "loss determination value data."

In this way, in this embodiment, of the random number values for determining a jackpot that are generated in the range of 0 to 65535, for example, a predetermined range from 0 (for example, 0 to 22117 in the hit determination process for the second special symbol) is assigned to other determination value data (for example, time-saving hit determination value data and small hit determination value data) excluding the jackpot determination value data and miss determination value data. In addition, the end of the predetermined value (for example, 22323 to 65535 if the special bonus flag is off during the hit determination process for the second special symbol) is assigned to miss determination value data. Furthermore, the jackpot determination value data and miss determination value data are assigned adjacent to each other. By doing this, for example, when the probability change flag changes from OFF to ON (or ON to OFF), it is possible to change the probability of a jackpot without changing the width of other judgment value data (for example, time-saving hit judgment value data and small hit judgment value data) by simply narrowing (or widening) the width of the miss judgment value data by the same amount that the width of the jackpot judgment value data is widened (or narrowed).

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed is made different from the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, thereby adding variety to the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 71, the probability of winning a "time-saving hit" when the first special symbol's hit determination process is performed is compared to the "time-saving win" chance when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed. By making the winning probability higher than the winning probability of ``, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the normal game state, which tends to become a monotonous game.

However, the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed may be made higher than the probability of winning the "time-saving hit" when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed. In this case, for example, by overlapping the time-saving play state when a "time-saving hit" is won during a time-saving play state, if a "time-saving hit" is won just before the end of the time-saving play state, the time-saving play state is effectively extended, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

As shown in FIG. 71, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 can determine that the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit" whether the special-hit flag is on or off. However, when the special-hit flag is off (normal game state, time-shortened game state), the main CPU 1201 controls the game to the time-shortened game state if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit", but when the special-hit flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control the game to the time-shortened game state even if the result of the hit determination process is a "time-shortened hit".

[2-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 72 shows an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 provided in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stopping symbols based on the symbol random number of the special symbol extracted when a game ball enters the first starting hole 1120 or the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B and the winning/losing judgment value data mentioned above. This table is referred to when selecting the "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" that determine the symbol (that is, when executing the special symbol determination process of S1035 in FIG. 78, which will be described later). The "selected symbol command" is a command for specifying a symbol determined according to the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for specifying the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a command for specifying. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 72, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201, for example, sends the selection symbol command and symbol designation command as follows. Select as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 69, the main CPU 1201 selects "z0" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 70 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z1" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the first special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 1201 selects a selection symbol command and a symbol designation command, for example, as follows. That is, when the symbol random value of the first special symbol is 0 or 1, the main CPU 1201 selects "z3" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 2 to 9, the main CPU 1201 selects "z4" as the selection symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 10 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z5" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z6" as the selection symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the first special symbol, for example, even if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Further, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, 0 to 96, the main CPU 1201 selects "z8" as the selection symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is, for example, one of 97 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z9" as the selection symbol command and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, regardless of the symbol random number value of the special symbol being between 0 and 99, the main CPU 1201 executes the selected symbol command ``z10'' is selected as the symbol designation command, and ``zA8'' is selected as the symbol designation command.

When small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the main CPU 1201 executes small win game control processing. In the small win game control processing, for example, the small win shutter 1153 (see FIG. 69) is operated to execute control so that the small win large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is opened so that the game ball can enter (pass through) the small win large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) or can be easily opened, and the prize ball can be paid out.

Further, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, for example, the selection symbol command and symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 0 to 29, the main CPU 1201 selects "z11" as the selection symbol command and "zA9" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 30 to 59, the main CPU 1201 selects "z12" as the selection symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z13" as the selection symbol command and "zA10" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when loss determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning determination process for the second special symbol, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected, for example, as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 1201 selects "z14" as the selected symbol command and "zA11" as the symbol designation command.

In this example, the win/loss judgment value data is determined based on the extracted random value for jackpot judgment with reference to the special symbol hit judgment table (see Figure 71), and then the special symbol judgment table (see Figure 71) is determined. 72), the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the winning or losing of the special symbol, the selection symbol command, and the symbol designation command may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value of the special symbol.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine will not be described, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is output to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164 (see FIG. 70) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, in response to a selection symbol command. In addition, the special symbol display units 1163 and 1164 derive the display mode of a time-saving hit, a big hit, a small hit, or a miss based on the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 1302 of the sub-control circuit 1300.

[2-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 73 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table is used when determining the winning gaming state and/or the subsequent gaming state (in other words, the following (When executing the hit type determination process in S1036 of FIG. 78). The form of the winning game state shown in FIG. 73 indicates the form of the jackpot gaming state or the form of the small winning gaming state. Further, the mode of the subsequent gaming state indicates the mode of the gaming state after the end of the winning gaming state. However, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the C time-saving gaming state is controlled without being controlled to the winning gaming state, so the subsequent gaming state will be the C-time saving gaming state. Indicates the mode.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the mode of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0," the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 10. When the selected symbol command is "z1" or "z8," the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 50. When the selected symbol command is "z2" or "z9," the main CPU 1201 decides to set only the time-saving flag of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to on, and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 100. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the above-mentioned time-saving hit to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then sets the time-saving flag on and the determined number of time-saving times without controlling to the big hit game state, and can control to the C time-saving game state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the game is not controlled to the hit game state, so the mode of the hit game state is not determined. In this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit", the number of time-saving times set is the same regardless of the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of time-saving times set may be different depending on the game state when the special symbol hit determination process is performed.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the number of time-saving turns that is set varies depending on the selected symbol command that is determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol. By doing this, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," it is possible to provide variety to the progress of the game thereafter, and to prevent a decline in interest.

By the way, as described above, when the probability change flag is on, the main CPU 1201 does not control to the time-saving gaming state even if the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". For example, even if the probability change flag is on (high probability gaming state), the main CPU 1201 performs a "time-saving winning" lottery as shown in FIG. 72, and the result of the winning determination process is "time-saving winning". In this case, although the display mode of the time-saving win indicating that the "time-saving win" has been won is derived to the special symbol display sections 1163 and 1164, it is not controlled to the C time-saving game state. In addition, the main CPU 1201 performs a "time-saving win" lottery even if the probability change flag is on, and if the result of the win determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes the display mode of the loss to a special symbol. The information may be displayed on the display sections 1163 and 1164. Furthermore, when the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving hit judgment value data may not be assigned to the random value for jackpot judgment, that is, the winning judgment process may be performed in which the "time-saving win" is not included in the lottery result. .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the probability change flag is on, it is configured not to shift to the C time-saving gaming state, but it is not limited to this. For example, in a high-probability non-time-saving gaming state where the time-saving flag is off even if the probability change flag is on, if the result of the hit determination process is "time-saving win", the system shifts to the high-probability time-saving gaming state. You can do it like this.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", the mode of the hit game state and the mode of the subsequent game state are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z10", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is opened as one time as the mode of the small hit game state. When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", the main CPU 1201 derives the display mode of the small hit described above to the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then sets the determined number of times the small hit large winning opening 1151 is opened, and the game state can be controlled to a small hit game state. Note that when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "small hit", after the small hit game state ends, the main CPU 1201 does not change either the probability change flag or the time reduction flag, and returns to the game state immediately before being controlled to the small hit game state.

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the form of the winning game state and the form of the subsequent game state are determined as follows.

For example, when the selected symbol command is "z3" or "z11", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds as 10 rounds as the jackpot gaming state, and sets the probability variable flag and time saving as the subsequent gaming state. Among the flags, it is decided to set only the probability variation flag to ON, and it is decided to set the probability variation number to 10,000 times. In this case, the main CPU 1201 can control the above-mentioned jackpot display mode to the first special symbol display section 1163 or the second special symbol display section 1164 and then switch to the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. becomes.

When the selected symbol command is "z4", "z5", or "z12", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds to be 10, 4, or 10, respectively, as the mode of the jackpot game state. In addition, in each case, as the mode of the subsequent game state, it determines to set both the probability change flag and the time-saving flag on, and determines to set both the number of probability change rounds and the number of time-saving rounds to 10,000. In these cases, the main CPU 1201 controls the jackpot game state after deriving the display mode of the jackpot described above to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls it to a jackpot game state, and after the jackpot game state ends, it becomes possible to control it to a high-probability time-saving game state.

In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z6" and when it is "z13", the main CPU 1201 determines the number of rounds as the mode of the jackpot game state to be 4 rounds and 10, respectively. In addition, as the mode of the subsequent game state, in either case, it determines that only the time-saving flag out of the probability change flag and the time-saving flag is set to on. In addition, the number of time-saving times to be set is determined to be set to, for example, 200 times when the selected symbol command is "z6", and to be set to, for example, 300 times when the selected symbol command is "z13". In these cases, the main CPU 1201 controls the display mode of the jackpot game state described above to the first special symbol display unit 1163 or the second special symbol display unit 1164, and then controls it to the jackpot game state, and after the end of this jackpot game state, it can be controlled to the time-saving game state. The time-saving game state controlled here is the A time-saving game state. In addition, the mode of time-saving control in the high-probability time-saving game state (hereinafter also referred to as "time-saving performance") is preferably the same as the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state, but may be different from the time-saving performance in the A time-saving game state.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), the main CPU 1201 does not set either the hit game state or the subsequent game state. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 1201 does not change the game state, but continues to control the previous game state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "lose" (for example, when the selected symbol command is "z7" or "z14"), the aspect of the winning game state and the subsequent Since none of the game state aspects are set, there is no need to show it in the winning type determination table of FIG. 73. However, in this example, in order to clearly indicate that neither the winning game state nor the subsequent game state will be determined if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "loss", the figure is shown for convenience. 73.

In this way, in this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol hit determination table in FIG. Win/loss determination value data is determined based on the random number value for jackpot determination (performing win/loss determination), and a win/loss (“time-saving win,” “small win,” “big hit,” or “loss”) is determined. Thereafter, the main CPU 1201 refers to the special symbol determination table in FIG. A selected symbol command is determined based on the winning/losing determination value data, and the type of display mode (for example, time saving type, jackpot type) derived to the special symbol display sections 1163, 1164 is determined. Note that the above-mentioned winning/losing determination and determination of the selected symbol command are performed at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, but it is excluded that it is performed from the time the variable display of the special symbol begins until the final display. That's not the purpose.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 73, in this embodiment, the number of time saving times in the A time saving gaming state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state is, for example, 200 times (when the selected symbol command is "z6") or 300 times. times (when the selected symbol command is "z13"). On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time saving hit", the number of time saving times in the C time saving game state that is controlled is, for example, 10 times (when the selected symbol command is "z0"), 50 times. times (when the selected symbol command is "z1") or 100 times (when the selected symbol command is "z2"). That is, the expected value of the number of time savings in the A time saving gaming state is higher than the expected value of the number of time saving times in the C time saving gaming state. In this way, by making the time-saving gaming state A more advantageous to the player than the time-saving gaming state C, it is possible to increase the position of the "jackpot". For example, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest that may occur due to winning a "jackpot" but being at a disadvantage compared to not winning a "jackpot" (winning a "time saving"). becomes.

In addition, instead of setting the expected value of the number of working hours in the A time saving game state to be higher than the expected value of the number of working hours in the C working time saving game state, the expected value of the number of working hours in the C working time saving gaming state is set as the expected value of the number of working hours in the A working time saving gaming state. The value may be set higher than the expected value. In this way, by making the time-saving game state C more advantageous for the player than the time-saving game state A, it is possible to increase the positioning of the "time-saving win". For example, even if the state continues for a long period of time without winning a "jackpot", if a "time-saving win" is won, the game is controlled to the relatively advantageous C-time-saving gaming state, thereby suppressing a decline in interest. It becomes possible to do so.

[2-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 74 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a low start of the second pachinko game machine. Further, FIG. 75 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start of the second pachinko game machine. All of these tables are stored in the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 included in the second pachinko gaming machine. Note that the "Remarks" column in FIGS. 74 and 75 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 1201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 1120, and determines the second special pattern when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 1140A, 1140B. Determine the fluctuation pattern of the symbol. The special symbol variation pattern table in FIGS. 74 and 75 is a table that is referred to when executing the special symbol variation pattern determination process in S1037 in FIG. 78, which will be described later.

In normal game mode, where hitting from the left is the normal game mode, the special symbol variation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for low starts shown in FIG. 74, for example.

As shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for low starts in FIG. 74, the main CPU 1201 sets a look-ahead flag when the random number value for effect selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first start hole 1120 is a specific random number value. The sub-CPU 1301, which receives the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 1201, performs a look-ahead effect when the look-ahead flag is set.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 decides whether or not to perform a look-ahead performance, but this is not limited to this, and the sub-CPU 1301 may decide.

On the other hand, in a game state in which right-handed hitting is a regular game mode, that is, a high-accuracy time-saving game state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, or a low-accuracy time-saving game state, a special symbol for a high start shown in FIG. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined with reference to the variation pattern table.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 1201 does not set a look-ahead flag when determining the special symbol variation pattern by referring to the special symbol variation pattern table for high starts, but this is not limited to this.

As shown in Figures 74 and 75, the variation pattern of the special symbols is determined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose), the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value. However, this is not limited to this, and the variation pattern may be determined based on other values instead of or in addition to any of the above.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

When the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start in FIG. 75, the expected number of times the special symbol is variably displayed per unit time is larger than when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start in FIG. 74. In particular, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for an extremely long period of time, for example, approximately 600,000 msec (for example, long fluctuation A to C). On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start, the second special symbol is variably displayed for only an extremely short period of time, for example, 1,000 msec (for example, super-fast fluctuation).

The main CPU 1201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 1301. The sub CPU 1301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 1007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 1032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 1201.

Although not shown in Figures 74 and 75, the variation pattern (variable display time) of the special symbols that are determined may be different for each setting value, for example by changing the range of the random number value for effect selection.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, in the normal game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 74) for low start, and for example, in the high accuracy time saving game state, the high accuracy In the time-saving game state and the low-accuracy time-saving game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high start (see FIG. 75), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a special symbol variation pattern table for a high start, a plurality of variation pattern tables with different expected values of the variable display number of special symbols per unit time may be provided, and the special symbol It is also possible to use different tables to refer to when determining the variation pattern of .

In addition, the time-saving hits A and B shown in the "Notes" column in Figures 74 and 75 indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). This is a reach performance that shows. Similarly, jackpot-related reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reach A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a short-time hit or a jackpot.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine will not be described, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 1202 of the main control circuit 1200 stores a normal symbol winning determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol winning type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19). The main CPU 1201 then determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 1146 (see FIG. 69) in the same way as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operating mode of the normal electric device 1146 based on this.

[2-4. Main control processing]
In the second pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 1201 of the main control circuit 1200 are the same as those executed by the main CPU 1201 except for the special symbol control process executed in S39 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23). Therefore, the special symbol control process will be described below, and the other processes executed by the main CPU 1201 will not be described. Note that the special symbol control process in the second pachinko game machine includes the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine (e.g., the jackpot end process (Figs. 42 and 86)), but the special symbol control process will be described again below, including the same processes as those executed in the first pachinko game machine, with the step numbers changed.

[2-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 76. Fig. 76 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 76, the main CPU 1201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S1001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number indicating the state (status) of the control process regarding the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process in S1001, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 1201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S1001, the main CPU 1201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the working area of each special symbol in the main RAM 1203 in a predetermined register.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 1201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, if the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a demonstration display command for the first special symbol, and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is kept constant. If the value is "0" for more than a certain period of time, a transmission reservation process for a demonstration display command regarding the second special symbol is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 1300 receives a demonstration display command, if the demonstration display command is a demonstration display command of the main special symbol, the sub CPU 1301 performs a demonstration display effect.

Although the second pachinko gaming machine can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 1301 can display either one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol, and the other is used as the secondary special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in a normal game state where left-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode, and a gaming state where right-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state). , high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, low-accuracy time-saving game state), the second special symbol is the main special symbol. Then, the sub CPU 1301 performs variable display of decorative symbols and display effects of characters, etc. for the main special symbols, and audio effects for the main special symbols. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the sub special symbol is a jackpot, for example, the sub special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced. In addition, among the game states in which right-handed hitting is the regular game mode, in the low-accuracy time-saving game state, other effects are used instead of the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main special symbol. An image (for example, a countdown effect of the remaining number of time savers until the end of the time saver game state) may be displayed.

In S1002, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variably displayed based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1001.

If it is determined in S1002 that the second special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S1002), that is, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 executes the process. is moved to S1003. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the second special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S1002.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1002 that it is time for the second special symbol to begin to change display (if S1002 returns YES), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1004.

In S1003, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1003, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1004.

In S1004, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process in S1004, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1005.

In S1005, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1004.

If it is determined in S1005 that it is not the timing to start the variable display of the first special symbol (if S1005 is a NO judgment), that is, if any processing related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1006. For example, if a jackpot game control processing based on the result of the hit determination processing of the first special symbol is being executed, a NO judgment is made in S1005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1005 that it is time for the first special symbol to begin to change display (if S1005 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1007.

In S1006, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1006, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1007.

In S1007, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S1007, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1008.

In S1008, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variable displayed based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S1007.

If it is determined in S1008 that it is not time for the second special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S1008 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1010.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S1008), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1009.

In S1009, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As mentioned above, details of the special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the process in S1009, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1010.

In S1010, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process in S1010, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1011.

In S1011, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S1010.

If it is determined in S1011 that the first special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (NO determination in S1011), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control process and transfers the process to the main control main process (FIGS. 20 to 20). (see 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1011 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (if S1011 returns a YES judgment), that is, if no processing related to the first special symbol has been performed and variable display can begin, the main CPU 1201 transfers processing to S1012.

In S1012, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 77. After executing the processing of S1012, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S1001 to S1012) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

In this way, in this embodiment, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the process related to the second special symbol is executed. is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started, special symbol management processing described below is performed in priority order. is executed.

[2-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1003, S1006, S1009, and S1012 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76) will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

For example, if the special pattern management process is called and executed in S1003 or S1009 during the special pattern control process, the second special pattern is the target of processing, and if the special pattern management process is called and executed in S1006 or S1012 during the special pattern control process, the first special pattern is the target of processing.

The numbers ("0" to "5") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 77 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 1201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S1021).

If it is determined in S1021 that the special symbol waiting time is not 0 (NO in S1021), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S1021), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1022.

In S1022, the main CPU 1201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S1022, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1023. The main CPU 1201 performs the process from S1023 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S1022.

In S1023, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S1023 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 78. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1024.

In S1024, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S1024 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1025.

In S1025, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S1025 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1026.

In S1026, the main CPU 1201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S1026 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1027.

In S1027, the main CPU 1201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S1027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1028.

In S1028, the main CPU 1201 performs a jackpot end process. This S1028 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

After completing the processing of S1023 to S1028, the main CPU 1201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 76). In addition, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to S1004 if the special symbol management process is called in S1003 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S1007 if it is called in S1006, and calls it in S1009. If it has been called, the process returns to S1010, and if it has been called in S1012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[2-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described with reference to Fig. 78. Fig. 78 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the second pachinko game machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S1023 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S1031).

If it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S1031), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S1031 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1032.

In S1032, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special symbol pause flag is off. The special symbol pause flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so that it does not proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S1032, even if S1031 is judged as YES (i.e., even if the start condition of the special symbol is met), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (S1032 is judged as NO), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

If it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol suspension flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO determination in S1032), the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed as described above, and the main CPU 1201 stops the special symbol variable display. Finish the start process. After that, the main CPU 1201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1032 that the special symbol suspension flag is off (YES in S1032), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1033.

In S1033, the main CPU 1201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S1033, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1034.

In S1034, the main CPU 1201 performs a hit determination process for the special symbol. In this process, the hit determination process for the special symbol is performed by referring to the hit determination table for the special symbol (see FIG. 71) and using a random number value for determining whether the special symbol is a big hit. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is determined to be a time-saving hit, a big hit, or a miss, and the second special symbol is determined to be a time-saving hit, a small hit, a big hit, or a miss. In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets the time-saving hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a time-saving hit, sets the small hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a small hit, and sets the big hit flag on when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a big hit. After executing the process of S1034, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1035. The time-saving hit flag is turned off when transitioning to the C time-saving play state, the small hit flag is turned off when the small hit play state begins, and the big hit flag is turned off when the big hit play state begins.

In the above special symbol hit determination process (see S1034), first, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot in this process, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit. If it is determined in this process that it is not a small win, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is a time saving win, and if it is determined in this process that it is not a time saving win, it is determined that it is a loss.

In S1035, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the stopping symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034) (for example, a time-saving hit, a small hit, a big hit, or a miss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 72) is referenced, and the random number value of the special symbol is used to determine the above-mentioned "selection symbol command" or "symbol designation command". In this embodiment, since there is only one type of miss, it is not necessary to determine the stopping symbol when the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, but multiple types of misses may be provided and the stopping symbol may be determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss. After executing the process of S1035, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1036.

In S1036, the main CPU 1201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (time-saving hit, small hit, or jackpot). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S1035) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 73). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but there may be only one type of jackpot, and there may be one type of time-saving winning. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing multiple types of wins, multiple types of other wins (for example, small wins) may be provided, or multiple types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process in S1036, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1037.

In S1037, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol variation pattern determination processing. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 74 and 75) is referred to, and for example, the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S1034), the random number value for reach determination or/and the random number for effect selection. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined according to the numerical value and the like. In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low start (see FIG. 74), In game states where right-handed hitting is a regular game mode (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), a variation pattern table of special symbols for high starts (see FIG. 75) ), the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined. After executing the process in S1037, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1038.

In S1038, the main CPU 1201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see Figures 74 and 75) is referenced, and the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the variation pattern determination process for the special symbol (S1037) is determined as the variation time for the special symbol. After executing the process of S1038, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1039.

In S1039, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S1024 in FIG. 77) is performed. After executing the process of S1039, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1040.

In S1040, the main CPU 1201 executes a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203 is performed. After executing the process of S1040, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1041.

In S1041, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S1041, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1042.

In S1042, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section, and interrupts the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management processing (S1041) and the special symbol production start command transmission reservation processing (S1042)). It is preferable to do so within the prohibited area.

[2-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1024 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIGS. 79 and 80 are flowcharts showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S1024 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target. In addition, in the special symbol variable display end processing described below, the special symbol that is the target of processing is simply referred to as the "special symbol", and the special symbol that is not the target of processing is referred to as "the other special symbol".

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S1051).

If it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S1051), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S1051), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1052.

In S1052, the main CPU 1201 loads the special symbol pause flag value. After executing the process of S1052, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1053.

In S1053, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off based on the special symbol suspension flag value loaded in S1052.

If it is determined in S1053 that the special pattern pause flag is not off, i.e., is on (if S1053 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special pattern variable display end process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1053 that the special symbol suspension flag is off (YES in S1053), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1054.

In S1054, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (see S1025 in FIG. 77) is performed after the special symbol variable display ending process is completed. After executing the process of S1054, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1055.

In S1055, the main CPU 1201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1055, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1056.

In S1056, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. The confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of guaranteed variations or the remaining number of time savings. You can also manage the numbers. After executing the process in S1056, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1057.

In S1057, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit.

In S1057, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is not a small hit (NO determination in S1057), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1059.

On the other hand, in S1057, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a small hit (YES determination in S1057), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1058.

In S1058, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping while the small win game control process is being executed. After executing the process of S1058, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1059.

In S1059, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot.

In S1059, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is determined to be not a big hit (if S1059 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, in S1059, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot (YES determination in S1059), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1060.

In S1060, the main CPU 1201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting while the jackpot game control process is being executed. After executing the process of S1060, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1061.

In S1061, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (NO determination in S1061), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77). Return to

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1061 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (if S1061 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1062.

In S1062, the main CPU 1201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. After executing the process in S1062, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1063.

In S1063, the main CPU 1201 sets a variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, the sight test signal is output to the outside. This test firing test signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped due to a loss. After executing the process in S1063, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1064.

In S1064, the main CPU 1201 forcibly changes and sets the hit flag of the other special symbol to a miss. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol being processed (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot, the other special symbol will be forcibly stopped as a miss even if the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the result of the hit determination process for this other special symbol is a jackpot. After executing the process of S1064, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1065.

In S1065, the main CPU 1201 performs processing to clear the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process in S1065, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1066.

In S1066, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting a predetermined fixed waiting time in the timer of the other special symbol. In this process, a fixed waiting time is set so that when a special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a jackpot, the other special symbol stops in a stop display mode indicating a loss. After executing the process in S1066, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1067.

In S1067, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the other special symbol to "2." After executing the process of S1067, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1068.

In S1068, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1068, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1069.

In S1069, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1069, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display end processing of this embodiment, if the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol being processed, the result of the hit determination processing for this special symbol (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a jackpot, and the other special symbol is being variable displayed, processing is performed to forcibly change the variable display of the other special symbol to a miss.

[2-4-5. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, with reference to Figures 81 and 82, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1025 during the special symbol management process (see Figure 77) will be described. Figures 81 and 82 are flow charts showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the second pachinko game machine.

In addition, when this special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S1025 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S1071).

If it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S1071), the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S1071), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1072.

In S1072, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S1072, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S1072), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1073. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1072 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S1072), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1075.

At S1073, the main CPU 1201 determines whether or not a small win has occurred, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win.

In S1073, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (NO determination in S1073), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1074.

In S1074, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83. In addition, when the main CPU 1201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1073 that a small win has occurred, i.e., that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win (if S1073 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1075.

In S1075, the main CPU 1201 performs start setting processing for the big win game control processing or the small win game control processing. In this processing, signals are generated and updated that are output via the external terminal board 1184 to, for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 70 for both) or the island computer (not shown). Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After performing processing in S1075, the main CPU 1201 transfers the processing to S1076.

In addition, in the start setting process of the jackpot game control process of S1075, the main CPU 1201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the special chance flag, special chance counter, time-saving flag, and time-saving counter.

In S1076, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening (for example, the large prize opening for large prizes 1131 for large prizes or the large prize opening for small prizes 1151 for small prizes) to be opened (S1077), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S1078), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S1080), and a process of reserving the transmission of a large prize start display command (S1081). In addition, by performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1079) to switch the control state number, the large prize opening opening preparation process (see S1026 in FIG. 77) will be performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. The main CPU 1201 then ends the special pattern game determination process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 77).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 1201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S1071 to S1081) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[2-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1074 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIGS. 81 and 82) will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 1201 first performs time saving management processing (S1091). The details of this time-saving management process are the same as the process described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko game machine, so the explanation will be omitted. After executing the process in S1091, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1092.

In S1092, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, when the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process in S1092, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1093.

In S1093, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S1094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S1094, the main CPU 1201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 81).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S1034 in FIG. 78) is a miss, the main CPU 1201 does not set or reset either the sure win flag or the time-saving flag. Therefore, even if a miss display mode is derived, the game state does not change.

[2-4-7. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1026 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening preparation process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big prize opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening preparation process is called in S1026 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S1101).

If it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S1101), the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 77). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S1101 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1102.

In S1102, the main CPU 1201 loads the grand prize opening number counter value. The big winning opening number counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state when the jackpot game control process is executed, and when the small win game control process is executed. , corresponds to a counter that counts the number of executions of the small winning game control process. The count value of the big winning opening number counter (big winning opening opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 1203. After executing the process in S1102, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1103.

In S1103, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of times a large prize opening (e.g., the large prize opening 1131 for a large prize or the large prize opening 1151 for a small prize) has been opened is at the upper limit. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds, which is the number of times the large prize opening 1131 for a large prize that is opened in a large prize game state, is 4 rounds or 10 rounds, as shown in the prize type determination table (see FIG. 73), for example. On the other hand, the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 1151 for a small prize that is opened in a small prize game state is 1 time, for example.

When it is determined in S1103 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit value (YES in S1103), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1104.

In S1104, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S1104) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 77) is performed. (see S1028) will be performed. After executing the process in S1104, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1105.

In S1105, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S1106). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S1106, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

Returning to S1103, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S1103), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1107.

In S1107, the main CPU 1201 performs a process of adding 1 to the grand prize opening number counter value. After executing the process in S1107, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1108.

In S1108, the main CPU 1201 performs selection processing of the big winning opening to be opened. In this process, the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the jackpot jackpot to be opened when the jackpot game control process is executed, and the small jack jackpot jackpot 1131 (see FIG. 69) is selected as the jackpot jackpot to be opened when the jackpot game control process is executed. The big prize opening 1151 (see FIG. 69) is selected. After executing the process in S1108, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1109.

In S1109, the main CPU 1201 performs various settings related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize openings (large prize openings for large prizes 1131 for large prizes and large prize openings for small prizes 1151 for small prizes) are opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize openings, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize openings, the number of winning balls when the large prize openings are opened, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize openings are opened corresponds to the number of rounds when the large prize opening control process is executed, and corresponds to the number of times the small prize opening 1151 is opened when the small prize opening control process is executed. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize openings are opened multiple times in one round or small prize opening control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize openings are opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S1109, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1110.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 30,000 msec when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,800 msec when the small prize game control process is being executed. The maximum number of winning balls entering the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 5 balls when the small prize game control process is being executed. The number of winning balls entering the large prize opening is set to, for example, 10 balls for both the large prize opening 1131 for a large prize opening for a large prize opening for a small prize opening and the large prize opening 1151 for a small prize opening. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the large prize opening are not limited to the above.

In S1110, the main CPU 1201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) is performed. After executing the process in S1110, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1111.

In S1111, the main CPU 1201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S1111) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening opening control process (see S1027 in FIG. 77) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S1111, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1112.

In S1112, the main CPU 1201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S1112, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1113.

In S1113, the main CPU 1201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S1113, the main CPU 1201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening control process is called in S1027 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S1121).

If it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S1121 is a NO determination), the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S1121), the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1122.

In S1122, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening for big wins 1131, large prize opening for small wins 1151) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening entry counter (for example, the large prize opening count switch for big wins 1132, the large prize opening count switch for small wins 1152 (see FIG. 70 for both)) that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings is the maximum number of winning balls. The large prize opening entry counter value counted by the large prize opening entry counter is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 1203.

If it is determined in S1122 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large wins, large prize opening 1151 for small wins) is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S1122 returns NO), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1123.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1122 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large wins, large prize opening 1151 for small wins) is the maximum number of winning balls (if S1122 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1124.

In S1123, the main CPU 1201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for large prizes, large prize opening 1151 for small prizes) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various settings process related to the large prize openings (see S1109 in FIG. 84) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening for jackpot 1131, big winning opening for small winning 1151) has not elapsed (if S1123 is NO), the main CPU 1201 controls the opening of the big winning opening. The mouth opening control process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening (big winning opening 1131 for jackpot, big winning opening 1151 for small winning) has elapsed (when S1123 is YES), the main CPU 1201 The process moves to S1124.

In S1124, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to close the large prize openings (large prize opening 1131 for a large win, and large prize opening 1151 for a small win). After executing the process of S1124, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1125.

In S1125, the main CPU 1201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S1125) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening preparation process (see S1026 in FIG. 77) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S1125, the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1126.

In S1126, the main CPU 1201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S1126, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1127.

In S1127, the main CPU 1201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S1127, the main CPU 1201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77).

[2-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 1201 in S1028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77) will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the second pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this jackpot end process is called in S1028 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the jackpot end process is called in S1028 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 1201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S1131).

If it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S1131), the main CPU 1201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 77). , returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 76). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1131 that the control state number of the special pattern is "5" (if S1131 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 1201 transfers the process to S1132.

In S1132, the main CPU 1201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, the values of various flags (e.g., probability variable flag, time-saving flag, ceiling count prohibition flag, etc.) are set or reset, and the values of various counters (e.g., probability variable counter, time-saving counter, number of confirmed symbols counter, number of times large prize openings have been opened counter, large prize opening winning counter, ceiling counter, etc.) are set or reset. The special symbol pause flag and ceiling counter are both reset in the special symbol game end setting process (S1132). In addition, when the probability variable flag is set to ON, the ceiling count prohibition flag is also set to ON. As a result, in a high probability game state where the probability variable flag is ON, the ceiling counter is not updated. After executing the process of S1132, the main CPU 1201 moves the process to S1133.

In S1133, the main CPU 1201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 31 is performed. After executing the processing of S1133, the main CPU 1201 ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 77).

It is preferable that the main CPU 1201 set an interrupt prohibited section and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[2-5. Small hit rush]
In the second pachinko game machine described above, it is possible to realize a so-called small win rush. The small hit rush will be explained below.

As described above, the second pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the main CPU 1201 selects one of these gaming states. Control to any gaming state. As described above, in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, so the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 1120 is mainly executed. In addition, in other gaming states (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), right-handed hitting is considered a regular gaming mode, so the game to the second starting ports 1140A and 1140B is A second special symbol game based on winning balls is mainly executed. In addition, when the winning hole included in the normal electric accessory unit 1145 is the first starting hole, the first starting hole is set in any of the normal gaming state, the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state. The special symbol game is mainly executed, and the second special symbol game is mainly executed in the high probability non-time saving game state.

In this embodiment, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the winning frequency of game balls to the small winning big prize opening 1151 is higher than that in other gaming states (for example, normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state). ), the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time becomes a small winning rush that can exceed 1.

Here, an example of the small win rush mechanism will be explained. First, the game ball hit to the right almost passes through the passage gate 1126. In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, electric support control that increases the frequency of operating the normal electric accessory 1146 to open the winning opening (for example, the second starting opening 1140B in this embodiment) is not executed. In addition, unless the jackpot game control process is executed, the jackpot jackpot jackpot 1131 will not be in the open state, so the frequency with which the second starting port 1140B will be in the open state in the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state is different from that in the game where the time-saving control is executed. low compared to the state. Therefore, if the small winning big prize opening 1151 is open, the game ball hit right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b can win in the small winning big winning opening 1151. When a game ball enters the small winning jackpot 1151, for example, 10 prize balls are paid out as described above. In addition, the game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a can win a prize in the second starting opening 1140A. When a game ball enters the second starting port 1140A, 1140B, the game ball stops showing a small hit with a relatively high probability of 1 in 3 (approximately) as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 71). Not only is the display mode derived, but super-fast fluctuations (for example, variable display time of 1000 msec) are performed as shown in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high starts (see Figure 75), so large The winning frequency of game balls into the winning hole 1151 is increased compared to other gaming states (for example, normal gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state). In this way, it is possible to realize a small win rush in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1.

On the other hand, in a game state where time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state or a low-probability time-saving game state), the second start port 1140B is opened by the execution of the electric support control, and most of the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the downward flow path 1107b enter the second start port 1140B. Therefore, even if the small win large winning port 1151 is open, the expectation of a game ball entering the small win large winning port 1151 is low. Moreover, as described above, even if a game ball enters the second start port 1140B, for example, only one prize ball is paid out. When a game ball that is hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a enters the second starting port 1140A, for example, three prize balls are paid out, but only about one-third to one-fifth of the game balls that are hit to the right and distributed to the upper flow path 1107a enter the second starting port 1140A. In this way, in a game state in which time-saving control is executed, the expected value of the game value (e.g., number of prize balls) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time does not exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, a left hit is considered to be the normal game mode, but if a right hit is performed, when the game ball hit from the right passes through the passing gate 1126 and a stop display mode indicating a normal pattern win is derived, the normal electric device 1146 is activated, and the game ball enters the second start port 1140B, which may open the large winning port for small wins 1151. However, in the normal game state, the variation pattern of the special pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table of the special pattern for low start (see FIG. 74), so even if the game ball enters the second start port 1140A, 1140B, the variable display of the second special pattern is performed in one of the long variations A to C, which have an extremely long variation time, and the frequency with which the large winning port for small wins 1151 is opened is extremely low. Therefore, there is no practical benefit for the player to hit from the right in the normal game state. In addition, if the winning hole included in the normal electric role unit 1145 is the first starting hole, the probability of winning a normal symbol in the normal game state may be set to 0, for example, so that there is no practical benefit to hitting to the right. In the normal game state, the expected value of the game value (e.g., the number of winning balls) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time does not exceed 1, and is smaller than the game state in which the time-saving control is executed.

In this embodiment, the small win rush occurs in a high probability non-time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the small win rush may occur in a high probability time-saving game state in which special symbol shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time of the special symbol without executing electric support control.

[3. Third pachinko machine]
Next, a third pachinko game machine will be explained. As mentioned above, the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine, and has the first route and the second route as the route until it is controlled to the jackpot game state. There is. The first route is a case where a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. In the second route, the V attacker releases the V attacker by deriving the stop display mode that indicates that the result of the special symbol determination is "accessory object release hit", and the game ball that enters the released V attacker This is a case where a prize is won in the V winning hole in the attacker.

The third pachinko gaming machine is a priority variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the start condition of the first special symbol. However, it is not limited to this, and may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

Below, in explaining the third pachinko game machine, for example, the basic structure of the outer frame 2 and base door 3, etc., and the external terminal board 2184 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the outside of the third pachinko game machine. (For example, signals output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 described later) and the island computers (not shown) provided on each island), the function, shape, arrangement position, etc. of the first pachinko game machine We will omit explanations as much as possible regarding points in common with the above.

In explaining the third pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers as in the first pachinko game machine will be used for the configurations explained with reference to the drawings used in the description of the first pachinko game machine. explain. However, regarding the configuration explained with reference to newly adopted drawings in the explanation of the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the configuration is similar in function etc. to the first pachinko gaming machine, The description will be made using symbols and step numbers different from those of the gaming machine.

[3-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 included in the third pachinko game machine will be described. Similar to the first pachinko game machine, this game board unit 2010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2).

Figure 87 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 2010 provided in the third pachinko game machine. A game area 2105 is formed on the front side of the game board unit 2010, in which the released game balls can roll and flow down.

Note that the various components (e.g., the first starting hole 2120, etc.) arranged in the play area 2105 of the third pachinko gaming machine share some in common with the various components arranged in the play area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine, but will be explained in detail again.

As shown in FIG. 87, the game board unit 2010 mainly includes a game panel 2100 in which a game area 2105 is formed in which a launched game ball can roll down, a guide rail 2110, a center role 2115 located approximately in the center of the game area 2105, a first start opening 2120, a second start opening 2140, a general winning opening 2122, a passing gate unit 2125, a special electric role unit 2130, a normal electric role unit 2145, an LED unit 2160, a V winning device 2150, an outlet 2178, and a back unit (not shown). Note that the LED unit 2160 is the same as the LED unit 160 of the first pachinko game machine, and a description thereof will be omitted for this third pachinko game machine.

(Game panel)
An opening (no reference number) is formed in the gaming panel 2100 at a position facing the display area of the display device 2007. A guide rail 2110 is provided on the front surface of the gaming panel 2100, and gaming nails (no reference number) and the like are planted therein. A gaming ball launched from the launching device 6 (see Figs. 1 and 2) flies out from the guide rail 2110 toward the gaming area 2105, collides with the gaming nails, etc., and flows downward below the gaming area 2105 while changing its direction of travel.

Further, behind the game panel 2100, a back unit (not shown) provided with decorations to enhance the performance effect is arranged. The game panel 2100 is made of transparent resin so that the decoration provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front. In this case, the entire game panel 2100 may be made of a transparent member, or, for example, only the portion where the decorative body provided on the back unit can be viewed from the front may be made of a transparent member. Further, the game panel 2100 may be made of a member (for example, made of wood) that does not have a transparent part, and a transparent member may be provided in a part to enhance the presentation effect.

(guide rail)
The guide rail 2110 is composed of an arc-shaped outer rail and an inner rail (neither reference numerals are provided), similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine. The game area 2105 is divided (defined) by guide rails 2110. The outer rail and the inner rail have a function of guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 2006 (see FIG. 88 described later) to the upper part of the game area 2105.

(center role)
The center accessory 2115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (no reference numeral) of the game panel 2100, and is provided with an arcuate center rail 2116 above. The game balls launched toward the game area 2105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 2116.

A game ball launched by the launching device 2006 towards the game area 2105 flows down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107. A game ball flowing down the left area 2106 or the right area 2107 changes direction as it flows downward due to collision with game pegs or the like planted in the game panel 2100. When the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is small, the launched game ball flows down the left area 2106. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 62 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right area 2107.

In addition, the center accessory 2115 has a warp entrance 2117 formed at the outer peripheral edge on the left side into which a game ball flowing down the left side area 2106 can enter. The game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2117 is configured to be guided to a stage 2118 formed on the center accessory 2115. The stage 2118 is formed so that a game ball can roll in the left-right direction in front of the lower side of the display area of the display device 2007. Note that the stage 2118 may be formed in multiple stages, for example, an upper stage and a lower stage.

A chance entrance 2119 through which game balls can enter is formed at the rear of the stage 2118, approximately in the center in the left-right direction, and game balls that enter the chance entrance 2119 are configured to be released directly above the first start opening 2120. Therefore, game balls that enter the chance entrance 2119 have a higher probability of entering (passing through) the first start opening 2120 than game balls that do not enter the warp entrance 2117, or game balls that enter the warp entrance 2117 but do not enter the chance entrance 2119.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 2120 is disposed below the display area of the display device 2007, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can win (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or is impossible to win). When a game ball wins in the first starting hole 2120, it is detected by a first starting hole switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described later). It is also possible that a game ball hit from the right can win in the first starting hole 2120. Also, instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned first starting hole 2120, a first starting hole that allows a game ball hit from the right to win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or is impossible to win) may be provided.

When the first start hole switch 2121 (see FIG. 88 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start hole 2120, start information for the first special pattern is extracted, and a predetermined number of the extracted start information (for example, a maximum of four) is reserved. When the start conditions are met, the reserved start information is used in the winning determination process for the first special pattern. When a game ball enters the first start hole 2120, for example, three prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 2120 is not limited to three.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 2140 is arranged so that a game ball hit from the right can win (a game ball hit from the left has difficulty or cannot win). However, this is not limited to this, and a game ball hit from the left may be able to win in the second starting hole 2140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, it is detected by the second starting port switch 2141. When the winning (passage) of a game ball to the second starting port 2140 is detected by the second starting port switch 2141 (see FIG. 88 described later), the starting information of the second special symbol is extracted, and the extracted starting information are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 4). The suspended starting information is provided for the second special symbol hit determination process. When a game ball enters the second starting port 2140, for example, one prize ball is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the second starting port 2140 is not limited to this.

(General prize winnings)
A plurality of general winning holes 2122 are arranged at the lower left of the display area of the display device 2007, and are arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can win a prize (a game ball hit to the right is difficult or impossible to win a prize). has been done. When a game ball wins in any one of the plurality of general winning holes 2122, it is detected by the general winning hole switch 2123 (see FIG. 88 described later).

When the general prize opening switch 2123 (see Figure 88 described below) detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the general prize opening 2122, for example, four prize balls are paid out, but the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 2122 is not limited to four.

In addition, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2122 is positioned so that it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the right to win, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the general winning opening 2122 described above, a general winning opening through which a game ball hit from the right can win may be provided.

(passing gate unit)
The passage gate unit 2125 is arranged in the right side area 2107, and includes a passage gate 2126 that is configured so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through, and a passage gate switch that detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 2126. 2127 (see FIG. 88, which will be described later).

When the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 2126 is detected, start information for the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information is held for a predetermined number of times (for example, up to four). The various held data are used for the winning determination process for the normal pattern. Note that even if the passing gate switch 2127 detects the passage of a gaming ball through the passing gate 2126, no prize balls are paid out. Also, the passing gate unit 2125 may be located in the left area 2106 instead of or in addition to the right area 2107.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric accessory unit 2130 is a unit body that integrates a large prize opening 2131, a large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later) that detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the large prize opening 2131, and a special electric accessory 2133. The special electric accessory unit 2130 is disposed below the passing gate unit 2125 in the right side area 2107.

The big prize opening 2131 is arranged so that a game ball hit to the right can win a prize (a game ball hit to the left is difficult or impossible to win a prize). However, this is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned grand prize opening 2131, a grand prize opening in which a game ball hit to the left can win may be arranged, or a game ball can be placed above the center accessory 2115. A grand prize opening in which a ball can be won may be arranged.

The big winning hole 2131 is a winning hole that is opened so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can win (pass through) when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player. It is. When the winning of game balls into the big winning hole 2131 is detected by the big winning hole count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88 described later), for example, 10 prize balls are paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls into the grand prize opening 2131 is not limited to ten.

The special electric device 2133 includes a special electric shutter 2134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 2135 (see FIG. 88 described later) that operates the special electric shutter 2134. The special electric device 2133, i.e., the special electric shutter 2134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which the game ball can enter (pass through) the large prize opening 2131 or easily, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large prize opening 2131 or is difficult to enter. The large prize opening 2131 transitions from a closed state to an open state when the game enters a jackpot game state via the first route described above. When the game enters a jackpot game state via the first route described above, the transition from the closed state to the open state is performed for a predetermined number of rounds. In other words, the jackpot game state via the first route is a game state in which a large number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls by playing multiple rounds of round play in which the jackpot opening 2131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined period of time.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The ordinary electric accessory unit 2145 includes a prize opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters (passes through) a prize, a switch that detects winning of a game ball to this prize opening, and a normal electric accessory unit 2145. It is a unit body that is integrated with the accessory 2146, and is arranged in the right area 2107. In this embodiment, the winning opening is the second starting opening 2140, and the switch is the second starting opening switch 2141.

The ordinary electric accessory 2146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 2147 that can be moved forward and backward, and a general electricity solenoid 2148 (see FIG. 88 described later) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 2147. The normal electric accessory 2146, that is, the shutter 2147 for general electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter (pass through) the second starting port 2140, and an open state in which it is impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 2140. Or configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state. Note that instead of the general power shutter 2147 that can be moved back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed.

(V prize winning device)
The V winning device 2150 is provided downstream of the passage gate 2126 in the right area 2107. The V winning device 2150 includes an opening/closing winning opening 2151 that is opened to allow a game ball to enter the inside of the V winning device 2150, a V attacker 2152 that can open and closing the opening/closing winning opening 2151, and this V attacker 2152. A V attacker solenoid 2154 that is activated to open and close the opening and closing prize opening 2151, and a V that detects that a game ball has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing prize opening 2151 is opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152. The attacker count switch 2153, the V winning hole 2155 through which the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning hole 2151 can pass, and the V winning hole 2155 through which the game ball that entered the V winning device 2150 from the open/close winning hole 2151 can pass through. A V winning port switch 2156 detects that a game ball has entered (passed through) the winning port 2155, and a game ball that has entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 from the opening/closing winning port 2151 does not enter the V winning port 2155. A loss opening 2157 into which game balls can enter (pass through), a V shutter 2158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 2155, a V shutter solenoid 2159 that operates this V shutter 2158 to open and close the V winning opening 2155, and a V winning opening. A locking member 2160 that can hold only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the device 2150 is provided. Note that the V winning device 2150 may be provided upstream of the passage gate 2126, or may be provided in the left region 2106.

The V attacker 2152 is made of an arc-shaped member, and is normally in a closed state in which the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is closed. Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends and a stop display mode is derived indicating a "hit on the opening of the special device" described below, the V attacker solenoid 2154 (see FIG. 88 described below) is activated to activate the V attacker 2152, for example, once, almost simultaneously with the end of the variable display of the special symbol. When the V attacker 2152 is activated once, the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is in an open state in which it is open for, for example, 1800 msec. Then, while the opening and closing winning opening 2151 is open due to the activation of the V attacker 2152, the maximum number of game balls that can enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 per opening is, for example, 10.

Note that the manner in which the V attacker 2152 is opened when the stop display manner indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived is not limited to the above, and for example, the release may be performed twice for 900 msec, It may be closed based on the fact that a predetermined number (for example, one) of game balls have entered the inside of the V winning prize device 2150.

The V attacker count switch 2153 detects the entry of a game ball into the inside of the V prize winning device 2150. When the entry of game balls into the V winning device 2150 is detected by the V attacker count switch 2153, the main CPU 2201 pays out, for example, 10 prize balls via the payout/launch control circuit 2400, and the main CPU 2201 functions. The value of the V attacker winning prize counter is added. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the V-attacker 2152 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 2154 to open and close the prize even if the maximum time (for example, 1800 msec) in which the opening/closing prize opening 2151 can be opened has not elapsed. Port 2151 is closed.

The opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued on the condition that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 2155. That is, the V winning hole 2155 is a winning hole that becomes an opportunity to be controlled to a jackpot gaming state through the second route described above.

The V winning hole switch 2156 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 2155. When the main CPU 2201 (see FIG. 88) detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 2155 within a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 msec) after the V attacker 2152 opens, it continues to control the opening of the V attacker 2152. In other words, it is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route. When it is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the V attacker 2152 transitions from a closed state to an open state is played for a predetermined number of rounds.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the first route, a round game is executed in which the large prize winning port 2131 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state, whereas when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, a round game is executed in which the V attacker 2152 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when the jackpot game state is controlled via the second route, the V attacker 2152 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state in the first round, but a round game in which, for example, the large prize winning port 2131 is transitioned from a closed state to an open state may be executed midway through the round game.

In addition, for example, by providing a V entry port inside the special electric device 2133 (i.e., the area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 2134 is in the open state), it is possible to have one V entry port and one attacker that is opened in the jackpot game state. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "game device open hit" is derived, the special electric shutter 2134 is opened, and when a game ball enters the V entry port 2155 provided inside the special electric device 2133, control is performed to the jackpot game state (jackpot game state via the second route).

The losing port 2157 is configured to allow game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 but have not passed through the V winning port 2155 to enter (pass through). Game balls that pass through the losing port 2157 are discharged outside the machine. Note that if all game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 2150 pass through the losing port 2157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 2155, the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is not continued and ends.

The V shutter 2158 has a closed mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 2155 and a game ball entering the V winning hole 2155 due to the operation of the V shutter solenoid 2159 (see FIG. 88 described later). A constant movement is always performed between the open mode and the open mode where the ball can pass through (or easily). In this embodiment, for example, the V-shutter 2158 always performs a constant operation in a 7000 msec cycle (period) in which the operation of "6000 msec closed ⇒ 1000 msec open ⇒ 6000 msec closed" is repeated.

The locking member 2160 is provided above the V winning a prize opening 2155, and is configured to be able to hold, for example, only one of the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning a prize device 2150. Game balls that enter the V winning device 2150 but are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged from the losing port 2157 to the outside of the machine. Even if a plurality of game balls enter the V winning device 2150, all the game balls that are not held by the locking member 2160 are discharged from the losing port 2157 to the outside of the machine.

In addition, after a certain time (e.g., 3000 msec) has elapsed since the V attacker 2152 was activated, the locking member 2160 releases the game ball by the activation of a locking solenoid (not shown). The game ball that has been released from the locking member 2160 falls toward the V winning port 2155, and if the V winning port 2155 is open at this time, it enters (passes through) the V winning port 2155, and if the V winning port 2155 is closed at this time, it passes through the losing port 2157. Note that the locking member 2160 may not be provided and game balls that enter the inside of the V winning device 2150 may be distributed to the V winning port 2155 or the losing port 2157.

(Outlet)
The outlet 2178 is for discharging game balls that have been shot toward the game area 2105 but have not won or entered any of the various winning ports (for example, the first start port 2120, the second start port 2140, the large winning port 2131, the V winning device 2150, the general winning port 2122, etc.) to the outside of the machine. This outlet 2178 is provided on the most downstream side of the game area 2105 so that both game balls hit from the left and game balls hit from the right can be discharged to the outside of the machine. However, in addition to the above-mentioned outlet 2178, an outlet may be provided at a position other than the most downstream side, for example, between multiple general winning ports 2122 or between the special electric role unit 2130 and the second start port 2140, so that game balls flowing down the game area 2105 can be discharged to the outside of the machine.

(back unit)
The back unit (not shown) decorates the game board unit 2010 similarly to the first pachinko game machine, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 2100. This back unit includes a group of production accessories 2058 such as movable accessories that are arranged around the display area of the display device 2007 and controlled by the sub-control circuit 2300. At least one or more of the performance accessory groups 2058 or the performance accessory constituent members that constitute the accessory function as performance accessories that can operate based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. do.

[3-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, the control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine will be explained. FIG. 88 is an example of a block diagram showing a control circuit of the third pachinko gaming machine. Although some of the control circuits of the third pachinko game machine are common to the control circuits of the first pachinko game machine, they will be explained once again.

As shown in FIG. 88, the third pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 2200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 2300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 2400, and a power supply circuit 2450.

[3-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 2200 includes a main CPU 2201, a main ROM 2202 (read-only memory), a main RAM 2203 (read-write memory), an initial reset circuit 2204, a backup capacitor 2207, etc., and is housed in a main board case (not shown).

A main ROM 2202, a main RAM 2203, an initial reset circuit 2204, and the like are connected to the main CPU 2201. The main CPU 2201 has a built-in WDT for monitoring operations, a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main ROM 2202 stores programs for controlling the operation of the third pachinko game machine by the main CPU 2201, various tables, and the like. The main CPU 2201 has a function of executing various processes according to programs stored in the main ROM 2202.

The main RAM 2203 is provided with a storage area for storing various data necessary for the progress of the game, and this main RAM 2203 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the main CPU 2201. . Note that in this embodiment, a RAM is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 2201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read and written may be used.

The initial reset circuit 2204 monitors the main CPU 2201 and outputs a reset signal as necessary.

The backup capacitor 2207 has the function of temporarily supplying power to prevent data stored in the main RAM 2203 from being lost in the event of a power outage, etc.

The main control circuit 2200 also includes an I/O port 2205 that is connected to various devices and other devices so as to be able to communicate with each other, and a command output port 2206 that is connected to the sub-control circuit 2300 so as to be able to output various commands to the sub-control circuit 2300.

In addition, various devices are connected to the main control circuit 2200. For example, the main control circuit 2200 is connected to the normal symbol display unit 2161, the normal symbol reserved display unit 2162, the first special symbol display unit 2163, the second special symbol display unit 2164, the first special symbol reserved display unit 2165, the second special symbol reserved display unit 2166, the time-saving notification display unit 2168, the normal power solenoid 2148, the special power solenoid 2135, the V attacker solenoid 2154, and the V shutter solenoid 2159. In addition to these, the main control circuit 2200 is also connected to the performance display monitor 2170 and the error notification monitor 2172. The main control circuit 2200 can control the operation of these devices by sending signals via the I/O port 2205.

The performance display monitor 2170 displays performance display data, setting values, etc. under the control of the main CPU 2201. The performance display data is data that indicates, for example, the proportion of game balls paid out in a game state other than a jackpot game state for a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 60,000 balls) shot, and is also called a base value.

The error code is displayed on the error notification monitor 2172. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 2172 also displays, for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine with a setting function, a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress, and a setting change in progress code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress. You can also display a code while checking settings. As the setting change code, a symbol that is not normally displayed as a special symbol (for example, a setting change symbol indicating that the setting is being changed) may be displayed.

In addition, the main control circuit 2200 includes a first starting port switch 2121, a second starting port switch 2141, a passage gate switch 2127, a big winning port count switch 2132, a V attacker count switch 2153, a V winning port switch 2156, and a general A prize opening switch 2123 is also connected. When these switches are detected, a detection signal is sent to main control circuit 2200 via I/O port 2205.

Furthermore, the main control circuit 2200 includes a calling device (not shown) that has a function of calling a hall attendant, a function of displaying the number of jackpots, etc., and a calling device (not shown) that is used when transmitting data to a hall computer 2186 that manages pachinko machines in the entire hall. The external terminal board 2184, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the setting key 2174 that is operated to change or confirm the setting value, and the backup data stored in the main RAM 2203 can be accessed by the game hall administrator. A backup clear switch 2176, etc., which can be cleared according to an operation, is connected. In addition, if it is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, the backup clear switch 2176 may also be used as a switch for changing the setting value, or a setting switch for changing the setting value may be provided. Good too.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 be housed in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the administrator of the gaming hall cannot easily touch them. ``Inside a specified case'' includes not only those configured such that the setting key 2174 and backup clear switch 2176 cannot be accessed without opening the case, but also those that are configured to have only the corresponding locations of the setting key 2174 and backup clear switch 2176 in the case. When a pachinko machine is rotated from the island equipment using a key controlled by the game hall manager to expose the back side, the game hall manager can use the setting key 2174 or/and the backup key. It also includes one configured to be able to contact the clear switch 2176.

Note that in this embodiment, the setting key 2174 and the backup clear switch 2176 are connected to the main control circuit 2200, but are not limited to this; It may be configured like this. In this case as well, it is preferable to prevent a third party other than the person in charge of the game parlor from easily accessing the setting key 2174 or the backup clear switch 2176.

[3-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 2300 includes a sub-CPU 2301, a program ROM 2302, a work RAM 2303, a display control circuit 2304, a sound control circuit 2305, an LED control circuit 2306, a role control circuit 2307, and a command input port 2308. The sub-control circuit 2300 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 2200. Although not shown in FIG. 88, the sub-control circuit 2300 is also connected to the effect button 54 (see FIG. 1) that can be operated by the player, as in the first pachinko game machine.

The program ROM 2302 stores programs for controlling the game presentation of the third pachinko game machine by the sub-CPU 2301, various tables, etc. The sub-CPU 2301 has the function of executing various processes according to the programs stored in the program ROM 2302. In particular, the sub-CPU 2301 controls the game presentation according to various commands sent from the main control circuit 2200.

The work RAM 2303 has the function of storing various flags and variable values as a temporary storage area for the sub-CPU 2301.

The display control circuit 2304 is a circuit for controlling the display in the display device 2007. The display control circuit 2304 includes a VDP, an image data ROM that stores data for generating various image data, a frame buffer that temporarily stores image data, and a D/A that converts image data into an image signal. Equipped with converter etc.

The display control circuit 2304 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command from the sub-CPU 2301. The image data to be displayed on the display device 2007 includes various image data related to the game, such as decorative pattern image data showing decorative patterns, background image data, and performance image data.

Then, the display control circuit 2304 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D/A converter at a predetermined timing. The D/A converter converts the image data into an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the display device 2007 at a predetermined timing. When the image signal is supplied to the display device 2007, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the display device 2007. In this way, the display control circuit 2304 can control the display device 2007 to display images related to the game.

The audio control circuit 2305 is a circuit for controlling the audio generated from the speaker 2032. The audio control circuit 2305 includes a sound source IC that controls audio, an audio data ROM that stores various audio data, an amplifier (hereinafter referred to as AMP) that amplifies audio signals, and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 2032. The sound source IC selects one sound data from a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM in response to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 2301. The sound source IC also reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. AMP amplifies signals such as audio and sound effects output from the speaker 2032.

The LED control circuit 2306 is a circuit for controlling the LED group 2046 including decorative LEDs and the like. The LED control circuit 2306 includes a drive circuit for supplying an LED control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of LED decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

The reel control circuit 2307 is a circuit for controlling the operation of each reel (for example, one or more reels among the group of reels for performance 2058). The reel control circuit 2307 includes a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each reel, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a reel data ROM in which operation patterns and lighting patterns are stored.

Further, the accessory control circuit 2307 selects one motion pattern from a plurality of motion patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to an accessory activation command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the mechanical motion of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected motion pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a drive signal corresponding to the read motion pattern. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on a lighting command from the sub CPU 2301. Then, the lighting operation of each accessory is controlled by reading the selected lighting pattern from the accessory data ROM and supplying a lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern.

Command input port 2308 is connected to command output port 2206 and receives commands sent from main control circuit 2200.

The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls from the pachinko game machine, and is connected to a payout device 2082 for paying out game balls, a launch device 2006 for launching game balls, a card unit 2180 capable of executing control related to ball lending, and the like.

When the payout/launch control circuit 2400 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 2200, it transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 2082 and controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls.

A ball rental operation panel 2182 is connected to the card unit 2180. The ball rental operation panel 2182 is provided with a ball rental button for renting balls and a rental return button (both not shown) for returning the ball rental card in which cache data is stored. For example, when a player performs a ball lending operation, a ball lending control signal corresponding to the ball lending operation is transmitted to the card unit 2180. The payout/launch control circuit 2400 controls the payout device 2082 to pay out game balls based on the rental ball control signal transmitted from the card unit 2180. Note that although the operation panel 2182 is often provided on the pachinko gaming machine side, it may be provided on the card unit 2180 side.

In addition, when the launch handle 62 (see Figures 1 and 2) is rotated clockwise, the payout/launch control circuit 2400 supplies power to a launch solenoid (not shown) according to the rotation angle (amount of rotation), and controls the launch of the game ball.

The power supply circuit 2450 is a power supply circuit created to supply the power supply voltage required during play to the main control circuit 2200, the sub control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.

The power supply circuit 2450 is connected to a power switch 2095 and other components. The power switch 2095 is turned on when the necessary power is to be supplied to the pachinko game machine (more specifically, the main control circuit 2200, the sub-control circuit 2300, the payout/launch control circuit 2400, etc.).

[3-3. Basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the third pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 89 to 92. The third pachinko gaming machine may be a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, but the description of the setting function will be omitted below.

Note that probability change control is not executed in the third pachinko game machine. Further, in the third pachinko gaming machine, a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed and a time-saving gaming state in which time-saving control is executed are prepared, and the main CPU 2201 advances the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. It is now possible.

In this embodiment, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the normal game state, and right-handed hitting is the regular game mode in the time-saving game state. The sub CPU 2301 executes control to display, for example, a playing style that is a normal game mode in the display area of the display device 2007.

[3-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 89 shows an example of a special symbol winning determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 provided in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 89, when a game ball enters (passes) the first starting hole 2120, the main CPU 2201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol to be a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "miss" based on the hit determination process for the first special symbol using a random number value for jackpot determination of the first special symbol. Also, when a game ball enters (passes) the second starting hole 2140, the main CPU 2201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol to be a "time-saving hit", "jackpot", or "gimmick release hit" based on the hit determination process for the second special symbol using a random number value for jackpot determination of the second special symbol.

It should be noted that it is not essential to prevent "accessory object release hit" from being determined when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, but even if it is determined as "accessory object release hit". It is preferable that the second special symbol be determined with an extremely low probability (for example, a probability equal to or lower than a "jackpot") than when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. In addition, it is not essential to prevent the second special symbol from being determined as a "lose" when the hit determination process is performed, but if it is determined as a "lose", the "accessory object opening hit" The probability may be higher than the probability determined based on "accessory object being released", or may be lower than the probability determined based on "accessory object being released".

The special symbol hit determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 includes data used for the first special symbol hit determination process that is executed based on winning in the first starting port 2120, such as "time-saving hit" and "jackpot". ” or the range (width) of random numbers for jackpot judgment determined as “loss” and the corresponding judgment value data (“time-saving hit judgment value data”, “jackpot judgment value data”, “loss judgment value data”) The relationship with In addition, as data used in the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning in the second starting opening 2140, a jackpot determined as a "time saving hit", "big hit", or "accessories opening hit" The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for judgment and the corresponding judgment value data ("time saving hit judgment value data", "jackpot judgment value data", "accessories release hit judgment value data") is specified. There is.

In addition, this third pachinko game machine does not have a function to change the jackpot probability determined for a "jackpot," but this is not essential, and the jackpot probability may be increased, for example, by setting a probability-change flag to ON depending on the type of jackpot, etc.

In addition, in this third pachinko game machine, the total random number of jackpot determination random numbers for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 65,536. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

In addition, when the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the opening of the accessory are set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of hitting the jackpot and the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set to be higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the probability of hitting the accessory object may be set constant regardless of the setting value, and the probability of hitting the jackpot You may set the probability to be higher at high settings than at low settings, or you may set the jackpot probability to be constant regardless of the setting value, and set the probability of opening a role item to be higher at high settings than at low settings. It's okay. However, even if the third pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that the time-saving winning probability be set to be a common probability for all settings, for example.

In addition to or instead of changing the jackpot probability or the probability of winning the special feature opening according to the set value, for example, the opening time of the V attacker 2152 may be changed for each set value to change the winning rate for the V winning device 2150, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 2155 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning port 2155, or the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed for each set value. In other words, by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the probability of winning the special feature opening, the opening frequency of the V winning port 2155 (i.e., the operation frequency of the V attacker 2152), the opening time, and the number of times the time-saving continuation may be changed, the expected value controlled in the jackpot game state may be configured to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[3-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 90 is an example of a special symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 included in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selection symbol command" that determines a stop symbol based on the symbol random value of the special symbol extracted when a game ball enters the starting hole 2120, 2140 and the above-mentioned determination value data. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a "symbol designation command". The "select symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the jackpot type when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. This is a command to specify the pattern to be displayed when the variable display stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 90, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is, for example, 0 to 99. Even so, the main CPU 2201 selects "z0" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 selects, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command as follows. That is, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 3, the main CPU 2201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 4 to 60, the main CPU 2201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. In addition, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 61 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, if loss judgment value data is obtained as a result of the hit judgment process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 2201 will issue a selection symbol command as Select "z4" and select "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, when the winning determination process for the second special symbol results in the obtaining of the winning determination value data for the opening of the reel, for example, the selected symbol command and the symbol designation command are selected as follows. That is, regardless of whether the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is 0 to 99, the main CPU 2201 selects "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

Although the explanation is omitted in the third pachinko game machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the first special symbol display section 2163 or the second special symbol display section 2164 (see FIG. 88) when the variable display of the special symbol stops. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions according to symbol commands. In addition, in the special symbol display sections 2163 and 2164, a display mode for short time winning, a display mode for jackpot, a display mode for opening a role object, or a display mode for losing is derived based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. Ru. Further, a decorative symbol stopping manner determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stopping manner determining table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko gaming machine is also stored in the program ROM 2302 of the sub control circuit 2300.

[3-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
FIG. 91 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 of the third pachinko game machine. The winning type determination table is referred to when determining the mode of the big win game state (more specifically, the number of rounds) and the mode of the subsequent game state (more specifically, the time-saving flag and the end condition of the time-saving) according to the selection pattern command determined in response to the pattern random number value of the special pattern. The mode of the subsequent game state indicates the mode of the game state after the big win game state ends. However, if the result of the hit determination process of the special pattern is a time-saving hit, the game state is controlled to the C time-saving game state without being controlled to the big win game state. "L" shown in the column of the time-saving end condition in FIG. 91 indicates the sum of the variable display number of the first special pattern and the variable display number of the second special pattern. Similarly, "M" indicates the variable display number of the second special pattern, and "N" indicates the number of times of the opening of the special device. Note that the remarks in the remarks column of FIG. 91 are written for convenience and to make it easier to understand.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the aspect of the C time-saving game state is determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z0", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=6, N=3. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z5", the main CPU 2201 decides to set the time saving flag on, and determines the time saving end conditions to be L=30, M=3, N=3. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the number of rounds as an aspect of the jackpot game state is not determined.

Further, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot", the number of rounds as a mode of the jackpot gaming state and the mode of the subsequent gaming state (A time-saving gaming state) are determined as follows. For example, when the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions as L=50, M= 5. Determine N=2. In addition, when the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions as L=50, M= 5. Determine N=1. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 4 rounds, and determines not to set the time saving flag on. Further, when the selected symbol command is "z6", the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time saving flag on, and sets the time saving end conditions as L=50, M= 5. Determine N=2.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "release of the special feature" (for example, the selected symbol command is "z7") and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 determines the number of rounds to be 10 rounds, decides to set the time-saving flag to ON, and determines the time-saving end conditions to be L = 50, M = 5, and N = 2. However, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "release of the special feature", if the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the main CPU 2201 not only does not execute the jackpot game state, but also does not set the time-saving flag to ON, and after executing control based on the special feature hit, returns to the game state immediately before the special feature hit.

Also, for example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z4"), the main CPU 2201 does not set either the mode of the big win game state or the mode of the game state thereafter. In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the main CPU 2201 does not change the game state, but continues to control the previous game state.

Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol command is "z4"), as described above, neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is set, so there is no need to illustrate this in the hit type determination table of FIG. 91. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is illustrated in FIG. 91 to clearly show that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss", neither the state of the jackpot game state nor the state of the subsequent game state is determined.

The "L", "M", and "N" shown in the column of the time-saving termination conditions in FIG. 91 are all the same conditions regardless of the game state, but are not limited to this and may be different conditions depending on the game state. For example, all of the termination conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different for the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, respectively, or may be different only for one of the time-saving game states among the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. Also, only one of the termination conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different for the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, respectively, or may be different only for one of the time-saving game states among the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In other words, at least one of the end conditions "L", "M", and "N" may be different in at least one of the time-saving play states A, B, and C.

[3-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 92 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the third pachinko game machine. Note that the "Remarks" column in FIG. 92 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand. The main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 2120, and determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol when it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting hole 2140. Determine the fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 92, the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when a game ball enters the first starting port 2120, and determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 2140. 2. Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 92, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the main CPU 2201 controls the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol so that the game ball enters the first starting hole 2120 and enters the prize. The decision is made based on the random number value for performance selection extracted when (passing).

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "miss," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the value of the time-saving flag, the reach determination random number value and the effect selection random number value extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes) the first starting hole 2120. Note that, since hitting to the right is considered the regular gaming mode in the time-saving gaming state, it is considered that the gaming ball will rarely enter the first starting hole 2120.

In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "time-saving hit," the main CPU 2201 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the random number value for effect selection extracted when the gaming ball enters (passes through) the second starting hole 2140.

In addition, when the result of the second special symbol lottery is a "jackpot", the main CPU 2201 generates a variation pattern of the second special symbol as an effect extracted when the game ball enters (passes) the second starting port 2140. Determined based on random number for selection.

If the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "hit with the release of the special feature" and the value of the time-saving flag is "1", the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol based on the reach determination random number value and the performance selection random number value extracted when the gaming ball enters the second start hole 2140.

On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "hit on the release of the reel" and the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the main CPU 2201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol to be a long fluctuation presentation with an extremely long fluctuation time, for example, 600,000 msec. If the value of the time-saving flag is "0", the game ball will not basically enter (pass) the second start hole 2140, but even if an unforeseen event occurs and the game ball does enter the second start hole 2140, this is done to minimize the profit that can be given to the advantageous player, but this is not necessarily required.

The random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 2201 sets a prefetch flag when the random number value for performance selection extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2120 is a specific random number value. The sub CPU 2301 which has received the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 2201 performs a pre-read effect if the pre-read flag is set.

Although it is not shown in the special symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 92 for convenience, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 sets the prefetch flag when the time saving flag is off, and when the time saving flag is on or If the probability change flag is on, the look-ahead flag is not set.

Further, in this embodiment, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 2301 may also make the determination.

Note that the main CPU 2201 may also set the prefetch flag (so that the prefetch effect is performed) when the time saving flag is on or when the probability change flag is on. Also, when determining the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a prefetch flag may be set (so that a prefetch effect is performed).

When the time-saving flag is on, the expected number of changes per unit time for the special symbol fluctuation pattern determined is smaller than when the time-saving flag is off. In other words, the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is on is likely to be shorter than the time it takes for the special symbol to fluctuate when the time-saving flag is off.

The main CPU 2201 transmits the determined variation pattern information to the sub CPU 2301. The sub CPU 2301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 2007 and the sound effects output from the speaker 2032 based on the variation pattern information transmitted from the main CPU 2201.

In addition, the time-saving hits A and B shown in the "Remarks" column of Figure 92 are reaches that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process may be a time-saving hit (there is no possibility of a jackpot). It's a performance. Similarly, jackpot-related reaches A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that there is a possibility of a jackpot (there is no possibility of a time-saving hit). Furthermore, common reach A and B are reach effects that indicate that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is likely to be either a short-time hit or a jackpot.

Although the third pachinko gaming machine will not be described, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the main ROM 2202 of the main control circuit 2200 stores a normal symbol winning determination table (see FIG. 16), a normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 17), a normal symbol winning type determination table (see FIG. 18), and a normal symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 19). The main CPU 2201 then determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 2146 (see FIG. 87) in the same manner as the first pachinko gaming machine, and controls the operation mode of the normal electric device 2146 based on this.

[3-4. Main control processing]
In the third pachinko gaming machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 2201 of the main control circuit 2200 include the special symbol control process executed in S39 of the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 2201 will be omitted. Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, jackpot end processing (FIGS. 42 and 103), etc.) ), below, the same processes as those performed in the first pachinko game machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[3-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 93, the main CPU 2201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S2001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S2001, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 2201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 2203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S2001.

Although not shown, when executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 2201 also checks the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol. If both the reserved number of the first special symbol and the reserved number of the second special symbol are "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of reserving a demo display command. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub-control circuit 2300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 2301 performs a demo display performance. Note that the third pachinko game machine is not a pachinko game machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, and therefore does not have the concept of a main special symbol as described in the first pachinko game machine.

In S2002, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S2001 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a state waiting for variable display.

If it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S2002), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S2002), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2003.

In S2003, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display, that is, whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2003 that the second special symbol is not a variable display start, that is, the start information of the second special symbol is not pending (NO determination in S2003), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2004.

In S2004, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., whether start information for the first special symbol is pending.

If it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has not started variable display, that is, the start information of the first special symbol has not been withheld (NO determination in S2004), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process. , returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that the first special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the first special symbol is pending (if S2004 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

Returning to S2003, if it is determined that the second special symbol has started to be variably displayed, i.e., that the start information for the second special symbol is pending (if S2003 returns YES), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2005.

In S2005, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 94. After executing the process of S2003, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S2001 to S2005) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is pending as the third pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the priority variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is pending, it may be a priority changing machine in which the special symbol management process (S2005) is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 2120 Alternatively, it may be a sequential variation machine in which the special symbol management process is executed in the order of winnings to the second starting opening 2140.

[3-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93) will be described with reference to Fig. 94. Fig. 94 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

When the control state number is 0 (when S2002 is judged as YES), the special pattern management process processes the second special pattern if S2003 is judged as YES, and processes the first special pattern if S2004 is judged as YES. Also, when the control state number is not 0 (when S2002 is judged as NO), the special pattern management process processes the special pattern currently being executed.

The numbers ("0" to "7") in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 94 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 2201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S2011).

If it is determined in S2011 that the special symbol waiting time is not 0 (NO in S2011), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S2011 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2012.

In S2012, the main CPU 2201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S2012, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2013. The main CPU 2201 performs the process from S2013 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S2012.

In S2013, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S2013 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 95. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2014.

In S2014, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S2014 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 96. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2015.

In S2015, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S2015 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 97. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2016.

In S2016, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening preparation process. This S2016 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2017.

In S2017, the main CPU 2201 performs a V winning device opening control process. This S2017 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this V winning device opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 100. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2018.

In S2018, the main CPU 2201 performs grand prize opening preparation processing. This process of S2018 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 101. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2019.

In S2019, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S2019 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 102. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2020.

In S2020, the main CPU 2201 performs a jackpot end process. This S2020 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

After completing the processes of S2013 to S2020, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[3-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2013 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S2013 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 95, the main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S2021).

If it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S2021 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S2021 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2022.

In S2022, the main CPU 2201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S2022, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2023.

In S2023, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 89) is referred to, and the special symbol hit determination is performed using the special symbol jackpot determination random number value. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is to be processed, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a jackpot, or a loss. Further, if the second special symbol is a processing target, it is determined whether it is a time saving hit, a jackpot, or a role opening hit. After executing the process in S2023, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2024.

In S2024, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S2023) (for example, time saving hit, jackpot, accessory opening hit, or loss). In this process, the above-mentioned "selected symbol command" and "symbol designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 90) and using the symbol random number value of the special symbol. After executing the process in S2024, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2025.

In S2025, the main CPU 2201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (time saving hit, jackpot, accessory opening hit). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determining process (S2024) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 91). In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit when an accessory is released, the type of win determined is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 2155 opened based on the release of the accessory. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, there are multiple types of time-saving hits, jackpots, and accessory release hits, but there may be only one type of time-saving hits, jackpots, and/or accessory release hits. . Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing a plurality of types of time-saving hits, jackpots, and/or accessory release hits, a plurality of types of losses may be provided. After executing the process in S2025, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2026.

In S2026, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the special symbol variation pattern table (see FIG. 92) is referenced, and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined, for example, according to the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit judgment process (S2023), the value of the time-saving flag, the random number value for reach judgment and/or the random number value for performance selection, etc. After executing the process of S2026, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2027.

In S2027, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIG. 92), the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S2026) is determined as the special symbol variation time. After executing the process in S2027, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2028.

In S2028, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". By performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1" in this way, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S2014 in FIG. 94) is performed. After executing the process of S2028, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2029.

In S2029, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the game state (e.g., the number of times remaining in the special mode and the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 2203 is performed. After executing the process of S2029, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2030.

In S2030, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S2030, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2031.

In S2031, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game state management process (S2030) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S2031)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[3-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2014 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 96. Fig. 96 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the third pachinko game machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S2014 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is a process called in S2014 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S2041).

If it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S2041 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S2041 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2042.

In S2042, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S2015 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. After executing the process of S2042, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2043.

In S2043, the main CPU 2201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the effect control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2043, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2044.

In S2044, the main CPU 2201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. As described above in the explanation of the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, the determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol is determined (the number of times a special symbol game has been played), but it may also manage the number of games of a special symbol game played under a specific state, such as the number of times a special symbol game is remaining or the number of times a time-saving game is remaining. After executing the process of S2044, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2015 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, if this special symbol game determination process is a process called in S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S2015 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S2051).

If it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO in S2051), the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S2051 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2052.

In S2052, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

In S2052, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S2052), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2060. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2052 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S2052), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2053. In addition, when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating that the accessory has been released, and when the special symbol is in a stop display mode indicating a loss, a NO determination is made in S2052.

In S2053, the main CPU 2201 performs start setting processing for jackpot game control. In this processing, signals (e.g., jackpot signals, etc.) that are output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88 for both) via the external terminal board 2184 are generated and updated. Note that the signal that is generated and updated in this processing is a hit signal for the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S2053, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2054.

In addition, in the jackpot game control start setting process of S2053, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2054, the main CPU 2201 performs processing to set round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201, for example, sets the upper limit of the number of openings of the big winning opening 2131 (S2055), sets the jackpot signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2056), and sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". (S2057), a gaming state designation parameter setting process (S2058), and a transmission reservation process for a jackpot start display command (S2059). In addition, by performing the process (S2057) of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the special symbol game determination process ends, the big winning opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed. It happens. After that, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2060, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not the accessory has been released, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating that the accessory has been released.

In S2060, if it is determined that the special symbol has not been released, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (if NO in S2060), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2061. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2060 that the special symbol has been released, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating that the special symbol has been released (YES in S2060), the main CPU 2201 returns the process to S2061. Move.

In S2061, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for game control per accessory release. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal for opening the accessory) to be output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S2061, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2062.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to set the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 can be opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 can be opened, set in this process, is, for example, 1 time. After executing the process of S2062, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2063.

In S2062, the main CPU 2201 performs processes such as setting a signal for opening a special device to the external terminal board 2184 (S2063), setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), setting a game state designation parameter (S2065), and reserving the transmission of a display command for starting a special device to be opened (S2066). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S2064), the V winning device opening preparation process (see S2016 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. Thereafter, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

In S2067, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 98. In addition, when the main CPU 2201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S2051 to S2067) within the interrupt prohibited period.

[3-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2067 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97) will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game ending processing in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first performs time saving management processing (S2071). Since the third pachinko game machine, which is called a 1 type and 2 type mixed machine, is not controlled to a high-accuracy gaming state, the time saving management process executed in the third pachinko game machine is not performed in the first pachinko game machine as shown in FIG. ~ There are some differences from the processing described with reference to FIG. 39. Specifically, in the first pachinko game machine, it was explained that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on when the variable probability flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In the pachinko game machine No. 3, the game is not controlled to a high-precision gaming state. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to on when the variable probability flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. It's different. In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), after determining whether or not the variable probability flag is off (see S191), the condition that the variable probability flag is off is set. Although the process of S192 is performed, the third pachinko game machine differs in that it performs the process of S192 without performing the process of S191 because it is not controlled to the high probability gaming state as described above. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process in S2071, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2072.

In S2072, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". By carrying out the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" in this way, the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to carry out the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After carrying out the process of S2072, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2073.

In S2073, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S2074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S2074, the main CPU 2201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 97).

[3-4-7. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2016 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S2081).

If it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S2081 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S2081 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2082.

In S2082, the main CPU 2201 sets, for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings as the opening pattern of the V winning device 2150 (i.e., the operation pattern of the V attacker 2152). In this embodiment, the opening pattern is set to a maximum of 1800 msec opening only once, but the opening pattern is not limited to this. For example, a maximum of 900 msec opening may be performed a maximum of two times per opening, or the first opening may be performed for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second opening may be performed for a maximum of 1200 msec. Furthermore, multiple opening patterns may be provided for each opening of the role within a total time not exceeding a specified time (for example, 1800 msec), and one of these multiple opening patterns may be set based on, for example, the random number value of the special pattern. After executing the process of S2082, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2083.

In S2083, the main CPU 2201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this processing, processing is performed to generate opening/closing control data for the V winning port 2155. After executing the processing of S2083, the main CPU 2201 transfers the processing to S2084.

In S2084, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S2084), after the completion of this V winning device opening preparation process, the V winning device opening control process (see S2017 in FIG. 94) will be held. After executing the process in S2084, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2085.

In S2085, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2085, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2086.

In S2086, the main CPU 2201 performs a transmission reservation process for the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2086, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device open preparation process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-8. V winning device opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 100, a V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2017 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 100 is a flowchart showing an example of a V winning device opening control process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S2091).

If it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (NO in S2091), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S2091), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2092.

In S2092, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the V winning device 2150 when the opening and closing winning port 2151 was opened by the operation of the V attacker 2152 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winning game balls that entered the V winning device 2150, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203.

If it is determined in S2092 that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 2150 is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S2092 is judged as NO), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2093.

On the other hand, in S2092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 2150 is the maximum winning number (YES in S2092), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2094.

In S2093, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the V prize winning device 2150 (that is, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing prize opening 2151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum open time set in the process of S2082 (see FIG. 99) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (if S2093 is a NO determination), the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (if S2093 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2094.

In S2094, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 2150 (ie, the opening/closing winning opening 2151). After executing the process in S2094, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2095.

In S2095, the main CPU 2201 determines whether or not a V entry has been detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the V entry port 2155 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not detection has occurred by the V entry port switch 2156). Note that the above-mentioned specified time may be any time related to the entry of a game ball into the V entry device 2150, and may be, for example, within a specified time from when the V attacker 2152 begins to operate, or within a specified time from when the game ball is released from the engagement by the engagement member 2160, etc.

If it is determined in S2095 that a V win has been detected (if S2095 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2096.

In S2096, the main CPU 2201 performs a start setting process for the V winning game control. In this process, a signal (eg, per-V signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 2186 (see FIG. 88) via the external terminal board 2184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 10 rounds is executed as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 91), so the player can understand that the jackpot game control process is executed. As in the case of this game, you can win a large amount of prize balls. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V winning game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and called, but the V winning game control can also be called the jackpot game control process. After executing the process in S2096, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2097.

In addition, in the start setting process of the V winning game control in S2096, the main CPU 2201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S2097, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this processing, the opening of the V winning device 2150 (that is, the operation of the V attacker 2152) that is first executed based on the opening of the accessory object is processed as a round game of the first round. That is, the V winning game control that is executed when it is determined that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S2095) is started from the second round of the round game. After executing the process in S2097, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2098.

In S2098, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 2150 is opened (i.e., the number of times the V attacker 2152 is operated) (S2099), a process of setting a V hit signal to the external terminal board 2184 (S2100), a process of setting the control state number of the special pattern to "5" (S2101), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S2102), and a process of reserving the transmission of a V hit start display command (S2103). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special pattern to "5" (S2101), a process of preparing to open the large winning port (see S2018 in FIG. 94) is performed after the special pattern game judgment process is completed. The main CPU 2201 then ends the special pattern game determination process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2095, if it is determined in S2095 that there is no V win detection (NO determination in S2095), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2104.

In S2104, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the processing of S2104, the main CPU 2201 ends the V winning device opening control processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-9. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 101, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2018 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 94) will be described. Fig. 101 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S2111).

If it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S2111), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S2111), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2112.

In S2112, the main CPU 2201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in the jackpot game state. The round counter count value (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203. After executing the process of S2112, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2113.

In S2113, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of times the jackpot opening has been opened is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of times the round play has been performed in the jackpot play state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S2113 that the number of openings of the big prize opening is the upper limit value (YES in S2113), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2114.

In S2114, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S2114), the jackpot end process (see S2020 in FIG. 94) will be performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S2114, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2115.

In S2115, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S2116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S2116, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

Returning to S2113, if it is determined that the number of openings of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S2113), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2117.

In S2117, the main CPU 2201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S2117, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2118.

In S2118, the main CPU 2201 performs selection processing of the big winning opening to be opened. This process is started when the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 95) is a jackpot, and a stop display mode indicating the jackpot is derived (YES is determined in S2052 in FIG. 97). In the case of the jackpot game control process, the big winning hole 2131 is selected as the big winning hole to be opened. On the other hand, the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory, a stop display mode indicating the opening of the accessory is derived (YES is determined in S2060 in FIG. 97), and a V winning is detected (in FIG. 100 (YES in S2095), the V winning device 2150 (that is, the opening/closing winning hole 2151) is selected as the big winning hole to be opened. After executing the process in S2118, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2119.

In S2119, the main CPU 2201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150, the number of winning balls when the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is won, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize opening device 2150 is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing S2119, the main CPU 2201 transfers processing to S2120.

The above "large prize opening 2131 or V prize device 2150" corresponds to the large prize opening selected in S2118 as the large prize opening to be opened between the large prize opening 2131 and the V prize device 2150. The same applies to the following processing.

In S2120, the main CPU 2201 performs a big winning opening opening/closing control process. In this process, a process of generating opening/closing control data for the big prize opening 2131 or the V prize winning device 2150 is performed. After executing the process in S2120, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2121.

In S2121, the main CPU 2201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S2121), the large prize opening opening control process (see S2019 in FIG. 94) is performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S2121, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2122.

In S2122, the main CPU 2201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S2122, the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2123.

In S2123, the main CPU 2201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S2123, the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-10. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the third pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special pattern is "6" (S2131).

If it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (NO in S2131), the main CPU 2201 ends the big winning opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 94). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (YES in S2131), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2132.

In S2132, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening count switch 2132 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of winning game balls in the large prize opening 2131, or the V attacker count switch 2153 (see FIG. 88), which counts the number of game balls that have entered the V prize device 2150, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the large prize opening count switch 2132 or the V attacker count switch 2153 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 2203.

If it is determined in S2132 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150 is not the maximum number of prizes (if S2132 returns a NO judgment), the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2133.

On the other hand, in S2132, if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 is the maximum number of winnings (YES in S2132), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2134. .

In S2133, the main CPU 2201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S2119 in FIG. 101) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has not elapsed (NO in S2133), the main CPU 2201 ends the grand prize opening control process and continues the process. Return to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2133 that the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 2131 or the V winning device 2150 has elapsed (YES in S2133), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2134.

In S2134, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to close the large prize opening 2131 or the V prize device 2150. After executing the process of S2134, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2135.

In S2135, the main CPU 2201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S2135), the large prize opening preparation process (see S2018 in FIG. 94) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S2135, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2136.

In S2136, the main CPU 2201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S2136, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2137.

In S2137, the main CPU 2201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S2137, the main CPU 2201 ends the large prize opening control process, and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94).

[3-4-11. Jackpot end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 2201 in S2020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94) will be described with reference to Fig. 103. Fig. 103 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the third pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 2201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S2141).

If it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (NO in S2141), the main CPU 2201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94). , returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

When it is determined in S2141 that the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (YES in S2141), the main CPU 2201 moves the process to S2142.

In S2142, the main CPU 2201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags (e.g., a probability change flag, a time-saving flag, etc.) are set, and the values of various counters (e.g., a probability change counter, a time-saving counter, a number of confirmed symbols counter, a round counter, a large prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S2142, the main CPU 2201 transfers the process to S2143.

In S2143, the main CPU 2201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 98 is performed. After executing the process of S2143, the main CPU 2201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 94), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 93). In this case, as described above, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 2201 set an interrupt prohibited section and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[4. Expansion example]
Below, an example of expansion common to the first pachinko game machine, second pachinko game machine, and third pachinko game machine described above will be explained. In addition, since the symbols given to each component are different depending on the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine, and the third pachinko game machine, in the following explanation, a specific pachinko game machine (especially the third pachinko game machine) Reference numerals are omitted unless the explanation is limited to Pachinko gaming machines.

[4-1. Extended example of variable control]
In the first pachinko gaming machine and the second pachinko gaming machine, it is determined whether or not to set the probability variation flag on depending on the type of jackpot, and when the probability variation flag is set to on, the number of probability variations is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the following embodiments may be used.

For example, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the jackpot, and if it is determined that at least one game ball has passed through the specific area, the jackpot It may be a so-called V probability change machine that sets a probability change flag to ON at the end of the game control process. In addition, the above-mentioned specific area can be set to an open state where the game ball can pass through or easily, and an open state where the game ball cannot enter, for example, by operating a movable member in a specific round game during the execution of the jackpot game control process. It is possible to displace it into a closed state that is possible or difficult.

In such a V-type high probability machine, for example, the ease with which the game ball passes through the above-mentioned specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process, i.e., the probability that the high probability flag will be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process, may be different between when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a jackpot, as will be described later with reference to Figures 104 to 107.

Figure 104 is an example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the jackpot opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example, and shows a case where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode, and (C) the opening mode of the specific area is the third opening mode. Note that the first opening mode and the second opening mode are modes in which it is easy for the game ball to pass through to the specific area, and the third opening mode is a mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through to the specific area. Note that in the example shown in Figure 104, the specific area is controlled to be in an open state by time control.

Note that, although FIG. 104 shows the large prize opening being opened for a short time and then opened for a long time, the opening manner of the large prize opening is not limited to this.

As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the first opening mode, the specific area is open while the large prize opening is open, except for a predetermined time after the long opening of the large prize opening has begun. Therefore, while the jackpot game control process is being executed, it is easy for at least one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. In other words, the special probability flag is likely to be set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. However, if no game balls have passed through the specific area despite the specific area being open, the special probability flag is not set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

Also, as shown in FIG. 104(B), in the second opening mode, the specific area is in an open state from the start of the short opening of the large prize opening to the end of the long opening of the large prize opening. Therefore, while the jackpot game control process is being executed, it is extremely easy for at least one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area. In other words, the special probability flag is very easily set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if the specific area is in an open state but no game balls have passed through the specific area, the special probability flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 104(C), in the third opening mode, the specific area is closed except for the time when the large prize opening is short-open and for a predetermined time after the large prize opening has started to be long-opened (both of these times are short). Therefore, compared to either the first or second opening mode, it is more difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control. In other words, it is difficult for the probability variable flag to be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, even if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability variable flag will be set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

In addition, in FIG. 104, during execution of the jackpot game control process, as an example of the opening mode of the specific area where it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. , an example in which two modes, a first open mode and a second open mode, are provided has been described. However, during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which at least one game ball out of the plurality of game balls that entered the big winning hole can easily pass through the specific area is limited to two. There may be only one mode or three or more modes.

In addition, FIG. 104 describes an example of a third opening mode as an example of a specific area opening mode in which it is difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process. However, the number of opening modes of the specific area in which it is difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize opening to pass through the specific area during execution of the jackpot game control process is not limited to one mode, and two or more modes may be provided.

FIG. 105 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the expanded example. According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 2. The special symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. That is, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a jackpot, the hit selection symbol command will select, for example, "z0" with a 40% selection rate and "z1" with a 10% selection rate. "z2" is selected with a selection rate of 50%. Additionally, if the result of the second special symbol's hit determination process is a jackpot, the hit selection symbol command will select, for example, "z3" with a 15% selection rate and "z4" with a 50% selection rate. "z5" is selected with a selection rate of 35%.

Figure 106 is an example of a jackpot type determination table in an extended example. According to the jackpot type determination table shown in this Figure 106, the type of jackpot (for example, the number of rounds, the opening mode of the specific area, etc.) is determined as follows. That is, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z0", the number of rounds is "3" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the third opening mode (3R normal jackpot A). Also, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z1", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the third opening mode (10R normal jackpot A). Also, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z2", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the first opening mode (10R certainty jackpot A). Also, when the winning time selection pattern command is "z3", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be a jackpot of the third opening mode (10R normal jackpot B). If the symbol command for selecting a winning combination is "z4", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the first opening mode of the winning combination (10R special winning combination B). If the symbol command for selecting a winning combination is "z5", the number of rounds is "10" and the opening mode of the specific area is determined to be the second opening mode of the winning combination (10R special winning combination C).

That is, according to the above-mentioned Figs. 104 to 106, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit, the type of the hit is determined to be 3R normal hit A with a selection rate of 40%, 10R normal hit A with a selection rate of 10%, and 10R sure-win A with a selection rate of 50%. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit, the type of the hit is determined to be 10R normal hit B with a selection rate of 15%, 10R sure-win B with a selection rate of 50%, and 10R sure-win C with a selection rate of 35. In this way, it is possible to make the probability that the sure-win flag is set to ON at the end of the hit game control process different between when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a hit.

In addition, in a specific round of play during execution of the jackpot game control process, the specific area is not limited to being opened by time control as shown in Figures 104 (A) to (C), but may be opened in response to a game ball entering a jackpot opening, for example, as shown in Figure 107 described below.

FIG. 107 is another example of a time chart showing the relationship between the opening timing of the big winning opening and the opening timing of the specific area in a specific round game during execution of the jackpot game control process of the extended example (the specific area is the big winning opening timing). An example in which the opening state is controlled based on winning in the mouth), where (A) the opening mode of the specific area is the first opening mode, (B) the opening mode of the specific area is the second opening mode. It is a figure which shows when it is an open aspect.

As shown in FIG. 107(A), in the first opening mode of another example, after the grand prize opening is opened, the first game ball enters the grand prize opening, and the grand prize opening is counted. When the winning of the first game ball is detected by the switch, the specific area is kept open for a certain period of time based on this detection. Then, when the second game ball enters the big winning hole and the winning of the second game ball is detected by the big winning hole count switch, the big winning hole becomes closed based on this detection. Until then, the specific area will be open. Therefore, during execution of the jackpot game control process, it is easy for at least one game ball among the plurality of game balls that have entered the big winning hole to pass through the specific area. That is, the probability change flag is likely to be set on at the end of the jackpot game control process. However, as described above, if no game ball passes through the specific area even though the specific area is open, the probability change flag is not set to ON at the end of the jackpot game control process.

Also, as shown in FIG. 107(B), in the second opening mode of another example, after the large prize winning hole is opened, the specific area is opened for a certain period of time only when the first game ball enters the large prize winning hole and the entry of the first game ball is detected by the large prize winning hole count switch. Even if the second game ball enters the large prize winning hole and the entry of the second game ball is detected by the large prize winning hole count switch, the specific area does not become open and remains closed until the winning hole is closed. Therefore, during the execution of the large prize game control, it is more difficult for even one of the multiple game balls that have entered the large prize winning hole to pass through the specific area compared to the first opening mode. In other words, it is difficult for the probability variable flag to be set to ON at the end of the large prize game control process. However, even in this case, if it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area while the jackpot game control is being executed, if the game ball passes through the specific area at the right time, the probability of winning flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

In the above, an example was described in which if the game ball passes through a specific area while the jackpot game control process is being executed, the probability variable flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the game ball passes through a specific area while the jackpot game control process is being executed, the time-saving flag may be set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends. This type of specification is particularly effective in the case of a type 1/type 2 mixed machine, such as a third type pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the above, an example was described in which the same opening pattern is set as the opening pattern of the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, but this is not limited to this, and for example, an opening pattern dedicated to the first special symbol and an opening pattern dedicated to the second special symbol may be set.

In addition, in the above, an example was described in which the third mode may be determined to be one in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a hit and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a hit, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured so that when the result of the hit determination process for either one of the special symbols (e.g. the second special symbol) is a hit, only a mode in which it is easy for at least one game ball to pass through the specific area (the first mode or the second mode) is determined.

Also, in the above, in the third mode in which it is difficult for game balls to pass through to the specific area, the specific area is in an open state twice (both for a short period of time) while the large prize opening is short-open and for a predetermined period of time after the large prize opening starts to be long-opened; however, if it is difficult for game balls to pass through to the specific area, the specific area may be in an open state once or multiple times.

In addition, a specific area may be closed when a predetermined opening time has elapsed, the round in which the specific area is open ends, or when a specified number of big winning openings or a prize is entered in the specific area. It may also be controlled to do the following. Furthermore, one or more conditions for closing may be combined.

It may also be a so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot game state and the game state in which the probability variable control is executed (for example, a high probability time-saving game state, a high probability non-time-saving game state, etc.) are alternately executed repeatedly until a predetermined upper limit number (hereinafter referred to as the "limiter number") is reached. In such a limiter machine, when the above-mentioned number of repetitions (hereinafter referred to as the "loop number") reaches a predetermined limiter number, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the probability variable control is not executed (for example, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, etc.). At this time, the loop number is also reset. In such a gaming machine, the limiter number may be a fixed number, or may be determined according to, for example, the random number value of the special pattern, or may be determined by a predetermined lottery. In addition, if it is a setting machine, the limiter number may be different depending on the setting value.

In addition, although the so-called limiter machine in which the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state in which probability variable control is executed are alternately and repeatedly executed until the limiter number of times is reached is described above, the jackpot gaming state is not limited to this, and for example, the jackpot gaming state and the game state in which the time saving control is executed may be alternately and repeatedly executed until a limiter number of times is reached. This is particularly effective in the case of a machine that mixes one type and two types, such as the third pachinko game machine.

In addition, in the case of the above-mentioned V-type high probability machine, if the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, the game state in which the high probability control is executed continues. Therefore, in such a V-type high probability machine, if the limiter number is, for example, N times, when the game ball passes through a specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, it is considered that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, and the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the high probability control is not executed. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the specific area during the execution of the Nth jackpot game control process, although it is not considered that the predetermined limiter number has been reached, since the game ball has not passed through the specific area during the execution of the jackpot game control process, even in such a case, the game state after the jackpot game control process is completed is controlled to a game state in which the high probability control is not executed. The same applies to gaming machines in which, if a gaming ball passes through a specific area while a jackpot game control process is being executed, the time-saving flag is set to ON when the jackpot game control process ends.

In addition, after the jackpot game control process is completed, the game state is controlled such that the probability change control is executed until a predetermined number of special symbol games are played (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.), and a predetermined It may be a so-called ST machine that shifts to a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.) in which probability change control is not executed when a special symbol game is played a number of times. In such a gaming machine, the number of special symbol games (hereinafter referred to as "ST number") in which probability variable control is executed may be a fixed number or may be different each time. Further, if it is a setting device, the expected value of the number of STs may be made to differ depending on the setting value. Furthermore, it may be a so-called falling type gaming machine in which, for example, a falling lottery is performed and probability variable control is terminated based on the result of the falling lottery, or for example, when a game ball passes through a specific area during a jackpot gaming state. , it may be a so-called V probability variable type gaming machine in which probability variable control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

[4-2. Example of time-saving control extension]
In the first pachinko game machine, the second pachinko game machine and the third pachinko game machine, if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a jackpot, the time-saving control can be executed after the jackpot game control process is completed, but the time-saving control may also be executed even if the result of the special pattern hit determination process is not a jackpot.

For example, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a miss, a time-saving hit/miss determination process may be performed separately from the special symbol hit determination process to determine whether or not to execute time-saving control, using a specific random number value (e.g., a random number value for special symbol hit determination, a pattern random number value of a special symbol, etc.) from among the random number values extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole. When a time-saving hit/miss determination is performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit or a miss, for example, when the pattern random number value of a special symbol extracted based on the entry of a game ball into the starting hole is a specific pattern random number value, it can be determined to be a "time-saving hit" in which time-saving control is executed. Note that the time-saving hit/miss determination process may also be performed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit.

Furthermore, when performing the time-saving win/loss determination process separately from the special symbol hit/loss determination process, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be performed in the same frame prior to the special symbol hit/loss determination process.

In addition, when performing the above-mentioned time-saving winning/losing judgment process, a random number for time-saving winning/losing judgment that is exclusively used for the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is generated within a predetermined range, and, for example, the time-saving winning/losing judgment is performed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting slot. A random number value may be extracted, and the extracted time-saving win/loss random number may be used to perform the time-saving win/loss determination process.

In addition, it is not essential that the random numerical value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process be extracted based on the fact that a game ball has won in the starting opening, but may be extracted from other areas (for example, general winning opening, small winning opening, etc.). The selection may be made based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize (such as a big prize opening). Furthermore, for example, a dedicated area is provided that triggers the execution of the time-saving win/loss determination process, and a random value to be used in the time-saving win/loss determination process is extracted based on, for example, a game ball passing through this dedicated area. You can do it like this.

By the way, for example, if the time-saving winning/losing judgment process and the special symbol winning/losing judging process are executed at different timings, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed during the variable display of the special symbol, which will derive a stop display mode that indicates a jackpot when it is confirmed to be displayed. The result of this time-saving win/loss determination process may be a "time-saving win". In such a case, the main CPU may, for example, forcefully derive a display mode that indicates "time saving loss" even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win".

The sub-CPU also preferably controls the display of a performance image (such as a decorative pattern change performance or a character display performance) on the display device that allows or makes it easy to understand from the outside whether the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is a "time-saving win" or a "time-saving miss." In this case, the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is displayed on the display device separately from the result of the special pattern win/loss judgment process, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, instead of displaying on the display device an effect image that makes it possible or easy to grasp from the outside whether the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning" or a "time-saving losing" result, it is also possible to execute control to display on the display device an effect image (for example, a decorative pattern change effect or a character display effect, etc.) that makes it impossible or difficult to grasp from the outside whether the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is a "time-saving winning" or a "time-saving losing" result. In this case, it is possible to maintain interest until the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is disclosed.

In addition, in a general pachinko game machine, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the sub-CPU displays a performance image that indicates, for example, a right-hand hit instruction as a recommended method of firing a game ball in a jackpot game state. The information is controlled to be displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device). In this regard, in this embodiment, even if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is not a jackpot, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving hit", the sub CPU The display device is controlled to display an effect image indicating, for example, an instruction to hit to the right as a recommended game ball firing method. However, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving win", a presentation image showing a recommended method of launching game balls when time-saving control is executed may be always displayed on the display device. However, it may be displayed only when a specific condition is met. For example, if the number of time reductions set based on "per time reduction" is a predetermined number of times or more (for example, two or more times), it will be displayed, but if it is less than a predetermined number of times (for example, less than two times), it will not be displayed. You can do it like this. Note that the above-mentioned specific conditions are not limited to the number of time reductions, but may be any conditions as appropriate.

In addition, if the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed before the special symbol hit determination process is executed, the sub CPU will perform the following operations under the condition of "time-saving win" (i.e., under the situation where the time-saving flag is set to ON) Control may be executed to display on the display device an effect image that can be visually or easily grasped to determine whether or not the special symbol hit determination process is to be executed.

The following is a summary of the processes related to time-saving, such as the type of random number used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the timing of extracting the random number used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the conditions for judging a time-saving winning/losing in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the execution timing of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the game state in which the time-saving winning/losing judgment process can be executed, the state of the time-saving game state, the number of time-saving times set when a time-saving winning/losing is achieved, the start timing of the time-saving game state, the end timing of the time-saving game state, the timing of rewriting the number of time-saving times, the probability of winning the time-saving game, and the display of the results of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process.

(Type of random numbers used in time-saving winning/losing judgment processing)
The random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be any of a plurality of types of random number values, such as a random number value for special symbol winning judgment, a random number value for special symbol determination, a random number value for normal winning judgment, a random number value for normal symbol determination, a random number value for special symbol fall judgment, and a dedicated random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment. In addition, in the case of a setting machine, when the setting is changed, the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed using the changed setting value.

In addition, the random number value used in the time-saving winning/losing determination process is not limited to one type (for example, only a random number value for time-saving winning/losing determination), but may be determined using multiple types of random number values (for example, a random number value for determining whether a special pattern has been won and a random number value for determining the pattern).

(Random value extraction timing used for time-saving win/loss determination process)
The extraction timing of the random number value used in the time-saving win/loss judgment process is when the game ball enters the starting hole, which is the trigger for the special symbol hit determination process, and when the game ball passes through the passage gate, which is the trigger for the normal symbol hit determination process. The timing may be arbitrary, such as when the game ball passes through a dedicated area that triggers the execution of the time-saving win/loss determination process. In addition, the extraction of random numbers used in the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be performed based on winnings in a specific winning opening where prize balls are paid out, or based on winnings in a specific winning hole etc. where prize balls are paid out, or based on winnings in a specific winning gate etc. where prize balls are not paid out. It may also be based on passage to the mouth or the like.

In addition, if the random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment processing is extracted based on the winning (passage) of the game ball to the starting port, the game ball will be able to win regardless of whether the game ball enters the first starting port or the second starting port. Even if there is, the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination may be extracted, or the random number value for time-saving win/loss determination may be extracted only when a game ball enters one of the specific starting slots.

(Conditions for determining a time-saving win in the time-saving win/loss determination process)
When performing time-saving winning/losing judgment processing using the extracted random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment, the extracted random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment is a specific random value for time-saving winning/losing judgment (for example, specific time-saving winning/losing judgment value data). It is preferable to determine that the time is saved at a certain time. In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss judgment process using the random value for special symbol hit judgment, the time-saving judgment process is performed when specific loss judgment value data, specific small hit judgment value data, and/or specific jackpot judgment value data are used. It is better to make it so that it is determined as a hit. In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the symbol random number value of the special symbol, it is recommended that a time-saving win is determined when a specific losing symbol, a specific small winning symbol, or a specific jackpot symbol is used. . In addition, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the special symbol fall determination random value data, it is preferable that the time-saving win is determined when the special symbol fall determination random value data is specific. Furthermore, when executing the time-saving win/loss determination process using the changed setting value, it is preferable that the time-saving win is determined when the setting value is changed to a specific setting value. The same applies to the case where the time-saving win/loss determination process is performed using the random number value for normal hit determination or the random number value for normal symbol determination. Furthermore, the conditions under which it is determined that the time-saving win or loss is achieved in the time-saving win/loss determination process are not limited to the above-mentioned conditions, but can be arbitrarily determined to be various conditions.

In addition, in the third pachinko gaming machine, even if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win", the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is a hit when the accessory is released. In addition, if the game ball that enters the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 opens passes through the V winning opening 2155, the execution or non-execution of time saving control and the number of times saving are determined according to the type of opening of the accessory. It is better to do this. Then, even though the result of the special symbol hit determination process is that the accessory has been opened and the V attacker 2152 has opened it, the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control process is executed. If not, the main CPU 2201 may decide whether to execute the time-saving control and the number of times of time-saving based on the "time-saving win" if the result of the time-saving determination process is "time-saving win". However, if the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving loss" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "accessory release hit", and the game ball enters the V winning device 2150 when the V attacker 2152 releases it. does not pass through the V winning hole 2155, time saving control is not executed.

(Execution timing of time-saving win/loss judgment process)
When executing the time-saving win/loss determination process at the start of the variable display of the special symbol using the random value for time-saving win/loss determination acquired based on the winning (passing) of the game ball in the starting hole, the main CPU uses the special symbol startup information. Similarly, it is recommended to hold the acquired random number value for time-saving win/loss determination.

Further, the main CPU may execute the time-saving win/loss determination process immediately after extracting the random number value to be used in the time-saving win/loss determination process (for example, before being put on hold), or may suspend the extracted random number value, The time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed before the variable display of the special symbols is started, or the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed at the start of the variable display of the special symbols.

(Game state in which time-saving winning/losing judgment processing can be executed)
The time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed in any of the normal game state, the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the time-saving game state, or may be executed only in a game state in which the time-saving control is not executed (for example, the normal game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, etc.). In addition, for example, a condition for executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be determined in advance, such as executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process in any game state, or executing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process only in a specific game state, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be executed when the determined condition is satisfied.

(Mode of time-saving control)
The mode of time-saving control executed according to the type of jackpot and the mode of time-saving control executed according to the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process may be the same or different. For example, a first time-saving flag and a second time-saving flag may be prepared, and when the time-saving control is executed according to the type of jackpot, the first time-saving flag may be set to on, and when the time-saving control is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, the second time-saving flag may be set to on. In this case, when the first time-saving flag is set to on and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, it is preferable to execute time-saving control with different functions. For example, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, both the special chart shortening control and the electric support control are performed, and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, only one of the special chart shortening control and the electric support control is performed. Also, when the first time-saving flag is set to on, the first time-saving game state is controlled in which only the special chart shortening control is performed among the special chart shortening control and the electric support control, and when the second time-saving flag is set to on, the second time-saving game state is controlled in which only the electric support control is performed among the special chart shortening control and the electric support control. However, which of the multiple time-saving flags is set to on is not limited to the above, and may be determined based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process, for example, or may be determined according to the game state when the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is executed.

(Number of time reductions set when time reduction is applied)
It is preferable that the number of time reductions set when the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win" is determined according to the gaming state when the time saving win/loss determination process is performed. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if multiple random numbers for time-saving win/loss determination are specified as time-saving win/loss determination value data, the number of time savings to be set may be set to the gaming state when the time-saving win/loss determination process is performed. Alternatively or in addition, the determination may be made in accordance with the extracted random number value for time-saving win/loss determination. For example, if the random number value for time-saving winning/losing judgment extracted based on the winning of a game ball in the starting slot is the first time-saving winning judgment value data, the number of time-savings is determined to be "100", and the second time-saving In the case of hit determination value data, it corresponds to determining the number of time saving times to be "50".

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed even in a gaming state where the time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of this time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving winning/losing". ”, the main CPU may newly set the number of time savings determined based on the “time saving per unit” in place of the remaining number of time savings (that is, reset the remaining number of time savings). In this case, the degree of profit for the player changes depending on whether the newly set number of time savers is greater or less than the remaining number of time savers, broadening the range of game play, and adding interest to the time saver game state when the time saver flag is on. This makes it possible to increase interest.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed even in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (for example, a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU may add the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving win" to the remaining number of time-saving times. In this case, the number of time-saving times will never be less than the current remaining number of time-saving times, allowing the player to play with peace of mind in a game state in which time-saving control is executed.

In addition, the time-saving win/loss determination process may be executed even in a game state in which time-saving control is executed (e.g., a high-probability time-saving game state, a time-saving game state, etc.), and if the result of this time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU may predetermine one of two processes: a process of replacing the remaining number of time-saving wins with the number of time-saving wins determined based on the "time-saving win" and setting it as a new number, or a process of adding the number of time-saving wins determined based on the "time-saving win" to the remaining number of time-saving wins, and set the number of time-saving wins in a manner that satisfies the predetermine condition.

In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine in which time-saving control is executed with different functions depending on whether the first time-saving flag is set to on or the second time-saving flag is set to on, the time-saving win/loss determination process If the result is "per time saving", the main CPU controls whether the time saving control being executed and the time saving control executed based on "per time saving" are the same function's time saving control or the time saving control of different functions. The process for setting the number of time reductions may be different depending on whether it is control or not. For example, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "per-time saving" are time-saving controls with the same function, the number of time-savings determined based on the "per-time saving" is set as the remaining number of time-savings. If the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "per-time saving" are time-saving controls of different functions, the time-saving control being executed is based on the "per-time saving" instead of the remaining number of time-savings being executed. The determined number of time reductions may be newly set (that is, the remaining number of time reductions may be reset). In addition, if the time-saving control being executed and the time-saving control executed based on the "time-saving hit" are time-saving controls of different functions, the time-saving control based on the "time-saving hit" will be applied after the remaining number of running time savings has been exhausted. Control may also be executed.

In addition, when setting the number of time savings based on the fact that the result of the time saving win/fail determination process is "time saving win", the number of time saving times may be set to "0". That is, when the number of time savings to be set is determined to be "0", the time saving flag is set on even though the result of the time saving win/loss determination process is "time saving win". Furthermore, if the result of the time saving win/fail judgment process performed during the execution of the time saving control is "time saving win" and the number of time saving times is set to "0", the running time saving control ends.

(Time-saving control start timing)
The timing for starting the time-saving control, which is executed based on the result of the time-saving hit/loss determination process being a "time-saving hit," can be the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a miss, the time-saving control can be started based on the passage of the special symbol determination time during which the special symbol is determined. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the time-saving control can be started based on the end of the small hit game control process. Also, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit, the time-saving control can be started based on the end of the big hit game control process.

The start timing of the time-saving control that is executed based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process being "time-saving winning" is the end of the special symbol game, and the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is changed to the special symbol winning/losing judgment process in the same frame. If it is done in advance, even if the result of the time-saving win/loss judgment process is a "time-saving win", if the result of the special symbol hit judgment process is a jackpot, the "time-saving win" is invalidated (based on the "time-saving win"). It is preferable to set the time saving flag to on based on the winning selection symbol command (the time saving flag may not be set to on depending on the type of jackpot).

Further, the start timing of the time saving control that is executed based on the result of the time saving win/loss determination process being a "time saving win" is not limited to the end of the special symbol game. For example, if the time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed before the special symbol winning/losing judgment process in the same frame, the time-saving control may be started immediately (before the special symbol winning/losing judgment process is performed) based on the result of the time-saving winning/losing judgment process. good. In this case, the gaming state (i.e., whether time-saving control is executed or not) may be different between when the random number value used for the time-saving win/loss determination process is extracted and when the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed, which can increase interest. becomes.

Furthermore, the start timing of the time-saving control that is executed based on the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process being a "time-saving win" may be set after a predetermined number of games have been played. In this case, after the result of the time saving win/loss determination process becomes "time saving win", until the time saving control is started, the sub CPU can perform an incitement effect to determine whether or not the time saving control will start. It is possible to increase interest.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, if the jackpot game control is executed based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process being a jackpot (a jackpot in which time-saving control is executed), this jackpot game control is terminated. Based on this, the time saving control based on the jackpot may be started. In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the opening of the accessory (the opening of the accessory for which time-saving control is executed) and the V attacker 2152 releases the game ball, the passage of the game ball to the V prize opening 2155 is Even when the jackpot game control is executed due to the detection, it is preferable that the time saving control is started based on the end of the jackpot game control. In addition, even if the V attacker 2152 opens based on the fact that the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is "time-saving win" and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S2023 in FIG. 68) is that the accessory is released. Regardless, if the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 2155 is not detected and the jackpot game control is not executed, the main CPU executes the time saving based on the "time saving win" based on the opening/closing winning opening 2151 being closed. It is a good idea to start controlling.

(Timing of end of time-saving gaming state)
The timing at which the time-saving gaming state ends is, for example, ``in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed, when the variable display of special symbols is executed for the set number of time-savings,'' or ``in the gaming state where the time-saving control is executed.'' , "When the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process" or "When the time-saving number is set to 0 even though the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a time-saving hit", etc. It is.

In addition, if a small win game control process is executed based on the results of the special symbol hit determination process during a game state in which time-saving control is executed, time-saving control will continue to be executed even after the small win game control process ends.

In the third pachinko game machine, if the opening and closing winning hole 2151 is opened when the special symbol hit determination process derives a stopped symbol pattern indicating a jackpot opening hit during the execution of the time-saving control, but the passage of the game ball into the V winning hole 2155 is not detected when the V attacker 2152 opens, and the jackpot game control process is not started, the main CPU 2201 continues to execute the time-saving control even after the opening and closing winning hole 2151 is closed.

(Time saving number of rewrites)
When the time-saving win/loss determination process is executed in a gaming state where time-saving control is executed (for example, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, time-saving gaming state, etc.), and the result of the time-saving winning/losing determination process is "time-saving win", the main CPU The number of time savings may be rewritten, or the number of time savings may not be rewritten (that is, the time saving control may be executed until the number of time savings in the currently executed time saving control is exhausted).

When rewriting the number of time-saving times, the main CPU may rewrite (set) the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving hit" when the number of time-saving times in the currently running time-saving control has been consumed, or may set it when the special pattern hit determination process is executed, or may set it when the variable display of the special pattern starts or stops, or may set it during the time-saving hit/loss determination process, and may set it at various times. When setting it during the time-saving hit/loss determination process, the number of time-saving times determined based on the "time-saving hit" will overwrite the number of time-saving times in the currently running time-saving control. Also, it may be set in advance to either "rewrite the number of time-saving times" or "add to the previous number of time-saving times," and the number of time-saving times may be set in a manner that satisfies this predetermined condition.

(Probability of time saving)
When performing the time-saving winning/losing judgment process based on the winning of a game ball in the first starting opening or the second starting opening, The time-saving win/loss determination process (hereinafter referred to as the "second time-saving win/loss determination process") is performed based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting slot. may be different. For example, the time-saving winning probability when the second time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed may be higher than the winning-time winning probability when the first time-saving winning/losing judgment process is performed, or The probability of winning in time saving when the first time saving winning/losing determination process is performed may be higher than the probability of winning in time saving when the first time saving winning/losing determination process is performed and the second time saving winning/losing determination process The time saving probability may be set to be the same or almost the same in the case where the above is performed.

(Result display of time-saving win/fail judgment process)
A time-saving win/loss determination result display section that displays the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process (whether the time-saving success or failure), and/or the number of time-saving decisions determined based on the result of the time-saving win/fail determination process (time-saving win). A winning time reduction number display unit may be provided to display the number of shortened winning times. It is preferable that the time-saving winning/losing determination result display section and/or the winning time-saving number display section be provided in an LED display group including a special symbol display section, etc., and controlled by the main CPU. However, instead of or in addition to this, the sub-CPU may display, on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, the result of the time-saving determination process and/or the number of time-savings determined based on the time-saving win. good.

(interval)
If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss and the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving win," the main CPU determines the interval time after stopping the variable display of the special symbol in the game, The interval time may be longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss and the result of the time-saving win/loss determination process is a "time-saving loss". In addition, since the variable display of the decorative pattern is synchronized with the variable display of the special pattern, in this case, the sub-CPU displays a performance image indicating "time saving win" until the above-mentioned interval time elapses, for example, on the liquid crystal display. It is preferable to display on a display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the third pachinko game machine, when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a hit to open the special feature and the jackpot game control process is not executed based on this hit to open the special feature, the main CPU 2201 may set the interval time after the end of the operation related to the hit to open the special feature when the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving hit" longer than the above-mentioned interval time when the result of the time-saving hit determination process is a "time-saving miss", or may set it to the same or approximately the same time.

[4-3. Examples of extensions related to management of game media]
The first, second and third pachinko game machines described in this specification can be applied to all gaming machines in which a game is played using a gaming medium and a bonus (e.g., prize balls, prize data, etc.) is awarded based on the result of the game. In other words, not only can the game be played by shooting or inserting a gaming medium (e.g., a gaming ball, a medal, etc.) by a physical action of a player, and the gaming medium is paid out based on the result of the game, but the main control circuit itself can electromagnetically manage the gaming medium held by the player and enable a game to be played by circulating the enclosed gaming balls or a medal-less game. In addition, the electromagnetic management of the gaming medium held by the player can be a gaming medium management device that is attached (connected) to the main control circuit and manages the gaming medium.

In the case of a gaming machine that plays games by circulating enclosed gaming balls, the gaming balls as gaming media are configured so that they can be played without being discharged to the outside, so when a prize is won, the prize balls are paid out. Instead, prize ball data as game media is provided. In this specification, the term "payout game value" includes both prize balls and prize ball data. For example, if a prize is entered into a winning slot with a number of prize balls of 15, if the game machine is an enclosed type game machine, prize ball data with a value corresponding to the 15 prize balls will be given. Furthermore, the gaming value is not necessarily limited to the prize ball or prize ball data, but may be anything that corresponds to the prize ball or prize ball data.

In addition, when the game media are managed by a game media management device connected to the main control circuit, the game media management device is a device having a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and installed in the game machine, and is connected to an external game media handling device (not shown) via a specified interface with a two-way communication function, and can perform the operation of lending game media (i.e., the operation of providing game media necessary for the player to insert game media), or the operation of paying out game media when a winning combination related to the payout of game media is won (the winning combination is established) (i.e., the operation of making the player acquire the game media necessary for the payout of game media), or the operation of electromagnetically recording game media used for play. In addition, the game media management device can not only manage the actual number of game media, but also, for example, a game media number display device (not shown) that displays the number of game media held on the front of the pachinko game machine based on the management results of the game media number, and can manage the number of game media displayed on this game media number display device. In other words, the gaming media management device should be able to electromagnetically record and display the total number of gaming media that a player can use for gaming.

In this case, the gaming media management device has the capability to allow the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming media to an external gaming media handling device, and also has the capability to prevent the number of recorded gaming media from being reduced except by direct operation by the player, and if an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between the device and the external gaming media handling device, it is desirable that the device has the capability to prevent the player from transmitting a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming media except through the external connection terminal board.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is equipped with a lending operation means, a return (payment) operation means, and an external connection terminal board that can be operated by the player, and the gaming media handling device has an input slot for valuables such as banknotes, and a recording medium. (For example, an IC card) insertion slot, a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal, various operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the side of the gaming media handling device. (both not shown).

In this case, the game flow is as follows: the player deposits a value into the game media handling device by any method, subtracts a predetermined amount of value by operating any of the above-mentioned lending operation means, and increases the game media corresponding to the subtracted value from the game media handling device to the game media management device. The player then plays the game, and repeats the above operation if more game media are required. After that, the player acquires a predetermined number of game media as a result of the game, and when the game ends, the player operates any of the return operation means to transmit the number of game media from the game media management device to the game media handling device, and the game media handling device ejects a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. When the game media number is transmitted, the game media management device clears the number of game media stored in itself. The player takes the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange it for a prize, or moves to another game machine to play based on the game media recorded on another machine.

In addition, in the above example, all the game media are sent to the game media handling device, but the game machine or game media handling device only transmits the number of game media desired by the player, and the game media owned by the player is transmitted. It is also possible to divide and process. Furthermore, instead of just ejecting the recording medium, cash or cash equivalent may be ejected, or it may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game media handling device may be configured to be able to insert a member recording medium of a game parlor, and to store the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that it can be played again at a later date.

In addition, in the gaming machine or gaming media handling device, a locking operation may be performed to lock the gaming media or valuable data communication to the gaming media handling device or gaming media management device by operating a specified operating means (not shown). In this case, information that only the player can know, such as a one-time password, may be set, and the player may be recorded by an imaging means provided in the gaming media handling device.

In addition, although the above describes the case where the game media management device is applied to a pachinko game machine, the game media management device can also be applied to a pachislot machine, a slot machine that uses game balls, and an enclosed game machine. A player's gaming media can also be managed.

In this way, by providing the gaming medium management device described above, it is possible to reduce the number of parts inside the gaming machine compared to when the gaming medium is physically provided for play, and not only can the cost and manufacturing costs of the gaming machine be reduced, but it is also possible to prevent the player from directly touching the gaming medium, improving the gaming environment and reducing noise, and the reduction in parts also reduces the power consumption of the gaming machine. It is also possible to prevent fraudulent activities via the gaming medium and the gaming medium insertion and payout slots. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

In addition, when the present invention is applied to a gaming system having an enclosed gaming machine configured so that gaming media can be played without being ejected to the outside, and a gaming media management device connected to the gaming machine so that data regarding increases and decreases in gaming media associated with consumption, lending, and dispensing of gaming media can be sent and received by optical signals via a communication cable, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

The outline of the enclosed gaming machine is explained below. In the enclosed gaming machine, the launching device is located above the game area and launches the game balls as the game medium from above into the game area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit drives the ball feed solenoid, and the ball feed pestle pushes the waiting game ball toward the launching pad. This moves the game ball to the launching pad. In addition, a subtraction sensor is provided on the path from the waiting position to the launching pad to detect the game ball moving to the launching pad. When the subtraction sensor detects the game ball, the number of balls held is subtracted by one. In this way, since the enclosed gaming machine is configured to launch the game balls as the game medium from above into the game area, it is possible to avoid so-called return balls (foul balls). Then, the game balls discharged from the game area after rolling in the game area are polished by the ball polishing device. The game balls polished by the ball polishing device are transported upward by the lifting device and guided to the launching device. The game balls are not discharged outside the enclosed game machine, but are configured so that a certain number of game balls (for example, 50 balls) circulate through a series of paths in the game machine. Alternatively, instead of providing a ball polishing device, a discharge mechanism that discharges game balls outside the game machine and a take-in mechanism that takes in the game balls that have been polished outside the game machine into the game machine may be provided. In this case, the take-in mechanism may be provided with a gutter dedicated to take-in, or may be configured to take in the balls from a winning hole provided in the game area.

In an enclosed gaming machine, the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the gaming machine, so there is no upper or lower tray for temporarily holding the game balls. In an enclosed gaming machine, the game balls are not actually in the player's hands, and the number of game balls does not actually increase or decrease as the player plays. In an enclosed gaming machine, the player starts playing after obtaining balls by loaning them from a gaming medium management device. Here, obtaining balls means that the player obtains gaming media for data management purposes. Then, the balls are consumed by the launching device when the game balls are launched, and the number of balls in hand decreases. In addition, when the game balls pass through each winning hole or the like provided in the playing area, the number of balls in hand is paid out according to the conditions set for each winning hole, and the number of balls in hand increases. Furthermore, the number of balls in hand increases by loaning them from the gaming medium management device. In addition, for example, when the game ends and all or a part of the balls are integrated into the game value managed by the game media management device by clearing all of the game value (i.e., the balls in hand) stored in the enclosed game machine, or by performing an operation to transmit some of the balls in hand to the game media management device, the game value stored in the enclosed game machine is subtracted or cleared, and the number of balls in hand is reduced. Furthermore, although there is no concept of foul balls in a game machine in which game balls are shot from above the game area, foul balls may occur when game balls are shot from below as in conventional game machines. Therefore, in the case of a game machine in which game balls are shot from below, the number of balls in hand increases or decreases depending on whether or not a foul ball occurs. Note that "consumption, lending, and payout of game media" refers to consumption, lending, and payout of balls in hand. Also, "increase or decrease in game media" refers to the increase or decrease in the number of balls in hand due to consumption, lending, and payout. In addition, "data regarding the increase and decrease in game media due to consumption, lending, and payout of game media" refers to data regarding the decrease in balls held due to game balls being fired, and the increase in balls held due to lending and payout.

The enclosed gaming machine has a payout control circuit and a touch panel type liquid crystal display device. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect when the game ball passes through each winning hole. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when a game ball passes through each winning hole, the number of game balls paid out due to this is added to the number of balls held. Furthermore, when a game ball is fired, the number of balls held is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data regarding the number of balls held to the game media management device by the player's operation. Further, the above liquid crystal display device is located at the top of the gaming machine, and accepts requests for converting the gaming value managed by the gaming media management device into balls held (renting balls) and counting balls held (returning). Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the game media management device, and the payout control circuit is instructed to transmit data regarding the current number of balls held to the game media management device. Here, "gaming value" refers to money/banknotes, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., which can be converted into balls by the gaming media management device. In this embodiment, the game media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to accept banknotes, prepaid media, and the like. Further, the counted balls can be used for exchanging prizes, etc. at a game hall where the game system is installed.

The enclosed gaming machine also has a backup power supply. This allows the data immediately prior to the power being turned off to be retained even if the power is turned off at night, etc. This backup power supply may also be used to, for example, continue to detect the opening of the door frame using a door opening sensor. This also makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activities at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be stored. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame has been opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

Enclosed gaming machines are only required to be configured so that players cannot touch the gaming balls. For example, machines that do not circulate gaming balls in an island facility but circulate them only in the gaming machine itself, and machines that circulate gaming balls in an island facility but do not allow players to touch them are also included in enclosed gaming machines.

The gaming media management device has a gaming machine connection board. The game media management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signals) to and from the game machine via the game machine connection board. The transmitted and received data includes the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine, the security chip manufacturer code, and the gaming machine manufacturer code stored in the gaming machine. This is information such as the model code of the machine. Then, when the transmission source transmits a transmission signal with one of the gaming machine and the gaming media management device as the transmission source and the other as the transmission destination, the transmission destination that received the transmission signal receives the same signal as the transmission signal. A confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal and the confirmation signal to determine whether or not they are the same.

In this way, the source of transmission can compare the confirmation signal sent from the destination with the transmission signal to determine whether they are identical, thereby confirming that the signal sent from the source of transmission has been sent to the source without being tampered with. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activities such as tampering with the transmitted and received signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device.

Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation section that modulates a signal, and the transmission source transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination transmits the signal modulated by the modulation section. It is also possible to include a demodulation section that performs demodulation.

As a result, even if the signals transmitted between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device are read, it is difficult to decipher these signals, and fraudulent activities such as tampering with the signals transmitted between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device can be prevented.

In addition, in the gaming system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the transmission destination sends an approval signal, which is a signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may also be sent to the sender.

By comparing the transmitted signal and the confirmation signal, it is possible to not only confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received, but also to confirm that a legitimate signal has been transmitted and received based on the authorization signal. Therefore, it is possible to further strengthen the suppression of fraudulent acts. Also, instead of directly communicating and connecting the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, a frame control circuit is provided between the main control circuit and the gaming media management device, and the main control circuit is connected via the frame control circuit. It may also be configured to be communicatively connected to a game media management device. Further, a firing control circuit may be provided separately from the main control circuit, and a frame control circuit may be provided between the firing control circuit and the game medium management device. In this case, error control of the main control circuit and the firing control circuit may be performed by the frame control circuit.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the main CPU stops at a symbol combination in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol indicate a jackpot symbol. Take steps to ensure that you do not have to worry about it.

In more detail, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops in a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, the main CPU performs control to forcibly stop the other special symbol in a symbol combination that indicates a loss regardless of the result of the special lottery. When one of the special symbols stops in a symbol combination that indicates a jackpot symbol, as described above, the game transitions from the general game state to the jackpot game state, but in this jackpot game state, neither the start condition for the first special symbol nor the start condition for the second special symbol is met, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the main CPU is performing both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small winning symbol, the general game Based on the transition from the small winning gaming state to the small winning gaming state (stopping at the symbol combination indicating the small winning symbol), the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol is interrupted, and the transition from the small winning gaming state to the general gaming state ( Based on the termination of the small winning game, the process of restarting the measurement of the variation time of the other special symbol is performed. When one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination that indicates a small winning symbol, the state shifts from the general gaming state to the small winning gaming state as described above, but in this small winning gaming state, the starting conditions of the first special symbol and the second special None of the symbol starting conditions are satisfied, and the main CPU does not newly perform either the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol. However, when both the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are performed, if one of the special symbols stops at a symbol combination indicating a small hit symbol, the main CPU As for the other special symbol, the special symbol consisting of the LED group is displayed in a variable manner in the same manner as during the variable display, but the measurement of the variable time is interrupted as described above.

[4-4. Other expansion examples]
In this specification, the first pachinko gaming machine, the second pachinko gaming machine, and the third pachinko gaming machine have been described as examples, but the technology described in this specification can be applied to other pachinko gaming machines such as pachislot, etc. It can be applied to gaming machines.

Regardless of whether the technology described in this specification is applied to a pachinko game machine or a pachislot, a performance that involves a temporary stop of symbols may include a temporary stop using the reel. Note that the symbol "stop" includes a permanent stop and a temporary stop, and the "stop" can be interpreted either way. Further, the operation for playing the game by the player may be any operation such as operation of a lever, handle, button, etc., or touch.

In a pachinko game machine, the administrator of the game machine may set the performance etc. by operating the performance button, but there are cases where the machine is operated so that the player starts playing after setting the performance button. be. In this case, it is conceivable that the operation by the administrator will eventually become the operation for the player to play the game. Similarly, in pachi-slot, an administrator may play a 2-bet game, and in a state where a BB flag corresponding to the 2-bet game is established, a player may play a 3-bet game. In this case, although the player can play either a 2-bet game or a 3-bet game, the 2-bet game may be played by the administrator of the gaming machine, so the game played by the administrator (for example, 2-bet games) A bet game, etc.), selection of a hole menu, etc. may be operations for a player to play a game.

In pachinko gaming machines, the main CPU controls the player's playing method by notifying whether the player is playing right-handed or left-handed. It may be possible to notify that it is unintended by the control of the sub CPU.

In pachislot, the player's playing method, such as the player's push order (assist), is sometimes managed by the main CPU, but if the player's playing method is not the intended one, errors or warnings may be generated. The fact that the game is unintended may be notified under the control of the sub CPU.

Further, in the pachinko game machine, the main control board and the payout control board are mounted on separate boards, but they may be on one board. In pachislot, there may be no payout control board, but payout may be controlled by a main control board, or may be separated into a main control board and a payout control board.

Additionally, pachislot machines usually have a rectangular housing that houses the equipment necessary for various games, and a door that can be opened and closed with respect to the housing. It is possible. On the other hand, in the case of pachinko, the outer frame is regarded as the casing, the outer frame and base door are regarded as the casing, and the entire gaming machine consisting of the outer frame, base door, glass door, and tray unit is regarded as the casing. is possible. Note that there may be a unit, a middle frame, an intermediate part, etc. in which various control boards are provided between the case and the door or between the frame and the door, and the door, frame, case, etc. In addition, various control boards, display means, decorative parts, accessories, etc. may be present.

[5. First embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. The fourth pachinko game machine has a first embodiment and a second embodiment, and both embodiments are pachinko game machines called one-type two-type mixed machines, like the third pachinko game machine. The first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine have different basic specifications of playability compared to the third pachinko game machine, and therefore the configurations of various members arranged in the play area are partially different.

The first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine are priority variable machines in which the first and second special symbols are not displayed in parallel, and the starting conditions for the second special symbol are established with priority over the starting conditions for the first special symbol, just like the third pachinko gaming machine. However, this is not limited to this, and the machine may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

First, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described, and then the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. Hereinafter, when describing the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the same components as those of the first pachinko game machine will be given the same reference numerals and step numbers, and the configuration and the second embodiment will be explained. A detailed explanation of the process will be omitted.

<First embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine>
[5-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 3010 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 108. This game board unit 3010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 108 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 3010 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 3010 includes a game panel 3100, various members are arranged on the game panel 3100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 3100, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down. .

As shown in FIG. 108, compared to the first pachinko game machine, the game board unit 3010 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine mainly includes a first passage gate 3126A and a second pass gate 3126A. The configuration and arrangement of the passage gate 3126B, the first starting port 3120, the second starting port 3140, the normal electric accessory unit 3145, the special electric accessory unit 3130, and the V winning device 3150 are different. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

(1st passage gate)
The first passage gate 3126A is arranged below the display area of the display device 7, and is arranged so that a game ball hit to the left can pass through it (a game ball hit to the right has difficulty or cannot pass through it). ing. The first passage gate 3126A is equipped with a first passage gate switch 3127A (see FIG. 109 described later) that detects passage of a game ball to the first passage gate 3126A.

(Second Passage Gate)
The second passage gate 3126B is disposed below the normal electric role unit 3145 described later in the right side area 107, and is disposed so that only game balls hit from the right side can pass through. The second passage gate 3126B is provided with a second passage gate switch 3127B (see FIG. 109 described later) that detects the passage of the game ball through the second passage gate 3126B.

When a game ball passes through the first passing gate 3126A or the second passing gate 3126B (hereinafter also referred to as "passing gates 3126A, 3126B" as appropriate), a normal symbol lottery and a variable display of the normal symbols are performed. In addition, in this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B, a prize ball is not paid out, but a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) may be paid out.

Furthermore, the passage gates 3126A and 3126B may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous actuation device. On the premise that the conditional device is operating, the accessory continuous operating device may be activated when the game ball passes through the passage gates 3126A, 3126B, and the state may be shifted to the jackpot gaming state.

This also applies to the passage gate 126 of the first pachinko game machine and the passage gate 2126 of the third pachinko game machine described above.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole 3120 is disposed in the direction of travel of the game ball that has passed through the first passing gate 3126A (i.e., directly below the first passing gate 3126A) and is disposed close to and separated by a distance of approximately one game ball from the first passing gate 3126A. Furthermore, the first starting hole 3120 is disposed so that game nails or the like make it difficult for game balls other than those that have passed through the first passing gate 3126A to enter the hole.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120, a special pattern lottery will be held, the first special pattern will be displayed variably, and a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., three game balls) will be paid out.

In this embodiment, the distance between the first starting opening 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A is set to the distance of approximately one game ball, but it may be set to the distance of approximately one or two game balls. In principle, the shorter the distance between the first starting opening 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A, the better, but in order to make the functions of the first starting opening 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A independent of each other, it is desirable to leave a distance of at least one game ball between the first starting opening 3120 and the first passing gate 3126A.

In this way, by positioning the first starting hole 3120 directly below and adjacent to the first passing gate 3126A, the game ball that passes through the first passing gate 3126A immediately enters the first starting hole 3120, and it is possible to coordinate the start time of the variable display of the normal pattern triggered by the game ball passing through the first passing gate 3126A and the start time of the variable display of the special pattern triggered by the game ball entering the first starting hole 3120 (the variable display can start at approximately the same time).

In addition, by arranging the first starting port 3120 in such a way that it is difficult for game balls other than those that have passed through the first passage gate 3126A to enter, the variable display of the normal symbol is not performed, but the variable display of the special symbol. Variable display of special symbols triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting gate 3120, and normal display triggered by the passage of a game ball into the first passage gate 3126A. It can be operated as a set with variable display of symbols.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 3140 is positioned so that a game ball hit from the right can enter the hole (but it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit from the left to enter the hole).

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 3140, a special pattern lottery will be held, a second special pattern will be displayed variably, and a specified prize ball (for example, one game ball) will be paid out.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 3145 is a unit body that integrates a winning hole into which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls when game balls enter the winning hole, a switch that detects the entry of game balls into the winning hole, and a normal electric accessory 3146, and is disposed in the right area 107. In this embodiment, the winning hole is the second start hole 3140, and the switch is the second start hole switch 3141.

The ordinary electric accessory 3146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 3147 that can move forward and backward, and a general electricity solenoid 3148 (see FIG. 109 described later) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 3147. The ordinary electric accessory 3146, that is, the shutter 3147 for ordinary electric power, has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second starting port 3140, and an open state in which it is impossible or easy for a game ball to enter the second starting port 3140. It is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state.

Specifically, the normal power shutter 3147 is composed of a substantially triangular ball entry prevention section disposed in front of the entrance of the second starting port 3140 and a plate-shaped ball entry guidance section inclined toward the second starting port 3140. When the normal power shutter 3147 is in the open state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention section protrudes a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball from the surface of the game panel 3100, so as not to impede the game ball from entering the second starting port 3140, and the plate-shaped ball entry guidance section protrudes a distance smaller than the diameter of the game ball from the surface of the game panel 3100 to receive the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107 and guide the received game ball to the second starting port 3140. On the other hand, when the normal power shutter 3147 is in the closed state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention part protrudes a distance smaller than the diameter of the game ball from the surface of the game panel 3100 to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting hole 3140, and the plate-shaped ball entry guide part is embedded in the surface of the game panel 3100, and does not accept the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107, but allows it to flow downward. Note that instead of the normal power shutter 3147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member called a so-called electric chute may be used.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric accessory unit 3130 is a unit body that integrates a large prize opening 3131, a large prize opening count switch 3132 (see FIG. 109 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 3131, and a special electric accessory 3133. The special electric accessory unit 3130 is disposed at the lower part in the right side area 107.

The large prize opening 3131 is located in the right area 107 so that game balls hit from the right can enter (game balls hit from the left have difficulty or cannot enter). However, this is not limited to this, and a large prize opening that can enter game balls hit from the left may be located, or a large prize opening that can enter game balls may be located above the center device 115.

The big prize opening 3131 is an opening that opens to allow up to a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) to enter when the machine is controlled to a big win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player. When a game ball enters this big prize opening 3131, a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 game balls) will be paid out.

The big prize opening 3131 transitions from a closed state to an open state in the first route when the result of the special symbol hit determination process derives a stop display mode indicating a "big prize", and in the second route when the V attacker 3152 opens due to the result of the special symbol determination deriving a stop display mode indicating a "gimmick opening hit", and the game ball that enters the opened V attacker 3152 enters the V prize opening within the V attacker 3152.

The special electric accessory 3133 includes a special electric shutter 3134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 3135 that operates the special electric shutter 3134 (see FIG. 109 described later). The special electric accessory 3133, that is, the special electric shutter 3134, has an open state where it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the grand prize opening 3131, and a closed state where it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the grand prize opening 3131. It is configured to be able to transition between states.

Specifically, the special electric shutter 3134 is composed of an opening and closing door with a pivot support at the bottom. When the special electric shutter 3134 is in the open state, the opening and closing door falls to the front side, opening the large prize opening 3131, receiving game balls flowing down into the right side area 107 and guiding the received game balls to the large prize opening 3131. On the other hand, when the special electric shutter 3134 is in the closed state, the opening and closing door is inverted to close the large prize opening 3131, making it impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the large prize opening 3131.

(V prize device)
The V winning device 3150 is provided downstream of the normal electric role unit 3145 in the right area 107. The V winning device 3150 includes an opening and closing winning port 3151 that is opened to allow game balls to enter the inside of the V winning device 3150, a V attacker 3152 that can open and close the opening and closing winning port 3151, a V attacker solenoid 3154 that activates the V attacker 3152 to open and close the opening and closing winning port 3151, a V attacker count switch 3153 that detects the entry of game balls into the opening and closing winning port 3151, and a game ball count switch 3154 that detects the entry of game balls into the V winning device 3150 from the opening and closing winning port 3151. The V winning port 3155 through which the game ball can pass, a V winning port switch 3156 that detects that the game ball has passed through the V winning port 3155, a loss port 3157 through which the game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 from the opening and closing winning port 3151 but have not entered the V winning port 3155 can pass, a V shutter 3158 that opens and closes the V winning port 3155, and a V shutter solenoid 3159 that operates the V shutter 3158 to open and close the V winning port 3155. The V winning device 3150 may be provided upstream of the normal electric role unit 3145, or may be provided in the left area 106.

The V attacker 3152 is made of a protruding plate-like member that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, and it moves the V attacker 3152 forward to create a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the opening/closing prize opening 3151. , is configured to be able to move the V attacker 3152 backward and enter the game ball into the opening/closing prize opening 3151 or to easily shift to the open state.

The opening/closing winning hole 3151 is a winning hole that is opened by the operation of the V attacker 3152 when a "accessory object is released", and up to a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls can enter per opening. It becomes. When a game ball enters this opening/closing prize opening 3151, the value of the V attacker winning prize counter is added, and a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls) is paid out.

V winning hole 3155 is a winning hole that triggers control to a jackpot game state via the second route described above, provided that a game ball passes through it within a predetermined time (e.g., 4000 msec) after V attacker 3152 opens.

When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, the opening of the V attacker 3152 when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 3155 is the first round, and the game ball passing through the V winning hole 3155 is set as the first round. Afterward (second round and onwards), a round game is executed in which the big prize opening 3131 is moved from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, so that the opening control of the V attacker 2152 is continued, even after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 3155 (from the second round onward), A round game in which the V attacker 2152 shifts from a closed state to an open state may be executed over a predetermined number of rounds.

In addition, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the special electric accessory 3133 (that is, the area where the game ball can enter when the special electric shutter 3134 is opened), the V winning hole and the jackpot game can be created. The number of attackers released in each state may be one at a time. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating that the "accessory object has been opened" is derived, the special electric shutter 3134 is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning opening 3155 provided inside the special electric accessory 3133. When enters, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot gaming state via the second route).

The losing hole 3157 is configured so that game balls that have entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 but have not passed through the V winning hole 3155 enter (pass through). The game balls that have passed through the loss port 3157 are discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, if all of the game balls that entered the inside of the V winning device 3150 pass through the losing port 3157 and no game balls pass through the V winning port 3155, the game ends without being controlled to a jackpot gaming state. becomes.

The V shutter 3158 operates between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 3155, and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 3155, by the operation of the V shutter solenoid 3159 (see FIG. 109 described below).

[5-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 109. Fig. 109 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 109, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, like the first pachinko game machine, mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 200 that controls the game according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the performance, a payout/emission control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine differs from the first pachinko game machine in part in the configuration of the device connected to the main control circuit 200. Specifically, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine includes a general electric solenoid 3148, a special electric solenoid 3135, a V attacker solenoid 3154, a V shutter solenoid 3159, a first starting port switch 3121, a second The configurations of the starting port switch 3141, first passing gate switch 3127A, second passing gate switch 3127B, big winning port count switch 3132, V attacker count switch 3153, and V winning port switch 3156 are partially different. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

In addition, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine does not execute the probability bonus control, and therefore does not have the probability bonus notification display unit 167 of the first pachinko gaming machine. Furthermore, as described below, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine does not have a reservation function that reserves the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, and therefore does not have the reservation display unit 162 for normal symbols, the reservation display unit 165 for the first special symbol, or the reservation display unit 166 for the second special symbol of the first pachinko gaming machine.

(Solenoid for general purpose)
The normal power solenoid 3148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 3147. When the normal power solenoid 3148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it advances the normal power shutter 3147 forward to open the second starting port 3140, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it retreats the normal power shutter 3147 backward to close the second starting port 3140.

(Special power solenoid)
The special power solenoid 3135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the special power shutter 3134, which is an opening and closing door. When the main CPU 201 applies electricity to the special power solenoid 3135 (ON), the special power shutter 3134 is tilted forward to open the large prize opening 3131, and when the main CPU 201 does not apply electricity to the special power solenoid 3135 (OFF), the special power shutter 3134 is inverted backward to close the large prize opening 3131.

(Solenoid for V attacker)
The V-attacker solenoid 3154 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-attacker 3152. When the V attacker solenoid 3154 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the V attacker 3152 is moved backward and the opening/closing prize opening 3151 is opened, and when the main CPU 201 is not energizing ( If it is OFF), the V attacker 3152 is advanced forward to close the opening/closing prize opening 3151.

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V shutter solenoid 3159 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V shutter 3158. When the V shutter solenoid 3159 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 3158 backwards to open the V winning opening 3155, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 3158 forwards to close the V winning opening 3155. In this embodiment, the V shutter solenoid 3159 is activated 200 msec after the opening of the opening/closing winning opening 3151 to open the V winning opening 3155. In other words, the V winning opening 3155 is opened 200 msec after the opening/closing winning opening 3151 is opened.

(First start switch)
The first start hole switch 3121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 3120. When the first start hole switch 3121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 3120, the main CPU 201 extracts start information of the first special symbol, and uses the extracted start information of the special symbol in a winning determination process of the first special symbol, performs a variable display process of the first special symbol, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform a payout process of predetermined prize balls (for example, three game balls).

(Second starting port switch)
The second starting port switch 3141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 3140. When the second starting port switch 3141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 3140, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the second special symbol, and transfers the starting information of the extracted special symbol to the second special symbol. It is used for the hit determination process, performs the variable display process of the second special symbol, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout process of a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball). .

(1st passage gate switch)
The first passage gate switch 3127A is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A. When the first passage gate switch 3127A detects passage of the game ball to the first passage gate 3126A, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the normal symbol, and applies the extracted starting information of the normal symbol to the normal symbol hit determination process. Ordinarily, the variable display process of the symbols is performed.

(Second pass gate switch)
The second passing gate switch 3127B is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a gaming ball through the second passing gate 3126B. When the second passing gate switch 3127B detects the passage of a gaming ball through the second passing gate 3126B, the main CPU 201 extracts start information of the normal pattern, and uses the extracted start information of the normal pattern in a winning determination process of the normal pattern, or performs a variable display process of the normal pattern.

The same winning determination process for the normal symbol is performed regardless of whether the first pass gate switch 3127A detects the passage of a game ball through the first pass gate 3126A or the second pass gate switch 3127B detects the passage of a game ball through the second pass gate 3126B. Also, even if the first pass gate switch 3127A or the second pass gate switch 3127B (hereinafter also referred to as "pass gate switches 3127A, 3127B" as appropriate) detects the passage of a game ball through the pass gates 3126A, 3126B, no prize balls are paid out.

(Big winning opening count switch)
The big winning hole count switch 3132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 3131. When the big winning hole count switch 3132 detects the entry of game balls into the big winning hole 3131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 3131, and counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 3131, and also counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 3131, and also counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 3131. It instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process for game balls (gaming balls).

(V attacker count switch)
The V attacker count switch 3153 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the opening/closing prize opening 3151. When the V-attacker count switch 3153 detects the entry of a game ball into the open/close winning slot 3151, the main CPU 201 adds the value of the V-attacker winning counter and pays out a predetermined prize ball (for example, 10 game balls). The processing may be instructed to the payout/emission control circuit 400. When the V-attacker winning counter reaches the specified value, the V-attacker 3152 is activated by the V-attacker solenoid 3154 and the opening-closing prize opening 3151 is closed, even if the maximum time for opening the opening/closing prize opening 3151 has not elapsed. will be done.

(V prize opening switch)
The V winning hole switch 3156 is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 3155. When the V winning hole switch 3156 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 3155 within a predetermined time (for example, 4000 msec) after the V attacker 3152 is released, the main CPU 201 controls the transition to the jackpot game state. It turns out. Note that even if the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 3155 is detected by the V winning hole switch 3156, the prize ball is not paid out.

[5-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 110 to 120. Note that the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, there are prepared a time-saving gaming state in which probability-variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed, and a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed. It is possible to proceed with the game in the state or time-saving game state. In addition, in the first embodiment of this fourth pachinko gaming machine, probability change control is not executed, but this is not essential; for example, probability change flag is set to on depending on the type of jackpot, etc. may be executable.

In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, which will be described in detail later, the number of consecutive jackpots that transition to a jackpot game state under specific conditions (A time-saving game state) is counted, and when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number, a "limiter function" is provided that partially restricts the game state to which the game state transitions after the jackpot game state ends.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left hitting is the regular game mode, and in the time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B, right hitting is the regular game mode. In the time-saving game state C, the game mode between left hitting and right hitting changes appropriately depending on the opening state of the normal electric device 3146. The sub-CPU 301 executes control to display the hitting method that is considered to be the regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7.

[5-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
FIG. 110 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 110 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table includes data used for the first special symbol hit determination process that is executed based on the ball entering the first starting port 3120, such as "jackpot", "accessory release hit", or " The range (width) of the random number value for jackpot determination determined for "Time-saving hit" and the corresponding determination value data ("Jackpot determination value data", "Accessories release hit determination value data", "Time-saving hit determination value data") ) is defined. In addition, as data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the winning in the second starting opening 3140, a random number value for jackpot determination determined as a "jackpot" or "accessory opening hit" is used. The relationship between the range (width) and the corresponding determination value data ("jackpot determination value data", "accessories release hit determination value data") is defined. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for jackpot determination is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 110, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol to be a "jackpot," "a hit with the release of the special symbol," or a "time-saving hit" based on the hit determination process for the first special symbol using a random number value for determining a hit with the first special symbol. Also, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 3140, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol to be a "jackpot" or a "hit with the release of the special symbol" based on the hit determination process for the second special symbol using a random number value for determining a hit with the second special symbol.

In addition, it may be configured such that a "loss" is determined when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed. Further, when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, it may be configured such that "accessory object release hit" is not determined. That is, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, it is an essential requirement that a "big hit" or "time-saving win" be determined when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, other requirements can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, it may be configured such that a "loss" is determined when the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed, but if it is determined as a "loss", then the first special symbol It is preferable to set the probability to be relatively low so that the determination made in the second special symbol hit determination process is more advantageous than the determination made in the hit determination process. Further, when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed, a "time saving hit" may be determined. That is, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, it is an essential requirement that a "big hit" or "accessory object release hit" be determined when the second special symbol hit determination process is performed. However, other requirements can be changed as appropriate.

When the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the jackpot probability may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of hitting the jackpot may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of hitting the special feature opening may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. However, even if the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the probability of hitting the time-saving feature to be a common probability for all settings.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot probability or the probability of opening a role object according to the set value, for example, the winning rate of the V winning device 3150 can be changed by changing the opening time of the V attacker 3152 for each set value. Alternatively, the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 3155 may be changed for each setting value to change the passage rate to the V winning opening 3155, or the number of time saving continuations may be changed for each setting value. In other words, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the probability of winning the jackpot, the probability of opening the accessory, the frequency of opening the V winning hole 3155 (that is, the frequency of operation of the V attacker 3152), the opening time, and the number of times the time saving is continued. By employing one or more of these, it may be configured such that the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state is higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[5-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
FIG. 111 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table determines the stopping symbol based on the symbol random number of the special symbol extracted when the game ball enters the first starting hole 3120 and the second starting hole 3140 and the aforementioned judgment value data. This table is referred to when selecting a "select symbol command" and a "symbol designation command".

The "selection symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the type of jackpot when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 0 to 3, the main CPU 201 selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 4 to 60, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Furthermore, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any of 61 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the winning judgment process for the first special symbol results in the reel opening winning judgment value data being obtained, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 59, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. In addition, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 60 and 89, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. In addition, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 90 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z6" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the reel opening hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the selected symbol command is configured to be more likely to be selected in the order of "z6" < "z5" < "z4" according to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 111.

In addition, when time-saving hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether the selected symbol ``z7'' is selected as the command, and ``zA3'' is selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, even if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 99, the main CPU 201 "z8" is selected as the command, and "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Furthermore, when the bonus item opening hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, even if the symbol random number value for the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z9" as the selected symbol command and "zA5" as the symbol designation command.

Although the description will be omitted in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 stores a special symbol stop mode determination table equivalent to the special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) described in the first pachinko game machine. The special symbol stop mode determination table is a table that is referenced when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is output to the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 (see FIG. 109) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, in response to the selected symbol command. In addition, the first special symbol display unit 163 and the second special symbol display unit 164 derive the display mode of the time-saving hit, the display mode of the jackpot, the display mode of the gimmick opening hit, or the display mode of the miss based on the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol. In addition, a decorative symbol stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 12(B)) is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[5-3-3. Winning Type Determination Table]
Fig. 112 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The winning type determination table shown in Fig. 112 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Fig. 112(a) is an example of a winning type determination table referred to when the limiter function is not activated (when the limiter function is not activated), and Fig. 112(b) is an example of a winning type determination table referred to when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated).

As shown in FIG. 112, the winning type determination table associates the selected symbol command with the opening mode of the special feature, the mode of the jackpot game state, the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times), the opening mode of the special feature, and the number of limiters at the time of the first win.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table and, based on the selected symbol command, determines the opening mode when the accessory is released, the jackpot gaming state, the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state (time saving flag and time saving number), Determine the release mode and limiter number of times each accessory is released.

The "opening mode when the device is opened" indicates the opening mode of the opening/closing winning opening 3151 (the opening mode of the V winning device 3150) that is opened when the device is opened. The "first opening mode" is an opening mode in which the opening/closing winning opening 3151 is opened for a short time (for example, 200 msec in this embodiment), which is disadvantageous to the player. Also, as described above, in this embodiment, the V winning opening 3155 is opened 200 msec after the opening of the opening/closing winning opening 3151, so even if the opening/closing winning opening 3151 is opened in the first opening mode and the game ball enters the opening/closing winning opening 3151, it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 3155, and from this perspective, it is an opening mode that is disadvantageous to the player. Also, the "second opening mode" is an opening mode in which the opening/closing winning opening 3151 is opened for a long time (for example, 18,000 msec), which is advantageous to the player. When the opening and closing winning opening 3151 is opened in the second opening mode and the game ball enters the opening and closing winning opening 3151, the game ball can easily pass through the V winning opening 3155, which is an opening mode that is advantageous to the player from this point of view as well.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "first opening mode" makes the opening time of the opening/closing winning hole 3151 short, and the "second opening mode" makes the opening time of the opening/closing winning hole 3151 long, but the "first opening mode" makes the opening time of the opening/closing winning hole 3151 long. The opening time of the opening/closing prize opening 3151 is made approximately the same in the "opening mode" and the "second opening mode", and the V shutter 3158 is easier to operate in the "second opening mode" than in the "first opening mode" ( It may be configured such that by opening the V winning hole 3155, the game ball can easily pass through the V winning hole 3155.

"Aspect of jackpot game state" indicates the opening mode of the jackpot opening 3131 that is opened at the time of "jackpot", and in this embodiment, indicates the number of rounds of jackpot. In addition to the number of jackpot rounds, the opening time per round and the jackpot openings to be opened may be determined.

"Subsequent gaming state mode" indicates the gaming state mode after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and means the setting of the "time saving flag" and "time saving number of times." In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state but is controlled to the C time-saving game state, and the "time-saving flag" and "time-saving number" are set.

The "limiter number of times" indicates the limiter number of times set when there is a jackpot in a state other than the A time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state, B time-saving gaming state, or C time-saving gaming state). The limiter number is subtracted each time the state shifts to the jackpot game state under specific conditions (A time-saving gaming state), and when the limiter number = 0, the limiter function is activated and the winning type is determined as shown in FIG. 112(b). The table will be referenced.

As shown in FIG. 112(a), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is the selected symbol command "z4-z6" corresponding to a "hit on the release of the special feature", the main CPU 201 is configured to determine the "first release mode" that is disadvantageous to the player as the "opening mode for the hit on the special feature", and when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is the selected symbol command "z9" corresponding to a "hit on the release of the special feature", the main CPU 201 is configured to determine the "second release mode" that is advantageous to the player as the "opening mode for the hit on the special feature".

In this embodiment, as described above, in the second special symbol hit determination process, either "jackpot" or "accessory release hit" is determined. Then, when a "accessory object opening hit" is determined as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, a "second opening mode" advantageous to the player is determined, and the game ball is placed in the opening/closing prize opening 3151. It is easy to pass through the prize opening 3155, and it is easy to shift to the jackpot game state from the second route. Therefore, if the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, it is easy to shift to the jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and when the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, It is configured to be able to shift to a jackpot gaming state.

On the other hand, even if a "accessory object release hit" is determined as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the "first release mode" that is disadvantageous for the player is determined, and the jackpot from the second route is It is difficult to shift to a gaming state. Therefore, the opening of the accessory triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 3120 is treated as substantially the same as a loss. Incidentally, a hit in which an accessory is released triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 3120 is treated in the same way as a loss, but will be referred to in switching the fluctuation pattern table described later.

In this embodiment, when a "reel opening hit" is determined as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, only the "first opening mode" that is disadvantageous to the player is determined as the "reel opening mode of the reel opening hit", but it may also be configured to determine a "second opening mode" that is advantageous to the player. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the "second opening mode" that is advantageous to the player is set to be more difficult to select than the "first opening mode" that is disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 112(a), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a selected symbol command "z1-z3" corresponding to a "jackpot", the main CPU 201 decides to set the time-saving flag to ON and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 100. When the selected symbol command is "z1", the main CPU 201 decides to set the number of rounds to 10 rounds and decides to set the limiter number to 5 times only when the jackpot occurs in a state other than the A time-saving play state. When the selected symbol command is "z2", the main CPU 201 decides to set the number of rounds to 4 rounds and decides to set the limiter number to 3 times only when the jackpot occurs in a state other than the A time-saving play state. When the selected symbol command is "z3", the main CPU 201 decides to set the number of rounds to 4 rounds and decides to set the limiter number to 3 times only when the jackpot occurs in a state other than the A time-saving play state.

In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "jackpot", the number of rounds and the limiter number are set differently depending on the selected symbol command. Thereby, it is possible to vary the profits given to the player depending on the type of jackpot (symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, as shown in Figures 112(a) and (b), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is the selected symbol command "z7" corresponding to a "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 decides to set the time-saving flag to on and decides to set the number of time-saving times to 1.

In this way, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit", compared to the "jackpot" as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, a time-saving gaming state of an extremely short period is determined. That will happen.

The winning type determination table when the limiter function is activated shown in FIG. 112(b) is different from the winning type determination table when the limiter function is not activated shown in FIG. 112(a). The setting of "number of times" is different, but the setting of "opening mode when accessory object is released" and "mode of jackpot game state" are the same. Note that, as shown in FIG. 112(b), since the limiter function is activated, the "limiter number of times" is naturally not set.

As shown in FIG. 112(b), when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", the jackpot game state is controlled. Therefore, the time saving flag and the number of time saving times are set as in FIG. 112(a).

However, when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is "jackpot" or "hit with release of special feature", then regardless of the selected symbol command, the game state after the jackpot game state ends will be that the time-saving flag is set to off and the number of time-saving times will not be set. In other words, when the limiter function is activated (when the limiter function is activated), the game state after the jackpot game state ends will transition to the normal game state.

[5-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
113 to 116 are examples of the variation pattern table of the special symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. FIG. 113 is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, and FIG. 114 is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbols in the C time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Also, FIG. 115 is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbols in the A time-saving game state and the B time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, and FIG. 116 is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbols after the limiter function is activated in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The variation pattern tables of the special symbols shown in FIG. 113 to 116 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIGS. 113 to 116, the special symbol variation pattern table includes the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the random value for reach determination, the random value for effect selection, and the special symbol The variation pattern of the symbol is associated with the variable display time of the special symbol. Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. Furthermore, the "Remarks" column in FIGS. 113 to 116 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

The main CPU 201 determines one of the special pattern variation pattern tables shown in Figures 113 to 116 depending on the game status, etc., and refers to the determined special pattern variation pattern table to determine the variation pattern of the special pattern and the variable display time of the special pattern based on the type of special pattern, the result of the special pattern hit determination process, the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value.

When the main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern, it transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. The fluctuation pattern command is configured to be able to identify whether the fluctuation pattern is triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 3120 or the second starting hole 3140.

The jackpot reach and jackpot normal reach shown in the "Notes" column of Figures 113 to 116 are reach effects that indicate that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is likely to be a jackpot (no chance of a time-saving hit). The chance fluctuation is a fluctuation effect that indicates that the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is likely to be a time-saving hit.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 113, three special symbol variation pattern tables are provided as variation pattern tables for special symbols in the normal game state: a special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in Fig. 113(1), a special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in Fig. 113(2), and a special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in Fig. 113(3). Note that the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the normal game state is not limited to three, and may be one or two or more.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113(1) is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected after the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is backed up and cleared (i.e., the initial value fluctuation pattern table), after the first special symbol corresponding to the "hit on opening the special symbol" selection symbol command "z4" is displayed stationary, after the limiter function is activated and the normal gaming state is entered, and after the first hit determination process for the first special symbol is completed (i.e., after the transition from the special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1) described later).

The special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 113 (2) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command “z5” for “accessory object opening” is stopped and displayed. .

The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 113 (3) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" for "hit on opening the reel" is stopped and displayed.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in Figures 113 (1) to (3), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," one of the fluctuation patterns is selected: fluctuation pattern "01H" (hereinafter also referred to as "chance fluctuation A") in which the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, and fluctuation pattern "02H" (hereinafter also referred to as "chance fluctuation B") in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol.

Details will be described later using Figure 137, but in the normal game state, chance fluctuation A, which is longer than the variable display time of the normal pattern, is likely to cause the second starting hole 3140 to open in an unfavorable manner due to the operation of the normal electric device 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal pattern, and chance fluctuation B, which is shorter than the variable display time of the normal pattern, is likely to cause the second starting hole 3140 to open in an advantageous manner due to the operation of the normal electric device 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal pattern.

In the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in FIGS. 113 (1) to (3), the selection rates of chance variation A and chance variation B are different. The chance variation B in which the second starting port 3140 is likely to be in an advantageous opening mode in the normal gaming state is configured such that it is likely to be selected in the order of special symbol variation pattern table T1 < special symbol variation pattern table T2 < special symbol variation pattern table T3. has been done.

Therefore, among the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal gaming state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T3 is the most advantageous fluctuation pattern table for the player, but as described above in FIG. In addition, since the selection symbol command is configured to be easily selected in the order of "z6" < "z5" < "z4", the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T3 corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" is the most selected. It is structured so that it is difficult to

(C Time-saving special symbol variation pattern table)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 114, three special symbol variation pattern tables are provided as variation pattern tables for the special symbols in the C time-saving game state: a special symbol variation pattern table C1 shown in Fig. 114(1), a special symbol variation pattern table C2 shown in Fig. 114(2), and a special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in Fig. 114(3). Note that the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the C time-saving game state is not limited to three, and may be one or two or more.

The special symbol variation pattern table C1 shown in FIG. 114 (1) is a variation pattern table that is selected after a transition from a normal game state to a C time-saving game state, or after the first special symbol corresponding to the "reel opening hit" selection symbol command "z4" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table C2 shown in FIG. 114 (2) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z5" for "hit on opening the reel" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 114 (3) is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" for "hit on opening the reel" is stopped and displayed.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving play state shown in Figures 114 (1) to (3), similarly to the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal play state shown in Figure 113, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," one of the fluctuation patterns is selected: "Chance fluctuation A," in which the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, or "Chance fluctuation B," in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol.

Although the details will be described later using FIG. 138, even in the C time-saving game state, the chance variation A that is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol is due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. Chance variation B, in which the second starting port 3140 is likely to be in an unfavorable opening state and is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, is caused by the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the second starting port 3140 in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. tends to be an advantageous opening mode.

In the special symbol variation pattern tables C1 to C3 of the C time-saving game state shown in FIGS. 114(1) to (3), the selection rates of chance variation A and chance variation B are different. In the time-saving gaming state, the second starting port 3140 is likely to be in an advantageous opening mode. Chance fluctuation B is likely to be selected in the order of special symbol fluctuation pattern table C1 < special symbol fluctuation pattern table C2 < special symbol fluctuation pattern table C3. It is configured.

For this reason, among the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving play state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table C3 is the most advantageous fluctuation pattern table for the player. However, as described above in FIG. 111, the selected symbol commands are configured to be most likely to be selected in the order "z6" < "z5" < "z4", so the special symbol fluctuation pattern table C3 corresponding to the selected symbol command "z6" is configured to be the least likely to be selected.

The special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in Fig. 113 and the special symbol variation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving game state shown in Fig. 114 have the same variation pattern for the first special symbol, but the variation pattern for the second special symbol when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "hit on the release of the special symbol" is different. That is, in the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in Fig. 113, when the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is a "hit on the release of the special symbol," the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern for the second special symbol to be a long variation performance with an extremely long variation time, for example, 500,000 msec or 600,000 msec. This is because, in normal game play, a gaming ball will not generally enter (pass through) the second starting hole 3140, but even if an unforeseen event occurs and a gaming ball does enter the second starting hole 3140, this is done to minimize the benefit that may be given to the advantageous player, but this is not necessarily required.

Therefore, the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. 113 and the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables C1 to C3 in the C time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 114 are common. may be adopted.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in time-saving game state A or time-saving game state B)
The special pattern variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 115 is a variation pattern table that is selected when the game is controlled to the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state.

The special symbol variation pattern table A is configured such that the variable display time of the special symbol is relatively short, except when the result of the hit determination process is a "jackpot". As a result, in the A time-saving gaming state or the B-time saving gaming state, the game ball can be transferred to the jackpot gaming state via the second route by passing through the V winning opening 3155 in the opening/closing winning opening 3151 in a short time. Can be done.

(Special pattern variation table after limiter function activation)
The special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116 (1) is a specific fluctuation pattern table selected in the first special symbol winning determination process after the transition to the normal game state following the activation of the limiter function.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116 (1), if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," chance fluctuation B, which is likely to result in an advantageous opening state of the second starting hole 3140 in normal game mode, is always selected.

When Chance Variation B is selected in the normal game state, the second start hole 3140 opens in a favorable manner, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start hole 3140. In this embodiment, as described above, if the game ball enters the second start hole 3140, it is easy to transition to a jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and it is possible to essentially transition to a jackpot game state by the game ball entering the second start hole 3140.

Therefore, even if a winning streak in the time-saving play state ends due to the activation of the limiter function, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special symbol after transition to the normal play state is a "time-saving hit," it is possible to transition again to the jackpot play state via the second route, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 is configured so that chance fluctuation B is always selected when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," but it may also be configured so that chance fluctuation A, which is more likely to result in an unfavorable opening state of the second starting hole 3140, is selected with a lower probability than chance fluctuation B.

In addition, after the transition to the normal game state following the activation of the limiter function and the completion of the first winning determination process for the first special symbol, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 113(1) will be selected from the special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1).

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z2 shown in FIG. 116(2) is a modification of the special symbol fluctuation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1), and after the transition to the normal gaming state after the limiter function is activated. , is a specific variation pattern table selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process. The special symbol variation pattern table Z2 is configured such that when the result of the first special symbol hit determination process is "time-saving hit", chance variation A is selected with a probability of 20% and chance variation B with a probability of 80%. are doing.

Even if you do this, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special symbol after the transition to the normal gaming state is "time-saving hit", the probability of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state via the second route again Since the limiter function is increased, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern tables Z1 and Z2 are fluctuation pattern tables that are selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process after the transition to the normal game state following the activation of the limiter function, but are not limited to the first time. For example, in the case of a special symbol reservation function, the fluctuation pattern tables may be selected based on the special symbol hit determination process up to the fourth time, or may be fluctuation pattern tables selected based on the special symbol hit determination process up to an arbitrary predetermined number of times.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", there is one chance variation A and one chance variation B, but the special symbol is determined based on the variable display time of the normal symbol. It is composed of a plurality of chance variation group A, in which the variable display time of the symbols is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols, and a plurality of chance variation B groups, in which the variable display time of the special symbols is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbols. Good too.

[5-3-5. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
117 is an example of a winning judgment table for normal symbols in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 117 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the gaming state and the random number value for normal symbol hit determination extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B. This is a table that is referred to when determining a ``normal symbol hit'' or ``loss'' by lottery based on the above.

The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 117 specifies the game state, the range (width) of the random number value for winning judgment of normal symbols, and the winning judgment value data for normal symbols ("winning normal symbols" or "missing") in correspondence with each other.

As described above, the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is a random number value used in the winning determination process for the normal symbol. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 selects the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 117, and determines the winning judgment value data for normal symbols based on the game state and the range (width) of the random number value for winning judgment for normal symbols.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 89, the main CPU 201 determines that the win/loss determination value data is a "normal symbol win determination value data." In addition, in the non-time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 90 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the win/loss determination value data is a "loss" determination value data.

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 98, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data."In addition, in the A time-saving game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol hit" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 0 and 89, and changes the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol hit". "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the B time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 90 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has won a normal symbol if the random number value for hit determination is between 0 and 89, and changes the winning/losing determination value data to “normal "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 90 and 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

As described above, in this embodiment, among the normal gaming state, A time saving gaming state, B working time saving gaming state, and C working time saving gaming state, the winning probability per normal symbol in the A time saving gaming state (the selection shown in FIG. 117) rate (approximate)) is the highest.

In addition, the winning probability of hitting a normal symbol in the B time-saving game state is the same as the winning probability of hitting a normal symbol in the normal game state. Similarly, the winning probability of hitting a normal symbol in the C time-saving game state is the same as the winning probability of hitting a normal symbol in the normal game state. Therefore, even if the game state transitions between the normal game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state, the winning probability of hitting a normal symbol will not change.

In addition, the winning probability per normal symbol may be the same in the normal game state, the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to vary the proportion of types of normal symbols, which will be described later, for each state without changing the probability of winning per normal symbol.

[5-3-6. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 118 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "normal symbol winning symbol selection command" that determines the normal symbol stopping symbol based on the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data and the normal symbol random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B. The "normal symbol winning symbol selection command" is a command for specifying the winning normal symbol, which is determined according to the normal symbol winning type, when the result of the normal symbol winning determination process is a normal symbol winning symbol.

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118 specifies the normal symbol winning determination value data ("normal symbol winning" or "miss"), the normal symbol random number value, and the symbol command selected when the normal symbol wins, in association with each other. The normal symbol random number value is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 118 and determines the pattern command to be selected when a normal pattern is hit based on the normal pattern hit determination value data and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

According to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 118, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, for example, the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is selected as follows. Ru.

For example, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues a normal symbol hit select symbol command if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 29. If the random number of the normal symbol is between 30 and 69, select "fz2" as the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits, and when the random number of the normal symbol is between 70 and 99. If either is the case, "fz3" is selected as the selection symbol command when the symbol hits normally.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, when selecting the "select symbol command when a normal symbol hits", the win/loss judgment value data (normal symbol hit judgment processing (result) and the symbol random value of the normal symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 117) to determine the winning/losing judgment value data based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 118) to determine the pattern command selected when the normal pattern is a winning pattern based on the pattern random number value of the normal pattern, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing of the normal pattern and the pattern command selected when the normal pattern is a winning pattern may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

[5-3-7. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 119 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 119 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol per type determination table determines the normal electric role as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 according to the gaming state and the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits which is determined in accordance with the symbol random value of the normal symbol. Reference is made when determining the opening pattern of object 3146.

The normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 119 specifies the game state, the symbol selection command when a normal symbol is won, and the opening pattern as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, which are associated with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 119, and determines the opening pattern of the normal electric role 3146 based on the game state and the normal symbol winning selection pattern command. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 the opening pattern command of the normal electric role 3146 that corresponds to the opening pattern of the determined normal electric role 3146.

In this embodiment, when in normal game mode, the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the opening manner of the normal electric device 3146, as 200 msec for the first opening, no wait time, and no second opening, regardless of the normal symbol selection command, regardless of the normal symbol selection command.

In addition, in the normal game state, the first opening time may be different depending on the normal pattern selection command. For example, in the normal game state, if the normal pattern selection command is "fz1", the opening pattern that is the opening mode of the normal electric role 3146 may be set to a first opening time of 200 msec, if the normal pattern selection command is "fz2", the opening pattern that is the opening mode of the normal electric role 3146 may be set to a first opening time of 250 msec, if the normal pattern selection command is "fz3", the opening pattern that is the opening mode of the normal electric role 3146 may be set to a first opening time of 300 msec, and the second opening time may be set to 0 regardless of the normal pattern selection command.

In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving play state, if the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz1", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, to be a first opening time of 2000 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 2000 msec. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving play state, if the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz2", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, to be a first opening time of 2500 msec, a wait time of 200 msec, and a second opening time of 2500 msec. In addition, when in the A time-saving play state, if the normal pattern selection command is "fz3", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern, which is the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, to be 3000 msec for the first opening, 200 msec for the wait time, and 3000 msec for the second opening.

In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the B time-saving gaming state or the C-time saving gaming state, if the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz1", the opening pattern which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is changed to 1. It is determined that the first opening time is 2500 msec, there is no wait time, and there is no second opening. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the B time saving game state or the C time saving game state, if the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz2", the opening pattern which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is changed to 1. The first opening time is determined to be 2000 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the second opening time is determined to be 2000 msec. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the B time saving game state or the C time saving game state, if the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol hit is "fz3", the opening pattern which is the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is changed to 1. The first opening time is determined to be 2500 msec, the wait time is 600 msec, and the second opening time is determined to be 2500 msec.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the same normal symbol selection command (e.g., "fz1") is used, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 is configured to differ depending on the game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process of the normal symbol in the normal game state is "normal symbol hit", the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the release pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 in each gaming state. Among the patterns, the most advantageous mode is the disadvantageous mode. The degree of advantage of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 3146 is the degree of ease of winning the game ball into the second starting opening 3140 when the ordinary electric accessory 3146 is released.

When the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the A time-saving play state is "normal symbol hit," the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 becomes the most advantageous pattern among the opening patterns of the normal electric device 3146 in each play state.

In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the B time-saving play state is "normal symbol hit" has the same degree of advantage as the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 when the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol in the C time-saving play state is "normal symbol hit", but is not limited to this.

[5-3-8. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 120 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 120 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 120 includes the gaming state, the random value for selecting a normal symbol effect extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol. variable display time. Note that the random number value for normal symbol performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and changes the normal symbol variation based on the gaming state and the random value for normal symbol production selection extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gates 3126A and 3126B. The pattern and the variable display time of the normal symbol are determined. When the main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols, it transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols to the sub CPU 301.

As shown in FIG. 120, in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state, regardless of whether the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is 0 to 99, the variable display time for the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 10,000 msec.

In addition, in the A time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 89, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 500 msec, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 90 to 99. In either case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 800 msec.

In addition, in the B time saving game state, if the random number value for normal symbol production selection is between 0 and 39, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be 500 msec, for example, and the random number value for normal symbol production selection is 40 to 79. If either of these is the case, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1000 msec, and if the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is any of 80 to 99, the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined to be, for example, 1500 msec. Ru.

In this way, the expected value of the variable display time of the normal symbol per variable display in the A time-saving game state is the shortest among the variable display times of the normal symbol in each game state. Therefore, in the A time-saving game state, the time until the normal electric device 3146 is opened is the shortest among all game states.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is fixed to 10,000 msec. For this reason, in the special symbol variation pattern table shown in Figs. 113 to 115, as described above, when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the chance variation A longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol is a variable display time of 13,000 msec, which is longer than 10,000 msec, and the chance variation B shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol is a variable display time of 9,000 msec, which is shorter than 10,000 msec. As will be described in detail later with reference to Figs. 137 and 138, the normal electric device 3146 opening pattern (opening mode of the second starting hole 3140) as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146 changes due to the relationship between the game state and the variable display time of the normal symbol and the variable display time of the special symbol.

[5-4. Main control processing]
In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are similar to those of the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23), except for the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and switch input detection process executed in S39. Therefore, the following will explain the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and switch input detection process, and will not explain the other processes executed by the main CPU 201.

Note that some of the processes performed in the special symbol control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine include the same processes as the processes performed in the first pachinko game machine (for example, the jackpot end process (FIG. 42) , FIG. 133), etc.) In the following, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[5-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 121. Fig. 121 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 121, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S3001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S3001, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S3001, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, etc., in a predetermined register.

In S3002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S3001 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a state waiting for variable display.

If it is determined in S3002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (if S3002 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3005.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (if S3002 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3003.

In S3003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the second special symbol is the start of variable display.

If it is determined in S3003 that the second special symbol has not started to be variable displayed (if S3003 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3004.

In S3004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the first special symbol is the start of variable display.

If it is determined in S3004 that the first special symbol does not start the variable display (NO determination in S3004), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and transfers the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3004 that the first special symbol is to start variable display (YES in S3004), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3005.

Returning to S3003, if it is determined that the second special symbol is the start of variable display (YES in S3003), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3005.

In S3005, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 122. After executing the processing of S3003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S3001 to S3005) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[5-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3005 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121) will be described. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the control state number is 0 (when S3002 is determined as YES), in the special symbol management process, when S3003 is determined as YES, the second special symbol is the processing target, and when S3004 is determined as YES, the processing target is the second special symbol. Special symbols are to be processed. Moreover, when the control state number is not 0 (when S3002 is NO determination), the special symbol management process is the special symbol being executed.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 122 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S3011).

If it is determined in S3011 that the special symbol waiting time is not 0 (NO in S3011), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3011 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S3011), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3012.

In S3012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S3012, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3013. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S3013 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S3012.

In S3013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S3013 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 123. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3014.

In S3014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S3014 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 125. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3015.

In S3015, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S3015 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3016.

In S3016, the main CPU 201 performs V winning device opening preparation processing. This process of S3016 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this V winning device opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3017.

In S3017, the main CPU 201 performs V winning device opening control processing. This process of S3017 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this V winning device release control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 130. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3018.

In S3018, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S3018 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 131. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3019.

In S3019, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This S3019 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3020.

In S3020, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. This S3020 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

After completing the processing of S3013 to S3020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 121). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[5-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 123, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3013 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

Note that if the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S3013 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, if the special symbol variable display start process is a process called in S3013 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 123, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S3021).

If it is determined in S3021 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S3021), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 122). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3021 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S3021 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3022.

In S3022, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process. In this special symbol hit determination process, a special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 110) is referenced, and a special symbol hit determination is performed using a random number value for special symbol hit determination stored in the special symbol determination area. In this embodiment, if the first special symbol is the target of processing, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a special feature release hit, or a time-saving hit. Also, if the second special symbol is the target of processing, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a special feature release hit. After executing the process of S3022, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3023.

In S3023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process for determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S3022) (for example, jackpot, accessory opening hit, and time saving hit). In this process, the above-mentioned "select symbol command" and "design designation command" are determined by referring to the special symbol determination table (see Figure 111) and using the symbol random value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area. be done. After executing the process in S3023, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3024.

In S3024, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot type determination processing. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (big hit, accessory opening hit, and time saving hit). In this process, with reference to the hit type determination table (see FIG. 112), the type of hit is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S3023). In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit when an accessory is released, the type of win determined is determined by the game ball passing through the V winning hole 3155 that was opened based on the release of the accessory. This is the type of jackpot when the jackpot game control process is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpots and accessory openings, but there may be only one type of jackpot and/or accessory opening. Furthermore, there may be a plurality of types of time saving. After executing the process in S3024, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3025.

In S3025, the main CPU 201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for judging or determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, a variation pattern table of one of the special symbols shown in FIG. 113 to FIG. 116 is determined according to the game state, etc., and the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol winning determination process, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for effect selection, with reference to the variation pattern table of the special symbol determined. Details of this process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol will be described later with reference to FIG. 124. After executing the process of S3025, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3026.

In S3026, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display time setting processing. In this process, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined based on the determined variation pattern with reference to the variation pattern table (see FIGS. 113 to 116) determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S3025). After that, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined special symbol, and causes the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 to start variable display of the special symbol. After executing the process in S3026, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3027.

In S3027, the main CPU 201 performs time saving management processing. In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, unlike the first pachinko game machine, when the variable display of special symbols starts, the ceiling counter update process that adds 1 to the ceiling counter and the time saving number counter A time saving counter update process of subtracting 1 is performed. Specifically, when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the time saving flag is set to 1 (the time saving flag is turned on), and the time saving number counter is set to the specified number of times, and the time saving identification identifies the B time saving gaming state. Set the number = 2 and control the transition to the B time saving gaming state. Further, when the time saving number counter becomes 0, the time saving flag and the time saving identification number are cleared, and the transition from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is controlled.

In addition, since the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, which is called a 1-type and 2-type mixed machine, is not controlled to a high-accuracy gaming state, the time-saving management performed in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine The processing also differs from the processing described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first pachinko gaming machine. Specifically, in the first pachinko game machine, it was explained that the ceiling count prohibition flag is set to on when the variable probability flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. In the first embodiment of the pachinko game machine No. 4, the game is not controlled to a high-precision game state. Therefore, instead of setting the ceiling count prohibition flag to on when the variable probability flag is set to on and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, it is set to on only when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. It's different. In addition, in the first pachinko gaming machine, in the time saving transition determination process (see FIG. 37), after determining whether or not the variable probability flag is off (see S191), the condition that the variable probability flag is off is set. The process of S192 is performed, but in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the process is different in that the process of S192 is performed without performing the process of S191 because the game is not controlled to a high-precision gaming state as described above. . In the time saving transition process (see FIG. 38), the transition to the B time saving gaming state is controlled by the ceiling flag that is turned on when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value (see S208) without performing the process of S202. will be held. Other processes in the time saving management process are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39 in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process in S3027, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3028.

In S3028, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". By performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1" in this way, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, the special symbol variable display end process (see S3014 in FIG. 122) is performed. After executing the process of S3028, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3029.

In S3029, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, for example, a process of updating parameters related to the gaming state (for example, the remaining number of time savings, etc.) stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 is performed. After executing the process in S3029, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3030.

In S3030, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S3030, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3031.

In S3031, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production start command. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

Note that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited period, and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management process (S3030) and the transmission reservation process of the special symbol production start command (S3031)) during the interrupt-prohibited section. It is preferable to do it inside.

[5-4-4. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 124, details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3025 during the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 123) will be described. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the limiter activation flag is on (S3025-1). In S3025-1, if the main CPU 201 determines that the limiter activation flag is on, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3025-2, and if it determines that the limiter activation flag is not on, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3025-2. Move to 5.

Here, the "limiter activation flag" is a flag that counts the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state under specific conditions (A time-saving gaming state), and is activated when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number. , is turned on in the limiter number update process (see FIG. 127), which will be described later.

In S3025-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter=0. In S3025-2, if it is determined that the ceiling counter is 0, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3025-3, and if it is determined that the ceiling counter is not 0, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3025-5. Move.

Unlike the first pachinko game machine, the "ceiling counter" updates the ceiling counter (increases by 1) when the variable display of special symbols starts, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the B time-saving game state is entered. This is a counter for controlling. In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process is performed, the ceiling counter is not incremented yet in the "time saving management process" of S3027, so the ceiling counter = 0. The case means the time when the first variable display of the special symbol starts in the normal game state.

In S3025-3, the main CPU 201 turns off the limiter activation flag and moves the process to S3025-4.

In S3025-4, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table Z1 shown in FIG. 116(1) as the specific variation pattern table after the limiter function is activated. Note that, as shown in the modified example, the special symbol variation pattern table Z2 shown in FIG. 116(2) may also be determined.

In addition, in S3025-4, the small hit symbol switching information to be described later is set to 0, and from the next time onward, the special symbol change pattern table Z1 or Z2 shown in FIG. 113(1) is Preparations are made so that the variation pattern table T1 is selected.

In S3025-5, the main CPU 201 acquires information on the game state (time-saving identification number) to determine whether the current game state is being controlled as the normal game state, time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B, or time-saving game state C.

In S3025-6, the main CPU 201 acquires information about the pattern that was stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display unit 163 when a "play mechanism release hit" was previously determined as a result of the hit determination process for the first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "small hit pattern switching information").

The "small win pattern switching information" is updated by overwriting one piece of information in the small win pattern switching information overwrite process (see S3062 in FIG. 126) described later. When the first special pattern hit determination process determines that a "gimmick release hit" has occurred, if the first special pattern corresponding to the selected pattern command "z4" is stopped and displayed, small win pattern switching information = 0 is stored, if the first special pattern corresponding to the selected pattern command "z5" is stopped and displayed, small win pattern switching information = 1 is stored, and if the first special pattern corresponding to the selected pattern command "z6" is stopped and displayed, small win pattern switching information = 2 is stored.

In S3025-7, the main CPU 201 determines one of the multiple variation pattern tables based on the acquired game status information and small win symbol switching information.

Specifically, when it is determined that the main CPU 201 is controlled to the normal gaming state, the small winning symbol switching information according to the selected symbol command “z4” is 0, as shown in FIG. 113 (1). A special symbol variation pattern table T1 is determined, and when the small winning symbol switching information according to the selection symbol command “z5” is 1, a special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 113 (2) is determined and selected. When the small hit symbol switching information corresponding to the symbol command “z6” is 2, a special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 113(3) is determined.

In addition, when it is determined that the main CPU 201 is controlled to the C time-saving gaming state, if the small winning symbol switching information according to the selected symbol command “z4” is 0, the special The symbol variation pattern table C1 is determined, and when the small hit symbol switching information according to the selected symbol command "z5" is 1, the special symbol variation pattern table C2 shown in FIG. 114 (2) is determined, and the selected symbol If the small winning symbol switching information corresponding to the command "z6" is 2, a special symbol variation pattern table C3 shown in FIG. 114(3) is determined.

In addition, when the main CPU 201 determines that the game is being controlled to the A time-saving game state or the B time-saving game state, it determines the special symbol variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 115, regardless of the small win symbol switching information.

In S3025-8, the main CPU 201 acquires the type of special symbol and the winning/losing information (jackpot, special feature release win, and time-saving win) as a result of the special symbol winning determination process.

In S3025-9, the main CPU 201 obtains a random number value for reach determination and a random number value for effect selection from the special symbol determination area.

In S3025-10, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table determined in S3025-4 or S3025-7 above, and determines the type of special symbol, win/loss information, random number for reach determination, and effect selection. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number value.

[5-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3014 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S3014 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is a process called in S3014 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S3041).

If it is determined in S3041 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S3041), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 122). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3041 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (YES in S3041), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3042.

In S3042, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S3015 in FIG. 122) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process in S3042, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3043.

In S3043, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S3043, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3044.

In S3044, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. As mentioned above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). It is also possible to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of time savings and the like. After executing the process of S3044, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-6. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3015 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, if this special symbol game determination process is a process called in S3015 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game determination process is called in S3015 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S3051).

If it is determined in S3051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (if S3051 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game play determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S3051), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3052.

In S3052, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S3052 that the result is not a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S3052 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3061. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3052 that the result is a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S3052 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3053. Note that if the special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a win when the special symbol is released, or if the special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a miss, a NO judgment is made in S3052.

In S3053, the main CPU 201 subtracts the limiter number of times each time the A time-saving gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and performs a limiter number of times updating process to determine whether or not to activate the limiter function. The limiter number update process in S3053 is a process that is updated when the game transitions from the first route to the jackpot gaming state. In addition, as will be described later, when transitioning from the second route to the jackpot gaming state, the limiter number of times will be updated in the V winning device opening control process (see FIG. 130) (see S3096). Further, details of the limiter number update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127. After executing the process in S3053, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3054.

In S3054, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing for jackpot game control. In this processing, signals (e.g., jackpot signals, etc.) that are output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 109 for both) via the external terminal board 184 are generated and updated. Note that the signal that is generated and updated in this processing is a hit signal for the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After executing the processing of S3054, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3055.

In addition, in the start setting process for the jackpot game control in S3054, the main CPU 201 also performs processing to clear various flags and counters, such as the time-saving flag and the time-saving counter.

In S3055, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 3131 can be opened (S3056), a process of setting a large prize signal to the external terminal board 184 (S3057), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3058), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S3059), and a process of reserving the transmission of a large prize start display command (S3060). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3058), the large prize opening preparation process (see S3018 in FIG. 122) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

In S3061, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the accessory has been released, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating that the accessory has been released.

If it is determined in S3061 that the special symbol is not a winning combination, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is a stopped display mode indicating a time-saving winning combination or a losing combination (if S3061 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3071. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3061 that the special symbol is a winning combination, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is a stopped display mode indicating a winning combination (if S3061 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3062.

In S3062, when the main CPU 201 determines that the first special symbol hit determination process has resulted in a "hit on the release of the reel", it refers to the selected symbol command, and when the selected symbol command is "z4", it overwrites and updates the small hit symbol switching information with "0", when the selected symbol command is "z5", it overwrites and updates the small hit symbol switching information with "1", and when the selected symbol command is "z6", it overwrites and updates the small hit symbol switching information with "2". When the second special symbol hit determination process has resulted in a "hit on the release of the reel", it does not overwrite the small hit symbol switching information and moves the process to S3063. After executing the process of S3062, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3063.

In S3063, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for game control per accessory opening. In this process, a signal (for example, a signal per accessory item opening, etc.) outputted to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 109 for both) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After executing the process in S3063, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3064.

In S3064, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 3150 can be opened. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 3150 can be opened, set in this processing, is, for example, 1 time. After executing processing of S3064, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S3065.

In S3064, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as setting a signal for opening a special device to the external terminal board 184 (S3065), setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S3066), setting a game state designation parameter (S3067), and reserving the transmission of a display command for starting a special device to be opened (S3068). By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S3066), the V winning device opening preparation process (see S3016 in FIG. 122) is performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. After that, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

In S3069, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a time saving win, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a time saving opening win.

If it is determined in S3069 that it is not time saving, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3071. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3061 that it is time saving, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3070.

In S3070, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 112, determines the mode of the game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times) based on the time-saving winning selection pattern command "z7", and sets the data of the determined mode of the game state. Specifically, it sets the time-saving flag = 1 (turns the time-saving flag on), sets the time-saving number counter = 1, and sets the time-saving identification number = 3, which identifies the time-saving game state C. Note that the time-saving identification number is set to 1 when the game state transitions to the time-saving game state A, and is set to 2 when the game state transitions to the time-saving game state B.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hit type determination table includes two hit type determination tables depending on whether the limiter function is activated or not, but regarding the time saving hit, the limiter function is disabled regardless of whether the limiter function is activated. Refer to the hit type determination table during operation. After executing the process in S3070, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3071.

In S3071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 128. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 122).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S3051 to S3071) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[5-4-7. Limiter count update process]
Next, the details of the limiter number update process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3053 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126) will be described with reference to Fig. 127. Fig. 127 is a flow chart showing an example of the limiter number update process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not it is in the A time-saving gaming state (S3053-1). In S3053-1, if it is determined that the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3053-2, and if it is determined that it is not in the A-time saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3053-5. Move.

In S3053-2, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the limiter count and updates it. After executing the process in S3053-2, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3053-3.

In S3053-3, the main CPU 201 determines whether the limiter count is 0 or not. If the main CPU 201 determines that the limiter count is 0, it transfers the process to S3053-4, and if it determines that the limiter count is not 0, it ends the limiter count update process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

Here, if it is determined that the limiter count = 0, it means that the number of transitions to the jackpot game state in the A time-saving game state has reached the limiter count.

In S3053-4, the main CPU 201 turns on the limiter activation flag. After executing the process of S3053-4, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter count update process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

In S3053-5, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the limiter number of times at the first hit. The main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table when the limiter function is not activated as shown in FIG. 112(a), determines the limiter number based on the selected symbol command, and sets the determined limiter number. After executing the process of S3053-5, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter number update process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

[5-4-8. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 128, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3071 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126) will be described. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0" (S3072). In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S3072, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3073.

In S3073, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. Also, various random numbers stored in the special symbol determination area are cleared. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S3074). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S3074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 126).

[5-4-9. V winning device opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 129, a V winning device opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3016 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 122) will be described. Fig. 129 is a flow chart showing an example of the V winning device opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S3081).

If it is determined in S3081 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (NO in S3081), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 122). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3081 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S3081 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3082.

In S3082, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 112, determines the opening mode per opening of the role as the opening pattern of the V winning device 3150, and sets the determined opening mode (for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings, etc.). In this embodiment, when the "first opening mode" is unfavorable to the player, the opening pattern is set to a maximum of 200 msec opening only once, and when the "second opening mode" is advantageous to the player, the opening pattern is set to a maximum of 1800 msec opening only once. Note that the opening pattern is not limited to this, and for example, when the "second opening mode" is advantageous to the player, the opening may be performed up to two times with a maximum of 900 msec opening per time, or the first time may be opened for a maximum of 600 msec, and the second time may be opened for a maximum of 1200 msec. Furthermore, multiple opening patterns may be provided for each opening of a reel within a total time not exceeding a specified time (e.g., 1800 msec), and one of these multiple opening patterns may be set based on, for example, the random number value of a special pattern.

In addition, in S3082, the main CPU 201 determines the operating mode of the V shutter 3158 that opens and closes the V winning opening 3155, and sets the determined operating mode (for example, the maximum opening time and the maximum number of openings, etc.). In this embodiment, an operating mode is set in which the V winning port 3155 is opened 200 msec after the V winning device 3150 is opened. After executing the process in S3082, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3083.

In S3083, the main CPU 201 performs V winning device opening/closing control processing. In this processing, processing is performed to generate opening/closing control data for the V winning port 3155. After executing the processing of S3083, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S3084.

In S3084, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S3084), after the completion of this V winning device opening preparation process, the V winning device opening control process (see S3017 in FIG. 122) will be held. After executing the process in S3084, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3085.

In S3085, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S3085, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3086.

In S3086, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the V winning device open display command. The V winning device open display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3086, the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device open preparation process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-10. V winning device opening control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 130, the V winning device opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3017 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 122) will be described. Fig. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of the V winning device opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special pattern is "4" (S3091).

If it is determined in S3091 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S3091 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3091 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (if S3091 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3092.

In S3092, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the V winning device 3150 when the opening and closing winning port 3151 was opened by the operation of the V attacker 3152 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the V attacker count switch 3153 (see FIG. 109), which counts the number of winning game balls that entered the V winning device 3150, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the V attacker winning counter counted by the V attacker count switch 3153 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203.

If it is determined in S3092 that the number of game balls that have won in the V winning device 3150 is not the maximum number of winning balls (if S3092 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3093.

On the other hand, in S3092, if it is determined that the number of winning game balls in the V winning device 3150 is the maximum winning number (YES in S3092), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3094.

In S3093, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 (ie, the maximum opening time of the opening/closing winning opening 3151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the process of S3082 (see FIG. 129) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S3093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 has not elapsed (if S3093 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3093 that the maximum opening time of the V winning device 3150 has elapsed (if S3093 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3094.

In S3094, the main CPU 201 performs a process of closing the V winning device 3150 (ie, the opening/closing winning opening 3151). After executing the process in S3094, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3095.

In S3095, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning prize is detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the V winning a prize opening 3155 within a specified time (that is, whether there has been detection by the V winning a prize opening switch 3156). In addition, the above specified time may be the time related to the entry of the game ball into the inside of the V winning device 3150. For example, the above specified time may be within the specified time after the operation of the V attacker 3152 starts. can do.

If it is determined in S3095 that a V winning prize has been detected (YES in S3095), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3096.

In S3096, the main CPU 201, as in S3053 above, subtracts the limiter number of times each time the A time saving gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and performs a limiter number of updating process to determine whether or not to activate the limiter function. The limiter number update process in S3096 is a process that is updated when the game transitions from the second route to the jackpot gaming state. After executing the process in S3096, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3097.

In S3097, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process for the V winning game control. In this process, a signal (for example, a per-V signal, etc.) that is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 109) via the external terminal board 184 is generated and updated. Note that the signal generated and updated in this process is a hit signal of the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. By the way, when the V winning game control is executed, a round game of, for example, 4 rounds or 10 rounds is executed as shown in the winning type determination table (see FIG. 112), so the player cannot perform the jackpot game control process. As in the case where the game is executed, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the V winning game control and the jackpot game control process are distinguished and called, but the V winning game control can also be called the jackpot game control process. After executing the process in S3097, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3098.

In addition, in the start setting process of the V winning game control in S3097, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of clearing various flags and various counters such as a time saving flag and a time saving counter.

In S3098, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the opening of the V winning device 3150 (i.e., the operation of the V attacker 3152), which was first performed based on the opening of the reel, is processed as the first round of round play. In other words, the V winning game control, which is executed when it is determined that a V winning has been detected (S3095 is determined as YES), will start from the second round of round play. After performing the process of S3098, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3099.

In S3099, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as a process of setting the upper limit of the number of times the V winning device 3150 is opened (i.e., the number of times the V attacker 3152 is operated) (S3100), a process of setting a V hit signal to the external terminal board 184 (S3101), a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3102), a process of setting a game state designation parameter (S3103), and a process of reserving the transmission of a V hit start display command (S3104). By performing a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3102), after the special symbol game judgment process is completed, a process of preparing to open the large winning port (see S3018 in FIG. 122) is performed. After that, the main CPU 201 completes the special symbol game judgment process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

Returning to S3095, if it is determined in S3095 that there is no V win detection (NO determination in S3095), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3105.

In S3105, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 128 is performed. After executing the process of S3105, the main CPU 201 ends the V winning device opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-11. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the big winning opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3018 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the grand prize opening preparation process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S3111).

If it is determined in S3111 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S3111), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 122). ).

On the other hand, when it is determined in S3111 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (YES in S3111), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3112.

In S3112, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S3112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3113.

In S3113, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of openings of the big winning opening is the upper limit. In this process, it is determined whether the number of round games executed in the jackpot game state is the upper limit.

If it is determined in S3113 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened has reached the upper limit (if S3113 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S3114.

In S3114, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7" (S3114), the jackpot end process (see S3020 in FIG. 122) is performed after the big winning hole opening preparation process is completed. It happens. After executing the process in S3114, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3115.

In S3115, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command (S3116). The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, after processing S3116, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

Returning to S3113, if it is determined that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit (if S3113 is judged as NO), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3117.

In S3117, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing processing of S3117, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S3118.

In S3118, the main CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the large prize opening to be opened. In this process, the large prize opening 3131 is selected as the large prize opening to be opened to the large prize game state. If the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a big prize, and the big prize game control process is started by deriving a stop display mode indicating a big prize, the large prize opening 3131 is selected as the large prize opening to be opened, and if the result of the hit determination process of the special symbol is a hit to open the role, and the stop display mode indicating the role opening is derived, and the V hit game control is started by detecting a V win, the V win device 3150 (i.e., the open/closed prize opening 3151) may be selected as the large prize opening to be opened, instead of the large prize opening 3131. After executing the process of S3118, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3119.

In S3119, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 3131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 3131, the maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening 3131, the number of winning balls when the large prize opening 3131 wins, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening 3131 is opened corresponds to the number of rounds. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening 3131 is opened multiple times in one round. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening 3131 is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S3119, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3120.

In S3120, the main CPU 201 performs a process for controlling the opening and closing of the large prize opening. In this process, the process for generating the opening and closing control data for the large prize opening 3131 or the V prize device 3150 is performed. After executing the process of S3120, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3121.

In S3121, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6" (S3121), after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process (see S3019 in FIG. 122) will be held. After executing the process in S3121, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3122.

In S3122, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S3122, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3123.

In S3123, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S3123, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-12. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 132, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3019 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (S3131).

If it is determined in S3131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6" (if S3131 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "6" (if S3131 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3132.

In S3132, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 3131 is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the large prize opening count switch 3132 (see FIG. 109), which counts the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 3131, is the maximum number of winning balls. The value of the large prize opening counter counted by the large prize opening count switch 3132 is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203.

In S3132, if it is determined that the number of game balls that entered the big prize opening 3131 is not the maximum winning number (NO determination in S3132), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3133.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3132 that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 3131 is the maximum number of winning balls (if S3132 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3134.

In S3133, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the special prize opening 3131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the special prize opening related various setting process (see S3119 in FIG. 131) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S3133 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 3131 has not elapsed (if S3133 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening opening control process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 122).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3133 that the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 3131 has elapsed (YES in S3133), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3134.

In S3134, the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the big prize opening 3131. After executing the process in S3134, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3135.

In S3135, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S3135), the large prize opening preparation process (see S3018 in FIG. 122) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S3135, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3136.

In S3136, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. After executing the process in S3136, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3137.

In S3137, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command scheduled for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S3137, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122).

[5-4-13. Jackpot end processing]
Next, the big win end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S3020 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122) will be described with reference to Fig. 133. Fig. 133 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win end process in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7" (S3141).

If it is determined in S3141 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7" (NO in S3141), the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122). , returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121). In this case, the jackpot end process returns to the called process.

If it is determined in S3141 that the control state number of the special pattern is "7" (if S3141 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S3142.

In S3142, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various flags are set, and the values of various counters (e.g., ceiling counter, round counter, big prize slot winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing S3142, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3143.

In S3143, the main CPU 201 performs a state setting process after the end of the jackpot. In this state setting process after the end of the jackpot, the main CPU 201 refers to the on/off of the limiter activation flag, and if the limiter activation flag is off, it determines the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 112(a), and if the limiter activation flag is on, it determines the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 112(b). Then, it refers to the determined hit type determination table, determines the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state (time-saving flag and time-saving count), and sets the data of the determined game state mode. Specifically, if the limiter activation flag is off, it sets the time-saving flag = 1 (time-saving flag on), sets the time-saving count counter = 100, and also sets the time-saving identification number = 1 that identifies the A time-saving game state. Also, if the limiter operation flag is on, the time-saving flag is set to 0 (time-saving flag is turned off), and the time-saving count counter is set to 0 and the time-saving identification number is set to 0. After executing the process of S3143, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 122), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 121). In this case, as described above, the process returns to the process from which the jackpot end process was called.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[5-4-14. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 at S40 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 134, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the starting conditions for the normal symbol are satisfied, similarly to the special symbol control process.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 134 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol. Note that each process shown in FIG. 134 is not shown as a subroutine for convenience.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S3291).

If it is determined in S3291 that the waiting time of the normal symbol is not 0 (if NO in S3291), the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and returns the process to S41 of the main control main process (see FIG. 21). Move.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S3291 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (YES in S3291), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3292.

In S3292, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S3292, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3293. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S3293 and subsequent processes based on the control state number read in the process of S3292.

In S3293, the main CPU 201 performs variable display start processing for normal symbols. This process of S3293 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3294.

In this normal symbol variable display start processing, the main CPU 201 performs "normal symbol hit determination processing", "normal symbol determination processing", "normal symbol determination processing", and ``Symbol variation pattern determination processing'' and ``normal pattern time saving management processing'' are performed, and then a process for setting the control state number of the normal pattern to ``1'' is performed. In addition, if the random number value etc. for hit determination of the normal symbol is not extracted (when various random number values are not stored in the normal symbol determination area), the normal symbol hit determination process, the normal symbol determination process, the normal symbol The control state number of the normal symbol is held at "0" without performing the fluctuation pattern determination process, etc., and it waits for the game ball to pass through the passage gates 3126A and 3126B.

In the normal symbol hit determination process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Based on the random number value for determination, win/loss determination value data ("normal symbol win" or "loss") is determined.

In the normal symbol determination process in the normal symbol variable display start process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. A "select symbol command when a normal symbol hits" is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol stored in the determination area.

In addition, in the process of determining the normal pattern variation pattern in the process of starting the variable display of the normal pattern, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal pattern variation pattern table shown in FIG. 120, and determines the normal pattern variation pattern and the variable display time of the normal pattern based on the random number value for selecting the normal pattern effect stored in the normal pattern determination area. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the determined variable display time of the normal pattern, and causes the normal pattern display unit 161 to start the variable display of the normal pattern.

In the regular pattern time-saving management process in the variable display start process for regular patterns, it is determined whether the time-saving count counter is 1 or more, and if it is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time-saving count counter. If the time-saving count counter = 0 as a result of the subtraction, the time-saving flag and time-saving identification number are cleared, and transition control from the time-saving play state to the normal play state is performed. Also, if the time-saving count counter is not 1 or more, the regular pattern time-saving management process is terminated, and if the time-saving count counter is 1 or more but the subtraction result from the time-saving count counter is not time-saving count counter = 0, the regular pattern time-saving management process is terminated without clearing the time-saving flag and time-saving identification number.

In this embodiment, the time-saving count counter is configured to subtract 1 from the time-saving count counter when the variable display of the normal symbols starts in any of the time-saving play states A, B, and C. However, the time-saving play state may be configured to subtract 1 from the time-saving play counter when the variable display of the normal symbols starts only in the time-saving play state C, and not to subtract 1 from the time-saving play counter when the variable display of the normal symbols starts in the time-saving play state A and time-saving play states B.

In S3294, the main CPU 201 performs variable display end processing for the normal symbol. This S3294 processing is performed when the control state number for the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number for the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S3295.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 manages whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is changed to " 2”. In addition, when the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1" and it is waited for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S3295, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol gameplay determination processing. This S3295 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S3296.

In this normal symbol game judgment process, the main CPU 201 performs a judgment process of the derived result of the normal symbol (for example, normal symbol hit or miss). Then, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a normal symbol hit, the opening pattern setting process (number of times to open, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric device 146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process is a miss, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric device 146 is not performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0".

In addition, in the process of setting the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146 in the normal symbol game judgment process, the normal symbol hit type determination table shown in FIG. 119 is referenced, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 is determined based on the game state and the symbol selection command when a normal symbol hits, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 the opening pattern command of the normal electric device corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146.

In S3296, the main CPU 201 performs a normal electric role release process. This S3296 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3297.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 performs the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 146 according to the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S3295. When the opening process of the normal electric accessory 146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "5".

In S3297, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit end processing. This S3297 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol hit end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol winning end process, the main CPU 201 performs a process to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbol determined in steps S3293 to S3296 above, and various random number values stored in the normal symbol determination area.

As mentioned above, the normal symbol hit determination process is performed in the gaming state when setting the variable display time of the normal symbol (when the variable display of the normal symbol is opened) in the variable display start process of the normal symbol in S3293. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 146 is determined based on the gaming state when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the variable display of the normal symbol ends) in the normal symbol game determination process of S3295 above. It will be decided. Therefore, if the gaming state is changed while the variable display of normal symbols is being performed, the normal symbol will be A hit determination and an opening pattern for the normal electric accessory 146 are determined.

[5-4-15. Switch input detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 135, the switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 in S320 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

The first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is different from the first pachinko game machine in that it is equipped with a hold function that holds the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number until a start condition is met. However, the processing contents of the starting opening winning detection processing and the ball passing detection processing are partially different. In addition, the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine has an additional configuration of a big winning opening count switch 3132, a V attacker count switch 3153, and a V winning opening switch 3156 compared to the first pachinko gaming machine. Some of these processes have been added because of the current situation.

First, the main CPU 201 executes the first start port winning detection process (S3381). After executing the process of S3381, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3382.

In this first start port winning detection process, when the first start port switch 3121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 3120, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the first start port 3120 and determines whether there is an empty space in one of the first special symbol determination areas. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is an empty space in one of the first special symbol determination areas, it extracts various random number values (for example, various random number values such as a random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, a pattern random number value for the first special symbol, a random number value for determining a reach for the first special symbol, and a random number value for selecting a performance for the first special symbol) as start information for the first special symbol, and stores the various extracted random number values in one of the first special symbol determination areas. On the other hand, when it determines that there is no empty space in one of the first special symbol determination areas, it ends the first start port winning detection process without extracting various random number values.

Next, the main CPU 201 executes the second starting opening winning detection process (S3382). After executing the process in S3382, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3383.

In this second starting port winning detection process, when the second starting port switch 3141 detects that the game ball enters the second starting port 3140, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the second starting port 3140. set, and it is determined whether or not there is a free area in one second special symbol determination area. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is a free space in one second special symbol determination area, the main CPU 201 inputs various random numbers (for example, a random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol, a second special symbol start information, Various random numbers such as the random number of the symbol, the random number for reach determination of the second special symbol, the random number for production selection of the second special symbol, etc.) are extracted, and the various extracted random numbers are combined into one second Stored in the special symbol determination area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in one second special symbol determination area, the second starting opening winning detection process is ended without extracting various random numbers.

In this way, in this embodiment, in order to perform the hit determination process for the first special pattern and the hit determination process for the second special pattern, only one first special pattern determination area and one second special pattern determination area are provided, and the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (4) for holding the start information for the special pattern until the start condition is met are not provided.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing (S3383). In the general winning hole passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the general winning hole 122 is set. After executing the process in S3383, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3384.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening passage detection process (S3384). In the large prize opening passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects an entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 3131 by the large prize opening count switch 3132, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the large prize opening 3131, and adds 1 to the large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 3131 to update it. After executing the process of S3384, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3385.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a V attacker passage detection process (S3385). In the V attacker passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 3131 by the large prize opening count switch 3132, it sets payout information corresponding to the V prize device 3150 (open/close prize opening 3151) and adds 1 to the V attacker prize counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the V prize device 3150 (open/close prize opening 3151) to update it. After executing the process of S3385, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S3386.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs a V prize opening passage detection process (S3386). In the V prize opening passage detection process, when the V prize opening switch 3156 detects the passage of a gaming ball into the V prize opening 3155, the main CPU 201 turns on the V prize opening passage flag. Note that even if a gaming ball passes through the V prize opening 3155, no payout information is set. After executing the process of S3386, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S3387.

Next, the main CPU 201 performs ball passage detection processing (S3387). In the ball passage detection process, when passage of a game ball to the first passage gate 3126A or the second passage gate 3126B is detected by the first passage gate switch 3127A or the second passage gate switch 3127B, one normal symbol determination area is detected. Determine whether there is free space. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is a free space in one normal symbol determination area, the main CPU 201 generates various random numbers (for example, a random number for hit determination for a normal symbol, a random symbol number for a normal symbol, and a normal symbol as starting information for a normal symbol). , etc.), and the extracted various random values are stored in one normal symbol start determination area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in one normal symbol start determination area, the ball passage detection process is ended without extracting various random numbers.

In this way, in this embodiment, in order to perform the hit determination process of the normal symbol, only one normal symbol determination area is provided, and the normal symbol is used to hold the starting information of the normal symbol until the starting condition is satisfied. It does not have a starting storage area (1) to a normal symbol starting storage area (4).

[5-5. Game state transition diagram]
Next, the transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 136. Fig. 136 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, left hitting is the normal game mode, and in the time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B, right hitting is the normal game mode. In the time-saving game state C, the game mode changes between left hitting and right hitting as appropriate depending on the opening state of the normal electric device 3146.

For this reason, in the normal game state, a transition in game state is triggered by a game ball entering the first start hole 3120, and in the time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B, a transition in game state is triggered by a game ball entering the second start hole 3140. Also, in the time-saving game state C, a transition in game state is triggered by a game ball entering the first start hole 3120 or the second start hole 3140. In the following, the explanation will be given on the premise that a game ball has entered the first start hole 3120 in the normal game state, and that a game ball has entered the second start hole 3140 in the time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B.

As shown in FIG. 136, in normal game mode, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120, it is determined to be a "jackpot," a "gimmick release hit," or a "time-saving hit" (see FIG. 110).

In the normal gaming state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and a "jackpot" is determined, the state shifts to a jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and the "accessory object release hit" is determined, and when the game ball passes through the V winning port 3155, the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, and the game ball enters the first starting port 3120. When the number does not pass through the V winning hole 3155, the game state is not changed and the normal game state is maintained.

As mentioned above, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120 and a "hit to open the special feature" is determined, the opening mode of the V winning device 3150 (opening and closing winning hole 3151) is unfavorable to the player, so it is extremely difficult to transition to a jackpot game state. Therefore, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 3120 and a "hit to open the special feature" is determined, there is essentially no transition in game state, and the normal game state is maintained.

After shifting from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the state shifts to the A time-saving gaming state.

The A time-saving game state is set to end when either of the following conditions is met: "100 time-saving times have been completed (see FIG. 112)" or "transition to a jackpot game state."

Here, "100 time saving times completed" means "the total number of variable displays of the variable display of special symbols and the variable display of normal symbols is counted 100 times".

In addition, in this embodiment, "the number of time saving times 100 times" is defined as "the total number of variable displays of the variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the normal symbol is counted 100 times"; The variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times" or the variable display of the normal symbol is performed 100 times. Alternatively, the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times. It is also possible to use only ``koto''.

Then, when the time-saving gaming state A shifts to the jackpot gaming state (consecutive games during the time-saving gaming state A), the limiter number is counted, and if the limiter number has been reached, the game state shifts to the normal gaming state and the limiter number is reached. If not, the game returns to the A time-saving game state.

Further, in the normal game state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 3120 and a "time-saving hit" is determined, the state shifts to the C-time-saving game state.

The C time saving gaming state is set when either of the following conditions is satisfied: "One time saving number completed (see FIG. 112)" and "Transition to the jackpot gaming state" as an end condition for the C time saving gaming state. There is.

Here, "one time saving number completed" means that either of the following conditions is met: "The variable display of the special symbol is counted once" or "The variable display of the normal symbol is counted once." It means that. In addition, in this embodiment, the "number of time saving times" is counted when a special symbol or a normal symbol is variablely displayed, and if the state has not been shifted to the jackpot game state, the first special symbol is counted. When the variable display is performed or when the first variable display of normal symbols is performed, the C time-saving game state ends and the state shifts to the normal game state.

In addition, after transitioning from the C time-saving play state to the jackpot play state, the game will transition to the A time-saving play state after the jackpot play state ends.

Furthermore, in the normal game state, when the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed (e.g., a ceiling counter) reaches a ceiling value (e.g., 1000 times), the game transitions from the normal game state to the time-saving game state B.

In the B time-saving gaming state, either of the following conditions is satisfied as the end condition of the B-time saving gaming state: "End of variable display of special symbols a specified number of times (for example, 1212 times)" and "Transition to jackpot gaming state" That's what it's set up to be.

When the "end of variable display of special symbols a specified number of times" occurs in the B time-saving game state, the game state transitions from the B time-saving game state to the normal game state. In addition, after transitioning from the B time-saving game state to the jackpot game state, the game state transitions to the A time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, three time-saving game states are provided as the time-saving game state: A time-saving game state, B-time saving game state, and C-time saving game state, but A time-saving game state is not provided, and A time-saving game state is not provided. It may be configured with two time-saving game states: a game state and a time-saving game state C.

[5-6. Opening mode of normal electric accessories]
In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the opening mode (opening pattern) of the normal electric device 3146 can be changed by adjusting the variable display time of the special symbol when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit" in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol. An example of the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146 will be described below.

FIG. 137 is a time chart showing an example of the opening state of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the normal gaming state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 138 is a time chart showing an example of the opening state of the normal electric accessory 3146 in the C time-saving game state in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

137 and 138 show the fluctuation and stoppage of the normal symbol display section 161, the fluctuation and stoppage of the first special symbol display section 163, the operation and stoppage of the normal electric solenoid 3148 that constitutes the normal electric accessory 3146, Shifts between gaming states are shown up and down.

Further, FIGS. 137 and 138 are based on the assumption that the result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol is "normal symbol win" and the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time saving win". Further, in this embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbols in the normal game state and the C time-saving game state is fixed at 10000 msec (10s) as shown in the normal symbol variation pattern table of FIG. 120.

In addition, in Fig. 137 and Fig. 138, as shown in the normal pattern hit type determination table in Fig. 119, the unfavorable opening mode in which the opening time (200 msec) of the normal electric device 3146 in the normal game state is short is illustrated as "short opening", and the favorable opening mode in which the opening time (2000 to 3000 msec) of the normal electric device 3146 in the C time-saving game state is long is illustrated as "long opening". Furthermore, the type of the first special pattern that is displayed as stopped in response to a "time-saving hit" is illustrated as "stopped with C time-saving pattern".

FIG. 137(a) shows that in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the normal gaming state of FIG. 113, and determines that the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol. This is an example of a time chart when "chance variation A" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 137(a), since the variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, after the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended (after the normal symbol has finished changing), the game state transitions from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the normal symbol fluctuation ends), the game state is the normal game state, and as shown in the normal symbol winning type determination table in FIG. 119, the opening mode of the normal electric roler 3146 is "short opening" in the normal game state.

Figure 137 (b) is an example of a time chart when the main CPU 201, in the normal game state, refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the normal game state of Figure 113 and determines "Chance Variation B" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 137(b), since the variable display time of the special symbols is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbols, the game The state has shifted from the normal gaming state to the C time-saving gaming state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the variation of the normal symbol ends), the gaming state is the C time saving gaming state, and as shown in the normal symbol per type determination table in FIG. As the opening mode of the electric accessory 3146, "long opening" in the C time-saving game state is performed.

Here, Figure 137(b) shows the opening state of the normal electric device 3146 when "fz1" is selected as the symbol command for selecting a normal symbol in the C time-saving play state, and illustrates one operation (one opening) of the normal power solenoid 3148. Note that when "fz2" or "fz3" is selected as the symbol command for selecting a normal symbol in the C time-saving play state, the normal power solenoid 3148 will be operated twice, with a wait time in between. The same applies to Figure 138(b) described below.

FIG. 138(a) shows that in the time-saving gaming state C, the main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the time-saving gaming state C in FIG. This is an example of a time chart when a long "chance fluctuation A" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 138(a), when the special symbol is variable displayed once in the C time-saving game state, the end condition of the C time-saving game state (the number of time savings ends once) is satisfied, and the special symbol is variable. At the start of the display, the C time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state. While the variable display of special symbols is being performed, it is in the normal gaming state, but after the variable display of the special symbol ends and it "stops at C time-saving symbol", the normal gaming state returns to the C time-saving gaming state. will be transferred.

And because the variable display time of the special symbols is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbols, after the variable display time of the normal symbols has ended (after the normal symbols have finished changing), the game state transitions from the normal game state to the C time-saving game state.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the normal symbol fluctuation ends), the game state is the normal game state, and as shown in the normal symbol winning type determination table in FIG. 119, the opening mode of the normal electric roler 3146 is "short opening" in the normal game state.

Figure 138 (b) is an example of a time chart when the main CPU 201, in the C time-saving game state, refers to the special symbol variation pattern table in the C time-saving game state of Figure 114 and determines "Chance Variation B" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 138(b), when the special symbol is variable displayed once in the C time-saving game state, the end condition of the C time-saving game state (the number of time savings ends once) is satisfied, and the special symbol is variable. At the start of the display, the C time-saving game state shifts to the normal game state. While the variable display of special symbols is being performed, it is in the normal gaming state, but after the variable display of the special symbol ends and it "stops at C time-saving symbol", the normal gaming state returns to the C time-saving gaming state. will be transferred.

Since the variable display time of the special symbols is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbols, the gaming state changes from the normal gaming state to the C time reduction before the variable display time of the normal symbols ends (before the variation of the normal symbols ends). Shifting to gaming state.

For this reason, when the variable display time of the normal symbol ends (when the normal symbol fluctuation ends), the game state is the C time-saving game state, and as shown in the normal symbol winning type determination table in FIG. 119, the opening mode of the normal electric role device 3146 is a "long opening" in the C time-saving game state.

In the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving game state, "ending one time of time-saving", is based on the condition that "the variable display of the special symbol is counted once" as well as "the variable display of the normal symbol is counted once". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 137(a) and FIG. 138(a), when the C time-saving game state is entered after the variable display of the special symbol is ended, even if the player hits the right side as an unintended game and passes the game ball through the second passing gate 3126B, the game state is entered from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, and an unintended "long opening" can be prevented as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146.

In this way, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the winning judgment process for the normal symbol is determined based on the game state when the variable display of the normal symbol is performed (when the normal symbol starts to change), and the opening state of the normal electric device 3146 is determined based on the game state when the variable display of the normal symbol ends (when the normal symbol changes). This adds new interest to the fact that the game state is changed or maintained while the variable display of the normal symbol is being performed, and can further increase the excitement of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, in relation to the variable display time of the normal symbol, by adjusting the variable display time of the special symbol when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", The game state can be changed and maintained while the normal symbols are intentionally displayed in a variable manner.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is variable for the normal symbol. A variation pattern table for a plurality of special symbols with different selection rates, ``Chance Variation A'' which is longer than the display time, and ``Chance Variation B'', where the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol, is provided. Since the special symbol variation pattern table is switched according to the changing conditions, the switching of the special symbol variation pattern table can also be interesting, making it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, the special pattern variation pattern table can be switched based on the information of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display section 163 when a "hit to open the special feature" is determined as a predetermined change condition (small win pattern switching information), so that the "hit to open the special feature" and the small win pattern switching information can be made interesting, and the excitement of the game can be further increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111 and FIG. 112, if the game ball enters the second starting hole 3140, it is easier to transition to a jackpot game state from the first route or the second route than when the game ball enters the first starting hole 3120. In particular, in this embodiment, it is configured so that the game ball can essentially transition to a jackpot game state by entering the second starting hole 3140. Therefore, as an opening mode of the normal electric device 3146, the value of the "long opening" in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting hole 3140 is increased, and the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146 can be made more interesting, thereby further improving the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a limiter function is provided, but even if the consecutive winnings in the A time-saving gaming state are ended due to the activation of the limiter function and the transition to the normal gaming state occurs, the normal gaming state after the activation of the limiter function In the first special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 116 is selected. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 116 is a specific variation pattern table in which the advantageous chance variation B in which "long release" is likely to be performed as the opening mode of the normal electric accessory 3146 is likely to be selected in the normal game state. For this reason, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special symbol after the transition to the normal gaming state is "time-saving hit", it is possible to transition to the jackpot gaming state via the second route again. , it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, in this embodiment, one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving game state, ``end of the number of time-savings once'', is ``the variable display of the special symbol is counted once'', and the variable display of the special symbol is Since it is configured so that the game state can be changed by subtracting the number of time-savings when the display is performed, the probability that the result of the special symbol hit determination process will be "time-saving hit" is increased. Also, it is possible to prevent the disadvantage that the time-saving gaming state is always controlled, and it is possible to maintain the gameplay.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, one of the conditions for ending the C time-saving game state, "ending one time of time-saving", requires that "the variable display of the special pattern is counted once" as well as "the variable display of the normal pattern is counted once". Therefore, even if an unintended right hit is performed in the C time-saving game state and the game ball passes through the second passing gate 3126B, the game state is transitioned from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state at the start of the variable display of the normal pattern, and an unintended "long opening" is prevented from being performed as the opening mode of the normal electric device 3146.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the second passing gate 3126B is located below the normal electric device unit 3145 in the right-side area 107. Therefore, even if a game ball happens to flow down the right-side area 107 during the C time-saving game state and passes through the second passing gate 3126B, the game ball can be prevented from unintentionally entering the normal electric device 3146.

Moreover, in this embodiment, by arranging the first starting port 3120 directly below and close to the first passing gate 3126A, the game ball that passes through the first passing gate 3126A immediately enters the first starting port 3120. When the game ball passes through the first passage gate 3126A, the normal symbols start to fluctuate, and the special symbols start to fluctuate when the game ball enters the first starting port 3120. Adjustment can be made with the timing (variable display can be started at approximately the same time).

[6. Second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine]
Next, a second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. The second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine differs from the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine in the configuration of the game board unit (arrangement of passing gates), in the provision of a reserve function for retaining the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, and in the end conditions of the time-saving game state.

Hereinafter, in describing the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the same reference numerals and step numbers will be used for the same components as in the first embodiment of the first pachinko game machine and the fourth pachinko game machine. A detailed explanation of its configuration and processing will be omitted.

[6-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 139, a game board unit 4010 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine will be described. Similarly to the first embodiment of the first pachinko game machine and the fourth pachinko game machine, this game board unit 4010 is also arranged so that the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) is located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2). (see).

FIG. 139 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 4010 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 4010 includes a game panel 4100, various members are arranged on the game panel 4100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 4100, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down. .

As shown in FIG. 139, the game board unit 4010 included in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is different from the game board unit 3010 provided in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The difference is that the second passage gate 3126B of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is not provided in the right side area 107.

In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the second passing gate 3126B is not provided in the right area 107 because the machine is provided with a holding function that holds the start information for normal and special symbols up to a specified number, which prevents a game ball hit to the right from passing through the second passing gate 3126B, causing the number of reserved normal symbols only to be stored, making it impossible to adjust the variable display time for normal and special symbols.

In addition, although not shown in FIG. 139, the LED unit 160 is equipped with a normal symbol reservation display section 162, a first special symbol reservation display section 165, and a second special symbol reservation display section 166. But there are differences.

[6-2. Electrical configuration]
As for the control circuit of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, compared to the control circuit of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine (Figure 109), the configuration of the second passing gate switch 3127B that detects the passage of the game ball through the second passing gate 3126B has been deleted, and only the configurations of the ordinary symbol reserve display unit 162, the first special symbol reserve display unit 165, and the second special symbol reserve display unit 166 in the first pachinko game machine have been added, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

In addition, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, since the main RAM 203 has a hold function that holds the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, the main RAM 203 stores the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number. A normal symbol starting storage area (1) to a normal symbol starting storage area (4) for storing up to a predetermined number of special symbol starting information, and a first special symbol starting storage area (1) to a first special symbol starting storage area for storing starting information of special symbols up to a predetermined number It has a special symbol start storage area (4), and a second special symbol start storage area (1) to a second special symbol start storage area (4).

[6-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142.

The second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is different from the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine in that the special symbol is mainly changed in order to synchronize the variation time between the special symbol and the normal symbol. The variation pattern table, the variation pattern table for normal symbols, etc. are different.

In addition, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, either of the following conditions is satisfied: "100 time-savings completed" and "transition to jackpot gaming state" as conditions for ending the time-saving gaming state A. However, the "time saving number 100 times end" is set to "the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times" without counting the variable display of the normal symbol. Similarly, as the end condition for the C time-saving gaming state, it is set that either of the conditions "end of the number of time-saving games 1" and "transition to the jackpot gaming state" is satisfied, but "the number of time-saving games 1" is satisfied. ``end of round'' is set to ``the variable display of the special symbol is performed once'' without counting the variable display of the normal symbol.

In addition, the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine has in common the special symbol winning determination table (Figure 110), the special symbol determination table (Figure 111), the winning type determination table (Figure 112), the regular symbol winning determination table (Figure 117), the regular symbol determination table (Figure 118), and the regular symbol winning type determination table (Figure 119) of the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

[6-3-1. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 140 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state and the time-saving game state C in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Also, FIG. 141 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols after the limiter function is activated in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Note that the variation pattern table of special symbols in the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B is the same as that in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, so the explanation is omitted. Note that the variation pattern table of special symbols shown in FIG. 140 and FIG. 141 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 140 and 141 includes the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the random value for effect selection, the special symbol variation pattern, and the variable display of the special symbol. It is associated with time.

The main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table according to the game state, etc., and refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table to determine the variation pattern and the variable display time of the special symbol based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol winning determination process, and the random number value for effect selection. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern, it transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the sub-CPU 301.

Here, in the "Notes" column of Figures 140 and 141, the "Special electric feature release end time" and "Special chart processing end time" are listed for reference.

The "special electric accessory opening end time" means the opening time of the opening/closing prize opening 3151 that is opened when the "accessory object is released". As explained in the hit type determination table of FIG. 112, if the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "accessory object opening hit", in this embodiment, the opening/closing prize is determined as the disadvantageous "first opening mode". Since the opening time of the mouth 3151 is 200 msec, "200 msec" is shown as the "special electric accessory opening end time".

"Special symbol processing end time" refers to the time from when the special symbol management processing shown in FIG. 122 starts to when it ends for the start information of one special symbol. Specifically, it refers to the time from when the special symbol variable display start processing (special symbol control state number = 0) in FIG. 123 is performed to when the special symbol game end processing in FIG. 128 is performed.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state and C time-saving game state)
The special pattern variation pattern table TC1 shown in Figure 140 is a variation pattern table that is selected after the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine is backed up and cleared, or after the first special pattern corresponding to the selection pattern command "z4" for "hit on opening the special device" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table TC2 shown in FIG. 140 is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z5" of "accessory object opening" is stopped and displayed.

The special symbol variation pattern table TC3 shown in FIG. 140 is a variation pattern table that is selected after the first special symbol corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" for "hit on opening the reel" is stopped and displayed.

In the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in FIG. 140, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the variable display time of the special symbol is the variable display time of the normal symbol (13300 or 13500 msec). ) Any of the above fluctuation patterns "Chance fluctuation A" of the fluctuation pattern "01H" and "Chance fluctuation B" of the fluctuation pattern "02H" in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol. is selected.

In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, as well as in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, in the normal game state and the C time saving game state, due to the relationship with the variable display time of the normal symbols, , Chance variation A is such that the second starting port 3140 is likely to be opened in an unfavorable opening mode due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146, and short chance variation B is an opening mode in which the second starting port 3140 is advantageous due to the operation of the normal electric accessory 3146. It's easy to become.

In addition, the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in FIGS. 140 (1) to (3) have a selection rate of chance variation A and chance variation B, similar to the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine. are different. Chance fluctuation B in which the second starting port 3140 tends to be in an advantageous opening mode in the normal gaming state and C time-saving gaming state is that special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 < special symbol fluctuation pattern table T2 < special symbol fluctuation pattern table T3. They are arranged in order to make them easier to select.

Therefore, among the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3, the special symbol variation pattern table TC3 is the most advantageous variation pattern table for the player, but as described above, as a selection symbol command, , "z6" < "z5" < "z4", so the special symbol variation pattern table TC3 corresponding to the selection symbol command "z6" is configured to be the least likely to be selected.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when attention is paid to the "Special symbol processing end time" in the "Notes" column of the special symbol variation pattern tables TC1 to TC3 shown in Figures 140 (1) to (3), it has the following characteristics.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern (01H) of disadvantageous chance fluctuation A when it is determined to be a "time-saving hit" in the first special symbol hit determination process is such that its "special symbol processing end time" is "13500 msec". A variable display time for special symbols is set.

In addition, the variable display time of the special symbol is set so that the special symbol change pattern (0BH) when the first special symbol hit determination process determines that a "gimmick opening hit" occurs, and the "special symbol processing end time" is 13,500 msec.

In other words, the special symbol variation pattern (01H) of disadvantageous chance variation A when it is determined to be a "time-saving hit" in the first special symbol hit determination process, and the "Accessory release" pattern in the first special symbol hit determination process. The variable display time of the special symbol is set so that the "special symbol processing end time" of the special symbol variation pattern (0BH) when it is determined to be a "hit" is the same time.

Here, the special symbol fluctuation pattern (01H) of the disadvantageous chance fluctuation A when the hit determination process of the first special symbol determines that it is a "time-saving hit" and the special symbol fluctuation pattern (0BH) when the hit determination process of the first special symbol determines that it is a "gimmick release hit" are special symbol fluctuation patterns that are essentially equivalent to a "special symbol miss" in the fourth pachinko gaming machine. And the special symbol variable display time is set so that the special symbol fluctuation patterns (01H, 0BH) that are essentially equivalent to a special symbol miss all have the same "special symbol processing end time".

(Special symbol variation pattern table after limiter function is activated)
The special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 141 (1) is a specific variation pattern table that is selected in the first special symbol hit determination process after the limiter function is activated and the normal gaming state is entered. be.

In the special symbol variation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 141(1), when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", the second starting port 3140 is opened in an advantageous opening mode in the normal gaming state. The configuration is such that the chance variation B that is likely to be selected is always selected.

As with the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, when Chance Variation B is selected in the normal game state, the second start hole 3140 opens in an advantageous manner, making it easier for the game ball to enter the second start hole 3140. In this embodiment, as described above, if the game ball enters the second start hole 3140, it is easy to transition to a jackpot game state from the first route or the second route, and it is possible to essentially transition to a jackpot game state by the game ball entering the second start hole 3140.

For this reason, even if the consecutive games in the time-saving gaming state end due to the activation of the limiter function, if the result of the first hit judgment process for the first special symbol after the transition to the normal gaming state becomes "time-saving winning", it will not be possible to play again. Since it is possible to shift to the jackpot game state via the second route, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing due to the activation of the limiter function.

In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table ZC1 is configured so that chance fluctuation B is always selected when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," but it may also be configured so that chance fluctuation A, which is more likely to result in an unfavorable opening state of the second starting hole 3140, is selected with a lower probability than chance fluctuation B.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table ZC2 shown in FIG. 116(2) is a modification of the special symbol fluctuation pattern table ZC1 shown in FIG. 116(1), and after the transition to the normal gaming state after the limiter function is activated. , is a specific variation pattern table selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process. The special symbol variation pattern table ZC2 is configured such that when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is "time-saving hit", chance variation A is selected with a probability of 20% and chance variation B with a probability of 80%. are doing.

Even if you do this, if the result of the first hit determination process for the first special symbol after the transition to the normal gaming state is "time-saving hit", the probability of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state via the second route again Since the limiter function is increased, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the activation of the limiter function.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern tables ZC1 and ZC2 are fluctuation pattern tables that are selected based on the first special symbol hit determination process after the transition to the normal game state following the activation of the limiter function, but are not limited to the first time. For example, in response to the special symbol hold function, when the special symbol start information is held up to a specific number of reserved symbols (e.g., four symbols), the fluctuation pattern tables may be selected based on the special symbol hit determination process up to the specific number of reserved symbols, or may be fluctuation pattern tables selected based on the special symbol hit determination process up to an arbitrary predetermined number of times.

In this embodiment, when the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is a "time-saving hit," there is one chance fluctuation A and one chance fluctuation B, but the configuration may also be such that, based on the variable display time of the normal symbol, there are multiple chance fluctuation A groups in which the variable display time of the special symbol is equal to or longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol, and multiple chance fluctuation B groups in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol.

[6-3-2. Normal pattern variation table]
Fig. 142 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in Fig. 142 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 142 corresponds to the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol, the result of the winning determination process for the normal symbol, the random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect extracted when the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 3126A, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the variable display time of the normal symbol. The random number value for selecting the normal symbol effect is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variable display time based on the game state at the start of the normal symbol variable display, the result of the normal symbol winning determination process, and the normal symbol effect selection random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 3126A. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301.

Here, in the "Notes" column of Figure 142, the "Game status when variable display ends," "End time of normal electric device opening," and "End time of normal map processing" are listed for reference.

The "gaming state at the end of the variable display" means the gaming state when the variable display of the normal symbols ends, and may be different from the gaming state when the variable display of the normal symbols starts. Note that the "gaming state at the end of variable display" also includes A time-saving gaming state and B time-saving gaming state, but since they have little to do with the gameplay of this embodiment, their explanations are omitted in the notes. There is.

"Normal electric accessory opening end time" means the end time of the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 3146 (first opening time + wait time + second opening time). In the normal game state, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", as explained in the normal symbol per type determination table in FIG. 119, only the first opening time of 200 msec is the normal electric accessory. This is the opening end time. In addition, in the C time-saving gaming state, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is "normal symbol hit", as explained in the normal symbol per type determination table in FIG. 119, the first opening time and wait time One of 2500 msec, 4600 msec, and 5600 msec, which is the sum of the second opening time, is the normal electric accessory opening end time.

"Normal symbol processing end time" means the time from the start to the end of the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 134 with respect to the start information of one normal symbol.

In particular, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, if we pay attention to the "normal pattern processing end time" in the "remarks" column of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 142, it has the following features. ing.

When the gaming state at the start of the variable display of normal symbols is the normal gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (01H) when it is determined as "normal symbol hit" in the normal symbol hit determination process is The variable display time of the normal symbols is set so that the "common symbol processing end time" is "13500 msec" when the gaming state at the end of the variable display of the common symbols is the normal gaming state.

In addition, when the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state or the C time shortened game state, the variable display time of the normal symbol is set so that the normal symbol change pattern (02H) when the normal symbol hit determination process determines that the normal symbol is a miss is always 13,500 msec, regardless of the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol.

Here, if the game state at the start of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state or the C time shortened game state, and the game state at the end of the variable display of the normal symbol is the normal game state, even if the normal symbol hit determination process determines that the normal symbol is a hit, as shown in FIG. 119, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 3146 will be an unfavorable opening mode. Also, if the normal symbol hit determination process determines that the normal symbol is a miss, the normal electric device 3146 will not operate, which will naturally be disadvantageous to the player.

For this reason, if the gaming state at the start of the variable display of normal symbols is the normal gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state, even though it is determined as a "normal symbol hit" in the normal symbol hit determination process, the variable display of the normal symbols ends. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern (predetermined 01H) in which the gaming state at the time becomes the normal gaming state, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (02H) when it is determined as "normal symbol loss" in the normal symbol hit determination process. is a variation pattern of normal symbols that corresponds to "substantially losing normal symbols" which is disadvantageous to the player. The variable display time of the normal symbol is set so that all the normal symbol variation patterns corresponding to "substantially normal symbol loss" have the same "normal symbol processing end time".

Comparing the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 140 and 141 with the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. "Special symbol processing end time (13500 msec)" (see Figures 140 and 141) and "Normal symbol processing end time (13500 msec)" (see Figure 142) in the variation pattern of normal symbols corresponding to "substantially normal symbol loss" ) are configured so that they are the same time.

As a result, as will be described later with reference to Figure 143, even if a reserve function is provided that reserves start information for normal and special symbols up to a specified number, the difference in the start time of the variable display of normal and special symbols can be suppressed.

[6-4. Main control processing]
In the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are different from those in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine. Other processing is the same, except that the process for performing a hold function that holds the starting information of special symbols up to a predetermined number, and that the time saving number is not subtracted when variable display of normal symbols is performed. The process for performing this hold function is the same as in the first to third pachinko gaming machines, but the differences will be explained using the drawings used in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine.

(Special pattern variable display start process)
In the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 123) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, if the control state number of the special symbol is determined to be "0" (YES in S3021), The special symbol hit determination process is performed using the starting information (random value for special symbol jackpot determination, etc.) stored in the symbol determination area (S3022). However, in the special symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, if it is determined that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S3021), "the special symbol After performing the "starting information shift process", a special symbol hit determination process (S3022) will be performed.

Specifically, in the "special symbol start information shift process", if the special symbol variable display start process targets the first special symbol, the first special symbol start information shift process is performed in the first special symbol start storage area (1) of the main RAM 203. The stored starting information is shifted to the special symbol determination area, and the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) is shifted to the first special symbol starting storage area ( 1) - Shift to the first special symbol starting storage area (3). In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process targets the second special symbol, the second special symbol is used instead of the first special symbol starting memory area (1) to the first special symbol starting memory area (4). The starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4) are shifted in the same way as when the first special symbol is targeted for processing.

(Normal pattern control processing)
In the normal symbol variable display start process (S3293) of the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 135) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, various random numbers are stored as starting information in the normal symbol determination area. If there is, the normal symbol hit determination process is performed. However, in the normal symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, after performing the normal symbol start information shift process, similar to the above-mentioned "special symbol start information shift process", If various random numbers are stored as starting information in the normal symbol determination area, a normal symbol hit determination process will be performed. Furthermore, in the normal symbol variable display start process (S3293) of the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 134), the "normal symbol time saving management process" in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine is not performed. become.

(Switch input detection processing)
The switch input detection process (see FIG. 135) in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine includes first starting opening winning detection processing (S3381), second starting opening winning detection processing (S3382), and ball passing detection processing (S3387). ), processing is performed to store the extracted start information in one special symbol determination area or normal symbol start determination area. However, in the special symbol variable display start process in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and the second special symbol Starting memory area (1) to second special symbol starting memory area (4), first special symbol starting memory area (1) to first special symbol starting memory area (4), normal symbol starting memory area (1) to normal The starting information is stored while referring to the free space in the symbol starting storage area (4). This is similar to the first pachinko game machine.

[6-5. Opening mode of ordinary electric accessories]
FIG. 143 is a time chart showing an example of the opening mode of the normal electric accessory in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine.

Figure 143 illustrates, from above to below, the fluctuation and stopping of the normal symbol display section 161, the operation and stopping of the normal power solenoid 3148 that constitutes the normal electric device 3146, the fluctuation and stopping of the first special symbol display section 163, and the transition of the game state.

In addition, in FIG. 143, as shown in the normal symbol hit type determination table in FIG. 119, the unfavorable opening mode in which the opening time of the normal electric device 3146 in the normal game state is short (200 msec) is illustrated as "short opening", and the favorable opening mode in which the opening time of the normal electric device 3146 in the C time-saving game state is long (2000 to 3000 msec) is illustrated as "long opening". Furthermore, the type of the first special pattern that is displayed as stopped in response to a "time-saving hit" is illustrated as "stopped at C time-saving pattern", and the opening time of the opening and closing winning port 3151 that is opened when a "device opening hit" is achieved is illustrated as "device opening end time".

In the period (A) of FIG. 143, the first special symbol and the normal symbol that are variably displayed for the first time are shown, and when the gaming state is the C time-saving gaming state, the normal symbol display section 161 displays the "normal symbol". The variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "loss" has started, and the variable display time of the first special symbol corresponding to "accessory object opening hit" has started in the first special symbol display section 163. Further, with the start of the variable display time of the first special symbol, the gaming state has shifted from the C time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

Although the variable display time of the first special symbol corresponding to the "accessory object release hit" is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol loss", the variable display time of the first special symbol corresponds to the "special electric The ``special symbol processing end time'' added to the ``accessory release end time'' is set to the same time as the ``ordinary symbol processing end time'' for the normal symbol.

Therefore, at the time of (a) in Figure 143, since the "special symbol processing end time" for the first special symbol and the "regular symbol processing end time" for the regular symbol are set to the same time, the second time The fluctuation start timings of the first special symbol and the normal symbol that are variably displayed are approximately synchronized.

In the period (A) of FIG. 143, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, in the normal symbol display section 161, the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "normal symbol hit" is started, and the first special symbol In the display section 163, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance fluctuation A corresponding to the "time saving win" has started.

The variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance variation A corresponding to a "time-saving hit" is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to a "normal symbol hit", and the variable display time of the first special symbol ends after the variable display time of the normal symbol ends, and the game state transitions from the normal game state to the time-saving game state C.

Therefore, when the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit" has ended, the variable display time of the first special symbol has not ended, the game state is the normal game state, and as shown in the normal symbol hit type determination table in FIG. 119, the "short opening" in the normal game state is performed as the opening mode of the normal electric role.

Although the variable display time of the first special symbol of the disadvantageous chance fluctuation A corresponding to the "time saving hit" is longer than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol hit", the variable display time of the normal symbol The "normal pattern processing end time" which is the "normal electric accessory release end time" which is the "short release" time added to the "normal electric accessory release end time" is set to the same time as the "special symbol processing end time" for the first special symbol. .

For this reason, even at the time (c) in Figure 143, the "special pattern processing end time" for the first special pattern and the "regular pattern processing end time" for the regular pattern are set to the same time, so the start times of the fluctuations between the first special pattern and the regular pattern that are variably displayed for the third time will be roughly synchronized.

At the time (c) in Figure 143, when the game state is the C time-saving game state, the normal pattern display section 161 starts a variable display time of the normal pattern corresponding to a "normal pattern hit", and the first special pattern display section 163 starts a variable display time of the first special pattern of the advantageous chance variation B corresponding to a "time-saving hit". In addition, with the start of the variable display time of the first special pattern, the game state transitions from the C time-saving game state to the normal game state.

In the period (d) of Fig. 143, the variable display time of the first special symbol of the advantageous chance variation B corresponding to the "time saving hit" is shorter than the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to the "normal symbol win". , the variable display time of the first special symbol ends immediately before the variable display time of the normal symbol ends, and the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the C time-saving gaming state.

At the time (e) in FIG. 143, when the variable display time of the normal symbol corresponding to "per normal symbol" ends, the variable display time of the first special symbol has already ended and the gaming state changes to the C time-saving gaming state. As shown in the normal symbol per type determination table of FIG. 119, the "long release" in the C time-saving game state is performed as the release mode of the normal electric accessory.

In this way, in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, in addition to the configuration that produces the effects in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the "special symbol processing end time" in the special symbol variation pattern (01H, 0BH) that corresponds to "effectively a special symbol miss" is configured to be the same as the "regular symbol processing end time" in the normal symbol variation pattern that corresponds to "effectively a normal symbol miss" (Figs. 140 to 142). As a result, even if there is a reservation function that reserves the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, it is possible to suppress the difference in the time of change between the normal symbols and the special symbols until a jackpot is hit.

<Modification of the fourth pachinko gaming machine>
Next, a fourth pachinko gaming machine that is a modified example of the first and second embodiments will be described.

In the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, the game balls flowing down from the left side area 106 directly pass through the first passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120 while colliding with the game nails. / Constructed to allow ball entry. However, in order to pass/enter the first passing gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120, the game ball must enter a sorting device (for example, a so-called croon), and be directed to a specific outlet by the sorting device. It may be configured such that only the distributed game balls pass/enter the first passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120. For example, the stage 118 formed on the center accessory 115 is used as a sorting device, and the game balls that enter the warp entrance 117 are configured to be sorted to a plurality of outlet ports (not shown) by the sorting device, and the game balls are distributed to a specific outlet port. It may be configured such that only the distributed game balls pass/enter the first passage gate 3126A and the first starting port 3120. In particular, as in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko game machine, if the holding function is not provided to hold the start information of normal symbols and special symbols up to a predetermined number, the first passing gate per unit time Even if the rate of balls passing through/entering the first starting port 3126A and the first starting port 3120 is reduced, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game by using the distribution device.

In the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined based on the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that is already displayed in a variable manner. However, when the variable display time of the special symbol is determined, the variable display time of the special symbol may be determined based on the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that is already displayed in a variable manner. For example, when the "chance variation B" of the special symbol that is advantageous to the player is determined, the variable display time of the first special symbol that is shorter than the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that is already displayed in a variable manner is calculated (for example, the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol - 1 second), and the calculated time is determined as the variable display time of the first special symbol of the chance variation B. In addition, when the "chance variation A" of the special symbol that is disadvantageous to the player is determined, the variable display time of the first special symbol that is longer than the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol that is already displayed in a variable manner is calculated (for example, the remaining time of the variable display time of the normal symbol + 1 second), and the calculated time is determined as the variable display time of the first special symbol of the chance variation A. In particular, if the machine is equipped with a hold function that holds the start information for normal and special symbols up to a specified number, it is effective because it allows you to adjust the end time of the variable display time for normal and special symbols in real time.

In addition, in the first embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the second passing gate 3126B is provided in the right area 107 of the gaming board unit 3010, but as shown in the second embodiment of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the second passing gate 3126B does not have to be provided in the right area 107 of the gaming board unit 3010.

In addition, in the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, when the special symbols are displayed variably, the time saving number is subtracted to make it possible to shift from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. However, similar to the first to third pachinko gaming machines, after the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the number of time-saving games can be subtracted and the time-saving game state can be changed to the normal game state. good.

In addition, in the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko gaming machine, the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state under specific conditions (A time-saving gaming state) is counted, and the number of consecutive jackpots is Although the present invention is provided with a "limiter function" that partially restricts the game state to which the jackpot game state is transitioned after the end of the jackpot game state when a predetermined limiter number of times is reached, the limiter function may not be provided.

In addition, in the first and second embodiments of the fourth pachinko game machine, the "hit of the opening of the special feature" is determined when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed, but the machine may be configured so that the "hit of the opening of the special feature" is not determined when the hit determination process of the first special symbol is performed.

(others)
In the fourth pachinko game machine described above, the techniques of each embodiment can be applied to each other, including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and changes can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Further, the effects described in the fourth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. It's not something you can do.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the fourth pachinko gaming machine, so long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

[7. Fifth pachinko machine]
Next, the fifth pachinko game machine will be explained. The fifth pachinko game machine is a so-called Type 1 pachinko game machine, but whereas the first pachinko game machine had a gameplay mainly based on a "special symbol game" using special symbols, the fifth pachinko game machine The pachinko game machine of No. 5 is different in that the gameplay is mainly a "normal symbol game" using normal symbols, and accordingly, the configurations of various members are partially different.

Further, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the fifth pachinko gaming machine does not have two types of special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), but only one type of special symbol. Not yet. For this reason, there is no concept of "priority variable machine," "sequential variable machine," or "simultaneous variable machine," as described above. Note that, similarly to the first to third pachinko gaming machines, two types of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol) may be provided.

Hereinafter, when describing an embodiment of the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko gaming machine will be given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed descriptions of their configurations and processing will be omitted.

[7-1. Game board unit]
The game board unit 5010 of the fifth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 144. This game board unit 5010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 144 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 5010 included in the fifth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 5010 includes a game panel 5100, various members are arranged on the game panel 5100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 5100, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down. .

As shown in FIG. 144, the game board unit 5010 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine mainly in the configuration and arrangement of the first passing opening 5126A, the second passing opening 5126B, the starting opening 5140, the normal electric role unit 5145, and the special electric role unit 5130. The configuration and arrangement of each of these are explained below.

(First Passage)
The first passage opening 5126A is disposed below the display area of the display device 7, and is disposed so that a game ball hit from the left can pass through (a game ball hit from the right has difficulty or cannot pass through). The first passage opening 5126A is also provided with a first passage opening switch 5127A (see FIG. 145 described later) that detects the passage of a game ball through the first passage opening 5126A. The game ball that passes through the first passage opening 5126A flows down a flow path on the back side of the game panel 5100 and is discharged outside the machine.

(Second passage gate)
The second passage opening 5126B is arranged above the normal electric accessory unit 5145, which will be described later, in the right side area 107, and is arranged so that only game balls hit to the right can pass through. Further, the second passage port 5126B is provided with a second passage switch 5127B (see FIG. 145 described later) that detects passage of a game ball to the second passage port 5126B. Then, the game ball that has passed through the second passage port 5126B flows down the right side area 107 toward the normal electric accessory unit 5145.

When a game ball passes through the first passing port 5126A or the second passing port 5126B (hereinafter also referred to as "passing port 5126A, 5126B" as appropriate), a normal symbol lottery or a variable display of the normal symbol is performed.

In particular, in the fifth pachinko game machine, when a game ball passes through the first passage port 5126A (when the first passage port switch 5127A detects a game ball), a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three When the game ball (game ball) is paid out and the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B (when the second passage port switch 5127B detects the game ball), the prize ball is not paid out. There is.
Note that when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, a predetermined number of prize balls may be paid out, or when the game ball passes through the first passage port 5126A, the prize balls are paid out. It may be configured so that it does not occur.

(starting port)
The starting port 5140 is arranged in the right side area 107 so that a game ball hit to the right can enter the ball (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball). Further, the game ball that has passed through the second passage port 5126B is arranged below the starting port 5140 so that the ball can enter the starting port 5140. Further, the starting port 5140 is provided with a starting port switch 5141 that detects entry of a game ball into the starting port 5140.

When a game ball enters the starting hole 5140, a special pattern lottery will be held, a special pattern will be displayed variably, and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, one game ball) will be paid out.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 5145 is a unit body that integrates a starting port 5140, a starting port switch 5141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the starting port 5140, and a normal electric accessory 5146. 107.

The normal electric device 5146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 5147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal power solenoid 5148 (see FIG. 145 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 5147. The normal electric device 5146, i.e., the normal power shutter 5147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy to insert a game ball into the starting hole 5140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to insert a game ball into the starting hole 5140.

Specifically, the general-purpose power shutter 5147 is composed of a substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion disposed in front of the entrance of the starting port 5140 and a plate-shaped ball entry guide portion inclined toward the starting port 5140. There is. When the general electricity shutter 5147 is in the open state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention portion moves from the surface of the game panel 5100 to a non-contact area of the game ball, which is a distance longer than the diameter of the game ball, and reaches the starting port 5140. The plate-like ball guide section moves from the surface of the game panel 5100 to the game ball contact point located at a distance equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, and flows down to the right area 107. The game ball is received and the received game ball is guided to the starting port 5140. On the other hand, when the general electricity shutter 5147 is in the closed state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention part moves to the game ball contact area and prevents the game ball from entering the starting port 5140, preventing the board-shaped ball from entering. The guide part is buried in the game panel 5100, does not receive the game balls flowing down to the right side area 107, and does not prevent the game balls from flowing down. Note that instead of the general power shutter 5147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be used.

(Special electric feature unit)
The special electric role unit 5130 is a unit body that integrates the big prize opening 5131, the big prize opening count switch 5132 that detects the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening 5131, and the special electric role 5133. The special electric role unit 5130 is disposed at the bottom in the right side area 107. The special electric role unit 5130 may be disposed below the first passage opening 5126A or above the center role 115.

The large prize opening 5131 is a prize opening that can be shifted from a closed state to an open state. The large prize opening 5131 shifts from a closed state to an open state when a stop display mode is derived that indicates that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "big hit" or a "small hit". When the large prize opening 5131 is controlled to a big hit game state or a small hit game state, up to a specified number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) can enter the large prize opening 5131, and when a game ball enters the large prize opening 5131, prize balls (e.g., 15 game balls) corresponding to the large prize opening 5131 are paid out.

The special electric device 5133 is equipped with a protruding plate-type special electric shutter 5134 that can move forward and backward, and a special electric solenoid 5135 (see FIG. 145 described below) that operates the special electric shutter 5134. The special electric device 5133, i.e., the special electric shutter 5134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 5131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 5131.

Specifically, the special power shutter 5134 is composed of a plate-shaped roof that is gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the outlet 178. When the special power shutter 5134 is in the open state, the roof is embedded in the game panel 5100, opening the large prize opening 5131 and allowing game balls flowing down the right-side area 107 and game balls rolling on the roof to enter. When the special power shutter 5134 is in the closed state, the roof protrudes from the game panel 5100, making it impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the large prize opening 5131.

In particular, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the special electricity shutter 5134 is a gently sloping plate-shaped roof portion, and when the special electricity shutter 5134 is in the closed state, the game balls can roll on the roof portion. Therefore, even if the machine is controlled to a small win game state and the large prize opening 5131 is only opened for an extremely short time, one or more game balls rolling on the roof portion are dropped toward the large prize opening 5131, making it possible for the game balls to enter the large prize opening 5131.

[7-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 145. Fig. 145 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 145, the fifth pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the fifth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200. Specifically, the fifth pachinko gaming machine differs in the configuration of the special symbol display unit 5160, the special symbol hold display unit 5161, the normal power solenoid 5148, the special power solenoid 5135, the start port switch 5141, the first pass port switch 5127A, the second pass port switch 5127B, and the special prize port count switch 5132. In addition, since the fifth pachinko gaming machine does not execute the probability bonus control, it does not have the probability bonus notification display unit 167 of the first pachinko gaming machine. The configuration and arrangement of each of these are explained below.

(Special pattern display section)
The special symbol display section 5160 displays the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs in the LED unit 160. Specifically, the special symbol display section 5160 is composed of an LED group consisting of eight LEDs 163a to 163h, which correspond to the special symbol display section 5160 of the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 5).

When the conditions for starting the variable display of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "special symbol start conditions") are met, the variable display of special symbols begins, in which all or some of the eight LEDs 163a-163h that make up the special symbol display unit 5160 alternately or mutually turn on and off. When a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display of special symbols began, the variable display of special symbols stops, and the result of the special symbol winning determination process is derived.

(Special design reserved display section)
The reserved display section 5161 for special symbols displays the number of reserved variable displays of special symbols (hereinafter referred to as the "reserved number of special symbols") when the start information of the special symbols, i.e., the variable display of the special symbols, is reserved, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs in the LED unit 160. Specifically, the reserved display section 5161 for special symbols is composed of an LED group consisting of two LEDs 165a and 165b corresponding to the first reserved display section 165 for special symbols of the first pachinko game machine (see FIG. 5). Here, "the variable display of the special symbols is reserved" refers to a state from when the passage of the game ball into the start hole 5140 is detected and the start information of the special symbols is extracted, until the start condition of the special symbols is established.

Similar to the first special symbol reservation display section 165 of the first pachinko game machine, the special symbol reservation display section 5161 displays the number of reservations for a variable display of special symbols by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of the two LEDs 165a and 165b. Display.

(Solenoid for general purpose)
The normal power solenoid 5148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 5147. When the normal power solenoid 5148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it advances the normal power shutter 5147 forward to open the starting port 5140, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it retreats the normal power shutter 5147 rearward to close the starting port 5140.

(Special power solenoid)
The special power solenoid 5135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the special power shutter 5134. When the special power solenoid 5135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the special power shutter 5134 backward to open the large prize opening 5131, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the special power shutter 5134 forward to close the large prize opening 5131.

(Start switch)
The start hole switch 5141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the start hole 5140. When the start hole switch 5141 detects the entry of a game ball into the start hole 5140, the main CPU 201 extracts start information of the special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for symbol, random number value for effect selection, etc.), and uses the extracted start information of the special symbol in a hit determination process of the special symbol, performs a variable display process of the special symbol, or instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform a payout process of a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball).

(1st passage switch)
The first passageway switch 5127A is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the first passageway 5126A. When the first passing port switch 5127A detects passage of the game ball to the first passing port 5126A, the main CPU 201 outputs normal symbol start information (normal symbol hit determination random number, normal symbol random number, normal symbol performance) Random numbers for selection, etc.) are extracted, and the extracted starting information of the normal symbols is used for the normal symbol hit determination processing, variable display processing of the normal symbols, and predetermined prize balls (for example, 3 game balls). This will instruct the payout/fire control circuit 400 to perform the payout process.

(Second passage port switch)
The second passage port switch 5127B is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the second passage port 5126B. When the second passing port switch 5127B detects passage of the game ball to the second passing port 5126B, the main CPU 201 extracts the starting information of the normal symbol (random value for normal symbol hit determination, random symbol value of the normal symbol, etc.) However, the extracted starting information of the normal symbol is used for the normal symbol hit determination process, and the normal symbol variable display process is performed. Note that even if the passage of the game ball to the second passage port 5126B is detected by the second passage port switch 5127B, the payout/launch control circuit 400 is not instructed to perform the process of paying out the prize ball.

(Big winning opening count switch)
The big winning hole count switch 5132 is a penetrating proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the big winning hole 5131. When the big winning hole count switch 5132 detects the entry of game balls into the big winning hole 5131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 5131, and also counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 5131. (for example, 15 game balls) is instructed to the payout/launch control circuit 400.

(display device)
The display device 7 (see FIG. 144) is a device similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, but the display area of the display device 7 variably displays performance identification symbols corresponding to the special symbols in the normal gaming state. The difference is that, instead of, in the normal game state, performance identification symbols corresponding to the normal symbols are variably displayed.

[7-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 146 to 153. Note that the fifth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, although the probability variable control is not executed, a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Note that, although the probability variable control is not executed in this fifth pachinko gaming machine, this is not essential, and it is also possible to execute the probability variable control by setting the probability variable flag on depending on the type of jackpot, etc., for example.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, left-handed play is the regular game mode, and in the A time-saving game state and the C time-saving game state, right-handed play is the regular game mode. The sub-CPU 301 executes control to display the play style that is the regular game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7. Note that in the fifth pachinko game machine, the B time-saving game state is not executed, but the B time-saving game state may be executable.

[7-3-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 146 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 146 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table specifies the range (width) of the random number value for determining a jackpot, which is determined to be a "jackpot", "small hit" or "time-saving hit", and the corresponding determination value data ("jackpot determination value data", "small hit determination value data", "time-saving hit determination value data") as data used in the hit determination process for a special symbol, which is executed based on the ball entering the starting hole 5140. The total random number value of the random number value for determining a jackpot is 65536. In other words, the random number value for determining a jackpot is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 146, when a game ball enters the starting hole 5140, the main CPU 201 determines the result of the special symbol hit determination process as a "big hit," "small hit," or "time-saving hit" based on the special symbol hit determination process using a random number value for determining a big hit for the special symbol.

In this embodiment, even if a game ball enters the starting hole 5140 and a "small win" is determined and the game state transitions to a small win game state, a game ball can enter the large winning hole 5131 and a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 150 balls) can be paid out. Even if a "time-saving win" is determined, the game state transitions to the time-saving C game state and a game ball can be entered into the starting hole 5140 again.
Therefore, if a game ball enters the starting hole 5140, a payout of the game ball will be triggered by a "big hit" or "small hit", and therefore in the normal game state, the starting hole 5140 is opened and a game is played with the goal of having the game ball enter the starting hole 5140.

In addition, it may be configured such that a "loss" is determined when a special symbol hit determination process is performed. In the case where a "loss" is determined, it is preferable to specify that a "small win" or "time saving win" is determined with a higher probability than a "loss".

When the fifth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the probability of a big win and/or a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. In this case, for example, both the probability of a big win and the probability of a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of a small win may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of a big win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting, or the probability of a big win may be set to be constant regardless of the setting value and the probability of a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. However, even if the fifth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable to set the probability of a time-saving win to be a common probability for all settings.

[7-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 147 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 147 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table includes a "selected symbol command" and " This table is referred to when selecting the "Symbol Designation Command".

The "selection symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the type of win when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a win, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is selected from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol judgment table shown in FIG. selects "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 50 to 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z2" as the selection symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the special symbol win determination process, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 0 and 49, the main CPU 201 selects "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.In addition, if the symbol random number value of the special symbol is any value between 50 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when short-time hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues "z5 ” and select “zA3” as the symbol designation command.

Although the description is omitted in the fifth pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table is referred to when determining the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the special symbol display section 5160 (see FIG. 145) when the variable display of the special symbol stops, in accordance with the selection symbol command. This is the table that will be used. In addition, the special symbol display section 5160 derives a time saving win display mode, a jackpot display mode, a small win display mode, or a loss display mode based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Further, a decorative pattern stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative pattern stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[7-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 148 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table shown in FIG. 148 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 148, the winning type determination table associates the selected symbol command with the mode of the big win game state, the mode of the small win game state, and the mode of the game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times).

The main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table and determines the mode of the big hit game state, the mode of the small hit game state, and the mode of the game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times) based on the selected symbol command.

Here, in the "jackpot game state", the state transition of the big winning opening 5131 from the closed state to the open state is performed over a predetermined number of rounds. For one round, when the opening time during which the grand prize opening 5131 is open has elapsed or when a specified number (10) of game balls enter the grand prize opening 5131, the grand prize opening 5131 is opened. to the closed state, and one round ends. Then, when the predetermined number of rounds ends, the jackpot gaming state ends.

The "mode of jackpot gaming state" indicates the mode of opening of the large prize opening 5131 that is opened during the jackpot gaming state, and in this embodiment, indicates the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the opening time per round. Note that the number of openings may be determined so that the large prize opening 5131 is opened and closed multiple times per round, or multiple large prize openings may be provided and the large prize opening to be opened may be determined.

In this embodiment, one round ends when 10 game balls enter the big winning hole 5131 for one round, and every time 10 game balls enter the big winning hole 5131, 15 game balls enter the big winning hole 5131. The game ball (prize ball) is set to be paid out. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 148, when the selected symbol command "z1" corresponding to "jackpot" is the result of the special symbol hit determination process, 10 rounds are determined, and 10 rounds x 10 pieces x 15 prize balls = 1500 game balls can be paid out, and when the selected symbol command is "z2", 4 rounds are determined, and 4 rounds x 10 pieces x 15 prize balls = 600 game balls can be paid out.

In addition, in the "small win game state", the large prize opening 5131 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined number of openings. When the predetermined number of openings for one small win game state is completed or a prescribed number of game balls enter the large prize opening 5131, the large prize opening 5131 transitions from an open state to a closed state, and one small win game state ends.

"Small winning gaming state mode" indicates the opening state of the large winning opening 5131 that is opened during the small winning gaming state, and in this embodiment, indicates the number of openings and the opening time in the small winning gaming state. It should be noted that a plurality of big winning holes may be provided and the big winning hole to be opened may be determined.

In this embodiment, when 10 game balls enter the big winning opening 5131 for one small winning gaming state, one small winning gaming state ends and the gaming balls enter the big winning opening 5131. It is set so that 15 game balls (prize balls) are paid out every time the ball is played. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 148, when the selected symbol command is "z3, z4" corresponding to "small hit" as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the number of openings is determined to be 10 or 8, 10×15 prize balls=150 game balls can be paid out.

Furthermore, the opening time for one round in the small winning gaming state (for example, 0.15 seconds) is set shorter than the opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 29 seconds), and It can be said that the big prize opening 5131 is opened in the "first opening mode" which is advantageous in this case, and the big winning opening 5131 is opened in the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode in the small winning game state. Furthermore, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small win game state (for example, 150 pieces) is greater than the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small win game state (for example, 1500 or 600 pieces). It can be said that the jackpot gaming state is an "advantageous special gaming state" and the small winning gaming state is a "disadvantageous special gaming state" than the jackpot gaming state.

"Game state mode" indicates the mode of the game state after the end of the jackpot game state or after the time saving hit, and indicates the settings of the "time saving flag" and the "time saving number of times". In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state but is controlled to the C time-saving game state, and the "time-saving flag" and "time-saving number" are set.

The "time saving flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving gaming state is executed and the type of the time saving gaming state to be executed. The time saving flag = 0 indicates the normal gaming state, and the time saving flag = 1 indicates the A time saving gaming state. The time saving flag=3 indicates the C time saving gaming state. In addition, in this embodiment, although the B time-saving game state is not executed, when the B time-saving game state is made executable, the time-saving flag=2 indicates the B time-saving game state.

The "number of time-saving times" refers to the number of times that the winning determination process for the special symbol is performed in the time-saving play state, i.e., the number of times that the variable display of the special symbol is performed. This number of time-saving times is subtracted when the winning determination process for the special symbol is performed, i.e., when the variable display of the special symbol begins, and when the number of time-saving times = 0, the game will transition from the time-saving play state to the normal play state.

As shown in FIG. 148, when the selected symbol command is "z1, z2" corresponding to "jackpot" as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 sets "A" indicating the time-saving gaming state as a "time-saving flag". 1" is determined, and "10 times" is determined as the "time saving number".

As shown in FIG. 148, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "z5" corresponding to "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 sets "3" as the "time-saving flag" indicating C time-saving gaming state. ” is determined, and “1 time” is determined as the “time saving number”.

As shown in FIG. 148, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "z5" corresponding to "time-saving hit", the main CPU 201 determines "1 time" as the "time-saving number". It is composed of

In this embodiment, the number of time-saving times is determined to be 10 in the case of a jackpot, and 1 in the case of a time-saving hit, because the probability of a "jackpot" being determined as a result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is low, making it a premium situation, and by transitioning to the A time-saving play state with 10 time-saving times after the end of the jackpot play state, it is possible to transition to more small win play states while being controlled in the A time-saving play state with 10 times. In other words, in this embodiment, by setting a large number of time-saving times, it is possible to transition to more small win play states in the time-saving play state, making it possible to pay out more game balls.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is the selected symbol command "z1, z2" corresponding to "jackpot", the same as when the selected symbol command "z5" corresponds to "time-saving hit", " It may be configured such that "one time" is determined as "the number of time saving times".

[7-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 149 is an example of a special symbol variation pattern table of the fifth pachinko game machine. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 149, the special symbol variation pattern table associates the results of the special symbol winning determination process, the random number value for effect selection, the special symbol variation pattern, and the variable display time of the special symbol. The random number value for effect selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above. Also, the "Notes" column in FIG. 149 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

The main CPU 201 refers to the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149, and determines the special symbol variation pattern, the special symbol variable display time, and Determine. In addition, in this embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149 is referred to regardless of the normal game state or the time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, C time-saving game state). Depending on the situation, the referenced variation pattern table may be different.

Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol, it transmits a special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

The "rewind performance" shown in the "Remarks" column of FIG. 149 means that the common "bonus time basic performance (special performance)" performed over multiple small win game states is This is a performance that suggests that there is a possibility that this will continue. The "rewind performance" and the "bonus time basic performance" will be described in detail later using FIG. 170. "Full rotation reach" is an effect that notifies you in advance that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot. "Jackpot notification reach" is a production that suggests that the result of the hit judgment process of the special symbol may be a jackpot. Specifically, three decorative symbols consisting of the words "Invincible" are aligned. There will be a production of whether or not. "Short variation" is a short variation in the variable display time of special symbols, but while the shortening variation and small hit game state are being performed, in terms of production, "Bonus time basic production or Bonus time specialization" A special performance will be held.

In the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 149, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "time-saving hit," the special symbol variation pattern and the variable display time of the special symbol for performing a "rewind effect" are determined.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot," the special symbol variation pattern and the variable display time of the special symbol are determined to perform a "full rotation reach" or a "jackpot notification reach."

Furthermore, when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", the special symbol variation pattern and special symbol variable display time for performing "shortening variation" or "jackpot notification reach" are determined. It is configured to

When the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit," the special symbol change pattern for performing a "shortened change" is easily determined, and a short variable display time is determined by determining the special symbol change pattern for performing a "shortened change." Therefore, by determining a short variable display time as the special symbol's variable display time, it is possible to transition between multiple small hit game states in a short time.

In addition, by determining the variation pattern of the special symbols for performing the "reach for jackpot notification", when the A time-saving gaming state or the C time-saving gaming state is being executed, a performance corresponding to the lottery of the special symbol is performed. be able to.

In this embodiment, the special symbol variation pattern for performing a "big hit notification reach" is determined when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small hit", but it may also be configured to provide a "miss" as a result of the special symbol hit determination process, and to determine the special symbol variation pattern for performing a "big hit notification reach" when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "miss".

[7-3-5. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
Fig. 150 is an example of a winning judgment table for normal symbols in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in Fig. 150 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, that is, the game state and the normal symbol hit determination disturbance extracted when the game ball passes through the passage ports 5126A and 5126B. This is a table that is referred to when determining a "normal symbol hit" or "normal symbol loss" by lottery based on the numerical value.

The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 150 includes the gaming state, the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination, and the win/loss determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”). They are defined in correspondence.

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for determining a hit of a normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning/losing determination table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 150, and determines the winning/losing determination value data based on the game state and the range (width) of the random number value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 0 and 97, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "normal symbol win" and sets the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol win determination value data." Also, in the normal game state, if the random number value for determining whether the extracted normal symbol is a win is any value between 98 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines that the symbol is a "miss" and sets the determination value data to "miss determination value data."

In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has won a normal symbol if the random number value for hit determination is between 0 and 98, and changes the winning/losing determination value data to "normal". "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the A time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning determination random number value of the extracted normal symbol is 99, and determines it as a "loss", and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines that the hit determination random value of the extracted normal symbol is one of 0 to 97 as a “normal symbol hit”, and changes the win/loss determination value data to “normal symbol hit”. "Symbol hit judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the C time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines a "loss" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is either 98 or 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". ” is decided.

In this embodiment, the probability of winning a normal symbol in the A time-saving game state (selection rate shown in FIG. 150) is the highest among the normal game state, the A time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state.

Further, the winning probability per normal symbol in the C time-saving gaming state is the same as the winning probability per normal symbol in the normal gaming state. Therefore, even if the gaming state shifts between the normal gaming state and the C time-saving gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol will not change.

Note that the winning probability per normal symbol may be the same in the normal game state, the A time-saving game state, and the C time-saving game state. In this case, the control process can be simplified because it is only necessary to vary the proportion of types of normal symbols, which will be described later, for each state without changing the probability of winning per normal symbol.

[7-3-6. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 151 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" that determines the normal symbol stopping symbol based on the above-mentioned normal symbol winning/losing determination value data and the normal symbol random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passage openings 5126A and 5126B.

"Select symbol command when normal symbol hits" is a command to specify the winning symbol of the normal symbol determined according to the type of normal symbol when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit. be.

The normal symbol determination table shown in Figure 151 specifies the hit/miss determination value data for normal symbols ("normal symbol hit" or "miss"), the symbol random number value for normal symbols, and the symbol selection command when a normal symbol hits.

In addition, the "Reference" column in Figure 151 is the combined selection rate of the selection rate for normal symbol hit determination in the normal game state (see Figure 150) and the selection rate for the "Select symbol command when hitting a normal symbol". This is illustrated as a "normal symbol" which is determined to be a "normal symbol hit" in the normal gaming state, and which the normal electric accessory 5146 (normal power shutter 5147) opens advantageously in the normal gaming state as described later. This is for explaining the ``total selection rate in the normal gaming state'' when the winning selection symbol command fz1'' is determined.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 151, and determines the normal symbol win selection symbol command based on the normal symbol win/loss determination value data and the normal symbol random symbol value.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 151, when normal pattern winning determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning/losing determination value data for normal patterns, for example, the selection pattern command when a normal pattern is won is selected as follows.

For example, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues a normal symbol hit select symbol command if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 162. ``fz1'' is selected as the normal symbol random number value from 163 to 65535, and ``fz2'' is selected as the normal symbol hit selection symbol command.

As shown in the "Reference" column of FIG. 151, the selection rate of the normal symbol hit judgment value data in the normal gaming state is "98/100" (see FIG. 150), and the selection rate of the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command" is "98/100" (see FIG. 150). The selection rate of ``fz1'' is approximately ``1/402.06'', and the ``total selection rate in the normal gaming state'' is used to ultimately determine the ``selected symbol command fz1 when hitting a normal symbol'' in the normal gaming state. is set to approximately "1/410.3".

In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the "selection pattern command when a normal pattern is hit" is selected based on the normal pattern hit/loss judgment value data (the result of the normal pattern hit judgment process) and the normal pattern random number value, regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 150) and determines the normal symbol win/loss determination value data based on the extracted normal symbol hit determination random value. After that, the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 151) is referred to and the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is determined based on the symbol random value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the extracted random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, the win/loss of the normal symbol and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol win may be determined together.

[7-3-7. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 152 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 152 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol per type determination table is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 (normal electric shutter 5147) according to the gaming state and the selection symbol command at the time of normal symbol winning.

The normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 152 specifies the game state, the symbol selection command when a normal symbol is won, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146 in correspondence with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 152 and determines the opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146 based on the game state and the normal symbol winning selection pattern command. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 the opening pattern command of the normal electric device corresponding to the opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146 that has been determined.

In this embodiment, when the main CPU 201 is in the normal gaming state, when the normal symbol hit select symbol command is "fz1", the first opening time is 2000 msec, the wait time is 500 msec, and the second opening time is 3000 msec. decide. Further, in the normal game state, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz2", the main CPU 201 determines the first opening time to be 100 msec, no wait time, and no second opening time.

Therefore, even in the normal game state, if the normal symbol hit select symbol command "fz1" is selected, an advantageous opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 5146 is determined, and the game ball to the starting port 5140 is It is now possible to enter the ball.

In addition, when the normal symbol selection command "fz1" is selected in the normal game state, a predetermined time (e.g., 10,000 msec) of waiting time for opening may be set before the first opening. By setting this waiting time for opening, it is possible to secure time for executing a promotional effect (e.g., an effect that displays "Aim to the right!") that encourages the player to enter the normal electric device 5146. By executing this promotional effect, it becomes easier to avoid the occurrence of a so-called "flat out," in which the game ball does not enter the normal electric device 5146 even though the normal symbol selection command "fz1" is selected, and therefore it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In this embodiment, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state and the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz1", the main CPU 201 determines the first opening time to be 2000 msec, the wait time to be 500 msec, and the second opening time to be 3000 msec. In addition, when the main CPU 201 is in the A time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state and the symbol command selected when a normal symbol hits is "fz2", the main CPU 201 determines the first opening time to be 2500 msec, the wait time to be 500 msec, and the second opening time to be 2500 msec.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the selected symbol command when the same normal symbol is hit (for example, "fz2"), the opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146 is configured to differ depending on the game state.

When in the A time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state, regardless of the normal pattern selection command, a favorable opening pattern for the normal electric device 5146 is determined, and the game ball can enter the starting hole 5140.

In addition, even if the normal symbol hit select symbol command "fz1" or "fz2" is selected in the A time saving gaming state or the C time saving gaming state, a predetermined period of time (for example, 5000 msec. ) may be set.

[7-3-8. Normal pattern variation table]
153 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 153 is extracted from the gaming state, the normal symbol win/loss judgment value data, the normal symbol winning selection symbol command, and when the game ball passes through the passage ports 5126A and 5126B. The random number value for normal symbol performance selection, the variation pattern of the normal symbol, and the variable display time of the normal symbol are associated with each other. Further, the "Remarks" column in FIG. 153 is shown for convenience to make it easier to understand.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153, and based on the gaming state, the normal symbol win/loss judgment value data, the normal symbol winning selection symbol command, and the normal symbol effect selection random value. Then, the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols are determined.

After determining the normal symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the normal symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

Here, the "long release" illustrated in the "select symbol command when hitting a normal symbol" in FIG. 153 refers to an advantageous release pattern (see FIG. 152) in which the opening time of the normal electric accessory 5146 is long, and is used in this implementation. The form refers to the symbol selection command "fz1" when a normal symbol hits in the normal game state, and the symbol commands "fz1" and "fz2" when a normal symbol hits in the A time-saving gaming state or the C-time saving gaming state. In addition, "short release" refers to an unfavorable release pattern in which the release time of the normal electric accessory 5146 is short (see FIG. 152), and in this embodiment, the selection symbol command "fz2" is used when a normal symbol is hit in the normal game state. , and is not performed in the A time-saving game state or the C time-saving game state.

"Normal reach" shown in the "Remarks" column of FIG. 153 suggests that the normal symbol hit select symbol command fz1, which the normal electric accessory 5146 opens advantageously in the normal game state, may have been determined. It is a performance that Moreover, "super reach" is an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility that the selection symbol command fz1 at the time of normal symbol hit, in which the normal electric accessory 5146 is advantageously released in the normal game state, has been determined. Moreover, "special reach" is an effect that suggests that there is an extremely high possibility that the selection symbol command fz1 has been determined when the normal symbol hits, which is advantageously released by the normal electric accessory 5146 in the normal game state. That is, "normal reach", "super reach", and "special reach" are performances that suggest the possibility that "long open" has been decided in the normal gaming state, and it is possible for the game ball to enter the starting port 5140. It can be said that this is a performance that hints at what is to come.

In addition, "normal variation" refers to a variation in which the variable display time of the normal pattern is normal, and "shortened variation" refers to a variation in which the variable display time of the normal pattern is short.

In the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 153, in the normal game state, when the normal symbol hit/loss judgment value data is "normal symbol hit judgment value data" and the symbol command selected when the normal symbol hits is "fz1", the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variable display time for performing a "normal reach", "super reach" or "special reach" are determined.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbol is "normal symbol winning judgment value data" and the symbol command selected when the normal symbol is hit is "fz2", the normal symbol variation pattern and the variable display time of the normal symbol for performing "normal variation", "normal reach", "super reach" or "special reach" are determined.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, if the normal symbol win/loss judgment value data is "normal symbol loss judgment value data", "normal fluctuation", "normal reach", "super reach" or "special reach" is performed. The variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols are determined.

Further, in the case of the A time-saving game state or the time-saving game state C, the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variable display time for performing the "shortening variation" are configured to be determined.

When in the A time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state, a short variable display time is determined as the variable display time for the normal pattern, so that when the game ball passes through the second passage opening 5126B, the normal electric device 5146 is quickly activated, thereby increasing the rate at which the game ball enters the start opening 5140 per unit time.

[7-4. Main control processing]
In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 include a special symbol control process carried out in S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23); Although the normal symbol control processing and sub-control circuit processing are partially different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process, and the sub control circuit process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine We will explain it again, including the same processing as above, with different step numbers.

[7-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in S39 in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 154. Fig. 154 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 154, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S5001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S5001, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S5001, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, etc., in a predetermined register.

In S5002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S5001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state.

If it is determined in S5002 that the control number of the special symbol is not 0 (NO determination in S5002), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5004.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5002 that the control number of the special symbol is 0 (YES in S5002), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5003.

In S5003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the special symbol is the start of variable display.

If it is determined in S5003 that the special symbol has not started to be variably displayed (if S5003 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5003 that the special symbol is to start variable display (YES in S5003), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5004.

In S5004, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 155. After executing the processing of S5003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S5001 to S5004) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[7-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5004 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154) will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

Further, the numerical values (“0” to “5”) written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 155 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S5021).

If it is determined in S5021 that the special symbol waiting time is not 0 (NO in S5021), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (if S5021 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5022.

In S5022, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S5022, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5023. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S5023 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S5022.

In S5023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S5023 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 156. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5024.

In S5024, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S5024 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 157. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S5025.

In S5025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S5025 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 158. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5026.

In S5026, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S5026 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 160. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5027.

In S5027, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S5027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 161. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5028.

In S5028, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end process. This S5028 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 162.

After completing the processing of S5023 to S5028, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 154). In addition, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S5004 if the special symbol management process is called in S5003 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S5007 if it is called in S5006, and calls it in S5009. If it has been called, the process returns to S5010, and if it has been called in S5012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[7-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 156, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special pattern is "0" (S5031).

If it is determined in S5031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (NO in S5031), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process, and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 155). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (YES in S5031), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5033.

In S5033, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the special symbol start information. In this process, the start information stored in the special symbol start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination area (0), and the start information stored in the special symbol start memory area (2) to the special symbol start memory area (4) is shifted to the special symbol start memory area (1) to the special symbol start memory area (3). After executing the process of S5033, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5034.

In S5034, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for the special symbol. In this process, the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 146) is referenced, and the special symbol hit determination process is performed using the random number value for big hit determination of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area (0). In this embodiment, it is determined whether it is a time-saving hit, a small hit, or a big hit. In addition, the main CPU 201 sets the time-saving hit flag on if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a time-saving hit, sets the small hit flag on if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, and sets the big hit flag on if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big hit. After executing the process of S5034, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5035.

In S5035, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S5034) (for example, time saving hit, small hit, jackpot). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 147) is referred to, and the symbol random value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area (0) is used to execute the above-mentioned "select symbol command" or "design designation command". ” is determined. After executing the process in S5035, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5036.

In S5036, the main CPU 201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining or deciding the type of win when the result of the special symbol win determination process is, for example, a win (time-saving win, small win, or big win). In this process, a win type determination table (see FIG. 148) is referenced and the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process (S5035). Note that in this embodiment, there are multiple types of wins, but there may be only one type of big win, one type of small win, or multiple types of time-saving wins. After executing the process of S5036, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5037.

In S5037, the main CPU 201 performs a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process, the variation pattern table (see FIG. 149) is referenced, and the variation pattern of the special symbol and the variable display time of the special symbol are determined based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process and the random number value for effect selection stored in the special symbol determination area (0). Note that in this embodiment, the variation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 149 is referenced regardless of the game state, but the variation pattern table to be referenced may be different depending on the game state. After executing the process of S5037, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5038.

In S5038, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, the variable display time for the special symbol determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process (S5037) is set to the waiting time for the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display unit 5160 is caused to start varying display of the special symbol. This waiting time for the special symbol is decremented as a special symbol timer counter in a system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at 2 msec intervals. After executing the process of S5038, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5039.

In S5039, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving end management process. In the fifth pachinko gaming machine, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the number of time-saving times is subtracted when "variable display of special symbols begins." In this process, 1 is subtracted from the time-saving number counter, and when the time-saving number counter = 0, the time-saving flag is cleared and transition control from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is performed. After executing the process of S5039, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5040.

In S5040, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see S5024 in FIG. 155) is performed. After executing the process of S5040, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5041.

In S5041, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, an update process of parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 is performed. Then, a transmission reservation process of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S5041, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5042.

In S5042, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. This processing mainly involves updating various flags related to game status management (e.g., time-saving flags, etc.). After executing S5042, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S5043.

In S5043, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol variation pattern command. The special symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited period, and interrupts the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start processing (in particular, the game state management processing (S5042) and the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation processing (S5043)). It is preferable to do so within the prohibited area.

[7-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5014 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (S5051).

If it is determined in S5051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (NO determination in S5051), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 155). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S5051 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5052.

In S5052, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (see S5015 in FIG. 155) is performed. After executing the process of S5052, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5053.

In S5053, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. This process also includes a process for stopping the variable display of the special symbol. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S522 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S5053, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5054.

In S5054, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. As mentioned above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). It is also possible to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of time savings and the like. After executing the process of S5054, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

[7-4-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 158, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S5071).

If it is determined in S5071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S5071), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (if S5071 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5072.

In S5072, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot.

If it is determined in S5072 that the reel is not a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbols are not in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S5072 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5073. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5072 that the reel is a jackpot, i.e. that the stopped special symbols are in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot (if S5072 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5078.

In S5073, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a small win has occurred, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win.

If it is determined in S5073 that the reel is not a small win, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a miss (if S5073 is a NO judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5074. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reel is a small win, i.e. that the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a small win (if S5073 is a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5078.

In S5074, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a time saving win, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a time saving opening win.

If it is determined in S5074 that the time-saving hit has not occurred, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S5077. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5074 that the time-saving hit has occurred, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S5075.

In S5075, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is an A time-saving gaming state. Specifically, the main CPU 201 refers to the time saving flag and determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating the A time saving gaming state is 1. If it is determined that it is not in the A time saving gaming state, the process moves to S5076 to perform the C time saving state setting process, and if it is determined that it is in the A time saving gaming state, the C time saving state setting process is not performed. Then, the process moves to S5077. By this process, even if a "time-saving win" is determined by a special symbol lottery during the time-saving game state A, the determination of "time-saving win" can be made invalid.

In S5076, the main CPU 201 performs C time saving state setting processing. In this C time saving state setting process, with reference to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. Set the data regarding the gaming state. Specifically, the time saving flag indicating the C time saving game state is set to 3 (the time saving flag is turned on), and the time saving number counter is set to 1. After executing the process in S5076, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5077.

In S5077, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 159. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 155).

In S5078, the main CPU 201 performs a start setting process of the jackpot game control process or the small win game control process. In this process, signals output to, for example, the hall computer 1186 (see FIG. 145) and the island computer (not shown) via the external terminal board 1184 are generated and updated. In addition, the signal generated and updated in this process is a signal related to the special symbol that is the processing target of the special symbol game determination process. After performing the process in S5078, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5079.

In S5079, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the round display LED data. After that, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of times the large prize opening 5131 can be opened (S5080), and processing to set a large prize signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S5081).

In S5082, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, after the end of this special symbol game determination process, the grand prize opening preparation process (see S5026 in FIG. 155) is performed. will be held.

In S5083, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process (S5083). In this process, the main CPU 201 performs a process to clear various flags and counters, such as the time-saving flag and the time-saving counter, when a big win occurs. Note that in the case of a small win, the process to clear various flags and counters, such as the time-saving flag and the time-saving counter, is not performed. Then, a process to reserve the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In S5084, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a big win start display command when a big win has occurred, and a process for reserving the transmission of a small win start display command when a small win has occurred. The big win start display command or small win start display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S522 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S5084, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited area and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S5071 to S5084) within the interrupt prohibited area.

[7-4-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 159, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5077 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 158) will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the fifth pachinko game machine.

In S5092, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is thus performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S5092, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5093.

In S5093, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game state designation parameter setting process. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game end command transmission reservation process (S5094). The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S5094, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 158).

[7-4-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 160, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5026 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 155) will be described. Fig. 160 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the fifth pachinko game machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S5101).

If it is determined in S5101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S5101 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (YES in S5101), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5102.

In S5102, the main CPU 201 loads the grand prize opening opening/closing execution count counter value. The big winning opening opening/closing execution counter corresponds to a counter that counts the number of rounds in the jackpot game state when executing the jackpot game control process, and corresponds to the counter that counts the number of rounds in the jackpot game state when executing the small win game control process. This corresponds to a counter that counts the number of times the process is opened. The counted value of the big winning opening opening/closing execution number counter (big winning opening opening/closing execution number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S5102, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5103.

In S5103, the main CPU 201 determines whether the large prize opening/closing execution count counter value is the upper limit. In this embodiment, as shown in the win type determination table in FIG. 148, the upper limit for the number of rounds in the large prize game state is 4 rounds or 10 rounds, and the upper limit for the number of times the small prize game state can be opened is 8 times or 10 times.

If it is determined in S5103 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened and closed has reached the upper limit (if S5103 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5104.

In S5104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S5104) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 155) is performed. (see S5028) will be performed. After executing the process in S5104, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5105.

In S5105, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed.

In S5106, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot end display command when it is a jackpot, and performs transmission reservation processing of a small win end display command when it is a small win. The jackpot end display command or small win end display command reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. be done. After the process of S5106, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

Returning to S5103, if it is determined that the number of opening/closing operations of the big prize opening is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S5103), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5107.

In S5107, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the value of the large prize opening opening/closing execution count counter. After performing the process of S5107, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5108.

In S5108, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining the big winning opening to be opened. In this process, as the big winning hole to be opened, the big winning hole 5131 is determined when the jackpot game control process is being executed, and the big winning hole 5131 is determined when the small winning game control process is being executed. After executing the process in S5108, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5109.

In S5109, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the large prize opening 5131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 5131, the maximum number of balls that can enter the large prize opening 5131, the number of prize balls when a ball enters the large prize opening, etc. are set. The number of times the large prize opening is opened corresponds to the number of rounds when the large prize opening control process is executed, and corresponds to the number of times the large prize opening 5131 is opened when the small prize opening control process is executed. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the large prize opening 5131 is opened multiple times in one round or small prize opening control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the large prize opening 5131 is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S5109, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5110.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 29,000 msec when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 1,500 msec or a maximum of 2,000 msec when the small prize game control process is being executed. The maximum number of balls that can enter the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when the small prize game control process is being executed. The number of winning balls when a ball enters the large prize opening 5131 is set to, for example, 15 balls. However, the values that are set or configured in the various setting processes related to the large prize opening are not limited to the above.

In S5110, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning hole opening/closing control process to open the big winning hole 5131. After executing the process in S5110, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5111.

In S5111, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S5111) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S5027 in FIG. 155) will be performed. After executing the process in S5111, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5112.

In S5112, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S5112, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5113.

In S5113, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S5113, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

[7-4-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 161, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5027 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S5121).

If it is determined in S5121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S5121 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5121 that the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (YES in S5121), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5122.

In S5122, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 5131 is the maximum number of balls that have entered. In this process, it is determined whether the value counted by the big winning hole count switch 5132 (see FIG. 145), which counts the number of game balls entering the big winning hole, is the value of the maximum number of balls entering the big winning hole. . It should be noted that the big winning hole winning counter value counted by the big winning hole counting switch 5132 is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S5122, if the main CPU 201 determines that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 5131 is not the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers processing to S5123, and if it determines that the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 5131 is the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers processing to S5128-1.

In S5128-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the game is in a jackpot gaming state (the jackpot flag is on). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is in the jackpot gaming state, it moves the process to S5124, and if it determines that it is not in the jackpot gaming state (that is, it is in the small winning gaming state), it moves the process to S5128-2. .

In S5123, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 5131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S5109 in FIG. 160) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S5123 that the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 5131 has not elapsed (NO in S5123), the main CPU 201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process ( (see Figure 155).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5123 that the maximum opening time of the large prize opening 5131 has elapsed (if S5123 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5124.

In S5124, the main CPU 201 performs closing processing of the big prize opening 5131. After executing the process in S5124, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5125.

In S5125, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S5125) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening preparation process (see S5026 in FIG. 155) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S5125, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5126.

In S5126, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S5126, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5127.

In S5127, if the main CPU 201 is in the jackpot gaming state, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, the transmission reservation process of the inter-round display command is not performed. After the process of S5127, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155).

In S5128-2, the main CPU 201 performs a closing setting process to close the big prize opening 5131. After executing the process in S5128-2, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5128-3.

In S5128-3, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, after the end of this big winning opening control process, the jackpot end process (see S5028 in FIG. 155) will be held. After executing the process in S5128-3, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5128-4.

In S5128-4, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S5128-4, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5128-5.

In S5128-5, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the small winning end display command. The small hit end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S5128-5, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

[7-4-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 162, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155) will be described. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S5131).

If it is determined in S5131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (NO in S5131), the main CPU 201 terminates the jackpot termination process and also terminates the special symbol management process (see FIG. 155). , returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 154). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S5131 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5132.

In S5132, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various counter values related to the big win game state and small win game state (large win port opening count counter value, large win port winning counter value, etc.), time-saving win flag, small win flag, big win flag, symbol confirmation count counter value, etc. are cleared. After executing S5132, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S5133.

In S5133, the main CPU 201 performs the A time-saving state setting process. In this A time-saving state setting process, the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 148 is referenced, and the mode of the game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times) is determined based on the time-saving winning selection pattern command, and the data of the determined game state mode is set. Specifically, whether the time-saving winning selection pattern command is "z1" or "z2", the time-saving flag is set to 1 (the time-saving flag is turned on), indicating the A time-saving game state, and the time-saving number counter is set to 10. After executing the process of S5132, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5034.

In S5134, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 159 is performed. After executing the processing of S5134, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end processing and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 155).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[7-4-10. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S40 during the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 163. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 163, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

Figure 163 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the fifth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 163 are control state numbers for the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S5300).

If it is determined in S5300 that the normal symbol waiting time is not 0, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and moves the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5301.

In S5301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process in S5301, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5310. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S5310 onwards based on the control state number read in the process of S5301.

In S5310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S5310 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this normal symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 164. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5320.

In S5320, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S5320 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5330.

In this normal symbol variable display end process, the main CPU 201 manages whether the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "2". If the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, it keeps the control state number of the normal symbol at "1" and waits for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S5330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S5330 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5340.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a determination process of the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a normal symbol loss). Then, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, an opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 146.

In addition, in the process of setting the opening pattern of the normal electric device 146, the normal symbol hit type determination table shown in FIG. 152 is referenced, and the opening pattern (number of times to open, opening time, wait time) of the normal electric device 5146 is determined based on the game state and the symbol selection command when a normal symbol hits, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 the opening pattern command of the normal electric device corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric device 5146.

In S5340, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S5340 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5350.

In this normal electric role release process, the main CPU 201 performs the normal electric role 146 release process according to the release pattern of the normal electric role 5146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S5330. Then, when the normal electric role 146 release process ends, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S5350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This process of S5350 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol per end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol winning end process, the main CPU 201 performs a process to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbol determined in steps S5310 to S5340 above, and various random number values stored in the normal symbol determination area (0).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited period and performs the normal symbol control process (S5300 to S5350) described above within the interrupt prohibited period.

[7-4-11. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 164, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S5310 during the normal symbol control process (see Fig. 163) will be described. Fig. 164 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol variable display start process in the fifth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 164, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S5311).

If it is determined in S5311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 163). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5312.

In S5312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the normal pattern. In this process, the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (2) to the normal pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (3). After executing the process of S5312, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5313.

In S5313, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol winning judgment process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 150, and determines winning/losing judgment value data ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing") based on the game state and the normal symbol winning judgment random number value stored in the normal symbol judgment area (0). After executing S5313, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5314.

In S5314, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. A "select symbol command when a normal symbol hits" is determined based on the symbol random number value of the symbol. After executing the process in S5314, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5315.

In S5315, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. ), the variation pattern of the normal symbols and the variable display time of the normal symbols are determined based on the random number values for selecting the normal symbols stored in the memory. After executing the process in S5315, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5316.

In S5316, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for normal symbols. In this process, the variable display time of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S5315) is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the variable display time of the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display section 161. start. The waiting time of this normal symbol will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. After executing the process in S5316, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5317.

In S5317, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this normal symbol variable display start process, the normal symbol variable display end process (FIG. 163) (see S5320) will be performed. After executing the process in S5317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S5318.

In S5318, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the normal symbol variation pattern command. The normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[7-5. Sub-control processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 165. Fig. 165 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-control circuit process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 165, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S5500). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S5510.

Note that the above-described initialization process (S5500) is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S5510 to S5580, which will be described later, are repeatedly executed.

In S5510, the sub-CPU 301 performs a read process on the command input port 308 (see FIG. 145). This process is performed by reading the command sent from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 145) that is set in the command input port 308. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5520.

In S5520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S5510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5530.

In S5530, sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, for example, a production pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests (such as a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) are made to operate various production devices based on the determined production pattern. , lamp requests, accessory requests, etc.). Details of this performance mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 166. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5540.

In S5540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 145). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5550.

In S5550, sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 145). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) sent from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5560.

In S5560, the sub-CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 145). Based on the message (LED request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or a portion of the LEDs that make up the LED group 46. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5570.

At S5570, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends a reel request to the reel control circuit 307 (see FIG. 145). Based on the message (reel request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the reel control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the reels that make up the performance reel group 58. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the sub-control circuit main process.

[7-5-1. Presentation mode determination process]
Next, the details of the presentation mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in S5530 during the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 165) will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing an example of the presentation mode determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

At S5531, the sub-CPU 301 executes a performance pattern determination process to determine a performance pattern. In this process, a performance pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, the performance pattern defining the display performance displayed on the display device 7 and the sound performance output from the speaker 32. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5532.

In S5532, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating an animation request. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S5531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5533.

In S5533, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating a drawing request. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5534.

In S5534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5535.

In S5535, the sub-CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing. In this processing, the lamp request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S5536.

In S5536, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory request generation processing. In this process, an accessory request is generated based on the animation request generated in S5532. Upon completion of this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the production mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 165).

[7-5-2. Presentation pattern determination process]
Next, the details of the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub-CPU 301 in S5531 in the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166) will be described with reference to Fig. 167. Fig. 167 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect pattern determination process in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

In S5531-1, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "normal symbol variation pattern command."

If it is determined in S5531-1 that the command is a "regular symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S5531-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "regular symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S5531-3.

In S5531-2, the sub-CPU 301 performs processing to determine the variation of the identification symbol for the performance. This "variation of the identification symbol for the performance" is a performance in which the identification symbol for the performance is displayed in a predetermined variation manner as a performance indicating that the "long opening" of the normal electric role device 5146 has been determined. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance pattern determination processing and returns the processing to the performance mode determination processing (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-3, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "normal electric role opening pattern command corresponding to long opening."

As described above, "the opening pattern command of a normal electric device that supports long opening" refers to the symbol selection command "fz1" when a normal symbol is hit in the normal play state, and the symbol selection commands "fz1" and "fz2" when a normal symbol is hit in the A time-saving play state or the C time-saving play state.

If it is determined in S5531-3 that the command is an "opening pattern command for a normal electric accessory corresponding to long opening", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-4. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not the "opening pattern command for a normal electric accessory corresponding to long opening", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-5.

In S5531-4, the sub CPU 301 performs a starting port opening effect determination process. This "starting port opening performance" is a performance that notifies that the "long opening" of the normal electric accessory 5146 has been performed and it is now possible to enter the game ball into the starting port 5140. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-5, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command."

If it is determined in S5531-5 that the command is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5531-6. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S5531-11.

In S5531-6, the sub-CPU 301 performs a special effect determination process. This "special effect" is a variable display of special symbols, a background effect performed during a small win game state, and a common effect performed over multiple small win game states. This special effect has a "bonus time basic effect" and a "bonus time specialized effect", and the sub-CPU 301 refers to the game state and determines the "bonus time basic effect" when in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state, and determines the "bonus time specialized effect" when in the A time-saving game state. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-7, the sub CPU 301 performs a bonus time variation effect determination process that determines the special symbol variation effect during the bonus time, which will be described later, according to the type of the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

In this bonus time variation performance determination process, a performance pattern for performing a "rewind performance" is determined when it is a "variation pattern command per time saving" so as to correspond to the performance in "Notes" in FIG. 149, When it is a "jackpot variation pattern command", a production pattern for performing "full rotation reach" or "jackpot notification reach" is determined, and when it is a "small win variation pattern command", a "shortened variation" or "jackpot variation" is determined. Determine the performance pattern for conducting “Notification Reach”. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-8, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "small win start display command."

If it is determined in S5531-8 that the command is a "small win start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S5531-9. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win start display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S5531-10.

In S5531-9, the sub CPU 301 performs special effect determination processing. This process is the same as S5531-6 above, and when in the normal gaming state or C time-saving gaming state, the "bonus time basic performance" is determined, and when in the A time-saving gaming state, the "bonus time specialized performance" is determined. do. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-10, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "big hit start display command".

If it is determined in S5531-10 that it is a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-12.

In S5531-11, the sub CPU 301 performs bonus time special performance determination processing to determine the "bonus time special performance". When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and returns the process to the effect mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-12, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "game state designation command."

If it is determined in S5531-12 that the command is a "gaming state designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-13. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "gaming state designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S5531-14.

In S5531-13, the sub-CPU 301 performs a game state setting process to set the game state according to the type of game state designation command. Specifically, if the game state designation command indicates a normal game state, the normal game state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303. If the game state designation command indicates an A-time shortened game state, the A-time shortened game state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303. If the game state designation command indicates a C-time shortened game state, the C-time shortened game state data is set in the state storage area of the work RAM 303. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern determination process and returns the process to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

In S5531-14, the sub-CPU 301 determines a presentation pattern according to various other commands sent from the main CPU 201. After that, the sub-CPU 301 executes the process of S5084, ends the presentation pattern determination process, and returns the process to the presentation mode determination process (see FIG. 166).

The above-mentioned "bonus time basic effect or bonus time specialized effect (special effect)", "rewind effect" and "starting hole opening effect" will be described in more detail later using Figure 170.

[7-6. Game state transition diagram]
Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the transition of the gaming state in the fifth pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 168 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

As described above, in this embodiment, left-handed playing is the regular game mode in the normal gaming state, and right-handed playing is the regular gaming mode in the A time-saving gaming state and the C-time saving gaming state.

Therefore, in the normal game state, when a game ball enters the first passage port 5126A, a "normal symbol hit" is determined by a normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination), and a normal electric win is determined. By determining the normal symbol winning selection symbol command fz1 corresponding to the "long open" of the object 5146 (probability of about 1/420.3), the game ball can enter the starting hole 5140.

When a game ball enters the start hole 5140, start information for the special symbol is extracted. In this embodiment, since the number of reserved special symbols is four, when five or more game balls enter the start hole 5140, the start information is stored in the special symbol determination area (0) and the four special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4) for that determination, and a total of five special symbol lotteries (special symbol winning determinations) are performed.

When the special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination) determines that there is a "jackpot" with a first probability (approximately 1/319 probability), the game moves to the jackpot game state. In this embodiment, as described above, in a 10-round jackpot game state, 1500 game balls can be paid out, and in a 4-round jackpot game state, 600 game balls can be paid out.

When it is determined as a "small win" with a second probability (probability of about 1/1.64) by special symbol lottery (special symbol win determination), a transition is made to a small win game state. In this embodiment, as described above, 150 game balls can be paid out in the small winning game state. It should be noted that the gaming state does not shift after shifting to the small winning gaming state.

When it is determined as a "time-saving win" with a third probability (probability of about 1/2.59) by special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination), the state shifts to C-time saving game state.

After transitioning to the jackpot gaming state, the game shifts to A time-saving gaming state. This time-saving game state A is set when either of the following conditions is satisfied: "10 time-savings completed (see Figure 148)" or "transition to jackpot game state" as the end condition of the time-saving game state A. ing.

The C time saving gaming state is set when either of the following conditions is satisfied: "One time saving number completed (see FIG. 148)" and "Transition to the jackpot gaming state" as the end condition of the C time saving gaming state. There is.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "time-saving count" is counted when the variable display of the special symbol starts, but it may be counted when the variable display of the special symbol ends.

In the A time-saving game state and the time-saving game state C, the "long release" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed (see FIG. 152), so it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the starting port 5140, and the special symbol is displayed again. You can take part in the lottery.

In this embodiment, when a miss is not determined in the lottery for the special symbols and a game ball enters the starting hole 5140, either a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "time-saving hit" is determined. If a "big hit" or a "small hit" is determined, an opportunity to pay out a predetermined number of game balls (hereinafter referred to as "bonus time") is given, and if a "time-saving hit" is determined, the game moves to the time-saving game state C, where a game ball can again enter the starting hole 5140, further extending the "bonus time". As mentioned above, the lottery for the special symbols may be configured so that a "miss" is determined with a relatively low probability.

The time-saving play state A is set to have more time-saving plays than the time-saving play state C. Therefore, if a "time-saving win" is determined by a lottery for a special symbol during the time-saving play state A, and the player is shifted from the time-saving play state A to the time-saving play state C following the determination of the "time-saving win," there is a risk that the number of time-saving plays that could be performed will be reduced, which may result in a disadvantage to the player.

Therefore, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, even if a "time-saving hit" is determined by drawing a special pattern during the A time-saving gaming state, the machine is controlled not to transition from the A time-saving gaming state to the C time-saving gaming state by executing a process to invalidate the determination of the "time-saving hit" (the process of S5075 shown in FIG. 158). Therefore, even if a "time-saving hit" is determined by drawing a special pattern during the A time-saving gaming state, the machine is configured so that the currently executing A time-saving gaming state can be continued.

In addition, if the start information for determining the "time-saving hit" remains stored in the reserved memory after the end of the A time-saving play state, it is possible to transition to the C time-saving play state based on the start information for determining the "time-saving hit", so even if the game transitions to the A time-saving play state, the possibility of resuming the time-saving play state is maintained.

In addition, if a "time saving win" is determined by drawing a special symbol during the C time saving gaming state, the new C time saving gaming state is configured to be executed repeatedly, as in the first pachinko gaming machine. Ideally, this is the case, but in order to simplify the control process, it may be configured such that the determination of the C time saving win is invalidated during the C time saving gaming state, similar to the A time saving gaming state.

The fifth pachinko game machine has two time-saving game states, A time-saving game state and C time-saving game state, but like the first pachinko game machine, A time-saving game state It may be provided with three time-saving gaming states: state B, time-saving gaming state B, and time-saving gaming state C.

[7-7. Bonus time explanation]
As described above, a "bonus time" is provided when a game ball enters the starting port 5140. The mechanism of this "bonus time" will be explained. FIG. 169 is an example of an explanatory diagram illustrating bonus time in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

Here, in FIG. 169, from the top, "judgment order" of the special symbol lottery, "applicable" indicating the special symbol determination area (0), and "" indicating the special symbol start storage area (1) to (4) The starting information stored in the "relevant" and "suspended memories" is shown as a "circle". In addition, the "circle" in the starting information is "small" when the starting information determines a small hit, "time" when the starting information determines a time-saving hit, and the starting information for determining a jackpot. Sometimes "large" is illustrated.

Figure 169 (a) shows an example of when the "long opening" of the normal electric device 5146 is performed, five or more game balls enter the starting hole 5140, and all the special symbols are determined to be "small wins."

As shown in FIG. 169(a), if all the special symbols are determined to be "small wins", a total of five small win games are played and the bonus time ends. In the case shown in FIG. 169(a), 5 small win games = 150 x 5 = 600 game balls can be paid out.

In FIG. 169(b), the "long opening" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, five or more game balls enter the starting port 5140, and a "time saving win" is determined by the lottery of the fifth special symbol. This is an example of what happens after.

As shown in FIG. 169(b), in the lottery for the 1st to 4th special symbols, a "small win" is determined, and the small win game is played, and in the lottery for the 5th special symbol, "small win" is determined. It is determined that the game has won a time-saving game, and after the variable display of the special symbol ends, the game shifts to the time-saving game state C.

When transitioning to the C time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, "long release" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, and the game ball is allowed to enter the starting port 5140 again. becomes possible.

After the fifth special symbol is drawn, "Applicable" and "Reserved Memory 1-4" become default data (blank data) (all start information in "Applicable" and "Reserved Memory 1-4" has been consumed), so when five or more game balls enter start hole 5140, the C time-saving game state is triggered and five new start information pieces are stored in "Applicable" and "Reserved Memory".

As shown in FIG. 169(b), when the sixth and seventh special symbols are drawn, a "small win" is determined and a small win game is played, and when the eighth special symbol is drawn, a "time-saving win" is again determined and after the variable display of that special symbol ends, the game transitions to the C time-saving game state.

When transitioning to the C time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, "long release" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, and the game ball is allowed to enter the starting port 5140 again. becomes possible.

After the eighth special symbol is drawn, starting information is already stored in "Applicable" and "Reserved Memory 1," and "Reserved Memory 2-4" are set to default data (blank data). Therefore, when three or more game balls enter the starting hole 5140, the C time-saving game state is triggered, and three pieces of starting information are newly stored in "Reserved Memory 2-4."

Thereafter, in the lottery of the 9th to 13th special symbols, a "small win" is determined, a small win game is carried out, and the bonus time ends.

In the case shown in FIG. 169(b), 11 small wins = 150 x 11 = 1,650 game balls can be paid out.

Figure 169 (c) shows an example of what happens after the "long opening" of the normal electric device 5146 occurs, five or more game balls enter the starting hole 5140, and the fifth special symbol is selected to determine a "jackpot."

As shown in FIG. 169(c), in the lottery for the 1st to 4th special symbols, a "small win" is determined, and the small win game is played, and in the lottery for the 5th special symbol, " ``Jackpot'' is determined, and after the jackpot game state ends, a shift is made to the time-saving game state A.

As mentioned above, the time saving game state A is set to the number of time saving times of 10 (see FIG. 148, etc.), and the time saving game state A can be continued until the special symbol lottery is performed 10 times. In the A time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, a "long release" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, and the game ball cannot enter the starting port 5140 again. It becomes possible.

Then, if the fifth special symbol is determined to be a "jackpot" and the game transitions to the A time-saving game state after the jackpot game state ends, 10 drawings for the sixth through fifteenth special symbols will be made in the A time-saving game state.

Here, in the lottery of the 9th and 13th special symbols in the A time-saving game state, it is determined that the ``time-saving win'' is won. However, as mentioned above, even if a "time-saving hit" is determined by a special symbol lottery during the time-saving game state A, the process of invalidating the "time-saving win" determination (the process of S5075 shown in FIG. 158) is performed. By executing this, it is possible to continue to execute the A time saving gaming state without shifting from the A working time saving gaming state to the C time saving gaming state.

The lottery for the 16th to 19th special symbols is based on the start information (hereinafter also referred to as "remaining reserved information") stored in "reserved memories 1 to 4" after the A time-saving play state ends.

In the lottery for the 19th special symbol based on the remaining pending information, it is determined that it will be a "short time win". The lottery for this 19th special symbol is carried out in the normal gaming state after the A time-saving gaming state has ended, so after the "time-saving win" is determined, the C This will shift to a time-saving gaming state. Therefore, even if the time-saving gaming state A ends, it is possible to continue the time-saving gaming state again based on the remaining pending information, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in gaming due to the end of the time-saving gaming state A. can do.

When transitioning to the C time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the second passage port 5126B, "long release" of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed, and the game ball is allowed to enter the starting port 5140 again. becomes possible.

After the drawing of the 19th special symbol, "Applicable" and "Reserved Memory 1-4" are set to default data (blank data), so when five or more game balls enter the start hole 5140, the C time-saving game state is triggered and five new start information items are stored in "Applicable" and "Reserved Memory".

Then, when the 20th to 24th special symbols are drawn, a "small win" is determined, the small win game is played, and the bonus time ends.

In the case shown in FIG. 169(c), if the "jackpot" in the fifth special symbol lottery is "10R", jackpot game (10R) x 1 time = 1500 x 1 = "1500 pieces", A total of ``4,500'' game balls can be paid out by adding ``small winning game x 20 times = 150 x 20'' = ``3,000 pieces''. In addition, if the "jackpot" in the fifth special symbol lottery is "4R", the jackpot game (4R) x 1 time = 600 x 1 = "600 pieces" and the small win game x 20 times = 150 x 20 = "3000", a total of "3600" game balls can be paid out.

In this way, in the fifth pachinko game machine, if a "time-saving hit" is determined in the lottery for the special symbol, the "bonus time" can be extended. This makes it possible to vary the time when the "bonus time" ends, allowing the player to enjoy wondering how long the bonus time will last, further increasing the enjoyment of the game. The condition for ending the bonus time is also "five consecutive small hits determined in the lottery for the special symbol."

［7-8. Bonus Time］
Next, the "bonus time" presentation will be described. Figure 170 shows an example of a display image for explaining the bonus time presentation in the fifth pachinko gaming machine.

(Performance when a time-saving hit occurs during bonus time)
(a-1) to (d-1) in the left column of Figure 170 are examples of display images that explain the presentation when a "time-saving hit" occurs during bonus time, and correspond to the drawing of the first to sixth special patterns in Figure 169 (b) described above.

FIG. 170(a-1) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and the drawing of the first to fourth special symbols in FIG. 169(b) described above This corresponds to

The "bonus time basic effect" is an effect that is performed in common during the variable display of special symbols in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state, and during the small win game state. More specifically, the "bonus time basic effect" is an effect that is performed when a game state designation command indicating the normal game state or the C time-saving game state is received, and when a special symbol variable pattern command is received in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state, and when a small win start display command is received in the normal game state or the C time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 170 (a-1), as the "basic bonus time effect", the "number of remaining rounds" is displayed at the upper left of the display area, and "bonus time" is displayed at the upper center of the display area. , "Right hit" is displayed on the upper right side of the display area to inform you of the legal game mode. Further, a predetermined character image is displayed in the center of the display area, and the "total number of rounds" and "obtained points" are displayed in the lower right part of the display area.

Here, the "number of remaining rounds" is displayed by subtracting 1R from 5R in accordance with the bonus time ending condition that "small wins are determined 5 times in a row in the special symbol lottery." It is something. In addition, the "total number of rounds" displays the total number of times the game has been controlled in the small win gaming state and the total number of rounds executed in the jackpot gaming state. The “obtained points” are displayed as the cumulative number of game balls that are paid out each time a game ball enters the grand prize opening 5131.

Figure 170 (b-1) is an example of a display image of a "rewind effect" that is displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when a time-saving win is determined by drawing a special symbol, and corresponds to the drawing of the fifth special symbol in Figure 169 (b) described above.

The "rewind performance" is a performance that is performed when a time-saving special symbol variation pattern command is received (see Figure 149), and the bonus time basic performance is rewound and there is a possibility that the small win game state will continue further. This is a performance that suggests that there is. As shown in FIG. 170(b-1), as a rewind effect, a display is performed as if the video of the basic bonus time effect up to now is being rewound.

FIG. 170(c-1) is an example of a display image of the "starting port opening effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 after the rewinding effect shown in FIG. 170(b-1) is performed. .

The "starting port opening performance" is a performance that notifies that the game ball can enter the starting port 5140. Specifically, the "starting opening opening effect" is performed when the variable display of special symbols per time saving is finished and a gaming state designation command indicating the C time saving gaming state is being received, or when the game ball is in the second passing gate. 5126B, and a normal symbol winning selection symbol command is received in which the long release of the normal electric accessory 5146 is performed. As shown in FIG. 170(c-1), as a starting hole opening effect, a display saying "Aim for the chance starting hole!" is displayed to inform the player that the game ball has entered the starting hole 5140. Note that "right-handed hitting" is still displayed in the upper right corner of the display area.

Figure 170 (d-1) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic performance" that is displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when the game ball enters the starting hole 5140 again, and corresponds to the drawing of the sixth special symbol in Figure 169 (b) described above.

As shown in FIG. 170 (d-1), when the game ball enters the starting hole 5140 again after the "starting hole opening effect", the "bonus time basic effect" is performed again. In this "bonus time basic effect", the "remaining rounds" is displayed as increased (rewound), and the character image displays an indication that the bonus time has been extended.

In this way, the "rewind effect" that occurs when a time-saving hit is determined can notify the player that the bonus time has been extended, allowing the player to enjoy wondering how long the bonus time will continue, further increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Performance when a jackpot is hit during bonus time)
(a-2) to (d-2) in the right column of Figure 170 are examples of display images explaining the presentation when a "jackpot" is hit during bonus time, and correspond to the drawing of special patterns 1 to 16 in Figure 169 (c) described above.

FIG. 170(a-2) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time basic effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and the drawing of the first to fourth special symbols in FIG. 169(c) described above This corresponds to The display contents such as “number of remaining rounds”, “bonus time”, “right-handed hit”, “total number of rounds”, and “obtained points” shown in FIG. 170 (a-2) are the same as in FIG. 170 (a-1). It is.

Figure 170 (b-2) is an example of a display image of a "jackpot notification reach" that is displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when a jackpot is determined by drawing a special symbol, and corresponds to the drawing of the fifth special symbol in Figure 169 (c) described above.

The "jackpot notification reach" is an effect that is performed when a command for the variation pattern of the special jackpot symbol is received (see FIG. 149), and is an effect of whether or not three decorative symbols consisting of the word "invincible" are lined up. As shown in FIG. 170 (b-2), when there is a jackpot, the three decorative symbols "invincible", "invincible", and "invincible" are displayed together as a result of the jackpot notification reach. Note that when there is no jackpot, decorative symbols such as "invincible", "X", and "invincible" are displayed as a result of the jackpot notification reach.

Figure 170 (c-2) is an example of a display image of the "bonus time special effect" displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and corresponds to the drawing of the 6th to 15th special symbols in Figure 169 (c) described above.

The "bonus time special performance" is a performance that is commonly performed in the jackpot game state, during variable display of special symbols in the A time-saving game state, and during the small-win game state in the A time-saving game state. More specifically, the "bonus time special performance" is a special symbol display when a jackpot start display command is received, and when a gaming state designation command indicating A time saving gaming state is received and the A time saving gaming state is in effect. This is a performance that is performed when a variable pattern command is received and when a small hit start display command is received in the A time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 170 (c-2), "Invincible Mode" is displayed in the center of the display area as a "bonus time specialized effect," and "Right Hit" is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area to notify the normal game mode. Then, in the lower right corner of the display area, continuing from the "bonus time basic effect," "Cumulative Rounds" and "Earned Points" are displayed. This "Cumulative Rounds" displays the total number of times that the game has been controlled to the small win game state and the number of rounds that have been executed in the big win game state, and "Earned Points" displays the cumulative number of game balls paid out each time a game ball enters the big prize opening 5131 in the small win game state and the big win game state.

FIG. 170(d-2) is an example of a display image of "Bonus Time Basic Performance" displayed in the display area of the display device 7 when the A time-saving gaming state ends and there are four pieces of remaining pending information. , corresponds to the lottery of the 16th special symbol shown in FIG. 169(c) described above.

As shown in FIG. 170 (d-2), in the "basic bonus time performance" after the bonus time special performance, the "remaining number of rounds", "total number of rounds" and The "obtained points" are continuously displayed, and the character image is displayed to notify that the bonus time has resumed.

In addition, for the "remaining number of rounds", "4R" is displayed corresponding to 4 remaining pending information, and if there are 3 remaining pending information after the end of A time-saving gaming state, "3R" is displayed, If there are two remaining reservation information after the end of the time-saving gaming state A, "2R" is displayed, and if there is one remaining reservation information after the end of the time-saving gaming state A, "1R" is displayed, and the time-saving gaming state A is displayed. If there is no remaining pending information after the end of the process, "End" will be displayed.

In this way, the "bonus time specialized performance" that is performed during a jackpot and during the A time-saving game state creates a guaranteed period in which the bonus time will not end, allowing players to enjoy the bonus time with peace of mind and further increasing the excitement of the game.

In this way, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, the main game in the normal gaming state is not a "special symbol game" consisting of a lottery of special symbols, but a "normal symbol game" consisting of a lottery of ordinary symbols, and a special In the symbol lottery, it is possible to treat the special symbol lottery as a "bonus time", which is an opportunity to receive a payout of a predetermined number of game balls, without determining the "loser", creating a new game experience that has never existed before. This makes it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if a "time-saving hit" is determined by the lottery for the special symbol, the game will transition to a time-saving game state (time-saving game state C) and the game ball will be able to enter the starting hole 5140 again, and the bonus time can be extended. This makes it possible to vary the time when the bonus time ends, further increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko game machine, the presentation when a small win is determined by a lottery for a special symbol and the shortened variation of the special symbol is performed and the presentation that is performed when the game is controlled to a small win game state are both treated as a common "special presentation (bonus time basic presentation or bonus time specialized presentation)." Also, the presentation that spans successive shortened variations and the small win game state is also treated as a common "special presentation (bonus time basic presentation or bonus time specialized presentation)." Therefore, multiple small win game states can be presented as one bonus time.

In addition, in the fifth pachinko gaming machine, a "time-saving hit" is determined by a lottery of special symbols, and when a variable display of the special symbol is being performed, the basic bonus time effect is rewound, and the small win game state is further improved. A ``rewind effect'' is performed to suggest that there is a possibility that the event may continue. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game even when the special symbols are being displayed variably.

<Fifth modified example of pachinko gaming machine>
Next, a modified example of the fifth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine will be described.

In the fifth pachinko game machine, as shown in FIG. 170, as a bonus time effect, when a variable display of a special symbol per time saving is performed, the bonus time basic effect is rewinded as a "rewind effect". The configuration is such that the "number of remaining rounds" is increased (rewinded) in the next bonus time basic performance, but the "number of remaining rounds" is not displayed in the bonus time basic performance. The "maximum number of rounds" will be displayed as the number of times the small winning game state can be executed, and the maximum number of rounds will be added as "maximum round number additional effect" when the variable display of special symbols for short winnings is being performed. It may be configured to perform a similar performance.

In addition, as a basic bonus time performance, a battle performance will be performed in which ally characters and enemy characters fight, and the bonus time ending condition is ``5 consecutive small wins in the special symbol lottery''. The HP of the ally character is set to 5 points, and each time the enemy character attacks the ally character and is controlled to the small winning game state, the HP is subtracted by 1. It may be configured to perform an effect such that the character's HP is recovered.

The fifth pachinko gaming machine is configured to be able to perform both the bonus time basic performance and the bonus time specialized performance as bonus time special performances. It may be configured as a performance that is summarized as a basic performance. In this case, when in the jackpot gaming state, the "jackpot medium performance" for the jackpot gaming state can be executed, and when in the A time-saving gaming state, the "remaining round number" of the bonus time basic performance is set to the "time saving" for the A time-saving gaming state. The number of rounds may be added, or "HOLD" or "STOP" may be displayed in the "number of remaining rounds".

As shown in FIG. 148, the fifth pachinko game machine is configured to determine the number of time-saving times when a time-saving hit occurs as one, but it may be configured to determine two or more times. Furthermore, it may be configured to provide multiple types of special symbols (multiple types of selection symbol commands) corresponding to time-saving hits, and to determine multiple types of times of time-saving. In particular, in this embodiment, by setting a large number of times of time-saving, it is possible to transition from the time-saving game state to a small hit game state more often, and to make it possible to pay out more game balls.

The fifth pachinko gaming machine is a so-called type 1 pachinko gaming machine, but like the third pachinko gaming machine, it may be configured as a type 1/2 mixed machine. When the fifth pachinko gaming machine is configured as a type 1/2 mixed machine, a specific area and a non-specific area may be provided inside the big prize opening 5131 (or another big prize opening to be added), and the big prize gaming state may be controlled by the game ball passing through the specific area.

(others)
The fifth pachinko gaming machine described above can apply the techniques of each embodiment, including modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiment does not limit the contents of the present invention, and modifications can be made to the extent that they do not deviate from the scope of the claims.

In addition, the effects described in the fifth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. [Extended example] can be applied to the fifth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancy in its gameplay or control.

[8. The 6th Pachinko Game Machine]
Next, the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. The sixth pachinko game machine is a so-called type one pachinko game machine that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, similar to the second pachinko game machine. However, the sixth pachinko game machine has a different basic specification of playability compared to the second pachinko game machine, and accordingly, the configuration of various components arranged in the play area is partially different.

Hereinafter, when describing an embodiment of the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko gaming machine will be given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed descriptions of their configurations and processing will be omitted.

The sixth pachinko game machine is a "simultaneous variable machine" that can variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, but the starting conditions for the first special symbol and the second special symbol It may be a "priority variable machine" in which any one of the starting conditions is satisfied with priority, or a "sequential variable machine" in which the starting conditions are satisfied in the winning order including the first starting port and the second starting port. It may be.

[8-1. Appearance]
The external configuration of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 171. Fig. 171 is an example of a perspective view showing the external appearance of the sixth pachinko gaming machine when viewed diagonally from above and to the right in the front direction.

As shown in FIG. 171, the external configuration of the sixth pachinko gaming machine is different from that of the first pachinko gaming machine in that the configuration of the performance button device 6310 (first performance operation unit 6311) provided on the upper tray 51 is different.

The effect button device 6310 is an operating device that allows the player to operate the effects. In particular, the effect button device 6310 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine is configured so that its operating mode can be changed, and the effect function can be improved by changing the operating mode of the effect button device 6310.

The following describes the changes in the operation mode of the performance button device 6310.

[8-2. Operation mode of production button device]
FIG. 172 is an example of a conceptual diagram showing a change in the operation mode of the performance button device of the sixth pachinko game machine.

Figure 172 (a) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the effect button device 6310 when in the first operation mode, which is the initial operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(a), the first operation mode of the production button device 6310 is such that the first production operation section 6311 that can be operated by the player is located on the top side. When the performance button device 6310 is in the first operation mode, the player can press the first performance operation section 6311.

FIG. 172(b) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the second operation mode changed from the first operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(b), in the second operation mode of the production button device 6310, the operation drive unit 6313 is rotated by about 45 degrees toward the protective glass 43 side by a drive device such as a motor, and the player The operation mode is such that the operable second performance operation section 6312 is located on the front side. When the performance button device 6310 is in the second operation mode, the player can perform an operation of pressing down the second performance operation section 6312 diagonally.

Figure 172 (c) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the effect button device 6310 when in a third operation mode changed from the second operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(c), in the third operation mode of the production button device 6310, the operation drive section 6313 rotates about 90 degrees toward the protective glass 43 side, and the second production operation section 6312 is turned toward the top side. The operating mode is located at When the performance button device 6310 is in the third operation mode, the player can press the second performance operation section 6312 directly downward.

FIG. 172(d) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the fourth operation mode changed from the third operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(d), the fourth operation mode of the production button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the second production operation section 6312 protrudes upward from the operation drive section 6313. When the production button device 6310 is in the fourth operation mode, the player can press the second production operation section 6312 that protrudes upward directly downward.

FIG. 172(e) is an example of a conceptual diagram of the production button device 6310 in the fifth operation mode changed from the fourth operation mode.

As shown in FIG. 172(e), the fifth operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is an operation mode in which the operation drive unit 6313 rotates approximately 120 degrees toward the protective glass 43 side, and the protruding second effect operation unit 6312 falls backward. When the effect button device 6310 is in the fifth operation mode, it is possible to pull the second effect operation unit 6312 that has fallen backward toward the front.

Furthermore, the production button device 6310 has a built-in vibrating device (not shown), and the production button device 6310 is configured to be able to vibrate. Therefore, in more detail, the presentation mode of the presentation button device 6310 can be configured from a combination of the first to fifth operation modes and the vibration mode.

The operation mode of the effect button device 6310 is not limited to the above-mentioned operation modes and the number of changes. For example, the effect button device 6310 may be operated in an operation mode in which it moves back and forth or left and right, or may simply protrude upward. Furthermore, the effect button device 6310 does not have to have a built-in vibration device and does not have to vibrate.

[8-3. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 173, the game board unit 6010 included in the sixth pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 6010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 173 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 6010 included in the sixth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 6010 includes a game panel 6100, various members are arranged on the game panel 6100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 6100, in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down. .

As shown in FIG. 173, the game board unit 6010 of the sixth pachinko game machine is different from the first pachinko game machine mainly in the configuration and arrangement of the ball passage 6108, the deceleration wall portion 6109, the center role 6115 located approximately in the center of the play area 105, the first start port (center) 6120A, the first start port (right) 6120B, the second start port 6140, the passing gate 6126, the normal electric role unit 6145, the big win role unit 6130, and the small win role unit 6150. The configuration and arrangement of each of these are explained below.

(ball passage)
The ball passage 6108 is arranged in the right side area 107, and is composed of a flat plate section tilted downward, on which the game ball can roll. The plate portion of this ball passage 6108 is made of transparent resin, and the contact surface on which the game ball rolls is textured. By applying texture to the ball path 6108, it is possible to slow down the rolling game balls, and by applying texture to the transparent resin, the light emitted from LEDs etc. is reflected diffusely, making it a decorative item. It can also enhance your sexuality. Note that the ball passage 6108 may be formed of a non-transparent member instead of being formed of a transparent resin.

(Deceleration wall)
The deceleration wall portion 6109 is disposed above the ball passage 6108, and is a surface-treated portion that is textured on the surface of the game panel 6100. The deceleration wall portion 6109 processed on the surface of the game panel 6100 can decelerate the rolling game ball, and by making the game panel 6100 out of transparent resin, light emitted from an LED or the like is diffused, enhancing the decorativeness.

(Center role)
The center device 6115 is configured to be fitted into an opening (without reference number) of the game panel 6100, and is provided with an arc-shaped center rail 116 at its upper portion. Game balls launched toward the game area 105 are distributed to the left and right by the center rail 116.

The center accessory 6115 is equipped with a warp entrance 117, a chance entrance 119 on the stage 118, like the first pachinko game machine, but unlike the first pachinko game machine, there is a circular shape on the front side of the display device 7. It also includes a performance division section 6116.

The effect division part 6116 is arranged on the front side of the display area of the display device 7, partitions the display area of the display device 7, and has an upper display area 7a inside the effect division part 6116 as a display area of the display device 7. is formed.

In addition, in the same manner as in the first pachinko gaming machine, while the special symbol is being variably displayed, the display area of the display device 7 variably displays a performance identification symbol (e.g., a decorative symbol) to display the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol, and also displays a performance image according to the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol, a performance image during a jackpot game state, a demo performance image, a hold image showing the hold status of the variable display of the special symbol, etc.

(First starting point)
The first starting hole (middle) 6120A is disposed below the display area of the display device 7, and is configured so that a game ball hit from the left can enter the hole (a game ball hit from the right is difficult or impossible to enter the hole). When a game ball enters the first starting hole (middle) 6120A, the game ball is detected by the first starting hole switch 6121A (see FIG. 174 described later).

The first starting port (right) 6120B is arranged in the right side area 107 and is provided in a normal electric utility unit 6145, which will be described later. (It is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball.) When a game ball enters the first starting port (right) 6120B, the game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 6121B.

In addition, in the embodiment, the first starting port (middle) 6120A and the first starting port (right) 6120B are also collectively referred to as "first starting ports 6120A, 6120B", and the first starting port switch 6121A and the first starting port The switches 6121B are also collectively referred to as "first starting port switches 6121A, 6121B."

When the first start port switches 6121A and 6121B detect the entry (passage) of a game ball into the first start port 6120A or 6120B, the start information of the first special pattern (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a pattern, random number value for selecting a first effect, random number value for selecting a second effect, etc.) is extracted, and the extracted start information of the first special pattern is reserved up to the "first reserved number (e.g., 4)". When the start condition of the special pattern is established, the reserved start information of the first special pattern is used for the hit determination process of the first special pattern. In addition, when a game ball enters the first start port 6120A or 6120B, the first prize ball number (e.g., 3) is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the first start port 6120A or 6120B is not limited to this.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 6140 is located in the right area 107 and below (downstream side) of the normal electric accessory unit 6145, which will be described later, and allows entry of game balls hit to the right (game balls hit to the left). (difficult or impossible to enter the ball). When a game ball enters the second starting port 6140, the game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 6141 (see FIG. 174 described later).

In addition, in this embodiment, since the second starting hole 6140 is located downstream of the normal electric role unit 6145 (first starting hole (right) 6120B), when the first starting hole (right) 6120B is in an open state, the game ball that flows down the right side area 107 enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B located upstream before reaching the second starting hole 6140, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting hole 6140. This is also true when in a time-saving game state in which the first starting hole (right) 6120B is likely to be in an open state.

When the second start hole switch 6141 detects the entry (passage) of a game ball into the second start hole 6140, the start information of the second special pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information of the second special pattern (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a pattern, random number value for selecting a first effect, random number value for selecting a second effect, etc.) is reserved up to a "second reserved number (e.g., 2)" that is less than the first reserved number. When the start condition of the special pattern is established, the reserved start information of the second special pattern is used for the hit determination process of the second special pattern. In addition, when a game ball enters the second start hole 6140, a second number of prize balls (e.g., 1) that is less than the first number of prize balls is paid out. However, the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 6140 is not limited to this.

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start port 6140, the number of reserved start information and the number of prize balls paid out are set to be smaller than when a game ball enters the first start port 6120A, 6120B. However, the number of reserved information and the number of prize balls may be set to be the same when a game ball enters the second start port 6140 and when a game ball enters the first start port 6120A, 6120B, or the number of reserved information and the number of prize balls may be set to be larger when a game ball enters the second start port 6140.

(Passing gate)
The passing gate 6126 is located in the right area 107 above the normal electric accessory unit 6145 described later, and is located so that the game ball hit from the right side can pass through it. The passing gate 6126 is also provided with a passing gate switch 6127 (see FIG. 174 described later) that detects the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 6126. The game ball that passes through the passing gate 6126 flows down the right area 107 toward the normal electric accessory unit 6145.

When the passing gate switch 6127 detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 6126, the start information of the normal pattern is extracted, and the extracted start information of the normal pattern (random number value for determining whether the normal pattern is a hit, random number value of the normal pattern, etc.) is reserved up to a third reserved number (for example, four). When the start condition of the normal pattern is established, the reserved start information of the normal pattern is used for the hit determination process of the normal pattern (lottery for the normal pattern). In addition, even if the game ball passes through the passing gate 6126, the game ball is not paid out. It is also possible to configure so that a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the game ball passes through the passing gate 6126.

Furthermore, the passage gate 6126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous activation device. Here, the condition for transition to the jackpot gaming state is that both the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device operate, but when the stop display mode (symbol combination) indicating a jackpot is derived, It is possible to operate the conditional device but not to operate the accessory continuous operating device. Then, on the premise that the condition device is operating, the accessory continuous actuation device is activated when the game ball passes through the passage gate 6126, that is, when the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 6127 (see FIG. 174 described later). It may be activated to shift to a jackpot game state.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric role unit 6145 is located in the right area 107, above (upstream of) the second start hole 6140 and below the passing gate 6126, and is located so that the game ball hit to the right can pass through. The normal electric role unit 6145 is a unit body that integrates the first start hole (right) 6120B, the first start hole switch 6121B that detects the entry of the game ball into the first start hole (right) 6120B, and the normal electric role 6146.

The normal electric device 6146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 6147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal power solenoid 6148 (see FIG. 174 described below) that operates the normal power shutter 6147. The normal electric device 6146, i.e., the normal power shutter 6147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy to insert a game ball into the first starting hole (right) 6120B, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to insert a game ball into the first starting hole (right) 6120B.

The normal power shutter 6147 is composed of a flat roof portion that is gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the second starting port 6140. When the normal power shutter 6147 is in the open state, the normal power shutter 6147 is embedded in the game panel 6100 and the first starting port (right) 6120B is in an open state, and game balls flowing down the right side area 107 and game balls rolling on the normal power shutter 6147 can enter the first starting port (right) 6120B. When the normal power shutter 6147 is in the closed state, the normal power shutter 6147 protrudes from the game panel 6100 and the first starting port (right) 6120B is closed, making it impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the first starting port (right) 6120B. In addition, when the normal power shutter 6147 is in the closed state, the game ball rolling on the normal power shutter 6147 is guided to the second starting hole 6140 or the small win role unit 6150 described later. Note that instead of the normal power shutter 6147 that can move forward and backward, a wing member that can move left and right, known as an electric chute, may be used.

(Jackpot accessory unit)
The jackpot accessory unit 6130 is located in the right area 107 and above the passage gate 6126. The jackpot accessory unit 6130 integrates a first jackpot 6131, a first jackpot count switch 6132 that detects the entry of a game ball into the first jackpot 6131, and a jackpot accessory 6133. It is a unit body.

The first big winning hole 6131 is a winning hole that can shift from a closed state to an open state. In this embodiment, the first big winning opening 6131 shifts from the closed state to the open state when a stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. be. When the first big prize opening 6131 is controlled to be in a jackpot gaming state, game balls up to a first specified number (for example, 10 balls) can enter the first big prize opening 6131. When a ball is played, game balls corresponding to the number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) corresponding to the first big prize opening 6131 are paid out.

The jackpot device 6133 is equipped with a protruding plate-type jackpot shutter 6134 that can move forward and backward, and a jackpot solenoid 6135 (see FIG. 174 described below) that operates the jackpot shutter 6134. The jackpot device 6133, i.e., the jackpot shutter 6134, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 6131, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 6131.

The jackpot shutter 6134 is composed of a flat plate-shaped roof that is gently sloped (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the passage gate 6126 side. When the jackpot shutter 6134 is in the open state, the jackpot shutter 6134 is buried in the game panel 6100 and the first jackpot opening 6131 is in the open state, and the game balls flowing down the right side area 107 and the jackpot shutter 6134 are buried in the game panel 6100. The game ball rolling above can enter the first grand prize opening 6131. When the jackpot shutter 6134 is in the closed state, the jackpot shutter 6134 protrudes from the gaming panel 6100 and the first jackpot opening 6131 becomes closed, making it impossible or impossible for the game ball to enter the first jackpot opening 6131. It becomes difficult. Further, when the jackpot shutter 6134 is in the closed state, the game ball rolling on the jackpot shutter 6134 is guided to the passage gate 6126 on the downstream side.

In the "jackpot game state" in which the jackpot accessory 6133 is operated, the state transition of the first jackpot 6131 from the closed state to the open state is performed until the maximum number of rounds. For one round, the maximum opening time for which the first big prize opening 6131 is open has elapsed, or the first prescribed number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the first big winning hole 6131. Then, the first big prize opening 6131 is shifted from the open state to the closed state, and one round ends. Then, when the maximum number of rounds ends, the jackpot gaming state ends. Every time a game ball enters the first big prize opening 6131, the number of prize balls (for example, 15) corresponding to the first big prize opening 6131 is paid out, so the jackpot game state is a state in which a large number of game balls are paid out. This is a gaming state that makes it possible to pay out .

(Small winning accessory unit)
The small winning accessory unit 6150 is located in the right side area 107 above the second starting port 6140 and below the normal electric accessory unit 6145. The small winning accessory unit 6150 integrates a second big winning opening 6151, a second big winning opening count switch 6152 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning opening 6151, and a small winning accessory 6153. It is a unit body.

The second big winning hole 6151 is a winning hole that can shift from a closed state to an open state. In this embodiment, the second big prize opening 6151 shifts from the closed state to the open state when the stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "small win" is derived. It is. The second big prize opening 6151 allows game balls up to a second specified number (for example, 4 balls) to enter the second big prize opening 6151 when the small winning game state is controlled. When the ball enters, game balls corresponding to the number of prize balls (for example, 14 balls) corresponding to the second large prize opening 6151 are paid out.

The small win device unit 6150 is equipped with a protruding plate-type small win shutter 6154 that can move forward and backward, and a small win solenoid 6155 (see FIG. 174 described below) that operates the small win shutter 6154. The small win device unit 6150, i.e., the small win shutter 6154, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 6151, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 6151.

The small win shutter 6154 is composed of a flat roof portion that is gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward the second starting hole 6140. When the small win shutter 6154 is in the open state, the small win shutter 6154 is embedded in the game panel 6100 and the second large winning hole 6151 is in an open state, and a game ball flowing down the right side area 107 or a game ball rolling on the small win shutter 6154 can enter the second large winning hole 6151. When the small win shutter 6154 is in the closed state, the small win shutter 6154 protrudes from the game panel 6100 and the second large winning hole 6151 is in a closed state, making it impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second large winning hole 6151. In addition, when the small win shutter 6154 is in the closed state, the game ball rolling on the small win shutter 6154 is guided downstream to the second starting port 6140.

In the "small win game state" in which the small win unit 6150 is activated, the second large winning opening 6151 transitions from a closed state to an open state for a predetermined number of times. When the predetermined number of times of opening is completed for one small win game state, or when a second specified number (e.g., 4 balls) less than the first specified number (e.g., 10 balls) of the large win game state enters the second large winning opening 6151, the second large winning opening 6151 transitions from an open state to a closed state, and one small win game state ends. Each time a game ball enters the second large winning opening 6151, a number of prize balls (e.g., 14 balls) corresponding to the second large winning opening 6151 that is less than the number of prize balls (e.g., 15 balls) corresponding to the first large winning opening 6131 is paid out, so the small win game state is a game state that makes it possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls.

In this embodiment, the second specified number for the small win game state (e.g., 4) is set to be less than the first specified number for the big win game state (e.g., 10), but the second specified number for the small win game state may be set to be the same as the first specified number for the big win game state, or may be set to be greater than the first specified number for the big win game state. However, it is preferable to set the second specified number for the small win game state to 10 or less.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls corresponding to the second large prize opening 6151 (e.g., 14) is set to be less than the number of prize balls corresponding to the first large prize opening 6131 (e.g., 15), but the number of prize balls corresponding to the second large prize opening 6151 may be set to be the same as the number of prize balls corresponding to the first large prize opening 6131, or may be set to be greater than the number of prize balls corresponding to the first large prize opening 6131. However, it is desirable to set the number of prize balls corresponding to the second large prize opening 6151 to 15 or less.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first big winning hole 6131 and the second big winning hole 6151 are provided separately, but the invention is not limited to this. The big winning hole opened at the time of execution of the winning game control process may be the same big winning hole.

[8-4. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 174. Fig. 174 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 174, the sixth pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the sixth pachinko game machine is partially different from the first pachinko game machine in the configurations of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

[8-4-1. Main control circuit]
Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the sixth pachinko game machine has a general power solenoid 6148 connected to the main control circuit 200, a jackpot solenoid 6135, a small win solenoid 6155, and a first starting port switch 6121A. , 6121B, the configurations of the second starting port switch 6141, the passing gate switch 6127, the first big winning port count switch 6132, and the second big winning port counting switch 6152 are partially different.

(General purpose electric solenoid)
The general electricity solenoid 6148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electricity shutter 6147. When the normal power solenoid 6148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the normal power shutter 6147 is moved backward to open the first starting port (right) 6120B, and the main CPU 201 turns on the power. If this is not done (if it is OFF), the normal power shutter 6147 is moved forward to close the first starting port (right) 6120B.

(jackpot solenoid)
The jackpot solenoid 6135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the jackpot shutter 6134. When the jackpot solenoid 6135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the jackpot shutter 6134 backward to open the first large prize opening 6131, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the jackpot shutter 6134 forward to close the first large prize opening 6131.

(Solenoid for small hits)
The small win solenoid 6155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the small win shutter 6154. When the small win solenoid 6155 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the small win shutter 6154 backward to open the second large winning opening 6151, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the small win shutter 6154 forward to close the second large winning opening 6151.

(First start switch)
The first start port switches 6121A and 6121B are through-type proximity switches that detect the entry of a game ball into the first start port 6120A and 6120B. The first start port switch 6121A detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port (center) 6120A, and the first start port switch 6121B detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port (right) 6120B.

(Second starting port switch)
The second starting port switch 6141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port switch 6140.

(Passing gate switch)
The passing gate switch 6127 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the passing gate switch 6126.

(First prize slot count switch)
The first large prize opening count switch 6132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 6131. When the first large prize opening count switch 6132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 6131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter per round, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the first prize ball (e.g., 15 game balls) corresponding to the first large prize opening 6131.

(Second major prize slot count switch)
The second large prize opening count switch 6152 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 6151. When the second large prize opening count switch 6152 detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 6151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter per small win game state, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the second prize ball (e.g., 14 game balls) corresponding to the second large prize opening 6151.

[8-4-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300, like the first pachinko game machine, is equipped with a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a gimmick control circuit 307 and a command input port 308, but differs in that it further comprises a button control circuit 310 and a performance button device 6310.

(Button control circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the production button device 6310. That is, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the production button device 6310 or vibrating the production button device 6310. The button control circuit 310 drives the production button device 6310 in response to a drive command from the sub CPU 301.

Further, the button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to the player's operation detected by the production button device 6310. When the button control circuit 310 receives an operation signal from the production button device 6310, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub CPU 301.

(Performance button device)
As shown in FIG. 172, the performance button device 6310 has an external configuration including a first performance operation unit 6311, a second performance operation unit 6312, and an operation drive unit 6313, and in addition, as internal components not shown, it is configured to have a first operation unit detection switch that detects the operation of the game ball relative to the first performance operation unit 6311, a second operation unit detection switch that detects the operation of the game ball relative to the second performance operation unit 6312, a third operation unit detection switch that detects the operation of the game ball relative to the operation drive unit 6313, a rotation motor for rotating the operation drive unit 6313, a button solenoid for protruding the second performance operation unit 6312, and a vibration motor for vibrating the vibrating body.

[8-5. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 175 to 185. Note that the sixth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, there is a "normal gaming state" in which a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state are controlled, a "high-precision time-saving gaming state" in which a high-probability gaming state and a time-saving gaming state are controlled, and a high-probability gaming state. The main CPU 201 provides a "high-probability non-time-saving gaming state" in which both the game state and the non-time-saving gaming state are controlled, and a "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state" in which the low-probability gaming state and the time-saving gaming state are controlled. It is possible to advance the game in any one of the game states. However, the gaming state progressed under the control of the main CPU 201 is not limited to this, and any gaming state among the normal gaming state, high probability time saving gaming state, high probability non time saving gaming state, and low probability time saving gaming state can be progressed. You may choose not to do so.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, hitting to the left is the normal game mode, and in the high-probability time-saving game state, the high-probability non-time-saving game state, and the low-probability time-saving game state, hitting to the right is the normal game mode. The sub-CPU 301 executes control to display the normal game mode (e.g., whether to hit to the right or left) in, for example, the display area of the display device 7.

In the embodiment, the first and second start holes are collectively referred to as "start holes", and the first and second special symbols are collectively referred to as "special symbols". The winning determination process for the first special symbol is also referred to as "drawing for the first special symbol", the winning determination process for the second special symbol is also referred to as "drawing for the second special symbol", and the drawing for the first special symbol and the drawing for the second special symbol are collectively referred to as "drawing for the special symbol".

[8-5-1. Special symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 175 is an example of a special symbol hit determination table in the sixth pachinko game machine. The special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 175 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" by lottery.

The special symbol hit determination table includes the type of special symbol (type of starting port), probability variable flag (whether or not probability variable control is executed), and the ball entering the first starting port 6120A, 6120B or the second starting port 6140. The random numerical value for jackpot judgment extracted (obtained) based on "judgment value data", "small hit determination value data", and "loss determination value data") are defined in association with each other. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for jackpot determination is 65,536.

As shown in FIG. 175, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines whether the lottery result for the first special symbol is a "jackpot" or a "miss" based on the probability variable flag and the random number value for determining a jackpot for the special symbol. Here, in the lottery for the first special symbol, when the probability variable flag is 1 (when probability variable control is being executed), the random number value for determining a jackpot is specified so that a "jackpot" is determined with a higher selection rate than when the probability variable flag is 0 (when probability variable control is being executed).

When a game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 determines the lottery result of the second special symbol as " Determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. Here, in the lottery of the second special symbol, when the variable probability flag is 1, the random value for jackpot determination is specified so that a "jackpot" is determined with a higher selection rate than when the variable probability flag is 0. However, the random number value for determining a jackpot is defined so that the selection rate for determining a "small hit" is the same regardless of the probability change flag.

Note that when the sixth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the jackpot probability and/or the small win probability may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. In this case, for example, both the jackpot probability and the small hit probability may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting, or the small hit probability may be constant regardless of the setting value, and the jackpot probability may be set at a low setting. The high setting may have a higher probability, or the jackpot probability may be constant regardless of the setting value, and the small winning probability may be higher at a high setting than a low setting.

[8-5-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 176 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 176 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table for selecting "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

The "selected symbol information" is symbol information for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the type of win if the special symbol lottery result is a winning symbol, and the "symbol designation command" is a command for designating the symbol that is displayed when the variable display of the special symbol stops.

The special symbol determination table specifies the type of special symbol (type of starting hole), the symbol random number value of the special symbol extracted (obtained) based on the ball entering the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B or the second starting hole 6140, the winning/losing determination value data described above, and the "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" that determine the stopping symbol, in association with each other. The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types).

As shown in FIG. 176, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol information "z1" with a selection rate of 30/100, selects the selected symbol information "z2" with a selection rate of 30/100, and selects the selected symbol information "z3" with a selection rate of 40/100 based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol when the hit/miss judgment value data is the jackpot judgment value data. When the selected symbol information "z1" is selected, "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command, when the selected symbol information "z2" is selected, "zA2" is selected as the symbol designation command, and when the selected symbol information "z3" is selected, "zA3" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when a game ball enters the first starting port 6120A, 6120B corresponding to the first special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol information "z4" when the win/loss judgment value data is the loss judgment value data. Then, "zA4" is selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol information "z5" when the win/loss determination value data is the jackpot determination value data, "zA5" will be selected as the symbol designation command.

Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol information "z6" when the win/loss determination value data is the small hit determination value data. , "zA6" will be selected as the symbol designation command.

In addition, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 corresponding to the second special symbol, if the hit/miss determination value data is miss determination value data, the main CPU 201 will select the selected symbol information "z7" and select "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

Although the explanation is omitted in the sixth pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table selects the stop mode of the special symbol that is derived to the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 174) when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions based on symbol information. Further, a display mode for a jackpot, a display mode for a small win, or a display mode for a loss is derived in the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 based on the special symbol lottery results. Further, a decorative pattern stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative pattern stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[8-5-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 177 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The winning type determination table shown in FIG. 177 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The winning type determination table is a table that determines "aspects of the jackpot gaming state", "aspects of the small winning gaming state", and "aspects of the subsequent gaming state (probability variation flag, probability variation number of times, time saving flag, time saving number of times)" .

"Opening mode of jackpot gaming state" indicates the opening mode of the first jackpot opening 6131 that is opened during the jackpot gaming state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (for example, 28 seconds) and closing time (for example, 2 seconds) per round in the jackpot game state are predefined, and the opening mode of the first jackpot 6131 is as follows: It shows the maximum number of rounds in a jackpot gaming state. Note that the maximum opening time per round may be determined, or the closing time (round interval time) of each round may be determined. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be determined so that the first big prize opening 6131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round.

"Opening mode of small winning game state" indicates the opening mode of the second big prize opening 6151 that is opened during the small winning gaming state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds) and closing time (for example, 0.6 seconds) per opening in the small winning game state are predefined, and the maximum opening time (for example, 0.6 seconds) per opening in the small winning gaming state is predetermined. Shows the number of openings. Note that the maximum opening time per opening may be determined, or the closing time for each number of openings may be determined.

Here, the maximum opening time for one round in the small winning gaming state (for example, 0.1 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 28 seconds), and the jackpot gaming In the state, the first big prize opening 6131 is opened by the "first opening mode" which is advantageous, and in the small winning game state, the second big prize opening 6151 is opened by the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode. It can be said to be open.

In addition, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small win game state (for example, 1 small win x 4 balls (second specified number) x 14 balls (number of prize balls) = 56 balls) is set to be less than the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one big win game state (for example, 3R x 10 balls (first specified number) x 15 balls (number of prize balls) = 450 balls), so it can be said that the big win game state is the advantageous "first special game," and the small win game state is the less profitable "second special game" than the big win game state.

"Subsequent mode of gaming state" indicates the mode of gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and indicates the settings of "probability change flag", "probability change number of times", "time saving flag" and "time saving number of times".

The "probability change flag" is a flag that indicates whether the game is in a low probability game state or a high probability game state, with a probability change flag of 0 indicating a "low probability game state" and a probability change flag of 1 indicating a "high probability game state." Additionally, the "number of probability changes" indicates the number of times the special symbol is drawn in the high probability game state, i.e., the number of times the special symbol is variably displayed.

"Time-saving flag" is a flag that indicates whether it is a non-time-saving gaming state or a time-saving gaming state, and time-saving flag = 0 indicates "non-time-saving gaming state", and time-saving flag = 1 indicates "time-saving gaming state". It shows. Further, the "time saving number" indicates the number of times the special symbol is drawn in the time saving game state, that is, the number of times the special symbol is variably displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the "time saving number" is a different number of time saving times depending on the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot ("normal gaming state" or "other" gaming state). The winning type determination table is configured so that the winning type can be determined.

As shown in FIG. 177, the winning type determination table specifies, for the selected symbol information, the "opening mode of the big win game state", the "opening mode of the small win game state", and the "probability bonus flag", "number of probability bonuses", "time-saving flag", and "number of time-saving bonuses" as the game state modes thereafter.

The main CPU 201 determines the "opening mode of the big win game state", the "opening mode of the small win game state", the "probability change flag", the "number of probability change times", the "time-saving flag", and the "number of time-saving times" based on the selected symbol information. Note that if the lottery result for the special symbol is a "miss" (for example, if the selected symbol information is "z4" or "z7"), the state of the big win game state, the state of the small win game state, and the state of the subsequent game state are not determined, and therefore are not originally provided in the win type determination table in FIG. 177. However, in this embodiment, for the sake of convenience, it is illustrated in FIG. 177 to clearly indicate that if the lottery result for the special symbol is a "miss", the state of the big win game state, the state of the small win game state, and the state of the subsequent game state are not determined.

When the main CPU 201 determines that a "jackpot" is selected as the result of the special pattern lottery, it refers to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 177 before the start of the jackpot game state, and when the selected pattern information is "z1" corresponding to a jackpot with the first special pattern, it determines "10R" as the "jackpot game state opening mode", when the selected pattern information is "z2" corresponding to a jackpot with the first special pattern, it determines "5R" as the "jackpot game state opening mode", when the selected pattern information is "z3" corresponding to a jackpot with the first special pattern, it determines "3R" as the "jackpot game state opening mode", and when the selected pattern information is "z5" corresponding to a jackpot with the second special pattern, it determines "2R" as the "jackpot game state opening mode".

Then, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 177, and when the selected symbol information is "z1 to z3" corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol, the "probability variable flag" is set. ``1'' indicating a high probability gaming state is determined, ``120 times'' is determined as the ``probability variable number of times'', ``1'' indicating a time saving gaming condition is determined as the ``time saving flag'', and ``1'' is determined as the ``time saving number of times''. 100 times. In addition, when the selected symbol information is "z5" corresponding to the jackpot of the second special symbol, "1" indicating a high probability gaming state is determined as the "probability variation flag", and "120 times" is determined as the "probability variation number". Then, "1" indicating the time-saving gaming state is determined as the "time-saving flag". Then, if the selected symbol information is "z5" corresponding to the jackpot of the second special symbol, and the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is the normal gaming state, "100 If the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is not the normal gaming state, "10000 times" is determined as the "time saving number".

Further, when a "small hit" is determined as the lottery result of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 177 and selects the selected symbol information "z6" before starting the small win game state. ”, “6 times” is determined as the “opening mode of the small winning game state”.

In addition, after the small hit gaming state ends, the mode of the subsequent gaming state is not determined even if the selected symbol information "z5" corresponds to the small winning of the second special symbol. That is, the gaming state will not shift (change) when the small winning gaming state is triggered.

In this way, in this embodiment, after all jackpot game states have ended, the game will transition to a "high probability time-saving game state" in which both the time-saving game state and the high probability game state are executed. Therefore, after all jackpot game states have ended, the chances of transitioning to a jackpot game state again are increased (providing an opportunity for so-called consecutive wins), and the excitement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this embodiment, after all the jackpot gaming states have ended, the number of variable probability of the high probability gaming state (120 times) is not necessarily set to the number of times that guarantees transition to the jackpot gaming state. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game by making the player expect to move to a jackpot game state by the time the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the variable number of times.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, the time saving number (100) is set to be shorter than the probability variation number (120). Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, the first half (1 to 100 times) of the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" will be entered, and if the state does not shift to the jackpot game state again, the second half (101 to 120 times), it is possible to shift to the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state".

In particular, in this embodiment, when transitioning to the latter half of the "high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state," the expected value of the number of game balls paid out relative to the number of balls fired per unit time may exceed 1, as will be described later. You can enter the "small hit RUSH". Here, if the number of variable times (120 times) in the high-precision gaming state is not set to a number that guarantees transition to the jackpot gaming state, each time the number of variable displays of the special symbol approaches the number of variable displays, Generally, the expected value of transitioning to a jackpot gaming state (the so-called expected value of consecutive wins) decreases, and the interest in the game decreases. However, in this embodiment, the expected value of entering the "small hit RUSH" increases as the number of variable displays of the special symbol approaches the variable number of times, so the expected value of transitioning to the jackpot gaming state increases. The decrease is compensated for by the expected value reaching the "small hit RUSH", and it is possible to maintain the improvement in the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that a jackpot has been won after the end of the jackpot game state for the second special symbol is not the "normal game state", that is, if the regular game mode is the "high probability time-saving game state", "high probability non-time-saving game state" or "low probability time-saving game state" when right-hitting, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving game state (10,000 times) is set to the number of times that guarantees a transition to the jackpot game state. For this reason, when the "high probability time-saving game state", "high probability non-time-saving game state" or "low probability time-saving game state" (especially the "high probability non-time-saving game state") is in the "high probability time-saving game state" when right-hitting, it is possible to expect a jackpot for the second special symbol, and to further increase the interest in the game.

Here, in this embodiment, the game ball enters the second starting port 6140, which is the trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol, when the game ball is in the non-time saving game state where the player is hitting right, that is, when the game ball enters the second starting port 6140, which is the trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol. The main opportunity is when you are in a non-time-saving gaming state. For this reason, in the "high-precision non-time-saving gaming state" that can be transitioned to in the latter half after the end of the jackpot gaming state, that is, the "small winning RUSH", the payout of game balls is expected, and the transition to the next jackpot gaming state is delayed. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game by making the player expect a guaranteed jackpot with the second special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the second special symbol, if the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot is the "normal gaming state", the time saving number of time saving gaming states ( 100 times) is not necessarily set to a number that guarantees transition to a jackpot gaming state. This is because when in the "normal game state", left-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, and entering the game ball into the second starting port 6140 is not recognized as a game feature of this embodiment. This is because it corresponds to "an irregular jackpot."

In this embodiment, when the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that a jackpot has been won after the end of the jackpot game state of the second special symbol is the "normal game state" (when it is an irregular jackpot), the number of time-saving times for the time-saving game state (100 times) is set to the same number as the number of time-saving times (100 times) for the time-saving game state set after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, but it may be set to a number less than the number of time-saving times for the time-saving game state set after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, and the time-saving flag and the number of time-saving times may not be set (the number of time-saving times may be 0).

[8-5-4. Game state transition diagram]
Next, the transition of the game state explained in Fig. 177 will be explained in detail with reference to Fig. 178. Fig. 178 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, left-handed playing is the normal gaming mode in the "normal gaming state", and "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state", "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", and "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" '', right-handed playing is considered a legal game mode.

(Normal gaming state)
In the normal game state where left-handed hitting is performed, the game ball is configured to be able to enter the first starting opening (middle) 6120A (see FIG. 173).

In the normal gaming state, when a "jackpot" is determined by the lottery of the first special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the first starting hole (middle) 6120A, the jackpot gaming state of the first special symbol ends. Afterwards, the game will move to a "high-accuracy time-saving game state" in which the number of time-savings is set to "100 times" and the number of probability variations is set to "120 times."

(Highly accurate time-saving gaming state)
In the high-accuracy time-saving game state in which the ball is hit to the right, the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the passage gate switch 6126, and the time-saving game state is controlled, so when the game ball passes through the passage gate switch 6126, the normal The accessory 6146 opens the first starting opening (right) 6120B, and the game ball is configured to be able to enter the first starting opening (right) 6120B (see FIG. 173).

When a ball enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B during high-probability time-saving play, and a "jackpot" is determined by drawing lots for the first special symbol, the number of time-saving periods and the number of chance bonuses are reset after the jackpot play state for the first special symbol ends, and the game returns to a high-probability time-saving play state (the so-called consecutive wins).

Here, in the high-accuracy time-saving game state, since the time-saving game state is controlled, the first starting port (right) 6120B is opened by the normal electric accessory 6146, and the first starting port (right) is opened. ) It is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 6140 provided on the downstream side of 6120B. Therefore, in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, it is difficult to draw the second special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the second starting port 6140, and the first starting port ( Right) The first special symbol lottery will be held when the game ball enters 6120B.

In the high-probability time-saving game state, if the special symbol is not determined to be a jackpot in the drawing and the number of times the special symbol has been drawn reaches the set number of time-saving times (100 time-saving times), control of the time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to a "high-probability non-time-saving game state."

(Highly accurate non-time saving gaming state)
In the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state in which right-hand hitting is performed, since the time-saving gaming state is not controlled, the first starting port (right) 6120B is almost closed by the normal electric accessory 6146, and the normal electric shutter 6147 is closed. The game ball rolling upward is guided to the small winning accessory unit 6150 or the second starting opening 6140, and the gaming ball is configured to be able to enter the second big winning opening 6151 or the second starting opening 6140. (See Figure 173).

For this reason, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, it is difficult to draw the first special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the first starting port (right) 6120B, and A second special symbol lottery will be held triggered by the game ball entering the second starting hole 6140.

In the high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state, when a "small hit" is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol triggered by the game ball entering the second starting opening 6140, the second big winning opening 6151 is in an open state. Therefore, each time a game ball enters the second big winning hole 6151, game balls corresponding to the number of prize balls (for example, 14 balls) corresponding to the second big winning hole 6151 are paid out. In the lottery of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. ``HIT RUSH'' is executed, and the number of game balls acquired increases.

In the high probability non-time-saving game state, if a game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 and a "jackpot" is determined by drawing lots for the second special symbol, after the jackpot game state for the second special symbol ends, the game will transition to a "high probability time-saving game state" in which the number of time-saving times is set to "10,000 times," which guarantees a transition to the jackpot game state, and the number of times for the special chance is set to "120 times."

In the high-probability non-time-saving gaming state, the special symbol lottery is not determined to be a jackpot, and the number of special symbol draws after the end of the jackpot game state for the first special symbol is the set probability variation number (120 probability variation number completion) When this happens, the control of the high-precision gaming state ends and the game returns to the "normal gaming state" in which left-handed hitting is performed.

(Low accuracy time saving gaming state)
In the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state where you hit right, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" that transitions after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the second special symbol, it is not judged as a jackpot in the lottery of the special symbol, but the jackpot of the second special symbol When the number of drawings of the special symbol after the end of the gaming state reaches the set probability variable number (120 times of probability variation ends), the game state is transferred.

In the low-accuracy time-saving game state, the time-saving game state is controlled similarly to the high-accuracy time-saving game state, so when the game ball passes through the passage gate switch 6126, the first starting port ( The configuration is such that the right) 6120B is in an open state and a game ball can enter the first starting port (right) 6120B (see FIG. 173).

In addition, because the time-saving game state is controlled in the low-probability time-saving game state as in the high-probability time-saving game state, it is difficult to draw a lottery for the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140, and instead, a lottery for the first special symbol is drawn when the game ball enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B.

Even if the game transitions to this low-probability time-saving game state, the remaining number of time-saving times is "9,880 times," so it is guaranteed that the time-saving game state will not end and the game will transition back to the jackpot game state.

In this way, in this embodiment, the configuration of the game board unit (see FIG. 173), the lottery contents of special symbols (see FIG. 175), the rules for transition to the gaming state (see FIG. 177), etc. are organically linked. , it is possible to create unprecedented gameplay and further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the "high probability time-saving gaming state," "high probability non-time-saving gaming state," and "low probability time-saving gaming state," in which right-hand play is the normal gaming mode, are collectively referred to as the "right-hand play state" as appropriate.

[8-5-5. Special symbol variation pattern table]
179 to 181 are examples of variation pattern tables for determining variation patterns of special symbols of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 179 is an example of the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 180 is an example of the second half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example. Further, FIG. 181 shows the right-handed game state (any of the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state,""high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state," or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state") in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. This is an example of a first half variation pattern table and a second half variation pattern table of special symbols. The special symbol variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 179 to 181 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "special symbol fluctuation pattern" of the sixth pachinko gaming machine is composed of two combinations: a "first half fluctuation pattern" corresponding to the first half of the variable display of the special symbol, and a "second half fluctuation pattern" corresponding to the second half of the variable display of the special symbol. Note that, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern may be combined into one fluctuation pattern. In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern are also referred to as the "fluctuation pattern" as appropriate.

(First half variation pattern table of special symbols in normal gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 179, the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state includes the type of special symbol (type of starting hole), winning/losing lottery result of the special symbol, and first starting hole 6120A, 6120B. Or, the first performance selection random value obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 6140, the "first half variation pattern number" indicating the first half variation pattern, and the "first half variable display time" of the special symbol in the first half variation pattern. ” are associated with each other. Note that the random number value for first performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. Furthermore, the "Remarks" column in FIG. 179 shows the contents of the performance for the sake of easy understanding.

When in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG. 179, and determines the first half variation pattern of the special symbol and the first half variable display time of the special symbol based on the type of special symbol (type of starting hole), the lottery result of the special symbol, and the random number value for the first performance selection. The main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the first special symbol when based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B, and determines the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the second special symbol when based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 6140.

The "pseudo consecutive" shown in the "Notes" column of FIG. 179 refers to a "pseudo consecutive performance" in which the decorative symbols that are displayed while the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner are temporarily temporarily stopped, and then the temporarily stopped decorative symbols are displayed again in a variable manner. The "temporary stop display" refers to a state in which the decorative symbols slightly swing or deform, making it appear to the player as if they are stopped. This pseudo consecutive performance can be performed multiple times, and the number of times the pseudo consecutive performance is performed is indicated as "pseudo consecutive X times." Furthermore, "pseudo consecutive teasing" refers to a performance that teases whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed. "NR" is an abbreviation for normal reach. Furthermore, "long fluctuation" refers to a fluctuation in which the variable display time of the special symbols is set to be extremely long.

"Road to the Final Battle" and "Road to the Extreme Showdown" are specific effects of the same type, in which the player operates the effect button device 6310 a specified number of times to collect up to a specific number (10) of "character icons." The "First Half Icon Count" indicates the number of "character icons" that can be displayed before the Road to the Final Battle or the Road to the Extreme Showdown is performed. More details about the Road to the Final Battle, the Road to the Extreme Showdown, and character icons will be provided later using Figures 220 to 222.

According to the first half fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG. 179, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B (when the first special symbol is displayed), the first half fluctuation pattern and the first half variable display time corresponding to either "normal fluctuation", "X pseudo consecutive times", "Road to the decisive battle" or "Road to the ultimate decisive battle" are determined as the first half fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol.

According to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 179, in "pseudo consecutive X times",
The random number value for selecting the first effect is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "one pseudo consecutive hit"<"two pseudo consecutive hits"<"three pseudo consecutive hits".

According to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 179, in the "Road to the Final Battle" and "Road to the Ultimate Final Battle",
The random number value for selecting the first performance is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "Road to the Final Battle"<"Road to the Ultimate Final Battle."

Furthermore, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state shown in FIG. A first half variation pattern of "long variation" in which the variable display time is set to be extremely long is determined.

Here, in the sixth pachinko game machine, when it is in the normal gaming state, left-handed hitting is the regular game mode, and when left-handed hitting is being performed, the game ball enters the second starting port 6140. Although it is difficult or impossible to do so, if the game ball is hit right-handed as an unintended game mode, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the second starting port 6140. However, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 179, when the game ball is entered into the second starting port 6140, the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely long. Since the first half variation pattern of the "long variation" is determined, the number of draws of the second special symbol per unit time is extremely small, and the structure is such that there is no real benefit for the player to hit right in the normal gaming state. .

(Late-stage variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game mode)
As shown in FIG. 180, the latter half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state corresponds to the first half variation pattern number, the winning or losing result of the special symbol lottery, the random number value for selecting the second performance obtained based on the ball entering the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B or the second starting hole 6140, the "second half variation pattern number" indicating the latter half variation pattern, and the "second half variable display time" of the special symbol in the latter half variation pattern. The random number value for selecting the second performance is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above. Also, the "Notes" column in FIG. 180 is a convenient way to show the content of the performance for easy understanding.

When in the normal game state, the main CPU 201 refers to the latter half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG. 180, and determines the latter half variation pattern of the special symbol and the latter half variable display time of the special symbol based on the already determined first half variation pattern number, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the random number value for the second performance selection. The main CPU 201 determines the latter half variation pattern and the latter half variable display time of the first special symbol when it is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B, and determines the latter half variation pattern and the latter half variable display time of the second special symbol when it is based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 6140.

When the main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern in the normal game state, it transmits a special pattern variation pattern command combining the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern to the sub-CPU 301 so that the type of the special pattern can be identified. Specifically, it transmits a three-byte variation pattern command consisting of "83H", "first half variation pattern number", and "second half variation pattern number" (e.g., 83H00H00H) as the "first special pattern variation pattern command", and transmits a three-byte variation pattern command consisting of "84H", "first half variation pattern number", and "second half variation pattern number" (e.g., 84HF1H00H) as the "second special pattern variation pattern command". Then, when the main CPU 201 is in the normal game state, it calculates the total variable display time by adding up the first half variable display time and the second half variable display time. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 201.

Here, "none" shown in the "Notes" column in FIG. 180 means that the latter half variation pattern and the latter half variable display time of the special symbol have not been determined, and if the latter half variation pattern of the special symbol has not been determined, only the first half variation pattern of the special symbol will be executed. Also, "normal reach", "ninja reach", "showdown reach" and "big showdown reach" are reach effects that suggest that the lottery result for the special symbol may be a jackpot in normal game mode. "Number of icons in the latter half" indicates the number of "character icons" that can be displayed after the Road to the Showdown or the Road to the Ultimate Showdown has been performed. The showdown reach and character icons will be described in more detail below.

According to the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 180, when based on the entry of game balls into the first starting holes 6120A and 6120B, the second half variation pattern of the first special symbol is "None ( A second half variation pattern and a second half variable display time corresponding to any one of "first half variation only)", "normal reach", "ninja reach", "confrontation reach", and "big battle reach" are determined.

According to the second half variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal game state shown in FIG. 180, in "normal reach", "ninja reach", "showdown reach", and "big battle reach",
The random value for selecting the second performance is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "Normal Reach"<"NinjaReach"<"ConfrontationReach"<"Big Battle Reach".

In addition, according to the latter half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state shown in FIG. 180, the latter half variation pattern and the latter half variable display time of the special symbol are not determined when the game ball enters the second start hole 6140. Therefore, in the normal game state, when the game ball enters the second start hole 6140, only the first half variation pattern corresponding to the "long variation", which is the first half variation pattern of the special symbol, is executed.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in right-hand play state)
Fig. 181(a) is an example of a first half variation pattern table of a special symbol in a right-hitting game state (any of the game states of "high probability time-saving game state", "high probability non-time-saving game state" or "low probability time-saving game state") in the sixth pachinko game machine. Fig. 181(b) is an example of a second half variation pattern table of a special symbol in a right-hitting game state in the sixth pachinko game machine, but in this embodiment, the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time of the special symbol are not determined in the right-hitting game state, and it is not necessary to have this table, but it is illustrated for convenience in order to clearly show that the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time of the special symbol are not determined in the right-hitting game state.

As shown in FIG. 181(a), the first half variation pattern table for the special symbol in the right-hand play state corresponds to the type of special symbol (type of starting port), the winning or losing result of the special symbol lottery, the random number value for selecting the first performance obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 6120A, 6120B or the second starting port 6140, the "first half variation pattern number" indicating the first half variation pattern, and the "first half variable display time" of the special symbol in the first half variation pattern.

When in a right-hand play state, the main CPU 201 refers to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the right-hand play state shown in FIG. 181(a) and determines the first half variation pattern of the special symbol and the first half variable display time of the special symbol based on the type of special symbol (type of starting hole), the lottery result of the special symbol, and the random number value for the first performance selection. The main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the first special symbol when based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B, and determines the first half variation pattern and the first half variable display time of the second special symbol when based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 6140.

When the main CPU 201 determines the first half variation pattern of the special symbol in the right-handed gaming state, the main CPU 201 does not determine the second half variation pattern and the second half variable display time, and does not execute the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern. A special symbol variation pattern command combined with the default latter half variation pattern number (00H) shown is transmitted to the sub CPU 301. Then, when the game is in a right-handed gaming state, the main CPU 201 calculates the first half variable display time as the total variable display time. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command sent from the main CPU 201.

The "Battle Challenge", "Battle Reach", "Door Opening Effect" and "Open Eyes Effect" shown in the "Notes" column of Fig. 181(a) are reach effects that suggest that the lottery result for the special symbol may be a jackpot when playing from the right. Also, "Ultra-Shortened Fluctuation" is a fluctuation in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely short.

According to the first half fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol in the right-hand play state shown in FIG. 181(a), when the game ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B (when the first special symbol is displayed), the first half fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is determined to be a first half fluctuation pattern and first half variable display time corresponding to either "super shortened fluctuation", "battle challenge" or "battle reach". Therefore, "battle challenge" and "battle reach" are also reach effects that suggest that the lottery result for the first special symbol in the right-hand play state may be a jackpot.

According to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbols in the right-hand play state shown in FIG. 181(a), in the "Battle Challenge" and "Battle Reach",
The random number value for selecting the first performance is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "Battle Challenge"<"BattleReach."

According to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state shown in FIG. As the first half variation pattern of the first special symbol, a first half variation pattern and a first half variable display time corresponding to any one of "super shortened variation", "door opening effect", and "eye opening effect" are determined. Therefore, the "door opening effect" and the "eyes opening effect" are also reach effects that suggest that there is a possibility that the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a jackpot in the right-handed game state.

According to the first half variation pattern table of the special symbol in the right-hitting game state shown in FIG. 181(a), in the "door opening performance" and "eye opening performance",
The random number value for selecting the first effect is set so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of "door opening effect"<"eye opening effect".

Furthermore, according to the first half variation pattern table of special symbols in the right-handed game state shown in FIG. The first half fluctuation pattern is determined. Further, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a "small hit", the first half variation pattern of "super shortening variation" is determined without determining the first half variation pattern for performing the reach effect.

For this reason, when in right-hand play mode, unlike in the normal play mode, the number of times the first special symbol is drawn per unit time and the number of times the second special symbol is drawn per unit time are increased, so that it is practically beneficial for the player to hit the right hand in right-hand play mode.

Here, the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 6140, which triggers the drawing of the second special symbol, is mainly triggered by the high probability non-time-saving game state, which is one of the right-hand play states, and the drawing of the second special symbol is likely to be determined as a "small win" (see Figure 175), and if the drawing result of the second special symbol is a "small win", it is possible to immediately transition the second large winning hole 6151 to an open state (see Figure 181). Therefore, in the high probability non-time-saving game state, it is possible to realize a "small win RUSH" that increases the rate at which game balls enter the second large winning hole 6151 per unit time.

[8-5-6. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 182 is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 182 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol winning judgment table is a table referenced in the normal symbol winning judgment process, that is, a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing" is made based on the game state and the normal symbol winning judgment random number value extracted when the game ball passes through the passing gate 6126.

The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 182 includes the gaming state, the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination, and the win/loss determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”). They are defined in correspondence.

The normal symbol hit determination random number value is, as described above, a random number value used for the normal symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 extracts a random number value for determining a hit of a normal symbol from 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 182 and determines win/loss determination value data based on the gaming state and the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination.

In this embodiment, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that the extracted normal symbol has a hit determination random value of 0, and determines that it is a "normal symbol hit", and changes the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol hit". "Judgment value data" is determined. In addition, in the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines a "lose" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is one of 1 to 99, and converts the determination value data into "loss determination value data". decided on.

In addition, in the time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol hit" if the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is between 0 and 98, and changes the win/loss determination value data to "normal symbol hit". Hit judgment value data” is determined. In addition, in the time-saving game state, the main CPU 201 determines a "lose" when the random number value for hit determination of the extracted normal symbol is 99, and determines the determination value data as "loss determination value data".

[8-5-7. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 183 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table determines the stopping symbol of the normal symbol based on the winning/losing judgment value data of the above-mentioned normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol extracted when the game ball passes through the passage gate 6126. This is a table that is referred to when selecting the "normal symbol hit selection symbol command".

The "regular symbol selection command when a regular symbol wins" is a command for specifying the regular symbol winning symbol that is determined according to the regular symbol winning type when the result of the regular symbol winning determination process is a regular symbol winning.

The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183 corresponds to the normal symbol win/loss determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “loss”), the symbol random value of the normal symbol, and the selection symbol command when the normal symbol is hit. It is specified and specified.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183 and determines the symbol command to be selected when a normal symbol is hit, based on the winning/losing determination value data for the normal symbol and the symbol random number value for the normal symbol.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 183, when normal pattern winning determination value data is obtained as a result of the winning/losing determination value data for the normal pattern, for example, the selection pattern command when the normal pattern is won is selected as follows.

For example, when normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 issues a normal symbol hit select symbol command if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is between 0 and 49. ``fz1'' is selected as the normal symbol random value, and if the symbol random value of the normal symbol is between 50 and 100, "fz2" is selected as the selection symbol command when the normal symbol hits.

In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the "selection symbol command when a normal symbol hits" is selected based on the normal symbol hit/miss judgment value data (the result of the normal symbol hit judgment process) and the normal symbol random number value, regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern (see FIG. 182) and determines the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal pattern based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern, and then refers to the normal pattern judgment table (see FIG. 183) and determines the pattern command selected when the normal pattern wins based on the pattern random number value of the normal pattern, but is not limited to this. For example, the winning/losing of the normal pattern and the pattern command selected when the normal pattern wins may be determined together based on the extracted random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern and the pattern random number value of the normal pattern.

[8-5-8. Normal symbol type determination table]
FIG. 184 is an example of a normal symbol type determination table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 184 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit type determination table is referenced when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146 (normal electric shutter 6147) according to the game state and the symbol selection command when a normal symbol hits.

In the normal symbol hit type determination table shown in FIG. 184, a gaming state, a selection symbol command when a normal symbol hits, and an opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 are defined in association with each other.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol per type determination table shown in FIG. 184 and determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 based on the gaming state and the normal symbol winning select symbol command. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal electric accessory opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 6146 to the sub CPU 301.

In this embodiment, when the main CPU 201 is in the non-time-saving gaming state, when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1" or "fz2", the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern "01H" of the normal electric accessory 6146. Then, 210 msec is determined as the opening time of the normal electric accessory 6146 corresponding to the opening pattern.

Therefore, in the non-time-saving gaming state, no matter which normal symbol hit selection symbol command is used, an unfavorable opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 is determined and the opening pattern is transferred to the first starting port (right) 6120B. It is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the ball.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern "02H" of the normal electric accessory 6146 when the normal symbol hit selection symbol command is "fz1" or "fz2" in the time-saving gaming state. , 5820 msec is determined as the opening time of the normal electric accessory 6146 corresponding to the opening pattern.

Therefore, in the time-saving gaming state, no matter which normal symbol hit selection symbol command is used, an advantageous opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 6146 is determined, and the opening pattern to the first starting port (right) 6120B is determined. Game balls can be entered.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146 is configured to open only once, but it may be configured to open multiple times by setting a wait time.

[8-5-9. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
185 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 185 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in Figure 185 corresponds to the game state, the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbol, the symbol selection command when the normal symbol is hit, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern, and the variable display time of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 185, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and normal symbol variation pattern based on the gaming state, the normal symbol win/loss judgment value data, and the normal symbol winning selection symbol command. The variable display time of the symbol is determined.

Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub-CPU 301. The sub-CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the normal symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201.

In this embodiment, a relatively short variable display time of normal symbols is determined so that the number of drawings of normal symbols per unit time becomes large. In particular, in the time-saving gaming state, if the lottery result of the normal symbol is "hit", it is possible to immediately shift the first starting port (right) 6120B to the open state, and the It is possible to increase the rate of game balls entering the first starting port (right) 6120B.

[8-6. Main control processing]
In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 include special symbol control processing, normal symbol control processing, and normal symbol control processing performed during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although the control processing and sub-control circuit processing are partially different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process, and the sub control circuit process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control processing, normal symbol control processing, and sub-control circuit processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, The same processing as that performed in the first pachinko game machine will be explained again using different step numbers.

[8-6-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the special symbol control process performed at S39 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 186, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the second special symbol in S6001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of each special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S6001, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S6001, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the working area of each special symbol in the main RAM 203 in a predetermined register.

Although not shown in the drawings, the main CPU 201 also performs a process of checking the number of first special symbols held and the number of second special symbols held when executing the special symbol control process. Then, if the number of reservations of the first special symbol is "0" for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a demonstration display command for the first special symbol, and the number of reservations of the second special symbol is kept constant. If the value is "0" for more than a certain period of time, a transmission reservation process for a demonstration display command regarding the second special symbol is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Then, when the sub control circuit 300 receives a demo display command, if the demo display command is a demo display command for the main special symbol, the sub CPU 301 performs a demo display effect.

Although the sixth pachinko game machine is capable of variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, the sub CPU 301 can display only one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The special symbol is used as the main special symbol, and the other is used as the secondary special symbol, and the performance control for the main special symbol is mainly performed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol is the main special symbol in the normal game state and the time-saving gaming state (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy time-saving gaming state), and the second special symbol is the main special symbol in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state. It is considered a special design. Then, the sub CPU 301 performs variable display of decorative symbols and display effects of characters, etc. for the main special symbols, and audio effects for the main special symbols. For example, if the result of the hit determination process for the sub special symbol is a jackpot, for example, the sub special symbol may be produced while the main special symbol is produced.

In S6002, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S6001.

If it is determined in S6002 that it is not the timing to start the variable display of the second special symbol (if S6002 is a NO judgment), that is, if any processing related to the second special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6003. For example, if a jackpot game control processing based on the result of the hit determination processing of the second special symbol is being executed, a NO judgment is made in S6002.

In S6003, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 187. After executing the processing of S6003, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6004.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6002 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S6002), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6004.

In S6004, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process of S6004, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6005.

In S6005, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S6004.

If it is determined in S6005 that the first special symbol is not at the timing to start variable display (if NO in S6005), that is, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the main CPU 201 executes the process. is moved to S6006. For example, during execution of the jackpot game control process based on the result of the first special symbol hit determination process, a NO determination is made in S6005.

In S6006, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 187. After executing the processing of S6006, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6007.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6005 that it is time to start variable display of the first special symbol (YES in S6005), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6007.

In S6007, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the second special symbol. After executing the process of S6007, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6008.

In S6008, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is time for the second special symbol to start being variably displayed based on the control state number of the second special symbol loaded in S6007.

If it is determined in S6008 that it is not the timing to start variable display of the second special symbol (NO determination in S6008), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6010.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6008 that it is time to start variable display of the second special symbol (YES in S6008), that is, no processing related to the second special symbol is being executed and variable display can be started. If so, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6009.

In S6009, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 187. After executing the processing of S6009, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6010.

In S6010, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the first special symbol. After executing the process in S6010, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6011.

In S6011, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the timing to start variable display of the first special symbol based on the control state number of the first special symbol loaded in S6010.

If it is determined in S6011 that it is not time for the first special symbol to start being variable displayed (if S6011 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see Figures 20 to 23).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6011 that it is time to start the variable display of the first special symbol (if S6011 returns a YES judgment), that is, if no processing related to the first special symbol has been performed and variable display can begin, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S6012.

In S6012, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. As described above, details of the special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 187. After executing the processing of S6012, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited area and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S6001 to S6012) within the interrupt prohibited area.

In this way, in this embodiment, if any process related to the second special symbol is being executed, if any process related to the first special symbol is being executed, the process related to the second special symbol is not executed at all and variable display can be started, and when no processing related to the first special symbol is executed and variable display can be started, special symbol management processing described below is performed in priority order. is executed.

[8-6-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 187, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6003, S6006, S6009, and S6012 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 186) will be described. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

For example, if the special symbol management process is called and executed in S6003 or S6009 during the special symbol control process, the second special symbol will be the processing target, and the special symbol management process will be executed in S6006 or S6009 during the special symbol control process. When called and executed in S6012, the first special symbol becomes the processing target.

Further, the numerical values ("0" to "5") written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 187 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (S6021).

If it is determined in S6021 that the waiting time for the special pattern is not 0 (if S6021 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special pattern management process and returns the process to the special pattern control process (see FIG. 186).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6021 that the waiting time for the special symbol is 0 (YES in S6021), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6022.

In S6022, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S6022, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6023. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S6023 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S6022.

In S6023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S6023 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 188. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6024.

In S6024, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S6024 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6025.

In S6025, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S6025 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 191. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6026.

In S6026, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S6026 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this big winning opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6027.

In S6027, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning opening control process. This process of S6027 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this big winning opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 194. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6028.

In S6028, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot end processing. This process of S6028 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this jackpot ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 195.

After completing the processing of S6023 to S6028, the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 186). In addition, the main CPU 201 returns the process to S6004 if the special symbol management process is called in S6003 during the special symbol control process, returns the process to S6007 if it is called in S6006, and calls it in S6009. If it has been called, the process returns to S6010, and if it has been called in S6012, the special symbol control process also ends.

[8-6-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 188, the special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6023 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S6023 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display start process is called in S6023 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

As shown in FIG. 188, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (S6031).

If it is determined in S6031 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0" (if S6031 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6031 that the control state number of the special symbol is "0" (if S6031 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6032.

In S6032, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol suspension flag value, and determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off based on the loaded special symbol suspension flag value. The special symbol suspension flag is a flag that stops the progress of the game so as not to proceed to the next process. Therefore, in this S6032, even if S6031 is YES (that is, even if the special symbol starting condition is satisfied), if the special symbol pause flag is not off, that is, it is on (S6032 is NO) (judgment), the special symbol variable display start process ends without proceeding.

If it is determined in S6032 that the special symbol pause flag is not OFF, i.e., is ON (if S6032 is a NO determination), as described above, the special symbol variable display start process does not proceed, and the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display start process. After that, the main CPU 201 returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6032 that the special pattern pause flag is off (if S6032 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S6033.

In S6033, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of special symbol starting information. In the shift processing of the starting information of the first special symbol that targets the first special symbol, since the number of pending special symbols is 4, the first special symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is The stored starting information is shifted to the first special symbol determination area (0), and the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4) is shifted to the first special symbol determining area (0). Shift to the symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (3). In addition, in the shift processing of the start information of the second special symbol whose processing target is the second special symbol, since the number of pending second special symbols is two, the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 (1 ) is shifted to the second special symbol determination area (0), and the starting information stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (2) is shifted to the second special symbol starting storage area (1). do. After executing the process in S6033, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6034.

In S6034, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for the special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the hit determination table for the special symbol (see FIG. 175) and performs the hit determination process for the special symbol based on the game state (presence or absence of the probability change flag) and the random number value for the special symbol hit determination stored in the special symbol determination area (0). In this embodiment, the first special symbol is determined to be a hit or a miss, and the second special symbol is determined to be a hit, a small hit, or a miss. In addition, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a small hit, the main CPU 201 sets the small hit flag to ON, and if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a hit, the main CPU 201 sets the big hit flag to ON. After executing the process of S6034, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6035.

In S6035, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing. This process is a process of determining a stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit determination process (S6034) (for example, small hit, jackpot, or loss). In this process, the special symbol determination table (see FIG. 176) is referred to, and the determination result (win or loss) of the above-mentioned special symbol hit determination process and the symbol random number value of the special symbol stored in the special symbol determination area (0) are determined. Based on this, "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" are determined. In this embodiment, since there is only one type of loss, there is no need to determine the stop symbol when the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, but by providing multiple types of losses, the special symbol hit determination process The stopping symbol may be determined when the result is a loss. After executing the process in S6035, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6036.

In S6036, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is, for example, a hit (small hit or jackpot). In this process, the winning type is determined in accordance with the "selected symbol information" determined in the special symbol determining process (S6035) with reference to the winning type determination table (see FIG. 177). In this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of winnings, but there may be one type of jackpot, or there may be multiple types of small winnings. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to providing multiple types of wins, multiple types of other wins (for example, time-saving wins) may be provided, or multiple types of losses may be provided. good. After executing the process in S6036, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6037.

In S6037, the main CPU 201 performs a process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. This process is a process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol, first, a process to determine the first half variation pattern is performed, and then a process to determine the second half variation pattern is performed.

In the first half fluctuation pattern determination process, if the game is in normal play mode, the first half fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 179 is determined, and if the game is in right-hand play mode, the first half fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 181 (a) is determined. The first half fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined is then referenced, and the first half fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process described above (win or lose) and the random number value for the first performance selection stored in the special symbol determination area (0).

In the second half variation pattern determination process, in the normal gaming state, the special symbol second half variation pattern table shown in FIG. The second half variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the result (win or loss) and the second performance selection random number stored in the special symbol determination area (0). In addition, in the right-handed gaming state, a default second half variation pattern number (00H) indicating that the second half variation pattern is not executed is determined. After executing the process in S6037, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6038.

In S6038, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, when in a normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table in FIG. 179 and FIG. 180 is referenced, and the total variable display time is calculated by adding up the first half variable display time of the first half variable pattern determined in the first half variable pattern determination process and the second half variable display time of the second half variable pattern determined in the second half variable pattern determination process. Also, when in a right-hand play state, the first half variable pattern table shown in FIG. 181 (a) is referenced, and the first half variable display time of the first half variable pattern determined in the first half variable pattern determination process is calculated as the total variable display time. Then, the calculated total variable display time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display unit 163, 164 is caused to start variable display of the special symbol. This waiting time of the special symbol is subtracted as a special symbol timer counter in a system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at 2 msec intervals. After executing processing of S6038, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S6039.

In S6039, the main CPU 201 performs time-saving probability variation count subtraction processing. In this process, it is determined whether the probability variation flag=1 (high probability gaming state), and if the probability variation flag=1, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number. Note that if the probability variation flag=1, the number of probability variations is not subtracted. Further, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag=1 (time saving gaming state), and if the time saving flag=1, 1 is subtracted from the number of time saving times. Note that if the time saving flag = 0, the number of time saving times is not subtracted.

In S6040, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the special symbol variable display start process is completed, the special symbol variable display end process (FIG. 187) (see S6024) will be performed. After executing the process in S6040, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6041.

In S6041, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, an update process of parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 is performed. Then, a transmission reservation process of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6041, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6042.

In S6042, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In this process, various flags (for example, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.) related to the management of the gaming state are mainly updated. After executing the process in S6042, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6043.

In S6043, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the special symbol effect start command. In this process, the transmission reservation process for the "symbol designation command" and the "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as the special symbol effect start command. In the pattern designation command transmission reservation process, the symbol designation command determined in S6035 is transmitted. In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, the special symbol variation pattern command that combines the first half variation pattern and the second half variation pattern determined in S6037 so that the type of special symbol can be identified is transmitted. The special symbol effect start command that is transmitted and reserved in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interruption prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game state management process (S6042) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S6043)) within the interruption prohibited section.

[8-6-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, referring to Fig. 189 and Fig. 190, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6024 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 187) will be described. Fig. 189 and Fig. 190 are a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the sixth pachinko game machine.

When the special symbol variable display end process is called in S6024 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol variable display end process is called in S6024 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target. Also, in the special symbol variable display end process described below, the special symbol that is the processing target is simply referred to as the "special symbol," and the special symbol that is not the processing target is referred to as the "other special symbol."

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special pattern is "1" (S6051).

If it is determined in S6051 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1" (if S6051 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6051 that the control state number of the special symbol is "1" (if S6051 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6052.

In S6052, the main CPU 201 loads the special symbol suspension flag value, and determines whether the special symbol suspension flag is off based on the loaded special symbol suspension flag value.

If it is determined in S6052 that the special symbol suspension flag is not off, that is, it is ON (NO determination in S6052), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (FIG. 187). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6052 that the special pattern pause flag is off (if S6052 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6053.

In S6053, the main CPU 201 performs a symbol confirmation time setting process for the special symbol. In this process, a predetermined special symbol symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set as the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 stop variable display of the special symbol. . The waiting time of this special symbol will be subtracted as a special symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. After executing the process in S6053, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6054.

The symbol determination time for the special symbol may differ depending on the type of win, or may differ depending on the game state. For example, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a big win or a miss, the first symbol determination time (e.g., 540 msec) may be set, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small win, the second symbol determination time (e.g., 24 msec) may be set, which is shorter than the first symbol determination time. In particular, when creating a small win rush like the sixth pachinko game machine, it is desirable to make the symbol determination time for a small win extremely short.

In S6054, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2" and switching the control state number, the special symbol game determination process (S6025 in FIG. 187 ) will be carried out. After executing the process in S6054, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6055.

In S6055, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. In this process, a process to stop the variable display of special symbols is also performed. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S6055, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6056.

In S6056, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. The confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed), and the counted value is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. For example, a counter may be provided to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the number of guaranteed changes or the number of time reductions, but the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions can be determined by the number of guaranteed symbols counter. May be managed. After executing the process in S6056, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6057.

In S6057, the main CPU 201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a small hit.

In S6057, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is determined to be not a small hit (if S6057 returns a NO determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6059.

On the other hand, in S6057, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is determined to be a small hit (YES determination in S6057), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6058.

In S6058, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol suspension flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting or stopping during execution of the small winning game control process. After executing the process in S6058, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6059.

In S6059, the main CPU 201 determines whether the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a jackpot.

In S6059, if it is determined that the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is not a jackpot (NO determination in S6059), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process, and is returned to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, in S6059, if the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is determined to be a jackpot (if S6059 returns a YES determination), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6060.

In S6060, the main CPU 201 sets a special symbol pause flag for the other special symbol. By performing this process, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from starting while the jackpot game control process is being executed. After executing the process of S6060, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6061.

In S6061, the main CPU 201 determines whether the other special symbol is being variably displayed.

If it is determined in S6061 that the other special symbol is not being variably displayed (if S6061 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variably display ending process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6061 that the other special symbol is being variably displayed (if S6061 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6062.

In S6062, the main CPU 201 increments the value of the determined symbol number counter by 1. After executing the process of S6062, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6063.

In S6063, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display stop flag. When this process is performed, a test firing signal is output to the outside. This test firing signal is a signal indicating that the other special symbol has been forcibly stopped as a miss. After executing the process of S6063, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6064.

In S6064, the main CPU 201 forcibly changes and sets the hit flag of the other special symbol to a miss. By performing this process, if the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol being processed (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol will be forcibly stopped as a miss even if the other special symbol is being variably displayed and the result of the hit determination process for this other special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. After executing the process of S6064, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6065.

In S6065, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the work area related to the variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process in S6065, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6066.

In S6066, the main CPU 201 performs symbol confirmation time setting processing for the other special symbol. In this process, a predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set as the waiting time of the other special symbol in the main RAM 203, and the special symbol display sections 163 and 164 stop variable display of the other special symbol. After executing the process in S6066, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6067.

In S6067, the main CPU 201 sets "2" to the control state number of the other special symbol. After executing the process in S6067, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6068.

In S6068, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. The gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S6068, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6069.

In S6069, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the other special symbol effect stop command. The other special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6069, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

In this way, in the special symbol variable display end processing of this embodiment, if the special symbol pause flag is not set for the special symbol being processed, the result of the hit determination processing for this special symbol (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a jackpot, and the other special symbol is being variable displayed, processing is performed to forcibly stop the variable display of the other special symbol as a miss.

[8-6-5. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 191, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6025 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

When this special symbol game judgment process is called in S6025 during special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol is the processing target. Similarly, when the special symbol game judgment process is called in S6025 during special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (S6071).

If it is determined in S6071 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2" (NO determination in S6071), the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187). ).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6071 that the control state number of the special symbol is "2" (YES in S6071), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6072.

In S6072, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot.

In S6072, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is not in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (NO in S6072), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6073. On the other hand, if it is determined in S6072 that it is a jackpot, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a jackpot (YES in S6072), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6075.

In S6073, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit.

In S6073, if it is determined that there is no small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a loss (if NO in S6073), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6082.

On the other hand, in S6073, if it is determined that there is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode indicating a small hit (YES in S6073), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6075.

In S6075, the main CPU 201 performs start setting processing for the big win game control processing or the small win game control processing. In this processing, signals are generated and updated that are output via the external terminal board 184 to, for example, the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 174 for both) or the island computer (not shown). Note that the signals generated and updated in this processing are signals related to the special symbol that is the subject of the special symbol game determination processing. After performing processing in S6075, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6076.

In S6076, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set round display LED data. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the upper limit of the number of openings of the first big winning hole 6131 to be opened (S6077), and a process of setting a jackpot signal to the external terminal board 1184 (S6078).

In S6079, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3." By performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" and switching the control state number, a process to prepare for opening the large prize opening (see S6026 in FIG. 187) is performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed.

In S6080, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 also performs processing to clear various flags and various counters, such as a probability variation flag, probability variation number, time saving flag, and time saving number, when there is a jackpot. In addition, at the time of a small hit, the process of clearing various flags and various counters, such as a probability variation flag, a probability variation number, a time saving flag, and a time saving number, is not performed. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. The gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In S6081, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a jackpot start display command when it is a jackpot, and performs transmission reservation processing of a small win start display command when it is a small win. The jackpot start display command or small win start display command reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S522 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. be done. After executing the process of S6081, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

In S6082, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state transition determination processing. This gaming state transition determination process includes a "low-probability gaming state transition determination process" that determines transition to a low-probability gaming state, and a "non-time-saving gaming state transition determination process" that determines transition to a non-time-saving gaming state. Both processes are performed. After executing the process in S6082, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6083.

In the low probability gaming state transition determination process, it is determined whether the probability variation flag = 1 (high probability gaming state), and if the probability variation flag = 1, then it is determined whether the probability variation number = 0. However, if the probability variation count=0, the probability variation flag=0 (low probability gaming state) is set, and the state is shifted from the high probability gaming state to the low probability gaming state. Further, if the probability variation flag = 0, the low probability gaming state transition determination process is terminated, and if the probability variation count = 0, the low probability gaming state transition determination process is terminated while the probability variation flag = 1 is held.

In the non-time-saving play state transition judgment process, it is determined whether the time-saving flag = 1 (time-saving play state), and if the time-saving flag = 1, it is next determined whether the number of time-saving times = 0, and if the number of time-saving times = 0, the time-saving flag = 0 (non-time-saving play state) is set, and the time-saving play state is transitioned to the non-time-saving play state. Also, if the time-saving flag = 0, the non-time-saving play state transition judgment process is terminated, and if the number of time-saving times is not 0, the non-time-saving play state transition judgment process is terminated while the time-saving flag = 1 is maintained.

In S6083, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 192. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited area and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S6071 to S6081) within the interrupt prohibited area.

[8-6-6. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6083 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 191) will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the sixth pachinko game machine.

In S6092, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". When the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0" is thus performed, the next special symbol game can be executed. After executing the process of S6092, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6093.

In S6093, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game state designation parameter setting processing. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. The gaming state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S6093, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6094.

In S6094, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S6094, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 191).

If the result of the special symbol hit determination process (see S6034 in FIG. 188) is a miss, the main CPU 201 does not set or reset either the sure win flag or the time-saving flag. Therefore, even if a miss display mode is derived, the game state does not change.

[8-6-7. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 193, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6026 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 187) will be described. Fig. 193 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the sixth pachinko game machine.

When this large prize opening preparation process is called in S6026 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, when this large prize opening preparation process is called in S6026 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (S6101).

If it is determined in S6101 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3" (if S6101 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6101 that the control state number of the special symbol is "3" (if S6101 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6102.

In S6102, the main CPU 201 loads the large prize opening counter value. When the large prize opening counter value is executing a large prize game control process, it corresponds to a count value that counts the number of rounds in the large prize game state, and when the small prize game control process is executing, it corresponds to a count value that counts the number of openings of the small prize game control process. The large prize opening counter value is stored in the large prize opening counter in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S6102, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6103.

In S6103, the main CPU 201 determines whether the large prize opening count counter value is at the upper limit. In this embodiment, as shown in the win type determination table in FIG. 177, the upper limit for the number of rounds in the large prize game state is 3, 5, or 10 rounds, and the upper limit for the number of times the small prize game state is opened is 6 times.

If it is determined in S6103 that the grand prize opening number counter value is the upper limit value (YES in S6103), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6104.

In S6104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5" (S6104) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning opening preparation process, the jackpot end process (see FIG. 187) (see S6028) will be performed. After executing the process in S6104, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6105.

In S6105, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After that, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the end of the winning display command, which is a transmission reservation process for the end of the winning display command after the end of the big winning game state, and a transmission reservation process for the end of the small winning display command after the end of the small winning game state (S6106). The end of the winning display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S6106, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

Returning to S6103, if it is determined that the grand prize opening number counter value is not the upper limit value (NO determination in S6103), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6107.

In S6107, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the grand prize opening number counter value. After executing the process in S6107, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6108.

In S6108, the main CPU 201 performs a selection process of a big winning hole to be opened. In this process, as the big winning hole to be opened, the first big winning hole 6131 is selected when the jackpot game control process is executed, and the second big winning hole 6151 is selected when the small winning game control process is executed. be done. After executing the process in S6108, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6109.

In S6109, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the big winning opening. In this process, for example, the number of openings of the grand prize opening, the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening, the maximum number of winning balls in the grand prize opening, the number of prize balls at the time of winning the grand prize opening, etc. are set. It should be noted that this is not intended to exclude cases in which the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round or in the small winning game control process. However, in this case, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of openings and closings of the grand prize opening as separate processes. After executing the process in S6109, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6110.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 28,000 msec when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 100 msec when the small prize game control process is being executed. The maximum number of winning balls into the large prize opening is set to, for example, a maximum of 10 balls when the large prize game control process is being executed, and is set to, for example, a maximum of 4 balls when the small prize game control process is being executed. The number of winning balls when a winning ball enters the large prize opening is set to 15 balls for the first large prize opening 6131, and 14 balls for the second large prize opening 6151. However, the values set in the various setting processes related to the large prize opening are not limited to the above.

In S6110, the main CPU 201 performs a big winning hole opening setting process to open the big winning hole (first big winning hole 6131, second big winning hole 6151). After executing the process in S6110, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6111.

In S6111, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S6111) and switching the control state number, after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process ( (See S6027 in FIG. 187) will be performed. After executing the process in S6111, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6112.

In S6112, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S6112, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

[8-6-8. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the special winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6027 in the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when this big winning a prize opening control process is called in S6027 during the special symbol management process in which the first special symbol is the processing target, the first special symbol becomes the processing target. Similarly, when the big winning opening control process is called in S6027 during the special symbol management process in which the second special symbol is the processing target, the second special symbol becomes the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4" (S6121).

If it is determined in S6121 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4" (if S6121 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6121 that the control state number of the special pattern is "4" (if S6121 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6122.

In S6122, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have won in the big winning hole (first big winning hole 6131, second big winning hole 6151) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether or not the value counted by the grand prize opening counter that counts the number of winning game balls that enter the grand prize opening is the maximum number of winning balls. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter value counted by the big winning opening winning counter is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203.

In S6122, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6123 if it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 6131, second grand prize opening 6151) is not the maximum number of winning balls. If it is determined that the number of game balls won in the big winning hole (first big winning hole 6131, second big winning hole 6151) is the maximum winning number, the process moves to S6128-1.

In S6128-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the game is in a jackpot gaming state (the jackpot flag is on). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is in the jackpot gaming state, it moves the process to S6124, and if it determines that it is not in the jackpot gaming state (that is, it is in the small winning gaming state), it moves the process to S6128-2. .

In S6123, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the large prize openings (first large prize opening 6131, second large prize opening 6151) has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various settings process related to the large prize openings (see S6109 in FIG. 193) has elapsed.

If it is determined in S6123 that the maximum opening time of the grand prize opening (first grand prize opening 6131, second grand prize opening 6151) has not elapsed (if NO in S6123), the main CPU 201 controls the opening of the grand prize opening. The release control process is ended and the process returns to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6123 that the maximum opening time of the large prize openings (first large prize opening 6131, second large prize opening 6151) has elapsed (if S6123 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6124.

In S6124, the main CPU 201 performs a closing setting process to close the big winning hole (first big winning hole 6131, second big winning hole 6151). After executing the process in S6124, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6125.

In S6125, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "3" (S6125) and switching the control state number, the large prize opening preparation process (see S6026 in FIG. 187) will be performed again after this large prize opening control process is completed. After executing the process of S6125, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6126.

In S6126, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. After executing the process of S6126, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6127.

In S6127, if the game is in a big win game state, the main CPU 201 performs a process of reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that in a small win game state, the process of reserving the transmission of an inter-round display command is not performed. Then, after processing S6127, the main CPU 201 ends the big win opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

In S6128-2, the main CPU 201 performs a closure setting process to close the large prize openings (first large prize opening 6131, second large prize opening 6151). After executing the process of S6128-2, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6128-3.

In S6128-3, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5." In this way, by performing processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5" and switching the control state number, the jackpot end processing (see S6028 in FIG. 187) is performed after the jackpot opening control processing is completed. After executing the processing of S6128-3, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6128-4.

In S6128-4, the main CPU 201 performs game state designation parameter setting processing. After executing S6128-4, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S6128-5.

In S6128-5, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the small winning end display command. The small hit end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S6128-5, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

[8-6-9. Jackpot end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the jackpot end process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6028 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187) will be described. FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

When this jackpot end process is called in S6028 during special pattern management process in which the first special pattern is the processing target, the first special pattern is the processing target. Similarly, when this jackpot end process is called in S6028 during special pattern management process in which the second special pattern is the processing target, the second special pattern is the processing target.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (S6131).

If it is determined in S6131 that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5" (if S6131 is a NO determination), the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and also ends the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187), and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 186). In this case, it returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S6131 that the control state number of the special symbol is "5" (if S6131 returns a YES judgment), the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6132.

In S6132, the main CPU 201 executes a special symbol game end setting process. In this process, various counter values related to the big win game state and small win game state (large prize opening count counter value, large prize opening winning counter value, etc.), small win flag, big win flag, symbol confirmation count counter value, special symbol pause flag, etc. are cleared. After executing S6132, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6133.

In S6133, the main CPU 201 performs a game state setting process. In this game state setting process, the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 177 is referenced, and the probability variable flag, the number of probability variable times, the time-saving flag, and the number of time-saving times are set based on the selected symbol information. Specifically, as shown in the winning type determination table in FIG. 177, after the end of the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, the probability variable flag is set to 1 (high probability game state), the number of probability variable times is set to 120, the time-saving flag is set to 1 (time-saving game state), and the number of time-saving times is set to 100. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state of the second special symbol, the probability variable flag is set to 1 (high probability game state), the probability variable count is set to 120, and the time-saving flag is set to 1 (time-saving game state). If the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that a jackpot has been won is the normal game state, the time-saving count is set to 100. If the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that a jackpot has been won is not the normal game state, the time-saving count is set to 10,000. Note that after the end of the small jackpot game state, none of the data for the probability variable flag, probability variable count, time-saving flag, or time-saving count is set. In other words, the game state does not transition (change) in response to the small jackpot game state. After executing the process of S5133, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6034.

In S6134, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 192 is performed. After executing the process of S6134, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interrupt prohibited area and perform the above-mentioned jackpot end processing within the interrupt prohibited area.

[8-6-10. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 196. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 196, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start condition for the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 196 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 (S6300).

If it is determined in S6300 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and transfers the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6301.

In S6301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S6301, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6310. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S6310 and subsequent processes based on the control state number read in the process of S6301.

In S6310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S6310 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this normal symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 197. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6320.

In S6320, the main CPU 201 performs processing to end the variable display of normal symbols. This processing of S6320 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6330.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when it is determined that the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, the predetermined normal symbol The symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set as the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". The waiting time of this normal symbol will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. In addition, when the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1" and it is waited for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

It should be noted that the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol may vary depending on the type of hit or may vary depending on the gaming state. For example, in the normal gaming state, the first symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set, and in the time-saving gaming state, the second symbol confirmation time is shorter than the first symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec). 132 msec). In particular, when creating a small hit RUSH like the sixth pachinko game machine, it is desirable to make the symbol determination time extremely short in the time-saving gaming state.

In S6330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S6330 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6340.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a determination process of the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a normal symbol loss). Then, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 6146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 6146.

In the process of setting the opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146, the opening pattern (number of times to open, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric device 6146 is determined based on the game state and the pattern command selected when a normal pattern is hit, by referring to the normal symbol winning type determination table shown in FIG. 184, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 the opening pattern command of the normal electric device corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric device 6146.

In S6340, the main CPU 201 performs the normal electric device release process. This S6340 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6350.

In this normal electric accessory opening process, the main CPU 201 performs the opening process of the ordinary electric accessory 6146 according to the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 6146 determined in the normal symbol game determination process of S6330. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric accessory 6146 is completed, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S6350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol win end processing. This S6350 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol win end processing, it ends the normal symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol winning termination process, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbols determined in S6310 to S6340 and various random numbers stored in the normal symbol determination area.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned normal symbol control processing (S6300 to S6350) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[8-6-11. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in S6310 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 196) will be described with reference to FIG. 197. FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol variable display start process in the sixth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 197, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal pattern is "0" (S6311).

If it is determined in S6311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 196). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6312.

In S6312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the normal pattern. In this process, the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (2) to the normal pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (3). After executing the process of S6312, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6313.

In S6313, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Determine the judgment value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol miss”). After executing the process in S6313, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6314.

In S6314, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 183, and determines a "normal symbol winning symbol selection command" based on the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data (the result of the normal symbol winning determination process) and the normal symbol random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0). After executing S6314, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S6315.

In S6315, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the normal symbol variation pattern. In this processing, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 185, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variable display time based on the game state, the normal symbol win/lose judgment value data, and the normal symbol winning symbol selection command. After executing the processing of S6315, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S6316.

In S6316, the main CPU 201 performs a variable display time setting process for normal symbols. In this process, the variable display time of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (S6315) is set to the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the variable display time of the normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display section 161. start. The waiting time of this normal symbol will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. After executing the process in S6316, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6317.

In S6317, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this normal symbol variable display start process, the normal symbol variable display end process (FIG. 196) (see S6320) will be performed. After executing the process in S6317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S6318.

In S6318, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a normal symbol variation pattern command. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[8-7. Small hit RUSH]
In the above-mentioned sixth pachinko game machine, it is possible to realize a "small hit RUSH". Below, the mechanism of small hit RUSH will be explained.

In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, the frequency of game balls entering the second big winning hole 6151 is different from that in other gaming states (for example, normal gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state). As a result, the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time becomes a small winning RUSH that can exceed 1.

As shown in FIG. 173, the game ball hit to the right passes through the passing gate 6126 and the normal electric role unit 6145. In the high probability non-time-saving game state, since the non-time-saving game state is controlled, it is difficult for the normal power shutter 6147 to be in the open state (see FIG. 182 to FIG. 184), and the normal power shutter 6147 is in the closed state protruding from the game panel 6100, and the game ball rolling on the normal power shutter 6147 is guided to the second large winning opening 6151 and the second starting opening 6140.

Therefore, if the second big winning hole 6151 is open, the game ball hit right will be guided to the normal electricity shutter 6147 and can enter the second big winning hole 6151. Every time a game ball enters this second big prize opening 6151, for example, 14 game balls are paid out.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 6140, not only is a stop display mode that indicates a small win with an extremely high probability of 1/1.07 (estimated) as shown in the special symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 175), but also an ultra-shortened variation with an extremely short variable display time is executed as shown in the special symbol variation pattern table for the right-hand play state (see FIG. 181(a)), so the frequency of game balls entering the second large winning hole 6151 is increased compared to other play states (for example, the normal play state, the high-probability time-shortened play state, and the low-probability time-shortened play state).

In this way, in a high-accuracy, non-time-saving gaming state, it is possible to realize a small hit RUSH in which the expected value of the game value (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) paid out for the number of balls fired per unit time exceeds 1. It becomes.

On the other hand, in a game state where the time-saving game state is controlled (high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), the normal power shutter 6147 is likely to be in an open state buried in the game panel 6100 (see Figures 182 to 184), and most of the game balls hit to the right will enter the first large winning hole (right) 6120B. Therefore, even if the second large winning hole 6151 is open, the expected value of the game ball entering the second large winning hole 6151 is low. Moreover, as mentioned above, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole (right) 6120B, for example, only one prize ball will be paid out.

In this way, in game states where the time-saving game state is controlled (high-probability time-saving game state, low-probability time-saving game state), the expected value of the game value (e.g. number of winning balls, etc.) paid out per number of balls fired per unit time is set to not exceed 1.

In addition, in the normal game state, a left hit is considered the normal game mode, but if a right hit is performed, since the non-time-saving game state is controlled, it becomes possible for the game ball hit to the right to enter the second starting hole 6140. However, as described above, as shown in the first half fluctuation pattern table of the special symbol in the normal game state (see FIG. 179), when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140, a "long fluctuation" first half fluctuation pattern in which the variable display time of the special symbol is set to be extremely long is determined, so that the number of times the second special symbol is drawn per unit time is extremely small, and it is configured so that there is no practical benefit for the player to hit to the right in the normal game state.

In this embodiment, the small win RUSH occurs in a high probability non-time-saving game state, but this is not limited to this. For example, the small win RUSH may occur in a high probability time-saving game state in which special symbol shortening control is executed to shorten the variable display time of the special symbol, without executing electric support control to increase the frequency of opening the first starting hole (right) 6120B by activating the normal electric role 6146.

[8-8. Performance flow]
Next, an outline of the performance performed in the sixth pachinko gaming machine will be explained using the overall flow of the performance. FIG. 198 is an example of the performance flow in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Further, FIG. 199 is an example of the performance flow of the right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine.

(Production flow in normal gaming state)
In the normal game state in which left-handed hitting is performed, a game ball can enter the first starting opening (middle) 6120A, and the first special symbol can be displayed with variable display of decorative symbols, display effects of characters, etc., audio effects, etc. A change effect on the operation mode of the effect button device 6310, etc. is performed. In this embodiment, the decorative pattern is composed of three main patterns: a left pattern, a middle pattern, and a right pattern, and a sub pattern that is much smaller than the main pattern. Note that the number and types of decorative patterns are not limited to these.

In the normal game mode of the sixth pachinko game machine, the main gameplay is to collect "character icons" and aim for a jackpot.

When a game ball enters the first starting opening (middle) 6120A, all the decorative symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner at high speed in the display area of the display device 7 (``start of variation of all symbols'').

When all decorative patterns are changing, it is possible to have one of the following preview effects: "Dialogue Preview", "Button Challenge Preview", or "Cherry Blossom Accumulation Preview". Other previews may also be possible.

"Speech preview" is, for example, a preview performance in which one of multiple characters is displayed, and the displayed character's dialogue suggests that the lottery result of the first special symbol may be a jackpot. .

A "button challenge notice" is, for example, a predetermined number of "character icons" by operating the performance button device 6310 multiple times (sequentially hitting), or the expected level of jackpot (for example, intense heat), and the contents of the developing reach (for example, This is a preview performance that displays whether or not a "character icon" indicating SP) can be obtained. Please note that you may not be able to obtain any of the icons from the "Button Challenge Preview".

In the "cherry blossom accumulation notice", for example, cherry blossoms dance over the entire display area of the display device 7, the cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a of the display device 7 (see FIG. 173), and the cherry blossoms are accumulated in stages. This is a preview performance. Then, when the accumulated cherry blossoms are released, a predetermined number of "character icons" or a "yakuza icon" indicating that it will develop into a "path to the ultimate battle" will be displayed, and a "yakuza icon" will be displayed. and develops into ``The Road to the Final Battle''. These cherry blossoms can be accumulated up to three levels over the relevant change or multiple changes due to pre-reading. The number of character icons is set to increase. The content of this "cherry blossom accumulation notice" will be described in detail later using FIGS. 215 and 216.

Then, when the number of "character icons" displayed so far is 5 ("5 character icons acquired"), the game progresses to "the road to a decisive battle."

After all the symbols start to change, and the left and right symbols are displayed as temporarily stopped ("temporary stop for left and right symbols"), it is possible for all symbols to stop, resulting in a "miss," or for a "pseudo consecutive stimulation effect" or "normal reach" to occur.

The "pseudo consecutive teasing effect" is an effect in which the right pattern, which is temporarily stopped, changes again (right pattern slip), and teases whether or not a "character icon" will stop at the position of the middle pattern. When a "character icon" stops at the position of the middle pattern, the above-mentioned "pseudo consecutive effect" occurs, and if the "character icon" does not stop at the position of the middle pattern, it is a "miss." Note that multiple "character icons" can also stop at the position of the middle pattern.

"Normal reach" is a reach effect that is performed when the left symbol and the right symbol are the same type of symbol, for example, a reach effect in which the middle symbol is displayed fluctuating at a low speed. In "normal reach", if the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol of a different type from the left and right symbols, it becomes a "loss", and when the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol of the same type as the left and right symbols, it becomes a "jackpot". In addition, in "Normal reach", if the middle symbol does not stop and display and the "character icon" stops at the middle symbol position, it will develop into a "pseudo continuous effect", and if the middle symbol changes at high speed, "Ninja reach" will occur. ”.

"Ninja reach" is a reach effect with a higher expectation of a jackpot than normal reach, for example, a reach effect in which a ninja character tries to stop a middle symbol of the same type as the left and right symbols. In a "ninja reach", if the middle symbol stops and displays a different type of symbol than the left and right symbols, it is a "miss", and if the middle symbol stops and displays the same type of symbol as the left and right symbols, it is a "jackpot". In a "ninja reach", if the middle symbol is not stopped and the "decisive battle icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol, it progresses to a "decisive battle reach".

In addition, when the "character icon" stops and a "pseudo continuous effect" is performed, if the number of "character icons" displayed so far is 5 (5 character icons acquired), the "pseudo continuous effect" ” without doing so, it develops into ``the road to a decisive battle.''

"Road to the Decisive Battle" and "Road to the Goku Decisive Battle" refer to the same type of identification in which the player operates the production button device 6310 a predetermined number of times and collects up to a specific number (10) of "character icons." This is a production of The "road to the decisive battle" and "the road to the ultimate decisive battle" will be described in detail later using FIGS. 220 to 222.

Since 5 character icons have already been acquired, "Road to the Decisive Battle" is a performance in which the player operates the production button device 6310 5 times to collect the remaining 5 "character icons". be.

In "The Road to the Ultimate Showdown," since the player has not yet acquired a character icon, the player operates the effect button device 6310 ten times to collect ten "character icons."

If the number of "character icons" collected in "Road to the decisive battle" or "Road to the final battle" is less than 10 ("obtained less than 10 character icons"), it will develop into "showdown reach" and collect If there are 10 "character icons" ("obtain 10 character icons"), it will develop into "Great Battle Reach".

"Confrontation Reach" is a reach performance that has higher expectations for a jackpot than Ninja Reach. For example, if an ally character faces off against an enemy character, it will be a "jackpot" if they win, and a "lose" if they lose. It is. Furthermore, in "Showdown Reach", a reach effect will be performed using the "character icons" collected in "Road to the Decisive Battle". In addition, in the "showdown reach", when the "big battle icon" stops at the position of the middle symbol, the "showdown reach" develops into the "big battle reach". This "confrontation reach" will be described in detail later using FIGS. 223 and 224.

"Great Decisive Battle Reach" is a reach performance with the highest expectation of a jackpot among the reach performances in the normal game state. For example, if your army and the enemy army face off and your army wins, it will be a "jackpot", and your army will It is a reach performance where if the player is defeated, it is a "lose".

(Production flow in right-handed game state)
Among the right-handed game states, in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" and "low-accuracy time-saving game state," the game ball can enter the first starting port (right) 6120B, and the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol is The first special symbol is given priority, and the first special symbol is subjected to variable display of decorative symbols, display performance of characters, etc., audio performance, change performance of the operation mode of the performance button device 6310, etc. In addition, in the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", a game ball can enter the second starting port 6140, and the second special symbol is given priority as the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol. It performs variable displays of decorative patterns, display effects of characters, etc., voice effects, changes in the operation mode of the effect button device 6310, and the like. In addition, in the right-handed game state, if only the first special symbol or only the second special symbol is being displayed variably, the special symbol that is being variably displayed is made to correspond to the special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol. It's okay.

When a game ball enters the first starting port (right) 6120B in the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" or "low-accuracy time-saving game state", all the decorative patterns are disjointed and fluctuate at high speed in the display area of the display device 7. Start displaying ("Start variation of all symbols"). In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 6140 in the "high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state", all the decorative symbols start to be displayed in a disjoint manner in the display area of the display device 7 at high speed ("all symbols ”).

When all the decorative patterns are being displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to perform either a "prediction inside a jewel" or a "lotus flower notice".

The "treasure ball preview" is a preview effect that displays the expected probability of a jackpot (e.g., "super hot") in the upper display area 7a (see FIG. 173) of the display device 7.

The "Lotus Flower Notice" is, for example, a notice that a bud is displayed, and as the bud opens, it suggests that the event will develop into a "Door Opening Event." The bud display can vary multiple times based on pre-reading, and the bud display continues even when a small win game state is occurring. The details of this "Lotus Flower Notice" will be described later using Figure 225.

In addition, in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state," it is possible to perform a reach effect of "battle challenge" or "battle reach."

In the "Battle Challenge", the performance button device 6310 changes to the fourth operation mode (see FIG. 172(d)), and the second performance operation section 6312 protruding upward is operated once (one blow) to create a performance role. When the object group 58 (see FIG. 173) falls, it is a reach effect in which the first special symbol becomes a jackpot.

In "Battle Reach", an ally character and an enemy boss face off, and each time the ally character attacks, the production button device 6310 changes (grows) in its operation mode, and the final operation mode of the production button device 6310 changes (grows). This is a ready-to-win performance in which the first special symbol becomes a jackpot when the operation is performed and the performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 173) falls. The content of this "battle reach" will be described in detail later using FIGS. 226 and 227.

In addition, in the "high probability non-time-saving play state," it is possible to perform the reach effects of "door opening effect" or "eye opening effect."

The "door opening effect" is a reach effect in which the effect button device 6310 is operated (hit repeatedly) multiple times, causing the door to gradually open, and when the door is completely open, a jackpot of the second special pattern is awarded.

The "eye opening effect" is a reach effect in which the ally character gradually opens his or her eyes, and if the eye opening is successful, the second special symbol becomes a jackpot.

The above-mentioned "development" includes displaying information necessary for the progress of a game or performance, or the progress of the game or performance itself, and includes the progress of the game or performance directly or indirectly. It is a concept that includes. In addition, in "development" that displays information necessary as the game or performance progresses, predetermined development information (for example, icons, etc.) may be displayed, or the displayed development information may be added or subtracted. It is a concept that also includes doing.

[8-9. Sub control circuit]
In order to execute the above effects, the control contents of the sub control circuit 300 based on various commands etc. sent from the main control circuit 200 to the sub control circuit 300 will be explained.

First, details of various tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained using FIGS. 200 to 209.

[8-9-1. Normal game state symbol production pattern determination table]
A symbol presentation pattern determination table for determining a symbol presentation pattern in the normal gaming state will be explained. FIG. 200 is an example of a symbol production pattern determination table in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

"Pattern presentation pattern" refers to information that defines the manner in which decorative patterns for special patterns change, as well as related display presentations of characters and the like, audio presentations, and presentations of changes in the operation mode of the presentation button device 6310. In addition to the pattern presentation pattern, various display presentations such as preview presentation patterns can be superimposed and executed.

The symbol presentation pattern in the normal game mode of the sixth pachinko gaming machine is composed of a combination of a "pre-reach presentation pattern" that corresponds to the first half of the special symbol variation pattern, and a "reach presentation pattern" that corresponds to the second half of the special symbol variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 200, the symbol presentation pattern determination table in the normal game state, for the first special symbol, corresponds the "first half variation pattern number" of the variation pattern command for the first special symbol with the "second half icon number" and "pre-reach presentation pattern" in which character icons described below are displayed in the second half, and corresponds the "second half variation pattern number", "second half icon number" and "reach presentation pattern" of the variation pattern command for the first special symbol. Note that when the second half variation pattern number is "00H", the "presentation end information" is determined so that only the pre-reach presentation pattern is executed as the reach presentation pattern.

In this embodiment, by combining the first half variation pattern number (09H-10H) with the second half variation pattern number (14H-16H, 24H-26H), after executing any of the pre-reach performance patterns 9-32 of "Road to the Final Battle" or "Road to the Extreme Battle", any of the reach performance patterns 4-8, 12-16 of "Confrontation Reach" or "Great Battle Reach" can be executed. And since both the pre-reach performance patterns 9-32 of "Road to the Final Battle" or "Road to the Extreme Battle" and the reach performance patterns 4-8, 12-16 of "Confrontation Reach" or "Great Battle Reach" are determined based on the "number of icons in the second half", the performances of both are related by the "number of icons in the second half", and if the number of icons in the second half is 10, the reach performance patterns 8 and 16 of "Great Battle Reach" can be executed, and if the number of icons in the second half is 8 or 9, the reach performance patterns 4-7 and 12-15 of "Confrontation Reach" can be executed.

In the symbol performance pattern determination table in the normal game state, in the second special symbol, all the variable pattern commands of the second special symbol are associated with the "standby performance pattern".

This "standby performance pattern" is a decorative pattern in which the three main symbols, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, are kept on standby (stopped display) without being fluctuated and displayed, while the sub symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. This will only cause the display to blink. Even if this standby performance pattern is executed, the so-called irregular fluctuation can be quietly ended without the player paying attention to the variable display of the second special symbol.

[8-9-2. Right-handed game state symbol production pattern determination table]
A symbol production pattern determination table for determining a symbol production pattern in a right-handed game state will be explained. FIG. 201 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table for the right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 201, the symbol presentation pattern determination table for the right-hand play state associates the special symbol variation pattern command (first half variation pattern number, second half variation pattern number), the selection rate (first random number value), and the "symbol presentation pattern."

Here, the "selection rate" corresponds to the fact that the obtained first random number value is within a predetermined range with respect to the first random number value consisting of the first random number range, but for convenience of explanation, , has been replaced with selection rate. Note that the selection rate may include 0% in addition to 1 to 100%, and does not exclude the wording 0% selection rate. The above also applies to the "selection rate" in the tables shown in FIGS. 202 to 209 and the like. In this embodiment, a large number of multiple types of random number values in different random number ranges are provided, and a description of the types of random number values will be omitted as appropriate.

In addition, the first symbol production pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command of the first special symbol, and the second symbol production pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command of the second special symbol, but the first symbol production pattern and When both of the second symbol production patterns are executed at the same time (such as when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time), the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state" or "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state" '', priority is given to the execution of the first symbol production pattern, and in the ``high-precision non-time-saving gaming state'', priority is given to the execution of the second symbol production pattern. ,

[8-9-3. Normal game state second half icon number determination table]
The second half icon number determination table for determining the second half icon number in the normal gaming state will be explained. FIG. 202 is an example of a second half icon number determination table in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine. Incidentally, the determination of the number of second-half icons is performed before determining the symbol presentation pattern (see FIG. 200) in the normal game state.

"Number of icons in the second half" refers to the total number of character icons that are finally displayed in "The Road to the Decisive Battle" and "The Road to the Final Battle," and in this embodiment, the maximum number is 10. However, the number is not limited. Further, the "number of icons in the second half" includes the "number of icons in the first half", which will be described later, and the relational expression "number of icons in the second half"="number of icons in the first half"+α holds true.

As shown in FIG. 202, the second half icon number determination table associates the variation pattern command (second half variation pattern number) of the first special symbol, the selection rate (second random value), and the "second half icon number". It is being

In this embodiment, the second half icon number determination table is configured so that when a "Great Battle Reach (reach performance patterns 8, 16: see FIG. 200)" occurs in response to the second half variation pattern number (16H, 26H), the maximum number of second half icons, 10, is determined. As a result, when 10 character icons are finally displayed in "Road to the Final Battle" or "Road to the Ultimate Battle", a "Great Battle Reach" will occur.

[8-9-4. Normal game state first half icon number determination table]
The first half icon number determination table for determining the first half icon number in the normal gaming state will be explained. FIG. 203 is an example of the first half icon number determination table in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

"Number of icons in the first half" refers to the total number of character icons that are finally displayed in "normal variation" and "pseudo continuous effect", and in this embodiment, the maximum number is 5, but the number is not limited.

As shown in FIG. 203, the first half icon number determination table associates the winning command (first half variation pattern number) of the first special symbol, the selection rate (third random value), and the "first half icon number". ing.

Here, the "winning command for the first special symbol" is a command that includes information to increase the reserved number of the first special symbol by 1, information on the variation pattern of the first special symbol (i.e., the variation pattern command for the first special symbol), etc., as explained in the first pachinko gaming machine. This winning command for the first special symbol is scheduled for transmission when a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 6120A, 6120B (see S397 in FIG. 52), and is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process during the next system timer interrupt process (see S322 in FIG. 45). The same applies to the "winning command for the second special symbol" described later (see S403 in FIG. 52).

In this embodiment, when "Road to the decisive battle" is performed corresponding to the first half variation pattern number (09H to 0FH), the number of first half icons is set so that the maximum number of five icons is determined as the first half icon number. A decision table is configured. As a result, when five character icons are finally displayed in the "normal variation" or "pseudo continuous effect", the "road to the decisive battle" will take place.

[8-9-5. Normal game state first half icon number determination table]
The first half icon display scenario determination table for determining the first half icon display scenario in the normal gaming state will be explained. FIG. 204 is an example of the first half icon display scenario determination table in the normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "first half icon display scenario" refers to information that determines the display trigger, display timing, and number of character icons to be displayed, such as where, when, and how many of the character icons in the first half are to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 204, the first half icon display scenario determination table includes the winning command of the first special symbol (first half fluctuation pattern number), the determined number of first half icons, the selection rate (fourth random number), "First half icon display scenario" is associated with the first half icon display scenario.

Further, in the rightmost column of the first half icon display scenario determination table, "contents of first half icon display scenario" is illustrated for reference. Moreover, "the said fluctuation|variation" is the variation display of the decorative pattern performed based on the lottery of the special symbol about the starting information which was the object of determination of the first half icon display scenario, and the lottery.

In this embodiment, the first-half icon display scenario is configured such that when one to three pseudo-continuous performances are performed, one or more character icons can be displayed each time the pseudo-continuous performance is performed. Thereby, it is possible to create an expectation that character icons will be added each time a pseudo continuous effect is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first half icon display scenario is configured such that one or more character icons can be displayed in the "cherry blossom accumulation preview" or "button challenge preview" before the pseudo continuous effect is performed. There is. The "cherry blossom accumulation notice" and the "button challenge notice" have different execution timings, and both are configured to be executable.

[8-9-6. First Half Icon Set Order Scenario Determination Table for Normal Game State]
A first half icon collection order scenario determination table for determining a first half collection order scenario in a normal gaming state will be described below. Fig. 205 shows an example of a first half icon collection order scenario determination table in a normal gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "first half collection order scenario" refers to information that determines in what display order character icons of the type corresponding to the number of first half icons are to be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 205, the first half icon collection order scenario determination table includes the winning command of the first special symbol, the determined number of first half icons, the selection rate (fifth random value), and the "first half collection order scenario". are associated with each other.

Further, in the rightmost column of the first half icon display scenario determination table, "contents of first half set order scenario" is illustrated for reference. Character icons A to E in "Western Army Mode" to be described later are illustrated as "A" to "E", and character icons F to J in "Eastern Army Mode" to be described later are illustrated as "F" to "J". It shows. Further, as will be described in detail later using FIG. 214, "A" and "F", "B" and "G", "C" and "H", "D" and "I", "E" and " The display positions of "J" correspond and have similar roles.

The last number of the first half set order scenario shown in FIG. 205 indicates "first half icon number" - "display order pattern", and in the first half set order scenario 1-1, "first half icon number 1" - " This indicates "display order pattern 1".

In this embodiment, as the "display order pattern" of the first half set order scenario,
"Display order" in which character icons are displayed in order from A (F) upwards (see Figure 214), such as "A → B → C → D → E (F → G → H → I → J)""Pattern1"
Characters are arranged in order from D (I) downwards, such as "D→C→B→A→E (I→H→G→F→J)", with E(J) at the end (see Figure 214). "Display order pattern 2" in which icons are displayed,
After displaying D (I) such as "D → A → B → C → E (I → F → G → H → J)", return to A (F) and move upward from A (F). "Display order pattern 3" in which character icons are displayed in order (see Figure 214);
"Display order" in which character icons are displayed in order from E (J) down (see Figure 214), such as "E → D → C → B → A (J → I → H → G → F)" Pattern 4". Note that the number and order contents of display order patterns are not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, "display order pattern 1" is a normal display order pattern, "display order pattern 2" is a display order pattern that improves the expectation of a jackpot, and "display order pattern 3" is a pseudo consecutive pattern. "Display order pattern 4" is a display order pattern that suggests that a battle will be performed, ``display order pattern 4'' is a display order pattern that suggests that a decisive battle path or a final battle path will be performed. In this manner, in this embodiment, the order in which the characters are displayed can give interest to the future game content and further improve the interest of the game.

[8-9-7. Sakura Accumulation Notice Determination Table in Normal Game Mode]
A cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table for determining the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the normal gaming state will be described. Fig. 206 is an example of the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table in the normal gaming state of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 206, the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table is determined by the "first special symbol winning command (first half fluctuation pattern number)", "first special symbol pending number", and first half icon display scenario. The "number of character icons displayed" (see FIG. 204) displayed in the cherry blossom accumulation notice, the selection rate (sixth random number), and the "cherry blossom accumulation notice performance pattern" are associated.

Further, in the rightmost column of the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table, "contents of the cherry blossom accumulation notice production pattern" is illustrated for reference. Further, "the variation" refers to a special symbol lottery for the starting information for which the cherry blossom accumulation notice performance pattern is determined, and a variable display of decorative symbols performed based on the lottery. "Preliminary variation" refers to a variation display of a decorative pattern that is started before "the variation in question". Regarding this advance fluctuation, it is executed multiple times depending on the number of reservations of the first special symbol, and if the number of reservations of the first special symbol is 4, advance fluctuation will be executed three times from the next fluctuation, If the number of reserved pieces of the first special symbol is 3, two preliminary variations will be executed from the next variation, and if the number of reserved pieces of the first special symbol is 2, one preliminary variation will be executed from the next variation. will be executed. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that a maximum of two advance fluctuations can be executed, but the configuration may be such that a maximum of three preliminary fluctuations can be executed.

As mentioned above, the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" is a notice that accumulates cherry blossoms in stages, and when the accumulated cherry blossoms are released, a predetermined number of "character icons" or "yakuza icons" will be displayed. This is the content that will be carried out. Therefore, it can be said that the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" consists of a staged effect that accumulates cherry blossoms in stages and an icon display effect that displays icons.

The stage presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable over the advance variation and the variation, and the icon display presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executed during the variation.

In addition, in the cherry blossom accumulation notice, cherry blossoms dance over the entire display area of the display device 7, and the cherry blossoms are about to be sucked into the upper display area 7a (see FIG. 173) of the display device 7, but the cherry blossoms are not accumulated. It is also possible to perform a failed preview performance (Sakura accumulation 0 stage notice - YK0). As a result, it is possible to increase the appearance rate of the cherry blossom accumulation notice as a whole and add interest to whether or not cherry blossoms will accumulate.

In this embodiment, the Sakura Accumulation Notice determination table is configured so that the likelihood of the "Yakuza Icon" being displayed and the number of "character icons" being displayed increases each time the stage presentation of the Sakura Accumulation Notice develops (in the order of Sakura Accumulation 1 Stage Notice < Sakura Accumulation 2 Stage Notice < Sakura Accumulation 3 Stage Notice). This adds interest to the development of the stage presentation (accumulation of Sakura), and can further increase the enjoyment of the game. In particular, because the stage presentation of the Sakura Accumulation Notice is configured to be executable across the pre-change and the current change, it can increase the enjoyment of the game across multiple changes.

[8-9-8. Support Icon Display Scenario Determination Table for Showdown Reach in Normal Game State]
A support icon display scenario determination table for displaying a support icon in a showdown reach in a normal game state will be described. Fig. 207 is an example of a support icon display scenario determination table for a showdown reach in a normal game state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "support icon display scenario" refers to the display content displayed by the support icon in response to the player's operation of the effect button device 6310 during a showdown reach, and is information that is determined in association with the number of times the effect button device 6310 is operated and the display content. The "support icon" in a showdown reach will be described in more detail later using Figures 223 and 224.

As shown in FIG. 207, the support icon display scenario determination table associates a reach presentation pattern (see FIG. 200) corresponding to a showdown reach, the determined number of second half icons, a selection rate (seventh random number value), and a "support icon display scenario."

Further, in the rightmost column of the support icon display scenario determination table, a "support icon display scenario" is illustrated for reference. Here, "line" refers to the character's dialogue that is displayed according to the support icon, "opportunity" means that the word "opportunity" is displayed and there is an expectation of a jackpot, and "fierce" means that the word "opportunity" is displayed and there is an expectation of a jackpot. is displayed with extremely enthusiastic characters, indicating that the expectation of winning the jackpot is higher than that of ``opportunity''. Furthermore, "LED" refers to the LED group 46 emitting a predetermined light, and "big battle" refers to the display of a "big battle icon." The content displayed by the "support icon display scenario" is not limited to the above, but includes "Change of pending image" which changes the display mode of the pending image, "Change of pending image" which causes the performance accessory group 58 (see FIG. 173) to fall, etc. Characters such as "Accessories for performance" and "Change of performance button" for changing the operation mode of the performance button device 6310 may be displayed.

In this embodiment, the support icon display scenario determination table is configured so that the "big battle icon" is always displayed when reach effect patterns 6, 7, 14, and 15 develop from confrontation reach to big decisive battle reach. has been done. As a result, when the "Big Decisive Battle Icon" is displayed as the support icon for the Confrontation Reach, you can perform the Great Decisive Battle Reach.

[8-9-9. Lotus flower preview decision table for right-handed game mode]
A lotus flower preview determination table for determining a lotus flower preview in a right-handed game state will be explained. FIG. 208 is an example of a lotus flower notice determination table in a right-handed game state in the sixth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 208, the lotus flower announcement determination table associates the "winning command for the second special symbol (first half variation pattern number and second half variation pattern number)," the "reserved number of second special symbols," the selection rate (8th random number value), and the "lotus flower announcement performance pattern."

As mentioned above, the "lotus flower preview" is a preview performance in which a bud is displayed and the opening of the bud suggests that it will develop into a "door opening performance." The buds can be displayed over multiple fluctuations (prior fluctuations).

In addition, there are two lotus flower preview performance patterns: a "lotus flower success preview" preview performance pattern and a "lotus flower failure preview" preview performance pattern. In the "lotus flower success preview" preview performance pattern, a bud is displayed from the next change (pre-change) after the lotus flower preview performance pattern is determined by the winning command for the second special symbol, and the bud opens when the change occurs. In addition, in the "lotus flower failure preview" preview performance pattern, a bud is displayed from the next change (pre-change) after the lotus flower preview performance pattern is determined by the winning command for the second special symbol, and the bud disappears when the change occurs.

In this embodiment, the lotus flower notice determination table is configured so that when a "door opening effect" is performed in response to the first half variation pattern number (41H, 45H), the notice effect pattern of the "lotus flower success notice" is determined with a predetermined selection rate. As a result, after the lotus flower success notice is performed, the door opening effect is performed.

[8-9-10. Fan notice determination table for jackpot game state]
A folding fan notice determination table for determining a folding fan notice in a big win gaming state will be described. Fig. 209 shows an example of a folding fan notice determination table in a big win gaming state in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

The "fan notice" in the jackpot game state is such that in the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, every time a game ball enters the first big prize opening 6131, a fan falls from the display area of the display device 7, This is a preview that suggests whether or not the starting information stored in the special symbol starting storage area is a jackpot depending on the color of the fan. That is, in the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, this is a notice that suggests a so-called pending series of wins. In addition, in this embodiment, although the configuration is such that the "fan notice" is performed only in the jackpot game state of the first special symbol, the "fan notice" is also performed in the jackpot game state of the second special symbol. You may.

The "Fan Announcement" is performed on the condition that the number of reserved second special symbols is the upper limit of two (start information is stored in each of the second special symbol start memory areas (1) to (2)). Note that the "Fan Announcement" may be configured to be performed regardless of the number of reserved second special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 209, the fan announcement determination table associates the start information (jackpot information, round information) stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1)-(4), the start information (jackpot information, round information) stored in the second special symbol start memory area (1)-(2), the selection rate (9th random number value), and the "fan announcement performance pattern."

Also, the jackpot information means a random number value for jackpot determination that is determined to be a jackpot, and the round information means a symbol random number value for determining the number of rounds in a jackpot game state.

In addition, the fan preview performance patterns are "White Fan Notice" where a white fan falls, "Red Fan Notice" where a red fan falls, and "Rainbow Fan" where a rainbow-colored fan falls. There are two types of preview performance patterns: ``Notice'' and ``Golden Fan Notice,'' in which a golden folding fan falls.

In this embodiment, the lotus flower notice determination table is configured so that the notice performance pattern of the "red fan notice" suggests that start information for a jackpot of 3R or more (3R, 5R, 10R) is stored in the first special pattern start memory area, and the notice performance pattern of the "rainbow fan notice" suggests that start information for a jackpot of 10R is stored in the first special pattern start memory area.

In addition, the lotus flower notice determination table is configured so that the notice performance pattern of the "Golden Fan Notice" suggests that the start information of a 2R jackpot is stored in the second special pattern start memory area.

Therefore, the preview performance pattern of "Red Fan Notice" and the notice performance pattern of "Rainbow Fan Notice" are fan notices that suggest the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the notice performance pattern of "Golden Fan Notice" It can be said that this is a fan preview that suggests a jackpot with the second special symbol.

In this embodiment, when jackpot starting information is stored in both the first special symbol starting storage area and the second special symbol starting storage area, "golden fan" indicating a jackpot of the second special symbol is used. In order to make it possible to determine the preview performance pattern of "Red Fan Notice" or the "Rainbow Fan Notice" that suggests the jackpot of the first special symbol, even though the notice performance pattern of "Notice" could not be determined, the lotus A flower notice determination table is configured.

[8-9-11. Sub control circuit processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 210, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 210, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S6500). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S6510.

Note that the above-mentioned initialization process (S6500) is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S6510 to S6580, which will be described later, are repeatedly executed.

In S6510, the sub-CPU 301 performs a data input process to input data. In this data input process, both the command input port 308 read process and the effect button device 6310 input process are performed.

The command input port 308 read process reads the command sent from the main control circuit 200 that is set in the command input port 308.

In addition, in the input process of the effect button device 6310, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button device 6310 is input from the button control circuit 310. In addition, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs operation information from the button control circuit 310, it determines whether to validate the input operation information or to discard it as invalid, and sets the reception time during which input of operation information is permitted, the validity time during which the input operation information is valid, and the invalidity period during which the input operation information is invalid, depending on the current situation such as the effect.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the production button device 6310 are completed, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6520.

In S6520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S6510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6530.

In S6530, the sub CPU 301 executes production mode determination processing. In this process, for example, a production pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests (such as a drawing request, a sound request, etc.) are made to operate various production devices based on the determined production pattern. , lamp requests, accessory requests, performance button drive requests, etc.). Details of this performance mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 211. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6540.

In S6540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304 (see FIG. 174). The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6550.

In S6550, the sub-CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305 (see FIG. 174). The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to output audio from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S6560.

In S6560, the sub-CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 sends an LED request to the LED control circuit 306 (see FIG. 174). Based on the message (LED request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or a portion of the LEDs that make up the LED group 46. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S6570.

At S6570, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends a reel request to the reel control circuit 307 (see FIG. 174). Based on the message (reel request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the reel control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the reels that make up the performance reel group 58. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6580.

At S6580, the sub-CPU 301 executes effect button control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 sends an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310 (see FIG. 174). Based on the message (effect button drive request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 or vibrating the effect button device 6310. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the sub-control circuit processing.

[8-9-12. Performance mode determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 211, details of the performance mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in S6530 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 210) will be described. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing an example of performance mode determination processing in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In S6531, the sub CPU 301 executes performance pattern determination processing to determine a performance pattern. In this process, the mode of the display effect displayed on the display device 7, the mode of the sound effect output from the speaker 32, the operation mode of the effect button device 6310, etc. are determined based on the command sent from the main CPU 201. A performance pattern is determined. Details of this performance mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6532.

In S6532, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S6531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6533.

In S6533, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating a drawing request. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S6532. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6534.

In S6534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S6531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6535.

In S6535, the sub-CPU 301 executes a lamp request generation process. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S6531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6536.

In S6536, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel request generation process. In this process, a reel request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S6531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6537.

At S6537, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating a performance button actuation request. In this process, a performance button actuation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S6531 above. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 210).

[8-9-13. Presentation pattern determination process]
Next, referring to Fig. 212 and Fig. 213, the details of the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub-CPU 301 in S6531 during the effect mode determination process (see Fig. 211) will be described. Fig. 212 and Fig. 213 are a flow chart showing an example of the effect pattern determination process in the sixth pachinko game machine.

In S6531-1, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "first special symbol winning command."

If it is determined in S6531-1 that it is a "first special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the "first special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-7.

In S6531-2, the sub CPU 301 updates the number of pending first special symbols and performs a first pending update display process for updating and displaying a pending image corresponding to the number of pending first special symbols. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-3.

In S6531-3, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the current gaming state is the "normal gaming state."

If it is determined in S6531-3 that the game is in the "normal game mode", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-4. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not in the "normal game mode", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-7.

In S6531-4, the sub CPU 301 performs first half icon number determination processing to determine the first half icon number in the normal gaming state.

In the first half icon number determination process, the first half icon number determination table shown in FIG. 203 is referred to, and the first half icon number is determined based on the winning command of the first special symbol and the third random number value. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-5.

In S6531-5, the sub-CPU 301 performs an icon scenario determination process. In this icon scenario determination process, both a first half icon display scenario determination process that determines a first half icon display scenario, and a first half collection order scenario determination process that determines a first half collection order scenario are performed.

In the first half icon display scenario determination process, the first half icon display scenario determination table shown in FIG. 204 is referenced, and the first half icon display scenario is determined based on the winning command for the first special pattern, the number of first half icons determined in S6531-4 above, and the fourth random number value.

In the first half collection order scenario determination process, the first half icon collection order scenario determination table shown in FIG. Based on this, determine the first half set order scenario.

When both the first half icon display scenario determination process and the first half collection order scenario determination process are completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-6.

In S6531-6, the sub-CPU 301 performs a cherry blossom accumulation notification determination process to determine the cherry blossom accumulation notification in the normal game state.

In the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination process, the cherry blossom accumulation notice determination table shown in FIG. 206 is referenced, and the cherry blossom accumulation notice performance pattern is determined based on the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of character icons displayed in the cherry blossom accumulation notice according to the first half icon display scenario determined in S6531-5 above, and the sixth random number value. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance pattern determination process, and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-7, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "second special symbol winning command".

If it is determined in S6531-7 that it is a "second special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-8. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the "second special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-10.

In S6531-8, the sub CPU 301 updates the number of second special symbols on hold and performs a second pending update display process for updating and displaying the pending image corresponding to the number of second special symbols on hold. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-9.

In S6531-9, the sub CPU 301 performs lotus flower preview determination processing to determine the lotus flower preview in the right-handed game state.

In the lotus flower announcement determination process, the lotus flower announcement determination table shown in FIG. 208 is referenced, and the lotus flower announcement performance pattern is determined based on the winning command for the second special symbol, the number of reserved second special symbols, and the eighth random value. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-10, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "prize command for the big prize slot."

If it is determined in S6531-10 that the command is a "prize command for the large prize slot", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S6531-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "prize command for the large prize slot", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S6531-20.

In S6531-11, the sub CPU 301 performs fan preview determination processing to determine the fan preview in the jackpot game state.

In the fan notice determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state for the first special symbol, and if it is not in a jackpot game state for the first special symbol, the fan notice determination process is terminated. Next, if the game is in a jackpot game state for the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols is the upper limit of two, and if the number of reserved second special symbols is not the upper limit of two, the fan notice determination process is terminated. Then, if the game is in a jackpot game state for the first special symbol and the number of reserved second special symbols is the upper limit of two, the fan notice determination table shown in FIG. 209 is referenced, and the fan notice performance pattern is determined based on the start information stored in the first special symbol start memory area, the start information stored in the second special symbol start memory area, and the ninth random number value. When this process is terminated, the sub-CPU 301 terminates the performance pattern determination process and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-20, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command."

If it is determined in S6531-20 that it is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-21. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-30.

In S6531-21, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process for determining the number of second-half icons to be used in the normal game state.

In the second half icon number determination process, the second half icon number determination table shown in FIG. 202 is referenced, and the second half icon number is determined based on the variable pattern command of the first special symbol and the second random number value. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-22.

In S6531-22, the sub CPU 301 performs symbol presentation pattern determination processing to determine a symbol presentation pattern. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-23.

In the symbol presentation pattern determination process, the game state is first referenced, and if it is a normal game state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 200 is determined, and if it is a right-hand play state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 201 is determined.

When the symbol production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 200 is determined, the determined symbol production pattern determination table shown in FIG. Based on the command and the number of second half icons determined in S6531-21 above, a pre-reach performance pattern and a reach performance pattern are determined. Further, if it is a normal game state and the variable pattern command is the second special symbol, a standby performance pattern is determined.

In addition, in the normal game state, when a reach effect pattern is determined, the support icon display scenario determination table shown in FIG. 207 is referenced, and the support icon display scenario is determined based on the reach effect pattern and the number of second half icons determined in S6531-21 above.

When the symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 201 is determined, the symbol presentation pattern is determined based on the special symbol variation pattern command and the first random number value by referring to the determined symbol presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 201.

In S6531-23, the sub CPU 301 performs other preview performance pattern determination processing to determine a dialogue preview and a button challenge preview. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In addition, in the dialogue announcement in the announcement performance pattern determination process, in order to suggest the possibility of a jackpot based on the character's dialogue displayed, a dialogue announcement determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol and a predetermined Based on the selection rate (10th random number, etc.), a dialogue preview performance pattern is determined.

In addition, in the button challenge preview in the other preview performance pattern determination process, first, the first half icon display scenario determined in S6531-5 above is referred to, and the number of character icons to be displayed in the button challenge preview according to the first half icon display scenario. If so, a first button challenge preview performance pattern in which the number of character icons to be displayed is displayed is determined. In this first button challenge preview production pattern, the number of character icons displayed is displayed as the player operates the production button device 6310 multiple times, but if the player does not operate the production button device 6310 Even in this case, the number of character icons to be displayed is displayed after the reception time of the production button device 6310 ends.

On the other hand, in the button challenge preview in the other preview performance pattern determination process, if there is no number of character icons displayed in the button challenge preview due to the first half icon display scenario, the character icon indicating the expected level of jackpot and the content of the developing reach will not be displayed. The second button challenge preview production pattern is created based on the variation pattern command of the first special symbol and a predetermined selection rate (11th random value, etc.) so that it can be displayed with reference to a button challenge preview determination table (not shown). Determine. In this second button challenge preview performance pattern, character icons are displayed as the player operates the performance button device 6310 multiple times. In addition, in the second button challenge preview performance pattern, if the player does not operate the performance button device 6310, the text icon is not displayed, but after the reception time for the performance button ends, the text icon is displayed. You can do it like this.

In S6531-30, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "symbol designation command."

If it is determined in S6531-30 that the command is a "designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-40.

In S6531-31, the sub-CPU 301 performs a decorative symbol determination process to determine the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed according to the type of symbol designation command. In addition, if the type of symbol designation command is a command corresponding to a jackpot symbol, the number of jackpot rounds data is set. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern determination process, and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-40, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol production stop command".

If it is determined in S6531-40 that it is a "special symbol production stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-41. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol production stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-50.

In S6531-41, the sub-CPU 301 performs a decorative pattern stopping process to stop and display the decorative pattern. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance pattern determination process and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-50, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot start display command".

If it is determined in S6531-50 that it is a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-60.

In S6531-51, the sub CPU 301 performs a jackpot performance determination process to determine a jackpot performance pattern for performing the jackpot performance. In this jackpot effect determination process, a jackpot effect pattern is determined according to the jackpot round number data set in S6531-31. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-60, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "game state designation command."

If it is determined in S6531-60 that the command is a "gaming state designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-61. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "gaming state designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S6531-70.

In S6531-61, the sub-CPU 301 performs a game state setting process to set the game state according to the type of game state designation command. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-62.

In S6531-62, the sub-CPU 301 performs a presentation mode determination process to determine the presentation mode.

In this production mode determination process, when the "high-accuracy time-saving game state" is set, "battle mode" is set as the production mode, and when the "high-precision non-time-saving game state" is set, the "golden hour mode" is set as the production mode, When in the "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state", the "dream mode" is set as the production mode. Furthermore, when in the "normal gaming state", the game alternately shifts between the "Western mode" and the "Eastern mode" based on a predetermined transition rate (12th random number, etc.). In addition, when in the "normal game state", the transition between "Western mode" and "Eastern mode" will be made based on a predetermined number of changes in the special symbol, not based on a predetermined transition rate (12th random number, etc.). It may be configured as follows. In addition, in the normal game state, the present invention is not limited to the two production modes of "Western mode" and "Eastern mode", but may be configured to allow transition to three or more production modes. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

In S6531-70, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "demonstration display command".

If it is determined in S6531-70 that the command is a "demo display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-71. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "demo display command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-73.

In S6531-71, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display effect pattern determination process to determine a demo display effect pattern for performing effects while the game is in standby. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S6531-72.

In S6531-73, the sub CPU 301 sets the effect button initialization button to instruct the button control circuit 310 to return the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 to the first operation mode (see FIG. 172(a)) as the initial operation mode. Perform conversion processing. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

The production button initialization process is configured to be performed when a "demonstration display command" is received, but in addition to this, at least a "special symbol winning command" and a "special symbol fluctuation pattern command" are executed. , "Special symbol production stop command" or "Jackpot start display command" may also be configured to be performed when any one of the commands is received.

The effect button initialization process may also be configured to be performed according to the current game state and various commands. For example, the effect button initialization process is performed regardless of the game state when a "demo display command" is received, but may also be configured to be performed when any of the following commands is received in the normal game state: "special symbol winning command," "special symbol variation pattern command," or "special symbol effect stop command." In particular, since the average variation time of special symbols and the frequency of operation of the effect button device 6310 differ depending on the game state, the effect button device 6310 can be initialized taking into account the game state.

In S6531-13, the sub CPU 301 also determines performance patterns according to various commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the effect pattern determination process and shifts the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 211).

[8-10. Performance contents]
Regarding the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, etc., an example of the effect content of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described.

(Normal display image)
First, the normal display images of the "West Army Mode" and the "East Army Mode" in the normal game state will be described. Fig. 214 shows an example of the normal display images of the West Army Mode and the East Army Mode in the normal game state of the sixth pachinko game machine, Fig. 214(a) shows an example of the normal display image of the West Army Mode in the normal game state, and Fig. 214(b) shows an example of the normal display image of the East Army Mode in the normal game state.

As described above with reference to FIG. 173, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the effect section 6116, which is an annular structure, is arranged on the front side of the display area of the display device 7, and inside the effect section 6116. , an upper display area 7a is formed as a display area of the display device 7. Various icons, characters, etc., which will be described later, are displayed in this upper display area 7a.

As shown in FIG. 214(a), in the normal display image of the Western Army mode in the normal game state, the left side of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed on the center side of the display area of the display device 7 as the main symbol. A pattern 6071L, a middle pattern 6071C, and a right pattern 6071R are configured to be displayable. Also, in the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-symbol 6071A as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, and a second sub-symbol 6071A as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern. The sub-symbol 6072A is configured to be small and displayable. In the normal gaming state, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed, the left symbol 6071L, middle symbol 6071C, right symbol 6071R, and first sub-symbol 6071A are variablely displayed, but the second special symbol is When variable display is performed, only the second sub-symbol 6072A is variable displayed.

In addition, in the normal display image of the Western army mode, the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, and the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed according to the number of reserved first special symbols. Special 1 first pending image 6072a showing that starting information is stored in the special symbol starting storage area (1), Special 1 showing that starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2) Second pending image 6072b, special first third pending image 6072c indicating that starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (3), starting information is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (4) A special first and fourth pending image 6072d is configured to be displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, although the number of reserved second special symbols is not displayed, numbers etc. that display the number of reserved second special symbols are also configured to be displayable.

In the normal display image in the Western Army mode, a Western Army icon display area 6074L is formed on the left side of the display area of the display device 7 to indicate that a character icon is displayed. The Western Army icon display area 6074L displays an icon A display image 6074a indicating that character icon A (for example, General A of the Western Army participates in the war), and a character icon B (for example, General B of the Western Army participates in the war). An icon B display image 6074b indicating that character icon C (for example, Western Army General C participating in the war), an icon C display image 6074c indicating that character icon C (for example, Western Army General D participating in the war), and character icon D (for example, Western Army General D participating in the war) were displayed. An icon D display image 6074d indicating that a character icon E (for example, General E of the Western Army participating in the war) is displayed is configured to be displayable. As will be described in detail later, when each character icon is displayed, the icon display image of the Western army icon display section 6074L corresponding to that character icon is displayed in a lit state.

As shown in FIG. 214(b), in the normal display image of the East team mode in the normal game state, the left pattern 6071L, the middle pattern 6071C, the right pattern 6071R, the first sub-pattern 6071A, the second sub-pattern 6072A, the first reserved image of special 1 6072a, the second reserved image of special 1 6072b, the third reserved image of special 1 6072c, and the fourth reserved image of special 1 6072d can be displayed, just like in the West team mode.

In the normal display image in the East Army mode, an East Army icon display area 6074R is formed on the right side of the display area of the display device 7 to indicate that a character icon is displayed. This Eastern Army icon display area 6074R includes an icon F display image 6074f indicating that a character icon F (for example, Eastern Army General F participates in the war) is displayed, and a character icon G (for example, Eastern Army General G participates in the war). An icon G display image 6074g indicating that a character icon H (for example, General H of the Eastern Army participates in the war) is displayed, an icon H display image 6074h indicating that a character icon H (for example, General H of the Eastern Army participates in the war), and a character icon I (for example, General I of the Eastern Army participates in the war) are displayed. An icon I display image 6074i indicating that a character icon J (for example, General J of the Eastern Army participating in the war) is displayed is configured to be displayable. As will be described in detail later, when each character icon is displayed, the icon display image of the Eastern Army icon display section 6074R corresponding to that character icon is displayed in a lit state.

In this embodiment, in the Western Army mode in the normal game state, the character icons A to E correspond to the above-mentioned "first half icons", and the icon display image lit and displayed in the Western Army icon display section 6074L. The number corresponds to the "first half icon number" described above. In addition, in the Togun mode in the normal game state, the character icons F to J correspond to the "first half icons", and the number of icon display images lit and displayed in the Togun icon display section 6074R is the same as described above. This corresponds to the "number of icons in the first half".

In this embodiment, the Western army icon display section 6074L and the East army icon display section 6074R are configured using the display device 7 as predetermined display images, but LEDs for effect that can individually light up multiple locations are used. A display device may be provided separately, and an LED display device for presentation may be used.

(Cherry Blossom Accumulation Announcement Production)
Next, the effect of the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" will be described. Figures 215 and 216 are examples of display images for explaining the effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

In the explanation of the effect of the cherry blossom accumulation notice, the reference numerals shown in FIG. 214 are omitted because the characters are small and lack visibility, and may interfere with the explanation of the effect. Further, illustration of the first sub-symbol 6071A and the second sub-symbol 6072A, which are displayed extremely small, will also be omitted. This also applies to the effects described in FIGS. 217 to 227.

Using Figures 215 and 216, a staged effect of accumulating cherry blossoms in stages is carried out in two stages: a preliminary change and the start of the change, and a cherry blossom accumulation that displays "two character icons" in the change. 2-stage notice - A cherry blossom accumulation notice corresponding to the YK7 notice performance pattern (see Figure 206), or a staged display that accumulates cherry blossoms in stages, is performed in two stages: advance fluctuation and the start of fluctuation of the fluctuation. An example of the performance of the cherry blossom accumulation notice corresponding to the YK24 notice performance pattern (see FIG. 206) will be described.

FIG. 215(a) is an example of a display image when the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state when the number of reserved first special symbols is two. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 215(a), none of the icon display images are lit and displayed in the Western Army icon display section.

Figure 215(b) is an example of a display image when the display of the decorative pattern begins as a pre-change from the state of Figure 215(a). As shown in Figure 215(b), when the display of the decorative pattern begins, at the start of the pre-change, a display image is produced in which cherry blossoms dance across the entire display area of the display device 7, and the cherry blossoms are drawn into the upper display area 7a.

Figure 215(c) is an example of a display image when cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a from the state of Figure 215(b) and the decorative pattern is displayed stationary. As shown in Figure 215(c), when cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a, a one-stage accumulation image indicating that cherry blossoms have accumulated one stage is displayed in the upper display area 7a, and then the decorative pattern is displayed stationary. Note that in the case of a cherry blossom accumulation notice (cherry blossom accumulation 0-stage notice - YK0) in which cherry blossoms attempt to be sucked into the upper display area 7a but fail to accumulate the cherry blossoms, the one-stage accumulation image will not be displayed in the upper display area 7a.

FIG. 215(d) is an example of a display image when variable display of decorative symbols is started in the state shown in FIG. 215(c) or as the variation. As shown in FIG. 215(d), when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, cherry blossoms dance over the entire display area of the display device 7, and the cherry blossoms are sucked into the upper display area 7a. The desired display image will be produced.

FIG. 216(e) is an example of a display image when cherry blossoms are drawn into the upper display area 7a from the state shown in FIG. 215(d). As shown in FIG. 216(e), when cherry blossoms are newly drawn into the upper display area 7a, a two-stage accumulation image indicating that two levels of cherry blossoms have been accumulated is displayed in the upper display area 7a.

Figure 216 (f) is an example of a display image when character icon A (for example, Western Army General A joins the battle) is displayed due to a button challenge notice or the like from the state of Figure 216 (e). As shown in Figure 216 (f), when character icon A (for example, Western Army General A joins the battle) is displayed due to a button challenge notice or the like different from the cherry blossom accumulation notice, the icon A display image is lit up in the Western Army icon display section, and a two-stage accumulation image and "1-person concentrated" are displayed in the upper display area 7a as a text image indicating the number of character icons.

Figure 216 (g) is an example of a display image when the cherry blossoms stored in the upper display area 7a are released. As shown in Figure 216 (g), at a specific timing, such as before a reach, the cherry blossoms stored in the upper display area 7a are released, and the entire display area is displayed as if they are covered with cherry blossoms. Note that the timing at which the cherry blossoms stored in the upper display area 7a are released can be freely designed and modified as appropriate.

FIG. 216 (h-1) is an example of a display image when a "yakuza icon" is displayed after the cherry blossoms are released, indicating that the path will lead to the ultimate battle. As shown in Figure 216 (h-1), in the case of Sakura Accumulation 2nd Stage Notice - YK24, when the released cherry blossoms disappear, the "yakuza icon" indicating that the path will progress to the ultimate battle will be displayed. Is displayed. After that, the road to the ultimate battle will be staged.

FIG. 216 (h-2) is an example of a display image when two character icons are displayed after the cherry blossoms are released. As shown in Figure 216 (h-2), in the case of cherry blossom accumulation stage 2 notice - YK7, when the released cherry blossoms disappear, character icon B (for example, General B of the Western Army joins the war) and character icon C ( For example, two character icons for Western Army General C (participating in the war) are displayed. Then, the icon B display image and the icon C display image are lit and displayed in the western army icon display section, and "3 people gathering" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a character image indicating the number of character icons.

Note that in Figures 215 and 216, an example of the presentation of the Cherry Blossom Accumulation Notice corresponding to the notice presentation patterns of Cherry Blossom Accumulation 2-Stage Notice-YK7 and Cherry Blossom Accumulation 2-Stage Notice-YK24 is explained, but the same applies to other notice presentation patterns of the Cherry Blossom Accumulation Notice (see Figure 206).

In this way, the cherry blossom accumulation preview of this embodiment gradually improves the anticipation of the game by developing the stage effect over the advance change and the change (or only with the change), and the display It is possible to arouse interest in the results and further improve the interest in the game.

(Pseudo continuous performance)
Next, the performance of the "pseudo continuous performance" will be explained. FIGS. 217 to 219 are examples of display images for explaining the pseudo-continuous performance in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using Figures 217 to 219, two pseudo-continuous performances are performed, and five character icons are displayed, which corresponds to the first half icon display scenarios A38 and A39 (see Figure 204), which progress to the decisive battle. An example of pseudo-continuous performance will be explained. Furthermore, the display order of the character icons in the pseudo-continuous effect explained using FIGS. 217 to 219 is based on the first half set order scenario 5-1 (see FIG. 205) corresponding to the display order pattern 1.

FIG. 217(a) is an example of a display image when all the decorative symbols, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, are displayed in a variable manner. As shown in FIG. 217(a), the icon A display image and the icon B display image of the Western Army icon display section are lit up, and "2 people are gathering" is displayed as a character image indicating the number of character icons in the upper display area 7a. Displayed.

Figure 217 (b) is an example of a display image when the left pattern is displayed as a provisional stop, and then the right pattern is also displayed as a provisional stop.

FIG. 217(c) is an example of a display image when the right symbol, which has been temporarily stopped and displayed, starts variable display again (right symbol sliding) from the state of FIG. 217(b).

FIG. 217(d) is an example of a display image when a first pseudo continuous stimulation effect is performed to determine whether or not a predetermined character icon stops at the position of the middle symbol. As shown in Figure 217(d), when the right symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, a display indicating whether or not "Character Icon C (Western Army General C Participates in War)" will be displayed is displayed at the center symbol. It will be done.

Figure 218 (e) is an example of a display image when a specified character icon stops at the center pattern position and the first pseudo consecutive promotion performance is successful. As shown in Figure 218 (e), when the pseudo consecutive promotion performance is successful and "character icon C (Western Army General C joins the battle)" stops at the center pattern position, the icon C display image is lit up in the Western Army icon display section, and "3 people united" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a text image indicating the number of character icons.

In addition, if the first pseudo-continuation incitement effect fails, "Character icon C (Western army general C participation)" will be erased, the right symbol will temporarily stop displaying a different type of symbol from the left symbol, and then all The decorative pattern will stop displaying and it will be a "lose".

FIG. 218(f) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon is stopped at the position of the middle symbol and the first pseudo continuous effect is being performed. As shown in FIG. 218(f), "Pseudo x 1 time" indicating the first pseudo continuous effect is displayed as the first pseudo continuous effect, and all the decorations of the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed. The symbols start to be displayed in a variable manner.

FIG. 218(g) is an example of a display image when the second pseudo-coupling effect is being performed. As shown in FIG. 218(g), when the left symbol is temporarily stopped, "Character icon D (General D of the Western Army participates in the war)" and "Character icon E (General E of the Western Army participates in the war)" appear at the position of the middle symbol. ” will be displayed to indicate whether or not to stop.

Figure 218 (h) is an example of a display image when a specified character icon stops at the position of the middle pattern and the second pseudo consecutive teasing performance is successful. As shown in Figure 218 (h), when "character icon D (Western Army General D joins the battle)" and "character icon E (Western Army General E joins the battle)" stop at the position of the middle pattern, the icon D display image and the icon E display image are lit up and displayed in the Western Army icon display section, and "5 people concentrated" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a text image indicating the number of character icons.

Also, when the second pseudo-coupling effect fails, "Character icon D (Western Army General D participates in the war)" and "Character icon E (Western Army General E participates in the war)" are deleted, and the right symbol is the same as the left symbol. A temporary stop will be displayed with the symbol, and a normal reach will be performed.

Figure 219(i) is an example of a display image when a specific character icon stops at the position of the center symbol and the second pseudo consecutive performance is being performed. As shown in Figure 219(i), for the second pseudo consecutive performance, "PSUI x 2 times" is displayed to indicate the second pseudo consecutive performance, and all decorative symbols of the left, center, and right symbols start to change in display.

Figure 219 (j) is an example of a display image when all icon display images are lit in the Western Army icon display section and a "path icon" is displayed indicating development to the path to the decisive battle. As shown in Figure 219 (j), after the second pseudo consecutive performance starts, as all icon display images are lit in the Western Army icon display section, a "path icon" is displayed indicating development to the path to the decisive battle. After that, the performance of the path to the decisive battle will be carried out.

Note that in Figures 217 to 219, an example of pseudo consecutive performances corresponding to the first half icon display scenario A38 or A39 and the first half set sequence scenario 5-1 has been described, but the same applies to pseudo consecutive performances corresponding to other first half icon display scenarios (see Figure 204) and other first half set sequence scenarios (see Figure 205).

In this way, the pseudo consecutive presentation of this embodiment adds new interest not only in whether or not a re-change will occur, but also in the number of character icons displayed during a re-change, the type of character icons, and the order in which the character icons are displayed, thereby making the game even more interesting.

(Direction of the road to the final battle)
Next, the effect of "Road to the Final Battle" will be described. Figures 220 and 221 are examples of display images for explaining the effect of "Road to the Final Battle" in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using Figures 220 and 221, we will explain an example of the presentation of the path to the decisive battle that develops from the Western Army mode, and corresponds to pre-reach presentation patterns 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, and 30 (see Figure 200), in which eight character icons are displayed and the path develops into a showdown reach.

Here, the Road to the Final Battle is an effect in which the player operates the effect button device 6310 a first number of times before a predetermined time has elapsed, aiming to collect 10 character icons, and an "operation effect time" is set in which the effect button device 6310 can be operated a first number of times. In this embodiment, the "operation effect time of the Road to the Final Battle" is set to 20 seconds so that the effect button device 6310 can be operated five times as the first number of operations, with one set (4 seconds) consisting of a 3-second reception time for the effect button device 6310 and a 1-second display time for displaying a predetermined icon based on the operation result. The operation effect time of the Road to the Final Battle and the configuration of the reception time for the effect button device 6310 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 228.

As shown in FIGS. 220 and 221, in the production of the road to the decisive battle that is developed from the Western Army mode, it is assumed that all icon display images in the Western Army icon display area are lit. Therefore, near the Western Army icon display section, a text image of "Western Army Unite" is displayed, indicating that all the icon display images of the Western Army icon display section are lit. Furthermore, in the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a ``countdown display image'' is displayed that counts down the number of seconds until the ``operation performance time of the road to the decisive battle'' ends. In this embodiment, the "countdown display image" indicates the maximum number of operations of the production button device 6310 (see FIG. 228); A number image indicating the number of operations may be displayed.

Fig. 220(a) is an example of a display image when it is possible to operate the effect button device 6310 for the first time. As shown in Fig. 220(a), when it is possible to operate the effect button device 6310, an effect button image is displayed to encourage the player to operate the effect button device 6310, and a gauge image is displayed below the effect button image, indicating the reception time of the effect button device 6310. This is also the case in the Road to Extreme Showdown performance.

FIG. 220(b) is an example in which "Character icon H (Eastern Army General H participates in war)" is displayed as a predetermined icon when the production button device 6310 is operated for the first time. As shown in FIG. 220(b), when the "Character icon H (Eastern Army General H participates in war)" is displayed, the icon H display image is illuminated in the Eastern Army icon display area, and the character icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a. "6 people gathered" is displayed as a character image indicating the number.

FIG. 220(c) is an example of a display image when the second operation of the production button device 6310 is possible.

Figure 220 (d) is an example of a display image when the effect button device 6310 is operated a second time and "Approaching?!" is displayed as the specified icon. This "Approaching?!" icon is an icon that corresponds to a miss, where no character icon is displayed, and the icons displayed are adjusted based on the selection rate, scenario, etc. so that a predetermined number of character icons are ultimately displayed.

Figure 221 (e) is an example of a display image when the third and fourth operations of the performance button device 6310 have been completed and it is possible to perform the fifth (final) operation of the performance button device 6310.

FIG. 221(f) is an example of a display image when a predetermined icon is displayed when the production button device 6310 is operated for the fifth time (last time). As shown in FIG. 221(f), when "Character icon G (Eastern Army General G participates in the war)" and "Character icon F (Eastern Army General F participates in the war)" are displayed as predetermined icons, the East Army icon display area The icon G display image and the icon F display image are displayed with lighting, and "8 people gathered" is displayed as a character image indicating the number of character icons in the upper display area 7a.

FIG. 221(g) is an example of a display image when the countdown display image reaches zero and the final number of character icons is displayed.

Figure 221 (h) is an example of a display image when, after the final number of character icons is displayed, a text image is displayed indicating that the game will progress to a showdown reach. Here, in the showdown reach, a performance is performed using the displayed character icons, so as shown in Figure 221 (h) the text image indicating the number of character icons continues to be displayed in the upper display area 7a. After the display shown in Figure 221 (h) is performed, the showdown reach performance will take place.

Note that in Figures 220 and 221, an example of the path to the decisive battle that develops from the Western Army mode and corresponds to pre-reach performance patterns 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27, and 30 is described, but the same applies to the path to the decisive battle that develops from the Eastern Army mode and other pre-reach performance patterns that involve the path to the decisive battle (see Figure 200).

In this way, the performance of the road to the decisive battle of this embodiment is a performance in which the player aims to collect 10 character icons by operating the performance button device 6310 by the end of a predetermined time, and the player It is possible to encourage the players to actively participate in the game, thereby further increasing the interest in the game.

(Direction of the road to the ultimate showdown)
Next, the effects of "The Road to the Ultimate Showdown" will be described. Fig. 222 is an example of a display image for explaining the effects of "The Road to the Ultimate Showdown" in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 222 shows an example of the presentation of the path to the ultimate showdown that develops from the Western Army mode, and corresponds to pre-reach presentation pattern 32 (see Figure 200) in which 10 character icons are displayed and the path develops into the ultimate showdown reach.

Here, the path to the ultimate battle is a specific performance similar to the path to the decisive battle, and the player is made to operate the performance button device 6310 a second number of times until the predetermined time period ends. This is a performance aimed at collecting character icons, and an "operation performance time" is set during which the performance button device 6310 can be operated a second number of times. In this embodiment, one set (4 seconds) includes a reception time of 3 seconds for the production button device 6310 and a display time of 1 second for displaying a predetermined icon according to the operation result, and the second operation is performed more often than the first operation. The "operation performance time for the road to the ultimate battle" is set to 40 seconds so that the performance button device 6310 can be operated 10 times.

As shown in FIG. 222, in the performance of the road to the ultimate battle developed from the Western army mode, the "operation performance time of the road to the ultimate battle" is displayed at the lower left of the display area of the display device 7. A "countdown display image" is displayed that counts down the number of seconds until the end. In addition, in this embodiment, the "countdown display image" suggests the maximum number of operations of the production button device 6310, but instead of the countdown display image, the "countdown display image" indicates the maximum number of operations of the production button device 6310. Images may also be displayed.

Figure 222(a) is an example of a display image when it is possible to perform the first operation of the performance button device 6310. At the start of the performance of the Road to the Extreme Battle, the icon display image displayed as lit continues to be displayed in the Western Army icon display section until the performance of the Road to the Extreme Battle begins. In Figure 222(a), character icon A is already displayed by the time the performance of the Road to the Extreme Battle begins, and the icon A display image continues to be displayed as lit in the Western Army icon display section.

FIG. 222(b) is an example of a display image when a predetermined character icon D is displayed when the production button device 6310 is operated for the first time. As shown in FIG. 222(b), when "Character icon D (Western army general D participates in war)" and "Character icon H (Western army general H participates in war)" are displayed as predetermined icons, the Western army icon display area The icon D display image of and the icon H display image of the Eastern Army icon display section are lit up, and "3 people gathered" is displayed in the upper display area 7a as a character image indicating the number of character icons.

FIG. 222(c) is an example of a display image when the tenth operation of the production button device 6310 is completed, the countdown display image becomes zero, and the final number of character icons is displayed. In FIG. 222(c), all the icon display images in the Western Army icon display area and the East Army icon display area are lit and displayed.

FIG. 222(d) is an example of a display image when, after the final number of character icons is displayed, a character image indicating that the game will develop into a big decisive battle reach is displayed. At this time, the character image indicating the number of character icons displayed in the upper display area 7a is erased. After the display shown in FIG. 222(d) is performed, a big decisive battle reach effect will be performed.

In addition, in FIG. 222, there is a pre-reach performance pattern 32 in which 10 character icons are displayed and progresses to the great decisive battle, which is a production of the road to the final battle that is developed from the western army mode. We have explained an example of the corresponding path to the final battle, but we also recommend the path to the ultimate battle developed from the East Army mode, and other pre-reach performance patterns for the path to the great decisive battle (Figure 200). The same applies to (see).

In this embodiment, in the Road to the Final Battle performance or the Road to the Ultimate Final Battle performance, the number of icon display images that are lit up in the Western Army icon display section and the Eastern Army icon display section corresponds to the "second half icon count" described above.

(The showdown reach production)
Next, the effects of the "showdown reach" will be described. Figures 223 and 224 are examples of display images for explaining the effects of the showdown reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Examples of performances corresponding to reach performance patterns 4, 6, 12, and 14 (see FIG. 200) in which a confrontation reach is performed after eight character icons are displayed will be described using FIGS. 223 and 224.

Figure 223 (a) is an example of a display image when a showdown reach begins. As shown in Figure 223 (a) (and Figure 221 (h)), a text image indicating the number of character icons displayed in the Road to the Final Battle and Road to the Ultimate Showdown performances is continuously displayed in the upper display area 7a.

FIG. 223(b) is an example of a display image when the number of character icons displayed in the upper display area 7a is converted to the number of support icons displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display device 7. . It should be noted that the decorative pattern is moved and displayed in a small manner to the lower right of the display area of the display device 7 so as not to spoil the presentation of the character.

Figure 223 (b) is an example of a display image when the number of character icons is converted and displayed as the number of support icons. As shown in Figure 223 (b), a display image is produced in which "8 people concentrated" is displayed as a text image indicating eight character icons in the upper display area 7a, which is converted and displayed as "Support x 8" as the number of support icons. Note that if "9 people concentrated" is displayed as a text image indicating nine character icons in the upper display area 7a, a display image is produced in which the number of support icons is converted and displayed as "Support x 9".

Figure 223 (c) is an example of the display image when an enemy character appears, following on from Figure 223 (b), when the eight character icons are converted and displayed as eight support icons.

FIG. 223(d) is an example of a display image when a friendly character is confronting an enemy character, and is an example of a display image when a support icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a. As shown in FIG. 223(d), in the upper display area 7a, there is a character image of "PUSH" for prompting the player to operate the performance button device 6310, and a character image of "PUSH" for prompting the player to operate the effect button device 6310, and a character image that has already been displayed on the road to the decisive battle or the ultimate decisive battle. A support icon consisting of a face image (for example, the face of General A of the Western Army) corresponding to the displayed character icon is displayed.

FIG. 224(e) is a display image when an ally character is confronting an enemy character, when the effect button device 6310 is operated and a predetermined effect result is displayed in the upper display area 7a. This is an example of a display image. In FIG. 224(e), when the support icon is displayed in the upper display area 7a, the effect button device 6310 is operated, and the words "opportunity" are displayed as a predetermined effect result. Note that what is displayed as a predetermined performance result is not limited to "opportunity", but also "dialogue", "opportunity", "extreme heat", and "LED" based on the support icon display scenario (see Figure 207). ” or “Great Battle Icon” can be displayed.

Figure 224(f) shows an example of a display image when an ally character is facing off against an enemy character, and is displayed when the effect button device 6310 is operated and the "Great Battle Icon" is displayed in the upper display area 7a. After the display shown in Figure 224(f) is displayed, the effect of the Great Battle Reach is performed.

FIG. 224(g) is an example of a display image when the support icon disappears and the ally character confronts the enemy character and displays the final result. As shown in FIG. 224 (h-1), if the ally character wins, it becomes a jackpot, and as shown in FIG. 224 (h-2), if the ally character loses, it becomes a loss.

In addition, in FIGS. 223 and 224, examples of performances corresponding to reach performance patterns 4, 6, 12, and 14 in which a confrontation reach is performed have been described, but an example of a performance in which a confrontation reach is performed after nine character icons are displayed The same applies to the effects of other reach effect patterns (see FIG. 200).

In this way, the presentation of the showdown reach in this embodiment can be controlled based on the number of character icons collected up until the showdown reach is reached (the presentation of the road to the showdown or the road to the ultimate showdown), making the game even more interesting.

(Lotus flower preview performance)
Next, the effect of the "Lotus Flower Notice" will be described. Figure 225 is an example of a display image for explaining the effect of the Lotus Flower Notice in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

An example of presentation of a lotus flower notice corresponding to the notice presentation pattern of a success notice of a lotus flower (see FIG. 208) will be described with reference to FIG. 225.

FIG. 225(a) is an example of a display image when a bud is displayed in advance variation in the "golden hour mode" which is a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 225(a), in the "Golden Hour Mode" which is a high-precision non-time-saving gaming state, the character image "Golden Hour" indicating the Golden Hour mode and the A count display image "beads" that cumulatively counts the number of game balls that enter the first prize opening 6131 and the second prize winning opening 6151 and are paid out, and an operation instruction image "beads" for making a right-handed hit. "Right-handed" is displayed.

Figure 225 (b) is an example of a display image when the pre-change has ended but the bud continues to be displayed. In addition, the bud that has continued to be displayed since the pre-change will continue to be displayed when the change in the current change begins.

Here, the buds that have been continuously displayed since the pre-change will continue to be displayed from the pre-change to the small win game state to that change, even if the pre-change corresponds to a small win. Therefore, in the lotus flower announcement presentation of this embodiment, the small win game state that is likely to be entered when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140 allows the player to continue enjoying the lotus flower announcement without interrupting the presentation.

Figure 225(c) is an example of a display image when the bud opens and is displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started. The opening of this bud suggests that it will progress to the "door opening effect" shown in Figure 225(d).

Note that in Figure 225, an example of a lotus flower announcement performance corresponding to the preview performance pattern of a lotus flower success announcement is explained, but the same applies to the lotus flower announcement performance corresponding to the preview performance pattern of a lotus flower failure announcement (see Figure 208).

(Battle Reach Production)
Next, the effects of the "battle reach" will be described. Figures 226 and 227 are examples of display images for explaining the effects of the battle reach in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

Using FIGS. 226 and 227, the final operation mode of the production button device 6310 changes to the fourth operation mode or the fifth operation mode in the first symbol production patterns 3, 4, 8, and 9 (see FIG. 201). An example of the corresponding battle reach performance will be explained.

Figure 226 (a) is an example of a display image of a button promotion chance effect that is performed when a battle reach is started. In a battle reach, it is possible to perform a button promotion chance effect first.

As shown in FIG. 226(a), above the display area of the display device 7, "button operation icons" indicating the operation mode of the production button device 6310 are scrolled from left to right. Further, in the center of the display area of the display device 7, a “performance button state image” indicating the current state of the operation mode of the performance button device 6310 is displayed.

Figure 226 (b) is an example of a display image when the button operation icon is frozen and the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 changes.

As shown in FIG. 226(b), the upper display area 7a displays a frozen button operation icon for "Level 3 consecutive hits," which indicates the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310. Correspondingly, a change is made to the effect button state image displayed in the center of the display area of the display device 7, which indicates the state of the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310.

Figure 226(c) is an example of a display image when an ally character is facing off against an enemy boss.

As shown in FIG. 226(c), the upper display area 7a continuously displays the button operation icon for "Level 3 consecutive hits," which indicates the third operation mode of the effect button device 6310.

FIG. 226(d) is an example of a display image when an attack of an ally character hits an enemy boss.

As shown in FIG. 226(d), when the attack of an ally character hits the enemy boss, the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a rises by one level, indicating the fourth operation mode of the production button device 6310. The button operation icon changes to "Lv4 One-Blow" and is displayed. Note that if the attack of the ally character does not hit the enemy boss or the enemy boss attacks the ally character, the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a does not change.

Figure 227 (e) is an example of a display image when the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 changes, following Figure 226 (d).

As shown in FIG. 226(e), since the button operation icon displayed in the upper display area 7a has changed to the button operation icon for "Lv4 blow", the production button is displayed in the center of the display area of the display device 7. The effect button state image indicating the state of the fourth operation mode of the device 6310 is changed and displayed.

FIG. 227 (f-1) shows a case where the confrontation between the friendly character and the enemy boss is repeated and the operation mode of the production button device 6310 finally becomes the fourth operation mode, and the player operates the production button device 6310. This is an example of a display image.

Figure 227 (f-2) shows an example of a display image when the player operates the effect button device 6310 after repeated battles between an ally character and an enemy boss and the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 finally reaches the fifth operation mode.

Figure 227 (g-1) is an example of a display image in which the player operates the effect button device 6310 from the state of Figure 227 (f-1) or Figure 227 (f-1), causing the group of effect props 58 (see Figure 173) to fall (not shown), indicating a jackpot.

Figure 227 (g-2) is an example of a display image showing that when the player operates the effect button device 6310 from the state of Figure 227 (f-1) or Figure 227 (f-1), the group of effect props 58 (see Figure 173) does not fall (not shown), resulting in a miss.

Note that in Figures 226 and 227, an example of the battle reach presentation corresponding to first pattern presentation patterns 3, 4, 8, and 9 is explained, but the same applies to the battle reach presentation corresponding to first pattern presentation patterns 2 and 7 (see Figure 201).

In this way, the battle reach presentation of this embodiment changes the operation mode of the presentation button device 6310 depending on the result of the presentation content, so that the player can be aroused by the change in the operation mode of the presentation button device 6310 (growth of the presentation button) that he or she will now be directly operating, thereby making the game even more interesting.

[8-11. Configuration of operation performance time and reception time]
Next, an explanation will be given of the operation presentation time of the road to the decisive battle and the reception time of the presentation button device 6310. Fig. 228 is an example of a configuration diagram for explaining the configuration of the operation presentation time of the road to the decisive battle and the reception time of the presentation button device in the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 228(1) is a configuration diagram illustrating the configuration of the operation performance time of the road to the decisive battle.

As shown in FIG. 228 (1), the operation time of the button device 6310 once in the Road to the Final Battle performance is composed of 4 seconds, which is the sum of the 3 second reception time and the 1 second display time for displaying a specified icon depending on the operation result, and the "operation performance time of the Road to the Final Battle" is set to 20 seconds so that the button device 6310 can be operated 5 times. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 220 and FIG. 221, the "countdown display image" that counts down the number of seconds until the "operation performance time of the Road to the Final Battle" ends indicates the maximum number of times the button device 6310 can be operated. This is also true in the Road to the Extreme Final Battle performance, although the number of operations is different.

In addition, if the effect button device 6310 is operated within the reception time, a specified icon will continue to be displayed from the time of operation until the end of the display time, and if the effect button device 6310 is not operated within the reception time, the specified icon will be displayed from the end of the reception time until the end of the display time.

Regarding the production button device 6310, when the production button device 6310 is operated during such reception time, the reception time ends and a predetermined image is displayed (a predetermined production is performed) from the time of operation. The production is called a ``single operation production,'' and the same applies to the production of the road to the ultimate battle.

Figure 228 (2a) is a diagram explaining the configuration of the reception time for a single operation performance.

As shown in FIG. 228 (2a), the reception time of the effect button device 6310 for a single operation effect is set such that a first period (e.g., 3 frames, 3/60 seconds, etc.) immediately after the start of the reception time is set as a "start invalid period" during which the operation of the effect button device 6310 is judged to be invalid, a second period (e.g., 3 frames, 3/60 seconds, etc.) immediately before the end of the reception time is set as an "end invalid period" during which the operation of the effect button device 6310 is judged to be invalid, and the period from the "start invalid period" to the "end invalid period" is set as a "valid period" during which the operation of the effect button device 6310 is judged to be valid.

As shown in FIG. 228 (2b), the "start invalid period" and "end invalid period" may not be included in the reception time, and the period immediately before the start of the reception time may be set as the "start invalid period", or the period immediately after the end of the reception time may be set as the "end invalid period". In this case, the reception time directly corresponds to the "valid time".

In contrast to this, in the case of "repeated press operation effects (for example, button challenge announcements, door opening effects, battle reach when the operation mode of the effect button device 6310 finally reaches the third operation mode (Level 3 repeated presses), etc.)" in which the reception time does not end even if the effect button device 6310 is operated within the reception time, and the effect button device 6310 can be operated multiple times within the reception time, the configuration of the reception time is different.

FIG. 228(3) is a configuration diagram illustrating the configuration of the reception time for the continuous hit operation performance.

As shown in Figure 228 (3), the "start invalid period", "end invalid period", and "valid period (initial)" are set in the reception time of the multiple-hit operation performance, because the one-time operation performance is It is the same as the structure of reception hours.

Then, if the effect button device 6310 is operated within the "valid period (initial)", the sub-CPU 301 will set a new "invalid operation period" during which the operation of the effect button device 6310 will be determined to be invalid for a specified period of time after the operation.

This "operation invalid period" is set to a different period by the sub CPU 301 depending on the content of the performance triggered by the operation of the performance button device 6310. For example, when the performance progresses, the performance button device 6310 vibrates, and a third period (for example, 5 frames, 5/60 seconds, etc.) is set as the "operation invalid period". On the other hand, when the performance is not progressing, the performance button device 6310 does not vibrate, and a fourth period shorter than the third period (for example, 4 frames, 4/4 60 seconds, etc.) is set.

In this way, in the repeated press operation performance, different periods are set depending on the performance content triggered by the operation of the performance button device 6310, so that the performance content triggered by the operation of the performance button device 6310 can be performed reliably. be able to.

[8-12. Signals output to outside the machine]
Next, we will explain the signals output from the external terminal board 184 (see Figure 6) to outside the sixth pachinko game machine (for example, the hall computer 186 (see Figure 6), the island computer (not shown) provided on each island).

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 generates “external information 1” to “external information 8” in the gaming state specification parameter setting process, and sends the generated “external information 1” to “external information 8” to the external terminal board 184. It will be output. The external terminal board 184 (see FIG. 6) has CH1 to CH12 as connectors for outputting signals to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine, similarly to the first pachinko game machine. The signals output from each channel of the external terminal board 184 to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine include, for example, "prize ball information 1," "door/frame open," "external information 1" to "external information 8." ”, “Prize Ball Information 2” and “Security”. However, the types of signals output from each CH to the outside of the sixth pachinko game machine are not limited to these, and there may be signals output to the outside of the machine in addition to these signals, and these The configuration may be such that one of the signals is not output.

Figure 229 is a table showing an example of the output conditions of signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine. In the sixth pachinko gaming machine, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine (see Figure 65), various signals of "prize ball information 1", "door/frame open", "external information 1" to "external information 8", "prize ball information 2" and "security" are output to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine from each CH. However, compared to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sixth pachinko gaming machine differs in part in the output conditions of the "external information 3" signal output from CH3 of the connector. The output conditions of "external information 3" etc. are explained below.

As shown in FIG. 229, "external information 3" includes "outputting during all jackpots, during probability changes, and time saving" as well as "outputting during all jackpots, during probability changes, and during time saving", as well as "outputs when changes start during probability changes", as in the first pachinko machine. A new output condition has been added to "output until the end of the variation of the special symbol".

Here, in the "simultaneous variation machine" in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be variably displayed in parallel, a specific time-saving game state consisting of a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state, and a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state Although the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has started from the gaming state, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends, the game is started using the special symbol whose variable display has ended first. An error case may occur in which the state is shifted to the normal gaming state and a special symbol whose variable display ends later is determined to be a jackpot, loss, etc. in the normal gaming state. By adding the above-mentioned new output conditions to "External Information 3", the occurrence of the above error case has been eliminated, and in "simultaneous variation machine", the number of jackpots and the number of consecutive wins triggered by a specific gaming state etc. can be measured accurately. This will be specifically explained using a timing chart of the "external information 3" signal as an example.

FIG. 230 is an example of a timing chart of the "external information 3" signal among the signals output to the outside of the sixth pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 230 shows the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol, the output and stop of the external information 3, and the transition of the gaming state vertically.

As shown in FIG. 230, in the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state, which is one of the specific gaming states, the first special symbol starts variable display at the 119th rotation after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Thereafter, in the high-accuracy non-time-saving game state, the second special symbol starts variable display at the 120th rotation after the end of the jackpot game state.

The variable display of the second special symbol ends before the first special symbol, and the display is stopped. When this second special symbol is stopped, the gaming state shifts from the high-precision non-time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state.

The first special symbol is displayed variably in the high probability non-time-saving play state, but is displayed stationary in the normal play state.

Even if the game transitions from a high probability non-time-saving game state to a normal game state, external information 3 will continue to be output until the variable display of the first special symbol ends due to the new output condition of "outputting the special symbol that started to change during the high probability game state until that change ends."

As a result, even if a jackpot occurs with the first special symbol on the 119th spin, it can be counted as the number of jackpots triggered by a specific game state.

In this way, in the sixth pachinko game machine, as explained in FIG. 178 etc., the configuration of the game board unit (see FIG. 173), the lottery contents of the special symbols (see FIG. 175), the rules for transition to the game state (see FIG. 177), etc. are organically linked, so that at the end of all jackpot game states, the game transitions to a "(first half) high probability time-limited game state" where the expectation of consecutive jackpots is high, and when the high probability game state ends and the expectation of consecutive jackpots decreases, the game transitions to a "(second half) high probability non-time-limited game state: small jackpot rush", and in the "high probability non-time-limited game state: small jackpot rush" to which the game is transitioned, the player can expect the payout of game balls as well as the second special symbol jackpot, which guarantees transition to the next jackpot game state, creating unprecedented gameplay and improving the excitement of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko machine, as explained in FIG. 198 etc., when the yakuza icon is displayed by making a cherry blossom accumulation notice, it develops into a presentation of the road to the final battle, and a pseudo consecutive presentation is performed. When 5 character icons are collected by doing so, it will develop into a production of the road to the decisive battle. Then, when it develops into a production of the road to the final battle or a production of the road to the decisive battle, a specific production of the same type (a production aiming to collect 10 character icons) can be performed. Therefore, various performances can be associated with each other to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the 6th pachinko machine, the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" is a staged effect in which cherry blossoms are accumulated step by step, and the accumulated cherry blossoms are released and a predetermined number of "character icons" or "yakuza icons" are displayed. It consists of an icon display effect that displays. The stage presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executable over the advance variation and the variation, and the icon display presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation notice is configured to be executed during the variation. In addition, the staged presentation of the cherry blossom accumulation preview is set such that the more cherry blossoms accumulate, the more expected the ``yakuza icon'' will be displayed and the number of ``character icons'' displayed will increase.
For this reason, the "cherry blossom accumulation notice" of this embodiment gradually improves the anticipation of the game by developing the stage effect over the advance change and the change (or only with the change). It is possible to arouse interest in the displayed results and further improve the interest in the game.

In the sixth pachinko game machine, the "pseudo consecutive performance" is performed when any one of a plurality of character icons stops, and each time the pseudo consecutive performance is performed, it is possible to collect one or more character icons. When five character icons are collected, the performance progresses to the Road to the Final Battle. The content of the upcoming game is also suggested by the number of character icons collected, the type of character icons, the order in which the character icons are collected (display order), and the like.
For this reason, the "pseudo consecutive performance" of this embodiment adds new interest not only in whether or not a re-change occurs, but also in the number of character icons displayed during a re-change, the type of character icons, the display order of the character icons, etc., thereby making the game even more enjoyable.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko gaming machine, the "performance of the road to the decisive battle" and the "performance of the road to the ultimate decisive battle" are performed by the player operating the production button device 6310 until the predetermined time period ends. It is a performance where you can aim to collect character icons. Then, when 10 character icons are collected, it will develop into a big decisive battle reach with the highest expectation of jackpot. Further, it is also possible to suggest the content of the future game based on the number of character icons to be collected, the types of character icons, the order in which the character icons are collected (display order), and the like.
Therefore, the "performance of the road to the final battle" and "performance of the road to the final battle" of this embodiment encourage the player to actively participate in the game (operate the performance button device 6310), and make the game even more enjoyable. It is possible to improve the interest of children.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "Confrontation Reach" converts the character icons collected up until the Confrontation Reach (the Road to the Final Battle performance or the Road to the Ultimate Final Battle) into support icons, and a performance using the support icons can be performed by operating the performance button device 6310.
Therefore, in the "showdown reach" of this embodiment, operation effects can be performed using the icons collected up until the showdown reach, which can further increase the entertainment value of the game.

In addition, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "lotus flower notice" is configured to be executable throughout the pre-variation and the relevant variation, and even if the pre-variation is a variation corresponding to a small win, it is configured to be continuously displayed from the pre-variation through the small win game state to the relevant variation.
For this reason, in this embodiment of the invention, the "Lotus Flower Notice" allows the player to continue enjoying the Lotus Flower Notice without interrupting the presentation by entering a small win game state which is likely to occur when the game ball enters the second starting hole 6140.

Furthermore, in the sixth pachinko game machine, the "battle reach" is a performance in which the operation mode of the performance button device 6310 is changed depending on the result of the performance content.
For this reason, the "battle reach" of this embodiment arouses new interest in the change in the operation mode (growth of the production button) of the production button device 6310, which the player will directly operate from now on, and makes the game even more enjoyable. It is possible to improve the interest of children.

(others)
The sixth pachinko gaming machine described above can apply the techniques of each embodiment, including modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiment does not limit the contents of the present invention, and modifications can be made to the extent that they do not deviate from the scope of the claims.

Furthermore, the effects described in the sixth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. [Extended example] can be applied to the sixth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancy in its gameplay or control.

[9. The 7th Pachinko Game Machine]
Next, the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be described. The seventh pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a one-type two-type mixed machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine. The seventh pachinko gaming machine is different from the third pachinko gaming machine in terms of gameplay and presentation content, and accordingly, the configuration of various components arranged in the game area is also partially different.

The seventh pachinko gaming machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine, is a priority variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is established with priority over the start condition of the first special symbol. However, it is not limited to this, and may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

Hereinafter, in describing the seventh pachinko game machine, the same components as those of the first pachinko game machine will be given the same reference numerals and step numbers, and a detailed explanation of the configuration and processing will be omitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, a game ball is inserted into a ball entry hole (for example, a starting hole or a big prize hole) that can provide a predetermined profit (payout of game balls, transition of gaming state) to the player. ``Playing a ball'' is also referred to as ``winning'' as appropriate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "variable display" of a symbol includes, for example, both "variable display" in which the symbol is displayed while fluctuating, and "stop display" in which the symbol is displayed in a stopped state. This is a concept, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display."

[9-1. Game board unit]
A game board unit 7010 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 231. This game board unit 7010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 231 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 7010 included in the seventh pachinko game machine. The game board unit 7010 includes a game panel 7100 as a game board, various members are arranged on the game panel 7100, and on the front side of the game panel 7100, there is a game area 105 in which a fired game ball can roll and flow down. It is formed.

As shown in FIG. 231, compared to the first pachinko game machine, the game board unit 7010 included in the seventh pachinko game machine mainly has a passage gate 7126, a second starting port 7140, and a normal electric The configuration and arrangement of the accessory unit 7145, the first special electric accessory unit 7130, and the second special electric accessory unit 7150 are different. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

The first start hole 7120 located in the play area 105 of the seventh pachinko game machine is functionally the same as the first start hole 120 located in the play area 105 of the first pachinko game machine, but because of its relationship with the second start hole 7140, it will be explained again using a different reference number from that of the first pachinko game machine.

(passing gate)
The passage gate 7126 is arranged above the normal electric accessory unit 7145 described later in the right side area 107, and allows a game ball hit to the right to pass through (a game ball hit to the left has difficulty or cannot pass through). ing. The passage gate 7126 is equipped with a passage gate switch 7127 (see FIG. 232 described later) that detects passage of a game ball to the passage gate 7126.

When the game ball passes through the passage gate 7126, it is used for normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination process) and variable display of the normal symbol. In addition, in this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the passage gate 7126, a prize ball is not paid out, but a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) may be paid out.

Furthermore, the passage gate 7126 may function as a trigger for activating the accessory continuous activation device. On the premise that the condition device is operating (the special symbol that becomes a jackpot is stopped and displayed), when the game ball passes through the passage gate 7126, the accessory continuous operation device is activated, and a jackpot game state is established. It may also be possible to move to .

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 7120 is arranged in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and allows a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball, and a game ball hit to the right by a game nail or the like to enter the ball. Constructed to be difficult or impossible. The first starting port 7120 is equipped with a first starting port switch 7121 (see FIG. 232 described below) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 7120.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 7120, a first special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the first special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the first special symbol, and a prize ball for the first starting hole (e.g., three game balls) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the first starting hole 7120 will be described in detail later.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 7140 is located in the right side area 107 below (downstream) the passing gate 7126 described later, and is provided in a normal electric role unit 7145 described later, so that game balls hit to the right can enter the hole (game balls hit to the left are difficult or impossible to enter the hole). The second starting hole 7140 is provided with a second starting hole switch 7141 (see FIG. 232 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 7140.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the second starting port 7140 is arranged below (downstream side) the passage gate 7126, the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 7126 is connected to the normal electric accessories 7140, which will be described later. When the game ball is in operation, the game ball can enter the second starting port 7140.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, a second special symbol lottery (a process for determining whether the second special symbol is a winning symbol), a variable display of the second special symbol, and a prize ball for the second starting hole (for example, one game ball) are paid out. The process after the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140 will be described in detail later.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric role unit 7145 is located in the right area 107 below (downstream of) the passing gate 7126, and is located so that the game ball hit to the right can pass through it. The normal electric role unit 7145 is a unit body that integrates the second start hole 7140, the second start hole switch 7141 that detects the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 7140, and the normal electric role 7146.

The ordinary electric accessory 7146 includes a protruding plate-type ordinary electricity shutter 7147 that can be moved forward and backward, and a general electricity solenoid 7148 (see FIG. 232 described later) that operates the ordinary electricity shutter 7147. The normal electric accessory 7146, that is, the shutter 7147 for general electric power, has an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting port 7140 or is easy to enter, and an open state in which it is impossible or easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 7140. It is configured to be able to transition to a difficult closed state.

Specifically, the general-purpose power shutter 7147 includes a substantially triangular ball entry prevention portion disposed near the entrance of the second starting port 7140 and a flat ball entry guide portion inclined toward the second starting port 7140. It is made up of. When the general power shutter 7147 is in the closed state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention portion is located in a region facing the entrance of the second starting port 7140 and prevents the ball from entering the second starting port 7140. The flat plate-shaped entering ball guide portion is buried in the surface of the game panel 7100, and allows the game ball to flow downward without receiving the game ball flowing down to the right side area 107. On the other hand, when the general power shutter 7147 is in the open state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention part is located in an avoidance area that does not face the entrance of the second starting port 7140 and prevents the ball from entering the second starting port 7140. Without being obstructed, the flat plate-like entrance ball guide portion protrudes from the surface of the game panel 7100, receives the game balls flowing down to the right side area 107, and guides the received game balls to the second starting port 7140. Note that instead of the above-mentioned ordinary power shutter 7147 that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions, a movable member called a so-called electric chew may be employed.

In addition, when the normal electric accessory 7146 enters the prescribed number of normal electric game balls (for example, 1 ball) while the second starting port 7140 is in the open state, the open time has not elapsed. In both cases, the second starting port 7140 is closed.

(1st special electric accessory unit)
The first special electric accessory unit 7130 is arranged below (downstream) in the right side area 107 than the passage gate 7126, the normal electric accessory unit 7145, and the second special electric accessory unit 7150, which will be described later. Note that the first special electric accessory unit 7130 may be provided upstream of at least one of the passage gate 7126, the normal electric accessory unit 7145, and the second special electric accessory unit 7150, which will be described later. It may be provided in the left side area 106.

The first special electric accessory unit 7130 includes a first big winning hole 7131 and a first big winning hole count switch 7132 (see FIG. 232 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 7131. It is a unit body that integrates a first special electric shutter 7134 that can move forward and backward in the front and back direction, and a first special electric solenoid 7135 (see FIG. 232 described later) that operates the first special electric shutter 7134.

The first large prize opening 7131 is an opening that opens when a jackpot is hit, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the first large prize opening 7131 in one round of a jackpot is set (for example, 7 balls). Each time a ball enters the first large prize opening 7131, prize balls for the first large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The first big prize opening 7131 shifts from the closed state to the open state in the first route when a special stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a "jackpot" is derived. , the second grand prize opening 7151 is opened due to the derivation of a specific stop display mode indicating that the result of the special symbol determination is a "small win", and a game in which the player enters the opened second major prize opening 7151. This is the second route when the ball enters the V winning hole in the second big winning hole 7151.

The first special electric shutter 7134 has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first large prize opening 7131 by the operation of a first special electric solenoid 7135 (see FIG. 232 described later), and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the first large prize opening 7131. It is configured to be able to transition between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the winning hole 7131.

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 7134 is composed of an opening/closing door whose lower part is pivoted. When the first special electric shutter 7134 is in the open state, the opening/closing door falls to the front side, the first big prize opening 7131 opens, receives the game ball flowing down into the right side area 107, and transfers the received game ball to the first You will be guided to the 1st prize winning opening 7131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 7134 is in the closed state, the opening/closing door is inverted and closes the first big winning hole 7131, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 7131. Become.

(Second special electric feature unit)
The second special electric role unit 7150 is provided below (downstream) the passing gate 7126 and the normal electric role unit 7145 in the right area 107. The second special electric role unit 7150 may be provided upstream of at least one of the passing gate 7126 or the normal electric role unit 7145, or may be provided in the left area 106.

The second special electric accessory unit 7150 has a second grand prize opening 7151 that is opened so that a game ball can enter inside the second special electric accessory unit 7150, and a second special electric accessory unit 7150 that allows a game ball to enter the second special prize opening 7151. A second big prize opening count switch 7152 that detects the entry of a ball, a second special electric shutter 7154 that can open and close the second big winning hole 7151, and a second special electric shutter 7154 that operates the second special electric shutter 7154 to win the second big prize. A second special electric solenoid 7155 (see FIG. 232 described later) that opens and closes the winning opening 7151, a V winning opening 7156 through which the game ball that entered the second big winning opening 7151 can pass, and a game ball entering the V winning opening 7156. A V-winning port switch 7157 that detects passing, a losing port 7158 through which game balls that did not enter the V-winning port 7156 among the game balls that entered the second large winning port 7151 can pass, and a V-winning port 7156. It is a unit body that integrates a V shutter 7159 that opens and closes, and a V shutter solenoid 7160 (see FIG. 232 described later) that operates this V shutter 7159 to open and close the V winning opening 7156.

The second large prize opening 7151 is an opening that opens when a small win occurs, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the second large prize opening 7151 in one small win (for example, 10 balls) is specified. Each time one game ball enters this second large prize opening 7151, prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) for the second large prize opening are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 7154 is made of a protruding plate-shaped member that can move forward and backward, and is configured so that by operating the second special electric solenoid 7155 (see Figure 232 described below), the second special electric shutter 7154 can move forward to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 7151, and the second special electric shutter 7154 can move backward to an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 7151.

The V winning hole 7156 is a winning hole that can be opened and closed by the V shutter 7159, and is also a winning hole through which the game ball passes, triggering control of the jackpot game state via the second route described above.

When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, the opening of the second big winning hole 7151 when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 is the first round, and the game ball entering the V winning hole 7156 After passing (second round and thereafter), a round game is executed in which the first big prize opening 7131 is moved from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled via the second route, the second jackpot 7151 changes from the closed state to the open state even after the game ball passes through the V winning slot 7156 (after the second round). The transition round game may be executed over a predetermined number of rounds.

In addition, for example, a V entry port may be provided inside the first large entry port 7131, so that there is one V entry port and one attacker that is opened in the big win game state. In this case, when a stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived, the first large entry port 7131 is opened, and when a game ball enters the V entry port provided inside the first large entry port 7131, the game is controlled to the big win game state (the big win game state via the second route).

The losing hole 7158 is configured so that game balls that entered the second big winning hole 7151 but did not pass through the V winning hole 7156 enter (pass through). The game balls that have passed through the loss port 7158 are discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, if all of the game balls that entered the second big winning opening 7151 pass through the losing opening 7158 and no gaming balls pass through the V winning opening 7156, the game ends without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. becomes.

The V-shutter 7159 is configured to be able to transition between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for game balls to pass through the V-entry opening 7156, and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for game balls to pass through the V-entry opening 7156, by the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 7160 (see Figure 232 described below).

[9-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 232. Fig. 232 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 232, like the first pachinko game machine, the seventh pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300, a payout/emission control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the seventh pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine in some respects in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300. The configuration and layout of each are explained below.

[9-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 has a general electric solenoid 7148, a first special electric solenoid 7135, a second special electric solenoid 7155, and a V-shutter solenoid 7160 connected to the main control circuit 200, compared to the first pachinko gaming machine. , the configurations of the first starting port switch 7121, the second starting port switch 7141, the passing gate switch 7127, the first big winning port count switch 7132, the second big winning port counting switch 7152, and the V winning port switch 7157 are partially different. There is.

(Solenoid for general purpose)
The normal power solenoid 7148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 7147. When the normal power solenoid 7148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it advances the normal power shutter 7147 forward to open the second starting port 7140, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the normal power shutter 7147 backward to close the second starting port 7140.

(First special solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 7135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 7134, which is an opening and closing door. When the first special electric solenoid 7135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it tilts the first special electric shutter 7134 forward to open the first large prize opening 7131, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it inverts the first special electric shutter 7134 backward to close the first large prize opening 7131.

(Second special electric solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 7155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 7154. When the second special electric solenoid 7155 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the second special electric shutter 7154 is moved backward to open the second grand prize opening 7151, and the second special electric solenoid 7155 is energized by the main CPU 201. If it is not performed (it is OFF), the second special electric shutter 7154 is advanced forward to close the second big prize opening 7151.

(Solenoid for V shutter)
The V-shutter solenoid 7160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V-shutter 7159. When the V-shutter solenoid 7160 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the V-shutter 7159 is moved backward and the V-winning port 7156 is opened, and when the main CPU 201 is not energized ( OFF), the V shutter 7159 is advanced forward to close the V winning opening 7156. In addition, in this embodiment, the V shutter solenoid 7160 operates in conjunction with the opening of the second large prize opening 7151, and opens the V winning opening 7156. That is, the V winning hole 7156 is in an open state from the time when the second big winning hole 7151 is opened, and when the game ball enters the second big winning hole 7151, it also passes through the V winning hole 7156 in principle.

(First start switch)
The first start hole switch 7121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 7120.

When the first start hole switch 7121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 7120, the main CPU 201 determines that the first start condition is met and acquires start information for the first special symbol (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information for the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (first special symbol start memory area (1) to first special symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of first special symbols (e.g., four)." When the judgment start condition for the first special symbol is met (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.), the information is used for the hit judgment process for the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, when the first start hole switch 7121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 7120, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the prize balls for the first start hole (e.g., three game balls).

(Second start switch)
The second start hole switch 7141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 7140.

When the second start hole switch 7141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 7140, the main CPU 201 determines that the second start condition is established and acquires start information for the second special symbol (random number value for jackpot determination, random number value for symbol, random number value for reach determination, random number value for effect selection, etc.). The acquired start information for the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (3) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of second special symbols (e.g., 3)," and when the determination start condition for the second special symbol (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is established, it is used for the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, when the second start port switch 7141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 7140, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a prize ball (e.g., one game ball) for the second start port.

In addition, in the embodiment, the winning judgment process for the first special pattern based on the start information of the first special pattern is also called the "lottery for the first special pattern," and the winning judgment process for the second special pattern based on the start information of the second special pattern is also called the "lottery for the second special pattern," and the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are collectively called the "lottery for the special patterns."

(Passing gate switch)
The passing gate switch 7127 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 7126.

When the pass gate switch 7127 detects the passage of a game ball through the pass gate 7126, the main CPU 201 acquires the start information of the normal symbol (random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, random number value of the normal symbol, etc.). The acquired start information of the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (normal symbol start memory area (1) to normal symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of normal symbols (for example, 4)". When the normal symbol judgment start condition (for example, the normal electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the normal symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit judgment process) and the variable display of the normal symbol. Note that even if the pass gate switch 7127 detects the passage of a game ball through the pass gate 7126, the prize ball is not paid out.

(1st big prize opening count switch)
The first big winning hole count switch 7132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 7131. When the first big winning hole count switch 7132 detects that a game ball enters the first big winning hole 7131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of winning game balls that enter the first big winning hole 7131 per round. At the same time, it instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the first big prize opening.

(Second major prize slot count switch)
The second large prize opening count switch 7152 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 7151. When the second large prize opening count switch 7152 detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 7151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 7151 and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the second large prize opening (e.g., 10 game balls).

(V prize opening switch)
The V winning hole switch 7157 is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 7156. When the V winning hole switch 7157 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 7156, the main CPU 201 will control the transition to the jackpot game state. Note that even if the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 7156 is detected by the V winning hole switch 7157, the prize ball is not paid out.

[9-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300, like the first pachinko game machine, is equipped with a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a gimmick control circuit 307 and a command input port 308, but differs in that it further comprises a button control circuit 310 and a performance button 54.
(Button Control Circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the effect button 54. In other words, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button 54 in response to a drive command from the sub-CPU 301.

Further, the button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to the player's operation detected by the production button 54. When the button control circuit 310 receives an operation signal from the production button 54, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub CPU 301.

[9-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 233 to 245. Note that the seventh pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the seventh pachinko gaming machine, a time-saving gaming state in which probability-variable control is not executed but time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which time-saving control is not executed, and the main CPU 201 is in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. It is possible to proceed with the game. In addition, in this seventh pachinko gaming machine, probability variable control is not executed, but this is not essential, and even if it is possible to execute probability variable control by setting a variable probability flag to on depending on the type of jackpot, for example. good.

In this embodiment, in a general normal gaming state (first normal gaming state to be described later), left-handed playing is, in principle, the legal gaming mode, and in time-saving gaming state A and time-saving gaming state B, playing right-handed is the normal gaming mode. It is considered as a mode. In addition, when the A time saving gaming state and the B working time saving gaming state are not distinguished, the A working time saving gaming state and the B working time saving gaming state are collectively simply referred to as the "time saving gaming state". The sub CPU 301 displays, for example, in the display area of the display device 7, how to play which is considered to be a normal game mode.

[9-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
233 is an example of a special symbol winning judgment table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 233 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining whether a hit is a "big hit", "small hit" or "miss".

In the special symbol hit determination table, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "hit" or a "miss" and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (hit determination value data, miss determination value data) is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first starting hole 7120. In addition, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "hit", a "minor hit" or a "miss" and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (hit determination value data, minor hit determination value data, miss determination value data) is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting hole 7140. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for determining a hit is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the random number value for determining a hit is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 233, when a game ball enters the first starting port 7120, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for the first special symbol using a random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol. The result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined to be a "jackpot" at a selection rate of approximately 1/199.8, and otherwise determined to be a "loss." Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140, the main CPU 201 determines the hit of the special symbol based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random number for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol. The result of the processing is determined to be a "big hit" with a selection rate of about 1/199.8, a "small hit" with a selection rate of about 1/3.0, and a "loss" otherwise.

The range (width) of the random numbers that determine a "jackpot", i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely modified as needed.

Furthermore, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol is performed, a "small hit" may be determined. However, if the "small hit" is determined, It is possible to set a "small hit" with a relatively low selection rate so that the judgment made in the hit judgment process of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the judgment made in the hit judgment process of the special symbol. preferable.

In addition, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, a "time-saving hit" that transitions directly to a time-saving game state (C time-saving game state) without transitioning to a jackpot game state may be determined.

In addition, if the seventh pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of a big win and/or a small win may be set to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting. However, even if the seventh pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, it is preferable that the selection rate of a time-saving win be set to a common probability for all settings.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot selection rate or the small hit selection rate according to the setting value, for example, by changing the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning opening 7156 for each setting value, the V winning opening 7156 It is also possible to change the rate of passage to or change the number of times the time saving is continued for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the small win probability, the opening frequency of the V winning opening 7156 (that is, the operating frequency of the second special electric shutter 7154), the opening time, and the number of times the time saving is continued. By employing one or more of these, it may be configured such that the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state is higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[9-3-2. Special symbol judgment table]
FIG. 234 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 234 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that determines the "selected symbol information" and "symbol designation command" that determine the special symbol that will be displayed when it stops.

The "selected symbol command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol determined according to the type of hit when the result of the special symbol's hit determination process is a hit, and the "design designation command" is a command for specifying the winning symbol that is determined according to the winning type. This is a command to specify the pattern that will be stopped and displayed.

The special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol, the above-mentioned win/loss determination value data, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole 7120 or the second starting hole 7140. is defined in association with the "select symbol command" and the "symbol designation command". The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 234, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 0 and 89, the main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the selected symbol command and "zA1" as the symbol designation command. Also, if the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is any value between 90 and 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol command and "zA2" as the symbol designation command.

As described above, in this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the selection symbol command is "z2" according to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. ” < “z1”.

In addition, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 0 and 19, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. In addition, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 20 and 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z4" as the selected symbol command and "zA3" as the symbol designation command. In addition, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is any value between 80 and 99, the main CPU 201 selects "z5" as the selected symbol command and determines "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

In this way, in this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the selected symbol command is likely to be determined in the order of "z3" = "z5" < "z4" according to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 234.

Further, when small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, and the symbol random number value for the second special symbol is between 0 and 19, the main CPU 201 executes the selected symbol command ``z6'' is determined as the symbol designation command, and ``zA4'' is determined as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 20 to 79, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 80 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z8" as the selected symbol command and "zA4" as the symbol designation command.

In this way, in this embodiment, when small win determination value data is obtained as a result of the win determination process for the second special pattern, the selected pattern command is likely to be determined in the order of "z6" = "z8" < "z7" according to the special pattern determination table shown in FIG. 234.

Note that the range of the symbol random number value of the special symbol that determines the "selected symbol command", that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, although the description is omitted in the seventh pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 has a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that corresponds to the special symbol stop mode determination table described in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table determines the stop mode of the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 232) when the special symbol is stopped and displayed using the selection symbol command. This is a table that is referred to when making decisions according to the following. In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 display the stop mode of a jackpot, the stop mode of a small hit, or the stop mode of a loss based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Ru. Further, a decorative pattern stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative pattern stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

[9-3-3. Hit type determination table]
FIG. 235 is an example of a winning type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the winning type determination table shown in FIG. 235 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The win type determination table is a table that determines the operation details of a win, and includes "aspects of the jackpot gaming state", "aspects of the small winning gaming state", and "aspects of the subsequent gaming state (time saving flag, A time saving end condition)" This is a table that determines ``.

As shown in FIG. 235, the winning type determination table includes "aspect of jackpot gaming state", "aspect of small winning gaming state", and "aspect of subsequent gaming state (time saving flag, A "Time-saving termination condition)" is associated with the event.

"Opening mode of jackpot gaming state" indicates the opening mode of the first jackpot opening 7131 that is opened during the jackpot gaming state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (for example, 28 seconds) and closing time (for example, 2 seconds) per round in the jackpot game state are predefined, and the opening mode of the first jackpot opening 7131 is as follows: It shows the maximum number of rounds in a jackpot gaming state. Note that the maximum opening time for each round may be different, or the closing time (round interval time) for each round may be different. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be determined so that the first big prize opening 6131 is opened and closed a plurality of times per round.

The "opening mode of the big win game state" corresponding to the "selected symbol command z6-8" of the small win of the second special symbol is the opening mode when the game ball that entered the second big winning hole 7151 opened in the small win game state passes through the V winning hole 7156 and transitions to the big win game state via the second route. When the game state transitions to the big win game state via this second route, the opening of the second big winning hole 7151 in the small win game state is the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 (from the second round onwards), a round game is executed to open the first big winning hole 7131. Also, when the game ball that entered the second big winning hole 7151 opened in the small win game state does not pass through the V winning hole 7156, the game state does not transition to the big win game state, and the mode of the game state thereafter is not determined.

"Opening mode in small win game state" indicates the opening mode of the second large prize opening 7151 that opens in a small win game state. In this embodiment, the maximum opening time (e.g., 0.1 seconds) and closing time (e.g., 0.6 seconds) per opening in a small win game state are specified in advance, and indicate the maximum number of openings in a small win game state. Note that the maximum opening time per opening may be determined differently, or the closing time for each opening may be determined differently.

Here, the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one small win game state (for example, 1 small win x 10 balls (second specified number) x 10 balls (number of prize balls) = 100 balls) is set to be less than the total number of game balls that can be paid out in one big win game state (for example, 5R x 7 balls (first specified number) x 15 balls (number of prize balls) = 525 balls), and it can be said that the big win game state is the advantageous "first special game state," and the small win game state is the "second special game state" that is less profitable than the big win game state.

In addition, the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the big win game state (e.g., 28 seconds), so that in the big win game state, the first large prize winning hole 7131 opens in a favorable "first opening mode," and in the small win game state, the second large prize winning hole 7151 opens in a less favorable "second opening mode" than the first opening mode.

``Subsequent gaming state mode'' indicates the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and indicates the settings of the ``time saving flag'' and the ``A time saving end condition.'' In addition, in this embodiment, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning ("normal gaming state" or "time saving gaming state") when a jackpot or small hit is determined, the "time saving flag" and "A time saving end" are set. The settings for "Conditions" are configured differently.

The "time saving flag" is a flag indicating whether or not the time saving gaming state is executed and the type of the time saving gaming state to be executed.The time saving flag = 0 indicates the normal gaming state, and the time saving flag = 1 indicates "A time saving gaming state. ”, and the time saving flag=2 indicates “B time saving gaming state”. In addition, in this embodiment, although the C time-saving game state is not executed, when the C time-saving game state is made executable, the time-saving flag=3 indicates the C time-saving game state.

The "A time-saving end condition" is a special condition for ending the A time-saving game state as a time-saving game state, and when either the "total number of special symbol time-savings" which is the total number of times that either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the A time-saving game state, or the "number of time-savings of the second special symbol" which is the total number of times that the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the A time-saving game state, is met, the A time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state.

In addition, in all time-saving game states (time-saving game state A, time-saving game state B), a "time-saving common ending condition" is set as a condition for transitioning to a big win game state or a small win game state. Therefore, in the time-saving game state A, if the "time-saving ending condition A" or the "time-saving common ending condition" is met, the time-saving game state will end and a transition to the normal game state will occur.

Here, as the "A time saving end condition", in addition to the "number of time saving times of the second special symbol", the "total number of time saving times of special symbols", which is the cumulative number of fluctuating displays of the first special symbol, is also a condition. During the normal gaming state in which left-handed hitting is considered a regular gaming mode, the start information of the first special symbol may be stored up to the number of reserved first special symbols (for example, 4), and the normal gaming state This is to avoid a phenomenon in which it becomes impossible to receive a profit in the time-saving gaming state equal to "the number of times of saving time of the second special symbol" when the game state shifts to the time-saving gaming state. For this reason, the "total time saving number of special symbols" is at least the safe number of times (e.g. 2 times).

In this way, even if the "total time saving number of special symbols" which is the cumulative total of the number of fluctuating displays of the first special symbol in addition to "the number of time saving times of the second special symbol" is set, right-handed hitting is considered to be a regular game mode. In the time-saving gaming state, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first starting port 7120, but it is easy for a game ball to enter the second starting port 7140. Except for the aspect, the condition of "total time saving number of special symbols" is not satisfied, and the time saving game state ends when the condition of "second special symbol time saving number of times" is satisfied.

In addition, the "A time saving end condition" may be configured to include only the condition "second special symbol time saving number" without providing the "special symbol total time saving number" condition.

The main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table and determines the jackpot gaming state, the small winning gaming state, the time saving flag, and the A time saving end condition based on the selected symbol command.

As shown in FIG. 235, in the normal game state, when the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot as a result of the hit determination process, the selection symbol command "z1" which is selected at 90% is used to select the symbol after the jackpot game state ends. As the "first A time saving end condition", an A time saving end condition is determined that either "special symbol total time saving number" = 7 times or "second special symbol time saving number" = 1 time is satisfied. It is easily structured. On the other hand, in the time-saving gaming state, after all the jackpot gaming states have ended, a "second A time-saving ending condition" that is more advantageous to the player than the "first A time-saving ending condition" is set as "special symbol". It is configured such that the A time saving end condition is determined on the condition that either of the following is satisfied: ``Total number of time saving times'' = 11 times and ``Second special symbol number of time saving times'' = 5 times.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing the A time saving game state in the time saving gaming state in more detail, "special symbol total time saving number = 7" and "second special symbol time saving number = 1" are determined as the A time saving end condition. The time-saving gaming state when the time-saving game is performed is also referred to as the "first time-saving gaming state", and when "special symbol total time-saving number = 11" and "second special symbol time-saving number = 5" are determined as the A time-saving end condition. The time-saving gaming state is also referred to as a "second time-saving gaming state." Further, the B time-saving game state is also referred to as a "third time-saving game state." In addition, as mentioned above, since the "A time saving end condition" may not include the condition of "total time saving number of special symbols" but only the condition of "the number of time saving times of the second special symbol", The first time-saving game state may be the time-saving game state when "the number of time-savings of the second special symbol = 1" is determined, and the second time-saving game state may be the time-saving game state when "the number of time-savings of the second special symbol = 5". It may also be a time-saving gaming state when it is determined. In addition, when the "first time-saving gaming state" and "second time-saving gaming state" are not clearly distinguished, they are also referred to as "A time-saving gaming state", and "A time-saving gaming state" and "B-time saving gaming state ( When not clearly distinguished from the third time-saving gaming state), it is also referred to as the "time-saving gaming state."

[9-3-4. Special symbol variation pattern table]
236 and 237 are examples of the variation pattern table of the special symbols of the seventh pachinko game machine. Fig. 236 is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbols in the normal game state of the seventh pachinko game machine, and Fig. 237 is an example of the variation pattern table of the special symbols in the time-saving game state of the seventh pachinko game machine. The variation pattern tables of the special symbols shown in Figs. 236 and 237 are stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, the special symbol variation pattern table includes the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or loss), the random value for reach determination, and the random value for performance selection. , the special symbol variation pattern, and the special symbol variation display time are associated with each other. Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above. Further, the "Remarks" column in FIGS. 236 and 237 shows the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol, the content of performance execution, etc. for the sake of convenience.

The main CPU 201 determines the special symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in either FIG. 236 or FIG. 237 according to the gaming state, refers to the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern table, and determines the type of special symbol and the hit of the special symbol. Based on the result of the determination process, the random number value for reach determination, and the random number value for performance selection, a special symbol variation pattern and a special symbol variation display time are determined.

Furthermore, upon determining the fluctuation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. The fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 7120, or a fluctuation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the second starting port 7140. It is configured so that it can be identified whether it is present or not.

(Fluctuating pattern table of special symbols in normal gaming state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 236, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(2) are used as the special symbol fluctuation pattern table in the normal gaming state. It is provided with three variation pattern tables: a variation pattern table T2 of , and a variation pattern table T3 of special symbols shown in FIG. 236(3). Note that the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the normal game state is not limited to three, and may be one, two or more.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing the normal gaming states in detail, the normal gaming state in which left-handed playing is the normal gaming mode is referred to as the "first normal gaming state", and when the time-saving gaming state ends, the main gaming state is The normal game state (that is, the second special stored in the time-saving game state) during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the start information of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the RAM 203 The normal gaming state in which the reserved number of symbols is being used up is referred to as the "second normal gaming state."

The special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1) is a variation pattern table selected during the first normal gaming state, and is a variation pattern table selected after the seventh pachinko game machine is backed up (i.e., initial value fluctuation pattern table) or after the special symbol fluctuation display is performed a predetermined number of times after the first normal game state starts (i.e., the special symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 236 (3) described later). This is a variation pattern table selected in the general performance state (after transition from T3).

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236 (2) is a fluctuation pattern table exclusively for the second special symbol that is selected in the second normal game state, and is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected in the "continuous battle" described below.

The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 236(3) is a variation pattern table selected during the first normal gaming state, and the special symbol is displayed a predetermined number of times after the first normal gaming state is started. This is a variation pattern table that is selected during the limited performance state until the variation display is performed.

The transition relationship of the special symbol variation pattern tables T1 to T3 in the normal game state shown in FIGS. 236(1) to (3) will be described in detail later using FIG. 238.

Here, in the first normal game state where hitting from the left is considered the normal game mode, it is extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140, and the variation pattern of the second special symbol should not be determined (the variation display of the second special symbol is not performed). However, in case the game ball irregularly enters the second starting hole 7140, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is specified.

In the special symbol variation pattern table T1 in the first normal game state shown in FIG. 236(1), as a variation pattern of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is The variable display times of the symbols are all set to the same time (for example, 15000 ms). However, as will be described later, even if the same second special symbol is displayed for a variable display time, different effects are performed.

In this embodiment, the pattern determination time for the special symbol is determined based on the game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose), but in the normal game state, the pattern determination time is set to the same time (for example, 540 ms) regardless of the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win/lose).

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in time-saving gaming state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 237, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237 (1) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237 (2) are used as the special symbol fluctuation pattern table in the time-saving gaming state. There are four variation pattern tables: a variation pattern table J2 of , a variation pattern table J3 of special symbols shown in FIG. 237(3), and a variation pattern table J4 of special symbols shown in FIG. 237(4). Note that the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the time-saving gaming state is not limited to four, and may be one or two or more.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237 (1) is the fluctuation pattern table selected at the time of the final fluctuation of the first time-saving game state, and is the fluctuation pattern table selected at the time of the "Sengoku Entry Chance" described below.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 237 (2) is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected at times other than the final fluctuation of the first time-saving game state, and is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected at the time of the "Chance to Enter the Sengoku Period."

Here, other than the final change of the first time-saving game state, it is limited to when the first special pattern is displayed changing and neither of the conditions "time-saving number of times for the second special pattern = 1" nor "total time-saving number of times for special patterns = 7" is met (when the second special pattern is displayed changing, "time-saving number of times for the second special pattern = 1" is met, resulting in the final change), so the special pattern change pattern table J2 is a change pattern table exclusively for the first special pattern, and the change pattern of the second special pattern is not determined.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 237 (3) is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected at times other than the final fluctuation of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, and is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected during the "Sengoku Time" described below.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 237 (4) is the fluctuation pattern table selected at the time of the final fluctuation of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, and is the fluctuation pattern table selected during the "Sengoku Time" described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the same fluctuation pattern table is determined in the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state, It may be configured such that different variation pattern tables are determined.

The transition relationship of the special symbol variation pattern tables J1 to J4 in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIGS. 237(1) to (4) will be described in detail later using FIG. 238.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 237 (1), the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is determined to be an extremely short first fluctuation display time (e.g., 200 ms) except when the hit determination process for the first special symbol results in a jackpot, and when the hit determination process for the first special symbol results in a jackpot, the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is determined to be a long second fluctuation display time (e.g., 89,000 ms). Also, at the time of the final fluctuation of the first time-saving play state, the pattern determination time of the special symbol is determined to be an extremely long pattern determination time (e.g., 89,000 ms).

This will be described in detail later using FIG. 244, but by determining the variable display time of the special symbol to be the extremely short first variable display time, the time-saving game state can be quickly ended, Since the specified number of symbols for use is set to 1, etc., in the first time-saving game state, the number of reserved symbols for the second special symbol is not accumulated, and the hit determination process for the second special symbol (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is performed. can be done only once.

In addition, as the "A time saving end condition", the "total number of special symbols time saving" is set to be greater than or equal to the total number of "second special symbol time saving number" and "first special symbol pending number (for example, 4 pieces)". (See Figure 235), at the final change of the time-saving game state, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner based on the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol when the "total time-saving number of special symbols" is established. This corresponds to when the game is played in an irregular manner.

In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern table J1 in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Although the display time is configured to be determined as a variable display time (for example, 200 ms), the display time may be configured to be determined at different times, or only a portion may be configured to be different. . For example, if a jackpot is achieved as a result of the second special symbol's hit determination process, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined to be a long variable display time A (for example, 89000 ms), and the second special symbol's hit determination process is performed. If the result is a small hit, the variable display time of the special symbol is determined to be a short variable display time B (for example, 300ms), and if the second special symbol is a loss as a result of the hit determination process. may be configured such that the variable display time of the special symbol is determined to be an extremely short variable display time C (for example, 200 ms).

In the special symbol variation pattern table J3 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 237(3), when the result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is a small hit, the third variable display time (e.g., 2000 ms) in which the variable display time of the special symbol is short, or the fourth variable display time (e.g., 5000 ms, 12000 ms) longer than the third variable display time is determined. Also, in the special symbol variation pattern table J3 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 237(3), when the result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol is based on the result, the third variable display time (e.g., 2000 ms) in which the variable display time of the special symbol is short is determined in order to quickly end the variable display of the first special symbol and to display the variable display of the second special symbol from the next time onwards.

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 237 (3), when a small win is the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol, the special symbol fluctuation display time is configured to be determined as the third fluctuation display time or the fourth fluctuation display time, but the third fluctuation display time may be the same as the first fluctuation display time (e.g., 200 ms), and the fourth fluctuation display time may be the same as the second fluctuation display time (e.g., 89,000 ms).

In the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J4 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 237 (4), the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is the same as that in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 in the time-saving play state shown in FIG. 237 (3), but the special symbol fluctuation pattern is configured so that if the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the second special symbol results in a miss, the content that is executed is different.

In addition, at the time of the final change between the second time-saving game state and the third time-saving game state, if the hit determination process for the first special pattern or the second special pattern results in a miss, the pattern determination time for the special pattern is determined to be longer (for example, 15,000 ms) than if the hit determination process for the first special pattern or the second special pattern results in a big hit or small hit.

In this way, in the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state, a long symbol confirmation time (for example, 15,000 ms) is determined when a loss occurs as a result of the special symbol hit determination process. The reason for this configuration is to display the gaming results (payouts, number of consecutive wins, etc.) in "Sengoku Time" at the end of "Sengoku Time", which will be described later, when a long symbol confirmation time is displayed. .

[9-3-5. Transition diagram of special symbol fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 238 is an example of a transition diagram of the special symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the transition diagram of the special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 238 shows that in the first normal game state, left-handed play is performed as a regular game mode, and in the time-saving game state, right-handed play is performed as a regular game mode. An example of a time transition diagram is shown, and irregular game modes are excluded.

(Normal gaming state after power-on after initialization)
First, in the first normal game state after the power is turned on after initialization, as described above, the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1) is selected.

In the first normal game state in which left-handed hitting is the normal game mode, it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 7140, and the game ball enters the first starting port 7120. As a result, a hit determination process for the first special symbol (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed.

(When the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the normal gaming state)
In the normal gaming state, if the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot as a result of the hit determination process and the selection symbol command "z1" is determined, the "second special symbol time saving number" = The game shifts to a first time-saving gaming state in which one game is determined. When a game ball enters the second starting port 7140 during this first time-saving game state, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237(1) is selected.

In addition, in the first time-saving game state, if the game ball does not enter the second starting port 7140 and there is a reserved number of the first special symbols, the special symbol fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 237 (2) When table J2 is selected and a game ball enters the second starting port 7140 after the reserved number of first special symbols is exhausted, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237(1) is selected. Become.

After the first time-saving game state ends, the number of reserved second special symbols should not be stored, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 244. Therefore, after the first time-saving game state ends, the first normal game state is entered, and from the start of the first normal game state until the number of variable displays of the special symbols reaches 20 times, as shown in FIG. The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in (3) is selected.

Then, when the number of times the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner exceeds 20 times after the first normal game state is started, the special symbol variable pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1) is selected.

(When the selection symbol command "z1" is determined in the time-saving game state)
In the time-saving game state, if the first special symbol is judged to be a jackpot as a result of the hit judgment process and the selected symbol command "z1" is determined, the game moves to a second time-saving game state in which the "second special symbol time-saving number of times" = 5 is determined after the end of the jackpot game state. In this second time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 237 (3) is selected.

When the second time-saving game state reaches its final change, the special symbol change pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 237 (4) is selected.

After the second time-saving game state ends, the number of reserved second special symbols is generally stored, so the game transitions to the second normal game state after the second time-saving game state ends. During the control period of the second special symbol in the second normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236 (2) is selected.

After the second normal gaming state ends (that is, after the reserved number of second special symbols is used up), the transition is made to the first normal gaming state, and after the first normal gaming state starts, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 236(3) is selected until the number of rotations reaches 20.

Then, when the number of times the special symbol changes display exceeds 20 spins after the first normal game state is started, the special symbol change pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236 (1) will be selected.

(When the selection command "z2-5" is confirmed)
If the result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot and the selected symbol command "z2" is determined, and if the result of the hit determination process for the second special symbol is determined to be a jackpot and the selected symbol command "z3-5" is determined, a transition to the second time-saving game state will occur, which is the same as when the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the time-saving game state described above, so explanation will be omitted.

(When the selected symbol command "z6-8" is determined)
If it is determined as a small hit as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the game state is changed depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156, so the selected special symbol changes. The pattern table will be different.

Here, the fact that the hit determination process for the second special symbol results in a small hit is premised on the premise that the time-saving game state in which the game ball can enter the second starting hole 7140 has been controlled. When the game state transitions to the small hit game state, the "time-saving common ending condition" is met as described above, and the time-saving game state ends once (the same applies when the game state transitions to the big hit game state). Then, if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156, the game state transitions to the big hit game state, and after the big hit game state ends, the game state transitions to the second time-saving game state. On the other hand, if the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole 7156, the game state does not transition to the big hit game state, but transitions to the normal game state.

If the hit determination process for the second special symbol determines that there has been a small hit and the game ball has not passed through the V winning hole 7156, the number of reserved second special symbols is generally stored after the small hit game state ends, so after the time-saving game state ends, the game transitions to the second normal game state. During the control period of the second special symbol in the second normal game state, the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236 (2) is selected.

After the second normal game state ends (i.e., after the reserved number of second special symbols is consumed), the game transitions to the first normal game state, and the special symbol variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 236 (3) is selected until the number of times the special symbol variation display has been performed reaches 20 spins since the first normal game state began.

Then, when the number of times the special symbol changes display exceeds 20 spins after the first normal game state is started, the special symbol change pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236 (1) will be selected.

If a small hit is determined as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process and the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156, the game will move to the second time-saving gaming state, so the above-mentioned This is the same as when the selected symbol command "z1" is determined in the time-saving gaming state, and the explanation will be omitted.

(When transitioning to B time-saving game mode)
As described later, after the number of times the special symbol variable display reaches a ceiling value (for example, 599 times) in the normal game state, the game state transitions to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state). Here, the "B time-saving end condition" of the B time-saving game state is that either the "total number of times of time-saving of special symbols" = 11 times or the "number of times of time-saving of second special symbols" = 5 times is established, and is set to be the same as the special condition for ending the second time-saving game state. Therefore, when the game state transitions to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state), the variable pattern table of the special symbol transitions in the same way as when the game state transitions to the second time-saving game state.

[9-3-6. Data related to pre-reading of special symbols]
FIG. 239 is an example of data related to pre-reading of special symbols in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Here, "prereading" means that when the game ball enters the first starting port 7120 or the second starting port 7140, the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) receives special symbol starting information (random value for jackpot determination, symbol This refers to analyzing the starting information of the acquired special symbol in advance of the special symbol lottery when a random value, random value for reach determination, random value for effect selection, etc.) is acquired. Then, the analyzed information (pre-read command) is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "pre-read effect" can be executed based on the pre-read command.

FIG. 239(1) is a pre-reading execution correspondence table that defines whether or not to execute pre-reading according to the gaming state as special symbol pre-reading related data.

As shown in FIG. 239(1), in the normal gaming state, both the pre-reading based on the starting information of the first special symbol and the pre-reading based on the starting information of the second special symbol are executable. Further, in the time saving game state, jackpot game state, and small win game state, only the pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be executed.

Figure 239 (2) shows an example of the configuration of a look-ahead command based on the analyzed information after analyzing the start information for a special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 239 (2), the prefetch command is composed of the "type of special symbol", whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a plurality of "parameters 1 to 3". There is.

“Parameter 1” is win/loss information that is analyzed in advance to determine whether it is a jackpot, small hit, or loss based on the random value for jackpot determination, and FIG. 239 (3) is an example of the setting table for parameter 1. It is.

"Parameter 2" is pattern information that is obtained by analyzing in advance the special pattern (selected pattern) that will be displayed when the reel stops based on the random number value for determining a jackpot and the random number value for the pattern. Figure 239 (4) is an example of a setting table for parameter 2.

"Parameter 3" is fluctuation information that analyzes the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol in advance based on the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for selecting a performance. Figure 239 (5) is an example of a setting table for parameter 3.

In this embodiment, the variable display of special symbols from the time when the starting information of the special symbol is read in advance to the time when the special symbol is drawn based on the starting information of the special symbol is also referred to as "pre-variation". . Further, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol is drawn based on the starting information of the special symbol is also referred to as "the variation".

[9-3-7. Normal symbol winning judgment table]
Fig. 240 is an example of a winning judgment table for normal symbols in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in Fig. 240 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table that is referred to in the normal symbol hit determination process, and is based on the normal symbol hit determination random value obtained when the game ball passes through the passage gate 7126. This is a table that is referred to when determining a "hit" or "normal symbol loss" by lottery.

The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 240 specifies the range (width) of random numbers for winning judgment of normal symbols and winning/losing judgment value data for normal symbols ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol miss") in correspondence with each other. Note that the random numbers for winning judgment of normal symbols are obtained in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types), for example. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 240 and determines the normal symbol win/loss determination value data based on the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 240, and if the acquired random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol is between 1 and 65535, it is determined as a "normal symbol hit". It is determined that the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol is determined as the "normal symbol winning judging value data". In addition, if the acquired random number value for determining the winning of the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 determines that it is a "normal symbol loss" and determines the winning determination value data of the normal symbol as "normal symbol losing determination value data". do.

In this way, in this embodiment, "normal symbol hit" is determined at a selection rate of about 1/1.00, and "normal symbol hit" is determined more easily than "normal symbol loss" is determined. ing. In addition, it is desirable that the configuration is such that "normal symbol winning" is determined more easily than "normal symbol losing" is determined, and the selection rate of "normal symbol winning" is not limited to approximately 1/1.00. do not have.

In this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is normal or time-saving, the selection rate for "normal symbol hit" is set to the same (the winning probability for normal symbol hit is the same), but by changing the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 depending on the game state, as described below, the degree of benefit given to the player is changed depending on the game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set in common regardless of the gaming state of the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, but the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set depending on the gaming state. The selectivity may be different. When the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is varied depending on the gaming state, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" in the time-saving gaming state will be higher than the selection rate of "per normal symbol" in the normal gaming state. It is desirable to configure it as follows. Furthermore, depending on the type of time-saving game state in A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state), "normal symbol per" The selection rate may be made different.

[9-3-8. Normal symbol determination table]
Fig. 241 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol determination table shown in Fig. 241 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting "normal symbol selection symbol data" that determines the normal symbol stopping symbol based on the above-mentioned normal symbol winning/losing determination value data and the normal symbol random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the passing gate 7126.

The normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 241 specifies the above-mentioned normal pattern winning/losing determination value data ("normal pattern win" or "normal pattern miss"), the normal pattern random number value, and the normal pattern selection pattern data in a corresponding relationship. Note that the normal pattern random number value is obtained, for example, from 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 241 and determines the normal symbol selection symbol data based on the normal symbol per determination value data and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 241, when normal pattern hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal pattern hit determination process, for example, the normal pattern selection pattern data is selected as follows.

For example, when normal symbol winning judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the normal symbol selection symbol data if the normal symbol random number value is any value between 0 and 49, and selects "f2" as the normal symbol selection symbol data if the normal symbol random number value is any value between 50 and 99. In addition, when normal symbol losing judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the normal symbol selection symbol data regardless of the normal symbol random number value.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the normal symbol selection symbol data is selected based on the normal symbol win/lose determination value data (the result of the normal symbol win determination process) and the normal symbol random number value, regardless of the gaming state. Note that, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the normal symbol selection symbol data may be selected depending on the gaming state.

Further, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 240) and uses the normal symbol win determination value data based on the acquired normal symbol hit determination random number value. is determined, and then, with reference to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 241), the normal symbol selection symbol data is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, based on the acquired random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol (win/loss of the normal symbol) and the normal symbol selection symbol data are determined together. You can do it like this.

[9-3-9. Table for determining the opening pattern of normal electric accessories]
Fig. 242 is an example of a normal electric role opening pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko game machine. The normal electric role opening pattern determination table shown in Fig. 242 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko game machine.

When normal symbol hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the normal symbol (in the case of a hit for a normal symbol), the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric device 7146 is referenced when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 as the opening mode of the normal electric device 7146 according to the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data.

In the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory shown in FIG. 242, the gaming state, the normal symbol selection symbol data, and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 7146 are defined in association with each other.

In the present embodiment, the "opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146" is the "first opening time" in the first open state of the second starting port 7140, and the "first opening time" in the first closed state of the second starting port 7140. "first wait time" in the second opening state of the second starting port 7140, "second opening time" in the second opening state of the second starting port 7140, "second waiting time" in the second closed state of the second starting port 7140, 2. It consists of an "ending time" in which the starting port 7140 is closed and the operation of the normal electric accessory 7146 is ended. The opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 is not limited to the above-described configuration, and may be configured so that the open state and closed state can be repeated three or more times, or it can consist of only one open state. It may also be a configuration. Furthermore, an "opening time" for waiting for the first opening of the second starting port 7140 may be provided before the "first opening time".

The main CPU 201 refers to the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric role shown in FIG. 242, and determines the opening pattern of the normal electric role 7146 based on the game state and the normal pattern selection pattern data. When the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric role 7146, it transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal electric role opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric role 7146.

According to the normal electric accessory opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. The opening pattern (91H01H) is configured to have a first opening time of 72 ms, no waiting time for the first time, no opening after the second time, and an ending time of 12 ms.

Furthermore, according to the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory shown in FIG. The opening pattern (91H02H) of 7146 is configured such that the first opening time is 5400 ms, the first waiting time is 120 ms, the second opening time is 72 ms, and the ending time is 12 ms.

In this way, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 differs depending on the game state, and in the case of a normal symbol hit in the normal game state, an "unfavorable opening mode (also called a "short opening")" in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140 is determined, and in the case of a normal symbol hit in the time-saving game state, an "favorable opening mode (also called a "long opening")" in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140 is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, no matter which opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 7146 is activated, the specified number of ordinary electric accessories is set to one, and while the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 7146 is activated ( When one game ball enters the second starting port 7140 (while the second starting port 7140 is open), the operation of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 ends (when the second starting port 7140 is closed). ). In other words, only one game ball can enter the second starting port 7140 for one normal symbol, and even if there is a remaining open time of 5400 ms in the time-saving gaming state, the second starting Port 7140 will be closed.

In this embodiment, the A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) are treated as the same time-saving game state without distinction, and the same opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 is determined. However, it may be configured to determine different opening patterns of the normal electric device 7146 for the A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state).

Furthermore, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 may be different depending on the normal pattern selection pattern data. However, it is desirable that when a normal pattern is hit in the normal game state, the opening pattern is a group of "unfavorable opening patterns" compared to when a normal pattern is hit in the time-saving game state, and when a normal pattern is hit in the time-saving game state, the opening pattern is a group of "favorable opening patterns" compared to when a normal pattern is hit in the normal game state.

[9-3-10. Normal symbol variation pattern table]
FIG. 243 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243, the gaming state, the normal symbol selection symbol data, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variation display time are associated with each other. In addition, the "Remarks" column in FIG. 243 shows the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol for the sake of clarity.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation display time based on the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data. Then, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern.

According to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243, in the normal game state, the normal symbol variation display time is determined to be 414 ms, and in the time-saving game state, the normal symbol variation display time is determined to be 408 ms. Also, in this embodiment, the normal symbol pattern determination time is always determined to be the same time (for example, 540 ms) regardless of the game state or the result of the normal symbol winning determination process.

In this embodiment, the normal game state is configured so that all the same normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times are determined, but different normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times may be determined according to the normal symbol selection symbol data. Similarly, in the time-saving game state, the same normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times are determined, but different normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times may be determined according to the normal symbol selection symbol data. Furthermore, different normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol fixed times may be determined between the A time-saving game state (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state).

Next, the hit type determination table shown in FIG. 235 mentioned above, the variation pattern table J1 of special symbols in the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 237, the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 241, and the normal electric combination shown in FIG. An example of the operation contents of the normal electric accessory 7146 in the first time-saving game state will be explained with reference to the object opening pattern determination table, the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243, and the like.

[9-3-11. Operation details of the normal electric accessory in the first time-saving game state]
FIG. 244 is an example of the operation details of the normal electric accessory 7146 in the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 244, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 7126 in the first time-saving game state, the first fluctuating display of normal symbols is started. At this time, with reference to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 243, the normal symbol is varied for a variation display time of 408 ms in the normal symbol display section 161, and then the normal symbol is stopped for a symbol confirmation time of 540 ms. Display (design confirmation) is performed.

When the first normal symbol has been confirmed and the normal symbol has been won, long opening is determined as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 7146 with reference to the opening pattern determination table for the ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. 242. is determined, and the second starting port 7140 remains open for up to 5400 ms.

Since the specified number of ordinary electric accessories 7146 for ordinary electricity is one, when the game ball enters the second starting port 7140, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory ends, and the second starting port 7140 becomes closed.

When the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140, the second special symbol display section 164 displays a very short first display time of 200 ms by referring to the special symbol change pattern table J1 in the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 237.

When the fluctuation of the second special symbol ends, the "time saving number of the second special symbol = 1" as the A time saving end condition is established, and the first time saving game state ends and the normal game state (first normal game state). Therefore, when the game ball enters the second starting port 7140, the first time-saving game state can be quickly ended.

Then, when the variation of the second special symbol is completed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol confirmed) with an extremely long symbol confirmation time of 89000 ms.

In addition, in the symbol confirmation of the second special symbol with an extremely long symbol confirmation time of 89,000 ms, an effect (boss battle effect) related to the determination result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol is performed on the display device 7, as will be described later. .

In addition, even if the game ball enters the second starting port 7140 and the operation of the normal electric accessory ends, if the number of reserved ordinary symbols is stored, the second operation will be started immediately after the operation of the ordinary electric accessory ends. The fluctuating display of normal symbols starts. That is, in the first time-saving game state, the second variable display of the normal symbols and the variable display of the second special symbols can be started at approximately the same time.

Then, the variable display of the normal symbols in the first time-saving gaming state is performed by referring to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. The symbol confirmation (stop display) of the normal symbol is performed for a confirmation time of 540 ms.

In this embodiment, the relationship is set such that the first variable display time of the second special symbol in the first time-saving game state (200 ms) ≦ the variable display time of the normal symbol (408 ms) holds. Therefore, even if the first time-saving game state is in effect when the second variable display of the normal symbol starts, the game state will have already transitioned to the normal game state (first normal game state) when the second variable display of the normal symbol ends.

For this reason, even if the second normal symbol determination is completed and the normal symbol is a winning combination, the normal electric device opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 242 is referenced and a short opening (72 ms) is determined as the opening pattern for the normal electric device 7146 in normal play mode, making it extremely difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140.

In this way, in this embodiment, by determining the variable display time of the second special symbol to be the very short first variable display time, the first time-saving game state is quickly ended, and the normal electric accessory 7146 is Since the specified number of electronics is 1 and the variable display time of the normal symbol in the first time-saving game state is set to be longer than the first variable display time of the second special symbol, the first time-saving game state is controlled. When the second special symbol starts storage area of the main RAM 203, the gaming state is controlled so that the start information of the second special symbol is not stored (the number of reserved second special symbols is not stored), and the second The special symbol can be displayed only once.

On the other hand, when the second time-saving gaming state is controlled, the start information of the second special symbol can be stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 (the number of reserved second special symbols is (memory possible) gaming state will be controlled.

[9-3-12. Right-hand hit instruction period setting table]
245 is an example of a right-hit instruction period setting table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. The right-hit instruction period setting table shown in FIG. 245 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 245, three conditions are set as "right hit instruction conditions" for issuing a right hit instruction: the first right hit instruction condition is "during control of the big win game state or the small win game state", the second right hit instruction condition is "during control of the time-saving game state", and the third right hit instruction condition is "during the control period of the second special pattern after the time-saving game state ends".

The first right-handed instruction condition, ``while controlling the jackpot game state or the small win game state,'' is a condition that is satisfied during the period from the start to the end of the jackpot game state or the small win game state.

The second right-hit instruction condition "during control of the time-saving game state" is a condition that is met during the period from the "time-saving start condition" to the "time-saving end condition." Note that the time-saving game state here does not distinguish between time-saving game state A (first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state) and time-saving game state B (third time-saving game state). The same is true for the third right-hit instruction condition "during the control period of the second special symbol after the end of the time-saving game state."

The "time-saving start condition" refers to the end of the big win game state (including the end of the big win game state after the game ball passes through the V winning port 7156 from the small win game state). The "time-saving end condition" refers to either the start of the symbol determination time for the special symbol in the final change of the time-saving game state, the end of the big win game state, or the end of the small win game state.

The third right-hit instruction condition, "during the control period of the second special symbol after the time-saving play state ends", is a condition that is met when the reserved number of second special symbols is stored at the end of the time-saving play state, during the period until the variable display of all second special symbols corresponding to that reserved number of second special symbols ends (until all reserved numbers of second special symbols are used up). Note that even if the reserved number of second special symbols is forcibly saved after the control period of the second special symbol after the time-saving play state ends, the third right-hit instruction condition is not met and no right-hit instruction is issued.

When any of these first right hit instruction condition through third right hit instruction condition is met, a right hit instruction is issued to the player to make a right hit.

[9-4. Main control processing]
In the seventh pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the same as those in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23), except for some special symbol control process and normal symbol control process. Therefore, the following will explain the special symbol control process and normal symbol control process, and will not explain the other processes executed by the main CPU 201.

Note that some of the processes performed in the special symbol control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine are the same as those performed in the first pachinko gaming machine (for example, the jackpot game state end process (Figures 42 and 259)), but below, the same processes as those performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[9-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the special symbol control process performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 246, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S7001. The control state number of the special symbol is a number that indicates the state (status) of the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol game). After executing the process of S7001, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the process of S7001, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, etc., in a predetermined register.

In S7002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S7001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it moves the process to S7008, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it moves the process to S7003.

In S7003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not start information for the second special pattern is stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of second special patterns. If the main CPU 201 determines that start information for the second special pattern is not stored, it transfers processing to S7004, and if it determines that start information for the second special pattern is stored, it transfers processing to S7005.

In S7004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not there is a pending number of the first special symbol. If the main CPU 201 determines that the starting information for the first special symbol is not stored, the process moves to S7007, and if it determines that the starting information for the first special symbol is stored, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7006. Move to.

In S7005, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the second special pattern stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (2) to the second special pattern start memory area (3) is shifted to the second special pattern start memory area (1) to the second special pattern start memory area (2).

In S7006, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the first special pattern stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (2) to the first special pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (3).

In S7007, if the special symbol start information (reserved number of first and second special symbols) has not been stored in the first and second special symbol start memory areas of the main RAM 203 for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance.

In S7008, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 247. After executing the processing of S7003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control process (S7001 to S7008) within the interrupt prohibited section.

In this manner, in this embodiment, as the seventh pachinko gaming machine, a priority variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special pattern when start information for the second special pattern is stored has been described, but this is not limited to this. For example, when start information for the first special pattern is stored, the priority variable machine may be one in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special pattern, or a sequential variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed in the order of winning (ball entry order) into the first start port 7120 or the second start port 7140.

[9-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, a special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see Fig. 246) will be described with reference to Fig. 247. Fig. 247 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The numbers ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 247 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

In S7011, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern is 0. This waiting time for the special pattern is set as the waiting time for various processes in the special pattern management process, and is decremented as a special pattern timer counter within the system timer interrupt process that is performed at 2 msec intervals, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is not 0, it ends the special pattern management process and returns the process to the special pattern control process (see FIG. 246), and if it determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is 0, it transfers the process to S7012.

In S7012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process in S7012, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7013. Note that the main CPU 201 performs the processes from S7013 onwards based on the control state number read out in the process of S7012.

In S7013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This S7013 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 248. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7014.

In S7014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S7014 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 250. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7015.

In S7015, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This process of S7015 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 253. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7016.

In S7016, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning game state setting process. This process of S7016 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this small winning game state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 255. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7017.

In S7017, the main CPU 201 performs a small win game state control process. This S7017 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". Details of this small win game state control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 256. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7018.

In S7018, the main CPU 201 performs a grand prize opening preparation process. This process of S7018 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this big prize opening preparation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 257. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7019.

In S7019, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S7019 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 258. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7020.

In S7020, the main CPU 201 performs a process to end the jackpot game state. This process of S7020 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this process to end the jackpot game state will be described later with reference to FIG. 259.

After completing the processing of S7013 to S7020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 246). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[9-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 248, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7021, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "0", it transfers the process to S7022.

In S7022, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 233 is referenced, and a hit determination of the special symbol is made based on the random number value for big hit determination of the special symbol as the starting information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0), and a hit/lose determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process of S7022, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7023.

In S7023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing to determine the stopping symbol of the special symbol. In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. A "selection symbol command" and a "design designation command" are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol as special symbol starting information. After executing the process in S7023, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7024.

In S7024, the main CPU 201 performs a win type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of win when the result of the special symbol win determination process is a win (big win or small win). In this win type determination process, the win type determination table shown in FIG. 235 is referenced, and the type of win is determined according to the "selected symbol command" determined in the special symbol determination process of S7023. Furthermore, in order to determine the number of time-saving times and the like based on the game state at the time of the win after the end of the big win game state, the main CPU 201 sets the game state data at the time of the win, which indicates the game state at the time of the win when it is determined that there is a big win or a small win, in the win state area of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S7024, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7025.

In S7025, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this special symbol variation pattern determination process, a special symbol variation pattern table of either FIG. 236 or FIG. 237 is determined depending on the game state, etc., and the determined special symbol variation pattern table is referenced to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the reach determination random number value, and the performance selection random number value. Details of this special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 249. After executing the process of S7025, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7026.

In S7026, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process to set the variable display time of the special symbol. In this special symbol variable display time setting process, the special symbol variable display time setting process refers to the special symbol variable pattern table determined in the special symbol variable pattern determination process in S7025 above, and determines the variable display time of the special symbol based on the determined special symbol variable pattern. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the determined variable display time of the special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to start displaying the variable special symbol. After executing the process of S7026, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7027.

In S7027, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 247) is performed. After executing the process of S7027, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7028.

In S7028, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, confirmation and update processes of parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 are performed. Then, a process of reserving transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (Figure 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7028, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7029.

In S7029, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. This processing mainly involves updating various flags related to game status management (e.g., time-saving flags, etc.). After executing S7029, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7030.

In S7030, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a special symbol presentation start command. In this process, a transmission reservation process of a "symbol designation command" and a "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as a special symbol production start command. As the transmission reservation process for the symbol designation command, the transmission reservation process for the symbol designation command determined in S7023 is performed. Further, as the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, a special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S7025 is performed so that the type of the special symbol can be known. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol variable display start process (particularly the game state management process (S7029) and the special symbol presentation start command transmission reservation process (S7030)) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[9-4-4. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 249, details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 248) will be described. FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation pattern determination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7025-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the process moves to S7025-2, and if the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (that is, the time-saving gaming state). Then, the process moves to S7025-4.

In S7025-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the control period for the second special symbol after the time-saving game state ends. More specifically, in the second normal game state after the time-saving game state ends (when the special 2 control period flag is on), it determines whether or not it is a special symbol control process when the start information for the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determination area (0). If the main CPU 201 determines that it is in the control period for the second special symbol after the time-saving game state ends, it transfers the process to S7025-3, and if it determines that it is not in the control period for the second special symbol after the time-saving game state ends, it transfers the process to S7025-4.

In S7025-3, the main CPU 201 determines a special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236(2).

In S7025-4, the main CPU 201 performs a performance variation counter update process in which the performance variation counter in the main RAM 203 is updated by subtracting 1 from it. Here, the "performance variation counter" is set to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 20 times) when the control period for the second special symbol ends after the time-saving game state ends, as described below. In addition, after the seventh pachinko gaming machine has been backed up and cleared, the performance variation counter is also cleared, and the performance variation counter becomes 0.

In S7025-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the performance variation counter in the main RAM 203 is equal to 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the effect variation counter is equal to 0, the process proceeds to S7025-6, and if it determines that the effect variation counter does not equal 0, the process proceeds to S7025-7.

In S7025-6, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1).

In S7025-7, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 236 (2).

In S7025-8, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is the first time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S7025-9, and if it determines that the current gaming state is not the first time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S7025-9. is moved to S7025-12.

In S7025-9, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current change in special symbols is the final change in the first time-saving gaming state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current change in special symbols is the final change in the first time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7025-10, and the current change in special symbols is the final change in the first time-saving gaming state. If it is determined that it is not the final variation, the process moves to S7025-11.

In S7025-10, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 237(1).

In S7025-11, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 237(2).

In S7025-12, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current change in special symbols is the final change in the time-saving gaming state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current change in the special symbol is the final change in the time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S7025-13, and determines that the current change in the special symbol is not the final change in the time-saving gaming state. If so, the process moves to S7025-14.

In S7025-13, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J4 shown in FIG. 237 (4).

In S7025-14, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 237 (3).

In S7025-15, the main CPU 201 refers to the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern table, and determines the type of special symbol (type of starting information), the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process in S7022, and the special symbol determination. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random value for reach determination and the random value for performance selection as starting information of the special symbol shifted to area (0).

[9-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 250, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7041, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", it ends the special symbol variable display start process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "1", the process moves to S7042.

In S7042, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol symbol determination time setting processing that sets the symbol determination time of the special symbol. In this special symbol symbol determination time setting process, the symbol determination time of the special symbol is determined based on the gaming state and the result (win or loss) of the special symbol hit determination process. In this embodiment, as shown in the special symbol variation pattern tables of FIGS. 236 and 237, in the normal gaming state, the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol is determined to be the first symbol confirmation time of 540 ms, and the first symbol confirmation time is 540 ms. When it is the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state, the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol is determined to be an extremely long second symbol confirmation time of 89000 ms, and at the time of the final variation of the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state. If the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a loss, the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol is determined to be the third symbol confirmation time of 15000 ms, and if it is in a time-saving game state other than the above, the symbol of the special symbol is The confirmation time is determined to be the fourth symbol confirmation time of 540 ms. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the symbol confirmation time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and displays the stop display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. let After executing the process in S7042, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043.

The time it takes for the special symbol to be determined may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or based only on the game state. Furthermore, a predetermined symbol determination time (e.g., 540 msec) may be determined.

In S7043, the main CPU 201 performs time saving management processing. In the seventh pachinko game machine, when the variable display of special symbols is finished, a ceiling counter updating process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter and a time saving counter updating process of subtracting 1 from the time saving number counter are performed. When this ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the time saving flag indicating the B time saving gaming state is set to 2 (time saving flag is turned on), the time saving number counter is set to the specified number of times, and the transition to the B time saving gaming state is controlled. . Further, when the time saving number counter becomes 0, the time saving flag is cleared (setting the time saving flag = 0), and the transition from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is controlled. Details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 251. After executing the process in S7043, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7044.

In S7044, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S7015 in FIG. 247) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process in S7044, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7045.

In S7045, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. The special symbol performance stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7045, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7046.

In S7046, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the symbol confirmed number counter. As mentioned above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the confirmed symbol number counter is a counter for counting the number of confirmed special symbols (the number of times the special symbol game is executed). It is also possible to manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions such as the remaining number of time savings and the like. After executing the process of S7046, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-6. Time-saving management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the time saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 250) will be described. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing an example of time saving management processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7043-1, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving counter update process to update the time-saving counter. In particular, in the seventh pachinko game machine, the "time saving counter" in the main RAM 203 is divided into a "first time saving counter" corresponding to the total number of time saving times of special symbols and a "second time saving counter" corresponding to the number of time saving times of the second special symbol. They are different in that they are composed of two types: ``counter''. Details of this time-saving counter updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. 252. After executing the process in S7043-1, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-2.

In S7043-2, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing to update the ceiling counter. This ceiling counter update process is a process of adding 1 to the ceiling counter when the ceiling count prohibition flag is off, and is the same as the ceiling counter update process shown in FIG. 35 of the first pachinko game machine. . After executing the process in S7043-2, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-3.

In S7043-3, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving transition judgment process to judge whether to transition to the B time-saving game state. This time-saving transition judgment process is a process for preparing to transition to the B time-saving game state by turning on the ceiling flag and the ceiling count prohibition flag when the ceiling counter reaches a ceiling value (for example, 599 times), and is similar to the time-saving transition judgment process shown in FIG. 37 for the first pachinko game machine. However, since the seventh pachinko game machine is not controlled to a high probability game state, the time-saving transition judgment process executed in the seventh pachinko game machine does not turn on the probability variable flag, and the on/off judgment of the probability variable flag is judged as "probability variable flag off". After executing the process of S7043-3, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-4.

In S7043-4, the main CPU 201 performs a time saving transition process to transition to the B time saving gaming state. This time saving transition process is a process of transitioning to the B time saving gaming state when the ceiling flag is on, and is similar to the time saving transition process shown in FIG. 38 of the first pachinko gaming machine. After executing the process in S7043-4, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-5.

However, the time-saving transition process executed in the seventh pachinko game machine is different from the time-saving transition process shown in FIG. 38 of the first pachinko game machine.
The first difference is that the seventh pachinko gaming machine is not controlled to a high probability gaming state, so the time saving transition process executed in the seventh pachinko gaming machine does not turn on the probability variation flag, and the probability variation flag The on/off determination is determined as "the probability variable flag is off."
Also, as a second difference, in the seventh pachinko game machine, since it is not controlled to the C time-saving gaming state, the determination of whether the time-saving hit flag is on or off is all determined as "the time-saving winning flag is off."
The third difference is the setting contents set in the B time saving control mode determination process (S208 shown in FIG. 38). In the B time saving control mode determination process of the seventh pachinko gaming machine, the time saving flag = 2 indicating the B time saving gaming state is set (the time saving flag is turned on), and the A time saving ending condition of the second time saving gaming state is set. "First time saving counter = 11 (special symbol total time saving number = 11)" and "Second time saving counter = 5 (second special symbol time saving number of times = 5)" are determined so as to have the same ending condition. Note that the number of times of time saving may be determined for the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter so that the ending condition is different from the A time saving ending condition of the second time saving game state.

In S7043-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether either the "first time saving counter" or the "second time saving counter" is equal to 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time saving counter is equal to 0, it moves the process to S7043-6, and if it determines that the time saving counter does not equal 0, it moves the process to S7043-10.

In S7043-6, the main CPU 201 clears the time saving information. Here, the time-saving information includes a "first time-saving counter", a "second time-saving counter", a "time-saving counter" for identifying whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the A-time-saving gaming state, or the B-time-saving gaming state. Clear (set to 0) the "A time-saving flag" for distinguishing the A time-saving gaming state from the first time-saving gaming state and the second time-saving gaming state. After executing the process in S7043-6, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-7.

In S7043-7, the main CPU 201 refers to the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, and determines whether the number of pending second special symbols>0 (second special symbol start storage area (1) to ( 3)) is determined whether the start information of the second special symbol is stored in any of the items. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of second special symbols on hold is >0, it moves the process to S7043-8, and if it determines that the number of second special symbols on hold is not >0, it moves the process to S7043. Move to -10.

In S7043-8, the main CPU 201 turns on the special 2 control period flag. This "special 2 control period flag" is a flag that identifies whether or not it is in the "second normal gaming state", and when the special 2 control period flag is on, it is in the second normal gaming state. It is shown that. After executing the process in S7043-8, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-10.

In S7043-10, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 are confirmed and updated. Then, a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. In particular, in this embodiment, depending on whether the special 2 control period flag is on or off, the normal game state can be identified as being the "first normal game state" or the "second normal game state" and a game state designation command can be generated. After executing the process of S7043-10, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7043-11.

In S7043-11, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a time-saving transition command when transitioning to a time-saving gaming state. The time-saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S7043-11, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving management process and returns the process to the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 250).

[9-4-7. Time-saving counter update processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the time-saving counter update process executed by the main CPU 201 during the time-saving management process (see FIG. 251) will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing an example of the time saving counter update process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7043-21, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving flag is on (time-saving flag is other than 0). If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving flag is on, it transfers the process to S7043-22, and if it determines that the time-saving flag is not on, it ends the current time-saving counter update process.

In S7043-22, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the "first time-saving counter" in the main RAM 203 to update it. After executing the process of S7043-22, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7043-23.

In S7043-23, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information shifted to the special symbol determination area (0) of the main RAM 203 is start information for the second special symbol.
If the main CPU 201 determines that it is start information for the second special pattern, it transfers processing to S7043-24, and if it determines that it is not start information for the second special pattern, it terminates this time-saving counter update processing.

In S7043-24, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the "second time-saving counter" in the main RAM 203 to update it. After executing the process of S7043-24, the main CPU 201 ends the current time-saving counter update process.

[9-4-8. Special symbol game determination process]
Next, a special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247) will be described with reference to Fig. 253. Fig. 253 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7051, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "2", it transfers the process to S7052.

In S7052, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is in a stopped display mode that indicates a jackpot. If the main CPU 201 determines that a jackpot has been reached, it transfers processing to S7054, and if it determines that a jackpot has not been reached, it transfers processing to S7061.

In S7054, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot external signal processing. In this process, an external signal (for example, a jackpot signal depending on the type of special symbol) is generated which is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 232 for both) via the external terminal board 184 when a jackpot occurs. Thereafter, the generated external signal is output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the process in S7054, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7055.

In S7055, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. Performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of rounds. After executing the process of S7055, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7056.

In S7056, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S7056, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7057.

In S7057, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a jackpot has been reached, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the time-saving flag and the time-saving counters (the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter). After executing the processing of S7057, the main CPU 201 shifts the processing to S7058.

In S7058, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process of S7058, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7059.

In S7059, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the big winning opening preparation process (see S7018 in FIG. 247) will be performed after the end of this special symbol game determination process. . After executing the process of S7059, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7059.

In S7060, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot start display command. After executing the process of S7060, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

In S7061, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a small hit. When the main CPU 201 determines that there is a small hit, the process moves to S7063, and when it determines that there is no small hit (that is, a loss), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7071.

In S7063, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for the small win. In this process, an external signal (for example, a small win signal, etc.) is generated which is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 232 for both) via the external terminal board 184 when a small win occurs. Thereafter, the generated external signal is output to the external terminal board 184.
After executing the process in S7063, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7064.

In S7064, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. Performs processing to set the upper limit value of the number of openings. In this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of small winning openings set in this process is, for example, 16 times. After executing the process in S7064, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7066.

In S7065, the main CPU 201 performs small win status display processing. In this small win status display process, right-handed hitting instruction data is set to notify the player that he or she is instructed to hit right. After executing the process in S7065, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7066.

In S7066, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a small win has occurred, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the time-saving flag and the time-saving counters (the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter). After executing the processing of S7066, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7067.

In S7067, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S7067, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7068.

In S7068, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small win game state setting process (see S7016 in FIG. 247) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After executing the process of S7068, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7069.

In S7069, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a small winning start display command. After executing the process of S7069, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

In S7071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 254. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 247).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S7051 to S7071) within the interrupt prohibited section.

[9-4-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, a special symbol game ending process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 253) will be described with reference to FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol game ending process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7072, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S7072, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7073.

In S7073, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. In addition, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special pattern game end process, the start information stored in the special pattern determination area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing the process of S7073, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7074.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the game state specification parameter setting process in the special symbol game end process, the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 is referred to, and the second special symbol start storage area (1) to (3) is ), when the start information of the second special symbol is not stored in any of them (the number of pending second special symbols=0), the flag is turned off during the special second control period.

In S7074, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S7074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 253).

[9-4-10. Small hit game status setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the small hit game state setting process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing an example of the small winning game state setting process in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In S7081, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", it ends the small win game state setting process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "3", it transfers the process to S7082.

In S7082, the main CPU 201 refers to the win type determination table shown in FIG. 235 and determines the opening mode of the second large prize opening 7151 as the opening mode of the small prize game state, as well as the operation mode of the V shutter 7159 that opens and closes the V prize opening 7156. In this embodiment, the operation mode of the V shutter 7159 is determined to be an operation mode that opens the V prize opening 7156 from the time the second large prize opening 7151 is opened. After executing the process of S7082, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7083.

In S7083, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening opening/closing control process. In this second large prize opening opening/closing control process, opening/closing pattern data (e.g., time-series control data such as the opening time, wait time, and maximum number of openings of the second large prize opening 7151) is generated to open and close the second large prize opening 7151 based on the opening mode of the determined small win game state. Then, control based on the generated opening/closing pattern data is started. After executing the process of S7083, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7084.

In S7084, the main CPU 201 performs V winning opening opening/closing control processing. In this V winning opening opening/closing control process, operation pattern data (for example, opening time, wait time, maximum number of openings, etc. of the V winning opening 7156) for opening and closing the V winning opening 7156 based on the determined operating mode of the V shutter 7159 sequence control data). Then, control based on the generated operation pattern data is started. After executing the process in S7084, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7085.

In S7085, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4" (S7085), the small win game state control process (see S7017 in FIG. 247) will be performed after the small win game state setting process is completed. After executing the process of S7085, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7086.

In S7086, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. The main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process of S7086, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game state setting process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-11. Small hit game state control process]
Next, referring to Fig. 256, the small win game state control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 247) will be described. Fig. 256 is a flow chart showing an example of the small win game state control process in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In S7091, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", it ends the small hit game state control process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and resumes the control of the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "4", the process moves to S7092.

In S7092, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that entered the second large prize opening 7151 (number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 7151) is the maximum number of winning balls when the second large prize opening 7151 is opened by the operation of the second special power shutter 7154. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the second large prize opening counter counted by the second large prize opening count switch 7152 (see FIG. 232) is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the second large prize opening 7151 (e.g. 10 balls).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7092 that the number of winnings at the second large winning slot 7151 is not the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S7093, and if the main CPU 201 determines in S7092 that the number of winnings at the second large winning slot 7151 is the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S7094.

In S7093, the main CPU 201 determines whether all the opening modes of the second grand prize opening 7151 have been completed. In this process, it is determined whether the control based on the opening/closing pattern data generated in the process of S7084 (see FIG. 255) has ended.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7093 that all the opening modes of the second big prize opening 7151 have not been completed, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game state control process and transfers the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247). If it is determined in S7093 that all opening modes of the second big prize opening 7151 have been completed, the process moves to S7094.

In S7094, the main CPU 201 performs processing to close the second large prize opening 7151. After executing processing of S7094, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7095.

In S7095, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning prize is detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the V winning a prize opening 7156 within a specified time (that is, whether there has been detection by the V winning a prize opening switch 7157).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7095 that a V winning was detected, it transfers processing to S7097, and if it determines in S7095 that a V winning was not detected, it transfers processing to S7105.

In S7097, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot from the second route. In this processing, an external signal (e.g., a jackpot signal according to the type of special symbol) is generated that is output to the hall computer 186 (see FIG. 232 for both) via the external terminal board 184 when a jackpot occurs. The generated external signal is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the processing of S7097, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S7098.

In S7098, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning type determination table shown in FIG. Performs processing to set the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds. After executing the process in S7098, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7099.

In S7099, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the opening of the second large prize opening 7151 (i.e., the operation of the second special electric shutter 7154), which was first performed based on a small prize, is processed as the first round of round play. In other words, the large prize play state that is executed when it is determined that a V prize has been detected (S7095 is determined as YES), will start from the second round of round play. After performing the process of S7099, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7100.

In S7100, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S7100, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7101.

In S7101, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the gaming state management process when it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the time saving flag and the time saving counters (the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter). After executing the process in S7101, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7102.

In S7102, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S7102, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7103.

In S7103, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5." By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5," the large prize opening preparation process (FIG. 247) will be performed after the special symbol game judgment process is completed. After executing the process of S7103, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7104.

In S7104, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a V hit start display command. After executing the process of S7104, the main CPU 201 ends the small hit game state control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

In S7105, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the small winning end display command. After executing the process in S7105, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7106.

In S7106, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 254 is performed. After executing the process of S7106, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game state control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-12. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 257, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 247) will be described. Fig. 257 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7111, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", it ends the big winning opening preparation process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "5", the process moves to S7112.

In S7112, the main CPU 201 loads the round counter value. The round counter is a counter that counts the number of times a round game is executed in a jackpot game state. Note that the count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a predetermined area within the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S7112, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7113.

In S7113, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded round counter value is the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7113 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is the upper limit, it transfers processing to S7114, and if the main CPU 201 determines in S7113 that the number of times the large prize opening has been opened is not the upper limit, it transfers processing to S7117.

In S7114, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7," the jackpot game state end process (FIG. 247) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing S7114, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7115.

In S7115, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S7115, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7116.

In S7116, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot end display command. The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S7116, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning hole opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

In S7117, the main CPU 201 performs processing to add 1 to the round counter value. After executing processing of S7117, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S7118.

In S7118, the main CPU 201 performs a process of selecting the large prize opening to be opened. In this process, the first large prize opening 7131 is selected as the large prize opening to be opened for the large prize game state. Note that if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a large prize and the large prize game control process is started because the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small prize, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a small prize and the large prize game control process is started because a V win has been detected, the second large prize opening 7151 may be selected as the large prize opening to be opened instead of the first large prize opening 7131. After executing the process of S7118, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7119.

In S7119, the main CPU 201 performs various setting processes related to the large prize opening. In this process, for example, the number of times the first large prize opening 7131 is opened, the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 7131, the maximum number of prizes won by the first large prize opening 7131, etc. are set. Note that this is not intended to exclude cases where the first large prize opening 7131 is opened multiple times in one round. In this case, however, it is preferable to perform the control for managing the number of rounds and the control for managing the number of times the first large prize opening 7131 is opened and closed as separate processes. After executing the process of S7119, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7120.

In S7120, the main CPU 201 performs release control data generation processing. In this process, opening control data for opening the first big winning hole 7131 is generated based on the information set in the big winning hole related various setting process of S7119. Then, control based on the generated release control data is started. After executing the process in S7120, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7121.

In S7121, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", after the completion of this big winning hole opening preparation process, the big winning hole opening control process (see FIG. 247) will be performed. Become. After executing the process in S7121, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7122.

In S7122, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S7122, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7123.

In S7123, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the large prize opening display command. The large prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7123, the main CPU 201 ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-13. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7131, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "6", it transfers the process to S7132.

In S7132, the main CPU 201 determines that when the first big winning hole 7131 is opened, the number of game balls that entered the first big winning hole 7131 (number of winnings in the first big winning hole 7131) is the maximum winning number. Determine whether it exists or not. In this process, the value of the first big winning hole counter counted by the first big winning hole count switch 7132 (see FIG. 232) is changed to the value of the maximum winning number of the first big winning hole 7131 defined in advance (for example, 7 ).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7132 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 7131 is not the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S7133, and if the main CPU 201 determines in S7132 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 7131 is the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S7134.

In S7133, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 7131 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the various setting processes related to the big winning opening (see S7119 in FIG. 257) has elapsed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S7133 that the maximum opening time of the first big winning hole 7131 has not elapsed, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247). . Further, when the main CPU 201 determines in S7133 that the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 7131 has elapsed, the process moves to S7134.

In S7134, the main CPU 201 performs a process of closing the first big prize opening 7131. After executing the process in S7134, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7135.

In S7135, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the large prize opening control processing is completed, the large prize opening opening preparation processing (see FIG. 257) is performed again. After executing the processing of S7135, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7136.

In S7136, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S7136, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7137.

In S7137, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S7137, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247).

[9-4-14. Jackpot game state end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the jackpot game state end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247) will be described. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game state ending process in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In S7141, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7," it ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 247), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "7," it transfers the process to S7142.

In S7142, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end setting processing. In this special symbol game end setting process, various flag data used in the jackpot game state and the values of various counters (for example, round counter, big winning opening winning counter, etc.) are set or reset. After executing the process in S7142, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7143.

In S7143, the main CPU 201 performs a state setting process after the end of the jackpot. In this state setting process after the end of the jackpot, the main CPU 201 refers to the win type determination table shown in FIG. 235, and determines the mode of the game state after the jackpot game state (time-saving flag and number of time-saving times) based on the selected symbol command determined in the special symbol determination process in S7023 above and the game state data at the time of winning that indicates the game state at the time of winning set in the win type determination process in S7024 above, and sets the data of the determined game state mode. After executing the process of S7143, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7144.

Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning is normal game state and the selected symbol command is "z1", the time-saving flag is set to 1 (time-saving flag is turned on), the first time-saving count counter is set to 7, and the second time-saving count counter is set to 1. Also, if the game state at the time of winning is normal game state and the selected symbol command is "z2-8", the time-saving flag is set to 1 (time-saving flag is turned on), the first time-saving count counter is set to 11, and the second time-saving count counter is set to 5. And, if the game state at the time of winning is time-saving game state, the time-saving flag is set to 1 (time-saving flag is turned on) for all selected symbol commands, the first time-saving count counter is set to 7, and the second time-saving count counter is set to 1.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to identify the A time saving gaming state in which the first time saving number counter = 7 and the second time saving number counter = 1 are set as the "first time saving gaming state", the A time saving flag = 1, and set the A time saving flag = 2 in order to identify the A time saving gaming state in which the first time saving number counter = 11 and the second time saving number counter = 5 are set as the "second time saving gaming state". do. Then, a gaming state designation command can be generated based on the A time saving flag.

In S7144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 254 is performed. After executing the process of S7144, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 set an interrupt prohibited section and perform the above-mentioned jackpot game state end processing within the interrupt prohibited section.

[9-6-15. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 260, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Note that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 260, the main CPU 201 stores normal symbol start information and determines whether or not the normal symbol determination start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process. Needless to say, we are doing this.

Figure 260 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 260 are control state numbers for the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 201 first determines whether or not the waiting time of the normal symbol is 0 (S7300).

If it is determined in S7300 that the waiting time for the normal symbol is not 0, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol control process and transfers the process to S41 (see FIG. 21) of the main control main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7301.

In S7301, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S7301, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7310. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S7310 and subsequent processes based on the control state number read in the process of S7301.

In S7310, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This process of S7310 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this normal symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 261. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7320.

In S7320, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S7320 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7330.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when it is determined that the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, the main CPU 201 displays the predetermined normal symbol The symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec as shown in FIG. 243) is set as the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". The waiting time of this normal symbol will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter within the system timer interrupt processing performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. In addition, when the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1" and it waits for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

The pattern determination time for normal patterns may differ depending on the type of normal pattern, or may differ depending on the game state. For example, in the normal game state, the pattern determination time may be the fifth pattern determination time (e.g., 540 msec), and in the time-saving game state, the pattern determination time may be the sixth pattern determination time (e.g., 132 msec) that is shorter than the fifth pattern determination time.

In S7330, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol game determination processing. This process of S7330 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7340.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a determination process of the derivation result of the normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a normal symbol loss). Then, when the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a normal symbol hit, the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 7146 is performed, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 7146.

In the process of setting the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146, the opening pattern (number of times to open, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric device 7146 is determined based on the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data by referring to the opening pattern determination table of the normal electric device shown in FIG. 242, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal electric device opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146.

In S7340, the main CPU 201 performs the normal electric role release process. This S7340 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7350.

In this normal electric device opening process, the main CPU 201 opens the second start hole 7140 according to the opening pattern of the normal electric device 7146 determined in the normal symbol game judgment process of S7330, and closes the second start hole 7140 when a specified number of game balls for normal power (e.g., one ball) enter the second start hole 7140 or when all opening patterns of the normal electric device 7146 have ended. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric device 7146 has ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S7350, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit termination processing. This process of S7350 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 finishes this normal symbol per end processing, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", ends the normal symbol control processing, and transfers the processing to the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Return to

In this normal symbol winning end processing, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbols determined in the above S7310 to S7340 and various random numbers stored in the normal symbol determination area.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned normal symbol control processing (S7300 to S7350) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[9-6-16. Normal symbol variable display start processing]
Next, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 260) will be described with reference to FIG. 261. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 261, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S7311).

If it is determined in S7311 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 260). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7312.

In S7312, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of starting information of normal symbols. In this process, the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol determining area (0), and the starting information stored in the normal symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (2) to normal symbol starting storage area (4). The starting information stored in is shifted to the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (3). After executing the process in S7312, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7313.

In S7313, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol winning judgment process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 240, and determines winning/losing judgment value data ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing") based on the game state and the normal symbol winning judgment random number value stored in the normal symbol judgment area (0). After executing S7313, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7314.

In S7314, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. "Normal symbol selection symbol data" is determined based on the symbol random number value of the symbol. After executing the process in S7314, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7315.

In S7315, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the normal symbol variation pattern. In this processing, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 243, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and normal symbol variation display time based on the game state and the normal symbol selection symbol data. After executing the processing of S7315, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S7316.

In S7316, the main CPU 201 performs a process for setting the variable display time of the normal pattern. In this process, the variable display time of the normal pattern determined in the normal pattern variable pattern determination process (S7315) is set to the waiting time of the normal pattern in the main RAM 203, and the normal pattern display unit 161 is caused to start displaying the variable normal pattern. This waiting time of the normal pattern is decremented as a normal pattern timer counter in a system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at 2 msec intervals. After executing the process of S7316, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7317.

In S7317, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the normal symbol variable display start process is completed, the normal symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 260) is performed. (see S7320) will be performed. After executing the process in S7317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7318.

In S7318, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of the normal symbol variation pattern command. The normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the performance control command transmission process (see S322 in FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[9-4-17. Switch input detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 262, the switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 during the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 45) will be described. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing an example of switch input detection processing in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the seventh pachinko game machine has the additional configuration of a first large prize slot count switch 7132, a second large prize slot count switch 7152, and a V prize slot switch 7157, and therefore some of the above processing has been added.

In S7381, the main CPU 201 executes the first starting opening winning detection process. After executing the process in S7381, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7382.

In this first start port winning detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects a game ball entering the first start port 7120 by the first start port switch 7121, it sets payout information corresponding to the first start port 7120 and determines whether there is any free space in the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (4).
When it is determined that there is free space in the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), various random number values (for example, random number values for jackpot determination, random number values for symbol random number, random number values for reach determination, random number values for effect selection, etc.) are obtained as start information for the first special symbol, and the various random number values obtained are stored in one first special symbol determination area in a FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Then, a transmission reservation process is performed for a winning command for the first special symbol indicating the winning of the first start port 7120 and the number of reserved first special symbols. The winning command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the effect control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special pattern start memory areas (1) to (4), the first start port winning detection process will be terminated without acquiring various random number values.

In S7382, the main CPU 201 executes the second start port winning detection process. After executing the process of S7382, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7383.

In this second starting port winning detection process, when the second starting port switch 7141 detects that the game ball enters the second starting port 7140, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the second starting port 7140. It is determined whether there is a free space in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (3).
When it is determined that there is free space in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (3), various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, A symbol random number value, a random number value for reach determination, a random number value for effect selection, etc.) are acquired, and the various acquired random values are stored in one second special symbol determination area in FIFO format. Then, a transmission reservation process of a winning command for a second special symbol indicating a winning to the second starting opening 7140 and a pending number of second special symbols is performed. The winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.
On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol start storage area (1) to second special symbol start storage area (3), the second start opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random values. This will end the process.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are four first special symbol start memory areas for the first special symbol, but there are three first special symbol start memory areas for the second special symbol. Therefore, the number of reserved first special symbols is four, and the number of reserved second special symbols is three. Note that the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols can be freely changed as needed, but it is preferable to keep it within four.

In S7383, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing. In the general winning hole passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the general winning hole 122 is set. After executing the process in S7383, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7384.

In S7384, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening passage detection process. In the first large prize opening passage detection process, when the first large prize opening count switch 7132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 7131, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the first large prize opening 7131 and adds 1 to the first large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 7131 to update it. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a first large prize opening entry command indicating an entry into the first large prize opening 7131. The first large prize opening entry command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7384, the main CPU 201 shifts the process to S7385.

In S7385, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening passage detection process. In the second large prize opening passage detection process, when the second large prize opening count switch 7152 detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 7151, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the second large prize opening 7151 and adds 1 to the second large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 7151 to update it. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a second large prize opening entry command indicating an entry into the second large prize opening 7151. The second large prize opening entry command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S7385, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S7386.

In S7386, the main CPU 201 performs V winning a prize opening passage detection processing. In the V winning hole passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 7156 is detected by the V winning hole switch 7157, the main CPU 201 turns on the V winning hole passage flag. Then, a transmission reservation process of a V passage command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 7156 is performed. The V passing command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that even if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156, the payout information is not set. After executing the process in S7386, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7387.

In S7387, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing the process in S7387, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S7388.

In this gate passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the passage of the game ball through the passing gate 7126 by the passing gate switch 7127, it determines whether there is any free space in the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (4).
When it is determined that there is free space in the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (4), various random number values (for example, random number values for determining whether the normal pattern is a hit, pattern random number values of the normal pattern, etc.) are obtained as start information for the normal pattern, and the various obtained random number values are stored in one normal pattern start memory area in FIFO format.
On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the normal pattern start memory areas (1) to (4), the gate passage detection process will be terminated without acquiring various random number values.

In S7388, the main CPU 201 performs prefetch command generation processing. After executing the process of S7388, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this prefetch command generation process, the various random numerical values obtained in the current first starting opening winning detection process or second starting opening winning detection process are analyzed based on the gaming state with reference to the prefetching related data in FIG. 239. , generates a read-ahead command. In addition, as shown in the prefetch related data in FIG. 239, in the time saving gaming state, jackpot gaming state, and small winning gaming state, the prefetching command (second special Only the symbol prefetch command) can be generated. Then, a prefetch command transmission reservation process for transmitting the generated prefetch command to the sub control circuit 300 is performed. The prefetch command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 45) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[9-5-1. Game state transition diagram]
Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the transition of the gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine will be described. FIG. 263 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As mentioned above, the "first normal gaming state" is a normal gaming state in which left-handed hitting is the normal gaming mode, and it is easy for the game ball to enter the first starting port 7120, It is difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting port 7140.

The "second normal game state" is the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol that is performed based on the start information of the second special symbol that was stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203 when the time-saving game state ended (i.e., the normal game state during which the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is being consumed). Here, the second normal game state may be either left-handed or right-handed as the regular game mode, but since the return rate of transitioning back to the second time-saving game state during the consumption of the reserved number of second special symbols is high (about 70%), right-handed play is set as the regular game mode (see FIG. 245).

In the time-saving game state consisting of the first to third time-saving game states, right-hand play is the normal game mode in all cases, and while it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 7120, it is easy for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 7140. As described above, the time-saving game state when "time-saving number of times for the second special symbol = 1" is determined as the A time-saving end condition is called the "first time-saving game state", the time-saving game state when "time-saving number of times for the second special symbol = 5" is determined as the A time-saving end condition is called the "second time-saving game state", and the time-saving game state B is called the "third time-saving game state".

(First normal gaming state transition control)
As shown in FIG. 263, in the first normal game state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 7120, a "jackpot" or "loss" is determined based on the starting information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 233), when a "big hit" is determined, the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after the jackpot gaming state triggered by the start information of the first special symbol in the first normal gaming state ends, 90% shifts to the first time-saving gaming state according to the selected symbol command, and 10% shifts to the first time-saving gaming state. Transition to the second time-saving game state (see FIGS. 234 and 235).

Although not shown, when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140 due to an irregular playing mode in the first normal gaming state, a "jackpot" is triggered based on the starting information of the second special symbol. ", "Small hit" or "Lose" is determined (see FIG. 233), and when a "jackpot" is determined, the game shifts to the jackpot game state; when a "small win" is determined, the game shifts to the small win game state. . Then, after the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the second special symbol in the first normal game state ends, the entire game shifts to the second time-saving game state (see FIG. 235).

Further, in the first normal game state (including the second normal game state), after the number of variable displays of the special symbols reaches 599 times, the normal game state shifts to the third time-saving game state.

(Transition Control of the First Time-Reduction Gaming State)
In the first time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the second start hole 7140, a "big win", a "small win" or a "miss" is determined (see FIG. 233), and if a "big win" is determined based on the start information of the second special symbol, the game state transitions to a big win game state, and if a "small win" is determined, the game state transitions to a small win game state. In particular, in this embodiment, when based on the start information of the second special symbol, a "small win" is determined with a high probability of about 1/3 regardless of the game state, and it is configured to be possible to transition to the big win game state via the second route from the small win game state.

Here, in the first time-saving game state, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first start hole 7120, but there are cases where the reserved number of first special symbols stored during the normal game state remains. In such cases, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 233), and if a "jackpot" is determined, the game transitions to the jackpot game state.

Then, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot or small win is the first time-saving game state, after the end of the jackpot game state, everything shifts to the second time-saving game state (see FIG. 235).

In addition, when in the first time-saving game state, if a "lose" is determined based on the start information of the second special symbol (non-winning), the first normal game is changed from the first time-saving game state. will move to the state.

Furthermore, in the first time-saving game state, when "special symbol total time-saving number = 7 times" is established as A time-saving end condition due to irregular game mode etc., that is, a game ball enters the second starting port 7140. When the "lose" judgment is made seven times (fluctuating display of the first special symbol seven times) based on the starting information of the first special symbol without will move to the state.

(Second and third time-saving gaming state transition control)
In the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140, a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss" occurs based on the starting information of the second special symbol. is determined (see FIG. 233), and when a "big hit" is determined, the game shifts to a jackpot gaming state, and when a "small win" is determined, the game shifts to a small winning gaming state.

Here, in the second or third time-saving game state, it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 7120, but there are cases where the reserved number of first special symbols stored in the normal game state before transitioning to the second or third time-saving game state remains. In such cases, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 233), and if a "jackpot" is determined, a transition is made to the jackpot game state.

Then, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot or small win is the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, after the jackpot game state ends, the game state shifts to the second time-saving game state (Fig. 235 reference).

Also, based on the starting information of the second special symbol, 5 "losing" judgments (fluctuating display of the 1st special symbol 5 times) are performed, or the starting information of the 1st special symbol or the starting of the 2nd special symbol is determined. When 11 "losing" determinations (11 variable displays of special symbols) are made based on the information, the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends.

When the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends, if there are reserved numbers of the second special symbol (start information for the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203), the game state transitions to the second normal game state. On the other hand, when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends, if there are no reserved numbers of the second special symbol (start information for the second special symbol is not stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203), the game state transitions to the first normal game state.

(Transition Control of Second Normal Gaming State)
In the second normal game state, a "big hit,""smallhit," or "miss" is determined based on the starting information of the second special pattern (see Figure 233), and if a "big hit" is determined, the game state transitions to a big hit game state, and if a "small hit" is determined, the game state transitions to a small hit game state.

Then, after the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the second special symbol in the second normal game state ends, the game returns to the second time-saving game state (see FIG. 235).

In addition, when the reserved number of second special symbols at the end of the second time-saving game state is consumed (when all the start information for the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203 is determined to be a "miss" and erased), the second normal game state ends and the game transitions to the first normal game state.

[9-5-2. Performance flow]
Next, an outline of the performance performed in the seventh pachinko game machine will be explained using the overall flow of the performance. FIG. 264 is an example of the production flow of the gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The effects performed in the seventh pachinko gaming machine include a variable effect consisting of a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to special symbols displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a display effect of characters, etc., a sound effect output from the speaker 32, a lamp effect emitted from the group of LEDs 46, a special effect effect that drives the group of special effect symbols 58, and an effect of changing the operation mode of the effect button 54. Note that in this embodiment, the decorative symbols are composed of three main symbols, a left symbol, a center symbol, and a right symbol, and a sub-symbol that is much smaller than the main symbols. Note that the number and type of decorative symbols are not limited to this.

In the embodiment, the performance based on the lottery of the first special symbol is also referred to as the "performance of the first special symbol", and the performance based on the lottery of the second special symbol is also referred to as the "performance of the second special symbol".

(Production in the first normal game state)
In the first normal game state, the performances that can be executed are different between the general performance state and the limited performance state.

In the general presentation state of the first normal game state, at least "normal variation," "normal reach," "super reach," and "ultra super reach" are configured to be executable as "first special symbol presentations," and at least "normal variation" and "card presentation" are configured to be executable as "second special symbol presentations."

In addition, in the limited presentation state of the first normal game state, at least "normal fluctuation" and "step-up reach" are configured to be executable as the "first special symbol presentation," and at least "normal fluctuation" and "card presentation" are configured to be executable as the "second special symbol presentation."

In addition, in the first normal game state, when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the ceiling value of 599 rotations, the "door performance" is configured to be executable. Note that the "door effect" is configured to be executable in other game states as well.

In addition, as a preview performance of the "first special symbol performance" in the first normal game state, a "window notice" is configured to be executable in the variation, and a "pending change notice" and a "pending change notice" as a look-ahead production in the advance variation. "Flash notice" is configured to be executable.

"Normal fluctuation" is a fluctuating performance in which all the decorative symbols start to fluctuate at high speed and stop displaying in order, and can be performed when you lose in the special symbol lottery. It is.

"Normal reach", "super reach", and "ultra super reach" are exclusive effects for the first special symbol that can be executed in the normal performance state, and are reach effects that suggest that the lottery result for the first special symbol may be a jackpot. A "normal reach" is a reach effect that occurs when the left and right symbols are temporarily displayed as the same type of symbol, and as an example, it is a reach effect in which the middle symbol changes display at a slow speed. In a "normal reach", if the middle symbol is displayed as a different type of symbol from the left and right symbols, it is a miss, and if the middle symbol is displayed as the same type of symbol as the left and right symbols, it is a jackpot. In addition, a "normal reach" may develop into a "super reach" without the middle symbol being displayed as a stationary symbol, and is configured so that a "super reach" can further develop into a "ultra super reach".

According to the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 236(1),
The random number values for selecting the effects are set so that the expected probability of a jackpot increases in the order of "Normal Reach"<"SuperReach"<"Super Super Reach".

Further, the "card performance" is a special performance for the second special symbol, and is a reach performance that suggests that the lottery result of the second special symbol may be a jackpot or a small win. The "card performance" is, for example, a performance in which a card with a predetermined pattern is displayed, and when the card is slowly reversed, characters indicating a jackpot or small win are displayed.

Further, "step up reach" is a special performance of the first special symbol that can be executed in the limited performance state, and is a reach performance that suggests that the lottery result of the first special symbol may be a jackpot. For example, in "Step Up Reach", a predetermined character is displayed so that it can grow from STEP 1 to STEP 3, and if it finally grows to STEP 3, it becomes a jackpot, and if it grows only to STEP 1 or STEP 2, it becomes a loss.

"Door performance" is a performance that can be executed regardless of the type of special symbol, the performance time is undefined (end time is not specified), and it is also a performance that suggests the transition of each game state. . For example, in the "door effect", a half-open door is displayed from the left and right, the half-open door rattles for a predetermined period of time, the door is completely closed, and the door is completely opened again. , it is announced that the background etc. have been changed and the gaming state has been shifted.

In the first normal game state, when the number of variable displays of the special symbol reaches the ceiling value of 599 revolutions, the "door effect" is executed, and from the next special symbol (600 revolutions), the B time-saving game state ( You will be notified that the game has moved to the third time-saving gaming state.

"Window notice" is a performance that foretells a change in the stage, the performance contents of a symbol performance pattern, or the lottery result of a special symbol lottery when a variable display of special symbols is being performed. As an example of the "window preview", a window is displayed in the display area of the display device 7, and predetermined preview contents are displayed in the window.

"Reservation change notice" is an example of a look-ahead effect, in which the lottery result of the special symbol and the change in the special symbol are displayed based on the display mode of the reservation image indicating the number of reserved special symbols before the lottery of the special symbol is carried out. It is a performance that suggests information.

The "flash preview" is an example of a pre-reading effect, in which the LED group 46 emits a predetermined amount of light from the time when the winning jackpot enters the first starting hole 7120 until the fluctuation begins.

(Production in the first time-saving gaming state)
In the first time-saving game state, at least "boss battle performance", "super shortening variation", and "door performance" are configured to be executable as "first special symbol performance", and "second special symbol performance" As such, it is configured so that at least "boss battle production" can be executed.

"Ultra-short change" refers to a change pattern in which all decorative patterns start to change at high speed and independently, and then all decorative patterns stop changing in an extremely short time (e.g. 200 ms).

The "boss battle effect" is a special effect that can be executed in the first time-saving game state, and is a reach effect that suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol may be a jackpot or a small win. "Boss battle production" is, for example, a production in which a boss character appears and the main character and the boss character confront each other, and when the main character wins ("boss battle production (victory)"), it becomes a jackpot or small win, and the main character wins. If the character is defeated ("boss battle production (defeat)"), the game is a loss.

As mentioned above, in the first time-saving game state, since "time-saving number of second special symbols = 1" is determined as the A time-saving end condition, the second special symbol is drawn, and a jackpot or If it is a small hit, the game shifts to the second time-saving gaming state, and if it is a loss, it shifts to the first normal gaming state. Then, in the first time-saving game state, a second special symbol is drawn, and if it is a jackpot or small hit, a "boss battle effect (win)" is executed, and if it is a loss, a "boss battle effect (defeat)" is executed. be done.

In addition, in the first time-saving game state, if there are still reserved numbers of the first special symbol stored during the normal game state remaining, a lottery is held for the first special symbol, and if there is a jackpot, a "boss battle performance (victory)" is executed, and if there is a miss, an "ultra-shortened time variation" is executed.

When the A time-saving end condition "total number of times special symbols have been shortened = 7 times" is met due to an irregular game mode or the like in the first time-saving game state, that is, when the game ball does not enter the second starting hole 7140 and the first special symbol is drawn 7 times, if there is a jackpot, a "boss battle effect (victory)" is executed, and if there is a miss, a "door effect" is executed. Here, when the "door effect" is executed in the first time-saving game state, a transition to the first normal game state is announced.

(Effects in the second and third time-saving game states)
At least a "Sengoku time effect" is configured to be executable other than the final change of the special symbols in the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state, and at least a "Sengoku time effect," a "door effect," and a "continuous battle entry effect" are configured to be executable in the final change of the special symbols in the second time-shortened game state or the third time-shortened game state.

"Sengoku Time Effects" refers to a series of effects that take place from the second or third time-saving game state to the small win game state, and the period that takes place from the second or third time-saving game state to the small win game state is also called "Sengoku Time." Details of this "Sengoku Time Effects" will be described later using Figures 288 and 289.

"Continuous battle entry performance" is a special performance that can be executed in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, and when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends (Sengoku time is This is a performance that announces that the next consecutive battle reach will be held).

As described above, when the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state ends, if there are reserved numbers of the second special pattern, the game state transitions to the second normal game state, and if there are no reserved numbers of the second special pattern, the game state transitions to the first normal game state. Then, at the final change of the special pattern in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, if there are reserved numbers of the second special pattern, a "continuous battle entry effect" is executed, and if there are no reserved numbers of the second special pattern, a "door effect" is executed. Here, when a "door effect" is executed in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, a transition to the first normal game state is notified.

(Effects in the Second Normal Gaming State)
In the second normal gaming state, at least a "continuous battle presentation" is executable as the "second special symbol presentation".

The "continuous battle performance" is a special performance that can be executed in the second normal game state, and is a reach performance that suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol may be a jackpot or a small win. An example of a "continuous battle production" is a production in which a rival character appears and the main character and rival character confront each other up to three times in a row, and if the main character wins in any of the confrontations (" If there is a jackpot or small hit ("continuous battle performance (defeat)"), and the main character is defeated ("continuous battle performance (defeat)"), it is a loss.

In addition to the effects shown in FIG. 264, this embodiment also includes various other effects during a jackpot, as well as multiple detailed stages that serve as the basis for the effects (the motifs of the effects), but these will be described in more detail later.

[9-6. Sub-control circuit]
In order to execute the above-mentioned effects, the control contents of the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands etc. transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be described.

First, details of various tables stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained using FIGS. 265 to 277.

[9-6-1. Symbol Presentation Pattern Determination Table for First Normal Game State]
A symbol presentation pattern determination table E1 for determining a symbol presentation pattern in the first normal gaming state will be described. Fig. 265 shows an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table in the first normal gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The "performance pattern" refers to information that defines display effects of characters, etc., voice effects, changes in the operation mode of the effect button 54, and the like. In addition, the "design performance pattern" is defined as the variation of the decorative design corresponding to the special design, the related display performance of characters, etc., the audio performance, the change performance of the operation mode of the performance button 54, etc. information. In addition to the symbol presentation pattern, various display effects such as a preview presentation pattern can be executed in a superimposed manner.

As shown in FIG. 265, the symbol presentation pattern determination table E1 for the first normal game state associates the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the presentation stage that determines the presentation display state, the number of times the special symbol variation display has occurred counted since the normal game state began, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

Here, the "production stage" is information that defines the performance display state of the production background, motif, etc. For example, "production stage 0" refers to the Yamamura stage in the general production state of the first normal game state. "Production Stage 1" indicates the castle town stage in the general production state of the first normal game state, and "Production Stage 2" indicates the seaside stage in the limited production state of the first normal game state. In addition, in this embodiment, only two stages are provided in the general performance state of the first normal game state, but three or more different stages may be provided.

In addition, "selection rate" corresponds to the fact that the obtained first random number value is within a predetermined range with respect to the first random number value consisting of the first random number range, but for convenience of explanation, It has been replaced with the selection rate. Note that the selection rate may include 0% in addition to 1 to 100%, and does not exclude the wording 0% selection rate. The above also applies to the "selection rate" in the tables shown in FIGS. 267 to 277 and the like. In this embodiment, a large number of multiple types of random number values in different random number ranges are provided, and a description of the types of random number values will be omitted as appropriate.

According to the symbol presentation pattern determination table E1 for the first normal game state shown in FIG. 265, even if the variation pattern command for the same special symbol is used, different symbol presentation patterns (different presentations) can be determined depending on the presentation stage.

Furthermore, according to the symbol presentation pattern determination table E1 in the first normal gaming state shown in FIG. performance) is configured so that it can be determined. Then, when the special symbol fluctuation display count = 599 and the special symbol lottery is a "lose" (that is, when moving to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state)), the door production The effect pattern 100 for performing the above is determined. In addition, even if the number of variable display times of the special symbol is 599, if there is a "big hit" or "small win" in the special symbol lottery, the system will not shift to the B time-saving gaming state (third time-saving gaming state). Since the game state shifts to a jackpot game state or a small win game state, a symbol performance pattern for executing a performance suggesting a jackpot or a small win (a card performance in the case of a second special symbol performance) is determined. There is. Note that the performance stage 2 is a dedicated stage in the limited performance state, and the number of variable display of the special symbol never becomes 599, so the performance pattern 100 for executing the door performance is never determined.

[9-6-2. Second normal game state start determination table]
When the second normal game state starts, a start time determination table for determining a symbol effect pattern determination table will be described. Figure 266 shows an example of a start time determination table for the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

In the second normal game state, when the second normal game state starts, i.e., when the first variable display of the second special symbol in the second normal game state starts, one symbol presentation pattern determination table is determined from among the multiple symbol presentation pattern determination tables, and when the variable display of the second special symbol starts thereafter, the symbol presentation pattern determination table that was already determined when the second normal game state started is referenced.

As shown in FIG. 266, the table for determining the start time of the second normal game state includes the pending number of second special symbols, the number of hits within the pending number of second special symbols, pullback information, and the symbol presentation pattern. Decision tables E2 to E8 are associated with each other.

Here, "the number of winning symbols among the reserved number of second special symbols" refers to the number of start information (random number value for determining a big win) that is determined to be a big win or a small win stored in the second special symbol start memory area of the main RAM 203, and since the reserved number of second special symbols is set to a maximum of three, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts (one is subtracted), the reserved number of second special symbols is a maximum of two.

"Pullback information" refers to fluctuation information that is initially determined to be a jackpot or small hit among starting information including the first fluctuation and pending memory in the second normal gaming state; The information that is first determined to be a jackpot or small hit when the second special symbol is displayed for the first time is "1", and the first information that is determined to be a jackpot or small hit when the second special symbol is displayed for the second time is "1". The information that is determined is "2", the information that is first determined to be a jackpot or small hit when the second special symbol is displayed for the third time is "3", and the information that is determined to be a jackpot or small hit is "3". If it does not exist, it is set to "0".

Then, from the "number of winning pieces within the pending number of second special symbols" and the "pullback information", it is determined that after the end of the current jackpot gaming state (the jackpot gaming state that has transitioned from the small winning state), it will be possible to win the jackpot or small hit again. This means that it is possible to grasp the "pending consecutive stock number" corresponding to the number of times the determination is made.

Therefore, the table for determining the start time of the second normal gaming state shown in FIG. 266 determines the order (number of times) of the variable display of the second special symbol that is first determined to be a jackpot or small hit in the second normal gaming state. It can be said that the symbol performance pattern determination table for the second normal game state is determined according to the number of reserved continuous stocks.

[9-6-3. Second normal game state symbol effect pattern determination table]
The symbol presentation pattern determination tables E2 to E8 for determining the symbol presentation pattern in the second normal gaming state will be described below. Fig. 267 shows an example of the symbol presentation pattern determination table in the second normal gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E2 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (1) is a table that is determined when all symbols are misses (pull-back information 0) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0, and corresponds to the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the number of reserved symbols of the second special symbol, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

Furthermore, according to the symbol production pattern determination table E2 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267(1), even if the variable pattern command is the same special symbol, the symbols differ depending on the number of pending second special symbols. A performance that is configured to be able to determine a performance pattern (different performance), and when the number of pending second special symbols = 0 (final variation of the second normal game state), a performance that indicates that the second normal game state ends. The symbol presentation pattern R3 to be executed is determined.

As shown in FIG. 267 (2), the symbol production pattern determination table E3 in the second normal gaming state is a table determined when the first variation occurs (withdrawal information 1) and the number of pending continuous stocks is 0. Yes, the second special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random value), and the symbol production pattern are associated.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E4 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (3) is a table that is determined when there is one variation hit (pull-back information 1) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1, and corresponds to the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E5 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (4) is a table that is determined when there is one variation hit (pull-back information 1) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 2, and corresponds to the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E6 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (5) is a table that is determined when there is a 2-variation hit (pull-back information 2) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 0, and corresponds to the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

The symbol presentation pattern determination table E7 in the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267 (6) is a table that is determined when there is a 2-variation hit (pull-back information 2) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1, and corresponds to the variation pattern command of the second special symbol received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random number value), and the symbol presentation pattern.

The symbol performance pattern determination table E8 in the second normal gaming state shown in FIG. The second special symbol variation pattern command received from the circuit 200, the selection rate (first random value), and the symbol production pattern are associated with each other.

And according to the symbol presentation pattern determination tables E2 to E8 for the second normal game state shown in FIG. 267, different symbol presentation patterns can be determined depending on the order of the variable display of the second special symbol that is first determined to be a big win or a small win (pull-back information) and the number of reserved consecutive stocks ("number of winning symbols among the reserved number of second special symbols" and "pull-back information").

[9-6-4. First time-saving gaming state symbol production pattern determination table]
The symbol production pattern determination table E9 for determining the symbol production pattern in the first time-saving gaming state will be explained. FIG. 268 is an example of a symbol performance pattern determination table for the first time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 268, the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (first random value), and the symbol production pattern are associated.

Furthermore, according to the symbol performance pattern determination table E9 for the first time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. When it is the first special symbol variation pattern command (83H12H, see FIG. 237) corresponding to a loss, the performance pattern 100 for executing the door performance is determined.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the symbol production patterns C4 to C9 of the second special symbol determined at the final variation of the first time-saving gaming state are such that the boss battle production is performed over the variation display time of the second special symbol and the symbol confirmation time. configured to run. Similarly, the performance pattern 100 determined at the final variation of the first time-saving game state is configured such that the door performance is executed over the variation display time of the first special symbol and the symbol confirmation time.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pattern presentation pattern C1 of the first special symbol corresponding to a jackpot is configured so that a boss battle presentation is executed over the time that the first special symbol is displayed, and when the first time-saving game state reaches its final change, the boss battle presentation is executed again over the time that the first special symbol is determined (the boss battle presentation is executed in a loop).

[9-6-5. Symbol presentation pattern determination table for the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state]
The symbol presentation pattern determination table E10, E11 for determining the symbol presentation pattern in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state will be described. Fig. 269 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table other than the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine. Fig. 270 is an example of a symbol presentation pattern determination table at the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

(Other than the final change of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state)
Except for the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. 269 is referenced.

In the symbol production pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. 269, the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the production stage, the selection rate (first random value), and the symbol production pattern are associated with each other. ing.

Here, "presentation stage 30" indicates the male character stage in the second and third time-saving play states, and "presentation stage 31" indicates the female character stage in the second and third time-saving play states. These "presentation stage 30" and "presentation stage 31" are stages that can be selected by the player when a predetermined selection condition is met. Note that in this embodiment, only two stages are provided as stages that can be selected by the player in the second and third time-saving play states, but three or more different stages may be provided.

In addition, "presentation stage 40" indicates a premier stage for female characters that suggests the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧1 in the second and third time-saving play states, "presentation stage 41" indicates premier stage 1 for male characters that suggests the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1 in the second and third time-saving play states, and "presentation stage 42" indicates premier stage 2 for male characters that suggests the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧2 in the second and third time-saving play states.

According to the symbol production pattern determination table E10 for the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. The display is configured such that different background display modes can be determined.

However, in the symbol presentation patterns associated with the symbol presentation pattern determination table E10 for the second time-saving play state and the third time-saving play state shown in FIG. 269, although the presentation by the background display mode, characters, etc. differs depending on the presentation stage, the presentation mode of the decorative symbols is a normal presentation mode in which, except for some jackpots (movie presentation of the variation pattern command 84H14H), all decorative symbols start to vary at high speed separately, and the left and right symbols do not temporarily stop in sequence, but all decorative symbols stop and display at approximately the same time. This is also the case with the symbol presentation patterns associated with the symbol presentation pattern determination table E11 for the second time-saving play state and the third time-saving play state shown in FIG. 270, except when the special symbol lottery is a "miss".

(At the time of the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state)
At the time of final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table E11 shown in FIG. 270 is referenced.

The symbol production pattern determination table E11 for the second time-saving gaming state and the third time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 270 includes the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the production stage, and the second special symbol. The number of pending pieces is associated with the symbol production pattern.

According to the symbol presentation pattern determination table E11 for the second time-saving play state and the third time-saving play state shown in FIG. 270, even if the variation pattern command for the same special symbol is used, it is possible to determine different symbol presentation patterns (different presentations) depending on the number of reserved second special symbols.

Then, when the special symbol lottery is a "lose" at the final change of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state, when the number of reserved second special symbols ≧ 1 (the number of reserved second special symbols (When there is a pending number of pieces), one of the symbol production patterns F10 to F13 that executes a continuous battle entry production after performing a result production showing the game result of the second time-saving gaming state or the third time-saving gaming state is determined, and when the number of reserved pieces of the second special symbol is 0 (when there is no number of reserved pieces of the second special symbol), a symbol production that executes a door production after performing a result production. The configuration is such that patterns F20 to F23 are determined. In addition, the production stages 40 to 42 are dedicated stages with a number of reserved continuous stocks, and the special symbol lottery will not be "lost" at the final change of the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state. do not have.

In this embodiment, the pattern presentation patterns F10-13 and F20-23 that are determined when the special symbol lottery result is a "miss" at the time of the final change in the second time-saving game state or the third time-saving game state execute a result presentation while the special symbol is being displayed, and execute a consecutive battle entry presentation or a door presentation while the special symbol shape is being displayed, but a consecutive battle entry presentation or a door presentation may also be executed while the special symbol is being displayed.

[9-6-6. First normal game state window preview preview performance pattern determination table]
A preview performance pattern determination table for determining a window preview performance pattern in the first normal game state will be described. FIG. 271 is an example of a window preview preview effect pattern determination table for the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 271, the preview performance pattern determination table for the window preview in the first normal game state corresponds the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the performance stage that determines the performance display state, the selection rate (second random number value), and the preview performance pattern.

In this embodiment, the preview performance pattern 1 is a preview performance pattern in which the characters "Stage Change" indicating a change in stage are displayed, and the display content of the symbol performance pattern is "Reach" indicating a reach. It has a preview performance pattern 2 in which characters are displayed, and a preview performance pattern 3 in which characters ``Super Hot'' are displayed, indicating that there is a high possibility of a jackpot as a lottery result of a special symbol. In this embodiment, only three types of preview performance patterns are provided, but the content to be previewed may be subdivided into four or more types of display modes.

When preview presentation pattern 1 is determined, in which the word "Stage Change" is displayed to indicate a change in stage, presentation stage 0 and presentation stage 1 in the first normal game state are alternately switched. Note that if the general presentation state of the first normal game state has three or more different stages, the switching can be done according to a predetermined rule (for example, a predetermined order).

[9-6-7. First normal game state pending change notice pending notice performance pattern determination table]
A pending notice performance pattern determination table for determining a pending notice performance pattern of a pending change notice in the first normal game state will be explained. FIG. 272 is an example of a reservation notice effect pattern determination table for a reservation change notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 272, the hold notice presentation pattern determination table for the hold change notice in the first normal game state corresponds the look-ahead command (see FIG. 239) received from the main control circuit 200, the selection rate (third random number value), and the hold notice presentation pattern.

As described below, when a special symbol winning command is received, a reserved image is displayed in a predetermined display mode based on the current presentation stage and the number of reserved special symbols. In this embodiment, when the first normal game state is in the general presentation state (presentation stages 0 and 1), "Normal Reserve 1" is displayed as the predetermined display mode, and when the first normal game state is in the limited presentation state (presentation stage 2), "Normal Reserve 2" is displayed as the predetermined display mode.

In this embodiment, as a display mode of the pending change notice, when in the general performance state (performance stage 0, 1) of the first normal game state, the special symbol fluctuation information is a message that suggests reach or higher. The first normal When the gaming state is in the limited production state (production stage 2), it can change to "Special Hold 3", which indicates that there is a high possibility of hitting the jackpot as the special symbol variation information and the lottery result of the special symbol. It is composed of In addition, in this embodiment, only three types of display modes are provided as the display modes of the pending change notice, but it is also possible to subdivide the content suggested in advance and provide four or more display modes. good.

For example, in the case of reservation notice performance pattern 10, when winning the first starting opening 7120, "Normal reservation 1" is displayed as the display mode of the reservation image, and due to the change, "Normal reservation 1" changes to "Special reservation 1". The display mode is changed. If it is the hold notice performance pattern 11, "Special hold 1" will be continuously displayed as the display mode of the hold image from the time of winning the first start opening 7120 until the change.

In addition, if it is the hold notice performance pattern 20, when winning the first starting opening 7120, "normal hold 1" is displayed as the display mode of the hold image, and due to the change, "normal hold 1" changes to "special hold 2". The display mode is changed. If it is the hold notice performance pattern 21, "Special hold 2" will be continuously displayed as the display mode of the hold image from the time of winning the first start opening 7120 until the change.

In addition, in the case of hold notice presentation pattern 30, when the first starting gate 7120 is won, "Normal hold 2" is displayed as the display mode of the hold image, and when the change occurs, "Normal hold 2" is changed to "Special hold 3." In the case of hold notice presentation pattern 21, "Special hold 3" will continue to be displayed as the display mode of the hold image from the time of winning the first starting gate 7120 until the change occurs.

[9-6-8. First normal game state flash notice winning time notice performance pattern determination table]
A winning notice performance pattern determination table for determining a winning notice performance pattern of the flash notice in the first normal game state will be described. Figure 273 is an example of a winning notice performance pattern determination table of the flash notice in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 273, the winning notice performance pattern determination table of the flash notice in the first normal gaming state is based on the prefetch command received from the main control circuit 200 (see FIG. 239) and the selection rate (fourth random number value). ) and the prize-winning preview presentation pattern.

In this embodiment, the winning preview performance pattern includes a winning preview performance pattern 1 in which the LED group 46 emits white light from the time of winning at the first start opening 7120 until the fluctuation starts, and the first winning preview performance pattern. The winning preview performance pattern 2 is provided in which the LED group 46 emits rainbow-colored light from the time of winning at the starting opening 7120 until the fluctuation starts. In the present embodiment, only two types of winning preview performance patterns are provided, but the suggested content may be subdivided to provide three or more types of winning preview performance patterns.

In this embodiment, when winning preview performance pattern 1 is determined and the LED group 46 emits white light, it indicates that there is a high possibility of a jackpot as the result of the lottery for the special symbol, and when winning preview performance pattern 2 is determined and the LED group 46 emits rainbow light, it indicates that the lottery for the special symbol will result in a jackpot.

[9-6-9. Table for setting prohibition conditions for pre-reading effects]
A table for setting a forbidden condition for a foreseeing performance for determining whether or not to execute a foreseeing performance (reserved change notice, flash notice) in the first normal game state will be described. Figure 274 is an example of a forbidden condition setting table for a foreseeing performance in the seventh pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 274, the prohibition conditions for prohibiting the execution of look-ahead effects include a "common prohibition condition" that prohibits the execution of both pending change notices and flash notices, and a "common prohibition condition" that prohibits the execution of only flash notices. A "first prohibition condition" is set.

Five common prohibition conditions, common prohibition conditions 1 to 5, are set. "Common prohibition condition 1" is established when there is a pending number of second special symbols, and "common prohibition condition 2" is established when the second special symbol is being controlled (during variable display of the second special symbol). , "Common Prohibition Condition 3" is met within 5 fluctuation displays before and after the stage change, "Common Prohibition Condition 4" is met when the full rotation performance is being displayed, and " "Common prohibition condition 5" is established when the same prefetch effect is already being executed with reference to the prefetch flag.

If any of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 5 is satisfied, neither the pending change notice nor the flash notice pre-read effect will be executed.

As the first prohibition condition, four prohibition conditions, first prohibition conditions 1 to 4, are set. The "first prohibition condition 1" is established when a prize is won in the first starting opening 7120 when a variation effect other than the normal variation is being performed, and the "first prohibition condition 2" is established when the symbol of the first special symbol The "first prohibition condition 3" is established when a prize is entered at the first starting port 7120 during the period from 1500ms before confirmation to the period during which the symbol is confirmed. The "first prohibition condition 4" is satisfied when a prize is won in the first starting opening 7120 during the demonstration display.

If any of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is met, the flash notice will not be executed, but the hold change notice will be executable.

[9-6-10. Small hit performance pattern determination table]
A small win presentation pattern determination table for determining a presentation pattern in a small win gaming state will be described. Figure 275 shows an example of a small win presentation pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 275, the small win presentation pattern determination table includes a small win start presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275(1) and a small win end presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275(2).

The small hit start effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. ), the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the selection rate (fifth random value), and the small winning start performance pattern are associated with each other.

Here, the "small winning start performance pattern" is a performance that is performed at the start of the small winning game state, and is information that determines the display performance of characters, etc., audio performance, change performance of the operation mode of the performance button 54, etc. means.

In this embodiment, the small win start performance pattern determined when the small win start display command is received is a small win in which the normal character instructs the game ball to pass through the V prize opening 7156 in the small win game state. Starting effect pattern 1, small winning starting effect pattern 10 instructing a male character to pass a game ball to the V winning hole 7156 on background A1 (for example, blue background) in the small winning gaming state, and small winning starting effect pattern 10 in the small winning gaming state. A small hit start effect pattern 11 instructing a male character to pass a game ball with a background A2 (for example, a red background) to the V winning hole 7156, and a female character in a small win game state with a background A1 (for example, a blue background). A small winning start production pattern 20 that instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 7156, and a female character instructing the female character to pass the background A2 (for example, red background) gaming ball into the V winning opening 7156 in the small winning gaming state. A small winning start performance pattern 21 for instructing is provided.

And according to the small win start presentation pattern determination table shown in Figure 275 (1), when the game is in the first normal game state (presentation stages 0 to 2), the second normal game state (presentation stage 10), or the first time-saving game state (presentation stage 20), small win start presentation pattern 1 is determined as the normal small win presentation.

On the other hand, when in the second time-saving game state, different small hit start performance patterns (different performances) can be determined based on the stages "performance stage 30" and "performance stage 31" selectable by the player. It is composed of
Specifically, when the male character is in the "performance stage 30", the small win start performance pattern 10 or the small win start performance pattern 11 is determined, and when the female character is in the "performance stage 31", the small win start performance is determined. It is configured such that a pattern 20 or a small winning start performance pattern 21 is determined.

Furthermore, as will be described later, "Production Stage 41" and "Production Stage 42" are transitioned only from "Production Stage 30" for a male character selected by the player, and "Production Stage 40" is for a female character selected by the player. The transition is made only from the character's "performance stage 31." Therefore, when it is "Production stage 41" and "Production stage 42", the small hit start production pattern 10 or the small win start production pattern 11 is determined, similarly to the "Production stage 30" for the male character, and the "Production stage 40'', the small win start effect pattern 20 or the small win start effect pattern 21 is determined, similar to the female character's ``effect stage 31''.

Furthermore, in the second time-saving game state, different small win start presentation patterns (different presentations) can be determined based on the number of reserved consecutive stocks.
Specifically, the greater the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the more likely it is that small win start presentation pattern 11 will be determined rather than small win start presentation pattern 10 when the presentation stage is for a male character (30, 41, 42), and the more likely it is that small win start presentation pattern 21 will be determined rather than small win start presentation pattern 20 when the presentation stage is for a female character (31, 40).

As a result, when in the second time-saving play state, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be suggested by the small win start presentation pattern.

The small hit end effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275 (2) includes the small hit end display command received from the main control circuit 200, the pending number of second special symbols, the effect pattern for executing the door effect, and the small hit It is associated with the production stage after the end.

Here, the "small win end presentation pattern" refers to the presentation that is performed when the small win game state ends, and refers to information that defines the display presentation of characters, etc., audio presentation, and presentation of changes in the operation mode of presentation button 54. Also, as described above, the small win end display command is a command that is sent when the small win game state ends without the game ball passing through V winning port 7156 (see S7105 in FIG. 256), and also results in the time-saving game state ending.

In this embodiment, the small win end presentation patterns include presentation pattern 101, which executes a door presentation and then executes a stage change presentation to presentation stage 2, and presentation pattern 102, which executes a consecutive battle entry presentation and then executes a door presentation.

According to the small win end presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275 (2), when there are no reserved second special symbols at the end of the small win game state, presentation pattern 101 and presentation stage 2 are determined, and when there are reserved second special symbols at the end of the small win game state, presentation pattern 102 and presentation stage 10 are determined.

In this embodiment, the presentation pattern 101 and presentation pattern 102 determined as the small win end presentation pattern are performed in the end interval time when the small win game state ends, but part of the presentation may be performed in the variable display of the special symbol immediately after the end of the small win game state. For example, a door presentation may be performed in the end interval time of the small win game state, and a stage change presentation or continuous battle entry presentation may be performed in the variable display of the special symbol immediately after the end of the small win game state.

[9-6-11. V passing performance pattern determination table]
A V passing effect pattern determination table for determining a V passing effect pattern in a small winning game state will be explained. FIG. 276 is an example of a V passing performance pattern determination table in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

The "V-passing effect pattern" refers to an effect that is performed when the game ball passes through the V-entry port 7156 during a small win game state, and refers to information that specifies the display effects of characters, etc., audio effects, changes in the operation mode of the effect button 54, etc.

As shown in FIG. 276, the V-passing performance pattern determination table associates the V-passing command received from the main control circuit 200, the game state information (performance stage) at the time of winning when a big win or small win is determined, the number of reserved consecutive stocks, the selection rate (sixth random number value), and the V-passing performance pattern.

In this embodiment, the V passing performance patterns include V passing performance pattern 1 which displays V in the normal display mode, V passing performance pattern 10 which displays V in the first display mode, V passing performance pattern 11 which displays V in the first display mode and displays "STOCK1" suggesting that the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1, V passing performance pattern 12 which displays V in the first display mode and displays "STOCK2" suggesting that the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 2, V passing performance pattern 20 which displays V in the second display mode, and V passing performance pattern 21 which displays V in the special display mode suggesting that the number of reserved consecutive stocks ≧ 1.

And according to the V-passing presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 276, when the game is in the first normal game state (presentation stages 0-2), the second normal game state (presentation stage 10), or the first time-saving game state (presentation stage 20), V-passing presentation pattern 1 is determined as the normal V-passing presentation.

In contrast, in the second time-saving game state, a different V-passing presentation pattern (different presentation) can be determined based on the presentation stage.
Specifically, when the male character is on "performance stage 30, 41, 42", V-passing performance pattern 10, V-passing performance pattern 11 or V-passing performance pattern 12 is determined, and when the female character is on "performance stage 31, 40", V-passing performance pattern 20 or V-passing performance pattern 21 is determined.

Furthermore, when in the second time-saving game state, a different V-passing presentation pattern (different presentation) can be determined based on the number of reserved consecutive stocks.
Specifically, in the case of a male character's performance stage (30, 41, 42), when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1, V-pass performance pattern 11 is more likely to be determined than V-pass performance pattern 10, and when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧2, V-pass performance pattern 12 is more likely to be determined than V-pass performance pattern 10. Also, in the case of a female character's performance stage (31, 40), when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧1, V-pass performance pattern 21 is more likely to be determined than V-pass performance pattern 20.

As a result, when in the second time-saving play state, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be indicated by the V-passing presentation pattern.

In addition, according to the small win start presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275 (1) and the V-pass presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 276, presentations based on the same presentation stage selected in the second time-saving play state are performed from the second time-saving play state to the small win play state. This allows a series of presentations to be performed from the second time-saving play state to the small win play state, further enhancing the excitement of the game. More details will be provided later using FIG. 288 and FIG. 289.

[9-6-12. Stage selection table after jackpot game state ends]
A description will be given of a presentation stage selection table for determining the presentation stage to be performed after the big win gaming state ends. Figure 277 shows an example of a presentation stage selection table for the seventh pachinko gaming machine after the big win gaming state ends.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 277, there are two presentation stage selection tables after the end of the jackpot game state: presentation stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state in the first normal game state, the second normal game state, and the first time-saving game state shown in FIG. 277 (1), and presentation stage selection table 2 after the end of the jackpot game state in the second time-saving game state shown in FIG. 277 (2).

As shown in FIG. 277 (1), the performance stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state corresponds to the game state at the time of winning when a jackpot or small win is determined, the winning symbols, and the production stage. It is attached.

Here, the "selection permission flag ON" shown in FIG. 277(1) means that the selection permission flag is turned on ( permitted).

According to the performance stage selection table 1 after the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 277(1), if the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state (performance stage 0 to 2), the winning symbol When it is "1st special symbol_5R jackpot symbol 1" corresponding to the specified command "zA1", it will shift to the first time-saving game state, so " ``Production Stage 20'' is selected.

According to the performance stage selection table 1 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 277(1), when the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state (performance stage 0 to 2), the symbol designation command ~4'', the gaming state at the time of winning is the second normal gaming state (production stage 10), the gaming state at the time of winning is the first time-saving gaming state (production stage 20) In either case, the player can select "Production Stage 30" or "Production Stage 31" because the game shifts to the second time-saving gaming state as a so-called first hit or pullback win. Set the "selection permission flag ON" to enable the selection.

As shown in FIG. 277 (2), the presentation stage selection table 2 after the end of the big win game state corresponds to information on the game state (presentation stage) at the time of winning when a big win or small win is determined, the V passing presentation pattern described above, the number of reserved consecutive stocks, and the presentation stage.

According to the presentation stage selection table 2 after the end of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 277 (2), the presentation stage selected after the end of the jackpot game state differs depending on whether or not the number of reserved consecutive stocks has been notified by the V-pass presentation pattern.

Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning is presentation stage 30, and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not announced by V-pass presentation pattern 10, presentation stage 30 is selected again (presentation stage 30 continues), and when the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 1 is announced by V-pass presentation pattern 11, presentation stage 41 is selected, and when the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 2 is announced by V-pass presentation pattern 12, presentation stage 42 is selected.

In addition, when the game state at the time of winning is the performance stage 41, if the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not notified by the V passing performance pattern 10, the performance stage 30 is selected, and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is selected according to the V passing performance pattern 11. When =1 is reported, the performance stage 41 is selected (the performance stage 41 is continued), and when the number of reserved consecutive stocks = 2 is reported by the V passing performance pattern 12, the performance stage 42 is selected.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning is presentation stage 42, and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not announced by V-pass presentation pattern 10 and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1, presentation stage 41 is selected, and if the number of reserved consecutive stocks is not announced by V-pass presentation pattern 10 but the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 2, presentation stage 42 is selected (presentation stage 42 continues), and if the number of reserved consecutive stocks is announced by V-pass presentation pattern 11 and 1, presentation stage 42 is selected (presentation stage 42 continues).

As a result, the "performance stage 41" which is the premier stage 1 for male characters can suggest at least the number of pending continuous stocks = 1 in the second and third time-saving game states, and the "presentation stage 41" which is the premier stage 1 for male characters The “performance stage 42” can suggest that at least the number of reserved continuous stocks≧2 in the second and third time-saving gaming states. Therefore, when the effects are being executed on the effect stages 41 and 42, the player can grasp the number of reserved consecutive stocks and can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning is the production stage 31, and the number of pending consecutive stocks is not notified by the V passing production pattern 20, the production stage 31 is selected (the production stage 31 is continued), and the V passing production When the number of reserved consecutive stocks≧1 is reported according to the pattern 21, the performance stage 40 is selected.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning is the production stage 40, and the number of pending consecutive stocks is not notified by the V passing production pattern 20 and the number of pending consecutive stocks = 0, the production stage 31 is selected and the V passing production pattern 20 If the number of pending continuous stocks is not notified by the production pattern 20 but the number of pending continuous stocks is ≧1, the production stage 40 is selected (the production stage 40 is continued), and the number of pending continuous stocks is ≧1 according to the V passing production pattern 21. Even when notified, the production stage 40 is selected (the production stage 40 is continued).

As a result, "production stage 40," the premier stage for female characters, can suggest that the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≥ 1 in the second and third time-saving play states. Therefore, when the production by production stage 40 is being performed, it is possible to make the player interested in how many reserved consecutive stocks there are and how long production stage 40 will continue.

[9-7-1. Sub-control circuit processing]
Next, the contents of various processes executed by the sub-CPU 301 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 278. Fig. 278 is a flow chart showing an example of the sub-control circuit process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 278, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S7500). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7510.

Note that the above-mentioned initialization process (S7500) is a process executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S7510 to S7580, which will be described later, are repeatedly executed.

In S7510, the sub-CPU 301 performs a data input process to input data. In this data input process, both the command input port 308 reading process and the effect button 54 input process are performed.

In the command input port 308 reading process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 set in the command input port 308 is read.

Further, in the input processing of the effect button 54, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 is input from the button control circuit 310. Furthermore, when the sub CPU 301 inputs operation information from the button control circuit 310, the sub CPU 301 determines whether to validate or discard the input operation information, and inputs the operation information according to the current situation such as the production. Set the reception time to allow the input operation information, the validity period to invalidate the input operation information, and the invalidation period to invalidate the input operation information.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are completed, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7520.

In S7520, the sub-CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S7510 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7530.

At S7530, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation mode determination process. In this process, for example, a presentation pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests for operating various presentation devices (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, a role request, a presentation button activation request, etc.) are generated based on the determined presentation pattern. Details of this presentation mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 279. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S7540.

In S7540, the sub-CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304. The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S7550.

At S7550, the sub-CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to output audio from the speaker 32 based on the message (sound request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S7560.

In S7560, sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7570.

At S7570, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends a reel request to the reel control circuit 307. Based on the message (reel request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the reel control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the reels that make up the performance reel group 58. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7580.

In S7580, sub CPU 301 executes production button control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a production button drive request to the button control circuit 310. The button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the performance button 54 or vibrating the performance button 54 based on a message (performance button drive request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 ends the sub control circuit process.

[9-7-2. Presentation mode determination process]
Next, the details of the presentation mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 278) will be described with reference to Fig. 279. Fig. 279 is a flow chart showing an example of the presentation mode determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

At S7531, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation pattern determination process to determine a presentation pattern. In this process, a presentation pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, the presentation pattern defining the type of display presentation to be displayed on the display device 7, the type of sound presentation to be output from the speaker 32, the operation type of the presentation button 54, etc. Details of this presentation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 280 to 283. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S7532.

In S7532, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating an animation request. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S7531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7533.

In S7533, the sub-CPU 301 executes a drawing request generation process. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S7532. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7534.

In S7534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S7531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7535.

In S7535, the sub-CPU 301 executes a lamp request generation process. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S7531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7536.

In S7536, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory request generation processing. In this process, an accessory request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S7531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7537.

In S7537, the sub CPU 301 executes production button drive request generation processing. In this process, a production button drive request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S7531 above. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the production mode determination process and returns the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 278).

[9-7-3. Presentation pattern determination process]
Next, with reference to Figures 280 to 282, the details of the effect pattern determination process executed by the sub-CPU 301 in the effect mode determination process (see Figure 279) will be described. Figures 280 to 282 are flow charts showing an example of the effect pattern determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7531-1, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol winning command."

If it is determined in S7531-1 that it is a "special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-2. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol winning command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-3.

In S7531-2, the sub CPU 301 performs special symbol pending number addition processing, such as adding the pending number of special symbols.

In this reserved number addition process for special symbols, it is determined whether the command is a "winning command for the first special symbol" or a "winning command for the second special symbol", and when the command is a "winning command for the first special symbol", 1 is added to the reserved number of the first special symbol (reserved number counter for the first special symbol) in the work RAM 303, and when the command is a "winning command for the second special symbol", 1 is added to the reserved number of the second special symbol (reserved number counter for the second special symbol) in the work RAM 303. Also, by referring to the performance stage storage area in the work RAM 303, a display mode of the reserved image is determined based on the current performance stage and the reserved number of the special symbol added this time, and a reserved display pattern for displaying the reserved image in the determined display mode on the display device 7 is determined.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-3, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "pre-read command" for a special symbol.

If it is determined in S7531-3 that the command is a "read-ahead command," the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-4. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "read-ahead command," the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-10.

In S7531-4, the sub CPU 301 performs a pending information storage process to store the contents of the special symbol starting information.

In this pending information storage process, it is determined whether it is a "first special symbol pre-read command" or "second special symbol pre-read command", and various parameters of the pre-read command (see FIG. 239) are stored in the main RAM 203. The decorative pattern determination area, the first decorative pattern starting storage area, and the second decorative pattern starting storage area of the work RAM 303 correspond to the special pattern determining area, the first special symbol starting storage area, and the second special pattern starting storage area. Remember.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-5.

In S7531-5, the sub CPU 301 performs a prefetch effect determination process to determine a prefetch effect. Details of this look-ahead effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 283.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-10, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "symbol designation command".

If it is determined in S7531-10 that it is a "symbol designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "symbol designation command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-20.

In S7531-11, the sub CPU 301 performs a decorative pattern determination process to determine a decorative pattern.

In this decorative symbol determination process, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is determined based on the type of symbol designation command and the state information (current gaming state) stored in the gaming state storage area of the work RAM 303, and the determined stop symbol is It is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303. Further, when the type of the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot or a small win, information on the current gaming state is stored in the winning state storage area of the work RAM 303 in order to maintain the gaming state at the time of winning. . Furthermore, if the gaming state at the time of winning is not the first normal gaming state (that is, the second normal gaming state or the first to third time-saving gaming states), 1 is set in the consecutive games counter in the work RAM 303. If the game state at the time of winning is the first normal game state, the consecutive winnings counter in the work RAM 303 is cleared (set to 0).
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-20, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command".

If it is determined in S7531-20 that the command is a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-21. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol variation pattern command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-30.

In S7531-21, the sub-CPU 301 performs a process to subtract the number of reserved special symbols, etc.

In this reserved number subtraction process for special symbols, it is determined whether the command is a "first special symbol variation pattern command" or a "second special symbol variation pattern command", and when the command is a "first special symbol variation pattern command", 1 is subtracted from the reserved number counter for the first special symbol in the work RAM 303, and when the command is a "second special symbol variation pattern command", 1 is subtracted from the reserved number counter for the second special symbol in the work RAM 303. In addition, a reserved shift display pattern for shifting and displaying the reserved image of the special symbol subtracted this time is determined.
Furthermore, various parameters stored in the decorative pattern determination area, first decorative pattern start memory area, and second decorative pattern start memory area of the work RAM 303 are shifted in the same manner as the special pattern determination area, first special pattern start memory area, and second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 shifts the process to S7531-22.

In S7531-22, the sub CPU 301 refers to the status information (current gaming status) etc. stored in the gaming status storage area of the work RAM 303, and performs a frequency counter updating process to update various frequency counters.

In this frequency counter updating process, when in the normal gaming state, 1 is added to and updated to the "normal variation display frequency counter" of the work RAM 303 that counts the number of variable display times of special symbols in the normal gaming state.
In addition, in the time-saving game state, when the command is a variation pattern command of the first special symbol, 1 is subtracted from the "first time-saving number sub-counter" and "second time-saving number sub-counter" of the work RAM 303, and When it is a variable pattern command of 2 special symbols, 1 is subtracted from the "second time saving number sub-counter" of the work RAM 303.
Additionally, when the first lookahead flag indicating that the pending change notice is being executed is on, the "first lookahead count counter" in the work RAM 303 is decremented by 1 and updated to indicate that the flash notice is being executed. When the second prefetch flag indicating , is on, the "second prefetch number counter" in the work RAM 303 is updated by subtracting 1 from it. Note that when the first pre-reading number counter becomes 0, the first pre-reading flag is turned off, and when the second pre-reading number counter becomes 0, the second pre-reading flag is turned off.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-23.

In S7531-23, the sub CPU 301 refers to the status information (current gaming status) stored in the gaming status storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether the current gaming status is the "first normal gaming status". Determine.

If it is determined in S7531-23 that the game is in the "first normal gaming state", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-24. On the other hand, if it is determined that the state is not the "first normal gaming state", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-26.

In S7531-24, the sub CPU 301 performs a first symbol production pattern determination process to determine a symbol production pattern in the first normal gaming state.

In this first pattern presentation pattern determination process, after obtaining the first random number value, the pattern presentation pattern determination table E1 shown in FIG. 265 is referenced to determine the pattern presentation pattern based on the received special pattern variation pattern command, the presentation stage stored in the presentation stage memory area of the work RAM 303, the number of times the special pattern has been varied and displayed stored in the normal variation display number counter of the work RAM 303, and the obtained first random number value.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-25.

In S7531-25, the sub CPU 301 performs a preview performance pattern determination process to determine a window preview performance pattern for the first normal game state.

In this advance notice performance pattern determination process, after acquiring the second random number value, the window advance notice advance notice performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. A preview performance pattern is determined based on the performance stage stored in the area and the acquired second random number value. Here, if the preview performance pattern 1 indicating a stage change is determined, the performance stage 0 stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303 is changed to the performance stage 1, or the performance stage 1 is changed to the performance stage 0. Switch and update.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-26, the sub CPU 301 refers to the status information (current gaming status) stored in the gaming status storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether the current gaming status is the "second normal gaming status". Determine.

If it is determined in S7531-26 that the game is in the "second normal game state", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-27. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not in the "second normal game state", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-29.

In S7531-27, the sub-CPU 301 performs a symbol presentation pattern table determination process to determine the symbol presentation pattern determination table for the second normal game state.

In this pattern presentation pattern table determination process, first, various parameters stored in the decorative pattern determination area and the second decorative pattern start memory area of the work RAM 303 are referenced to calculate the "number of winning symbols within the reserved number of second special symbols" and "pull-back information."
Then, by referring to the start determination table for the second normal game state shown in FIG. 266, one of the pattern presentation pattern determination tables E2 to E8 is determined based on the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the reserved number counter for the second special symbol in the work RAM 303, the calculated "number of winning symbols within the reserved number of second special symbols" and the "pull-back information."
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-28.

In S7531-28, the sub CPU 301 performs a second symbol production pattern determination process to determine a symbol production pattern in the second normal gaming state.

In this second symbol production pattern determination process, after obtaining the first random value, the symbol production pattern determination table determined in S7531-27 above is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern command of the received special symbol and the A symbol production pattern is determined based on the number of second special symbols held in a second special symbol held number counter and the acquired first random number value.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-29, the sub-CPU 301 performs a third symbol presentation pattern determination process that determines the symbol presentation pattern in the time-saving game state.

In this third symbol presentation pattern determination process, the game state storage area of the work RAM 303 is first referenced to determine whether the game state is the first time-saving game state or the second or third time-saving game state.

In the third symbol performance pattern determination process, in the first time-saving gaming state, after obtaining the first random value, the symbol performance pattern determination table E9 shown in FIG. 268 is referred to, and the received special symbol is A symbol presentation pattern is determined based on the variable pattern command and the obtained first random number value. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In the third symbol production pattern determination process, if it is the second or third time-saving gaming state, it is determined whether or not it is the final variation of the time-saving gaming state. Here, to determine whether or not it is the final change in the time-saving game state, refer to the "first time-saving number sub-counter" and "second time-saving number sub-counter" in the work RAM 303, and if any of the time-saving number sub-counters = 0. If so, it is determined that it is a final change.

In the third symbol presentation pattern determination process, when the second or third time-saving play state is in effect and other than the final change in the time-saving play state, the symbol presentation pattern determination table E10 shown in FIG. 269 is referenced to determine the symbol presentation pattern based on the received special symbol change pattern command and the presentation stage stored in the presentation stage memory area of the work RAM 303. When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In the third symbol production pattern determination process, in the second and third time-saving gaming states, when it is the final variation of the time-saving gaming state, the symbol production pattern determination table E11 shown in FIG. 269 is referred to, and the received Based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern command, the production stage stored in the production stage storage area of the work RAM 303, and the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the second special symbol reservation number counter of the work RAM 303. to determine the symbol presentation pattern. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-30, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol production stop command".

If it is determined in S7531-30 that it is a "special symbol production stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-31. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol production stop command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-32.

In S7531-31, the sub CPU 301 performs a symbol presentation end process to end the symbol presentation.

In this pattern presentation end processing, the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, the "first time-saving count sub-counter" and the "second time-saving count sub-counter" are referenced to determine whether or not this is the final change of the first to third time-saving game states. If this is other than the final change of the first to third time-saving game states, pattern presentation execution end data is created to end the execution of the presentation by the pattern presentation pattern and the presentation pattern 100 of the door presentation. If this is the final change of the first to third time-saving game states, the pattern presentation end processing is ended without creating pattern presentation execution end data in order to execute the presentation over the special pattern variation display time and the pattern determination time.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-32, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol game end command".

If it is determined in S7531-32 that the command is a "special symbol game end command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-33. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "special symbol game end command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-40.

In S7531-33, the sub-CPU 301 performs a full effect end process to end all effects related to the lottery for special symbols, excluding some effects such as the background.

In this all-effects end process, all-effects execution end data for ending the execution of all effects related to the lottery of special symbols is created. Even if the symbol effect execution end data is not created in the above S7531-31 when the first to third time-saving game states are the final change, the execution of the effect by the symbol effect pattern when the first to third time-saving game states are the final change is ended by this all-effects execution end data.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-40, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "small win start display command".

If it is determined in S7531-40 that it is a "small win start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-41. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-42.

In S7531-41, the sub CPU 301 performs a small win start performance determination process that determines a small win start performance pattern for performing a small win start performance.

In this process of determining the small win effect, first, various parameters stored in the second decorative pattern start memory area of the work RAM 303 are referenced, and the "number of reserved consecutive stocks", which is the number of parameters that will result in a big win or a small win, is calculated, and the calculated "number of reserved consecutive stocks" is overwritten and stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303.
Then, after obtaining the fifth random number value, the small win start presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 275 (1) is referenced, and a small win start presentation pattern is determined based on the game state information stored in the winning state memory area of the work RAM 303, the presentation stage stored in the presentation stage memory area of the work RAM 303, the number of reserved consecutive stocks stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303, and the obtained fifth random number value.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-42, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "V pass command."

If it is determined in S7531-42 that the command is a "V pass command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-43. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "V pass command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-44.

In S7531-43, the sub-CPU 301 performs a V-passing effect determination process to determine a V-passing effect pattern for performing a V-passing effect.

In this V passing effect determination process, after obtaining the sixth random number value, the V passing effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. Based on the performance stage stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303, the number of pending continuous stocks stored in the pending continuous stock number counter of the work RAM 303, and the acquired sixth random value, the V passing performance pattern is created. Determine.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-44, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "small win end display command."

If it is determined in S7531-44 that it is a "small win end display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-45. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "small win end display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-50.

In S7531-45, the sub-CPU 301 performs a small win end effect determination process to determine the effect pattern for performing the small win end effect.

In this small win end performance determination process, the small win end performance pattern determination table shown in Fig. 275 (2) is referenced, and the small win end performance pattern and performance stage are determined based on the reserved number of the second special symbol stored in the reserved number counter of the second special symbol in the work RAM 303. Then, the information of the determined performance stage is overwritten and stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-50, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "big hit start display command".

If it is determined in S7531-50 that it is a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot start display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-52.

In S7531-51, the sub CPU 301 performs a jackpot start performance determination process that determines a performance pattern for performing the jackpot start performance. In this jackpot start performance determination process, the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and the performance pattern of the jackpot start performance is determined according to the stop symbols (winning symbols).
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-52, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "jackpot end display command."

If it is determined in S7531-52 that it is a "jackpot end display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-53. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "jackpot end display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-70.

In S7531-53, the sub CPU 301 performs performance stage determination processing to determine the performance stage after the end of the jackpot game state.

In this performance stage determination process, the winning state storage area of the work RAM 303 is referred to to determine whether the gaming state at the time of winning is the second time-saving gaming state.

If the game state at the time of winning is not the second time-limited game state in the presentation stage determination process (if it is the first normal game state, the second normal game state, or the first time-limited game state), the presentation stage selection table 1 after the end of the big win game state shown in FIG. 277 (1) is referenced, and a new presentation stage (presentation stage 20 or selection permission flag ON) is determined based on the game state information stored in the winning state memory area of the work RAM 303 and the winning pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area of the work RAM 303.

Here, when a new production stage 20 is determined, the information on the production stage 20 is overwritten and stored in the production stage storage area of the work RAM 303, the current production stage determination process is ended, and the process is continued in S7531-54. Move to.

When the selection permission flag is set to ON, a valid operation time is set within the end interval time at the end of the jackpot game state, and the initial selection stage is set to presentation stage 30, with the selection stage being switched between presentation stage 30 and presentation stage 31 each time the player operates presentation button 54. When the valid operation time has elapsed, the selection permission flag is set to OFF, the presentation stage selected as the selection stage is newly determined, and the information of the newly determined presentation stage is overwritten and stored in the presentation stage storage area of work RAM 303. Note that if the game state at the time of winning is the second time-saving game state, the selection permission flag will not be set to ON. When this process is completed, the process moves to S7531-54.

In addition, if the game state at the time of winning in the performance stage determination process is the second time-saving game state, first, various parameters stored in the second decorative pattern start memory area of the work RAM 303 are referenced, and the "number of reserved consecutive stocks", which is the number of parameters that will result in a big hit or a small hit, is calculated, and the calculated "number of reserved consecutive stocks" is overwritten and stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303.
Then, referring to the performance stage selection table 2 after the end of the big win game state shown in Fig. 277 (2), a new performance stage is determined based on the performance stage stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303, the V-pass performance pattern determined (executed) in the above S7531-43, and the number of reserved consecutive stocks stored in the reserved consecutive stock number counter of the work RAM 303. After that, the information of the newly determined performance stage is overwritten and stored in the performance stage storage area of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7531-54.

In S7531-54, the sub-CPU 301 performs a big win end effect determination process to determine an effect pattern for performing a big win end effect. In this big win end effect determination process, the effect pattern of the big win end effect is determined according to the stop symbol (winning symbol) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the work RAM 303, the effect stage newly determined in the above S7531-53, and the selection permission flag ON/OFF.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current presentation pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-70, the sub-CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "game state designation command."

If it is determined in S7531-70 that the command is a "game state designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-71. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "game state designation command", the sub-CPU 301 transfers processing to S7531-80.

In S7531-71, the sub CPU 301 performs a state information update process of updating and storing state information indicating the current gaming state in the gaming state storage area of the work RAM 303, depending on the type of the gaming state designation command. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-72.

In addition, in the state information update process of this embodiment, when the state information is updated from the normal gaming state to the first time-saving gaming state (when the first time-saving gaming state starts), the “first time saving gaming state” of the work RAM 303 is When the ``1 time saving number sub-counter'' = 7 and the ``2nd time saving number sub counter'' = 1 are set and the status information is updated from the normal gaming state to the 2nd time saving gaming state (the 2nd time saving gaming state starts) ), the "first time saving number sub-counter" = 11 and the "second time saving number sub-counter" = 5 are set in the work RAM 303.

At S7531-72, the sub-CPU 301 performs a production stage transition determination process to determine whether or not to transition to a production stage.

In this presentation stage transition determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there has been a change in the state information stored in the game state storage area of the work RAM 303, and when the state information is changed from the first to third time-saving game states or the second normal game state to the first normal game state (when transitioning to the first normal game state), presentation stage 2 is determined, when the state information is changed from the second or third time-saving game state to the second normal game state (when transitioning to the second normal game state), presentation stage 10 is determined, and when the state information is changed from the first normal game state to the third time-saving game state (when transitioning to the B time-saving game state), presentation stage 30 is determined. Next, the normal variable display count counter of the work RAM 303 is referenced, and when the variable display of the special symbol has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times) in the first normal game state, presentation stage 0 is determined.
When this process is completed, the sub-CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process, and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-80, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the command sent from the main CPU 201 is a "demonstration display command".

If it is determined in S7531-80 that the command is a "demonstration display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-81. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command is not a "demonstration display command", the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7531-90.

In S7531-81, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display performance pattern determination process to determine a demonstration display performance pattern for performing the performance during standby of the game.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the current effect pattern determination process and moves the process to animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).

In S7531-90, the sub-CPU 301 determines a presentation pattern according to various commands sent from the main CPU 201. For example, the sub-CPU 301 updates the cumulative payout information of game balls in response to receiving the first large prize opening winning command and the first large prize opening winning command. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the presentation pattern determination process and moves the process to the animation request generation process (see FIG. 279).
[9-7-4. Pre-reading performance decision process]
Next, with reference to Fig. 283, the details of the look-ahead effect determination process executed by the sub-CPU 301 in the effect pattern determination process (see Fig. 280) will be described. Fig. 283 is a flow chart showing an example of the look-ahead effect determination process in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In S7601, the sub CPU 301 refers to the status information (current gaming status) stored in the gaming status storage area of the work RAM 303, and determines whether the current gaming status is the "first normal gaming status". do.

If it is determined in S7601 that the game is in the "first normal game state", the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7602. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game is not in the "first normal game state", the sub-CPU 301 ends the current pre-reading performance determination process and transfers the process to the animation request generation process (see Figures 279 and 280).

In S7602, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the forbidden condition setting table for the look-ahead performance shown in FIG. 274, and determines whether any of the forbidden conditions among the common forbidden conditions 1 to 4 has not yet been satisfied.

If it is determined in S7602 that none of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is satisfied, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7603. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the common prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is satisfied, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7606.

In S7603, the sub CPU 301 performs a pending change notice effect determination process that determines a pending change notice effect pattern for the pending change notice.

In this pending change notice performance determination process, after obtaining the third random number value, the pending change notice pending notice performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 272 is referred to, and the received prefetch command (see FIG. 239) A hold notice performance pattern is determined based on the third random number value. Then, when a pending notice performance pattern for giving a pending change notice is determined, the first prefetch flag has already been set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 in order to determine whether the common prohibition condition 5 (see FIG. 274) is satisfied. (Whether or not the pending change notice is being executed). If the first look-ahead flag has already been set, the currently determined pending notice performance pattern is discarded and the process ends. On the other hand, if the first read-ahead flag is not set, the first read-ahead flag is set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 (the first read-ahead flag is turned on), and the pending number counter of the first special symbol in the work RAM 303 is referred to. Then, the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved first special symbols is set in the first pre-reading number counter of the work RAM 303, and this process is ended.
After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7604.

In S7604, the sub-CPU 301 refers to the prohibition condition setting table for the look-ahead performance shown in FIG. 274, and determines whether any of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 has not been satisfied.

If it is determined in S7604 that none of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is satisfied, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7603. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the first prohibition conditions 1 to 4 is satisfied, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S7606.

In S7605, the sub CPU 301 performs a winning preview performance determination process that determines a winning preview performance pattern for the flash preview.

In this winning notice performance determination process, after obtaining the fourth random number value, the winning notice performance pattern is determined based on the received look-ahead command (see FIG. 239) and the obtained fourth random number value by referring to the winning notice performance pattern determination table for flash notice shown in FIG. 273. Then, when the winning notice performance pattern for performing flash notice is determined, in order to determine whether the common prohibition condition 5 (see FIG. 274) is satisfied, it is determined whether the second look-ahead flag is already set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 (whether the flash notice is being executed or not). If the second look-ahead flag is already set, the winning notice performance pattern determined this time is discarded and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second look-ahead flag is not set, the second look-ahead flag is set in the flag storage area of the work RAM 303 (the second look-ahead flag is turned on), and the number of times corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol is set in the second look-ahead number counter of the work RAM 303 by referring to the reserved number counter of the first special symbol of the work RAM 303.
When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 transfers the process to S7606.

In S7606, the sub CPU 301 determines whether the received prefetch command is a prefetch command for the second special symbol, that is, whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 7140 in the first normal gaming state. judge.

In S7606, if it is determined that the received prefetch command is a second special symbol prefetch command, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S7607. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received prefetch command is not the second special symbol prefetch command, the current prefetch effect determination process is ended and the process is moved to animation request generation process (see FIGS. 279 and 280).

In S7607, the sub CPU 301 performs a process of erasing the pre-read information of the first special symbol. In this erasing process, the first pre-reading flag, the second pre-reading flag, the first pre-reading number counter, the second pre-reading number counter, the pending notice presentation pattern, and the winning notice presentation pattern are erased (=0).

Even if a pre-reading effect such as a hold change notice or a flash notice is being performed in the first normal game state, if a game ball enters the second start hole 7140, the execution of the pre-reading effect is stopped.

[9-8. Production Contents]
Regarding the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300, etc., an example of the effects of the display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described below.

(Normal display image)
First, a normal display image in the first normal gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 284. Fig. 284 is an example of a normal display image in the first normal gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 284, in the normal display image in the first normal game state, the left symbol 7071L as the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed on the center side of the display area of the display device 7. A pattern 7071C and a right pattern 7071R are configured to be displayable.

In addition, the right corner of the display area of the display device 7 is configured to be able to display a small first sub-pattern 7072 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, and a small second sub-pattern 7073 as a sub-pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern.

In this embodiment, when the special symbol is displayed in the first normal game state, in addition to the main symbols, left symbol 7071L, middle symbol 7071C, and right symbol 7071R, the sub-symbols, first sub-symbol 7072 or second sub-symbol 7073, are displayed in accordance with the type of special symbol. This is the same for the second normal game state and the first to third time-saving game states. However, when the special symbol is displayed in the first time-saving game state, the main symbols, left symbol 7071L, middle symbol 7071C, and right symbol 7071R, are not displayed, and only the first sub-symbol 7072 or second sub-symbol 7073 are displayed in accordance with the type of special symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main symbols of the left symbol 7071L, the middle symbol 7071C, and the right symbol 7071R are composed of numbers "1-9" or character symbols, and when a big win or small win occurs, the same symbols are all displayed in a stopped state. In contrast, the sub-symbols of the first sub-symbol 7072 and the second sub-symbol 7073 are composed of symbols such as "circle, cross, square, or triangle," and are configured so that different combinations of symbols are displayed in a stopped state even when a big win or small win occurs.

In the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the first special pattern can be displayed, and a first reserved image 7074a indicating that start information is stored in the first special pattern start memory area (1), a second reserved image 7074b indicating that start information is stored in the first special pattern start memory area (2), a third reserved image 7074c indicating that start information is stored in the first special pattern start memory area (3), and a fourth reserved image 7074d indicating that start information is stored in the first special pattern start memory area (4) can be displayed according to the reserved number of the first special pattern. Also, in response to the reserved image, the reserved image 7075 indicating that the variable display of the special pattern is being performed is displayed. Note that in this embodiment, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special pattern is not displayed, but a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special pattern may be displayed.

(Card performance and door performance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the card effect and door effect when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the first normal game state will be described. FIG. 285 is an example of a display image illustrating the card performance and door performance in the first normal game state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

In addition, when explaining the card effects, the symbols in Figure 284 will be omitted because the characters will be small and difficult to see, which may interfere with the explanation of the effect content. In addition, the first sub-pattern 7072 and second sub-pattern 7073, which are displayed very small, will also be omitted. This also applies to the effects explained in Figures 286 to 292.

In the left column (a), (b-1), (c-1), and (d-1) of FIG. 285, the number of variable display times of the special symbol in the first normal game state is 599, and the second special symbol This is an example of a card presentation that is executed in symbol presentation pattern A14 (see FIG. 265) when the lottery result is a jackpot.

In addition, in the right column (a), (b-2), (c-2), and (d-2) of FIG. 285, the number of variable display times of the special symbol is 599 in the first normal game state, and This is an example of a door performance that is performed in performance pattern 100 (see FIG. 265) without performing a card performance when the special symbol lottery result is a loss.

Figure 285 (a) is an example of a display image before the variable display of the second special symbol begins on the 599th spin in the first normal gaming state.

FIG. 285(b-1) is an example of a display image when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the card effect is started. As shown in Figure 285 (b-1), when the pattern production pattern A14 (see Figure 265) is determined and the card production is started, the chance card with the words jackpot, small win, and loss written on it is turned over. Then, the cards are shuffled and one of the cards is selected. In addition, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols, which were displayed large in the center of the display area, are now reduced to the lower right of the display area so that they can be identified by the player so as not to interfere with the card performance. be done.

FIG. 285(c-1) is an example of a display image when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the performance result of the card performance is displayed. As shown in FIG. 285(c-1), when one card is selected in the card performance, the card is slowly reversed and a chance card with the word jackpot written on it is displayed.

Figure 285 (d-1) is an example of a display image in which, when the variable display of the second special symbol has finished, a jackpot has been reached as the result of the lottery for the second special symbol. As shown in Figure 285 (d-1), when a chance card with the word jackpot written on it is displayed, the main symbols of the left, middle and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size in the bottom right of the display area, are displayed large in the center of the display area, and all the main symbols are displayed as the same symbol, notifying the player that a jackpot has been reached.

FIG. 285(b-2) is an example of a display image when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the door effect is started without the card effect being executed. As shown in FIG. 285(b-2), when the effect pattern 100 (see FIG. 265) is determined and the door effect is started, half-open doors are displayed from the left and right of the display area, and the doors remain ajar for a predetermined period of time. There will be a performance that will make the door rattle. Here, the performance pattern of the door performance does not have a defined end time for the performance, and until an instruction to end the performance is given, a performance in which a half-open door rattles is repeatedly performed over a predetermined period of time.

FIG. 285(c-2) is an example of a display image when the variable display of the second special symbol ends and the door performance ends. As shown in FIG. 285 (c-2), when the variable display of the second special symbol ends (when the special symbol production stop command is received), the door is produced to close, and all decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state. .

Figure 285 (d-2) is an example of a display image when the display of the special symbol changes at the 600th spin is started, continuing from Figure 285 (c-2). As shown in Figure 285 (d-2), when the display of the special symbol changes at the 600th spin is started from the first normal game state, a door is opened, and the transition from the first normal game state to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) is notified by the background, etc. Note that, as described above in S7531-72 of Figure 285, when the transition from the first normal game state to the B time-saving game state (third time-saving game state) occurs, the male character's presentation stage 30 is determined as the initial presentation stage.

(Chance to enter the Sengoku Period)
Next, the presentation of the Sengoku entry chance in the first time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 286. Fig. 286 is an example of a display image for explaining the presentation of the Sengoku entry chance in the first time-saving gaming state in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Figure 286 shows an example of a boss battle presentation executed with symbol presentation patterns C4 to C7 (see Figure 268) as a presentation of a chance to enter the Sengoku period when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol in the first time-saving game state is a big win or a small win.

Figure 286 (a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku Entry Chance in the first time-saving game state starts. As shown in Figure 286 (a), in the Sengoku Entry Chance in the first time-saving game state, as an example, an operation instruction image for causing the player to hit to the right is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area, and the background of "presentation stage 20" showing the stage for the Sengoku Entry Chance is displayed.

Figure 286 (b) is an example of a display image of a boss battle effect that is performed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140 in the first time-saving game state and the second special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner.

Here, as described above with reference to FIGS. 237(1) and 268, the lottery of the second special symbol, which is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in the first time-saving gaming state, is It is the final variation of the time-saving gaming state, the variation display time of the second special symbol is determined to be an extremely short variation display time (0.2 seconds), and the symbol confirmation time of the second special symbol is determined to be an extremely long symbol confirmation time (89 seconds). seconds).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 286(b), when a game ball enters the second starting port 7140 in the first time saving game state, the main symbol is not displayed and the variable display of the second sub symbol 7073 is displayed. The display will stop immediately. At this time, the boss battle performance started when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner does not end when the second special symbol stops being displayed, and the boss character continues to be displayed.

Figure 286 (c) is an example of a display image of a boss battle effect that is performed when the second special symbol is being displayed as a confirmed symbol. As shown in Figure 286 (c), when the second special symbol is being displayed as a confirmed symbol, an effect in which a player fights a boss character is performed, and the boss battle effect that started during the variable display of the second special symbol continues to be executed.

Figure 286 (d) is an example of a display image when the result of the boss battle effect that is performed while the second special symbol is being displayed as determined. As shown in Figure 286 (d), when the player wins the battle against the boss character, it is announced that the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, and the game moves to a big win game state or a small win game state.

Then, at the end of the jackpot game state (including the case of passing through the small win game state) from the first time-saving game state, the selection permission flag is turned ON, allowing the player to select the production stage of Sengoku Time. Become.

(Selection of performance stage by player)
Next, with reference to FIG. 287, the selection of the Sengoku Time performance stage by the player will be explained. FIG. 287 is an example of a display image illustrating selection of a production stage by a player in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

Here, as described above in FIG. 277(1), if the winning symbol corresponds to the symbol designation command "zA2-4" when the gaming state at the time of winning is the first normal gaming state, the winning symbol If the gaming state is the second normal gaming state, or if the gaming state at the time of winning is the first time-saving gaming state, in either case, the second time-saving game will be awarded as a so-called first win or a pullback win. Since the game state is shifted to the game state, it is possible for the player to select the performance stage of Sengoku Time at the end interval when the jackpot game state ends.

Figure 287 (a) is an example of a display image when selecting the Sengoku Time presentation stage in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state. As shown in Figure 286 (a), in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state, an operation instruction image for the player to hit to the right, a presentation button operation image showing the operation of the presentation button 54, a remaining time image showing the remaining time of the effective operation time of the presentation button 54, an operation explanation image explaining the operation method of stage selection using the presentation button 54, and a stage selection image showing the selection between the male character stage (presentation stage 30) and the female character stage (presentation stage 30) are displayed.

FIG. 287(b) is an example of a display image when the performance stage of Sengoku Time is determined in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state. As shown in FIG. 286(b), in the end interval at the end of the jackpot game state, when the effective operation time of the production button 54 has elapsed (when the remaining time image becomes zero), the selected production The stage will be decided as the production stage of Sengoku Time.

(Sengoku time production)
Next, the Sengoku time effect will be explained with reference to FIGS. 288 and 289. FIG. 288 is an example of a display image explaining the Sengoku time effect when the male character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko game machine. Further, FIG. 289 is an example of a display image illustrating the Sengoku time effect when the female character stage is selected in the seventh pachinko game machine.

FIG. 288(a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku time performance in the second time-saving game state is started. As shown in FIG. 288(a), in the Sengoku Time production in the second time-saving game state, as an example, there is a remaining number image showing the remaining variable display number of Sengoku Time (second time-saving number) in the upper left of the display area. , an operation instruction image for making the player play right-handed, and the background of the Sengoku Time production stage are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 288(a), a star-patterned background of the "performance stage 41" indicating the premier stage 1 for the male character (the number of reserved consecutive stocks=1) is displayed. Furthermore, the "production stage 30" indicating the normal stage of the male character has a plain background.

Figure 288 (b) is an example of a display image of the Sengoku Time effect (for example, an effect executed by the pattern effect patterns P10, P13, and P16 (see Figures 269 and 270)) that is performed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140 in the second time-saving game state and the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. As shown in Figure 288 (b), a male character and a star pattern background are displayed corresponding to the "effect stage 41", and the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols that were displayed large in the center of the display area are displayed in a reduced size in the lower right of the display area so that the player can distinguish them. At this time, as a decorative symbol effect, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols all start to display a high-speed variable display separately, and the left and right symbols do not stop temporarily in order, but all symbols stop and display approximately simultaneously, in a normal variable mode effect.

Figure 288 (c) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time presentation (for example, a presentation executed by the pattern presentation patterns P10, P13, and P16) in which, when the variable display of the second special pattern ends, it is announced that the special pattern lottery result is a big win or a small win. As shown in Figure 288 (c), the main patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area are displayed large in the center of the display area, and all the main patterns are displayed as the same pattern, announcing that the lottery for the second special pattern has resulted in a big win or a small win. Note that, if the lottery for the second special pattern is a miss, the main patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area and are displayed as different patterns.

Figure 288 (d) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time presentation (for example, a presentation executed by small win start presentation pattern 10 (see Figure 275)) that is performed when a male character presentation stage is selected and a small win game state is started. As shown in Figure 288 (d), in the small win game state, a presentation is performed in which a male character instructs the player to pass the game ball through the V winning hole 7156 against background A1 (for example, a blue background). At this time, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be suggested in advance by background A1 (for example, a blue background) or background A2 (for example, a red background).

Figure 288 (e) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time effect (for example, an effect executed by V passage effect pattern 11 (see Figure 276)) that is performed when a male character's effect stage is selected and the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in a small win game state. As shown in Figure 288 (e), when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in a small win game state, a V is displayed in the first display mode, and if the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1, "STOCK1" can be displayed, indicating that the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 1. In this way, when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in a male character's effect stage, the number of reserved consecutive stocks can be notified.

FIG. 289(a) is an example of a display image when the Sengoku time production in the second time-saving game state is started. As shown in FIG. 289(a), in the Sengoku Time effect in the second time-saving game state, as an example, there is a remaining number image showing the remaining variable display number of Sengoku Time (second time-saving number) in the upper left of the display area. , an operation instruction image for making the player play right-handed, and the background of the Sengoku Time production stage are displayed. In addition, in FIG. 289(a), a heart-patterned background of a "production stage 40" indicating a premier stage for a female character (pending continuous stock number≧1) is displayed. Further, the "production stage 31" indicating the normal stage of the female character has a plain background.

Figure 289 (b) is an example of a display image of the Sengoku Time effect (for example, an effect executed by the pattern effect patterns P12, P15, and P18 (see Figures 269 and 270)) that is performed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 7140 in the second time-saving game state and the second special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. As shown in Figure 289 (b), a female character and a heart-patterned background are displayed corresponding to the "effect stage 40", and the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols that were displayed large in the center of the display area are displayed in a reduced size in the lower right of the display area so that the player can distinguish them. At this time, the main symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols start to display a variable manner at high speed separately as a decorative symbol effect, and a normal variable mode effect is performed in which all symbols stop and display approximately simultaneously without the left and right symbols temporarily stopping in sequence.

FIG. 289(c) shows a Sengoku time production (for example, symbol production patterns P12, P15, This is an example of a display image of the effect executed by P18. As shown in Figure 289(c), the main symbols of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area, and are displayed in a large size in the center of the display area, and all the main symbols stop at the same symbol. This is displayed to notify that a jackpot or small win has been achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, when there is a loss in the lottery of the second special symbol, the main symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed in a reduced size at the lower right of the display area, and are stopped and displayed as separate symbols.

FIG. 289(d) shows the Sengoku time performance performed when the female character's performance stage is selected and the small winning game state is started (for example, the performance performed according to the small winning start performance pattern 20 (Fig. 275). This is an example of a display image of (see)). As shown in FIG. 289(d), in the small winning game state, an effect is performed in which the female character instructs the female character to pass the game ball to the V winning hole 7156 on the background A1 (eg, blue background). At this time, the number of reserved continuous stocks can be suggested in advance by the background A1 (for example, blue background) or the background A2 (for example, red background).

Figure 289 (e-1) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time effect (for example, an effect executed by V-passing effect pattern 20 (see Figure 276)) that is performed when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in a small win game state when a female character's performance stage is selected and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0. As shown in Figure 289 (e-1), when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is 0, a V can be displayed in the second display mode.

Figure 289 (e-2) is an example of a display image of a Sengoku Time effect (for example, an effect executed by V-passing effect pattern 21) that is performed when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 in a small win game state when a female character's performance stage is selected and the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧1. As shown in Figure 289 (e-2), when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156 when the number of reserved consecutive stocks is ≧1, a V can be displayed in a special display mode.

In this way, on the female character production stage, when a game ball passes through the V winning hole 7156, it is possible to notify that the number of pending consecutive stocks is ≧1 (whether or not there is a pending consecutive stock number).

(Small hit game state: punctured)
Next, referring to Fig. 290, the effect that is performed when the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole 7156 in the small winning game state (so-called blowout) will be described. Fig. 290 is an example of a display image that explains the effect that is performed when the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole in the small winning game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

Figure 290 (a) is an example of a display image of the Sengoku Time presentation that is performed when a male character presentation stage is selected and a small win game state is started. As shown in Figure 290 (a), in a small win game state, a presentation is performed in which the male character instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 7156, but it is assumed that the game ball does not pass through the V winning hole 7156 because the player does not perform a right hit, etc.

Figure 290 (b) is an example of a display image of an effect (for example, an effect executed by effect patterns 101 and 102 (see Figure 275)) that is performed when the small win game state ends without the game ball passing through the V winning opening 7156. As shown in Figure 290 (b), during the interval time at the end of the small win game state, a half-open door is displayed on the left and right of the display area, and after the half-open door rattles for a predetermined period of time, a door effect is performed in which the door closes.

FIG. 290 (c-1) shows a performance that is performed when there is a pending number of second special symbols at the end of the small winning game state after the door performance has been performed (for example, a performance performed according to the performance pattern 102) This is an example of a display image. As shown in FIG. 290 (c-1), when there is a pending number of second special symbols at the end of the small winning game state, the door is opened and a special stage (actual stage) for continuous battles in the second normal game state is opened. 10) A continuous battle entry effect is performed to notify the transition to step 10).

Figure 290 (c-2) is an example of a display image of an effect (for example, an effect executed by effect pattern 101) that is performed when there are no reserved second special symbols at the end of the small win game state after the door effect has been performed. As shown in Figure 290 (c-2), when there are no reserved second special symbols at the end of the small win game state, the door is opened and a stage change effect is performed to notify the player of a transition to the seaside stage (effect stage 2) of the limited effect state in the first normal game state.

(End of Sengoku Time)
Next, the effects performed when the Sengoku Time ends will be described with reference to Fig. 291. Fig. 291 is an example of a display image for explaining the effects performed when the Sengoku Time ends in the seventh pachinko gaming machine.

FIG. 291(a) is an example of a display image of the Sengoku time performance performed when the variable display of special symbols is started at the final variation of the second time saving game state or the third time saving game state. As shown in FIG. 291(a), a male character and a plain background are displayed corresponding to "production stage 30", and in the lower right of the display area, the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed in a reduced size. The main symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

FIG. 291(b) shows the Sengoku Time result presentation (for example, according to the symbol presentation patterns F10 to F13, F20 to F23) that is performed when a loss is determined in the special symbol lottery and a variable display of the special symbol is performed. This is an example of a display image of an effect to be executed (see FIG. 270). As shown in FIG. 291(b), information on the number of jackpots and earned points indicating the number of game balls paid out to the player are displayed as the game results of Sengoku Time, and as soon as the special symbol fluctuation display ends, The main symbols of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol that are reduced and displayed in the lower right corner of the display area are stopped and displayed as separate symbols.

Figure 291 (c-1) is an example of a display image of the consecutive battle entry effect that is performed during the determined special pattern display when there are reserved numbers of the second special pattern when the variable display of the special pattern ends. As shown in Figure 291 (c-1), during the determined special pattern display, a consecutive battle entry effect is performed to notify the player of a transition to a dedicated stage (effect stage 10) for consecutive battles in the second normal game state.

Figure 291 (c-2) is an example of a display image of a door effect that is performed during the determined special pattern display when there are no reserved second special patterns when the variable display of the special pattern ends. As shown in Figure 291 (c-2), during the determined special pattern display, half-open doors are displayed on the left and right of the display area, and after the half-open doors rattle for a predetermined period of time, the doors close.

(Continuous battle production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 292, the continuous battle performance in the second normal game state will be described. FIG. 292 is an example of a display image illustrating the continuous battle performance in the second normal game state in the seventh pachinko game machine.

FIG. 292 shows that in the second normal game state, when the second special symbol is a lottery result and the second variation is a hit, the first variation is a continuous battle performance based on the symbol performance pattern R2 (see FIG. 267). , the second variation is an example in which a continuous battle effect is executed using the symbol effect patterns R10 and R11 (see FIG. 267).

FIG. 292(a) is an example of a display image when the continuous battle performance in the second normal game state is started. As shown in FIG. 292(a), in the continuous battle performance in the second normal game state, for example, an operation instruction image for making the player perform a right-handed strike is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area; On the left side, 1st to 3rd round display images corresponding to the number of variable display times of the second special symbol are displayed, and in the center of the display area, a background of a dedicated stage for continuous battles (acting stage 10) imitating an arena is displayed. Further, the main symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed in a reduced size at the lower right of the display area to the extent that the player can identify them so as not to interfere with the performance of the continuous battle.

FIG. 292(b) is an example of a display image of a continuous battle effect performed when the variable display of the second special symbol of the first variation starts in the second normal game state. As shown in FIG. 292(b), as a continuous battle performance, a performance is performed in which a main character and a rival character appear and face off (a continuous battle performance based on the symbol performance pattern R2).

FIG. 292(c) is an example of a display image of a continuous battle effect performed when the variable display of the second special symbol of the first variation ends in the second normal game state. As shown in FIG. 292(c), as a result of the continuous battle, an effect is performed in which the showdown is inconclusive but the main character has the upper hand and the game ends in a draw.

FIG. 292(d) is an example of a display image of a continuous battle effect performed when variable display of the second special symbol of the second variation starts in the second normal game state. As shown in FIG. 292(d), as a continuous battle effect, a continuous battle effect is performed in which the main character and the rival character continue to face each other (continuous battle effect based on the symbol effect patterns R10 and R11).

FIG. 292(e) is an example of a display image of a continuous battle effect performed when the variable display of the second special symbol of the second variation ends in the second normal game state. As shown in FIG. 292(e), as a result of the consecutive battles, the showdown is concluded and the main character wins. In addition, the main symbols of the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol that are reduced and displayed in the lower right of the display area are all temporarily stopped and displayed as the same symbol. Thereafter, all the same symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the main symbol is displayed in a large size in the center of the display area, and the player is notified of the jackpot or small win.

In this way, the seventh pachinko gaming machine allows transitions between the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, the first time-saving gaming state, the second time-saving gaming state, and the third time-saving gaming state, and provides appropriate presentations according to each gaming state, thereby further increasing the excitement of the game.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, in the pre-read effect (pending change notice, flash notice) in the first normal gaming state, as explained in FIG. Since the availability is determined, the pre-read effect can be executed at an appropriate timing and the interest of the game can be further improved.

Further, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, even when playing in an irregular game mode, the performance is executed according to an appropriate performance pattern in accordance with the transition of the game state due to the irregular game mode. Therefore, it is possible to maintain and improve the gameplay.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, as explained in FIG. 244 etc., the first time-saving game state is quickly ended by determining the variable display time of the second special symbol to be the extremely short first variable display time. In addition, the specified number of normal electric accessories 7146 for normal electricity is set to 1, and the variable display time of the normal symbol in the first time-saving game state is set to be longer than the first variable display time of the second special symbol. 2. It is possible to control the first time-saving gaming state in which the number of reserved special symbols is not stored. Further, it is also possible to control a second time-saving game state in which the number of reserved second special symbols is stored.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko gaming machine, as explained in FIG. 286 etc., in the presentation of the Sengoku Entry Chance in the first time-saving gaming state, the presentation is executed over the time for which the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the time for which the symbol is determined, thereby improving the freedom of presentation and making the game more interesting.

In addition, in the seventh pachinko game machine, as explained in Figures 288 and 289, etc., in "Sengoku Time," which is the period from the second or third time-saving game state to the small win game state, presentations based on the same presentation stage are performed, so that a series of presentations can be executed from the second or third time-saving game state to the small win game state, further enhancing the entertainment value of the game. Furthermore, in the Sengoku Time presentation, the small win start presentation pattern and the V-pass presentation pattern can suggest the number of reserved consecutive stocks, further enhancing the entertainment value of the game.

(others)
In the seventh pachinko game machine described above, the techniques of each embodiment can be applied to each other, including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and changes can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Furthermore, the effects described in the seventh pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most favorable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the seventh pachinko gaming machine, as long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

[10. 8th pachinko machine]
Next, the eighth pachinko game machine will be explained. The eighth pachinko game machine, like the third pachinko game machine, is a pachinko game machine called a 1 type 2 type mixed machine. The eighth pachinko game machine differs from the third pachinko game machine in terms of playability, production contents, etc., and accordingly, the configurations of various members arranged in the game area are also partially different.

Note that, like the third pachinko game machine, the eighth pachinko game machine does not variably display the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel, and the second special symbol is more effective than the starting condition of the first special symbol. It is a priority variable machine in which the starting conditions of special symbols are established with priority. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned sequential variable machine may be used.

In addition, the eighth pachinko gaming machine counts the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state under specific conditions (time-saving gaming state), and when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number (for example, 100 times), , is equipped with a "number of times limiter function" that partially restricts the gaming state to which the jackpot gaming state transitions after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, in addition to the "number of times limiter function", the eighth pachinko gaming machine counts the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out in the jackpot game state per day, and the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out per day is calculated. It also has a "ball output limiter function" that partially restricts the game state to which the game state shifts after the end of the jackpot game state when a predetermined number of balls are reached (for example, 100,000 balls).

Hereinafter, when explaining the eighth pachinko gaming machine, the same components as those in the first pachinko gaming machine will be given the same symbols and step numbers, and detailed explanations of their configuration and processing will be omitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, a game ball is inserted into a ball entry hole (for example, a starting hole or a big prize hole) that can provide a predetermined profit (payout of game balls, transition of gaming state) to the player. ``Playing a ball'' is also referred to as ``winning'' as appropriate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "variable display" of a symbol includes, for example, both "variable display" in which the symbol is displayed while fluctuating, and "stop display" in which the symbol is displayed in a stopped state. This is a concept, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display."

[10-1. Game board unit]
A game board unit 8010 provided in the eighth pachinko game machine will be described with reference to Fig. 293. This game board unit 8010 is also disposed in front of the base door 3 (see Fig. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see Fig. 2) like the first pachinko game machine.

FIG. 293 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of the game board unit 8010 included in the eighth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 8010 includes a game panel 8100 as a game board, various members are arranged on the game panel 8100, and on the front side of the game panel 8100, a game area 105 where a fired game ball can roll and flow down is provided. It is formed.

As shown in FIG. 293, the game board unit 8010 of the eighth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine mainly in the configuration and arrangement of the passing gate 8126, the second starting port 8140, the normal electric role unit 8145, the first special electric role unit 8130, and the second special electric role unit 8150. The configuration and arrangement of each of these are explained below.

The first starting hole 8120 located in the play area 105 of the eighth pachinko game machine is functionally the same as the first starting hole 120 located in the play area 105 of the first pachinko game machine, but because of its relationship with the second starting hole 8140, it will be described again using a different reference number than in the first pachinko game machine.

(passing gate)
The passage gate 8126 is arranged above the normal electric accessory unit 8145 described later in the right side area 107, and allows a game ball hit to the right to pass through (a game ball hit to the left has difficulty or cannot pass through). ing. The passage gate 8126 is equipped with a passage gate switch 8127 (see FIG. 294 described later) that detects passage of a game ball to the passage gate 8126. In this embodiment, the passage gate 8126 is arranged above the normal electric accessory unit 8145 in the right side area 107, but the passage gate 8126 may also be arranged below the ordinary electric accessory unit 8145 in the right side area 107. good.

When a game ball passes through the passing gate 8126, it is used for the normal symbol lottery (a process for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol) and for the variable display of normal symbols. In this embodiment, even if a game ball passes through the passing gate 8126, no prize balls are paid out, but it may be a winning gate from which a predetermined prize ball (for example, one game ball) is paid out.

The passing gate 8126 may also function as a trigger for activating a consecutive operation device for special features. Assuming that the condition device is in operation (the special symbol that will result in a jackpot is displayed frozen), the passing gate 8126 may activate the consecutive operation device for special features, causing a transition to a jackpot gaming state.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 8120 is arranged in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and allows a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball, and a game ball hit to the right by a game nail or the like to enter the ball. Constructed to be difficult or impossible. The first starting port 8120 is equipped with a first starting port switch 8121 (see FIG. 294 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 8120.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120, a first special symbol lottery (first special symbol hit determination process), a variable display of the first special symbol, and a prize ball for the first starting hole (for example, three A payout of game balls) is performed. The process after the game ball enters the first starting port 8120 will be described in detail later.

(Second starting port)
The second starting port 8140 is located in the right area 107 and below (downstream side) a passage gate 8126 which will be described later, and is also provided in a normal electric accessory unit 8145 which will be described later. is allowed to enter the ball (it is difficult or impossible for a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball). The second starting port 8140 is equipped with a second starting port switch 8141 that detects entry of a game ball into the second starting port 8140.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the second starting port 8140 is arranged below (downstream side) of the passage gate 8126, the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 8126 is connected to a normal electric accessory 8140, which will be described later. When the game ball is in operation, the game ball can enter the second starting port 8140.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, a second special symbol lottery (second special symbol hit determination process), a variable display of the second special symbol, and a prize ball for the second starting hole (for example, one A payout of game balls) is performed. The process after the game ball enters the second starting port 8140 will be described in detail later.

(Normal electric role unit)
The normal electric role unit 8145 is located in the right area 107 below (downstream of) the passing gate 8126, and is located so that the game ball hit to the right can pass through it. The normal electric role unit 8145 is a unit body that integrates the second start hole 8140, the second start hole switch 8141 that detects the entry of the game ball into the second start hole 8140, and the normal electric role 8146.

The normal electric device 8146 is equipped with a protruding plate-type normal power shutter 8147 that can move forward and backward, and a normal power solenoid 8148 (see FIG. 294 described below) that operates this normal power shutter 8147. The normal electric device 8146, i.e., the normal power shutter 8147, is configured to be able to transition between an open state in which it is possible or easy to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 8140, and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult to insert a game ball into the second starting hole 8140.

Specifically, the normal power shutter 8147 is composed of a substantially triangular ball entry prevention section disposed near the entrance of the second starting port 8140 and a flat ball entry guidance section inclined toward the second starting port 8140. When the normal power shutter 8147 is in the closed state, the substantially triangular ball entry prevention section is located in an opposing area facing the entrance of the second starting port 8140 and prevents balls from entering the second starting port 8140, and the flat ball entry guidance section is embedded in the surface of the game panel 8100 and allows game balls to flow downward without accepting game balls flowing down into the right side area 107. On the other hand, when the normal power shutter 8147 is in the open state, the approximately triangular ball entry prevention section is located in an avoidance area (for example, the gap from the top of the game nail to the protective glass 43) that does not face the entrance of the second starting hole 8140, and does not hinder the ball from entering the second starting hole 8140, and the flat ball entry guide section protrudes from the surface of the game panel 8100 to receive the game ball flowing down to the right area 107 and guide the received game ball to the second starting hole 8140. Note that instead of the above-mentioned normal power shutter 8147 that can move forward and backward, a movable member called a so-called electric chute may be used.

In addition, when the normal electric accessory 8146 enters the prescribed number of normal electric game balls (for example, 1 ball) while the second starting port 8140 is in the open state, the open time has not elapsed. In both cases, the second starting port 8140 is closed.

(First special electric feature unit)
The first special electric role unit 8130 is disposed below (downstream) the pass gate 8126, the normal electric role unit 8145, and the second special electric role unit 8150 described later in the right area 107. The first special electric role unit 8130 may be disposed upstream of at least one of the pass gate 8126, the normal electric role unit 8145, and the second special electric role unit 8150 described later in the right area 107, or may be disposed in the left area 106.

The first special electric device unit 8130 is a unitary body that integrates a first large prize opening 8131, a first large prize opening count switch 8132 (see FIG. 294 described below) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 8131, a first special electric shutter 8134 that can move back and forth, and a first special electric solenoid 8135 (see FIG. 294 described below) that operates the first special electric shutter 8134.

The first big winning hole 8131 is a winning hole that is opened when there is a jackpot, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the first big winning hole 8131 in one round in one jackpot (for example, 10 ) is specified. Every time one game ball enters the first big winning hole 8131, prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the first big winning hole are paid out.

The first large prize opening 8131 transitions from a closed state to an open state in the first route when a special stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "big hit" and in the second route when a specific stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern determination is a "small hit" and the second large prize opening 8151 opens, and a game ball that enters the opened second large prize opening 8151 enters the V prize opening 8156 within the second large prize opening 8151.

The first special electric shutter 8134 has an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first large prize opening 8131, and a first large prize opening state, by the operation of a first special electric solenoid 8135 (see FIG. 294 described later). It is configured to be able to transition between a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the winning hole 8131.

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 8134 is composed of an opening/closing door whose lower part is pivoted. When the first special electric shutter 8134 is in the open state, the opening/closing door falls to the front side, the first big prize opening 8131 opens, receives the game ball flowing down into the right side area 107, and transfers the received game ball to the first You will be guided to the 1st prize winning opening 8131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 8134 is in the closed state, the opening/closing door is inverted and closes the first big winning hole 8131, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first big winning hole 8131. Become. Note that instead of the first special electric shutter 8134 described above, a movable member whose lower part is pivoted and can be tilted to either the left or right side may be employed.

(Second special electric accessory unit)
The second special electric accessory unit 8150 is provided below (downstream side) the passage gate 8126 and the normal electric accessory unit 8145 in the right side area 107. Note that the second special electric accessory unit 8150 may be provided upstream of at least either the passage gate 8126 or the normal electric accessory unit 8145, or may be provided in the left side area 106.

The second special electric accessory unit 8150 includes a second big prize opening 8151 , a second big winning opening count switch 8152 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning opening 8151 , and a second big winning opening 8151 . A second special electric shutter 8154 that can be opened and closed, and a second special electric solenoid 8155 that operates the second special electric shutter 8154 to open and close the second big prize opening 8151 (see FIG. 294 described later). A V winning hole 8156 through which the game ball that entered the second big winning hole 8151 can pass, a V winning hole switch 8157 that detects that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 8156, and a V winning hole switch 8157 that allows the game ball to pass through the second big winning hole 8151. A loss opening 8158 through which game balls that have not entered the V winning opening 8156 can pass through, a V shutter 8159 that opens and closes the V winning opening 8156, and a V shutter 8159 that operates the V shutter 8159 to open the V winning opening 8156. It is a unit body that is integrated with a V-shutter solenoid 8160 (see FIG. 294 described later) that opens and closes.

The second large prize opening 8151 is an opening that opens when a small win occurs, and the maximum number of winning balls that can enter the second large prize opening 8151 in one small win (for example, 10 balls) is specified. Each time one game ball enters this second large prize opening 8151, prize balls for the second large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 8154 is made of a protruding plate-shaped member that can move forward and backward, and is configured so that by operating the second special electric solenoid 8155 (see Figure 294 described below), the second special electric shutter 8154 can be advanced forward to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 8151, and the second special electric shutter 8154 can be retracted backward to an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 8151.

The V winning hole 8156 is a winning hole that can be opened and closed by a V shutter 8159, and is a winning hole that is triggered to be controlled into a jackpot gaming state through the second route described above when a game ball passes through it.

When the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, the opening of the second large prize opening 8151 when the game ball passes through the V prize opening 8156 is counted as the first round, and after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 8156 (from the second round onwards), a round game is executed in which the first large prize opening 8131 transitions from a closed state to an open state. Note that when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state via the second route, a round game in which the second large prize opening 8151 transitions from a closed state to an open state may be executed for a predetermined number of rounds even after the game ball passes through the V prize opening 8156 (from the second round onwards).

Further, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the first big winning hole 8131, one V winning hole and one attacker may be opened in the jackpot game state. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived, the first big winning hole 8131 is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning hole provided inside the first big winning hole 8131. When the game enters, the control may be controlled to a jackpot gaming state (a jackpot gaming state via the second route).

The losing hole 8158 is configured so that game balls that entered the second big winning hole 8151 but did not pass through the V winning hole 8156 enter (pass through). The game balls that have passed through the loss port 8158 are discharged to the outside of the machine. In addition, at the time of a small hit, if all of the game balls that entered the opened second grand prize opening 8151 passed through the loss opening 8158 and no game balls passed through the V winning opening 8156, the small winning game state Therefore, the state will not be shifted to the jackpot gaming state.

The V-shutter 8159 is configured to be able to transition between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for game balls to pass through the V-entry opening 8156, and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for game balls to pass through the V-entry opening 8156, by the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 8160 (see Figure 294 described below).

In particular, in the eighth pachinko game machine, even if the same small win (small win game state), the operation mode of the V shutter 8159 (the operation timing of the V shutter solenoid 8160) changes the game to the V winning hole 8156. We create different types of small wins: "falling small wins" in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the ball to pass through, and "V small wins" in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156. ing.

[10-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the eighth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 294. Fig. 294 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 294, like the first pachinko game machine, the eighth pachinko game machine mainly includes a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, and a main control circuit 200 that controls the performance according to the progress of the game. It is composed of a sub-control circuit 300, a payout/emission control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, compared to the first pachinko game machine, the eighth pachinko game machine differs in some respects in the configuration of the device connected to the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, and the payout/launch control circuit 400. The configuration and layout of each of these components are explained below.

[10-2-1. Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 200 has a general electric solenoid 8148, a first special electric solenoid 8135, a second special electric solenoid 8155, and a V-shutter solenoid 8160 connected to the main control circuit 200, compared to the first pachinko gaming machine. , the configurations of the first starting port switch 8121, second starting port switch 8141, passage gate switch 8127, first big winning port count switch 8132, second big winning port counting switch 8152, and V winning port switch 8157 are partially different. There is.

(Solenoid for general purpose)
The normal power solenoid 8148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the normal power shutter 8147. When the normal power solenoid 8148 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it advances the normal power shutter 8147 forward to open the second starting port 8140, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the normal power shutter 8147 backward to close the second starting port 8140.

(1st special electric solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 8135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 8134, which is an opening/closing door. When the first special electric solenoid 8135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, the first special electric shutter 8134 is tilted forward, the first big prize opening 8131 is opened, and the first special electric solenoid 8135 is energized by the main CPU 201. If it is not executed (if it is OFF), the first special electric shutter 8134 is inverted backward and the first big prize opening 8131 is closed.

(Second special electric solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 8155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 8154. When the second special electric solenoid 8155 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the second special electric shutter 8154 is moved backward to open the second grand prize opening 8151, and the second special electric solenoid 8155 is energized by the main CPU 201. If it is not performed (it is OFF), the second special electric shutter 8154 is advanced forward to close the second big prize opening 8151.

(Solenoid for V-shutter)
The V shutter solenoid 8160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V shutter 8159. When the V shutter solenoid 8160 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 8159 backward to open the V winning opening 8156, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 8159 forward to close the V winning opening 8156.

(1st starting port switch)
The first starting port switch 8121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 8120.

When the first start hole switch 8121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 8120, the main CPU 201 determines that the first start condition is met and acquires start information for the first special symbol (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information for the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (first special symbol start memory area (1) to first special symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of first special symbols (e.g., four)," and when the judgment start condition for the first special symbol (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the hit judgment process for the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, when the first start port switch 8121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 8120, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of the prize balls for the first start port (e.g., three game balls).

(Second starting port switch)
The second starting port switch 8141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 8140.

When the second start hole switch 8141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 8140, the main CPU 201 determines that the second start condition is met and acquires start information for the second special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for symbol, random number value for reach determination, random number value for effect selection, etc.). The acquired start information for the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of second special symbols (e.g., four)," and when the judgment start condition for the second special symbol (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the hit judgment process for the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, when the second start port switch 8141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 8140, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a prize ball (e.g., one game ball) for the second start port.

In addition, in the embodiment, the hit determination process of the first special symbol based on the starting information of the first special symbol is a "first special symbol lottery", and the winning determination process of the second special symbol based on the starting information of the second special symbol is "first special symbol lottery". The winning determination process is also referred to as "second special symbol lottery", and the first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery are collectively referred to as "special symbol lottery".

(Passing gate switch)
The passing gate switch 8127 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball through the passing gate 8126.

When the passage gate switch 8127 detects passage of the game ball to the passage gate 8126, the main CPU 201 acquires the starting information of the normal symbol (random value for normal symbol hit determination, random symbol value of the normal symbol, etc.). The acquired normal symbol starting information is sequentially stored in the normal symbol starting memory area (normal symbol starting memory area (1) to normal symbol starting memory area (4)) of the main RAM 203 up to the "pending number of normal symbols (for example, 4 pieces)". ), and when the normal symbol judgment start conditions (for example, the normal electric accessory is not operating, the variable display of the normal symbol is not performed, etc.), the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol winning (judgment processing) and variable display of normal symbols. Note that even if passage of the game ball to the passage gate 8126 is detected by the passage gate switch 8127, the prize sphere is not paid out.

(First prize slot count switch)
The first large prize opening count switch 8132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 8131. When the first large prize opening count switch 8132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 8131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter the first large prize opening 8131 per round, and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the first large prize opening (for example, 15 game balls).

(Second major prize slot count switch)
The second large prize opening count switch 8152 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 8151. When the second large prize opening count switch 8152 detects the entry of game balls into the second large prize opening 8151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 8151 and instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of prize balls for the second large prize opening (e.g., 15 game balls).

(V prize entry switch)
The V winning hole switch 8157 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 8156. When the V winning hole switch 8157 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 8156, the main CPU 201 performs control to transition to a big win game state. Note that even if the V winning hole switch 8157 detects the passage of a game ball into the V winning hole 8156, no prize balls are paid out.

[10-2-2. Sub control circuit]
Similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, the sub control circuit 300 includes a sub CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, an audio control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, an accessory control circuit 307, and a command input port 308. However, the difference is that a button control circuit 310 and a production button 54 are further provided.
(Button control circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the production button 54. That is, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the production button 54 and vibrating the production button 54. The button control circuit 310 drives the production button 54 in response to a drive command from the sub CPU 301.

Further, the button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to the player's operation detected by the production button 54. When the button control circuit 310 receives an operation signal from the production button 54, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub CPU 301.

[10-2-3. Payout/fire control circuit]
The payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the payout/launch of game balls, similar to the first pachinko gaming machine, and this payout/launch control circuit 400 has a circuit that can pay out game balls. A payout device 82, a firing device 6 capable of firing game balls, a card unit 180 capable of controlling ball lending, and the like are connected.

Furthermore, in the payout/launch control circuit 400 of the eighth pachinko game machine, when the cumulative number of game balls paid out during a jackpot game state per day reaches a predetermined number of balls to be stopped (for example, 100,000 balls), the "ball payout limiter function" is activated, and control related to the game-disabled state is performed, such as stopping the firing of game balls by the launch device 6 (stopping the supply of power to the launch solenoid) and prohibiting the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82. The control related to the game-disabled state will be described in more detail later.

[10-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the eighth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 295 to 306. Note that the eighth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the eighth pachinko gaming machine, although the special probability control is not executed, a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Note that, although the eighth pachinko gaming machine does not execute the special probability control, this is not essential, and for example, the special probability control may be executed by setting the special probability flag to ON depending on the type of jackpot, etc.

In addition, in the eighth pachinko game machine, as described later, as time-saving game states distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving end conditions, there are a "special time-saving game state" in which the next jackpot is practically guaranteed, and a "general time-saving game state" in which the next jackpot is not guaranteed. In addition, as time-saving game states distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving transition conditions (time-saving occurrence conditions), there are an "A time-saving game state" which is transitioned to after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by a jackpot, and a "B time-saving game state" which is transitioned to after the variable display count of the special pattern reaches the ceiling value without being triggered by a jackpot. As described later in detail, in this embodiment, from the viewpoint of time-saving end conditions and time-saving transition conditions, the "general time-saving game state" is composed of the "A time-saving game state" consisting of the first time-saving end condition, and the "special time-saving game state" is composed of the "B time-saving game state" consisting of the second time-saving end condition, or the "A time-saving game state" consisting of the second time-saving end condition. In addition, in this embodiment, when there is no distinction between the special time-saving game state, the general time-saving game state, the A time-saving game state, and the B time-saving game state, they are simply referred to as the "time-saving game state."

In addition, in this embodiment, in a general normal gaming state (first normal gaming state described later), left-handed playing is, in principle, the legal gaming mode, and in the time-saving gaming state, right-handed playing is the normal gaming mode. Ru. The sub CPU 301 displays, for example, in the display area of the display device 7, how to play which is considered to be a normal game mode.

[10-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
295 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning determination table shown in FIG. 295 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining whether a hit is a "big hit", "small hit" or "miss".

In the special symbol hit determination table, as data used in the first special symbol hit determination process executed based on the ball entering the first starting port 8120, a jackpot determined as a "jackpot" or "loss" is recorded. The relationship between the range (width) of random numbers for determination and the corresponding win/loss determination value data (jackpot determination value data, loss determination value data) is defined. In addition, as data used for the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting port 8140, the data used for determining the jackpot determined as "jackpot", "small hit", or "loss" is used. The relationship between the range (width) of the random number value and the corresponding win/loss determination value data (big hit determination value data, small hit determination value data, loss determination value data) is defined. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for jackpot determination is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned random number value for jackpot determination is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 295, when a game ball enters the first starting port 8120, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for the first special symbol using a random value for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol. The result of the special symbol hit determination process is determined to be a "jackpot" at a selection rate of approximately 1/319.7, and otherwise determined to be a "loss." Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 8140, the main CPU 201 determines the hit of the special symbol based on the hit determination process of the second special symbol using the random number value for determining the jackpot of the second special symbol. As for the result of the processing, a selection rate of approximately 1/319.7 is determined to be a "big hit", a selection rate of approximately 1/36.6 is determined to be a "small hit", and other than that, a "loss" is determined.

Note that the range (width) of random numbers determined as a "big hit" or "small hit", that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, a "small hit" may be determined. However, if a "small hit" is determined, the first It is possible to determine a "small hit" with a relatively low selection rate so that the determination performed in the hit determination process of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the determination performed in the hit determination process of the special symbol. preferable.

In addition, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, a "time-saving hit" that transitions directly to the time-saving game state (C time-saving game state) without transitioning to the jackpot game state may be determined.

Further, when the eighth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of jackpot and/or small win may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. However, even if the eighth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that the selection rate per time saving be a common probability for all settings, for example.

In addition to or instead of changing the selection rate of a big win or a small win according to the set value, for example, the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning port 8156 may be changed for each set value to change the passing rate to the V winning port 8156, or the time-saving end condition (number of small wins, etc.) may be changed for each set value. In other words, by adopting one or more of the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the probability of a big win, the probability of a small win, the opening frequency of the V winning port 8156 (i.e. the operation frequency of the second special electric shutter 8154), the opening time, and the time-saving end condition, the expectation value controlled to the big win game state may be configured to be higher in a high setting than in a low setting.

[10-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
Fig. 296 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in Fig. 296 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that determines the "special symbol selection symbol" and "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

The "special symbol selection symbol" is information for determining the special symbol that will be stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit, and the "symbol designation command" is This is a command sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in order to display a decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the special pattern in the display area of the display device 7.

The special symbol determination table contains the type of special symbol, the above-mentioned win/loss determination value data, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 or the second starting hole 8140. is defined in association with the "special symbol selection symbol" and the "design designation command". The symbol random number value of the special symbol is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 296, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the symbol random number value for the first special symbol is one of 0 to 19. At times, the main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the special symbol selection symbol, and determines "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 20 to 59, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the first special symbol is one of 60 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

When jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the second special symbol, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the selected symbol of the special symbol, regardless of which value the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is. ” is determined, and “zA4” is determined as the symbol designation command.

When small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, if the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is between 0 and 5, the main CPU 201 selects the selected symbol of the special symbol. ``z5'' is determined as the symbol designation command, and ``zA5'' is determined as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 6 to 75, the main CPU 201 determines "z6" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA5" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the second special symbol is one of 76 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA6" as the symbol designation command.

As described above, in this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the special symbol selection symbol is determined by the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 296. The configuration is such that the relational expression of selectivity of "z1"<"z2"="z3" holds true.

Further, as will be described in detail later using FIG. 298, when small hit judgment value data is obtained and "z5" or "z6" is determined as the selected symbol of the special symbol, the input to the V winning hole 8156 is When a small winning game state is performed as a “V small winning” in which the game ball can pass (or easily), and “z7” is determined as the selected special symbol, the game ball enters the V winning hole 8156. A small winning game state as a "falling small winning" in which it is impossible (or difficult) to pass is performed. When a small winning game state as "V small winning" is performed, a game ball passes through the V winning hole 8156, thereby transitioning to a jackpot gaming state from the second route. On the other hand, when a small winning gaming state such as a "falling small winning" is performed, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and the transition to the jackpot gaming state occurs. If the game is not in the time-saving gaming state, the number of small winnings as a time-saving ending condition A to be described later is subtracted, and this becomes an opportunity to end the time-saving gaming state.

The right column of the special symbol determination table in Fig. 296 shows for reference the "combined probability" of each selected symbol of the special symbol calculated by combining the "random number value for determining a big win (see Fig. 295)" and the "symbol random number value (see Fig. 296)." In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, the combined probability of the selected symbols "z5, z6" of the special symbols corresponding to a "V small win" is approximately 1/48.2, and the combined probability of the selected symbol "z7" of the special symbol corresponding to a "fall small win" is approximately 1/152.6. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, the combined probability of the selected special pattern "z4" corresponding to a "big win" on the first route and the selected special patterns "z5, z6" corresponding to a "V small win" on the second route, that is, the actual probability of transitioning to a big win game state via the first route and the second route when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, is configured to be approximately 1/41.9.

Although the explanation is omitted in the eighth pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table determines the stop mode of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 294) when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a table that is referred to when making a decision according to the selected symbol. In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 display the stop mode of a jackpot, the stop mode of a small hit, or the stop mode of a loss based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Ru. Further, a decorative pattern stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative pattern stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

Note that the range of the symbol random number value of the special symbol that determines the "selected symbol of the special symbol", that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

[10-3-3. Jackpot Type Determination Table]
297 is an example of a big win type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The big win type determination table shown in FIG. 297 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The jackpot type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the jackpot gaming state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the jackpot gaming state." In the eighth pachinko game machine, different jackpot type determination tables are referred to depending on whether or not the limiter number is set by the number of times limiter function (presence or absence of a limiter activation flag described later) and the remaining number of limiter times in the number of times limiter function. That will happen.

The jackpot type determination table 1 shown in FIG. 297(a) is a jackpot type determination table that is referenced when the jackpot limiter number is not set (when the limiter activation flag = 0). In other words, it is a jackpot type determination table that is referenced at the time of the first jackpot (the so-called first hit) in a game state other than the A time-saving game state (normal game state or B time-saving game state).

The jackpot type determination table 2 shown in FIG. 297(b) is a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when the limiter activation flag=1 is set and the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts is 91 or more.

The jackpot type determination table 3 shown in FIG. 297(c) is a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when the limiter activation flag=1 is set and the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts is 90 or less.

As shown in FIG. 297, in the jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3, "opening mode of jackpot game state" is associated with the selected special symbol.

The "opening mode in the jackpot gaming state" specifies the maximum number of rounds of the first large prize opening 8131 that is opened in the jackpot gaming state, and the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131. The opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131 specifies the OP waiting time (opening time), the maximum opening time of each round, the closing time of each round, the ED waiting time (ending time), etc. Note that the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131 may specify a different maximum opening time for each round, or a different closing time for each round (round interval time). Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be specified so that the first large prize opening 6131 is opened and closed multiple times per round.

Here, the "opening mode of the jackpot game state" corresponding to the "selected symbols z5 to 7 of special symbols" of the small win of the second special symbol is the second big prize opening 8151 opened during the small win game state. This is the opening mode when the game ball that has entered the V winning hole passes through the second route 8156 and shifts to the jackpot game state. When transitioning to the jackpot gaming state via this second route, the opening of the second big prize opening 8151 during the small winning gaming state is considered as the first round, and from the second round onwards, the first big winning opening 8131 is opened. A jackpot game state is started.

Further, when the game ball that enters the second big winning hole 8151 opened during the small winning game state does not pass through the V winning hole 8156, the big winning gaming state will not be executed. In particular, in this embodiment, if the selected symbol "z7" of the special symbols corresponding to the "falling small hit" is determined, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is essentially not executed.

As shown in FIG. 297, according to jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3, the OP waiting time (opening time) and ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131 are configured to differ depending on whether or not a limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining number of limiter counts in the count limiter function.

In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 297, the smaller the remaining number of limiter times in the number limiter function (the more consecutive jackpots are counted), the more the OP in the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 8131 becomes The waiting time (opening time) and the ED waiting time (ending time) are configured to be short.

In this embodiment, the OP waiting time (opening time) and ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 8131 are configured to differ depending on whether or not a limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining number of limiter counts in the count limiter function. However, the jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3 may be configured so that only the OP waiting time (opening time) or only the ED waiting time (ending time) is different.

Furthermore, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the first big prize opening 8131, the maximum opening time of each round, depending on whether or not the limiter number is set by the number limiter function, and the remaining number of limiters in the number limiter function. The jackpot type determination tables 1 to 3 may be configured so that at least one of the time, the closing time of each round, and the ED waiting time (ending time) is different.

[10-3-4. Small hit type determination table]
FIG. 298 is an example of a small win type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the eighth pachinko game machine. The small type determination table shown in FIG. 298 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The small win type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the small win game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the small win game state." In the eighth pachinko game machine, different small winning type determination tables are referenced depending on whether or not the limiter number is set by the number limiter function (presence or absence of a limiter activation flag, which will be described later), and the remaining number of limiter times in the number limiter function. will be done.

The small win type determination table 1 shown in FIG. 298(a) is a small win type determination table that is referenced when the limiter number of big wins is not set (when the limiter activation flag = 0). In other words, it is a small win type determination table that is referenced at the time of the first small win (the so-called first win) in a game state other than the A time-saving game state (normal game state or B time-saving game state).

The small win type determination table 2 shown in FIG. 298(b) is a small win type determination table that is referred to when the limiter activation flag=1 is set and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more.

The small win type determination table 3 shown in FIG. 298(c) is a small win type determination table that is referenced when the limiter activation flag is set to 1 and the remaining number of big win limiter counts is 90 or less.

As shown in FIG. 298, in small win type determination tables 1 to 3, the "opening mode of the small win game state" is associated with the selected special pattern.

The "opening mode of the small winning game state" refers to the maximum number of times the second big winning hole 8151 is opened during the small winning gaming state, the opening pattern of the second big winning hole 8151, and the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156. stipulated. The opening pattern of the second grand prize opening 8151 includes OP waiting time (opening time), maximum opening time for each number of times, closing time for each number of times, ED waiting time (ending time), etc. Further, the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156 includes an opening waiting time, an opening time, etc. In addition, as the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156, like the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 8151, multiple opening times and closing times may be defined so that the V winning opening 8156 is opened and closed multiple times. .

At the start of the small win game state, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second large prize winning port 8151 and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V prize winning port 8156 are timed simultaneously.

When the special symbol selection patterns "z5, z6" corresponding to a "V small win" are determined, the second large winning opening 8151 opens a maximum of 16 times, and when the second large winning opening 8151 opens for the second or subsequent times, the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 has elapsed, making it possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through to the V winning opening 8156. Therefore, when the special symbol selection patterns "z5, z6" corresponding to a "V small win" are determined, a favorable operation mode is determined as the opening mode of the small win game state.

In addition, when the special symbol selection pattern "z7" corresponding to a "small fall win" is determined, the second large prize opening 8151 opens once, and when the second large prize opening 8151 opens for the first time, the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V prize opening 8156 has not elapsed, making it impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through to the V prize opening 8156. For this reason, when the special symbol selection pattern "z7" corresponding to a "small fall win" is determined, an unfavorable operation mode is determined as the opening mode of the small win game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the advantageous operation mode and the disadvantageous operation mode in the opening mode of the small winning game state are determined by the opening timing of the second big winning opening 8151 (the operating timing of the second special electric solenoid 8155) and the V winning opening. 8156 (operation timing of the V-shutter solenoid 8160), but by changing the opening frequency and opening time of the V winning opening 8156, it is possible to create an advantageous operation so that the passage rate to the V winning opening 8156 is different. A mode and a disadvantageous operating mode may be configured.

And, as shown in FIG. 298, according to small win type determination tables 1 to 3, the OP waiting time (opening time), ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning port 8151, and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning port 8156 are configured to differ depending on whether or not a limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining number of limiter counts in the count limiter function.

In particular, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 298, the fewer the remaining limiter counts in the count limiter function (the more consecutive jackpots are counted), the shorter the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second large prize opening 8151, the ED waiting time (ending time), and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V prize opening 8156 become.

In this embodiment, the OP waiting time (opening time), ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 8151, and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 are configured to differ depending on whether or not a limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining number of limiter counts in the count limiter function. However, the small win type determination tables 1 to 3 may be configured so that at least one of the OP waiting time (opening time), ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 8151, and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 8156 are different.

Furthermore, the small win type determination tables 1 to 3 may be configured so that at least one of the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning port 8151, the maximum opening time for each number, the closing time for each number, the ED waiting time (ending time), and the opening waiting time, opening time, and closing time in the opening pattern of the V winning port 8156 differ depending on whether or not a limiter count is set by the count limiter function and the remaining number of limiter counts in the count limiter function.

In addition, the maximum opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 28 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 0.1 seconds), and The first big prize opening 8131 is opened in the "first opening mode" which is advantageous, and the second big prize opening 8151 is opened in the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode in the small winning game state. It can be said that

[10-3-5. Game status related setting table]
299 is an example of a game state related setting table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The game state related setting table shown in FIG. 299 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The game state related setting table is a table for setting the game state after the end of a jackpot game state. In the eighth pachinko game machine, different game state related setting tables are referenced depending on whether or not a limiter number has been set by the number limiter function (whether or not a limiter activation flag is set) and the remaining number of limiter numbers in the number limiter function.

(Game status related setting table 1)
The gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a) is a gaming state related setting table that is referred to when the limiter number of jackpots is not set (when the limiter activation flag=0). That is, at the time of the first jackpot (so-called first hit) in a gaming state other than the A time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state or B time-saving gaming state), in the gaming state related setting table that is referred to after the end of the jackpot gaming state. be.

As shown in FIG. 299(a), the game state related setting table 1 associates a "game state setting" consisting of a "state flag" and an "A time-saving end condition," a "limiter activation flag," and a "limiter count" based on the game state (game state at the time of winning) when the selected special symbol is determined to be a big hit or a small hit.

The “state flag” is a flag indicating the type of gaming state, and is stored in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 203. State flag = 0 indicates "normal gaming state", state flag = 1 indicates "A time saving gaming state", and state flag = 2 indicates "B time saving gaming state". In addition, in this embodiment, although the C time-saving game state is not executed, when the C time-saving game state is made executable, the state flag=3 indicates the C time-saving game state.

The "A time saving end condition" is a special condition for ending the A time saving gaming state as a time saving gaming state, and is composed of two ending conditions: "number of small winnings" and "time saving number". When either the ending condition of the "number of small winnings" or "time saving number" is satisfied, the time saving game state A ends and the game mode shifts to the normal game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, "A time saving end condition" is composed of two end conditions, "number of small winnings won" and "time saving number", but only "number of small winnings winning" or "time saving" is configured. It may also be composed of only the number of times. This also applies to "B time saving termination condition" which will be described later.

The "number of small wins" indicates the number of times a small win has been won in the time-saving play state, and is counted without distinguishing between the above-mentioned "V small win" and "falling small win". When a "V small win" is won, it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and it becomes possible to transition to a big win play state, but when a "falling small win" is won, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and there is no transition to a big win play state, the number of small wins is deducted, and this triggers the end of the time-saving play state.

For example, if the number of small winnings is set to 1, if the "falling small winning" is won before the "V small winning", it is impossible for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 8156. (or difficult), and the time-saving gaming state ends without transitioning to the jackpot gaming state. On the other hand, when the number of small winnings = 255 is set, the "V small winning" (about 1/48.2) is more likely than the "falling small winning (about 1/152.6)". Since the probability of winning is higher and it is possible to win at least the "V small win" by the time the small win is won 255 times, it is possible to shift to the jackpot game state without ending the time saving gaming state, This means that you are virtually guaranteed until the next jackpot. In this embodiment, the time-saving gaming state when the number of small winnings = 1 or 2 is set as the first time-saving ending condition is referred to as a "general time-saving gaming state", and the second time-saving ending condition is The time-saving game state when the number of small winnings is set to 255 is called a "special time-saving game state."

Further, when setting the number of small winnings = 255, the main CPU 201 sets the special time saving flag = 1 (special time saving flag on) in order to identify the special time saving gaming state. Similarly, when setting the number of small winnings = 1 or 2, the main CPU 201 sets the special time saving flag = 0 (turning off the special time saving flag) in order to identify the general time saving gaming state. ).

The "time saving number of times" indicates the total number of times that either the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be variably displayed in the time saving game state.

In this embodiment, when the state flag is set to 1 (A time-saving game state), the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, which is a number at which the end condition of the "time-saving number of times" cannot actually be met. However, it is also possible to set the number of time-saving times to 100, which is a number at which the end condition of the "time-saving number of times" can be met.

The "limiter activation flag" is a flag that indicates whether or not the number of continuous jackpots that have transitioned from the time-saving gaming state to the jackpot gaming state due to the number of times limiter function is being counted, and when the limiter activation flag = 1, the number of jackpots that have been made by the number of times limiter function is counted. This indicates that the number of consecutive jackpots is being counted, and the limiter activation flag = 0 indicates that the number of consecutive jackpots due to the number limiter function is not being counted. In addition, the limiter operation flag also corresponds to the state flag, and when the state flag indicating the A time saving gaming state is set to 1, the limiter operation flag is set to 1, and the state flag indicating the normal gaming state is set to 0. is set, the limiter activation flag=0 is set.

The "limiter number of times" indicates the number of times set at the time of the first jackpot in a gaming state other than the A time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state or B time-saving gaming state). When the limiter activation flag = 1 is set, the limiter count is subtracted every time the time-saving gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and when the limiter activation flag = 1 and the limiter count = 0, the number of times limiter function is activated, and the gaming state related setting table 4 shown in FIG. 299(d), which will be described later, is referred to.

According to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state, if the game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 and the lottery result for the first special symbol is a jackpot, after the jackpot game state ends, if the selected symbol for the first special symbol is "z1", the status flag is set to 1, the number of small jackpot wins is set to 255, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and the number of limiter times is set to 98. If the selected symbol for the first special symbol is "z2", the status flag is set to 1, the number of small jackpot wins is set to 1, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and the number of limiter times is set to 100. If the selected symbol for the first special symbol is "z3", the status flag is set to 0, and the limiter activation flag is set to 0.

According to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state, if the game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and the lottery result for the second special pattern is a big win or a small win, after the big win game state (including the big win game state from a V small win) ends, if the selected pattern for the second special pattern is "z4", "z5" or "z6", the following settings are set: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 1, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, number of limiters = 90; and when the selected pattern for the second special pattern is "z7", the following settings are set: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 1, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, number of limiters = 1.

In addition, according to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state, if the game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 and the lottery result for the first special symbol is a jackpot, after the jackpot game state ends, if the selected symbol for the first special symbol is "z1", the following settings are set: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 255, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, and number of limiters = 97; and if the selected symbol for the first special symbol is "z2" or "z3", the following settings are set: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 1, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, and number of limiters = 99.

According to the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state, if the game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and the lottery result for the second special pattern is a big win or a small win, after the big win game state (including the big win game state from a V small win) ends, if the selected pattern for the second special pattern is "z4", "z5" or "z6", the following settings are made: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 1, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, number of limiters = 96; and when the selected pattern for the second special pattern is "z7", the following settings are made: status flag = 1, number of small wins = 1, number of time-saving times = 10,000, limiter activation flag = 1, number of limiters = 1.

In addition, if the game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small hit, and the selected symbol for the second special symbol corresponding to a "small fall hit" is determined to be "z7", it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and there is no transition to a big hit game state, and the game state, limiter activation flag, and limiter count are not set. This is also true for game state related setting tables 2 to 4 described below.

Next, by summarizing the situation of the lottery for special symbols in each game state for which the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a) is referenced, the time-saving game state when the jackpot limiter number of times has not been set is limited to the B time-saving game state, which is entered after the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed reaches the ceiling value, without being triggered by a jackpot. In other words, "the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state" in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a) indicates that the game state at the time of winning is the "B time-saving game state."

Here, when in the normal game state, left-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, the game ball can enter the first starting port 8120, and the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 8140. Have difficulty. In addition, when in the time-saving gaming state (B-time saving gaming state), right-handed hitting is performed as a regular gaming mode, a game ball can enter the second starting port 8140, and a game ball can enter the first starting port 8120. It is difficult to enter the ball.

Therefore, in the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, as will be described later. In the first normal game state, this corresponds to when the first special symbol is determined to be the first jackpot.

In addition, during normal game play, it is essentially possible for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 8120, and it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 8140; however, immediately after the time-saving game play ends and the game transitions to the normal game play state, the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game play state is consumed.

For this reason, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the normal game state, if the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, this corresponds to the fact that in the second normal game state described below, the lottery for the second special symbol determines that it is a big win or a small win immediately after the time-saving game state ends, and the big win or small win is won back.

In addition, when in the B time-saving game state, it is originally possible for a game ball to enter the second starting port 8140, and it is difficult for a game ball to enter the first starting port 8120; Immediately after transitioning from the state to the time-saving gaming state, the reserved number of the first special symbols stored in the normal gaming state is used up, or even though it is in the time-saving gaming state (B time-saving gaming state), As an irregular game mode, left-handed hitting is performed, and a game ball may enter the first starting port 8120.

Therefore, in the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the gaming state at the time of winning is the time-saving gaming state (B time-saving gaming state), the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot. The case is the B time saving game state where the reserved number of the first special symbols stored in the normal game state has been used up, or the B time saving game state where the player is left-handed as an irregular game mode, and the first special symbol This corresponds to when the first jackpot is determined by the lottery.

In addition, in the game state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), when the game state at the time of winning is the time-saving game state (B time-saving game state), the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is a big win or a small win corresponds to the case where the first big win is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol in the B time-saving game state during right-hand play.

(Limiter frequency characteristics)
Next, the characteristics of the limiter count set by the game state related setting table 1 shown in Figure 299 (a) will be explained.

In the first normal game state, when the first jackpot is determined by the drawing of the first special symbol and the limiter number is set, a different limiter number (98 or 100) is set depending on the selected symbol of the first special symbol. will be set.

In the second normal game state, a big win or small win is determined immediately after the time-saving game state ends by drawing the second special symbol, and when the limiter number of times is set, a different limiter number (1 time or 90 times) is set according to the selected second special symbol.

B In the time-saving game state, when the first jackpot is determined by the drawing of the first special symbol and the limiter number is set, a different limiter number (97 or 99) is set depending on the selected symbol of the first special symbol. That will happen.

B In the time-saving game state, when the first jackpot is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol and the limiter number is set, a different limiter number (96 times or 1 time) is set depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol. That will happen.

In this way, according to the game state related setting table 1 shown in Figure 299 (a), different "limiter counts" are set depending on the game state at the time of winning and the selected special pattern.

In particular, according to the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), after the jackpot gaming state by drawing a special symbol in the B time-saving gaming state ends, the jackpot gaming state by drawing a special symbol in the normal gaming state ends. It is possible to set a limiter number (97 times, 99 times, or 96 times) that is different from the limiter number (98 times, 100 times, or 90 times) that is set after the end.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a jackpot or small hit is determined by the second special symbol lottery in the second normal gaming state immediately after the end of the time-saving gaming state, and the limiter number is set (big hit or small win) ), when it is determined to be the first jackpot by drawing the first special symbol in the first normal gaming state, and when it is determined to be the first jackpot by drawing the special symbol in the B time-saving gaming state. The game state related setting table 1 is configured so that a smaller limiter number (90 times) is set than the above. In particular, the limiter number set when a jackpot or small hit is determined by the lottery of the second special symbol in the second normal gaming state immediately after the end of the time-saving gaming state is set in the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 (described later). This corresponds to the remaining number of jackpot limiter times determined by ) It is possible to adopt a variation pattern table of special symbols.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined, the original In this case, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and the game state etc. are not set without transitioning to the jackpot game state. However, if a game ball passes through the V winning hole 8156 due to fraud or irregularity, and the state shifts to a jackpot game state, the number limiter function will be activated immediately (at the next jackpot) after the jackpot game state ends. In order to operate, the limiter number of times (0 times) is set smaller than the number of times (90 times or 96 times) set when the selected symbol "z4-6" of the second special symbol corresponding to "V small hit" is selected. The gaming state related setting table 1 is configured so that

In addition, in this embodiment, the limiter number is configured to be different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning and the selected special symbol, but it is arranged so that the same limiter number is set for all (for example, 100 times). may be configured.

(Characteristics of the number of small winnings)
According to the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), the "number of small winnings" in the A time saving end condition is configured to differ depending on the gaming state at the time of winning and the selected symbol of the special symbol. ing. Note that the gaming state related setting table 1 may be configured so that the "number of small winnings" in the A time-saving end condition differs depending on the gaming state at the time of winning or the selected symbol of the special symbol.

In addition, in the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), it is possible to set the number of small winnings = 255 times according to the selected symbol of the first special symbol by lottery of the first special symbol. 1. It is possible to shift from the lottery of special symbols to a special time-saving game state. However, the gaming state related setting table 1 is configured so that the number of small winnings = 255 can be set according to the selected symbol of the second special symbol by the lottery of the second special symbol. It may also be possible to make a transition from the lottery to a special time-saving gaming state. However, if it is possible to set the number of small winnings = 255 according to the selected symbol of the second special symbol, the number of small winnings = 255 will be set according to the selected symbol of the second special symbol. It is desirable that the selection rate is lower than the selection rate where the number of small winnings = 255 is set according to the selected symbol of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, according to the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), two types of small winning numbers are set, 1 or 255, depending on the selected special symbol. However, as shown in the gaming state related setting table 2 to be described later, it may be configured so that three or more types of the number of small winnings are set, such as 1, 2, or 255. . However, it is desirable that the number of small winnings = 255 is set when the first special symbol is selected by the first special symbol lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "number of small winnings" in the A time-saving ending condition is configured to differ depending on the gaming state at the time of winning and the selected symbol of the special symbol. It may also be configured such that "number of times" is set.

(Game status related setting table 2)
The gaming state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 299(b) is a gaming state related setting table that is referred to when the limiter activation flag=1 is set and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more. In addition, since the limiter activation flag = 1 is set, the gaming state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. This is a gaming state related setting table to be referred to. This also applies to the gaming state related setting table 3 and gaming state related setting table 4, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 299(b), in the game state related setting table 2, the selected special symbol is associated with a "game state setting," a "limiter activation flag," and a "limiter count subtraction value."

According to the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 299(b), when a game ball enters the first starting port 8120 and the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot game state After the completion of , "gaming state setting" and "limiter activation flag" are set similarly to the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), but when the selected symbol of the first special symbol is "z1" Or, when it is "z2", 1 is subtracted from the limiter count.

As mentioned above, the limiter activation flag also corresponds to the status flag, and when the limiter activation flag = 1 is set, the status flag = 1 indicating the A time saving gaming state is set. In the time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, and although it is originally impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the first starting port 8120, the time-saving game In this situation, it is possible for the game ball to enter the first starting port 8120 by hitting left-handed as an irregular game mode (which is disadvantageous to the player). Therefore, in the gaming state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 299(b), the case where the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot is different from the case where the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot because left-handed hitting is performed as an irregular gaming mode in the time-saving gaming state. This corresponds to when a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 and is determined to be a jackpot. This also applies when the lottery result of the first special symbol in the gaming state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 299(c) is a jackpot.

Furthermore, according to the game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 299(b), when a game ball enters the second starting port 8140 and the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot or a small win, , After the end of the jackpot game state (including the jackpot game state from the V small win), if the selected symbol of the second special symbol is "z4", the state flag = 1, the number of wins of the small win = 2 times , Time saving number = 10000 times, limiter activation flag = 1 is set, 3 is subtracted from the limiter number, and when the selected symbol of the second special symbol is "z5", status flag = 1, number of small winnings won = 2 times, time saving number = 10000 times, limiter activation flag = 1 is set, 2 is subtracted from the limiter number, and when the selected symbol of the second special symbol is "z6" or "z7", the status flag = 1. The number of small winnings = 1 time, the number of time saving times = 10,000 times, the limiter activation flag = 1 are set, and 1 is subtracted from the limiter number of times.

In this way, according to the game state related setting table 2 shown in Figure 299 (b), the "number of small wins" and the "limiter number of deductions" in the A time-saving end condition are configured to differ depending on the selected second special symbol.

In this embodiment, the game state related setting table 2 is configured so that the "number of small wins" and the "limiter count subtraction value" in the A time-saving end condition differ depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol. However, the game state related setting table 2 may be configured so that only the "number of small wins" or only the "limiter count subtraction value" in the A time-saving end condition differs depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, the gaming state related setting table 2 may be configured so that the "limiter count subtraction value" differs depending on the selected symbol of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, the game state related setting table 2 may be configured so that the same "limiter count subtraction value (e.g., all 1)" is subtracted regardless of the selected second special symbol (selected first special symbol).

(Game status related setting table 3)
The gaming state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 299(c) is a gaming state related setting table that is referred to when the limiter activation flag = 1 is set and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 1 to 90. .

As shown in FIG. 299(c), similar to the gaming state related setting table 2, the gaming state related setting table 3 includes "gaming state setting" and "limiter activation" for the selected special symbol. ``flag'' and ``limiter count subtraction value'' are associated.

According to game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 299(c), when a game ball enters the first starting hole 8120 and the lottery result for the first special symbol is a jackpot, after the jackpot game state ends, the "game state setting" and the "limiter activation flag" will be set, and the limiter count will be decremented, in the same manner as game state related setting table 2 shown in FIG. 299(b).

Furthermore, according to the game state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 299(c), when a game ball enters the second starting port 8140 and the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot or a small jackpot, , After the jackpot game state (including the jackpot game state from the V small win) ends, no matter which second special symbol is selected, the state flag = 1, the number of small winnings = 1, time saving The number of times = 10,000 times, the limiter activation flag = 1 is set, and 1 is subtracted from the limiter number of times.

In this way, according to game status related setting table 2 in FIG. 299(b) and game status related setting table 3 in FIG. 299(c), the "number of small wins" and the "subtraction value of the limiter number" in the A time-saving end condition are configured to differ depending on the remaining number of big win limiter numbers.

In this embodiment, the "number of small wins" and the "limiter count subtraction value" in the A time-saving end condition are configured to differ depending on the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts, but it is also possible to configure only the "number of small wins" or only the "limiter count subtraction value" in the A time-saving end condition to differ depending on the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts.

Furthermore, it may be configured such that the "number of small winnings" and "subtraction value of the limiter number" in the A time-saving termination condition do not differ depending on the remaining number of limiter numbers of jackpots. In this case, the gaming state related setting table 2 in FIG. 299(b) is deleted and the gaming state related setting table 3 in FIG. 299(c) is set with the limiter activation flag = 1. , the game state related setting table may be referred to when the remaining number of jackpot limiter numbers is not 0 (jackpot limiter number≠0).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts reaches 90 (hereinafter also referred to as the "first switching count"), the game status related setting table is configured to switch (be referenced) from game status related setting table 2 in FIG. 299(b) to game status related setting table 3 in FIG. 299(c), but the first switching count can be freely redesigned as appropriate.

(Game status related setting table 4)
The game state related setting table 4 shown in FIG. 299(d) is a game referenced when the number limiter function is activated (the limiter activation flag = 1 is set and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times = 0). This is a state-related setting table.

As shown in FIG. 299(d), the gaming state related setting table 4 includes "state flag = 0" which sets the normal gaming state as the gaming state setting for all selected special symbols. are associated.

In this way, according to the gaming state related setting table 4 in FIG. 299(d), when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number in the time-saving gaming state, the normal gaming state is forcibly entered after the jackpot gaming state ends. In this way, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be regulated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming state related setting table 4 is configured so that when the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number in the time-saving gaming state, the game state is forcibly shifted to the normal gaming state after the jackpot gaming state ends. However, when the number of successive jackpots reaches a predetermined limiter number in the time-saving gaming state, the gaming state related setting table 4 may be configured to forcibly shift to the game disallowed state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, except for game state related setting table 4 which is referenced when the number limiter function is activated, game state related setting tables 1 to 3 are configured to transition to a "special time-shortened game state", "general time-shortened game state" or "normal game state" after the jackpot game state resulting from the lottery of the first special symbol ends, and are configured to transition only to the "general time-shortened game state" without transitioning to a "special time-shortened game state" or "general time-shortened game state" after the jackpot game state resulting from the lottery of the second special symbol ends.

In this embodiment, after the jackpot game state by the lottery of the first special symbol is ended, the game state is changed to the "special time-saving game state", the "general time-saving game state", or the "normal game state". However, after the jackpot game state by the lottery of the first special symbol is ended, the game state may be changed to either (a) the "special time-saving game state" only, (b) the "special time-saving game state" or the "general time-saving game state", or (c) the "special time-saving game state" or the "normal game state". Furthermore, after the jackpot game state by the lottery of the second special symbol is ended, the game state is changed to the "general time-saving game state" only, but the game state may be changed to (a) the "general time-saving game state" or the "special time-saving game state", (b) the "general time-saving game state" or the "normal game state", or (c) the "general time-saving game state", the "special time-saving game state" or the "normal game state".

In this embodiment, except for game state related setting table 4 that is referenced when the count limiter function is activated, game state related setting tables 1 to 3 are configured to transition to a "special time-saving game state" at a first rate that is relatively higher after the end of a jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of a first special symbol, than after the end of a jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of a second special symbol. Also, after the end of a jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of a second special symbol, the game state is configured to transition to a "general time-saving game state" at a second rate that is relatively higher than after the end of a jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of a first special symbol. Note that the first rate and second rate do not exclude the intention that the rates to be compared are 0% and 100%.

[10-3-6. Special pattern variation pattern table]
300 and 301 are examples of special symbol variation pattern tables of the eighth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 300 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state or special time-saving gaming state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. This is an example of a variation pattern table. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 300 and 301 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol change pattern table is a table that determines the "special symbol change pattern" and "special symbol change display time" as the change manner of the special symbol.

The main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table shown in either FIG. 300 or FIG. Based on the result of the determination process, the selected special symbol, etc., a special symbol variation pattern and a special symbol variation display time are determined.

Further, upon determining the fluctuation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effects displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effects output from the speaker 32 based on the variation pattern commands transmitted from the main CPU 201. The fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 8120, or a fluctuation pattern triggered by a game ball entering the second starting port 8140. It is configured so that it can be identified whether it is present or not.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 300(a) is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined during normal game play.

As shown in FIG. 300(a), the special symbol fluctuation pattern table T1 includes the type of special symbol, the lottery result (win or loss) of the special symbol, the selected symbol of the special symbol, and the random number value for reach determination. , the random number value for performance selection, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display time of the special symbol are associated with each other. Note that the random number value for reach determination is extracted from, for example, 0 to 249 (250 types), and the random number value for performance selection is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

As described above, in the normal game mode, left-handed shots are performed as the regular game mode, so that a game ball can actually enter the first starting hole 8120, but it is impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 8140. However, immediately after the time-saving game mode ends and the normal game mode is entered, the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game mode is consumed.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing between normal game states in detail, the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol based on the start information of the first special symbol is called the "first normal game state", and the normal game state in which the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is being consumed immediately after the time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state (the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol based on the start information of the second special symbol) is called the "second normal game state".

According to the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 300(a), in the first normal game state (first special symbol), different special symbol variation patterns can be determined according to the special symbol lottery result (win or lose) and the selected special symbol. However, in the second normal game state (second special symbol), when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected second special symbol "z7" corresponding to a "fall small win" is determined, and when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a loss, the same variation pattern (00H) that executes normal variation can be determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the second normal game state, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined. Although the same variation pattern is determined in the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss and the case where the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, different variation patterns may be determined. Furthermore, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined, the same variation pattern (which executes the normal variation) It may be configured such that the same variation pattern (0AH) for executing the door opening effect (loss) can be determined without determining 00H).

(Special symbol variation pattern table for special time-saving game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 300(b) is a variation pattern table of the special symbol determined in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 300(b) is also a variation pattern table of the special symbol determined in the A time-saving game state in which the number of small wins is set to 255 as the second time-saving end condition, or in the B time-saving game state in which the number of small wins is set to 255 as the second time-saving end condition.

As shown in FIG. 300(b), the special pattern variation pattern table S1 associates the type of special pattern, the lottery result (win or lose) of the special pattern, the selected special pattern, a random number value for selecting the performance, the variation pattern of the special pattern, and the variation display time of the special pattern.

As mentioned above, in the special time saving game state, right-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, and it is originally impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the first starting port 8120. However, it is possible for the game ball to enter the first starting port 8120 by hitting the ball to the left as an irregular game mode (which is disadvantageous to the player) in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the special symbol variation pattern table S1 in FIG. It corresponds to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined when the ball enters the ball. This also applies to the special symbol variation pattern tables J1 to J3 shown in FIG. 300, which are determined in the general time-saving gaming state.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 300(b), in the special time-saving game state, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss, a special symbol variation pattern (10H) consisting of a very short special symbol variation display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) compared to the normal game state can be determined. As a result, in the special time-saving game state, the variable display of the special symbol can be ended (consumed) much faster than in the normal game state.

Furthermore, according to the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. '' is determined, it is treated as a loss and the same fluctuation pattern (10H) as the fluctuation pattern determined when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss is determined. This is because in the special time-saving gaming state, the number of small winnings under A time-saving ending condition is set to 255, and the "falling small winning" will not substantially end the time-saving gaming state. .

In this embodiment, when the number of small wins in the A time-saving end condition is set to 255, the time-saving game state will not actually end due to a "falling small win". However, for security reasons, when the number of small wins is the 255th falling small win (when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small win, the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined, and the remaining number of small wins is 1), a variation pattern that executes an effect that ends the time-saving game state (for example, variation pattern 43H that executes a card effect described below) may be determined.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in general time-saving gaming state)
The special symbol fluctuation pattern tables in the general time-saving gaming state include a special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301(a), a special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 301(b), and a special symbol fluctuation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 301(c). ) is provided with three variation pattern tables including the special symbol variation pattern table J3. In addition, the number of special symbol variation pattern tables in the general time-saving gaming state is not limited to three, and may be one, or may be two or more.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301(a) is for the general time saving game state, the limiter activation flag = 1 is set, and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more. This is a variation pattern table of special symbols to be determined.

As shown in FIG. 301(a), the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1 includes the type of special symbol, the lottery result (win or loss) of the special symbol, the selected symbol of the special symbol, and the "A time-saving end condition". The remaining number of small winnings, the random number for reach determination, the random number for effect selection, the special symbol fluctuation pattern, and the special symbol fluctuation display time are associated.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301(a), in the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of jackpot limiters is 91 or more, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss, a special symbol variation pattern (11H) consisting of a shorter special symbol variation display time (e.g., 3.0 seconds) than in the normal game state can be determined. As a result, in the general time-saving game state, the variable display of the special symbol can be ended (consumed) more quickly than in the normal game state.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301(a), in the general time-saving play state when the remaining number of the jackpot limiter count is 91 or more, when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected pattern of the second special symbol "z5, z6" corresponding to the "V small win" is determined, and when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss, a special symbol variation pattern (40H or 41H) in which a common "battle performance" is executed can be determined. This allows the player to feel reassured that they have not won the "fall small win" that triggers the end of the general time-saving play state, while giving them hope that they have won the "V small win" that triggers the transition to the jackpot play state.

Furthermore, according to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301(a), in the general time-saving play state when the remaining number of the jackpot limiter number is 91 or more, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win and the selected pattern of the second special symbol "z5, z6" corresponding to the "V small win" or the selected pattern of the second special symbol "z7" corresponding to the "fall small win" is determined, and when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a miss, a variation pattern of the special symbol (30H, 31H, 32H, 3FH) in which a common "card performance" is executed can be determined. This allows the player to be interested in whether the "fall small win" that triggers the end of the general time-saving play state, the "V small win" that triggers the transition to the jackpot play state, or the "miss" has been won.

In this way, according to the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301(a), in the general time-saving gaming state when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more, This makes it possible to perform various performances and further improve the interest of the game, compared to the general time-saving game state when the remaining number of jackpot limiter numbers corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown is 90 or less.

The special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 301(b) is for the general time saving game state, the limiter activation flag = 1 is set, and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 1 to 90. This is a variation pattern table of special symbols determined by.

As shown in FIG. 301(b), the special pattern change pattern table J2 associates the type of special pattern, the lottery result (win or lose) of the special pattern, the selected special pattern, the "remaining number of small wins as the A time-saving end condition," a random number value for reach determination, a random number value for effect selection, the special pattern change pattern, and the special pattern change display time.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 301(b), in the general time-saving gaming state when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 90 or less, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, , a special symbol fluctuation pattern consisting of a shorter special symbol fluctuation display time (for example, 0.5 seconds) than the general time-saving gaming state when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more is configured to be determinable. There is. Thereby, in the general time-saving game state, when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times decreases, the variable display of special symbols can be finished (expired) more quickly.

Also, according to the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 301(b), in the general time-saving gaming state when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 90 or less, the special symbol shown in FIG. 301(a) Unlike the variation pattern table J1, a special symbol variation pattern (40H or 41H) in which a "battle performance" in which a special symbol has a long variation display time is not determined. As a result, in the general time-saving gaming state when the remaining limiter number of jackpots is 90 or less, the special symbol fluctuation pattern consisting of a long special symbol fluctuation display time is not determined, and the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 90 or less. The variable display of the special symbols can be finished (digested) more quickly than in the general time-saving game state when the number of times is 91 or more.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times reaches 90 (hereinafter also referred to as "second switching number"), the special symbol fluctuation pattern table changes to the special symbol shown in FIG. 301(a). Although the structure is configured such that the variation pattern table J1 of 1 is switched (determined) to the variation pattern table J2 of the special symbol shown in FIG. 301(b), the design of the second switching number can be changed as appropriate. In particular, if the second switching number is designed to be the number of times less than 10% (1 to 10 times) is subtracted from the limiter number (100 times) set at the time of the first jackpot, the special symbol can be changed more quickly. Since it becomes possible to switch to the special symbol variation pattern table whose display is finished (digested) at an early timing, the interest of the game is further improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the second switching number of times the special symbol fluctuation pattern table switches is set to the same number (90) as the first switching number of times the gaming state related setting table switches; The number of times of switching may be set to be different from the second number of switching times.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 301(c) is determined when the general time-saving gaming state is in place, the limiter activation flag is set to 1, and the remaining jackpot limiter count is 0. This is a variation pattern table of special symbols. That is, the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 301(c) is a special symbol variation pattern table determined when the number of times limiter function is activated.

As shown in FIG. 301(c), the special pattern change pattern table J3 associates the type of special pattern, the lottery result (win or lose) of the special pattern, the selected special pattern, the "remaining number of small wins as the A time-saving end condition," the special pattern change pattern, and the special pattern change display time.

According to the special symbol fluctuation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 301(c), in the general time-saving game state when the count limiter function is activated, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, a different special symbol fluctuation pattern (50H, 51H) is determined compared to the general time-saving game state when the count limiter function is not activated (special symbol fluctuation pattern table J1, J2). As a result, in the general time-saving game state when the count limiter function is activated, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, a special dedicated performance (ending success reach) can be executed.

[10-3-7. Data related to pre-reading of special symbols]
FIG. 302 is an example of data related to pre-reading of special symbols in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Here, "pre-reading" means that when the game ball enters the first starting port 8120 or the second starting port 8140, the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) receives special symbol starting information (random value for jackpot determination, symbol This refers to analyzing the starting information of the acquired special symbol in advance of the special symbol lottery when a random value, random value for reach determination, random value for effect selection, etc.) is acquired. Then, the analyzed information (pre-read command) is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "pre-read effect" can be executed based on the pre-read command.

Figure 302 (a) is a look-ahead execution correspondence table that determines whether or not to execute look-ahead depending on the game status as data related to look-ahead of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 302(a), in the normal gaming state, both pre-reading based on the starting information of the first special symbol and pre-reading based on the starting information of the second special symbol are executable. Further, in the time saving game state, jackpot game state, and small win game state, only the pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be executed.

Figure 302 (b) shows an example of the configuration of a look-ahead command based on the analyzed information that is the start information for a special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 302(b), the prefetch command is composed of the "type of special symbol", whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a plurality of "parameters 1 to 3". There is.

"Parameter 1" is the winning/losing information that is analyzed in advance to determine whether it is a big win, a small win, or a miss based on a random number value for determining a big win, and Figure 302 (c) is an example of a setting table for parameter 1.

"Parameter 2" is symbol information that is obtained by analyzing in advance the special symbol (selected symbol) when it is stopped and displayed based on the random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value. This is an example of a setting table.

"Parameter 3" is fluctuation information that analyzes the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols in advance based on the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for selecting a performance. Figure 302 (e) is an example of a setting table for parameter 3.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol from when the start information of the special symbol is read ahead until the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "pre-variation." Also, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol is drawn based on the start information of the special symbol is also called "the said variation."

[10-3-8. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 303 is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 303 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol winning judgment table is a table referenced in the normal symbol winning judgment process, and is a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing" is made based on the normal symbol winning judgment random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the passing gate 8126.

The winning judgment table for normal symbols shown in FIG. 303 specifies the range (width) of random numbers for winning judgment of normal symbols and winning/losing judgment value data for normal symbols ("normal symbol win" or "normal symbol miss") in correspondence with each other. Note that the random numbers for winning judgment of normal symbols are obtained in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types), for example. However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 303 and determines the normal symbol win/loss determination value data based on the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the winning judgment table for the normal pattern shown in FIG. 303, and if the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is any value between 1 and 65535, it judges it as a "normal pattern winning" and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as "normal pattern winning/losing judgment value data". In addition, if the acquired random number value for winning judgment of the normal pattern is 0, the main CPU 201 judges it as a "normal pattern losing" and determines the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal pattern as "normal pattern losing judgment value data".

In this way, in this embodiment, "normal symbol hit" is determined at a selection rate of about 1/1.00, and "normal symbol hit" is determined more easily than "normal symbol loss" is determined. ing. In addition, it is desirable that the configuration is such that "normal symbol winning" is determined more easily than "normal symbol losing" is determined, and the selection rate of "normal symbol winning" is not limited to approximately 1/1.00. do not have.

In this embodiment, the selection rate for "normal symbol hit" is set to the same regardless of whether the game state is normal or time-saving, but the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 is changed depending on the game state, as described below, to give the player different benefits depending on the game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" is set to the same regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state or the time-saving game state, but the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different depending on the game state. When making the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" different depending on the game state, it is desirable to configure it so that the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the time-saving game state is higher than the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the normal game state. Furthermore, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may also be made different depending on the type of time-saving game state, between time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B, or between special time-saving game state and general time-saving game state.

[10-3-9. Normal symbol determination table]
304 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 304 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table is a table that is referenced when selecting a "selected normal symbol" that determines the stopping symbol of the normal symbol based on the winning/losing determination value data of the normal symbol described above and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol obtained when the game ball passes through the passing gate 8126.

The normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 304 specifies the above-mentioned normal pattern winning/losing determination value data ("normal pattern win" or "normal pattern miss"), the normal pattern random number value, and the selected normal pattern, which are associated with each other. Note that the normal pattern random number value is obtained, for example, from 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 304, and determines the selected symbol of the normal symbol based on the normal symbol hit determination value data and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in Figure 304, when normal pattern hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal pattern hit determination process, for example, the selected normal pattern is selected as follows.

For example, when normal symbol winning judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the selected normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 49, and selects "f2" as the selected normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 50 and 99. Also, when normal symbol losing judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the selected normal symbol, regardless of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, when selecting a selected symbol of a normal symbol, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol (in the normal symbol winning/losing judgment process) is used regardless of the game state. The selected symbol of the normal symbol is selected based on the result) and the symbol random number value of the normal symbol. Incidentally, similarly to the first pachinko gaming machine, it may be configured such that the selection symbol of the normal symbol is selected depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 303) and uses the normal symbol win determination value data based on the acquired normal symbol hit determination random number value. is determined, and then, with reference to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 304), the selection symbol of the normal symbol is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but this is not restrictive. For example, based on the acquired random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the pattern random number value of the normal symbol, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol (win/loss of the normal symbol) and the selected symbol of the normal symbol are determined together. You can do it like this.

[10-3-10. Opening pattern determination table for ordinary electric accessories]
FIG. 305 is an example of the opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory in the eighth pachinko game machine. The opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory shown in FIG. 305 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The opening pattern determination table for the normal electric accessory is determined according to the gaming state and the selected symbol of the normal symbol when the normal symbol hit judgment value data is obtained as a result of the normal symbol hit judgment process (in the case of a normal symbol hit). This is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 as the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory 8146.

The opening pattern determination table for the normal electric device shown in Figure 305 specifies the game state, the selected normal symbol, and the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 in correspondence with each other.

In this embodiment, the "opening pattern of the normal electric role 8146" is composed of the "first opening time" in the first opening state of the second starting port 8140, the "first waiting time" in the first closing state of the second starting port 8140, the "second opening time" in the second opening state of the second starting port 8140, the "second waiting time" in the second closing state of the second starting port 8140, and the "ending time" in which the second starting port 8140 is closed and the operation of the normal electric role 8146 is terminated. The opening pattern of the normal electric role 8146 is not limited to the above-mentioned configuration, and may be configured to be capable of repeating the opening state and the closing state three or more times, or may be configured to be composed of only one opening state. Furthermore, it may be configured to have an "opening time" in which the first opening of the second starting port 8140 is waited for before the "first opening time".

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal electric accessory opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 305 and determines the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 8146 based on the gaming state and the selected symbol of the normal symbol. In addition, when the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146, it transmits an opening pattern command of the ordinary electric accessory corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 8146 to the sub CPU 301.

According to the normal electric accessory opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. The opening pattern (91H01H) is configured to have a first opening time of 72 ms, no waiting time for the first time, no opening after the second time, and an ending time of 12 ms.

In addition, according to the opening pattern determination table for normal electric devices shown in Figure 305, when a normal symbol is hit during time-saving play, the opening pattern (91H02H) of the second normal electric device 8146 is determined to be a first opening time of 5400 ms, a first waiting time of 120 ms, a second opening time of 72 ms, and an ending time of 12 ms, regardless of which normal symbol is selected.

In this way, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 differs depending on the game state, and in the case of a normal symbol hit in the normal game state, an "unfavorable opening mode (also called a "short opening")" in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 8140 is determined, and in the case of a normal symbol hit in the time-saving game state, an "advantageous opening mode (also called a "long opening")" in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 8140 is determined.

In addition, in this embodiment, no matter which opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 is activated, the specified number of ordinary electric accessories is set to one, and while the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 8146 is activated ( When one game ball enters the second starting port 8140 (while the second starting port 8140 is open), the operation of the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 8146 ends (when the second starting port 8140 is closed). ). In other words, only one game ball can enter the second starting port 8140 for one normal symbol, and even if there is a remaining opening time of 5400 ms in the time-saving gaming state, the second starting Port 8140 will be closed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the opening pattern of the same normal electric accessory 8146 is determined as the same time-saving game state regardless of the time-saving game state A and the time-saving game state B, or the special time-saving game state and the general time-saving game state. However, it may be configured to determine different opening patterns of the normal electric accessory 8146 between the A time saving game state and the B time saving game state, or the special time saving game state and the general time saving game state.

Furthermore, the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 may be different depending on the selected normal symbol. However, it is desirable that when a normal symbol is hit in the normal game state, the opening pattern is a more "disadvantageous opening pattern" group than when a normal symbol is hit in the time-saving game state, and when a normal symbol is hit in the time-saving game state, the opening pattern is a more "advantageous opening pattern" group than when a normal symbol is hit in the normal game state.

[10-3-11. Normal pattern variation table]
306 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 306 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in Figure 306 corresponds the game state, the selected normal symbol, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variation display time.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and the normal symbol variation display time based on the gaming state and the selected symbol of the normal symbol. After determining the normal symbol variation pattern, the main CPU 201 transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301.

According to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 306, in the normal game state, the normal symbol variation display time is determined to be 414 ms, and in the time-saving game state, the normal symbol variation display time is determined to be 408 ms. Also, in this embodiment, the normal symbol pattern determination time is always determined to be the same time (for example, 540 ms) regardless of the game state or the result of the normal symbol winning determination process.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal game state, the variable display time of the normal symbols and the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbols are all determined to be the same, but the time varies depending on the selected symbol of the normal symbols. It may be configured such that the variable display time of normal symbols and the symbol confirmation time of normal symbols are determined. Similarly, in the time-saving game state, the variable display time of the same normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol are determined, but depending on the selected symbol of the normal symbol, different normal symbols are displayed. It may be configured such that the variable display time and the symbol confirmation time of the normal symbol are determined. Furthermore, it may be configured such that different normal symbol variable display times and normal symbol symbol confirmation times are determined between the A time saving gaming state and the B time saving gaming state, or the special time saving gaming state and the general time saving gaming state. good.

[10-4. Main control processing]
In the eighth pachinko gaming machine, various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 include special symbol control processing and normal symbol control performed in the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23). Although some of the processing and system timer interrupt processing are different, other processing is the same. Therefore, below, the special symbol control process, the normal symbol control process, and the system timer interrupt process will be explained, and the explanation of other processes executed by the main CPU 201 will be omitted.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[10-4-1. Special symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 307, the special symbol control process performed in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. FIG. 307 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol control processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 307, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S8001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S8001, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8002.

Although not shown, when the main CPU 201 executes the special symbol control process, prior to the processing of S8001, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process to set the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, etc., in a predetermined register.

In S8002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S8001 is 0, that is, whether or not the special symbol is in a variable display waiting state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it moves the process to S8008, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it moves the process to S8003.

In S8003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not there is a pending number of the second special symbol. If the main CPU 201 determines that the starting information for the second special symbol is not stored, the process proceeds to S8004, and if it determines that the starting information for the second special symbol is stored, the process proceeds to S8005. Move.

In S8004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the start information of the first special symbol is stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203, that is, whether or not there is a pending number of the first special symbol. If the main CPU 201 determines that the starting information for the first special symbol is not stored, the process moves to S8007, and if it determines that the starting information for the first special symbol is stored, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8006. Move to.

In S8005, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the second special pattern stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the second special pattern start memory area (2) to the second special pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the second special pattern start memory area (1) to the second special pattern start memory area (3).

In S8006, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the first special pattern stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203 to the special pattern determination area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the first special pattern start memory area (2) to the first special pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the first special pattern start memory area (1) to the first special pattern start memory area (3).

In S8007, if the special symbol start information (reserved number of first and second special symbols) has not been stored in the first and second special symbol start memory areas of the main RAM 203 for a certain period of time or more, the main CPU 201 performs a demo display command transmission reservation process. The demo display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub-control circuit 300 receives the demo display command, the sub-CPU 301 performs a demo display performance.

In S8008, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 308. After executing the processing of S8003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control processing and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S8001 to S8008) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

In this manner, in this embodiment, as the eighth pachinko gaming machine, a priority variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special pattern when the start information of the second special pattern is stored has been described, but this is not limited to this. For example, when the start information of the first special pattern is stored, the priority variable machine may be one in which the special pattern management process is executed with a higher priority than the second special pattern, or a sequential variable machine in which the special pattern management process is executed in the order of winning (ball entry order) into the first start port 8120 or the second start port 8140.

[10-4-2. Special design management processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 308, the special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see FIG. 307) will be described. FIG. 308 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol management processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The numbers ("0" to "7") written in parentheses to the right of each process in FIG. 308 are the control state numbers of the special symbols that are the subject of the process. The main CPU 201 progresses the special symbol game by executing each process that corresponds to the control state number.

In S8011, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern (special pattern timer counter) is 0. This waiting time for the special pattern is set as the waiting time for various processes in the special pattern management process, and is decremented as the special pattern timer counter within the system timer interrupt process that is performed, for example, at 2 msec intervals. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is not 0, it ends the special pattern management process and returns the process to the special pattern control process (see FIG. 307), and if it determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is 0, it transfers the process to S8012.

In S8012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S8012, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8013. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S8013 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S8012.

In S8013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S8013 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 309. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8014.

In S8014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display termination processing. This process of S8014 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 311. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8015.

In S8015, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game determination processing. This process of S8015 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 313. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8016.

In S8016, the main CPU 201 performs small winning game closed processing. This process of S8016 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". The details of this small winning game closing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 316. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8017.

In S8017, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning game opening process. This process of S8017 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this small winning game opening process will be described later with reference to FIG. 317. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8018.

In S8018, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S8018 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 318. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8019.

In S8019, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This process of S8019 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 319. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8020.

In S8020, the main CPU 201 performs a process to end the jackpot game state. This process of S8020 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this process to end the jackpot game state will be described later with reference to FIG. 320.

After completing steps S8013 to S8020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management process and returns the process to the special symbol control process (see FIG. 307). In this case, the process returns to the process from which the special symbol management process was called.

[10-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 309, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308) will be described. FIG. 309 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display start processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8021, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "0", it transfers the process to S8022.

In S8022, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 295 is referenced, and a hit determination of the special symbol is made based on the random number value for big hit determination of the special symbol as the starting information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0), and a hit/lose determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process of S8022, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8023.

In S8023, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination process to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 296 is referenced, and the selected symbol and symbol designation command for the special symbol are determined based on the hit/loss determination value data as the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process in S8022 and the special symbol random number value as the start information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0). After executing the process of S8023, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8024.

In S8024, the main CPU 201 performs a hit type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the result of the hit determination process for the special symbol is a hit (big hit or small hit). In this hit type determination process, if the hit determination process for the special symbol is a big hit, one of the big hit type determination tables 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 297 is determined based on the limiter operation flag and the remaining number of limiter times in the number limiter function (the "limiter number counter" of the main RAM 203 described later). Also, if the hit determination process for the special symbol is a small hit, one of the small hit type determination tables 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 298 is determined based on the limiter operation flag and the remaining number of limiter times in the number limiter function (the limiter number counter). Furthermore, in order to set the game state etc. based on the game state at the time of winning after the end of the big win game state, the game state data at the time of winning, which indicates the game state at the time of winning when it is determined that there is a big win or a small win, is set in the game state storage area at the time of winning of the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S8024, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025.

In S8025, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol. In this special symbol variation pattern determination process, a special symbol variation pattern table of either FIG. 300 or FIG. 301 is determined depending on the game state, etc., and the determined special symbol variation pattern table is referenced to determine the special symbol variation pattern and the special symbol variation pattern command based on the type of special symbol, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, and the selected special symbol, etc. Details of this special symbol variation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 310. After executing the process of S8025, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8026.

In S8026, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process to set the variable display time of the special symbol. In this special symbol variable display time setting process, the special symbol variable display time setting process refers to the special symbol variable pattern table determined in the special symbol variable pattern determination process in S8025 above, and determines the variable display time of the special symbol based on the determined special symbol variable pattern. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the determined variable display time of the special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to start variable display of the special symbol. After executing the process of S8026, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8027.

In S8027, the main CPU 201 performs a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing a process to set the control state number of the special symbol to "1", after the special symbol variable display start process ends, a special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 308) is performed. After executing the process of S8027, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8028.

In S8028, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, confirmation and update processes of parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 are performed. Then, a process of reserving transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (Figure 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8028, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8029.

In S8029, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol presentation start command. In this process, a transmission reservation process of a "symbol designation command" and a "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as a special symbol production start command. As the transmission reservation process for the symbol designation command, the transmission reservation process for the symbol designation command determined in S8023 is performed. Further, as the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, a special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S8025 is performed so that the type of the special symbol can be known. The special symbol production start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[10-4-4. Special symbol variation pattern determination process]
Next, the details of the special symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 309) will be described with reference to Fig. 310. Fig. 310 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variation pattern determination process in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8025-1, the main CPU 201 refers to the status flag and determines whether or not the current gaming status is a normal gaming status. In other words, it determines whether or not the status flag indicating the normal gaming status is 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming status is a normal gaming status, it transfers processing to S8025-2, and if it determines that the current gaming status is not a normal gaming status (i.e., it is a time-saving gaming status), it transfers processing to S8025-3.

In S8025-2, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 300(a). After executing the process in S8025-2, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-3, the main CPU 201 refers to the state flag and determines whether the current game state (time-shortened game state) is the B time-shortened game state. In other words, it determines whether the state flag indicating the B time-shortened game state is 2. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current game state is the B time-shortened game state, it transfers processing to S8025-4, and if it determines that the current game state is not the B time-shortened game state (i.e., it is the A time-shortened game state), it transfers processing to S8025-5.

In S8025-4, if the current gaming state is the B time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 300(b). After executing the process of S8025-4, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-5, the main CPU 201 refers to the special time saving flag and determines whether the current gaming state (A time saving gaming state) is a special time saving gaming state. That is, it is determined whether the special time saving flag indicating the special time saving gaming state is 1 or not. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is the special time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S8025-6, and determines that the current gaming state is not the special time-saving gaming state (that is, the general time-saving gaming state). If determined, the process moves to S8025-7.

In S8025-6, if the current gaming state is a special time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table S1 shown in FIG. 300(b). After executing the process of S8025-6, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-7, if the main CPU 201 is in the general time-saving gaming state, the main CPU 201 determines whether the remaining limiter number of jackpots ("limiter number counter" of the main RAM 203 to be described later) is 91 or more. If the main CPU 201 determines that the remaining limiter count of jackpots is 91 or more, the process moves to S8025-8, and the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8025-8, and determines that the remaining limiter count of jackpots is not 91 or more (that is, the remaining limiter count of jackpots is 91 or more). If it is determined that the number of times is 90 or less), the process moves to S8025-9.

In S8025-8, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 301(a). After executing the process of S8025-8, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-9, the main CPU 201 determines whether the remaining limiter number of jackpots ("limiter number counter" of the main RAM 203, which will be described later) is between 1 and 90 in the general time-saving gaming state. If the main CPU 201 determines that the remaining number of jackpot limiter numbers is between 1 and 90, it moves the process to S8025-10, and the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8025-10, and the remaining number of jackpot limiter numbers is not 1 to 90 (that is, the jackpot limiter number If it is determined that the remaining number of times = 0), the process moves to S8025-11.

In S8025-10, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J2 shown in FIG. 301(b). After executing the process of S8025-10, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-11, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table J3 shown in FIG. 301(c). After executing the process in S8025-11, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8025-12.

In S8025-12, the main CPU 201 refers to the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern table, and determines the type of special symbol (type of starting information), the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process in S8022, and the special symbol. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the selected symbol, a random value for reach determination, a random value for performance selection, etc. as starting information of the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination area (0). After executing the process in S8025-12, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8025-13.

In S8025-13, the main CPU 201 refers to the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern table and determines a special symbol fluctuation pattern command based on the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern. After executing the process of S8025-13, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variation pattern determination process and moves the process to S8026 of the special symbol variable display start process (see FIG. 309).

[10-4-5. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308) will be described with reference to Fig. 311. Fig. 311 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display end process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8041, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", it ends the special symbol variable display start process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "1", the process moves to S8042.

In S8042, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol determination time setting process to set the symbol determination time for the special symbol. In this special symbol determination time setting process, the special symbol determination time (e.g., 540 ms) is determined based on the game state and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or lose). The main CPU 201 then sets the determined special symbol determination time to the special symbol waiting time in the main RAM 203, and causes the first special symbol display unit 163 or the second special symbol display unit 164 to display the special symbol in a stopped state. After executing the process of S8042, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8043.

Note that the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or may be determined based only on the gaming state. Furthermore, one predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 ms) may be determined.

In S8043, the main CPU 201 performs time saving management processing. The eighth pachinko game machine includes a "time saving number counter" for counting the number of time saving times as a condition for ending the time saving gaming state when the variable display of the special symbols is finished, and a special symbol that transitions to the B time saving gaming state. A process is performed to update a "ceiling counter" for counting the number of variable displays. Furthermore, when the time saving number counter becomes 0, the transition from the time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state is controlled, and when the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value, the transition to the B time saving gaming state is controlled. Details of this time saving management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 312. After executing the process in S8043, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8044.

In S8044, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", after the special symbol variable display end process is completed, the special symbol game determination process (see S8015 in FIG. 308) is performed. After executing the process of S8044, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8045.

In S8045, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol effect stop command. The special symbol effect stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8045, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8046.

In S8046, the main CPU 201 increments the value of the determined symbol counter by 1. As described above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol has been determined (the number of times a special symbol game has been played), but it may also manage the number of games of a special symbol game played under a specific condition, such as the number of times remaining in the special symbol mode or the number of times remaining in the time-saving mode. After executing the process of S8046, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

[10-4-6. Time-saving management process]
Next, a time-saving management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 311) will be described with reference to Fig. 312. Fig. 312 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving management process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8043-1, the main CPU 201 performs a time-saving count counter update process to update the time-saving count counter. In this time-saving count counter update process, if a time-saving game state is set (if state flag = 1 or 2 is set), the "time-saving count counter" in the main RAM 203 is updated by subtracting 1. After executing the process of S8043-1, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8043-2.

In S8043-2, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving counter = 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter = 0, it transfers processing to S8043-3, and if it determines that the time-saving counter = 0 is not, it transfers processing to S8043-4.

In S8043-3, the main CPU 201 clears the time-saving information and transitions from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. Here, the time-saving information is cleared by clearing (setting to 0) the status flag, the special time-saving flag, the time-saving count counter, and the small win count counter described below. After executing the process of S8043-3, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8043-4.

In S8043-4, the main CPU 201 performs a ceiling counter update process to update the ceiling counter. In this ceiling counter update process, the ceiling counter is updated by adding 1. After executing the process of S8043-4, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8043-5.

In S8043-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter=the ceiling value (for example, 999 times). If the main CPU 201 determines that the ceiling counter = the ceiling value, the process moves to S8043-6, and if it determines that the ceiling counter does not = the ceiling value, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8043-9.

In S8043-6, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter (sets it to 0). After executing the process of S8043-6, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8043-7.

In S8043-7, the main CPU 201 executes a B time-saving game state setting process to transition to the B time-saving game state. In this B time-saving game state setting process, the state flag indicating the B time-saving game state is set to 2, and the number of small wins won is set to 255, and the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000, as the "B time-saving end condition" so as to transition to the "special time-saving game state". Then, the special time-saving flag is set to 1 so that it is possible to identify that the special time-saving game state is in effect. Note that in the B time-saving game state setting process, the number of small wins won may be set to 1, the number of time-saving times may be set to 10,000, and the special time-saving flag may be set to 0 so as to transition to the "normal time-saving game state". After executing the process of S8043-7, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8043-8.

In S8043-8, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a time-saving transition command when starting the B time-saving gaming state. The time-saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8043-8, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8043-9.

In S8043-9, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, processing such as confirmation and update of parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 is performed. Then, processing is performed to reserve the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the processing of S8043-9, the main CPU 201 ends the time-saving management processing and returns the processing to the special pattern variable display end processing (see FIG. 311).

[10-4-7. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 313, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308) will be described. FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8051, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", it ends the special symbol game determination process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and changes the control state of the special symbol. If it is determined that the number is "2", the process moves to S8052.

In S8052, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbols and determines whether or not it is a jackpot, that is, whether the stopped special symbol is a selected symbol of the special symbols corresponding to the jackpot. When the main CPU 201 determines that it is a jackpot, it moves the process to S8054, and when it determines that it is not a jackpot, it moves the process to S8061.

In S8054, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a jackpot. In this external signal processing for a jackpot, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 when a jackpot occurs. The generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the processing of S8054, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S8055.

In S8055, the main CPU 201 performs the first route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this first route jackpot start preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 297 determined in S8024 above is referenced, the maximum number of rounds is determined based on the "special symbol selected" of the jackpot, and the determined maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 297 determined in S8024 above is referenced, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "special symbol selected" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S8055, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8056.

In S8056, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S8056, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8057.

In S8057, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a jackpot has been hit, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the status flag, the special time-saving flag, the time-saving count counter, and the small jackpot win count counter. After executing the processing of S8057, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8058.

In S8058, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S8058, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8059.

In S8059, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In addition, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the big winning opening preparation process (see S8018 in FIG. 308) will be performed after the end of this special symbol game determination process. . After executing the process of S8059, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8059.

In S8060, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot start display command. After executing the process of S8060, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

In S8061, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether or not it is a small hit, that is, the stopped special symbol is a selected symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit. Determine whether it exists or not. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is a small hit, the process moves to S8063, and if it determines that it is not a small hit (that is, a loss), it moves the process to S8071.

In S8063, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a small win. In this external signal processing for a small win, the selected special symbol is referenced, and when the selected second special symbol "z5, z6" corresponding to the "V small win" is determined, a "small win signal" is generated as an external signal to be output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184. The generated small win signal is then output to the external terminal board 184. In this embodiment, the "small win signal" is not generated when the selected second special symbol "z7" corresponding to the "fall small win" is determined, but the "small win signal" may be generated even when the selected second special symbol "z7" corresponding to the "fall small win" is determined. After executing the processing of S8063, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S8064.

In S8064, the main CPU 201 performs a small win start preparation setting process. In this small win start preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 298 determined in S8024 is referenced, the maximum number of openings is determined based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined maximum number of openings is set as the upper limit of the number of small win openings in the main RAM 203. Next, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 298 determined in S8024 is referenced, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 298 determined in S8024 is referenced, and the opening waiting time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156 based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined opening waiting time is set in the V winning hole closing timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the V operation flag is turned on. In addition, the V winning control process for the V shutter solenoid 8160 that opens and closes the V winning port 8156 is performed in the system timer interrupt process (FIGS. 324 and 325) described below. After executing the process of S8064, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8066.

In S8065, the main CPU 201 performs a small win status display process. In this small win status display process, right hit instruction data is set to notify the player that a right hit is to be performed. After executing the process of S8065, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8066.

In S8066, the main CPU 201 performs a small win count update process to count the number of small wins that have been won as a condition for ending the time-saving game state, and update the "small win count counter" that indicates the remaining number of small wins. Details of this small win count update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 314. After executing the process of S8066, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8067.

In S8067, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S8067, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8068.

In S8068, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small win game closure process (see S8016 in FIG. 308) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After executing the process of S8068, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8069.

In S8069, the main CPU 201 processes the transmission reservation process for the small win start display command. After executing the process of S8069, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

In S8071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 315. In addition, when the main CPU 201 performs the special symbol game end process, it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S8051 to S8071) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[10-4-8. Small hit number of winnings update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 314, a description will be given of the small winning number update process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 313). FIG. 314 is a flowchart showing an example of the process of updating the number of small winnings in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8066-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state, that is, whether the state flag=1 or 2. If the main CPU 201 determines that the current gaming state is a time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S8066-2, and if it determines that the current gaming state is not a time-saving gaming state, it performs a small winning number update process. is finished, and the process moves to S8067 of the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 313).

In S8066-2, the main CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the "small winning winnings counter" in the main RAM 203 and updates it. After executing the process in S8066-2, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8066-3.

In S8066-3, the main CPU 201 determines whether the small winning number counter = 0 or not. If the main CPU 201 determines that the small hit winning number counter = 0, it moves the process to S8066-4, and if it determines that the small winning winning number counter = not 0, it executes the small winning winning number updating process. The process ends and the process moves to S8067 of the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 313).

In S8066-4, the main CPU 201 clears the time-saving information and transitions from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. Here, the time-saving information is cleared by clearing (setting to 0) the status flag, special time-saving flag, time-saving count counter, and small win count counter. After executing the process of S8066-4, the main CPU 201 ends the small win count update process, and moves the process to S8067 of the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 313).

[10-4-9. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 313) will be described. FIG. 315 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8072, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends, and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, that is, the next special symbol game. Become. After executing the process in S8072, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8073.

In S8073, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. In addition, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special pattern game end process, the start information stored in the special pattern determination area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing the process of S8073, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8074.

In S8074, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S8074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 313).

[10-4-10. Processing during small win game closure]
Next, referring to Fig. 316, a description will be given of a small win game closing process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 308). Fig. 316 is a flow chart showing an example of a small win game closing process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8081, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", it ends the small winning game closing process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the status number is "3", the process moves to S8082.

In S8082, the main CPU 201 loads the "small win opening count counter value." The "small win opening count counter" is a counter that counts the number of small win openings. The count value of the small win opening count counter (small win opening count counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S8082, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8083.

In S8083, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded small win opening count counter value is the upper limit of the small win opening count. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the upper limit of the small win opening count, it transfers processing to S8089, and if it determines that it is not the upper limit of the small win opening count, it transfers processing to S8084.

In S8084, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 8151 in the small win game state (the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 8151) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the second large prize opening counter counted by the second large prize opening count switch 8152 is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the second large prize opening 8151 (for example, 10 balls). If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 8151 is not the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers the process to S8085, and if it determines that the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 8151 is the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers the process to S8089.

In S8085, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the small win opening count counter value. After executing the process of S8085, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8086.

In S8086, the main CPU 201 performs a second big winning opening setting process to open the second big winning opening 8151. In the opening setting process of the second big winning hole, refer to the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. Based on the number of times counter value), the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 8151 of this time is determined, and the determined maximum opening time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the second special winning hole opening control data for opening the second big winning hole 8151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 8155. After executing the process in S8086, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8087.

In S8087, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", after the small win game closed process ends, the small win game open process (see FIG. 317) is performed. After executing the process of S8087, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8088.

In S8088, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. The main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process of S8088, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game closing process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

In S8089, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning prize is detected. In this process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed to the V winning a prize opening 8156 within a specified time (that is, whether there has been detection by the V winning a prize opening switch 8157). If the main CPU 201 determines that a V winning prize has been detected, the process moves to S8090, and if it determines that a V winning prize has not been detected, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8098.

In S8090, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for the jackpot from the second route. In this process, the selected symbols of the special symbols are referred to and a ``jackpot signal corresponding to the selected symbols of the special symbols'' is generated as an external signal output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 at the time of a jackpot. Thereafter, the generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the process in S8090, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8101.

In S8091, the main CPU 201 performs a second route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this second route jackpot start preparation setting process, first, the jackpot type shown in FIG. 297 is determined based on the limiter activation flag and the remaining limiter number in the number limiter function (“limiter number counter” of the main RAM 203 to be described later). One of the jackpot type determination tables from Tables 1 to 3 is determined. Then, referring to the decided jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. Set to . Furthermore, with reference to the determined jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 297, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is used as the main Set to the waiting time of special symbols in RAM203. After executing the process in S8101, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8092.

In S8092, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the jackpot game state from the second route will start from the second round game. After executing the process in S8092, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8093.

In S8093, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S8093, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8094.

In S8094, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the gaming state management process when it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the status flag, special time saving flag, time saving number counter, and small winning winning number counter. After executing the process in S8094, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8095.

In S8095, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S8095, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8096.

In S8096, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the large prize opening preparation process (Fig. 308) will be performed after the small prize game closure process ends. After executing the process of S8096, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8097.

In S8097, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the per-V start display command. After executing the process of S8097, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game opening process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

In S8098, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning end preparation setting process. In this small hit end preparation setting process, the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the small win with reference to the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 298 determined in S8024 above. Then, the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S8098, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8099.

In S8099, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reserve the transmission of a small win end display command. After executing processing in S8099, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8100.

In S8100, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 315 is performed. After executing the process of S8100, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game closing process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

[10-4-11. Small hit game opening process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 317, the small winning game opening process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308) will be described. FIG. 317 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing during opening of the small winning game in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8101, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", it ends the small win game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "4", it transfers the process to S8102.

In S8102, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 8151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the second large prize opening opening setting process (see S8086 in FIG. 316) has elapsed. If the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 8151 has not elapsed, it ends the small win game opening process and returns the process to the special pattern management process (see FIG. 308). If the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 8151 has elapsed, it moves the process to S8103.

In S8103, the main CPU 201 performs a second grand prize opening closing setting process to close the second grand prize opening 8151. In this second big winning opening closing setting process, refer to the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. Based on the number of times counter value), the current closing time of the second big prize opening 8151 is determined, and the determined closing time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the second special winning hole closing control data for closing the second big winning hole 8151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 8155. After executing the process in S8103, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8104.

In S8104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", after the small win game open process ends, the small win game closed process (see FIG. 316) is performed. After executing the process of S8104, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

[10-4-12. Large prize opening preparation process]
Next, referring to Fig. 318, a special prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 308) will be described. Fig. 318 is a flow chart showing an example of the special prize opening preparation process in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8111, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5," it ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "5," it transfers the process to S8112.

In S8112, the main CPU 201 loads the "round counter value." The "round counter" is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in a jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S8112, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8113.

In S8113, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded round counter value is the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of jackpot rounds is the upper limit, it transfers processing to S8114, and if it determines that the number of jackpot rounds is not the upper limit, it transfers processing to S8118.

In S8114, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot end preparation setting process. In this jackpot end preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 297 determined in S8024 or S8101 above is referenced, an ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set as the waiting time for the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S8114, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8115.

In S8115, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7", the jackpot game state end process (FIG. 308) is performed after the big winning opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process in S8115, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8116.

In S8116, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S8116, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8117.

In S8117, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command. The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S8117, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

In S8118, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S8118, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8119.

In S8119, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening setting process to open the first large prize opening 8131. In this first large prize opening setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 297 determined in S8024 or S8101 above, and determines the maximum opening time of the first large prize opening 8131 in this round based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot and the current round number (round counter value), and sets the determined maximum opening time to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, it generates first large prize opening opening control data for the first special electric solenoid 8135 to open the first large prize opening 8131. After executing the process of S8119, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8120.

In S8120, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", the large prize opening opening control process (see FIG. 308) will be performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S8120, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8121.

In S8121, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S8121, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8122.

In S8122, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8122, the main CPU 201 ends the big prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

[10-4-13. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 319, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308) will be described. FIG. 319 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8131, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6," it ends the large prize opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "6," it transfers the process to S8132.

In S8132, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of winning balls that entered the first large prize opening 8131 in one round when the first large prize opening 8131 was opened is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the first large prize opening counter counted by the first large prize opening count switch 8132 is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the first large prize opening 8131 (e.g., 10 balls).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S8132 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 8131 is not the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S8133, and if the main CPU 201 determines in S8132 that the number of winnings at the first large winning slot 8131 is the maximum number of winnings, it transfers processing to S8134.

In S8133, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 8131 in one round has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether the maximum opening time set in the opening setting process of the first big prize opening (see S8119 in FIG. 318) has elapsed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S8133 that the maximum opening time of the first big winning hole 8131 has not elapsed, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308). . In addition, when the main CPU 201 determines in S8133 that the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 8131 has elapsed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8134.

In S8134, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening closure setting process to close the first large prize opening 8131. In this first large prize opening closure setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 297 determined in S8024 or S8101 above, and determines the closure time of the first large prize opening 8131 in this round based on the "selected special pattern" of the jackpot and the current round number (round counter value), and sets the determined closure time to the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 generates first large prize opening closure control data for the first special power solenoid 8135 to close the first large prize opening 8131. After executing the process of S8134, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8135.

In S8135, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the completion of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (see FIG. 318) is performed again. It happens. After executing the process in S8135, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8136.

In S8136, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S8136, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8137.

In S8137, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S8137, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308).

[10-4-14. Jackpot game state end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 320, the jackpot game state end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308) will be described. FIG. 320 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game state termination process in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8141, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7," it ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 308), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "7," it transfers the process to S8142.

In S8142, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot game information initialization processing. In this jackpot game information initialization process, processing is performed to set or reset various flag data used in the jackpot game state and the values of various counters (for example, a round counter, a jackpot prize counter, etc.). After executing the process in S8142, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8143.

In S8143, the main CPU 201 performs post-jackpot end state setting processing to set the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In this state setting process after the end of the jackpot, based on the remaining jackpot limiter number (value of the "limiter number counter" to be described later), one of the game state settings tables 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 299 is selected. Determine the state-related setting table, refer to the determined gaming state-related setting table, and set the gaming state (state flag, number of small winnings, number of time-savings, special Set the time saving flag). After executing the process in S8143, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8145.

In this embodiment, first, the limiter activation flag is referred to, and if the limiter activation flag=0, the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a) is determined. In addition, when the limiter activation flag = 1, when the "limiter number counter" is 91 or more (when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times is 91 or more), the gaming state related setting table shown in FIG. 299 (b) 2, and when the "limiter number counter" is between 1 and 90 (when the remaining number of jackpot limiter numbers is between 1 and 90), the gaming state related setting table 3 shown in FIG. 299(c) is determined, and " When the "limiter number counter" is 0 (when the remaining number of limiter number of jackpots is 0), the gaming state related setting table 4 shown in FIG. 299(d) is determined. Then, with reference to the determined game state related setting table, the game state (status flag, number of small winnings, number of time savers, special time saver flag) is set based on the selected special symbol.

In this embodiment, when the limiter count counter = 0 and the game state related setting table 4 shown in Figure 299 (d) is determined, "state flag = 0" is set to set the normal game state for all selected special symbols, and the game will be forcibly switched to the normal game state after the big win game state ends.

In S8144, the main CPU 201 performs a limiter information update process to set and update the limiter information, including a "limiter activation flag" and a "limiter count counter" that corresponds to the remaining number of jackpot limiter counts and counts the number of consecutive jackpots in the time-saving game mode. Details of this limiter information update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 321. After executing the process of S8144, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8145.

In S8145, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 315 is performed. After executing the processing of S8145, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 187).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot game state termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[10-4-15. Limiter information update process]
Next, the limiter information update process executed by the main CPU 201 during the big win game state end process (see Fig. 320) will be described with reference to Fig. 321. Fig. 321 is a flow chart showing an example of the limiter information update process in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8144-1, the main CPU 201 determines whether the selected special symbol at the end of the jackpot game state is the selected special symbol for transitioning to the time-saving game state. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the selected special symbol for transitioning to the time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S8144-4, and if it determines that it is not the selected special symbol for transitioning to the time-saving game state, it transfers processing to S8144-2.

In S8144-2, the main CPU 201 clears the limiter count counter in the main RAM 203 (sets the limiter count counter to 0). After executing the process of S8144-2, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8144-3.

In S8144-3, the main CPU 201 sets the limiter operation flag=0. After executing the process of S8144-3, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter information update process and moves the process to S8145 of the jackpot game state end process (see FIG. 320).

In S8144-4, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of consecutive jackpots that have shifted to the jackpot gaming state in the time-saving gaming state is being counted, that is, whether the limiter activation flag is 1. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is counting the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state in the time-saving gaming state, it moves the process to S8144-7, and counts the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state from the time-saving gaming state. If it is determined that counting is not in progress, the process moves to S8144-5.

In S8144-5, if the main CPU 201 is not counting the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot gaming state in the time-saving gaming state (if the limiter activation flag = 0), the main CPU 201 stores the limiter number in the limiter number counter in the main RAM 203. Performs limiter count setting processing. In this limiter number setting process, the number of limiter times is determined based on the selected special symbol by referring to the gaming state related setting table 1 shown in FIG. 299(a), and the determined number of limiter times is set in the limiter number counter. . After executing the process in S8144-5, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8144-6.

In S8144-6, the main CPU 201 sets the limiter operation flag=1 when the limiter count is newly set. After executing the process of S8144-6, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter information update process and moves the process to S8145 of the jackpot game state end process (see FIG. 320).

In S8144-7, if the main CPU 201 is counting the number of consecutive jackpots that have transitioned to the jackpot game state in the time-saving game state (if the limiter activation flag is 1), it performs a subtraction process of the limiter number. In this subtraction process of the limiter number, it determines one of the game state related setting tables 1 to 4 shown in FIG. 299 based on the remaining number of jackpot limiter numbers (the current value of the limiter number counter), and determines the subtraction value of the limiter number based on the selected special pattern by referring to the determined game state related setting table. Then, it subtracts the determined subtraction value of the limiter number from the limiter number counter in the main RAM 203 to update it. After executing the process of S8144-7, the main CPU 201 ends the limiter information update process and moves the process to S8145 of the jackpot game state end process (see FIG. 320).

[10-6-16. Normal symbol control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 322, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23) will be described. Note that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in FIG. 322, the main CPU 201 stores normal symbol start information and determines whether or not the normal symbol determination start condition is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process. Needless to say, we are doing this.

Figure 322 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the numbers ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in Figure 322 are control state numbers for the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 progresses the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

In S8200, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 or not. The waiting time of this normal symbol is set as the waiting time of various processes of the normal symbol control process, and will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for normal symbols is not 0, it ends the normal symbol control process, returns the process to S41 of the main control main process (see FIG. 21), and sets the waiting time for normal symbols to 0. If it is determined that this is the case, the process moves to S8201.

In S8201, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S8201, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8210. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S8210 and subsequent processes based on the control state number read in the process of S8201.

In S8210, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This S8210 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". Details of this normal symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 323. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8220.

In S8220, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display end processing. This process of S8220 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8230.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when it is determined that the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, the main CPU 201 displays the predetermined normal symbol The symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set as the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". In addition, when the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1" and it waits for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S8230, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol gameplay determination processing. This S8230 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S8240.

In this normal symbol game determination process, the main CPU 201 performs a process of determining a selected symbol (for example, a normal symbol hit or a normal symbol loss) of the stopped and displayed normal symbols. Then, when the selected symbol of the stopped and displayed normal symbol corresponds to the normal symbol, the opening pattern setting process of the normal electric accessory 8146 is performed and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "3". On the other hand, if the result of the normal symbol hit determination process is a loss, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "0" without performing the opening pattern setting process for the normal electric accessory 8146.

In the process of setting the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146, the opening pattern (number of times to open, opening time, wait time, etc.) of the normal electric device 8146 is determined based on the game state and the selected normal symbol by referring to the opening pattern determination table of the normal electric device shown in FIG. 305, and the determined opening pattern is set. After that, the main CPU 201 transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a normal electric device opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146.

In S8240, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S8240 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8250.

In this normal electric device opening process, the main CPU 201 opens the second start hole 8140 according to the opening pattern of the normal electric device 8146 determined in the normal symbol game play determination process of S8230 above, and closes the second start hole 8140 when a specified number of game balls for normal power (e.g., one ball) enter the second start hole 8140 or when all opening patterns of the normal electric device 8146 have ended. Then, when the opening process of the normal electric device 8146 has ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "4".

In S8250, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit end processing. This S8250 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". When the main CPU 201 ends this normal symbol hit end processing, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", ends the normal symbol control processing, and returns the processing to the main control main processing (see Figures 20 to 23).

In this normal symbol winning termination process, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reset (clear) various parameters related to the normal symbols determined in S8210 to S8240 and various random numbers stored in the normal symbol determination area.

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the normal symbol control process (S8200 to S8250) described above within the interrupt prohibited section.

[10-6-17. Normal symbol variable display start processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 323, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 322) will be described. FIG. 323 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol variable display start processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 323, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "0" (S8211).

If it is determined in S8211 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 322). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8212.

In S8212, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the normal pattern. In this process, the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (2) to the normal pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (3). After executing the process of S8212, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8213.

In S8213, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol winning judgment process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol winning judgment table shown in FIG. 303, and determines winning/losing judgment value data ("normal symbol winning" or "normal symbol losing") based on the game state and the normal symbol winning judgment random number value stored in the normal symbol judgment area (0). After executing S8213, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8214.

In S8214, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 304, and determines the "selected normal symbol" based on the above-mentioned winning/losing determination value data (the result of the normal symbol winning/losing determination process) and the normal symbol random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0). After executing S8214, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8215.

In S8215, the main CPU 201 performs processing to determine the normal symbol variation pattern. In this processing, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 306, and determines the normal symbol variation pattern and normal symbol variation display time based on the game state and the selected normal symbol. After executing the processing of S8215, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8216.

In S8216, the main CPU 201 executes a process for setting the variable display time of the normal pattern. In this process, the variable display time of the normal pattern determined in the variable pattern determination process of the normal pattern (S8215) is set to the waiting time of the normal pattern in the main RAM 203, and the normal pattern display unit 161 is caused to start displaying the variable display of the normal pattern. After executing the process of S8216, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8217.

In S8217, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the normal symbol variable display start process is completed, the normal symbol variable display end process (as shown in FIG. 322) is performed. (see S8220) will be performed. After executing the process in S8217, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8218.

In S8218, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a normal symbol variation pattern command. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[10-6-18. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 324 and 325, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. 324 and 325 are flowcharts showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

In S8311, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving the protection register. After executing the process of S8311, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8312.

In S8312, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is not off (that is, a power outage is detected), the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8332, and determines that the XINT detection flag is off (that is, a power outage is not detected). If so, the process moves to S8313.

In S8313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing the process in S8313, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8314.

In S8314, the main CPU 201 performs processing to read the state of the input port of the I/O port 205. After executing the process in S8314, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8315.

In S8315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on the game permission flag. The game permission flag indicates a game permission state when the game permission flag is on (=1), and indicates a game non-permission state when the game permission flag is off (=0). As explained for the first pachinko game machine, the game permission flag is turned off (=game not permitted state) as the startup state when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored and the RAM is cleared. The game permission flag is also set to ON (=game permission state) after the RAM is cleared after the power is restored and after the RAM is cleared. If the main CPU 201 determines that the game is allowed, the process moves to S8317, and if it determines that the game is not allowed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8332.

In S8317, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt-disabled section during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is based on the number of interrupts in the work area of the main RAM 203. Stored in the counter area. After executing the process in S8317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8318.

In S8318, the main CPU 201 performs update processing of the interrupt cycle timer. In the update process of the interrupt cycle timer, various timer counters such as the special symbol timer counter, the normal symbol timer counter, the V winning opening closing timer counter, and the V winning opening opening timer counter in the work area of the main RAM 203 are subtracted. After executing the process in S8318, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8319.

In S8319, the main CPU 201 performs random number update processing. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for jackpot determination of a random number value for jackpot determination, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined period (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are important elements related to ball output. After executing the process in S8319, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8320.

In S8320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 326. After executing the processing of S8320, the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S8321.

In S8321, the main CPU 201 executes a winning information command setting process. In this process, a winning information command (payout information) setting process is performed. After executing S8321, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8322.

In S8322, the main CPU 201 performs V winning control processing to open and close the V winning opening 8156 when the V operation flag is on. In this V winning control process, when the V activation flag is on and the opening waiting time has elapsed (V winning opening closing timer counter = 0), the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. 298 determined in S8024 above is used. , determine the opening time as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 8156 based on the "selected special symbol", set the determined opening time to the V winning hole opening timer counter in the main RAM 203, and V winning opening control data for opening the V winning opening 8156 is output to the shutter solenoid 8160. In addition, the V winning a prize opening control data is continuously output as long as the V winning a prize opening timer counter is not 0. Then, when the V operation flag is on and the V winning opening opening control data is output, if the opening time has elapsed (V winning opening opening timer counter = 0), the V winning opening opening control data Stop the output and turn off the V operation flag. After executing the process in S8322, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8323.

In S8323, the main CPU 201 refers to the "cumulative jackpot payout ball counter" which counts the cumulative number of jackpot payout balls of game balls paid out in a jackpot game state per day, and determines whether the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is greater than or equal to 99,900. If the main CPU 201 determines that the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is greater than or equal to 99,900, it transfers processing to S8324, and if it determines that the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is not greater than or equal to 99,900, it transfers processing to S8328.

Here, the "cumulative jackpot ball counter" is a counter in the work area of the main RAM 203, and is configured to be initialized when the power is turned on (starts from 0 when the power is turned on). Note that the "cumulative jackpot ball counter" is not initialized when the power is turned on, but is initialized every time the corresponding number of game balls fired or out (for example, 3000 balls) is counted per day. It may be configured so that

In S8324, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a "gaming disallowed state preparation command" for causing the display device 7, speaker 32, etc. to notify that the state will soon shift to the disallowed gaming state. After executing the process in S8324, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8325.

In this embodiment, the game disallowed state preparation command is sent when the cumulative jackpot payout number, which is the condition for switching to the game disallowed state, is 99,900 or more, which is 100 less than 100,000 (100,000). However, the game disallowed state preparation command may be sent when the cumulative jackpot payout number is less than the cumulative jackpot payout number (100,000) that is the condition for switching to the game disallowed state, and is equal to or greater than the cumulative jackpot payout number (100,000) that is the condition for switching to the game disallowed state minus the maximum payout number that can be paid out in one jackpot game state (for example, 10R x 10 counts x 15 prize balls = 1,500).

In S8325, the main CPU 201 refers to the "cumulative jackpot ball number counter" and determines whether the cumulative jackpot ball number counter≧100000. If the main CPU 201 determines that the cumulative jackpot ball number counter is ≧100000, it moves the process to S8326, and if it determines that the cumulative jackpot ball number counter ≧100,000, it moves the process to S8328.

In S8326, the main CPU 201 performs a game disallowed state setting process to transition to a game disallowed state as the operation of the ball payout limiter function. In this game disallowed state setting process, the game permission flag is turned off (=0), the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is set to 0, and the special symbol control state number is set to 0 to end the special symbol game. Furthermore, game disallowed information is output to the payout/launch control circuit 400 to control the stopping of the launch of game balls by the launch device 6 and the prohibition of the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82. The game disallowed state will then transition to a game allowed state by clearing the RAM. After executing the process of S8326, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8327.

In S8327, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a "gaming disallowed state command" to notify the display device 7, speaker 32, etc. that the state has shifted to the gaming disallowed state. After executing the process in S8327, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8328.

In this way, according to this embodiment, when the cumulative number of game balls paid out in a jackpot game state per day reaches the number of balls that can be dispensed at any one time (for example, 100,000 balls), the game state is forcibly shifted from the jackpot game state to a game non-permitted state, and the game state after the jackpot game state ends can be partially restricted.

In this embodiment, when the cumulative number of balls dispensed from a jackpot reaches the limit number of balls dispensed, the machine is forcibly switched from the jackpot game state to a non-playing state. However, it may be configured to forcibly switch to the normal game state after the jackpot game state ends when the cumulative number of balls dispensed from a jackpot reaches the limit number of balls dispensed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the game is not permitted, various switches through which game balls enter or pass (excluding the backup clear switch 176, etc.) are disabled, and the launch of game balls from the launching device 6 and the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82 are prohibited. However, it may be configured to at least one of disable various switches, prohibit the launch of game balls from the launching device 6 and prohibit the payout of prize balls from the payout device 82.

In addition, in this embodiment, the machine is configured to transition to a state in which play is not permitted when the cumulative number of balls dispensed from a jackpot reaches 100,000 (one hundred thousand balls) or more, but the cumulative number of balls dispensed from a jackpot that transitions to a state in which play is not permitted can be freely modified as appropriate.

In S8328, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, the command that has been scheduled for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing the process of S8328, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8329.

In S8329, the main CPU 201 performs register saving processing. After executing the process in S8329, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8330.

In S8330, the main CPU 201 performs performance display monitor control processing. In this process, a game determination process, a prize ball addition determination process, a display content update process of the performance display monitor 170, etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is in an area (outside the area) that is different from the work area where data necessary for playing the game is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up, and for example, when the RAM is cleared. data is also stored in an area that is never cleared. After executing the process in S8330, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8331.

In S8331, the main CPU 201 performs restoration processing for the registers saved in S8329. After executing the process in S8331, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8332.

In S8332, the main CPU 201 performs the process of restoring the protection registers that were saved in S8311, and ends the system timer interrupt process.

[10-4-19. Switch input detection process]
Next, a switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 during the system timer interrupt process (see Fig. 324) will be described with reference to Fig. 326. Fig. 326 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The eighth pachinko gaming machine has an additional structure of a first big winning opening count switch 8132, a second big winning opening counting switch 8152, and a V winning opening switch 8157 compared to the first pachinko gaming machine. Since then, some of these processes have been added.

In S8401, the main CPU 201 executes the first start port winning detection process. After executing the process of S8401, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8402.

In this first starting port winning detection process, when the first starting port switch 8121 detects that a game ball enters the first starting port 8120, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the first starting port 8120. Then, it is determined whether there is a free space in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4). When it is determined that there is free space in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, A random number value for symbols, a random number value for reach determination, a random number value for performance selection, etc.) are acquired, and the various acquired random values are stored in one first special symbol determination area in FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Then, a transmission reservation process of a first special symbol winning command indicating a winning to the first starting opening 8120 and the number of reserved first special symbols is performed. The winning command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4), the first starting opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random values. This will end the process.

In S8402, the main CPU 201 executes the second start port winning detection process. After executing the process of S8402, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8403.

In this second starting port winning detection process, when the second starting port switch 8141 detects that the game ball enters the second starting port 8140, the main CPU 201 outputs payout information corresponding to the second starting port 8140. Then, it is determined whether there is a free space in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4). When it is determined that there is free space in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), various random numbers (for example, random numbers for jackpot determination, A symbol random number value, a random number value for reach determination, a random number value for effect selection, etc.) are acquired, and the various acquired random values are stored in one second special symbol determination area in FIFO format. Then, a transmission reservation process of a second special symbol winning command indicating a winning to the second starting opening 8140 and the pending number of second special symbols is performed. The winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (4), the second starting opening winning detection is performed without acquiring various random values. This will end the process.

In S8403, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing. In the general winning hole passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the general winning hole 122 is set. After executing the process in S8403, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8404.

In S8404, the main CPU 201 performs a first big prize opening passage detection process. In the first big winning hole passage detection process, when the first big winning hole count switch 8132 detects that the game ball enters the first big winning hole 8131, the main CPU 201 responds to the first big winning hole 8131. At the same time, 1 is added to the first grand prize opening counter for counting the number of winning game balls entered into the first grand prize opening 8131 to update it. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when in the jackpot game state (when the control state number of the special symbol = 5 or 6), the "cumulative jackpot ball output counter" of the main RAM 203 is set to the first jackpot opening 8131. is updated by adding the number of prize balls (for example, 15) of the game balls that are paid out when the balls are entered. Then, a transmission reservation process of a first big winning hole winning command indicating a winning to the first big winning hole 8131 is performed. The first big winning opening winning command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S8404, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8405.

In S8405, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening passage detection process. In the second large prize opening passage detection process, when the second large prize opening count switch 8152 detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 8151, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the second large prize opening 8151 and adds 1 to the second large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls entering the second large prize opening 8151 to update it. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a jackpot game state is in progress, the "cumulative jackpot payout ball counter" in the main RAM 203 is updated by adding the number of prize balls (e.g., 15 balls) of the game balls paid out when the ball enters the second large prize opening 8151. Then, a transmission reservation process for a second large prize opening entry command indicating entry into the second large prize opening 8151 is performed. The second large prize winning slot winning command scheduled for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command sending process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S8405, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S8406.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot game state is in effect, a ball is paid out to the "cumulative jackpot payout number counter" in the main RAM 203 when a ball enters the first jackpot opening 8131 and the second jackpot opening 8151. Although it is configured to add the number of prize balls of the game balls, in addition to when it is in the jackpot game state, the number It may be configured such that the number of prize balls of game balls paid out when the ball enters the first big winning hole 8131 and the second big winning hole 8151 is added. Furthermore, when it is in a jackpot gaming state (when the special symbol control state number = 5, 6), or when it is in a jackpot gaming state including a small winning gaming state (the special symbol control state number = 3 to 6). ), the number of game balls paid out when the balls enter the first big winning hole 8131 and the second big winning hole 8151 is stored in the "cumulative jackpot balls counter" in the main RAM 203, as well as the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first big winning hole 8131 and the second big winning hole 8151. It may be configured to add the number of prize balls of game balls paid out when the balls enter the opening 8120, the second starting opening 8140, and the general winning opening 122.

In S8406, the main CPU 201 performs a V prize opening passage detection process. In the V prize opening passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the passage of a game ball into the V prize opening 8156 by the V prize opening switch 8157, it turns on the V prize opening passage flag. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a V passage command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V prize opening 8156. The V passage command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that even if a game ball passes through the V prize opening 8156, no payout information is set. After executing the process of S8406, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8407.

In S8407, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing the process in S8407, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S8408.

In this gate passage detection process, when passage of the game ball to the passage gate 8126 is detected by the passage gate switch 8127, the main CPU 201 determines that the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to the normal symbol starting storage area (4) are free. Determine whether there is an area. If it is determined that there is free space in the normal symbol starting memory area (1) to normal symbol starting memory area (4), various random values (for example, random numbers for determining whether a normal symbol hits, normal symbol symbol random numbers, etc.) and store the obtained various random numbers in a FIFO format in one normal symbol starting storage area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (4), the gate passing detection process will be terminated without acquiring various random values. .

In S8408, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead command generation process. After executing the process of S8408, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this prefetch command generation process, the various random numerical values obtained in the first starting opening winning detection process or the second starting opening winning detection process are analyzed based on the gaming state with reference to the prefetching related data in FIG. 302. , generates a read-ahead command. In addition, as shown in the prefetch related data in FIG. Only the symbol prefetch command) can be generated. Then, a prefetch command transmission reservation process for transmitting the generated prefetch command to the sub control circuit 300 is performed. The prefetch command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 324) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[10-5. Sub control circuit]
Next, the control contents of the sub-control circuit 300 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained.

[10-5-1. Time-saving game state preview performance pattern determination table]
First, details of the preview performance pattern determination table stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300 will be explained using FIG. 327. FIG. 327 is an example of a preview presentation pattern determination table for the time-saving game state in the eighth pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 327, the advance notice presentation pattern determination table for the time-saving game state associates the special symbol variation pattern command received from the main control circuit 200, the type of time-saving game state (special time-saving game state or general time-saving game state), the selection rate (first random number value), and the advance notice presentation pattern.

Here, "effect pattern" refers to information that defines the display effects of characters, etc., audio effects, effects that change the operation mode of the effect button 54, etc. Also, "preview effect pattern" refers to information on effects that, among the effect patterns, give advance indications of the results of the lottery for special symbols and the content of the effects that will be executed. In addition to the preview effect pattern, various effects such as the symbol effect pattern described below can be executed in a superimposed manner.

In addition, "selection rate (first random number value)" corresponds to the fact that the obtained second random number value is within a predetermined range with respect to the second random number value consisting of the second random number range. However, for convenience of explanation, this is replaced with the selection rate. Note that the selection rate may include 0% in addition to 1 to 100%, and does not exclude the wording 0% selection rate.

In this embodiment, the preview performance patterns include "Notice performance pattern A" which suggests a "falling small hit" in advance, and "Notice performance pattern B1" which suggests in advance that there is a possibility of a "V small hit". ", and a "notice performance pattern B2" which is developed from the preview performance pattern B1 and suggests in advance that the "battle performance" is highly likely to be executed. In this embodiment, only three types of preview performance patterns are provided, but the content to be previewed may be subdivided into four or more types of display modes.

The sub-CPU 301 refers to the preview presentation pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 327, and determines the preview presentation pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern command, the type of time-saving game state (special time-saving game state or general time-saving game state), and the selection rate (first random number value).

According to the preview performance pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in Figure 327, a selection rate (first random number value) is associated with each preview performance pattern so that the possibility of a "V small hit" increases in the order of "preview performance pattern A" < "preview performance pattern B1" < "preview performance pattern B2".

Furthermore, according to the preview performance pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 327, if the lottery result for the second special symbol in the special time-saving game state is a miss, the preview performance pattern is not determined (executed).

In addition, according to the advance notice pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 327, in the special time-saving game state, the "advance notice pattern A," which suggests a "small fall win" in advance, is configured not to be determined (executed).

Furthermore, according to the advance notice performance pattern determination table for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 327, the "notice performance pattern B2" is determined (executed) only when a special symbol variation pattern command for executing a battle performance is received. It is configured as follows.

In addition, in the advance notice performance pattern determination table for the time-saving game state shown in FIG. 327, "notice performance pattern A" that suggests "falling small hit" in advance is a special symbol variation pattern command or card performance that executes a battle performance. It is configured to be determined (executed) when receiving a special symbol variation pattern command to execute a card effect, but only when a special symbol variation pattern command to execute a card effect is received, the ``notice effect pattern'' is determined (executed). A'' may be determined (executed).

[10-5-2. Sub control circuit processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 328, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 301 of the sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 328 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 328, the sub-CPU 301 first performs an initialization process (S8500). In this initialization process, for example, RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8510.

The initialization process (S8500) described above is executed when the power is turned on or the backup is cleared. After the power is turned on, the processes S8510 to S8580 described below are executed repeatedly.

In S8510, the sub-CPU 301 performs a data input process to input data. In this data input process, both the command input port 308 reading process and the effect button 54 input process are performed.

The command input port 308 read process reads the command sent from the main control circuit 200 that is set in the command input port 308.

In addition, in the input process of the effect button 54, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 is input from the button control circuit 310. In addition, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs operation information from the button control circuit 310, it determines whether to validate the input operation information or discard it as invalid, and sets the acceptance time during which input of operation information is permitted, the validity time during which the input operation information is valid, and the invalidity period during which the input operation information is invalid, depending on the current situation such as the effect.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are completed, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8520.

In S8520, the sub-CPU 301 executes a command analysis process. In this process, the command read in the process of S8510 is analyzed. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8530.

At S8530, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation mode determination process. In this process, for example, a presentation pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests for operating various presentation devices (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, a role request, a presentation button activation request, etc.) are generated based on the determined presentation pattern. Details of this presentation mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 329. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S8540.

In S8540, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 sends a drawing request to the display control circuit 304. The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control to display an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on a message (drawing request) sent from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8550.

In S8550, sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8560.

In S8560, the sub-CPU 301 executes an LED control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. Based on the message (LED request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to light up or blink all or a portion of the LEDs that make up the LED group 46. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8570.

In S8570, the sub CPU 301 executes accessory control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an accessory request to the accessory control circuit 307. The accessory control circuit 307 controls performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the accessory objects forming the performance accessory group 58 based on the message (accessory request) sent from the sub CPU 301. Performs drive control for operation. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8580.

At S8580, the sub-CPU 301 executes effect button control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 sends an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310. Based on the message (effect button drive request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the sub-control circuit processing.

[10-5-3. Presentation mode determination process]
Next, the details of the presentation mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 328) will be described with reference to Fig. 329. Fig. 329 is a flow chart showing an example of the presentation mode determination process in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In S8531, the sub CPU 301 executes performance pattern determination processing to determine a performance pattern. In this production pattern determination process, based on the type of command received from the main CPU 201, the display production mode displayed on the display device 7, the sound production mode output from the speaker 32, and the operation mode of the production button 54 are determined. Decide on a production pattern that specifies etc. Specifically, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command", a "symbol performance pattern" is determined based on the received special symbol variation pattern command. In addition, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a "special symbol variation pattern command" when in the time-saving gaming state, the special symbol is A "notice presentation pattern" is determined based on the variation pattern command, the type of time-saving game state (special time-saving game state or general time-saving game state), and the selection rate (first random number value). In addition, performance patterns are determined according to various commands sent from the main CPU 201. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8532.

In S8532, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating an animation request. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S8531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8533.

In S8533, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing request generation processing. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S8532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8534.

In S8534, the sub CPU 301 executes sound request generation processing. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S8531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S8535.

In S8535, the sub-CPU 301 executes a lamp request generation process. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S8531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8536.

In S8536, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel request generation process. In this process, a reel request is generated based on the performance pattern determined in S8531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S8537.

At S8537, the sub-CPU 301 executes a process for generating a performance button actuation request. In this process, a performance button actuation request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S8531 above. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 ends the performance mode determination process and transfers the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 328).

[10-6. Game state transition diagram]
The gaming states transferred through the various processes executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 as described above will be explained using a gaming state transition diagram. FIG. 330 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the eighth pachinko game machine.

In the eighth pachinko gaming machine, the gaming states include a normal gaming state (a first normal gaming state, a second normal gaming state), a time-saving gaming state (a special time-saving gaming state, a general time-saving gaming state), and a game not permitted. It has a state.

As mentioned above, the "first normal gaming state" is the normal gaming state during the control period of the first special symbol, which is performed based on the starting information of the first special symbol, and left-handed hitting is the regular gaming mode. This is the normal gaming state. Therefore, in the first normal gaming state, it is easy for the game ball to enter the first starting port 8120, but it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 8140.

The "second normal gaming state" is a normal gaming state during the control period of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the start information of the second special symbol, and the time-saving gaming state ends and shifts to the normal gaming state. Immediately after, the normal game state is in which the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is being used up. Here, the second normal game state is defined as left-handed play as a regular game mode, but while the reserved number of second special symbols is used up, the withdrawal rate is changed to the general time-saving game state again. Since this is high, right-handed hitting may be specified as a regular game mode. In this way, since the second normal game state may specify left-handed play or right-handed play, in the second normal game state, the display device 7 displays information as a normal game mode. It is desirable to have the display device 7 notify left-handed hitting as a normal gaming mode when the second normal gaming state shifts to the first normal gaming state without causing the second normal gaming state to occur.

"Special time-saving gaming state" is a time-saving gaming state in which the number of small winnings = 255 is set as the second time-saving ending condition, and "V Small hit (approximately 1/48.2)" has a higher winning probability, and by the time the small hit is won 255 times, it is possible to win at least the V small hit, so it is practically the time until the next jackpot. It is a guaranteed time-saving gaming state. Further, the special time-saving game state becomes the A-time-saving game state when transferred after the end of the jackpot game state, and also becomes the B-time-saving game state when transferred after the variable display number of special symbols reaches a ceiling value.

The "general time-saving gaming state" is a time-saving gaming state in which the first time-saving end condition is set as the number of small wins = 1 or 2 times, and if all the small wins that have been won are falling small wins, the jackpot is reached. Since the time-saving gaming state ends without transitioning to the gaming state, it is a time-saving gaming state in which the next jackpot is not guaranteed.

In both the special time-saving game state and the general time-saving game state, right-hand hits are considered the normal game mode, and while it is difficult for the game ball to enter the first start hole 8120, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second start hole 8140.

The "game not permitted state" is a game state in which the player is unable to play, and as described above, the various switches through which game balls enter or pass are disabled, game balls are prohibited from being launched from the launching device 6, and prize balls are prohibited from being paid out from the payout device 82.

(Transition Control of First Normal Gaming State)
As shown in Fig. 330, in the first normal game state, when a game ball enters the first start hole 8120, a "jackpot" or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the first special symbol (see Fig. 295), and when a "jackpot" is determined, a transition to a jackpot game state occurs. Then, after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the first special symbol in the first normal game state, depending on the selected symbol of the special symbol, a transition to a "special time-saving game state" occurs with a selection rate of 20%, a transition to a "general time-saving game state" occurs with a selection rate of 40%, and a transition to a "normal game state" occurs with a selection rate of 40% (see Figs. 296 and 299).

In addition, in the first normal game state (including the second normal game state), after the number of times the special symbol changes display reaches 999 times, the game state transitions from the normal game state to a "special time-saving game state."

(Transition control of special time-saving game state)
In the special time-saving game state, when a game ball enters the second start port 8140, a "big win", a "small win" or a "miss" is determined based on the start information of the second special symbol (see FIG. 295). If a "big win" is determined, the game state transitions to a big win game state, and if a "small win" is determined, the game state transitions to a small win game state. In particular, in this embodiment, when a small win game state is played as a V small win, it becomes possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning port 8156, and when the game ball passes through the V winning port 8156, the game state transitions to a big win game state from the second route.

In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 8140, the actual probability of winning that will transition to the jackpot gaming state via the first route or the second route is approximately 1/41.9. (See FIG. 296).

Then, in the special time-saving gaming state, after a game ball enters the second starting port 8140 and shifting to the jackpot gaming state, everything shifts to the general time-saving gaming state (see FIG. 299). In addition, as mentioned above, in the special time-saving game state, after a game ball enters the second starting port 8140 and transitioning to the jackpot game state, it is configured to shift to the special time-saving game state again at a predetermined rate. You may.

(Transition control of general time-saving gaming state)
In the general time-saving play state, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140, a "jackpot,""smallhit," or "miss" is determined based on the start information of the second special pattern (see Figure 295), and if a "jackpot" is determined, the game transitions to a big hit play state, and if a "small hit" is determined, the game transitions to a small hit play state.

In the general time-saving game state, the "number of small wins" is subtracted as the A time-saving end condition without distinguishing between V small wins and fall small wins, but if all the small wins won are fall small wins, the game cannot transition to the big win game state and transitions from the general time-saving game state to the second normal game state. Also, if the small win won is a V small win, the game will transition to a small win game state as a V small win in which it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 8156, and when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 8156, the game will transition to the big win game state from the second route.

In the general time-saving game state, after transitioning to the jackpot game state via the first route or the second route, if the number of consecutive jackpots due to the count limiter function has not reached the limiter number, the game state transitions back to the general time-saving game state, and if the number of consecutive jackpots due to the count limiter function has reached the limiter number, the game state transitions to the second normal game state (see FIG. 299). As described above, in the general time-saving game state, after a game ball enters the second starting hole 8140 and transitions to the jackpot game state, the game state may be configured to transition back to the special time-saving game state at a predetermined rate.

(Transition Control of Second Normal Gaming State)
In the second normal game state, a "big win", a "small win" or a "miss" is determined based on the start information of the second special symbol stored during the general time-saving game state (see FIG. 295), and if a "big win" is determined, the game state transitions to a big win game state, and if a "small win" is determined, the game state transitions to a small win game state. If the winning small win is a V small win, a small win game state is performed as a V small win in which the game ball can (or easily) pass through the V winning hole 8156, and when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 8156, the game state transitions to a big win game state from the second route.

Then, in the second normal game state, after transitioning to the jackpot game state via the first route or the second route, the game state will transition back to the general time-saving game state (see FIG. 299).

In addition, in the second normal game state, the starting information of all the second special symbols stored during the general time-saving game state is determined to be a "loss" or "falling small hit", and the state is changed to the general time-saving game state. When the stored number of reserved second special symbols is all consumed, the second normal game state ends and the game shifts to the first normal game state.

(Transition control of gaming disallowed state)
Regardless of the current game state, when the cumulative number of balls paid out in a jackpot game state per day reaches a predetermined number of balls (for example, 100,000 balls), the game state will be forcibly shifted from the jackpot game state to a game-disallowed state. When the RAM is cleared or a setting change process is performed, this game-disallowed state will be shifted to the first normal game state, which is a game-allowed state. In addition, the shift to the game-disallowed state will be executed as the highest priority process in the shift control in each game state.

[10-7. Performance flow]
Next, an outline of the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 300, etc. will be explained using the flow of the entire effect. FIG. 331 is an example of the production flow of the gaming state in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The effects performed in the eighth pachinko gaming machine include a variable effect consisting of a variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to special symbols displayed in the display area of the display device 7, a display effect of characters, etc., a sound effect output from the speaker 32, a lamp effect emitted from the group of LEDs 46, a special effect effect that drives the group of special effect devices 58, and an effect of changing the operation mode of the effect button 54. Note that in this embodiment, the decorative symbols are composed of three main symbols, a left symbol, a center symbol, and a right symbol, and a sub-symbol that is much smaller than the main symbols. Note that the number and type of decorative symbols are not limited to this.

In addition, in the embodiment, the effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol is also called the "first special symbol effect," and the effect based on the lottery of the second special symbol is also called the "second special symbol effect."

(Production in the first normal game state)
In the first normal game state, at least "normal fluctuation", "normal reach", "super reach", "super super reach", and "full rotation reach" can be executed as "first special symbol production". has been done.

"Normal change" refers to a change in which all decorative symbols start changing at high speed and stop displaying in order, and can be performed when the special symbol lottery result is a miss.

"Normal reach", "super reach", and "super super reach" are reach effects that suggest that the lottery result of the first special symbol may be a jackpot. "Normal reach" is a reach effect that is performed when the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same type of symbol, and as an example, a reach effect in which the middle symbol is displayed fluctuating at a low speed. In "normal reach", if the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol of a different type from the left and right symbols, it will be a loss, and if the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as a symbol of the same type as the left and right symbols, it will be a jackpot. In addition, in "Normal Reach", the medium symbol may not be stopped and displayed and may develop into "Super Reach", and the system is configured so that "Super Reach" can further develop into "Super Super Reach". There is.

"Full rotation reach" refers to a state in which multiple decorative symbols indicating a jackpot fluctuate slowly when all of them are in line. In this embodiment, this is an effect that is only executed when the result of the lottery for the first special symbol is a jackpot and the selected symbol "z1" for the first special symbol that transitions to a special time-saving game state is determined.

According to the special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 300(a), the expectation level of transition to the jackpot game state in the order of "normal reach" < "super reach" < "super super reach" < "full rotation reach" The random number value for performance selection is set so that the number is high.

In addition, in the first normal game state, the "card effect" and "battle effect" described below may be configured to be executed at a predetermined rate. When the "card effect" or "battle effect" is executed in the first normal game state, the random number value for effect selection, etc. is set so that the expectation of transitioning to the jackpot game state is high.

(Effects during special time-saving game mode)
In the special time-saving game state, at least a "super-shortened variation," a "instant win effect," and a "battle effect" can be executed as the "second special symbol effect."

"Super-shortened variation" is a variation in which all the decorative symbols begin to display variations at high speed, and in an extremely short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds), all the decorative symbols stop and display different types of symbols. This is a presentation of the form, and is a presentation that can be executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss. In addition, in the special time saving game state, in the "super shortening variation", the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined. It is configured to be executable even when the program is executed (see FIG. 300(b)).

"Immediate win effect" is a variation mode in which all the decorative patterns start to be displayed randomly and at high speed, and in an extremely short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds), all the decorative patterns stop and display as the same type of pattern. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, or the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the selected symbol "z5, z6" of the second special symbol corresponding to "V small win" This is a performance that can be executed when the

"Battle production" is when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, or when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected symbol "z5" of the second special symbol corresponding to "V small win" is used. , z6'' is determined. The "battle performance" does not suggest that you have won the "falling small win" that is the trigger for the end of the general time-saving gaming state, but rather whether you have won the "V small win" that is the trigger to move to the jackpot gaming state. This is a performance that suggests that you are losing. For example, an enemy character appears and the main character and enemy character face off against each other. When the main character wins, a V small win is announced, and the main character This is a performance that announces that you have lost if you are defeated.

(Presentation during normal time-saving game mode)
In the general time-saving game state, different presentations can be executed according to the remaining number of jackpot limiter times.

Specifically, when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times in the general time-saving play state is 91 or more (hereinafter also referred to as the "first half of the number limiter"), "shortened variation", "instant win effect", "card effect", and "battle effect" are configured to be executable. Also, when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times in the general time-saving play state is 90 or less (hereinafter also referred to as the "second half of the number limiter"), "ultra-shortened variation", "instant win effect", and "card effect" are configured to be executable. Also, when the remaining number of jackpot limiter times in the general time-saving play state is 0 (hereinafter also referred to as "when the number limiter is activated"), "ultra-shortened variation" and "ending effect" are configured to be executable.

"Shortened fluctuation" is a special effect during the "first half of the count limiter" in the general time-saving game mode, in which all decorative symbols start to fluctuate at high speed and stop displaying different types of symbols in a short period of time (e.g. 3 seconds) that is shorter than normal fluctuation and longer than ultra-shortened fluctuation, and is an effect that can be executed when the lottery result for the special symbol is a miss. Note that during the "second half of the count limiter" and "when the count limiter is activated" in the general time-saving game mode, "shortened fluctuation" will switch to the above-mentioned "ultra-shortened fluctuation."

The "card effect" is a special effect for the "first half of the count limiter" and the "second half of the count limiter" in the general time-saving play state, and is an effect that can be executed when the result of the lottery for the special pattern is a small win or a miss. The "card effect" is an effect that suggests whether the "fall small win" that triggers the end of the general time-saving play state has been won, the "V small win" that triggers the transition to the big win play state has been won, or it has been a "miss". As an example, it is an effect in which a card with a specified pattern is displayed, and when the card is slowly flipped over, text suggesting the result of the lottery for the second special pattern is displayed.

An "ending effect" is a special effect that occurs when the "number of times limiter is activated" in the general time-saving play state, and can be executed when the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. An "ending effect" is an effect that suggests whether a "big hit" that transitions to a big hit play state has been won, a "V small hit" that triggers a transition to a big hit play state has been won, or a "fall small hit" that triggers the end of the general time-saving play state has been won. As an example, it is an effect in which a specified story is displayed, and when the story is completed, a big hit or V small hit is announced, and when the story ends midway, a fall small hit is announced.

(Production in the second normal game state)
In the second normal game state, at least "normal fluctuation" and "door opening effect" are configured to be executable as the "second special symbol effect."

"Normal fluctuation" is a performance that can be executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, as described above in the performance in the first normal gaming state, but in the second normal gaming state, the second special It is also configured to be executable when the lottery result of the symbol is a small hit and the selected symbol "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to the "falling small win" is determined (see FIG. 300(a)). .

The "door opening effect" is an effect exclusive to the second normal game state, and can be executed when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big hit, when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small hit and the selected second special symbol patterns "z5, z6" corresponding to a "V small hit" are determined, or when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss. As an example, the "door opening effect" displays a half-open door from the left and right, and displays the half-open door rattling for a predetermined period of time, and when there is a big hit or a V small hit, the door is displayed as being completely closed, and when there is a miss, the door is displayed as not being completely closed.

In this embodiment, when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected pattern "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to a "fall small win" is determined during the second normal game state, a "normal change" is executable, but a "door opening effect" may also be executable. When the lottery result for the second special symbol is a small win and the selected pattern "z7" of the second special symbol corresponding to a "fall small win" is determined during the second normal game state, when the "door opening effect" is executed, the same effect as when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a loss may be performed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the "door opening effect" is configured to be executable as a special effect in the second normal game state, but instead of the "door opening effect", the above-mentioned "battle effect" is configured to be executable. You may.

[10-8. Display contents]
The display contents of the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200, sub-control circuit 300, etc. described above will be explained using display images displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

(Battle effects)
First, a battle effect that can be executed in the first half of the number limiter in the special time-saving game state or the general time-saving game state will be described with reference to Fig. 332. Fig. 332 is an example of a display image that explains a battle effect in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The battle effect shown in Figure 332 is an effect based on a pattern effect pattern executed based on the special pattern change pattern command (31H, 32H) that executes the battle effect, as shown in the special pattern change pattern table S1 in Figure 300 (b) and the special pattern change pattern table J1 in Figure 301 (a).

Figure 332 (a) is an example of a display image when a battle performance starts. As shown in Figure 332 (a), when a battle performance starts, a performance is performed in which a main character and a rival character appear and face off against each other. In addition, the decorative patterns of the left, middle, and right patterns are displayed in a reduced size at the bottom right of the display area so as not to interfere with the battle performance and so as to be easily distinguishable by the player.

Figure 332 (b-1) is an example of a display image of a battle effect that is performed when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a V small hit (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 31H). As shown in Figure 332 (b-1), as a result of the battle effect, the showdown is concluded and an effect is performed in which the main character is victorious. In addition, the decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size in the bottom right of the display area, are all displayed as the same symbol and temporarily stopped. After that, the decorative symbols, all of which are the same symbol and temporarily stopped, are displayed large in the center of the display area, and the player is notified that a V small hit has occurred.

Figure 332 (b-2) is an example of a display image of a battle effect that is performed when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a miss (when the variable pattern command for the special symbol is 32H). As shown in Figure 332 (b-2), the battle effect results in a showdown and an effect in which the main character is defeated is performed. In addition, the decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size at the bottom right of the display area, are displayed in a stopped state so that they are not all the same symbol.

In this way, the battle effects executed in the general time-saving play state in this embodiment are not executed when a "fall small hit" occurs, which is the trigger for ending the general time-saving play state. This gives the player a sense of security that the general time-saving play state will continue, while also giving the player a sense of anticipation for a V small hit, making the game even more exciting.

(Card presentation)
Next, a card effect that can be executed in the general time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 333. Fig. 333 is an example of a display image that explains the card effect in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The card presentation shown in Figure 333 is based on a pattern presentation pattern that is executed based on the special pattern variation pattern command (40H, 41H, 42H, 43H) that executes the card presentation, as shown in the special pattern variation pattern tables J1 and J2 in Figure 301.

FIG. 333(a) is an example of a display image when the card effect is started. As shown in FIG. 333(a), when the card effect is started, there is a "win" indicating a V hit, a "loss", a "mode continuation" indicating a continuation of the general time-saving gaming state, a falling small win, and a general A chance card with the words "end of mode" indicating the end of the time-saving game state is displayed, and an effect is performed in which the chance card is turned over and shuffled. In addition, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, which were displayed large in the center of the display area, are now reduced to the lower right of the display area so that they can be easily identified by the player, so as not to interfere with the card performance. be done.

FIG. 333(b) is an example of a common display image from the start of the card performance to the time when the lottery result of the second special symbol is suggested. As shown in FIG. 333(b), when the chance cards are turned over and shuffled, an effect is performed in which one of the chance cards is selected.

Figure 333 (c-1) is an example of a display image of a card presentation that is performed when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a V small hit (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 41H). As shown in Figure 332 (c-1), when one card is selected in the card presentation, the card is slowly flipped over and a chance card with the word "hit" written on it is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbols of the left, middle, and right symbols, which are displayed in reduced size in the bottom right of the display area, are all displayed as the same symbol and temporarily stopped. After that, the decorative symbols, all of which are the same symbol and temporarily stopped, are displayed large in the center of the display area, and the player is notified that a V small hit has occurred.

FIG. 333 (c-2) is an example of a display image of a card performance performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a falling small hit (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 42H or 43H). . As shown in Figure 332 (c-2), when one card is selected in the card performance, the card is slowly reversed and a chance card with the words "end of mode" written on it is displayed. be exposed. In addition, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that are reduced and displayed at the lower right of the display area are stopped and displayed so that they are not all the same.

Although not shown, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 40H), when one card is selected in the card performance, the card is A chance card with the words "Continue Mode" written on it is slowly flipped over and displayed.

Figure 333 (d-2) is an example of a display image of a card presentation that follows Figure 333 (c-2) when the result of the lottery for the second special symbol is a small drop hit and the remaining number of small hit wins is two or more (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 42H). As shown in Figure 332 (d-2), after a chance card with the words "mode end" is displayed, a female character is displayed and a presentation is performed indicating the continuation of the general time-saving game state.

Furthermore, even when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 40H), as shown in FIG. 332 (c-2) and FIG. 332 (d-2), After the chance card with the words "end of mode" written on it is once displayed, a female character may be displayed and an effect indicating the continuation of the general time-saving game state may be executed at a predetermined rate.

Furthermore, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a V small hit (when the fluctuation pattern command of the special symbol is 41H), a chance card with the words "End mode" or "Continue mode" written on it is displayed. After being displayed, a specific character may be displayed and a resurrection effect that notifies you of a V hit may be executed at a predetermined rate.

In this way, according to the card presentation executed in the general time-saving play state in this embodiment, whether it is a "fall small hit" that will trigger the end of the general time-saving play state, a "miss" that will cause the general time-saving play state to continue, or a "V small hit" that will trigger a transition to a big hit play state, the player can hope that it is not a "fall small hit" and be interested in the possibility of a "miss," thereby further increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(Ending performance)
Next, an ending effect that can be executed when the number limiter is activated in the general time-saving gaming state will be described with reference to Fig. 334. Fig. 334 is an example of a display image that explains the ending effect in the eighth pachinko gaming machine.

The ending effect shown in Figure 334 is an effect based on a pattern effect pattern executed based on the special pattern change pattern command (50H, 51H, 52H) that executes the ending effect, as shown in the special pattern change pattern table J3 in Figure 301.

FIG. 334(a) is an example of a display image when the ending effect is started. As shown in FIG. 334(a), when the ending effect is started, a predetermined story is displayed. In addition, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, which were displayed large in the center of the display area, are now reduced to the lower right of the display area so that they can be easily identified by the player, so as not to interfere with the card performance. be done.

Figure 334 (b-1) shows the ending performance (successful ending performance) that is performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot or a V small win (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 51H or 52H). This is an example of a display image. As shown in FIG. 334 (b-1), the story is completed and the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, which are reduced and displayed in the lower right corner of the display area, are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same symbol.

Figure 334 (c-1) is an example of a display image of the ending presentation that follows Figure 334 (b-1). As shown in Figure 334 (c-1), after the story is completed, all the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are displayed as the same symbol large and stopped in the center of the display area, notifying the player that they have won a big prize or a V small prize.

Figure 334 (b-2) is an example of a display image of an ending effect (ending failure effect) that is performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small fall hit (when the variation pattern command of the special symbol is 50H). As shown in Figure 334 (b-2), the display screen breaks down and a message is displayed indicating that the story has ended midway.

FIG. 334(c-2) is an example of a display image of the ending effect that is performed subsequent to FIG. 334(b-2). As shown in Figure 334 (c-2), after the story ends midway, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are displayed in a large stop in the center of the display area so that they are not all the same pattern. . Then, the words "Mode End" are displayed to indicate that the general time-saving game state has ended.

As described above, according to the ending performance executed in the general time-saving gaming state in this embodiment, the number of times limiter function in the general time-saving gaming state restricts the gaming state to which the jackpot gaming state is transitioned after the end of the jackpot gaming state (normal gaming state In addition to being able to recognize whether the player has won a jackpot, a V-small win, or a falling win, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

(Door opening effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 335, a door opening effect that can be executed in the second normal game state will be described. FIG. 335 is an example of a display image illustrating a door opening effect in the eighth pachinko game machine.

The door opening effect shown in FIG. 335 is executed based on the special symbol variation pattern commands (08H, 09H, 0AH) that execute the door opening effect, as shown in the special symbol variation pattern table T1 in FIG. 300(a). This is a performance based on a design performance pattern.

FIG. 335(a) is an example of a display image when the door opening effect is started. As shown in FIG. 335(a), when the door opening effect is started, half-open doors are displayed from the left and right, and a display is performed in which the half-open doors rattle for a predetermined period of time. In addition, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols that were displayed large in the center of the display area have been reduced to the bottom right of the display area so that they can be easily identified by the player so that they do not interfere with the door opening effect. Is displayed.

Figure 335 (b-1) is an example of a display image of the door opening effect that is performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot or a V-small win (when the special symbol fluctuation pattern command is 08H or 09H). It is. As shown in FIG. 335(b-1), after a display indicating that the half-open door is rattling for a predetermined period of time, a display indicating that the door is completely closed is displayed.

Figure 335 (c-1) is an example of a display image of the door opening effect that follows Figure 335 (b-1). As shown in Figure 335 (c-1), after the door is displayed as being completely closed, the door opens again and all the decorative patterns of the left, middle and right patterns are displayed large and stopped in the center of the display area as the same pattern, notifying the player that they have won a big win or a V small win.

FIG. 335(b-2) is an example of a display image of the door opening performance performed when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss (when the special symbol variation pattern command is 0AH). As shown in FIG. 335(b-2), after a display indicating that the half-open door is rattling for a predetermined period of time, a display indicating that the door is not completely closed is displayed.

FIG. 335(c-2) is an example of a display image of the door opening effect performed subsequent to FIG. 335(b-2). As shown in Figure 335 (c-2), after the door is not completely closed, the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are placed in the center of the display area so that they are not all the same. A large stop is displayed.

In this way, the door opening effect executed in the second normal game state in this embodiment results in a big win or V small win after the normal time-saving game state ends, giving the player the expectation of returning to the normal time-saving game state again, further increasing the interest in the game.

(Preview performance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 336, a preview performance that can be executed in the time-saving game state will be described. FIG. 336 is an example of a display image explaining a preview performance in the eighth pachinko game machine.

As shown in the preview performance pattern determination table of FIG. 327, the preview effects shown in FIG. 336 include "Notice Effect Pattern A" that suggests a falling small hit in advance, and a "previous effect pattern A" that suggests in advance that there is a possibility of a V small hit. This is a performance based on a "notice performance pattern B1" that advances from the notice performance pattern B1 and a "notice performance pattern B2" that suggests in advance that there is a high possibility that a battle performance will be executed.

FIG. 336(a) is an example of a display image before the preview effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 336(a), decorative symbols including a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol are displayed in a variable manner in the center of the display area.

FIG. 336(b-1) is an example of a display image when the preview performance according to the preview performance pattern A is executed. As shown in FIG. 336(b-1), the word "DANGER" is displayed to indicate in advance that there is a possibility of a small hit.

Figure 336 (b-2) is an example of a display image when preview performances according to preview performance pattern B1 and preview performance pattern B2 are executed. As shown in Figure 336 (b-2), to suggest in advance that there is a possibility of a V small hit, a male character is displayed from a window, and the word "CHANCE" is also displayed.

FIG. 336(c-2) is an example of a display image when the preview performance according to the preview performance pattern B2, which is performed subsequent to FIG. 336(b-2), is executed. As shown in Figure 336 (c-2), in order to suggest in advance that there is a high possibility that a battle performance will be executed, the window becomes larger, a female character is displayed from the enlarged window, and " The words "BATTLE" are displayed.

In this way, according to the preview effect executed in the time-saving game mode in this embodiment, the content suggested by the preview effect allows players to guess the lottery results for the special symbols and the content of the effect that will be executed, thereby making the game even more interesting.

In this way, the eighth pachinko gaming machine allows transitions to the first normal gaming state, the second normal gaming state, the special time-saving gaming state, and the general time-saving gaming state, and allows the transition to an appropriate time-saving gaming state according to each gaming state. Since the performance is performed, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the eighth pachinko gaming machine, the number of small winnings = 255 is set as a time-saving ending condition, and a "special time-saving gaming state" in which the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed, and a small winning number as a time-saving ending condition. By providing a "general time-saving gaming state" in which the number of winnings is set to 1 or 2 and the next jackpot is not guaranteed, it creates an unprecedented gaming experience and increases the interest of the game. You can improve your performance.

<Modified example of the eighth pachinko game machine>
In the eighth pachinko gaming machine, the "ball output limiter function" counts the cumulative number of game balls paid out in a jackpot game state "per day", and the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out "per day" is " When a predetermined number of balls are reached (for example, 100,000 balls), the game state to which the game state shifts after the end of the jackpot game state is partially regulated. However, as a "ball limiter function", like a "number of times limiter function", the total number of jackpot balls paid out in a jackpot gaming state under specific conditions (time-saving gaming state) is counted, and the cumulative number of jackpot balls is calculated. When the number of balls put out reaches a "predetermined number of balls put out in consecutive games (for example, 50,000 balls)", the game state to which the game state is transferred after the end of the jackpot game state may be partially regulated.

If the "ball payout limiter function" is configured to count the cumulative number of jackpot balls paid out of game balls paid out in a jackpot game state under specific conditions (time-saving game state), and to partially restrict the game state to which the player transitions after the jackpot game state ends when the cumulative number of jackpot balls reaches a specified number of consecutive balls paid out, then the processing can be modified as follows.
First, in S8325 of the system timer interruption process (FIG. 324), the "cumulative jackpot payout ball counter" in the main RAM 203 is referred to, and it is determined whether the value of the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is equal to or greater than the "predetermined consecutive payout ball number (for example, 50,000 balls)". If it is determined that the value of the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is equal to or greater than the "predetermined consecutive payout ball number", the process proceeds to S8326, and a setting process for a game non-permitted state is performed. In addition, in S8323 of the system timer interruption process (FIG. 324), it is determined whether the value is less than the predetermined consecutive payout ball number (for example, 49,000 balls). This allows the cumulative jackpot payout ball number to be switched from the "predetermined number of balls to be played (for example, 100,000 balls)" per day to the "predetermined consecutive payout ball number".
Next, in the jackpot end state setting process of S8323 in the jackpot end game state end process (see FIG. 320), it is determined whether the selected special symbol at the end of the jackpot game state is the selected special symbol for the time-saving game state. If it is not the selected special symbol for the time-saving game state (if it is the selected special symbol for the normal game state), the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is cleared (the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is set to 0). As a result, after the jackpot game state that transitions to the normal game state is ended, the cumulative jackpot payout ball counter is cleared, and the cumulative jackpot payout ball number of the game balls paid out in the jackpot game state under a specific condition (time-saving game state) can be counted.

In the eighth pachinko game machine, as shown in S8325 and S8326 of the system timer interrupt processing (Fig. 324), the main CPU 201 counts the cumulative number of balls dispensed in a jackpot, and the main control circuit 200 and the payout/launch control circuit 400 control the "ball dispense limiter function". However, it may also be configured so that the payout/launch control circuit 400 counts the cumulative number of balls dispensed in a jackpot, and only the payout/launch control circuit 400 controls the "ball dispense limiter function".

The eighth pachinko gaming machine is equipped with two functions, a "count limiter function" and a "ball payout limiter function", to partially restrict the gaming state to which the game transitions after the end of the big win gaming state, but it may be configured with only the "count limiter function" or only the "ball payout limiter function".

Furthermore, the technology described in the eighth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine may be applied to a slot machine. When applied to a slot machine, the various performances executed in the eighth pachinko game machine may be replaced with performances by a display device, reels, etc. provided in the slot machine. In addition, the time-saving gaming states (special time-saving gaming state, general time-saving gaming state) include replay time (RT state) in which the probability of replaying is improved, and assist time (AT It may be replaced with either state) or assist replay time (ART state) in which the replay time and assist time are controlled simultaneously. In addition, jackpots and small hits (V small winnings, falling small winnings) include winning a specific combination, a specific symbol combination being stopped and displayed (a specific symbol combination winning a prize), and RT status. It may be replaced with any one of winning a rush win, winning a rush win in an AT state, or winning a rush win in an ART state. In addition, the number of times limiter function can be used to control the number of games that can be played in any of the RT, AT, and ART states, and the ball output limiter function can be used under certain conditions (predetermined small winnings and the operation content of the stop button can be notified). It may be replaced by the number of payouts of game media (medals/game balls) in the section).

(others)
The eighth pachinko gaming machine described above can apply the techniques of each embodiment, including modified examples. The above-mentioned embodiment does not limit the contents of the present invention, and modifications can be made to the extent that they do not deviate from the scope of the claims.

Further, the effects described in the eighth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. It's not something you can do.

Furthermore, the above [4. [Extended example] can be applied to the eighth pachinko game machine as long as it does not cause any discrepancy in its gameplay or control.

[11. The 9th Pachinko Game Machine]
Next, the ninth pachinko gaming machine will be described. The ninth pachinko gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine called a one-type two-type mixed machine, similar to the third pachinko gaming machine. The ninth pachinko gaming machine is different from the third pachinko gaming machine in terms of gameplay and presentation content, and accordingly, the configuration of various components arranged in the game area is also partially different.

In particular, the ninth pachinko gaming machine differs from the third pachinko gaming machine in that in the time-saving gaming state, the gameplay is mainly composed of the variable display of normal symbols, and the condition for ending the time-saving gaming state is composed of the number of times that the variable display of normal symbols has occurred, not the number of times that the variable display of special symbols has occurred.

The ninth pachinko gaming machine, like the third pachinko gaming machine, is a priority variable machine in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in parallel, and the start condition of the second special symbol is established in priority over the start condition of the first special symbol. However, this is not limited to this, and the machine may be a sequential variable machine as described above.

Hereinafter, in explaining the ninth pachinko game machine, the same components as the first pachinko game machine will be given the same reference numerals and the same step numbers, and detailed explanations regarding the configuration and processing will be omitted.

In addition, in this embodiment, a game ball is inserted into a ball entry hole (for example, a starting hole or a big prize hole) that can provide a predetermined profit (payout of game balls, transition of gaming state) to the player. ``Playing a ball'' is also referred to as ``winning'' as appropriate. In addition, in the present embodiment, the "variable display" of a symbol includes, for example, both "variable display" in which the symbol is displayed while fluctuating, and "stop display" in which the symbol is displayed in a stopped state. This is a concept, and the operation from the start of the variable display to the stop display is referred to as one "variable display."

[11-1. Game board unit]
Referring to FIG. 337, a game board unit 9010 included in the ninth pachinko game machine will be described. This game board unit 9010 is also arranged in front of the base door 3 (see FIG. 2) so as to be located behind the protective glass 43 (see FIG. 2), similarly to the first pachinko game machine.

Figure 337 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit 9010 equipped in the ninth pachinko game machine. The game board unit 9010 has a game panel 9100 as a game board, various components are arranged on the game panel 9100, and a game area 105 is formed on the front side of the game panel 9100, in which the released game balls can roll and flow down.

As shown in FIG. 337, compared to the first pachinko game machine, the game board unit 9010 included in the ninth pachinko game machine mainly has a normal pattern operation area 9126 that replaces the passage gate, and a second start-up area. The configuration and arrangement of the mouth 9140, the normal electric accessory unit 9145, the first special electric accessory unit 9130, and the second special electric accessory unit 9150 are different. Each configuration and its arrangement will be explained below.

Note that the first starting port 9120 located in the gaming area 105 of the ninth pachinko gaming machine is functionally common to the first starting port 120 located in the gaming area 105 of the first pachinko gaming machine. However, due to its relationship with the second starting port 9140, it will be explained again using a different code from the first pachinko game machine.

(1st starting port)
The first starting port 9120 is arranged in the game area 105 below the display area of the display device 7, and allows a game ball hit to the left to enter the ball, and a game ball hit to the right by a game nail or the like to enter the ball. Constructed to be difficult or impossible. The first starting port 9120 is equipped with a first starting port switch 9121 (see FIG. 338 described later) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 9120.

When a game ball enters the first starting hole 9120, a first special symbol lottery (first special symbol hit determination process), a variable display of the first special symbol, and a prize ball for the first starting hole (for example, three A payout of game balls) is performed. The process after the game ball enters the first starting port 9120 will be described in detail later.

(Second starting hole)
The second starting hole 9140 is located in the right side area 107 below (downstream) the first special electric role unit 9130 described later and above (upstream) the normal operation area 9126 and the second special electric role unit 9150, and is provided in the normal electric role unit 9145 described later, so that game balls hit to the right can enter the hole (game balls hit to the left are difficult or impossible to enter the hole). The second starting hole 9140 is provided with a second starting hole switch 9141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 9140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, a second special symbol lottery (second special symbol hit determination process), a variable display of the second special symbol, and a prize ball for the second starting port (for example, one A payout of game balls) is performed. The process after the game ball enters the second starting port 9140 will be described in detail later.

(Normal operating range)
Unlike the passing gate of the first pachinko game machine, the normal map operation area 9126 is configured with a winning port (also called a "normal map operation port") through which game balls that have passed through the normal map operation area 9126 are collected by the game machine without returning to the game area 105 (right side area 107), and prize balls for the normal map operation area (for example, one game ball) are paid out. The normal map operation area 9126 is located below (downstream) the first special electric role unit 9130, the normal electric role unit 9145, and the second special electric role unit 9150 in the right side area 107, which will be described later, and game balls hit to the right can pass through (game balls hit to the left have difficulty or cannot pass through).

Therefore, the game balls flowing down the right side area 107 are the first big prize opening 9131 of the first special electric accessory unit 9130, the second starting opening 9140 of the normal electric accessory unit 9145, and the second special electric accessory unit 9150. When the ball does not enter any of the second big prize openings 9151, it is possible to pass to the normal pattern operation area 9126. As a result, when a right hand is being played in the jackpot game state, the game ball flowing down the right side area 107 enters the first big prize opening 9131 by the operation of the first special electric accessory unit 9130 arranged above. Since the number of game balls passing through the normal pattern operation area 9126 is reduced, the normal electric accessory unit 9145 is activated by the passing of the game ball into the normal pattern operation area 9126, and the game performance is not designed to be affected. It is possible to prevent game balls from unexpectedly entering the second starting port 9140. In addition, when a right hand is played as an irregular game mode in the normal game state, the normal pattern operating area 9126 is not a passing gate but also a normal pattern operating opening (winning opening), so the passing of the normal pattern operating area 9126 The played game ball will never enter the second starting port 9140.

Further, the normal figure operating area 9126 is provided with a normal figure operating switch 9127 (see FIG. 338 described later) that detects passage of the game ball to the normal figure operating area 9126. When the game ball passes through the normal pattern operating area 9126, the passing of the game ball to the normal pattern operating area 9126 is detected by the normal pattern operating switch 9127, and the prize ball (for example, one game ball) for the normal pattern operating area is activated. A payout is performed, and a normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination process) and a variable display of the normal symbols are performed.

In this embodiment, the normal map operation area 9126 is configured as a normal map operation port, but it may also be configured as a passing gate as in the first pachinko game machine.

The passage of the game ball into the normal symbol operation area 9126 may also be made to function as a trigger for activating the consecutive operation device of the special device. Assuming that the condition device is in operation (the special symbol that will result in a jackpot is displayed frozen), the passing of the game ball into the normal symbol operation area 9126 may activate the consecutive operation device of the special device, transitioning to a jackpot game state.

(Normal electric accessory unit)
The normal electric accessory unit 9145 is located below (downstream side) a first special electric accessory unit 9130 (described later) in the right side area 107 and above (upstream side) the ordinary figure operation area 9126 and the second special electric accessory unit 9150. It is placed so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through. The normal electric utility unit 9145 includes a second starting port 9140, a second starting port switch 9141 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 9140, and a two-stage upper and lower switch that can move forward and backward. It is a unit body that integrates a general power shutter 9147 and a general power solenoid 9148 (see FIG. 338 described later) that operates the general power shutter 9147.

The general-purpose power shutter 9147 retreats rearward by the operation of the general-purpose power solenoid 9148, and enters the open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting port 9140 or easily, and advances forward and enters the second starting state. It is configured to be able to be moved to a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the opening 9140.

Specifically, the normal power shutter 9147 has a roughly U-shape when viewed in cross section from the front-to-rear direction, and is configured with an upper top plate 9147U on which the game ball can roll, a lower bottom plate 9147D on which the game ball can roll, and a support plate that connects and supports the upper plate 9147U and the bottom plate 9147D. In addition, the upper plate 9147U and the bottom plate 9147D of the normal power shutter 9147 are configured to be gently inclined (for example, 5 to 10 degrees) toward a center line perpendicular to the left-right direction of the play area 105.

When the normal power shutter 9147 advances forward and is in a closed state, the upper plate 9147U and the lower plate 9147D protrude from the surface of the game panel 9100, and the protruding lower plate 9147D closes the second starting hole 9140, making it impossible or difficult for a game ball flowing down the right side area 107 to enter the second starting hole 9140. Also, when the normal power shutter 9147 is in a closed state, the game ball rolling on the upper plate 9147U is guided downstream to the general winning hole 122, the second special electric role unit 9150, or the normal map operation area 9126, and the game ball rolling on the lower plate 9147D is guided downstream to the second special electric role unit 9150 or the normal map operation area 9126.

Here, in the game panel 9100, when the general electricity shutter 9147 is in a closed state due to a game nail or the like, the game ball flowing down the right side area 107 is basically not guided onto the bottom plate 9147D, It is configured to be guided above the top plate 9147U.

In addition, when the normal power shutter 9147 is retracted backward and in an open state, the upper panel 9147U and the lower panel 9147D are recessed into the game panel 9100, and the second starting hole 9140 is opened.

When the normal power shutter 9147 is in an open state for a predetermined time or longer, a game ball flowing down the right side area 107 passes through the upper plate 9147U and the lower plate 9147D, a game ball rolling on the upper plate 9147U falls toward the lower plate 9147D, or a game ball rolling on the lower plate 9147D falls toward the second starting hole 9140, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140.

On the other hand, when the normal power shutter 9147 is in an open state for an opening time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds or less), even if a game ball rolling on the upper plate 9147U falls toward the lower plate 9147D, the opening time ends immediately, causing the lower plate 9147D to protrude from the surface of the game panel 9100, and the game ball that fell from the upper plate 9147U will roll on the lower plate 9147D (and be caught by the lower plate 9147D), making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140. In addition, the game ball rolling on the lower panel 9147D falls toward the second starting hole 9140, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140. However, as described above, when the normal power shutter 9147 is in the closed state, the game ball is not guided to the lower panel 9147D, and the game ball is not basically rolling on the lower panel 9147D. Therefore, if the normal power shutter 9147 is only displaced to the open state once for a short opening time, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140.

In addition, in this embodiment, the route R1 of the game ball launched from the launch device 6 (see FIG. 338 described later) until it reaches the normal electric accessory unit 9145 (second starting port 9140) is as shown in FIG. 337. As shown by the one-dot chain line, it is determined in advance by the configuration of the game board unit 9010. Therefore, in this embodiment, the average arrival time until the game ball fired from the firing device 6 reaches the normal electric accessory unit 9145 (second starting port 9140) depends on the firing intensity of the firing device 6. It is possible to calculate that the average time is 5 seconds (approximately 4 to 6 seconds). It goes without saying that depending on the configuration of the game board unit 9010, the average arrival time until the game ball fired from the firing device 6 reaches the normal electric accessory unit 9145 (second starting port 9140) is variable. .

In addition, in this embodiment, the general power shutter 9147 is configured as a two-stage shutter equipped with an upper surface plate 9147U and a lower surface plate 9147D that can move back and forth in the front and rear directions. The normal power shutter 9147 may be configured with a one-stage shutter including a bottom plate 9147D that opens and closes the starting port 9140. Furthermore, instead of a shutter that can move back and forth in the front-rear direction, the normal electricity shutter 9147 may be configured with a movable member called a so-called electric chew that can move in the left-right direction.

(First special electric feature unit)
The first special electric role unit 9130 is located in the right side area 107 above (upstream) the normal operation area 9126, the normal electric role unit 9145, and the second special electric role unit 9150 described later.

The first special electric device unit 9130 is a unitary body that integrates a first large prize opening 9131, a first large prize opening count switch 9132 (see FIG. 338 described below) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 9131, a first special electric shutter 9134 that can move left and right, and a first special electric solenoid 9135 (see FIG. 338 described below) that operates the first special electric shutter 9134.

The first large prize opening 9131 is a large prize opening that opens when a jackpot is hit, and the maximum number of winning balls (e.g., 10 balls) that can enter the first large prize opening 9131 in one round of a jackpot is specified. Each time one game ball enters this first large prize opening 9131, prize balls (e.g., 15 game balls) for the first large prize opening are paid out.

The first large prize opening 9131 transitions from a closed state to an open state in the first route when a special stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern hit determination process is a "big hit" and in the second route when a specific stop display mode is derived indicating that the result of the special pattern determination is a "small hit" and the second large prize opening 9151 opens, and a game ball that enters the opened second large prize opening 9151 enters the V prize opening 9156 within the second large prize opening 9151.

The first special electric shutter 9134 is configured to be displaceable between an open state in which it is possible or easy for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 9131 and a closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the first large winning opening 9131, by the operation of the first special electric solenoid 9135.

Specifically, the first special electric shutter 9134 is roughly fan-shaped when viewed from the front, is supported at the bottom by a pivot, and is made up of a blade member that can move left and right.

When the first special electric shutter 9134 is movable to the right and in an open state, the first large prize opening 9131 opens, receives game balls flowing down into the right area 107, and guides the received game balls to the first large prize opening 9131. On the other hand, when the first special electric shutter 9134 is movable to the left and in a closed state, the first large prize opening 9131 closes, making it impossible or difficult for game balls to enter the first large prize opening 9131. Note that instead of the above-mentioned first special electric shutter 9134, a door member that displaces approximately parallel and approximately perpendicular to the surface of the game panel 9100, or a protruding plate member that can advance and retreat in the forward and backward directions relative to the surface of the game panel 9100 may be used.

(Second special electric feature unit)
The second special electric device unit 9150 is located below (downstream) the first special electric device unit 9130 and the normal electric device unit 9145 in the right-side area 107 and above (upstream) the normal operating area 9126, and is positioned so that a game ball hit to the right can almost pass through it.

The second special electric accessory unit 9150 includes a second big winning hole 9151, a second big winning hole count switch 9152 that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 9151, and a second big winning hole 9151. A second special electric shutter 9154 that can be opened and closed; and a second special electric solenoid 9155 that operates the second special electric shutter 9154 to open and close the second big prize opening 9151 (see FIG. 338 described later); A V winning hole 9156 through which the game ball that entered the second big winning hole 9151 can pass, a V winning hole switch 9157 that detects that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 9156 (see FIG. 338 described later), A normal opening 9158 through which game balls that have entered the two major winning openings 9151 and which have not entered the V winning opening 9156 can pass through, a V shutter 9159 that opens and closes the V winning opening 9156, and operating this V shutter 9159. It is a unit body that is integrated with a V shutter solenoid 9160 (see FIG. 338 described later) that opens and closes the V winning opening 9156.

The second big winning hole 9151 is a big winning hole that is opened when there is a small win, and the maximum number of winning balls (for example, 10) that can enter the second big winning hole 9151 in one small winning. is stipulated. Every time one game ball enters the second big winning hole 9151, prize balls for the second big winning hole (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second special electric shutter 9154 is made of a protruding plate-like member that can move back and forth in the front and back direction, and when the second special electric solenoid 9155 is activated, the second special electric shutter 9154 advances forward to win the second grand prize. A closed state in which it is impossible or difficult for a game ball to enter the opening 9151, and a closed state in which it is possible or easy to allow a game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 9151 by moving the second special electric shutter 9154 backward. It is configured to be able to be displaced between states.

The V winning hole 9156 is a winning hole that can be opened and closed by a V shutter 9159, and is a winning hole that is triggered to be controlled into a jackpot gaming state through the above-mentioned second route when a game ball passes through it.

When the jackpot game state is controlled through the second route, the opening of the second big winning hole 9151 when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156 is the first round, and the game ball entering the V winning hole 9156 After passing (second round and onwards), a round game is executed in which the first big prize opening 9131 is moved from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when the jackpot gaming state is controlled through the second route, the second jackpot 9151 changes from the closed state to the open state even after the game ball passes through the V winning slot 9156 (from the second round). The transition round game may be executed over a predetermined number of rounds.

Further, for example, by providing a V winning hole inside the first big winning hole 9131, one V winning hole and one attacker may be opened in the jackpot game state. In this case, when the stop display mode indicating a "small win" is derived, the first big winning hole 9131 is opened, and the game ball is inserted into the V winning hole provided inside the first big winning hole 9131. When the game enters, the control may be made to a jackpot gaming state (a jackpot gaming state via the second route).

The normal opening 9158 is configured such that game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 9151 but have not passed through the V winning opening 9156 enter (pass through). In addition, during the small winning game state, if all the game balls that entered the opened second large prize opening 9151 passed through the normal opening 9158 and no game balls passed through the V winning opening 9156, the small winning occurred. There will be no transition from the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state.

The V-shutter 9159 is configured to be displaceable between a closed state in which it is impossible (or difficult) for game balls to pass through the V-winning opening 9156 and an open state in which it is possible (or easy) for game balls to pass through the V-winning opening 9156 by the operation of the V-shutter solenoid 9160.

In particular, in the ninth pachinko game machine, when the small winning game state is entered, the V-shutter solenoid 9160 is operated to open the V-winning port 9156, and the game ball that has entered the second large-winning port 9151 is almost It is configured so that it can pass through the prize opening 9156.

In addition, in this embodiment, the route for the game balls launched from the launch device 6 to reach the second special electric accessory unit 9150 is predetermined similarly to the route R1, and The average arrival time for the game ball to reach the second special electric accessory unit 9150 can be calculated to be 6 seconds on average (approximately 5 to 7 seconds), although it depends on the firing intensity of the firing device 6. . It goes without saying that depending on the configuration of the game board unit 9010, the average arrival time for the game balls fired from the firing device 6 to reach the second special electric accessory unit 9150 can be varied.

In addition, the arrangement relationship of the first special electric accessory unit 9130, the normal electric accessory unit 9145, the second special electric accessory unit 9150, and the general figure operation area 9126 arranged in the right side area 107 can be changed in design as appropriate. It is.

[11-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, the control circuit of the ninth pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 338. Fig. 338 is an example of a block diagram showing the control circuit of the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 338, the ninth pachinko gaming machine, like the first pachinko gaming machine, is mainly composed of a main control circuit 200 that controls the game, a sub-control circuit 300 that controls the presentation according to the progress of the game, a payout/launch control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 450.

However, the ninth pachinko gaming machine differs from the first pachinko gaming machine in some respects in the configuration of the devices connected to the main control circuit 200 and the sub-control circuit 300. The configuration and layout of each are explained below.

[11-2-1. Main control circuit]
Compared to the first pachinko game machine, the main control circuit 200 has slightly different configurations in the normal power solenoid 9148, the first special power solenoid 9135, the second special power solenoid 9155, the V shutter solenoid 9160, the first start port switch 9121, the second start port switch 9141, the normal operation switch 9127, the first large prize port count switch 9132, the second large prize port count switch 9152, and the V prize port switch 9157 which are connected to the main control circuit 200.

(General purpose electric solenoid)
The general electricity solenoid 9148 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the general electricity shutter 9147. When the normal power solenoid 9148 is energized by the main CPU 201 (ON), the normal power shutter 9147 is moved backward to open the second starting port 9140, and the main CPU 201 energizes the solenoid 9148. If not (OFF), the normal power shutter 9147 is moved forward to close the second starting port 9140.

(1st special electric solenoid)
The first special electric solenoid 9135 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the first special electric shutter 9134. When the first special electric solenoid 9135 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the first special electric shutter 9134 to the right to open the first big prize opening 9131, and the main CPU 201 If energization is not performed (OFF), the first special electric shutter 9134 is moved to the left to close the first big prize opening 9131.

(Second special solenoid)
The second special electric solenoid 9155 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the second special electric shutter 9154. When the main CPU 201 applies electricity to the second special electric solenoid 9155 (ON), the second special electric solenoid 9155 moves the second special electric shutter 9154 backward to open the second large winning opening 9151, and when the main CPU 201 does not apply electricity to the second special electric solenoid 9155 (OFF), the second special electric shutter 9154 advances forward to close the second large winning opening 9151.

(Solenoid for V-shutter)
The V shutter solenoid 9160 is an electromagnetic solenoid that operates the V shutter 9159. When the V shutter solenoid 9160 is energized (ON) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 9159 backward to open the V winning opening 9156, and when it is not energized (OFF) by the main CPU 201, it moves the V shutter 9159 forward to close the V winning opening 9156.

(1st starting port switch)
The first starting port switch 9121 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 9120.

When the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 9120 is detected by the first starting port switch 9121, the main CPU 201 determines that the first starting condition has been met, and the starting information of the first special symbol (jackpot determination (random value for use, pattern random value, random value for reach determination, random value for performance selection, etc.). The acquired starting information of the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol determination storage area (0), or is stored in the first special symbol starting storage area of the main RAM 203 up to the "pending number of first special symbols (for example, 4 pieces)". (in order from the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (4)), and the starting conditions for the first special symbol (for example, the special electric accessory is not activated, If it is established that the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.), it will be used for the hit determination process of the first special symbol and the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, when the first starting port switch 9121 detects that a game ball enters the first starting port 9120, the main CPU 201 performs a payout process for prize balls (for example, three game balls) for the first starting port. is instructed to the payout/fire control circuit 400.

(Second start switch)
The second start hole switch 9141 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 9140.

When the second start hole switch 9141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 9140, the main CPU 201 determines that the second start condition is met and acquires start information for the second special symbol (random number value for determining a big win, random number value for a symbol, random number value for determining a reach, random number value for selecting a performance, etc.). The acquired start information for the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol determination memory area (0) or is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (second special symbol start memory area (1) to second special symbol start memory area (2) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of second special symbols (e.g., two)." When the start condition for the second special symbol (e.g., the special electric role is not in operation, the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed, etc.) is met, the information is used for the hit determination process for the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, when the second start hole switch 9141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start hole 9140, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a prize ball (e.g., one game ball) for the second start hole.

In addition, in the embodiment, the winning judgment process for the first special pattern based on the start information of the first special pattern is also called the "lottery for the first special pattern," and the winning judgment process for the second special pattern based on the start information of the second special pattern is also called the "lottery for the second special pattern," and the lottery for the first special pattern and the lottery for the second special pattern are collectively called the "lottery for the special patterns."

(Normal operation switch)
The normal ball activation switch 9127 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the passage of a game ball into the normal ball activation area 9126.

When the normal symbol activation switch 9127 detects the passage of the game ball into the normal symbol activation area 9126, the main CPU 201 acquires normal symbol start information (random number value for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit, random number value for the normal symbol, etc.). The acquired normal symbol start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (normal symbol start memory area (1) to normal symbol start memory area (4) in order) of the main RAM 203 up to the "reserved number of normal symbols (for example, 4)". When the normal symbol determination start condition (for example, the normal electric role is not in operation, the normal symbol variable display is not being performed, etc.) is met, it is used for the normal symbol lottery (normal symbol hit determination process) and the normal symbol variable display. In addition, when the normal play operation switch 9127 detects the passage of a game ball into the normal play operation area 9126, the main CPU 201 instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to perform the payout process of a prize ball (e.g., one game ball) for the normal play operation area.

(1st big prize opening count switch)
The first big winning hole count switch 9132 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big winning hole 9131. When the first big winning hole count switch 9132 detects that a game ball enters the first big winning hole 9131, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls that enter the first big winning hole 9131 per round. At the same time, it instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the first big prize opening.

(2nd big prize opening count switch)
The second big winning hole count switch 9152 is a through-type proximity switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big winning hole 9151. When the second big winning hole count switch 9152 detects the entry of game balls into the second big winning hole 9151, the main CPU 201 counts the number of game balls entering the second big winning hole 9151, and also counts the number of game balls entering the second big winning hole 9151. It instructs the payout/launch control circuit 400 to process the payout of prize balls (for example, 15 game balls) for the two major winning openings.

(V winning port switch)
The V winning hole switch 9157 is a through-type proximity switch that detects passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 9156. When the V winning hole switch 9157 detects the entry of a game ball into the V winning hole 9156, the main CPU 201 will control the transition to the jackpot game state. Incidentally, even if the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 9156 is detected by the V winning hole switch 9157, the prize ball is not paid out.

[11-2-2. Sub-control circuit]
The sub-control circuit 300, like the first pachinko game machine, is equipped with a sub-CPU 301, a program ROM 302, a work RAM 303, a display control circuit 304, a sound control circuit 305, an LED control circuit 306, a gimmick control circuit 307 and a command input port 308, but differs in that it further comprises a button control circuit 310 and a performance button 54.
(Button Control Circuit 310)
The button control circuit 310 is a circuit for driving the effect button 54. In other words, the button control circuit 310 is a circuit for changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. The button control circuit 310 drives the effect button 54 in response to a drive command from the sub-CPU 301.

Further, the button control circuit 310 is also a circuit for inputting an operation signal related to the player's operation detected by the production button 54. When the button control circuit 310 receives an operation signal from the production button 54, it outputs predetermined operation information to the sub CPU 301.

[11-3. basic specifications]
Next, the basic specifications of the ninth pachinko gaming machine will be explained with reference to FIGS. 339 to 350. Note that the ninth pachinko game machine may be a pachinko game machine with a setting function, but the description regarding the setting function will be omitted below.

In the ninth pachinko gaming machine, although the probability variable control is not executed, a time-saving gaming state in which the time-saving control is executed and a normal gaming state in which the time-saving control is not executed are prepared, and the main CPU 201 is capable of progressing the game in the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. Note that in this ninth pachinko gaming machine, the probability variable control is not executed, but this is not essential, and for example, the probability variable control may be executed by setting the probability variable flag on depending on the type of jackpot, etc.

As described later, the ninth pachinko game machine has two time-saving game states, which are distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving transition conditions (time-saving occurrence conditions): an "A time-saving game state" which is entered after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by a jackpot, and a "B time-saving game state" which is entered after the variable display count of the special symbol reaches a ceiling value without being triggered by a jackpot. The "A time-saving game state" is also distinguished from the viewpoint of time-saving termination conditions and the operation mode during the time-saving game state (operation pattern of the normal power shutter 9147), which are the "first time-saving game state", the "second time-saving game state" which is easier to transition to the next jackpot game state than the first time-saving game state, and the "third time-saving game state" which is practically guaranteed to transition to the next jackpot game state. In addition, in this embodiment, when there is no distinction between the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state, they are simply referred to as "time-saving game states."

In addition, in this embodiment, in a typical normal game state (the first normal game state described below), left-handed hitting is generally considered to be the normal game mode, and in a time-saving game state, right-handed hitting is the normal game mode. The sub-CPU 301 displays the hitting method that is considered to be the normal game mode, for example, in the display area of the display device 7.

[11-3-1. Special symbol winning judgment table]
339 is an example of a special symbol winning determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol winning determination table shown in FIG. 339 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol hit determination table is a table for determining "big hit", "small hit", or "loss".

In the special symbol hit determination table, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "hit" or a "miss" and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (hit determination value data, miss determination value data) is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the first special symbol executed based on the ball entering the first starting hole 9120. In addition, the relationship between the range (width) of the random number value for determining a hit that is determined to be a "hit", a "minor hit" or a "miss" and the corresponding hit/miss determination value data (hit determination value data, minor hit determination value data, miss determination value data) is specified as the data used in the hit determination process of the second special symbol executed based on the ball entering the second starting hole 9140. In addition, the total random number value of the random number value for determining a hit is 65536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In other words, the random number value for determining a hit is generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535.

As shown in FIG. 339, when a game ball enters the first starting port 9120, the main CPU 201 performs a hit determination process for the first special symbol using a random number value for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol. The result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol is determined to be a "jackpot" at a selection rate of approximately 1/231.6, and otherwise determined to be a "loss." Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, the main CPU 201 selects the second special symbol based on the second special symbol's hit determination process using the second special symbol's jackpot determination random value. The result of the hit determination process is determined as a "big hit" with a selection rate of approximately 1/231.6, a "small hit" with a selection rate of approximately 1/1.004, and a "loss" in all other cases. do.

The range (width) of the random number value that determines whether a "big hit" or a "small hit", i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely modified as appropriate. In particular, the process of determining whether a "miss" is determined for the second special symbol may be configured so that a "miss" is not determined. In other words, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 9140, either a "big hit" or a "small hit" is determined.

Furthermore, when the first special symbol hit determination process is performed, a "small hit" may be determined. However, if a "small hit" is determined, the first It is possible to determine a "small hit" with a relatively low selection rate so that the determination performed in the hit determination process of the second special symbol is more advantageous than the determination performed in the hit determination process of the special symbol. preferable.

In addition, when the hit determination process for the first special symbol or the hit determination process for the second special symbol is performed, a "time-saving hit" that transitions directly to the time-saving game state (C time-saving game state) without transitioning to the jackpot game state may be determined.

Further, when the ninth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, for example, the selection rate of jackpot and/or small win may be set higher at a high setting than at a low setting. However, even if the ninth pachinko game machine is a pachinko game machine with a setting function, it is preferable that the selection rate per time saving be a common probability for all settings, for example.

Also, instead of or in addition to changing the jackpot selection rate or the small hit selection rate according to the setting value, for example, by changing the opening frequency or opening time of the V winning opening 9156 for each setting value, the V winning opening 9156 It is also possible to change the passing rate of the game, or change the time-saving end conditions (number of small winnings, etc.) for each set value. That is, among the conditions that can change the degree of advantage for the player, such as the jackpot probability, the small win probability, the opening frequency of the V winning opening 9156 (that is, the operating frequency of the second special electric shutter 9154), the opening time, and the time-saving termination condition. By employing one or more of these, it may be configured such that the expected value controlled in the jackpot gaming state is higher at the high setting than at the low setting.

[11-3-2. Special symbol determination table]
340 is an example of a special symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 340 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 provided in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The special symbol determination table is a table that determines the "special symbol selection symbol" and "symbol designation command" that determine the stop symbol of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

The "special symbol selection symbol" is information for determining the special symbol that will be stopped and displayed when the result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit, and the "symbol designation command" is This is a command sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in order to display a decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern of the special pattern in the display area of the display device 7.

The special symbol determination table specifies the type of special symbol, the winning/losing determination value data described above, and the symbol random number value of the special symbol obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 9120 or the second starting hole 9140 in association with the "special symbol selection symbol" and the "symbol designation command." The symbol random number value of the special symbol is selected, for example, from 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 340, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 0 to 9, The main CPU 201 determines "z1" as the special symbol selection symbol, and determines "zA1" as the symbol designation command. When the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 10 to 54, the main CPU 201 determines "z2" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA2" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 55 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z3" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA3" as the symbol designation command.

When jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the main CPU 201 selects "z4" as the special symbol selection symbol, regardless of the value of the symbol random number value of the special symbol. Then, "zA4" is determined as the symbol designation command.

When small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 0 to 9, the main CPU 201 selects " z5" is determined, and "zA5" is determined as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 10 to 19, the main CPU 201 determines "z6" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA6" as the symbol designation command. Further, when the symbol random number value of the special symbol is one of 20 to 99, the main CPU 201 determines "z7" as the selected symbol of the special symbol and "zA7" as the symbol designation command.

In this way, in this embodiment, when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process for the first special symbol, the special symbol is determined by the symbol random number value of the special symbol in the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. The selected symbols are configured so that the relational expression of selection rate of "z1"<"z2"="z3" holds true. In addition, the selection symbols of the special symbol determined when jackpot determination value data is obtained as a result of the hit determination process of the first special symbol are composed of only two types, "z1" and "z2", and "z1" It may be configured such that the selection rate relational expression ``<z2'' holds true.

Furthermore, if small hit determination value data is obtained as a result of the second special symbol hit determination process, the selected symbol is selected as the special symbol according to the symbol random value of the special symbol in the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. , "z5+z6"<"z7" is configured so that the relational expression of selection rate holds true. In addition, the selection rate relational expression of "z5" < "z6" < "z7" may be established as the selected special symbol.

Although the description is omitted in the ninth pachinko game machine, the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 contains a special symbol stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(A)) that is explained in the first pachinko game machine. A special symbol stop mode determination table is stored. The special symbol stop mode determination table determines the stop mode of the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164 (see FIG. 338) when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a table that is referred to when making a decision according to the selected symbol. In addition, the first special symbol display section 163 and the second special symbol display section 164 display the stop mode of a jackpot, the stop mode of a small hit, or the stop mode of a loss based on the result of the special symbol hit determination process. Ru. Further, a decorative pattern stop mode determination table corresponding to the decorative pattern stop mode determination table (see FIG. 12(B)) described in the first pachinko game machine is also stored in the program ROM 302 of the sub-control circuit 300.

Note that the range of the symbol random number value of the special symbol that determines the "selected symbol of the special symbol", that is, the selection rate, is not limited to the above value, and the design can be changed as appropriate.

[11-3-3. Jackpot type determination table]
FIG. 341 is an example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the ninth pachinko game machine. The jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 341 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The jackpot type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the jackpot gaming state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the jackpot gaming state."

As shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot type determination table associates the "opening mode of the jackpot game state" with the selected special symbol.

The "opening mode of the jackpot game state" specifies the maximum number of rounds of the first large prize opening 9131 that is opened during the jackpot game state, and the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 9131. The opening pattern of the first large prize opening 9131 specifies the OP waiting time (opening time) which is the waiting state for the start of the jackpot game state, the maximum opening time of each round, the closing time of each round, the ED waiting time (ending time), etc. Note that the opening pattern of the first large prize opening 9131 may specify a different maximum opening time for each round, or a different closing time (round interval time) for each round. Furthermore, the number of openings and the opening time may be specified so that the first large prize opening 6131 is opened and closed multiple times per round.

Here, the "opening mode of the big win game state" corresponding to the "selected special pattern z5-7" determined when the small win judgment value data of the second special pattern is obtained is the opening mode when the game ball that entered the second large winning opening 9151 opened in the small win game state passes through the second route of the V winning opening 9156 and transitions to the big win game state. When transitioning to the big win game state via this second route, the opening of the second large winning opening 9151 in the small win game state is regarded as the first round, and from the second round onwards, the big win game state in which the first large winning opening 9131 is opened is started. Note that if the game ball that entered the second large winning opening 9151 opened in the small win game state does not pass through the V winning opening 9156, the big win game state is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 341, according to the jackpot type determination table, when the jackpot determination value data for the first special symbol is obtained, the "special symbol selection symbols z1-3" are determined to have the first number of rounds (8 rounds) as the maximum number of rounds. Note that a different maximum number of rounds may be determined depending on the "special symbol selection symbols z1-3".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 341, according to the jackpot type determination table, when the special symbol selection symbols z5 to 7 are determined when the small hit judgment value data of the second special symbol is obtained, the special It is configured such that a third number of rounds (10 rounds) or a fourth number of rounds (4 rounds) smaller than the third number of rounds is determined as the maximum number of rounds depending on the selected symbol. . In particular, according to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. This means that the fourth number of rounds (4 rounds) is more easily determined than the third number of rounds (10 rounds).

In addition, when selecting "special symbols z5 to 7", a different number of rounds other than "10 rounds" or "4 rounds" may be determined, or the same maximum round may be determined for all. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, depending on the special symbol selected, either the OP waiting time (opening time) or the ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 9131 may be configured to be different.

[11-3-4. Small Win Type Determination Table]
342 is an example of a small win type determination table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The small win type determination table shown in FIG. 342 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The small win type determination table is a table that determines the operation content of the small win game state, and is a table that determines the "opening mode of the small win game state."

As shown in FIG. 342, in the small win type determination table, "opening mode of small win game state" is associated with the selected special symbol.

The "opening mode of the small winning game state" refers to the maximum number of openings of the second large winning hole 9151 that is opened during the small winning gaming state, the opening pattern of the second large winning hole 9151, and the opening pattern of the V winning hole 9156. stipulated. The opening pattern of the second big prize opening 9151 includes the OP waiting time (opening time), which is the waiting state for the start of the small winning game state, the maximum opening time of each number, the closing time of each number, and the ED waiting time (ending time). etc. are stipulated. Further, the opening pattern of the V winning hole 9156 includes an opening waiting time, an opening time, etc.

When the small win game state starts, the OP waiting time (opening time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 9151 and the opening waiting time in the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156 are timed simultaneously, and when the second large winning opening 9151 is open, the V winning opening 9156 is also open. Therefore, when the small win game state is performed, it is possible (or easy) for the game ball to pass through the V winning opening 9156. Note that the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156 may be specified as multiple opening and closing times so that the V winning opening 9156 is opened and closed multiple times, as in the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 9151.

The small win type determination table may be configured so that at least one of the OP waiting time (opening time), the maximum opening time for each number of times, the closing time for each number of times, and the ED waiting time (ending time) in the opening pattern of the second large winning port 9151, and the opening waiting time, opening time, and closing time in the opening pattern of the V winning port 9156 are different depending on the special pattern selected.

In particular, the opening pattern of the V winning hole 9156 is varied depending on the selected special symbol, and an advantageous operating mode that allows (or facilitates) passage of the game ball to the V winning hole 9156, and a The small hit type determination table may be configured such that a disadvantageous operating mode in which it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to pass is determined.

In addition, the maximum opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 28 seconds) is set shorter than the maximum opening time for one round in the jackpot gaming state (for example, 0.1 seconds), and In the case, the first big prize opening 9131 is opened by the advantageous "first opening mode", and in the small winning game state, the second big prize opening 9151 is opened by the "second opening mode" which is more disadvantageous than the first opening mode. It can be said that

[11-3-5. Game status related setting table]
FIG. 343 is an example of a gaming state related setting table stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the gaming state related setting table shown in FIG. 343 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The game state related setting table is a table for setting the game state after the big win game state ends.

As shown in FIG. 343, the gaming state-related setting table includes "status ``flag'', ``general power operation pattern'', and ``game state setting'' consisting of ``A time-saving termination condition'' are associated with each other.

The "state flag" is a flag that indicates the type of game state, and is stored in a specified memory area of the main RAM 203. A state flag of 0 indicates a "normal game state", a state flag of 1 indicates an "A time-shortened game state", and a state flag of 2 indicates a "B time-shortened game state". Note that in this embodiment, the C time-shortened game state is not executed, but if the C time-shortened game state is executable, a state flag of 3 indicates a "C time-shortened game state".

The "normal power operation pattern" is information that defines the opening pattern of the second starting port 9140, and is stored in a specified memory area of the main RAM 203. Normal power operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" described below is difficult to determine and the "short opening pattern" described below is likely to be determined, normal power operation pattern = 01 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" and the "short opening pattern" are determined, and normal power operation pattern = 02 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" is more likely to be determined and the "short opening pattern" is more difficult to determine than when normal power operation pattern = 01.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "normal power operation pattern" has a corresponding relationship with the "status flag (game state)", and is configured so that when the status flag indicating the normal game state is 0, the normal power operation pattern is set to 00, when the status flag indicating the A time-saving game state is 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 01 or 02, and when the status flag indicating the B time-saving game state is 2, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02.

The "A time-saving end condition" is the end condition for the A time-saving game state, and the "variable number of times normal symbols are displayed" is set as the end condition for the number of times the time-saving game state is to be played. When this end condition for the "variable number of times normal symbols are displayed" is met, the A time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state.

In this embodiment, the variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed is set as the A time-saving end condition, but in addition to the end condition of "the variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed," the "A time-saving end condition" may be set from multiple end conditions such as "the number of times a small jackpot is won" and "the variable number of times the special symbol is displayed," and when any of the end conditions is met, the A time-saving game state ends and the game transitions to the normal game state. This also applies to the B time-saving end condition described below.

When setting an end condition for the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" in addition to the end condition for the "variable number of times regular symbols are displayed" as the A time-saving end condition or the B time-saving end condition, it is preferable to set the end condition for the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" to a variable number of times that is less than the variable number of times that is set as the end condition for the "variable number of times regular symbols are displayed". For example, when the end condition for the "variable number of times regular symbols are displayed" is set to 50 times, it is preferable to set the end condition for the "variable number of times special symbols are displayed" to a total variable number of times that the first special symbols and the second special symbols are displayed = 10 times, or to set the end condition to be satisfied when either the variable number of times that the first special symbols are displayed = 5 times or the variable number of times that the second special symbols are displayed = 5 times.

According to the game state related setting table shown in FIG. 343, when the variable display number of normal symbols in the A time-saving end condition is set to 100 times, which is the "first time-saving number," depending on the selected symbol of the special symbol, the status flag is set to 1 and the normal power operation pattern is set to 01, and when the variable display number of normal symbols in the A time-saving end condition is set to 120 times, which is the "second time-saving number," or 10,000 times, which is the "third time-saving number," the status flag is set to 1 and the normal power operation pattern is set to 02.

In this embodiment, the time-saving game state in which the state flag = 1, the general power operation pattern = 01, and the first time-saving number of times (100 times) are set is referred to as a "first time-saving game state." In addition, the time-saving game state in which the status flag = 1, general power operation pattern = 02, and the second time-saving number of times (120 times) is set is set to the "second time-saving game state" which is easier to transition to the next jackpot game state than the first time-saving game state. "Time-saving game state." In addition, the "3rd time saving game state" in which the status flag = 1, general power operation pattern = 02, and the 3rd time saving number of times (10000 times) are set, is virtually guaranteed to be transferred to the next jackpot game state. "Time-saving game state."

In this embodiment, the number of times of time-saving (the number of times of variable display of normal symbols) of the A time-saving end condition in the first time-saving game state is configured to be set to 100 times as the first time-saving number, but the first time-saving number can be freely changed in design as needed. In addition, the number of times of variable display of normal symbols of the A time-saving end condition in the second time-saving game state is configured to be set to 120 times as the second time-saving number, but as long as the normal power operation pattern = 01 is set in the first time-saving game state and the normal power operation pattern = 02 is set in the second time-saving game state, the second time-saving number can be freely changed in design as needed as long as it is equal to or greater than the first time-saving number. Furthermore, the number of times of variable display of normal symbols of the A time-saving end condition in the third time-saving game state is configured to be set to 10,000 times as the third time-saving number, but the third time-saving number can be freely changed in design as needed as long as it is a number that practically guarantees a transition to the next big win game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is provided with the normal power operation pattern, but without the general power operation pattern, the first You may configure so that a time-saving game state, a 2nd time-saving game state, and a 3rd time-saving game state are comprised. In this case, the first number of time reductions (for example, 50 times)<the second number of time reductions (for example, 100 times)<the third number of time reductions (for example, 10,000 times) may be satisfied.

According to the gaming state related setting table shown in FIG. 343, after the jackpot gaming state by drawing the first special symbol ends, the "first time saving gaming state" or "second time saving gaming state" is selected depending on the selected symbol of the special symbol. After the jackpot game state due to the drawing of the second special symbol ends, the system shifts to the "second time saving gaming state" or "third time saving gaming state" depending on the selected special symbol. ”.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot game state due to the second special symbol lottery ends, the “second It is configured to shift to a "time-saving gaming state". Furthermore, after the jackpot gaming state due to the drawing of the second special symbol ends, the transition to the "third time saving gaming state" occurs at a relatively higher second rate than after the end of the jackpot gaming state due to the drawing of the first special symbol. is configured to do so. Furthermore, after the jackpot game state by drawing the second special symbol ends, the system is configured to shift to the "second time-saving game state" at a third rate that is relatively higher than the "third time-saving game state". There is. Note that the above-mentioned first ratio, second ratio, and third ratio do not exclude the meaning that the ratios to be compared are 0% and 100%.

In this embodiment, after the jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of the first special symbol ends, the game is configured to transition to the "first time-shortened game state" or the "second time-shortened game state". However, after the jackpot game state resulting from the drawing of the first special symbol ends, the game may be configured to transition to (a) only the "first time-shortened game state", (b) the "first time-shortened game state" or the "normal game state", (c) the "first time-shortened game state" or the "third time-shortened game state", (d) the "first time-shortened game state", "normal game state" or the "second time-shortened game state", (e) the "first time-shortened game state", "normal game state" or the "third time-shortened game state", (f) the "first time-shortened game state", "second time-shortened game state" or the "third time-shortened game state", (g) the "first time-shortened game state", "normal game state", "second time-shortened game state" or the "third time-shortened game state".

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot game state by drawing the second special symbol, the transition is made to the "second time-saving game state" or the "third time-saving game state," but (a ) "Second Time Saving Game State" only, (b) "Second Time Saving Game State" or "Normal Game State", (c) "Second Time Saving Game State" or "First Time Saving Game State", (d) " ``Second time-saving gaming state'', ``Normal gaming state'' or ``First time-saving gaming state'', (e) ``Second time-saving gaming state'', ``Normal gaming state'' or ``Third time-saving gaming state'', (f) `` (g) "Second Time Saving Game State", "Normal Game State", "First Time Saving Game State", or "Second Time Saving Game State", "First Time Saving Game State", or "Third Time Saving Game State"; It may be configured to shift to a ``3-hour saving gaming state''. However, even if it is possible to shift to various gaming states as described above, it is desirable to maintain the relationships among the first ratio, second ratio, and third ratio described above.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming state related setting table indicates the end of the jackpot gaming state depending on when the "gaming state at the time of winning is the normal gaming state" and when "the gaming state at the time of winning is the time-saving gaming state". Although the subsequent gaming states are configured to be set in the same way, the gaming states after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be configured to differ depending on the gaming state at the time of winning.

[11-3-6. Special symbol variation pattern table]
344 and 345 are examples of special symbol variation pattern tables of the ninth pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 344 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the normal gaming state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 345 is an example of a variation pattern table of special symbols in the time-saving gaming state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. be. The special symbol variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 344 and 345 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the ninth pachinko game machine.

The special symbol fluctuation pattern table is a table that determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the fluctuation display time of the special symbol. "Special symbol fluctuation pattern" is information that defines the fluctuation mode of the special symbol, and at least the fluctuation display time of the special symbol is defined.

The main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation pattern table shown in either FIG. 344 or FIG. 345 according to the gaming state, refers to the determined special symbol variation pattern table, and determines the type of special symbol and the hit of the special symbol. A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the result of the determination process and the selected symbol of the special symbol. Then, the main CPU 201 determines the special symbol variation display time based on the determined special symbol variation pattern.

Moreover, when the main CPU 201 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol, it transmits a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol to the sub CPU 301. The sub CPU 301 controls the display effect displayed in the display area of the display device 7 and the sound effect output from the speaker 32 based on the special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main CPU 201. In addition, the special symbol variation pattern command is a variation pattern of the first special symbol triggered by a game ball entering the first starting port 9120, or a gaming ball entering the second starting port 9140. When distinguishing between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation pattern command of the first special symbol or the second Also called special symbol variation pattern command.

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in normal game state)
The special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 344 is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined during normal game play.

Here, in the normal game state, since left-handed hitting is performed as a regular game mode, it is originally possible for the game ball to enter the first starting port 9120, and the game ball can enter the second starting port 9140. Although it is impossible (or difficult) for the ball to enter, immediately after the time-saving game state ends and the transition to the normal game state, the reserved number of second special symbols stored in the time-saving game state is used up. something will be done.

In this embodiment, when distinguishing between normal game states in detail, the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol, which is performed based on the start information of the first special symbol, is called the "first normal game state", and the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the start information of the second special symbol (the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol, which is performed when the variable display number of the normal symbol is the final time-saving number in the time-saving game state, the second start hole 9140 is opened based on the lottery of the normal symbol, and a game ball enters the second start hole 9140) is called the "second normal game state".

As shown in FIG. 344, according to the special symbol variation pattern table T1, in the first normal game state (first special symbol), the lottery result (win/lose) of the special symbol, the selected special symbol, the random number value for reach determination, the random number value for effect selection, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display time of the special symbol are associated with each other. Note that the random number value for reach determination is selected from, for example, 0-249 (250 types), and the random number value for effect selection is selected from, for example, 0-99 (100 types). However, the range of the generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

In addition, in the second normal game state (second special symbol), the lottery result (win or lose) of the special symbol, the selected special symbol, the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is met, the change pattern of the special symbol, and the change display time of the special symbol are associated with each other, and in the second normal game state (second special symbol), different change patterns of the special symbol and the change display time of the special symbol can be determined according to the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is met.

Here, the "start condition of the second special symbol" specifically means that, at least under the condition that the special electric device is not operating (not in a big win game state or a small win game state) and the variable display of the second special symbol is not being performed, the start information of the second special symbol is stored in either the special symbol determination memory area (0) or the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (2) of the main RAM 203.

And, "the number of second special symbols reserved when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied" is the second special symbol starting storage area (1) to the second special symbol starting storage area (2) of the main RAM 203. It refers to the pending number of second special symbols immediately before the start information of the second special symbols stored in is shifted to the special symbol determination storage area (0).

For example, when three game balls enter the second start hole 9140 in succession under conditions that are not a big win or small win game state and the variable display of the second special symbol is not being performed, the start information of the second special symbol based on the first game ball that entered the second start hole 9140 is stored in the special symbol determination memory area (0), and the start condition of the second special symbol is immediately established, so that the "number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is established" = 0. Also, the start information of the second special symbol based on the second game ball that entered the second start hole 9140 is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (1), and the start information of the second special symbol based on the third game ball that entered the second start hole 9140 is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (2). Then, when the start condition of the second special symbol is established for the start information of the second special symbol based on the second game ball, the start information of the second special symbol is stored up to the second special symbol start memory area (2), so the number of reserved second special symbols just before being shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0) is 2, and the "number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is established" = 2. Also, when the start condition of the second special symbol is established for the start information of the second special symbol based on the third game ball, the start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start memory area (1), so the number of reserved second special symbols just before being shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0) is 1, and the "number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is established" = 1.

In this embodiment, in the case of the second normal game state (second special symbol), when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, if the number of reserved second special symbols = 0 when the start condition for the second special symbol is met, a "first special symbol change pattern (0AH)" can be determined in which a "BONUS entry effect" that notifies the player of entry into the BONUS state described below is executed, and if the number of reserved second special symbols > 0 when the start condition for the second special symbol is met, a "second special symbol change pattern (1AH)" can be determined in which a "BONUS continuation effect" in which the BONUS effect executed in the big hit game state and the small hit game state continues is executed.

In addition, the "first variable display time (for example, 10 seconds)" associated with the first special symbol variation pattern (0AH) in which the BONUS rush effect is executed is the game ball fired from the firing device 6. It is set longer than the average arrival time (for example, 5 seconds, hereinafter also referred to as "ordinary electric average arrival time") until it reaches the ordinary electric accessories unit 9145 (second starting port 9140).
Furthermore, the above-mentioned "first variable display time (for example, 10 seconds)" is the average until the game ball launched from the launch device 6 reaches the second special electric accessory unit 9150 (second big prize opening 9151). It is set longer than the arrival time (for example, 6 seconds).

In addition, the "second fluctuation display time (for example, 1 second)" associated with the second special symbol fluctuation pattern (1AH) in which the BONUS continuous performance is executed is longer than the "average arrival time of ordinary electricity". It is set short.
Furthermore, the above-mentioned "second variable display time (for example, 1 second)" is set so that it appears that multiple jackpot game states or small win game states are continuing, so the variable display time of the special symbol is different from the jackpot game state. The time is set to be less than or equal to the OP waiting time (opening time, for example, 2 seconds) and the OP waiting time (opening time, for example, 2 seconds) of the small winning game state.

In this way, when the start condition for the second special pattern is met and the number of reserved second special patterns = 0, the variable display time of the second special pattern is set longer than the "normal power average arrival time", and when the start condition for the second special pattern is met and the number of reserved second special patterns > 0, the variable display time of the second special pattern is set shorter than the "normal power average arrival time". Therefore, depending on the number of reserved second special patterns when the start condition for the second special pattern is met, the ball entry rate at which the game balls launched from the launching device 6 enter the normal electric role unit 9145 (second starting hole 9140) can be varied, and balls according to the design value can be provided to the player.

In addition, when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied and the number of pending symbols of the second special symbol is > 0, by setting the variable display time of the second special symbol to be short, multiple times (maximum When three jackpot game states are executed consecutively, the variable display time of the second special symbol executed between the plurality of jackpot game states is shortened, and the plural jackpot game states are seamlessly executed (a group of (like a jackpot game state).

(Variation pattern table of special symbols in time-saving game mode)
The special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 345 is a special symbol variation pattern table that is determined during the time-saving game state.

As shown in FIG. 345, the special pattern change pattern table J1 associates the type of special pattern, the lottery result (win or lose) of the special pattern, the selected special pattern, the number of second special patterns reserved when the start condition of the second special pattern is met, the change pattern of the special pattern, and the change display time of the special pattern.

Here, in the time-saving game state, a right-handed hit is performed as a regular game mode, and it is essentially impossible (or difficult) for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 9120, but it is possible for a game ball to enter the first starting hole 9120 by a left-handed hit as an irregular game mode (that is disadvantageous to the player) in the time-saving game state. For this reason, the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 345 corresponds to the variation pattern of the special symbol that is determined when a left-handed hit is performed as an irregular game mode in the time-saving game state and the game ball enters the first starting hole 9120.

In the special pattern fluctuation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 345, when the type of special pattern is the second special pattern, similarly to the special pattern fluctuation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 344, the "first special pattern fluctuation pattern (0AH)" and the "second special pattern fluctuation pattern (1AH)" can be determined by referring to the number of reserved second special patterns when the start condition of the second special pattern is satisfied.

[11-3-7. Data related to pre-reading of special symbols]
FIG. 346 is an example of data related to pre-reading of special symbols in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Here, "pre-reading" means that when the game ball enters the first starting port 9120 or the second starting port 9140, the main control circuit 200 (main CPU 201) receives special symbol starting information (random value for jackpot determination, symbol This refers to analyzing the starting information of the acquired special symbol in advance of the special symbol lottery when a random value, random value for reach determination, random value for effect selection, etc.) is acquired. Then, the analyzed information (pre-read command) is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 (sub-CPU 301), and the "pre-read effect" can be executed based on the pre-read command.

FIG. 346(a) is a pre-reading execution correspondence table that defines whether or not to execute pre-reading according to the gaming state as pre-reading related data of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 346(a), in the normal gaming state, both pre-reading based on the starting information of the first special symbol and pre-reading based on the starting information of the second special symbol are executable. Further, in the time saving game state, jackpot game state, and small win game state, only the pre-reading based on the start information of the second special symbol can be executed.

Figure 346 (b) shows an example of the configuration of a look-ahead command based on the analyzed information that is the start information for a special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 346(b), the look-ahead command is composed of a "special symbol type" (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol) and multiple "parameters 1 to 3."

"Parameter 1" is win/loss information that is analyzed in advance to determine whether it is a jackpot, small hit, or loss based on the random number value for jackpot determination, and FIG. 346(c) is an example of the setting table for parameter 1. It is.

"Parameter 2" is symbol information that is obtained by analyzing in advance the special symbol (selected symbol) when it is stopped and displayed based on the random number value for jackpot determination and the symbol random number value. This is an example of a setting table.

"Parameter 3" is fluctuation information that analyzes the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols in advance based on the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for selecting a performance. Figure 346 (e) is an example of a setting table for parameter 3.

In this embodiment, the variable display of special symbols from the time when the starting information of the special symbol is read in advance to the time when the special symbol is drawn based on the starting information of the special symbol is also referred to as "pre-variation". . Further, the variable display of the special symbol when the special symbol is drawn based on the starting information of the special symbol is also referred to as "the variation".

[11-3-8. Normal symbol hit determination table]
FIG. 347 is an example of a hit determination table for normal symbols in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 347 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol hit determination table is a table referenced in the normal symbol hit determination process, and is a table referenced when determining by lottery whether a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss" is made based on the normal symbol hit determination random number value obtained when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation area 9126.

The normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 347 includes the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol win determination value data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”). They are defined in correspondence. Note that the random number value for determining the hit of the normal symbol is obtained, for example, in the range of 0 to 65535 (65536 types). However, the range of generated random numbers is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 347, and determines the normal symbol win/loss determination value data based on the range (width) of the random number value for normal symbol hit determination.

In this embodiment, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 347, and if the acquired random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol is between 0 and 956, "normal symbol hit" is determined. It is determined that the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol is determined as the "normal symbol winning judging value data". Therefore, in this embodiment, the "normal symbol hit" is determined at a selection rate of about 1/68.5. In addition, if the acquired random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol is between 957 and 65535, the main CPU 201 determines that the winning symbol is a "normal symbol loss", and converts the winning determination value data of the normal symbol into "normal symbol loss determination value data". decided on.

The range (width) of the random number value for determining whether a normal pattern is a hit or a miss, i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above values and can be freely designed and modified as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "per normal symbol" is set to be the same (the winning probability per normal symbol is the same) regardless of the gaming state of the normal gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. By varying the opening pattern of the second starting port 9140 depending on the gaming state (normal power operation pattern), the degree of profit given to the player is varied depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" is set to the same regardless of whether the game state is the normal game state or the time-saving game state, but the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different depending on the game state. When making the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" different depending on the game state, it is desirable to configure it so that the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the time-saving game state is higher than the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" in the normal game state. Furthermore, the selection rate of "normal symbol hit" may be made different depending on the type of game state, time-saving game state A and time-saving game state B.

[11-3-9. Normal symbol judgment table]
FIG. 348 is an example of a normal symbol determination table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 348 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol determination table determines the stopping symbol of the normal symbol based on the winning/losing judgment value data of the above-mentioned normal symbol and the symbol random value of the normal symbol obtained when the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation area 9126. This is a table that is referred to when selecting a determined "normal symbol selection symbol".

The normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 348 specifies the above-mentioned normal pattern winning/losing determination value data ("normal pattern winning determination value data" or "normal pattern losing determination value data"), the normal pattern random number value, and the selected normal pattern, in correspondence with each other. Note that the normal pattern random number value is obtained, for example, from 0 to 100 (101 types). However, the range of the generated random number value is not limited to the above.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 348 and determines the selected symbol for the normal symbol based on the normal symbol hit determination value data and the symbol random number value for the normal symbol.

According to the normal pattern determination table shown in FIG. 348, when normal pattern winning determination value data is obtained as a result of the normal pattern winning determination process, for example, the selected normal pattern is selected as follows.

For example, when normal symbol winning judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f1" as the selected normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 0 and 49, and selects "f2" as the selected normal symbol if the symbol random number value of the normal symbol is any value between 50 and 99. Also, when normal symbol losing judgment value data is obtained, the main CPU 201 selects "f3" as the selected normal symbol, regardless of the symbol random number value of the normal symbol.

The range (width) of the random number value of the normal pattern from which the "selected normal pattern" is selected, i.e., the selection rate, is not limited to the above value and can be freely designed and modified as appropriate.

In particular, in this embodiment, unlike the first pachinko gaming machine, the selected normal symbol is selected based on the winning/losing judgment value data for the normal symbol (the result of the winning/losing judgment process for the normal symbol) and the random number value for the normal symbol, regardless of the gaming state. Note that, like the first pachinko gaming machine, the selected normal symbol may be selected depending on the gaming state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main CPU 201 first refers to the normal symbol hit determination table (see FIG. 347) and uses the normal symbol win determination value data based on the acquired normal symbol hit determination random number value. is determined, and then, with reference to the normal symbol determination table (see FIG. 348), the selected symbol of the normal symbol is determined based on the symbol random number value of the normal symbol, but this is not restrictive. For example, based on the acquired random number value for hit determination of the normal symbol and the pattern random number value of the normal symbol, the winning/losing judgment value data of the normal symbol (win/loss of the normal symbol) and the selected symbol of the normal symbol are determined together. You can do it like this.

[11-3-10. Second starting port opening pattern determination table]
FIG. 349 is an example of an opening pattern determination table for the second starting port in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Note that the second starting port opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 349 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 included in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The opening pattern determination table for the second starting port determines the operation mode of the shutter 9147 for normal electricity according to the gaming state (normal electricity operation pattern) and the selected symbol of the normal pattern when it is determined that the normal symbol has been hit. It is referred to when determining the opening pattern of the second starting port 9140.

In the opening pattern determination table for the second starting port shown in FIG. 349, the gaming state (normal power operation pattern), the selection symbol of the normal symbol, and the opening pattern for the second starting port 9140 are defined in association with each other. ing.

The "second start port opening pattern" is composed of a "first opening time" when the second start port 9140 is in the first open state, a "first wait time" when the second start port 9140 is in the first closed state, a "second opening time" when the second start port 9140 is in the second open state, a "second wait time" when the second start port 9140 is in the second closed state, and an "ending time" that closes the second start port 9140 and ends the operation of the normal power shutter 9147.

The main CPU 201 refers to the second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 349 and determines the opening pattern of the second start hole 9140 based on the game state (normal power operation pattern) and the selected normal pattern. When the main CPU 201 determines the opening pattern of the second start hole 9140, it transmits to the sub-CPU 301 a second start hole opening pattern command corresponding to the determined opening pattern of the second start hole 9140.

In this embodiment, as the opening pattern of the second starting port, there is an unfavorable "short opening pattern (91H01H)" in which the opening time of the second starting port 9140 is short, and an advantageous "long opening pattern (91H01H)" in which the opening time of the second starting port 9140 is long. There are two types of open patterns: "Open pattern (91H02H)". Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port may include three or more types of opening patterns.

In particular, in this embodiment, the opening time of the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is set to an extremely short time (e.g., 0.072 seconds) during which, even if a game ball rolling on the upper plate 9147U of the normal power shutter 9147 falls toward the lower plate 9147D, the lower plate 9147D immediately protrudes, and the game ball that fell from the upper plate 9147U rolls on the lower plate 9147D (is caught by the lower plate 9147D). For this reason, even if a normal pattern is determined to be a hit, when the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is performed, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140, and it is essentially treated as a miss.

The opening time of the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is set to a long time (e.g., 5.4 seconds) so that even if a game ball rolling on the upper panel 9147U of the normal power shutter 9147 falls toward the lower panel 9147D, the lower panel 9147D does not protrude and the game ball passes through the lower panel 9147D, allowing it to enter the second starting hole 9140.

According to the second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 349, when the normal power operation pattern associated with the normal game state is 00, the "short opening pattern (91H01H)" is determined as the second start hole opening pattern even when the selected normal pattern is "f1" or when the selected normal pattern is "f2" (the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is not determined).

In addition, when the general power operation pattern associated with the first normal gaming state is 01, when the selected symbol of the normal symbol is "f1", the opening pattern of the second starting port is "short opening pattern". (91H01H)" is determined, and when the selected symbol of the normal symbol is "f2", the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is determined as the opening pattern of the second starting opening.

In addition, when the normal power operation pattern associated with the second normal game state and the third normal game state is 02, the "long opening pattern (91H02H)" is determined as the opening pattern for the second starting hole when the selected normal symbol is "f1" or when the selected normal symbol is "f2."

For this reason, normal power operation pattern = 00 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" is difficult to determine and the "short opening pattern" is likely to be determined, normal power operation pattern = 01 indicates a state in which both the "long opening pattern" and the "short opening pattern" are determined, and normal power operation pattern = 02 indicates a state in which the "long opening pattern" is more likely to be determined and the "short opening pattern" is more difficult to determine than when normal power operation pattern = 01.

In addition, in the right column of the second starting hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 349, the "long opening probability" at which the "long opening pattern" is executed is shown for reference, calculated by adding up the "random number value for determining whether a normal pattern is a hit (see FIG. 347)" and the "pattern random number value for a normal pattern (see FIG. 348)". In this embodiment, when the normal power operation pattern = 00, the normal pattern hit is about 1/68.5, but the long opening pattern is never determined, so the "long opening probability" is 0. In addition, when the normal power operation pattern = 01, the normal pattern hit is about 1/68.5, and the selection rate of the selected pattern "f2" of the normal pattern that determines the long opening pattern is 51/101, so the "long opening probability" is about 1/135.6. Also, when the normal power operation pattern is 01, the normal symbol hit rate is approximately 1/68.5, and the long opening pattern is determined for all selected normal symbols (101/101), so the "long opening probability" is approximately 1/68.5.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specified number for normal power is set to three, and even if the opening pattern of any of the second start ports is determined and the second start port 9140 is open, when three game balls enter the second start port 9140, the opening pattern of that second start port ends (the second start port 9140 closes). In other words, only three game balls can enter the second start port 9140 for one normal pattern hit, and even if there is 5,400 ms of remaining opening time in the time-saving game state, the second start port 9140 will close.

[11-3-11. Normal pattern variation table]
FIG. 350 is an example of a normal symbol variation pattern table in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 350 is stored in the main ROM 202 of the main control circuit 200 of the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern table is a table that determines the normal symbol fluctuation pattern and the normal symbol fluctuation display time. "Normal symbol fluctuation pattern" is information that defines the normal symbol fluctuation mode, and at least the normal symbol fluctuation display time is defined.

The main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table and determines the gaming state, the selected symbol of the normal symbol, the current opening pattern of the second starting opening, the previous opening pattern of the second starting opening, and the normal symbol. A variation pattern of normal symbols is determined based on the random number value for performance and the number of reserved normal symbols. Then, the main CPU 201 determines the fluctuation display time of the normal symbols based on the determined fluctuation pattern of the normal symbols. Moreover, when the main CPU 201 determines the normal symbol variation pattern, it transmits a normal symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation pattern to the sub CPU 301.

The normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 350 corresponds to the game state, the selected normal symbol, the current opening pattern of the second start hole, the previous opening pattern of the second start hole, the random number value for the normal symbol performance, the number of reserved normal symbols, the normal symbol variation pattern, and the normal symbol variation display time. Note that in this embodiment, the time-saving game state is the same for all of the A time-saving game state, the B time-saving game state, the first time-saving game state, the second time-saving game state, and the third time-saving game state without distinction.

According to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 350, in the normal gaming state, the performance related to the normal symbol is not executed, and the normal symbol is associated with a relatively longer variable display time than in the time-saving gaming state. The symbol variation pattern (01H or 02H) is configured to be determinable. However, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (01H) associated with the longest normal symbol fluctuation display time (for example, 30 seconds) that can be determined in the normal gaming state is the longest normal symbol that can be determined in the time-saving gaming state. This is a normal symbol variation pattern associated with a shorter normal symbol variable display time than the normal symbol variation pattern (16H) associated with a variable display time (for example, 60 seconds).

Also, according to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. When the opening pattern of the second starting port is the "long opening pattern (91H02H)", the normal symbol variation pattern ( 13H to 16H) are determined. In addition, even if the selected symbol (f1, f2) is a normal symbol that is determined at the time of a normal symbol, if the opening pattern of the second starting port this time is "short opening pattern (91H01H)", it will save time. It is configured such that a normal symbol variation pattern (11H, 12H) in which a losing performance is executed in a gaming state is determined.

And according to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 350, in the time-saving game state, when the selected normal symbol is the selected normal symbol (f1, f2) determined when the normal symbol hits, a normal symbol variation pattern (13H, 15H or 16H) associated with a relatively longer normal symbol variation display time (for example, 40 seconds, 60 seconds) can be determined when the opening pattern of the current second starting hole is a "long opening pattern (91H02H)" rather than a "short opening pattern (91H01H)."

In this way, in the time-saving game state, the variable display time of the normal pattern is relatively longer for the "long opening pattern" than for the "short opening pattern," so it is possible to implement a presentation that makes the player look forward to the "long opening pattern," thereby increasing the interest of the game in the time-saving game state.

Furthermore, according to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 350, in the time-saving gaming state, when the selected symbol of the normal symbol is the selected symbol (f1, f2) of the normal symbol determined when the normal symbol is hit, , when the previous opening pattern of the second starting port is "no opening" or "short opening pattern (91H01H)", the third variable display time (for example, 15 seconds, 12 seconds, 40 seconds) is configured to be able to be determined, and when the previous opening pattern of the second starting port is the "long opening pattern (91H02H)", the fluctuation pattern (13H to 15H) of the normal symbol associated with A normal symbol variation pattern (16H) associated with a fourth variation display time (for example, 60 seconds) longer than the third variation display time is configured to be determinable.

In this way, in the time-saving game mode, when "long opening patterns" are performed consecutively, a relatively long variable display time of the normal pattern is performed, so that by performing "long opening patterns" consecutively within a short period of time, it is possible to prevent more game balls than expected from entering the second starting hole 9140.

In addition, in this embodiment, the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, the first working time saving gaming state, the second working time saving gaming state, and the third working time saving gaming state are all set as a common time saving gaming state without distinguishing them. It may be configured such that different normal symbol fluctuation patterns are determined in the A time saving gaming state, the B working time saving gaming state, the first time saving gaming state, the second time saving gaming state and the third time saving gaming state.

[11-4. Main control processing]
In the ninth pachinko game machine, the various processes (various modules) executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 are the same as those executed by the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23), except for some of the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and system timer interrupt process. Therefore, the following will explain the special symbol control process, normal symbol control process, and system timer interrupt process, and will not explain the other processes executed by the main CPU 201.

Note that some of the processing performed in the special symbol control process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine is the same as the processing performed in the first pachinko gaming machine, but below, the same processing as that performed in the first pachinko gaming machine will be explained again with different step numbers.

[11-4-1. Special symbol control process]
Next, the special symbol control process performed in the main control process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 351. Fig. 351 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol control process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 351, the main CPU 201 first loads the control state number of the special symbol in S9001. The special symbol control state number is a number indicating the state (status) of control processing regarding the variable display of special symbols (special symbol game). After executing the process in S9001, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9002.

Although not shown, in executing the special symbol control process, the main CPU 201 performs an address setting process in which the address of the work area of the special symbol in the main RAM 203 is set in a predetermined register prior to the process of S9001.

In S9002, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol loaded in S9001 is 0, i.e., whether the special symbol is in a state of waiting for variable display. If the main CPU 201 determines that the control number of the special symbol is not 0, it transfers processing to S9008, and if it determines that the control number of the special symbol is 0, it transfers processing to S9003.

In S9003, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not start information for the second special pattern is stored in the second special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of second special patterns. If the main CPU 201 determines that start information for the second special pattern is not stored, it transfers processing to S9004, and if it determines that start information for the second special pattern is stored, it transfers processing to S9005.

In S9004, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not start information for the first special pattern is stored in the first special pattern start memory area of the main RAM 203, i.e., whether or not there is a reserved number of first special patterns. If the main CPU 201 determines that start information for the first special pattern is not stored, it transfers processing to S9007, and if it determines that start information for the first special pattern is stored, it transfers processing to S9006.

In S9005, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the second special symbol stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination storage area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the starting information stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determining storage area (0), and the starting information stored in the second special symbol starting storage area (2) is shifted. The starting information will be shifted to the second special symbol starting storage area (1). In addition, in this embodiment, the number of pending second special symbols before shifting the start information is temporarily stored in the main RAM 203 as "the number of pending second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied". to be memorized.

In S9006, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process to shift the start information of the first special symbol stored in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 203 to the special symbol determination storage area (0) of the main RAM 203. In this shift process, the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the special symbol determining storage area (0), and the starting information stored in the first special symbol starting storage area (2) to the first The starting information stored in the special symbol starting storage area (4) will be shifted to the first special symbol starting storage area (1) to the first special symbol starting storage area (3).

In S9007, the main CPU 201 stores special symbol startup information (the number of reserved first special symbols and second special symbols) in the first special symbol startup storage area and second special symbol startup storage area of the main RAM 203. If the demo display command has not been stored for a certain period of time or more, a transmission reservation process for the demo display command is performed. The demonstration display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. When the sub control circuit 300 receives the demonstration display command, the sub CPU 301 performs a demonstration display effect.

In S9008, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol management processing. Details of this special symbol management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 352. After executing the process of S9003, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol control process and returns the process to the main control main process (see FIGS. 20 to 23).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol control processing (S9001 to S9008) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the start information of the second special symbol is stored as the ninth pachinko gaming machine, the special symbol management process is executed with a higher priority than the first special symbol. Although the variable machine has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the starting information of the first special symbol is stored, it may be a priority variable machine in which special symbol management processing is executed with a higher priority than the second special symbol, or the first starting port 9120 or the second It is also possible to use a sequential variation machine in which special symbol management processing is executed in the winning order (ball entering order) to the starting hole 9140.

[11-4-2. Special design management process]
Next, a special symbol management process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol control process (see Fig. 351) will be described with reference to Fig. 352. Fig. 352 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol management process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The numerical values (“0” to “7”) written in parentheses to the right of each process shown in FIG. 352 are the control state numbers of the special symbols to be processed. The main CPU 201 advances the special symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number.

In S9011, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the special pattern (special pattern timer counter) is 0. This waiting time for the special pattern is set as the waiting time for various processes in the special pattern management process, and is decremented as the special pattern timer counter within the system timer interrupt process that is performed at 2 msec intervals, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is not 0, it ends the special pattern management process and returns the process to the special pattern control process (see FIG. 351), and if it determines that the waiting time for the special pattern is 0, it moves the process to S9012.

In S9012, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the special symbol. After executing the process of S9012, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9013. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S9013 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S9012.

In S9013, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display start processing. This process of S9013 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "0". Details of this special symbol variable display start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 353. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9014.

In S9014, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol variable display end processing. This S9014 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "1". Details of this special symbol variable display end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 354. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9015.

In S9015, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol game determination process. This S9015 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "2". Details of this special symbol game determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 356. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9016.

In S9016, the main CPU 201 performs small win game closure processing. This S9016 processing is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "3". Details of this small win game closure processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 358. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9017.

In S9017, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning game opening process. This process of S9017 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "4". The details of this small winning game opening process will be described later with reference to FIG. 359. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9018.

In S9018, the main CPU 201 performs a process for preparing to open the large prize opening. This process of S9018 is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "5". Details of this process for preparing to open the large prize opening will be described later with reference to FIG. 360. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "5", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9019.

In S9019, the main CPU 201 performs a large prize opening control process. This S9019 process is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "6". Details of this large prize opening control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 361. If the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9020.

In S9020, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot game state termination processing. This process of S9020 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the special symbol is "7". Details of this jackpot game state ending process will be described later with reference to FIG. 362.

After completing the processing of S9013 to S9020, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol management processing and returns the processing to the special symbol control processing (see FIG. 351). In this case, the special symbol management process returns to the called process.

[11-4-3. Special symbol variable display start process]
Next, a special symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) will be described with reference to Fig. 353. Fig. 353 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol variable display start process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9021, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "0". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "0", it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "0", it transfers the process to S9022.

In S9022, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol hit determination process to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss. In this special symbol hit determination process, the special symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 339 is referenced, and a hit determination of the special symbol is made based on the special symbol hit determination random number value as the starting information for the special symbol shifted to the special symbol determination memory area (0), and a hit/lose determination value data is determined according to the determination result. After executing the process of S9022, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9023.

In S9023, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol determination processing to determine the stopping symbol of the special symbol. In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. The selection symbol and symbol designation command of the special symbol are determined based on the symbol random number value of the special symbol as starting information of the special symbol. After executing the process in S9023, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9024.

In S9024, the main CPU 201 performs a winning type determination process. This process is a process for determining the type of hit when the determination result of the special symbol hit determination process is a hit (big hit or small hit). In this hit type determination process, if the special symbol hit determination process is a jackpot, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 341 is determined, and if the special symbol hit determination process is a small hit, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The small hit type determination table shown in is determined. Furthermore, in order to set the gaming state etc. based on the gaming state at the time of winning after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the gaming state data at the time of winning indicating the gaming state at the time of winning when it is determined to be a jackpot or small win is stored in the main RAM 203. Set in the game state storage area at the time of winning. After executing the process in S9024, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9025.

In S9025, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variation pattern determination process that determines a special symbol variation pattern. In this special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process, one of the special symbol fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIG. 344 and FIG. The variation pattern of the special symbol and the special symbol are based on the type, the result of the special symbol hit determination process, the selected symbol of the special symbol, the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, etc. The fluctuation pattern command is determined. Specifically, when the state is in the normal gaming state by referring to the status flag, a special symbol variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. and the result of the special symbol hit determination process (win or loss), the selected symbol of the special symbol, the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for performance selection. Based on this, a special symbol variation pattern and a special symbol variation pattern command are determined. Also, when the state flag is referred to and the time-saving gaming state is selected, the special symbol variation pattern table J1 shown in FIG. 345 is determined, and the special symbol variation pattern table J1 is referred to and The variation pattern of the special symbol and the variation of the special symbol based on the result of the hit judgment process (win or loss), the selected symbol of the special symbol, and the number of reserved second special symbols when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Determine the pattern command. After executing the process in S9025, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9026.

In S9026, the main CPU 201 performs a special symbol variable display time setting process that sets a special symbol variable display time. In this special symbol fluctuation display time setting process, the special symbol fluctuation pattern table determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process of S9025 is referred to, and the special symbol fluctuation is performed based on the determined special symbol fluctuation pattern. Determine display time. Thereafter, the main CPU 201 sets the variable display time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and displays the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. Let it start. After executing the process in S9026, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9027.

In S9027, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "1", the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 352) will be performed after the special symbol variable display start process is completed. Become. After executing the process in S9027, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9028.

In S9028, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, for example, confirmation and update processes of parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203 are performed. Then, a process of reserving transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state is performed. Note that the game state designation command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9028, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9029.

In S9029, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for the special symbol effect start command. In this process, the transmission reservation process for the "symbol designation command" and the "special symbol variation pattern command" is performed as the special symbol effect start command. In the pattern designation command transmission reservation process, the symbol designation command determined in S9023 is transmitted. In addition, in the special symbol variation pattern command transmission reservation process, the special symbol variation pattern command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined in S9025 is transmitted so that the type of special symbol can be identified. The special symbol effect start command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process.

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described special symbol variable display start process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[11-4-4. Special symbol variable display end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 354, a special symbol variable display end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) will be described. FIG. 354 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variable display termination processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9041, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "1." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "1," it ends the special symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "1," it transfers the process to S9042.

In S9042, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol symbol determination time setting processing that sets the symbol determination time of the special symbol. In this special symbol symbol confirmation time setting process, the special symbol symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 ms) is determined based on the gaming state and the result (win or loss) of the special symbol hit determination process. After that, the main CPU 201 sets the symbol confirmation time of the determined special symbol to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203, and displays the stop display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display section 163 or the second special symbol display section 164. let After executing the process in S9042, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9043.

Note that the symbol confirmation time of the special symbol may be determined based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, or may be determined based only on the gaming state. Furthermore, one predetermined symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 ms) may be determined.

In S9043, the main CPU 201 performs B time saving game state transition determination processing. In the ninth pachinko game machine, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished, the "ceiling counter" for counting the number of variable displays of the special symbols that shifts to the B time-saving gaming state is updated, and the ceiling counter reaches the ceiling value. When reaching the B time saving gaming state, control is performed to shift to the B time saving gaming state. Details of this B time-saving game state transition determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 355. After executing the process in S9043, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9044.

In S9044, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "2". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "2", the special symbol game determination process (see S9015 in FIG. 352) is performed after the special symbol variable display end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process in S9044, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9045.

In S9045, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a special symbol production stop command. The special symbol production stop command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process in S9045, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9046.

In S9046, the main CPU 201 adds 1 to the value of the determined symbol counter. As described above in the explanation of the first to third pachinko gaming machines, the determined symbol counter is a counter for counting the number of times a special symbol has been determined (the number of times a special symbol game has been played), but it may also manage the number of special symbol games played under specific conditions, such as the number of times a special symbol game has remained or the number of times a time-saving game has remained. After executing the process of S9046, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol variable display end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

[11-4-5. B time-saving gaming state transition determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 355, the B time saving game state transition determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 354) will be described. FIG. 355 is a flowchart showing an example of B time-saving game state transition determination processing in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In S9043-4, the main CPU 201 performs ceiling counter update processing to update the ceiling counter. In this ceiling counter updating process, the ceiling counter is updated by adding 1 to it. After executing the process in S9043-4, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9043-5.

In S9043-5, the main CPU 201 determines whether the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value (for example, 600 times). If the main CPU 201 determines that the ceiling counter is equal to the ceiling value, it transfers processing to S9043-6, and if it determines that the ceiling counter is not equal to the ceiling value, it transfers processing to S9043-9.

In S9043-6, the main CPU 201 clears the ceiling counter (sets it to 0). After executing the process of S9043-6, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9043-7.

In S9043-7, the main CPU 201 performs a B time-saving game state setting process to transition to the B time-saving game state. In this B time-saving game state setting process, the state flag indicating the B time-saving game state is set to 2, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the number of times that the normal symbols are variable displayed = 600 times is set in the time-saving count counter as the "B time-saving end condition". Note that in the B time-saving game state setting process, the normal power operation pattern may be set to 01, or any number of times such as 100 times, 120 times, or 10,000 times may be set as the "B time-saving end condition". After executing the process of S9043-7, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9043-8.

In S9043-8, the main CPU 201 executes a process for reserving the transmission of a time-saving transition command when starting the B time-saving gaming state. The time-saving transition command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9043-8, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9043-9.

In S9043-9, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process of S9043-9, the main CPU 201 ends the B time saving game state transition determination process and returns the process to the special symbol variable display end process (see FIG. 354).

[11-4-6. Special symbol game judgment processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 356, the special symbol game determination process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) will be described. FIG. 356 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game determination processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9051, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "2". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "2", it ends the special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "2", it transfers the process to S9052.

In S9052, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to a jackpot. If the main CPU 201 determines that a jackpot has been reached, it transfers processing to S9054, and if it determines that a jackpot has not been reached, it transfers processing to S9061.

In S9054, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot external signal processing. In this jackpot external signal processing, the selected symbol of the special symbol is referred to, and an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 during the jackpot game state is "the signal corresponding to the selected symbol of the special symbol". "Jackpot signal" is generated. Thereafter, the generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the process in S9054, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9055.

In S9055, the main CPU 201 performs a first route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this first route jackpot start preparation setting process, the maximum number of rounds is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot with reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 341 determined in S9024 above. The maximum number of rounds is set to the upper limit value of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, with reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 341 determined in S9024 above, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time ) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S9055, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9056.

In S9056, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S9056, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9057.

In S9057, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state management processing. In the game state management process when it is determined that the jackpot has been won, the main CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the state flag, the normal power operation pattern, and the time saving counter. After executing the process in S9057, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9058.

In S9058, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S9058, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9059.

In S9059, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the process of preparing to open the large prize opening (see S9018 in FIG. 352) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process is completed. After executing the process of S9059, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9059.

In S9060, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the jackpot start display command. After executing the process of S9060, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

In S9061, the main CPU 201 refers to the selected special symbol and determines whether or not it is a small win, i.e., whether or not the stopped special symbol is the selected special symbol corresponding to a small win. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is a small win, it transfers processing to S9063, and if it determines that it is not a small win (i.e., a miss), it transfers processing to S9071.

In S9063, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for a small win. In this external signal processing for a small win, the selected special symbol is referenced, and a "small win signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is generated as an external signal that is output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 during a small win gaming state. The generated small win signal is then output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the processing of S9063, the main CPU 201 moves the processing to S9064.

In S9064, the main CPU 201 performs a small win start preparation setting process. In this small win start preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 342 determined in S9024 above is referenced, the maximum number of openings is determined based on the "selected special symbol", and the determined maximum number of openings is set as the upper limit of the number of small win openings in the main RAM 203. Next, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 342 determined in S9024 above is referenced, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol", and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time for the special symbol in the main RAM 203.

Furthermore, in the small win start preparation setting process, the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 342 determined in S9024 above is referenced, and the opening waiting time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning hole 9156 based on the "selected special pattern", and the determined opening waiting time is set in the V winning hole closing timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the V operation flag is turned on. Note that the V winning control process for the V shutter solenoid 9160 that opens and closes the V winning hole 9156 is performed in the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 366) described later. After executing the process of S9064, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9066.

In S9065, the main CPU 201 performs a small win status display process. In this small win status display process, right hit instruction data is set to notify the player that a right hit is to be performed. After executing the process of S9065, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9067.

In S9067, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process for reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. After executing the process of S9067, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9068.

In S9068, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", the small win game closure process (see S9016 in FIG. 352) will be performed after the special symbol game determination process ends. After executing the process of S9068, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9069.

In S9069, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a small winning start display command. After executing the process of S9069, the main CPU 201 ends the current special symbol game determination process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

In S9071, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. This special symbol game end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 357. After performing the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game determination processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 352).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-mentioned special symbol game determination process (S9051 to S9071) within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[11-4-7. Special symbol game end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 357, the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 356) will be described. FIG. 357 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol game end processing in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In S9072, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "0", the current special symbol game ends and it becomes possible to execute the special symbol variable display start process, i.e., the next special symbol game. After executing the process of S9072, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9073.

In S9073, the main CPU 201 performs a game state designation parameter setting process. In this process, the main CPU 201 performs processes such as checking and updating parameters related to the game state stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. Then, it performs a process of reserving the transmission of a game state designation command indicating the current game state. In addition, in the game state designation parameter setting process in the special pattern game end process, the start information stored in the special pattern determination memory area (0) in the main RAM 203 is cleared. After executing the process of S9073, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9074.

In S9074, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process of a special symbol game end command. The special symbol game end command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S9074, the main CPU 201 ends the special symbol game end process and returns the process to the special symbol game determination process (see FIG. 356).

[11-4-8. Processing during small win game closure]
Next, referring to Fig. 358, a description will be given of a small win game closing process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see Fig. 352). Fig. 358 is a flow chart showing an example of a small win game closing process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9081, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "3". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "3", it ends the small win game closure process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "3", it transfers the process to S9082.

In S9082, the main CPU 201 loads the "small hit opening number counter value". “Small hit opening number counter” is a counter that counts the number of small winning openings. Note that the count value of the small hit opening number counter (small winning opening number counter value) is stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S9082, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9083.

In S9083, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded small win opening count counter value is the upper limit value for the number of small win openings. If the main CPU 201 determines that it is the upper limit value for the number of small win openings, it transfers processing to S9089, and if it determines that it is not the upper limit value for the number of small win openings, it transfers processing to S9084.

In S9084, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 9151 in the small win game state (the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 9151) is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the second large prize opening counter counted by the second large prize opening count switch 9152 is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the second large prize opening 9151 (e.g., 10 balls). If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 9151 is not the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers the process to S9085, and if it determines that the number of winning balls in the second large prize opening 9151 is the maximum number of winning balls, it transfers the process to S9089.

In S9085, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the small win opening count counter value. After executing the process in S9085, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9086.

In S9086, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening setting process to open the second large prize opening 9151. In this second large prize opening setting process, the small prize type determination table shown in FIG. 342 determined in S9024 is referenced, and the maximum opening time of the second large prize opening 9151 is determined based on the "selected special pattern" of the small prize and the current opening count (small prize opening count counter value), and the determined maximum opening time is set as the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, second large prize opening opening control data for opening the second large prize opening 9151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 9155. This causes the second large prize opening 9151 to open. After executing the process of S9086, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9087.

In S9087, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "4". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "4", the small winning game opening process (see Figure 359) will be performed after the small winning game closing process is completed. Become. After executing the process in S9087, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9088.

In S9088, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. The main CPU 201 performs a gaming state designation parameter setting process. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process of S9088, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game closing process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

In S9089, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not a V winning has been detected. In this process, it determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the V winning port 9156 within a specified time (i.e., whether or not there has been detection by the V winning port switch 9157). If the main CPU 201 determines that a V winning has been detected, it transfers the process to S9090, and if it determines that a V winning has not been detected, it transfers the process to S9098.

In S9090, the main CPU 201 performs external signal processing for the jackpot from the second route. In this process, the selected symbols of the special symbols are referred to and a ``jackpot signal corresponding to the selected symbols of the special symbols'' is generated as an external signal output to the hall computer 186 via the external terminal board 184 at the time of a jackpot. Thereafter, the generated "jackpot signal corresponding to the selected special symbol" is output to the external terminal board 184. After executing the process in S9090, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9101.

In S9091, the main CPU 201 performs a second route jackpot start preparation setting process. In this second route jackpot start preparation setting process, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 341 is referenced, the maximum number of rounds is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined maximum number of rounds is set as the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds in the main RAM 203. Furthermore, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 341 is referenced, the OP waiting time (opening time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot, and the determined OP waiting time (opening time) is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S9101, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9092.

In S9092, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. By performing this process, the jackpot game state from the second route starts from the second round of round play. After executing the process of S9092, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9093.

In S9093, the main CPU 201 performs a jackpot status display process. In this jackpot status display process, round display LED data corresponding to the maximum number of rounds determined as described above is set, and right hit instruction data that notifies the player to hit to the right is set. After executing the process of S9093, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9094.

In S9094, the main CPU 201 performs game status management processing. In the game status management processing when it is determined that a jackpot has been reached, the main CPU 201 performs processing to clear the status flag, the normal power operation pattern, and the time-saving count counter. After executing processing of S9094, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9095.

In S9095, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S9095, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9096.

In S9096, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "5". By performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", the big winning opening preparation process (FIG. 352) will be performed after the small winning game closed process is completed. After executing the process in S9096, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9097.

In S9097, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reserve the transmission of a V hit start display command. After executing the processing of S9097, the main CPU 201 ends the processing during the small hit game opening, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 352).

In S9098, the main CPU 201 performs a small winning end preparation setting process. In this small hit end preparation setting process, the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the small win with reference to the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 342 determined in S9024 above. Then, the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S9098, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9099.

In S9099, the main CPU 201 performs processing to reserve the transmission of a small win end display command. After executing processing in S9099, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9100.

In S9100, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this processing, the special symbol game end processing described with reference to FIG. 357 is performed. After executing the processing of S9100, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game closure processing, and returns the processing to the special symbol management processing (see FIG. 352).

[11-4-9. Small hit game opening process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 359, the small winning game opening process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) will be described. FIG. 359 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a small winning game opening process in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In S9101, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "4", it ends the small win game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "4", it transfers the process to S9102.

In S9102, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 9151 has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the second big prize opening opening setting process (see S9086 in FIG. 358) has elapsed. If the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second big prize opening 9151 has not elapsed, the main CPU 201 ends the small winning game opening process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352). Further, when the main CPU 201 determines that the maximum opening time of the second grand prize opening 9151 has elapsed, the process advances to S9103.

In S9103, the main CPU 201 performs a second big winning hole closing setting process to close the second big winning hole 9151. In this second big winning opening closing setting process, refer to the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. Based on the number of times counter value), the current closing time of the second big winning hole 9151 is determined, and the determined closing time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the second special winning hole closing control data for closing the second big winning hole 9151 is generated for the second special electric solenoid 9155. As a result, the second grand prize opening 9151 will be closed. After executing the process in S9103, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9104.

In S9104, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "3". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "3", after the small win game open process ends, the small win game closed process (see FIG. 358) is performed. After executing the process of S9104, the main CPU 201 ends the small win game open process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

[11-4-10. Big prize opening preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 360, the grand prize opening preparation process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) will be described. FIG. 360 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the grand prize opening preparation process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9111, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "5." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "5," it ends the large prize opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "5," it transfers the process to S9112.

In S9112, the main CPU 201 loads the "round counter value." The "round counter" is a counter that counts the number of rounds played in the jackpot game state. The count value of the round counter (round counter value) is stored in a specified area in the main RAM 203. After executing the process of S9112, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9113.

In S9113, the main CPU 201 determines whether the loaded round counter value is the upper limit of the number of jackpot rounds. If the main CPU 201 determines that the number of jackpot rounds is the upper limit, the process moves to S9114, and if it determines that the number of jackpot rounds is not the upper limit, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9118.

In S9114, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot end preparation setting processing. In this jackpot end preparation setting process, the ED waiting time (ending time) is determined based on the "selected special symbol" of the jackpot with reference to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 341 determined in S9024 or S9101 above. , the determined ED waiting time (ending time) is set to the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. After executing the process in S9114, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9115.

In S9115, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "7." In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "7," the jackpot game state end process (FIG. 352) is performed after the jackpot opening preparation process is completed. After executing S9115, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9116.

In S9116, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S9116, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9117.

In S9117, the main CPU 201 performs a process for reserving the transmission of a jackpot end display command. The jackpot end display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After processing S9117, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

In S9118, the main CPU 201 performs a process of adding 1 to the round counter value. After executing the process in S9118, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9119.

In S9119, the main CPU 201 performs a first big winning hole opening setting process to open the first big winning hole 9131. In this first jackpot opening setting process, refer to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. The maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 9131 in the round is determined, and the determined maximum opening time is set as the waiting time of the special symbol in the main RAM 203. Then, the first special winning hole opening control data for opening the first big winning hole 9131 is generated for the first special electric solenoid 9135. As a result, the first big prize opening 9131 will be opened. After executing the process in S9119, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9120.

In S9120, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the special symbol to "6". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "6", the large prize opening opening control process (see FIG. 352) will be performed after the large prize opening preparation process is completed. After executing the process of S9120, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9121.

In S9121, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S9121, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9122.

In S9122, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of the large prize opening display command. The big prize opening display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9122, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening preparation process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

[11-4-11. Big prize opening control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 361, the big winning opening control process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) will be described. FIG. 361 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening control process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9131, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "6". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "6", it ends the big winning opening control process, returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and controls the special symbol. If it is determined that the state number is "6", the process moves to S9132.

In S9132, the main CPU 201 determines whether the number of winning game balls that entered the first large prize opening 9131 in one round when the first large prize opening 9131 was opened is the maximum number of winning balls. In this process, it is determined whether the value of the first large prize opening counter counted by the first large prize opening count switch 9132 is the predetermined maximum number of winning balls for the first large prize opening 9131 (e.g., 10 balls).

If the main CPU 201 determines in S9132 that the number of winnings in the first big winning hole 9131 is not the maximum number of winnings, the process moves to S9133, and in S9132, the number of winnings in the first big winning hole 9131 is the maximum number of winnings. If it is determined that this is the case, the process moves to S9134.

In S9133, the main CPU 201 determines whether the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 9131 in one round has elapsed. In this process, it is determined whether or not the maximum opening time set in the opening setting process of the first big prize opening (see S9119 in FIG. 360) has elapsed.

If the main CPU 201 determines in S9133 that the maximum opening time of the first big winning hole 9131 has not elapsed, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning hole opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352). . In addition, when the main CPU 201 determines in S9133 that the maximum opening time of the first big prize opening 9131 has elapsed, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9134.

In S9134, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening closure setting process to close the first large prize opening 9131. In this first large prize opening closure setting process, the main CPU 201 refers to the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 341, and determines the closure time of the first large prize opening 9131 in this round based on the jackpot "selected special pattern" and the current round number (round counter value), and sets the determined closure time to the waiting time of the special pattern in the main RAM 203. Then, the main CPU 201 generates first large prize opening closure control data for the first special power solenoid 9135 to close the first large prize opening 9131. This closes the first large prize opening 9131. After executing the process of S9134, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9135.

In S9135, the main CPU 201 performs processing to set the control state number of the special symbol to "5". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the special symbol to "5", after the completion of this big winning hole opening control process, the big winning hole opening preparation process (see FIG. 360) is performed again. It happens. After executing the process in S9135, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9136.

In S9136, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S9136, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9137.

In S9137, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing for the inter-round display command. The inter-round display command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After the process of S9137, the main CPU 201 ends the big winning opening control process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352).

[11-4-12. Jackpot game state end processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 362, the jackpot game state end process executed by the main CPU 201 during the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352) will be described. FIG. 362 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game state termination process in the ninth pachinko game machine.

In S9141, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the special symbol is "7." If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the special symbol is not "7," it ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 352), and if it determines that the control state number of the special symbol is "7," it transfers the process to S9142.

In S9142, the main CPU 201 performs jackpot game information initialization processing. In this jackpot game information initialization process, processing is performed to set or reset various flag data used in the jackpot game state and the values of various counters (for example, a round counter, a jackpot prize counter, etc.). After executing the process in S9142, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9143.

In S9143, the main CPU 201 performs post-jackpot end state setting processing to set the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In this state setting process after the end of the jackpot, the gaming state related setting table shown in FIG. Set the variable number of times the normal symbol is displayed. After executing the process in S9143, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9144.

In this embodiment, if the selected special symbol is "z1", the status flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the variable display count of the normal symbol is set to 120 in the time-saving count counter. If the selected special symbol is "z2" or "z3", the status flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 01, and the variable display count of the normal symbol is set to 100 in the time-saving count counter. If the selected special symbol is "z4", "z6", or "z7", the status flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the variable display count of the normal symbol is set to 120 in the time-saving count counter. In addition, if the selected special symbol is "z5", the state flag indicating the A time-saving game state is set to 1, the normal power operation pattern is set to 02, and the variable display count of the normal symbol is set to 10,000 times in the time-saving count counter.

In S9144, the main CPU 201 performs special symbol game end processing. In this process, the special symbol game end process described with reference to FIG. 357 is performed. After executing the process of S9144, the main CPU 201 ends the jackpot game state end process and returns the process to the special symbol management process (see FIG. 187).

In addition, it is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt-prohibited section and performs the above-described jackpot game state termination process within the interrupt-prohibited section.

[11-4-13. Normal symbol control process]
Next, the normal symbol control process executed by the main CPU 201 in the main control main process (see Figs. 20 to 23) will be described with reference to Fig. 363. It goes without saying that, prior to the normal symbol control process shown in Fig. 363, the main CPU 201 stores the start information of the normal symbol and judges whether the judgment start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, as in the special symbol control process.

FIG. 363 is a flowchart showing an example of normal symbol control processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. In addition, the numerical values ("0" to "4") written in parentheses to the right of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 363 are the control state numbers of the normal symbols. The main CPU 201 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the control state number of the normal symbol.

In S9200, the main CPU 201 determines whether the waiting time for the normal symbol is 0 or not. The waiting time of this normal symbol is set as the waiting time of various processes of the normal symbol control process, and will be subtracted as a normal symbol timer counter in the system timer interrupt process performed at a cycle of 2 msec, for example. If the main CPU 201 determines that the waiting time for normal symbols is not 0, it ends the normal symbol control process, returns the process to S41 of the main control main process (see FIG. 21), and sets the waiting time for normal symbols to 0. If it is determined that this is the case, the process moves to S9201.

In S9201, the main CPU 201 loads the control state number of the normal symbol. After executing the process of S9201, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9210. The main CPU 201 performs the process of S9210 and subsequent steps based on the control state number read in the process of S9201.

In S9210, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol variable display start processing. This S9210 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "0". In this normal symbol variable display start processing, a win determination process for the normal symbol, a normal symbol determination process, a process for determining the opening pattern of the second start port, a process for determining the variation pattern of the normal symbol, etc. are performed, but details will be described later with reference to FIG. 364. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the processing to S9220.

In S9220, the main CPU 201 performs processing to end the variable display of normal symbols. This processing of S9220 is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "1". Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "1", the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9230.

In this normal symbol variable display end processing, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, and when it is determined that the variable display time of the normal symbol has ended, the main CPU 201 displays the predetermined normal symbol The symbol confirmation time (for example, 540 msec) is set as the waiting time of the normal symbol in the main RAM 203, and the control state number of the normal symbol is set to "2". In addition, when the variable display time of the normal symbol has not ended, the control state number of the normal symbol is held at "1" and it waits for the variable display time of the normal symbol to end.

In S9230, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol game play determination process. This S9230 process is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "2". If the control state number of the normal symbol is not "2", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9240.

In this normal symbol game judgment process, the main CPU 201 performs a judgment process of the selected symbol of the stopped normal symbol (for example, a normal symbol winning or a normal symbol losing). If the main CPU 201 judges that the selected symbol of the stopped normal symbol corresponds to a normal symbol winning, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "3", and if it judges that the result of the normal symbol winning judgment process corresponds to a losing, it sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0".

In S9240, the main CPU 201 performs normal electric accessory release processing. This process of S9240 is a process that is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "3". In addition, when the control state number of the normal symbol is not "3", the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9250.

In this normal electric device opening process, the main CPU 201 refers to the second start hole opening pattern determination table shown in FIG. 349, and operates the normal power shutter 9147 to open and close the second start hole 9140 according to the operation of the second start hole opening pattern determined in the second start hole opening pattern determination process of S9215 (FIG. 364) described later. Then, when a specified number of game balls for normal power (e.g., three balls) enter the second start hole 9140 or all the operations of the determined second start hole opening pattern are completed, the second start hole 9140 is closed, the control state number of the normal pattern is set to "4", and the normal electric device opening process is terminated.

In S9250, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit end processing. This S9250 processing is performed when the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". In this normal symbol hit end processing, the number of time-saving times is updated and a determination is made as to when the time-saving times have ended, but details will be described later with reference to FIG. 365. Note that if the control state number of the normal symbol is not "4", the main CPU 201 returns the processing to the main control main processing (see FIG. 20 to FIG. 23).

It is preferable that the main CPU 201 sets an interrupt prohibited section and performs the normal symbol control process (S9200 to S9250) described above within the interrupt prohibited section.

[11-4-14. Normal symbol variable display start process]
Next, details of the normal symbol variable display start process executed by the main CPU 201 in the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 363) will be described with reference to FIG. 364. FIG. 364 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol variable display start process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 364, the main CPU 201 first determines whether the control state number of the normal pattern is "0" (S9211).

If it is determined in S9211 that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "0", the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 363). On the other hand, if it is determined that the control state number of the normal symbol is "0", the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9212.

In S9212, the main CPU 201 performs a shift process of the start information of the normal pattern. In this process, the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (1) of the main RAM 203 is shifted to the normal pattern determination area (0), and the start information stored in the normal pattern start memory area (2) to the normal pattern start memory area (4) is shifted to the normal pattern start memory area (1) to the normal pattern start memory area (3). After executing the process of S9212, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9213.

In S9213, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol hit determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. Determine the data (“normal symbol hit” or “normal symbol loss”). After executing the process in S9213, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9214.

In S9214, the main CPU 201 performs a normal symbol determination process. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 348, and determines the "selected normal symbol" based on the winning/losing determination value data (the result of the normal symbol winning/losing determination process) and the normal symbol random number value stored in the normal symbol determination area (0). After executing S9214, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9215.

In S9215, the main CPU 201 performs a second starting port opening pattern determination process. After executing the process in S9215, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9216.

In the second starting port opening pattern determination process, the main CPU 201 first imports data of the second starting port opening pattern stored in the starting port opening pattern storage area (0) of the main RAM 203 into the starting port opening pattern storage area (0). Shift to 1). Note that the data of the opening pattern of the second starting port stored in the starting port opening pattern storage area (1) will be overwritten and erased by shifting the data of the opening pattern of the second starting port. As a result, the data of the opening pattern of the second starting port stored in this starting port opening pattern storage area (0) corresponds to "the opening pattern of the second starting port determined this time", and the data of the opening pattern of the second starting port stored in this starting port opening pattern storage area (0) corresponds to the "opening pattern of the second starting port determined this time", The data of the opening pattern of the second starting port stored in step 1) corresponds to the "previously determined opening pattern of the second starting port".

In addition, in the process of determining the opening pattern of the second starting opening, when it is determined that the normal symbol has been hit, the main CPU 201 shifts the data of the opening pattern of the second starting opening, and then selects the second opening pattern shown in FIG. 349. Referring to the opening pattern determination table of the starting opening, the opening pattern of the second starting opening is determined based on the gaming state (normal power operation pattern) and the selected symbol of the normal symbol, and the opening pattern of the second starting opening determined this time is The opening pattern is stored in the starting port opening pattern storage area (0) of the main RAM 203.

In S9216, the main CPU 201 performs normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. Based on the opening pattern of the starting opening, the previous opening pattern of the second starting opening stored in the starting opening opening pattern storage area (1), the random value for production of the normal symbol, and the number of reserved ordinary symbols, Determine the fluctuation pattern of normal symbols. Then, the main CPU 201 refers to the normal symbol variation pattern table shown in FIG. 350 and determines the normal symbol variation display time based on the determined normal symbol variation pattern. After executing the process in S9216, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9217.

In S9217, the main CPU 201 executes a process for setting the variable display time of the normal pattern. In this process, the variable display time of the normal pattern determined in the variable pattern determination process of the normal pattern (S9216) is set to the waiting time of the normal pattern in the main RAM 203, and the normal pattern display unit 161 is caused to start displaying the variable display of the normal pattern. After executing the process of S9217, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9218.

In S9218, the main CPU 201 performs a process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "1" and switching the control state number, after the end of this normal symbol variable display start process, the normal symbol variable display end process (FIG. 363) (see S9220) will be performed. After executing the process in S9218, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9219.

In S9219, the main CPU 201 performs transmission reservation processing of a normal symbol variation pattern command. Note that the normal symbol variation pattern command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 1300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9219, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol variable display start process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 363).

[11-4-15. End processing of normal pattern]
Next, with reference to Fig. 365, details of the normal symbol winning end process executed by the main CPU 201 in the normal symbol control process (see Fig. 363) will be described. Fig. 365 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol winning end process in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9251, the main CPU 201 determines whether the control state number of the normal symbol is "4". If the main CPU 201 determines that the control state number of the normal symbol is not "4", it ends the normal symbol win end process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 363), and if it determines that the control state number of the normal symbol is "4", it transfers the process to S9252.

In S9252, the main CPU 201 executes a time-saving count counter update process to update the time-saving count counter. In this time-saving count counter update process, if a time-saving game state is set (if state flag = 1 or 2 is set), the "time-saving count counter" in the main RAM 203 is updated by subtracting 1. This makes it possible to count the number of times the normal pattern is variable displayed as the number of time-saving plays. After executing the process of S9252, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9253.

In S9253, the main CPU 201 determines whether the time-saving counter is 0. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter is 0, the process proceeds to S9254. If the main CPU 201 determines that the time-saving counter is not 0, the process proceeds to S9255.

In S9254, the main CPU 201 clears the time-saving information and transitions from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. Here, the time-saving information is cleared by clearing (setting to 0) the status flag, normal power operation pattern, and time-saving count counter. After executing the process of S9254, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9255.

In S9255, the main CPU 201 performs gaming state designation parameter setting processing. In this process, parameters related to the gaming state stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 203 are checked and updated. Then, a transmission reservation process of a gaming state designation command indicating the current gaming state is performed. After executing the process in S9255, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9256.

In S9256, the main CPU 201 sets the control state number of the normal symbol to "0". In this way, by performing the process of setting the control state number of the normal symbol to "0", the normal symbol variable display start process (see S9210 in FIG. 363) is performed after the normal symbol per end process is completed. becomes. After executing the process of S9256, the main CPU 201 ends the normal symbol per end process and returns the process to the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 363).

In this embodiment, the normal symbol hit end process is configured to perform the time-saving counter update process and the time-saving end determination process as shown in S9252 to S9254 above, but it may also be configured to perform these processes in the normal symbol variable display end process (S9220 in FIG. 363).

[11-4-16. System timer interrupt processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 366, a system timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU 201 at an interrupt cycle of, for example, 2 msec will be described. FIG. 366 is a flowchart showing an example of system timer interrupt processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

In S9311, the main CPU 201 performs a process of saving the protected register. After executing the process of S9311, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9312.

In S9312, the main CPU 201 determines whether the XINT detection flag is off. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is not off (i.e., a power interruption has been detected), the process proceeds to S9344. If the main CPU 201 determines that the XINT detection flag is off (i.e., a power interruption has not been detected), the process proceeds to S9313.

In S9313, the main CPU 201 performs interrupt permission processing. After executing S9313, the main CPU 201 transfers processing to S9314.

In S9314, the main CPU 201 performs processing to read the state of the input port of the I/O port 205. After executing the process in S9314, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9315.

In S9315, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted. In this process, the main CPU 201 determines whether or not the game is permitted based on the game permission flag. The game permission flag indicates a game permission state when the game permission flag is on (=1), and indicates a game non-permission state when the game permission flag is off (=0). As explained for the first pachinko game machine, the game permission flag is turned off (=game not permitted state) as the startup state when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored and the RAM is cleared. The game permission flag is also set to ON (=game permission state) after the RAM is cleared after the power is restored and after the RAM is cleared. When the main CPU 201 determines that the game is allowed, the process moves to S9317, and when it determines that the game is not allowed, the process moves to S9344.

In S9317, the main CPU 201 executes a process of adding 1 to the value of the interrupt counter. The interrupt counter is a counter for counting (managing) the interrupt-disabled section during the main control main processing (see FIGS. 20 to 23), and the count value of the interrupt counter is based on the number of interrupts in the work area of the main RAM 203. Stored in the counter area. After executing the process in S9317, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9318.

In S9318, the main CPU 201 performs update processing of the interrupt cycle timer. In the update process of the interrupt cycle timer, various timer counters such as the special symbol timer counter, the normal symbol timer counter, the V winning opening closing timer counter, and the V winning opening opening timer counter in the work area of the main RAM 203 are subtracted. After executing the process in S9318, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9319.

In S9319, the main CPU 201 performs a random number update process. In this random number update process, various random number counters (for example, a random number counter for determining a jackpot of a random value for determining a jackpot, etc.) are updated. In this way, by performing the random number update process at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in this embodiment), it is possible to ensure the reliability of various random numbers, which are an important factor in determining the number of balls dispensed. After executing the process of S9319, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9320.

In S9320, the main CPU 201 performs switch input detection processing. Details of this switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 367. After executing the process in S9320, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9330.

In S9330, if the V operation flag is on, the main CPU 201 performs V winning control processing to open and close the V winning opening 9156. In this V winning control process, when the V activation flag is on and the opening waiting time has elapsed (V winning opening closing timer counter = 0), the small winning type determination table shown in FIG. Based on the selected symbol of the special symbol, the opening time is determined as the opening pattern of the V winning opening 9156, and the determined opening time is set in the V winning opening opening timer counter in the main RAM 203, and the opening time is set in the V shutter solenoid 9160. On the other hand, V winning a prize opening control data for opening the V winning a prize mouth 9156 is output. In addition, the V winning a prize opening control data is continuously output as long as the V winning a prize opening timer counter is not 0. Then, when the V operation flag is on and the V winning opening opening control data is output, if the opening time has elapsed (V winning opening opening timer counter = 0), the V winning opening opening control data Stop the output and turn off the V operation flag. After executing the process in S9330, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9340.

At S9340, the main CPU 201 performs a performance control command transmission process. In this process, the command that is scheduled for transmission is transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the sub-control circuit 300. After executing the process of S9340, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9341.

In S9341, the main CPU 201 performs a register save process. After executing S9341, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9342.

At S9342, the main CPU 201 performs a performance display monitor control process. In this process, game judgment process, prize ball addition judgment process, display content update process for the performance display monitor 170, etc. are performed. The data stored in this process is stored in an area separate from (outside) the working area in which data necessary for game progress is stored, that is, in an area that is backed up and where the data is not cleared even if, for example, the RAM is cleared. After executing the process of S9342, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9343.

In S9343, the main CPU 201 performs a process of restoring the registers that were saved in S9341. After executing the process of S9343, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9344.

In S9344, the main CPU 201 performs processing to restore the protection register saved in S9311, and ends the system timer interrupt processing.

[11-4-17. Switch input detection process]
Next, a switch input detection process executed by the main CPU 201 during the system timer interrupt process (see Fig. 366) will be described with reference to Fig. 367. Fig. 367 is a flow chart showing an example of the switch input detection process in the ninth pachinko game machine.

Compared to the first pachinko gaming machine, the ninth pachinko gaming machine has an additional configuration of a first big winning opening count switch 9132, a second big winning opening counting switch 9152, and a V winning opening switch 9157. Since then, some of these processes have been added.

In S9401, the main CPU 201 executes the first start port winning detection process. After executing the process of S9401, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9402.

In this first start port winning detection process, when the first start port switch 9121 detects the entry of a game ball into the first start port 9120, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the first start port 9120 and determines whether there is free space in any of the special symbol determination memory area (0) or the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4). If it is determined that there is free space in any of the special symbol determination memory area (0) or the first special symbol start memory area (1) to the first special symbol start memory area (4), it obtains various random number values (e.g., random number values for jackpot determination, pattern random number values, random number values for reach determination, random number values for performance selection, etc.) as start information for the first special symbol, and stores the various obtained random number values in a single memory area in FIFO (First In, First Out) format. Then, a process is performed to reserve the transmission of a winning command for the first special symbol, which indicates a winning entry into the first start port 9120 and the number of reserved first special symbols. The winning command for the first special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the first special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), the first start port winning detection process is terminated without acquiring various random number values.

In S9402, the main CPU 201 executes the second start port winning detection process. After executing the process of S9402, the main CPU 201 transfers the process to S9403.

In this second start port winning detection process, when the second start port switch 9141 detects the entry of a game ball into the second start port 9140, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the second start port 9140 and determines whether there is free space in any of the special symbol determination memory area (0), the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (2). If it is determined that there is free space in any of the special symbol determination memory area (0), the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (2), it obtains various random number values (for example, random number values for jackpot determination, pattern random number values, random number values for reach determination, random number values for performance selection, etc.) as start information for the second special symbol, and stores the various obtained random number values in a single memory area in FIFO format. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a winning command for the second special symbol indicating the winning of the second start port 9140 and the number of reserved second special symbols. The winning command for the second special symbol reserved for transmission in this process is sent to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the second special symbol start memory areas (1) to (4), the second start port winning detection process will end without acquiring various random number values.

In S9403, the main CPU 201 performs general winning opening passage detection processing. In the general winning hole passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of pieces to be paid out at the time of winning to the general winning hole 122 is set. After executing the process in S9403, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9404.

In S9404, the main CPU 201 performs a first large prize opening passage detection process. In the first large prize opening passage detection process, when the first large prize opening count switch 9132 detects the entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 9131, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the first large prize opening 9131 and adds 1 to the first large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 9131 to update it. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a first large prize opening entry command indicating an entry into the first large prize opening 9131. The first large prize opening entry command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9404, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9405.

In S9405, the main CPU 201 performs a second large prize opening passage detection process. In the second large prize opening passage detection process, when the second large prize opening count switch 9152 detects the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 9151, the main CPU 201 sets payout information corresponding to the second large prize opening 9151 and adds 1 to the second large prize opening counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 9151 to update it. Then, the main CPU 201 performs a transmission reservation process for a second large prize opening entry command indicating an entry into the second large prize opening 9151. The second large prize opening entry command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. After executing the process of S9405, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9406.

In S9406, the main CPU 201 performs a V prize opening passage detection process. In the V prize opening passage detection process, when the main CPU 201 detects the passage of a game ball into the V prize opening 9156 by the V prize opening switch 9157, it turns on the V prize opening passage flag. Then, it performs a transmission reservation process for a V passage command indicating that the game ball has passed through the V prize opening 9156. The V passage command reserved for transmission in this process is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the performance control command transmission process (FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process. Note that even if a game ball passes through the V prize opening 9156, no payout information is set. After executing the process of S9406, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9407.

In S9407, the main CPU 201 performs gate passage detection processing. After executing the process in S9407, the main CPU 201 moves the process to S9408.

In this gate passage detection process, when the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern activation area 9126 is detected by the normal pattern activation switch 9127, the main CPU 201 controls the normal pattern starting storage area (1) to the normal pattern starting storage area (4). ) is available. If it is determined that there is free space in the normal symbol starting memory area (1) to normal symbol starting memory area (4), various random values (for example, random numbers for determining whether a normal symbol hits, normal symbol symbol random numbers, etc.) and store the obtained various random numbers in a FIFO format in one normal symbol starting storage area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no free space in any of the normal symbol starting storage area (1) to normal symbol starting storage area (4), the gate passing detection process will be terminated without acquiring various random values. .

In S9408, the main CPU 201 performs a look-ahead command generation process. After executing the process of S9408, the main CPU 201 ends the current switch input detection process.

In this prefetch command generation process, the various random numerical values obtained in the first starting opening winning detection process or the second starting opening winning detection process are analyzed based on the gaming state with reference to the prefetching related data in FIG. 346. , generates a read-ahead command. In addition, as shown in the prefetch related data of FIG. Only the symbol prefetch command) can be generated. Then, a prefetch command transmission reservation process for transmitting the generated prefetch command to the sub control circuit 300 is performed. The prefetch command reserved for transmission in this process will be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 300 in the production control command transmission process (see FIG. 366) during the next system timer interrupt process.

[11-5. Sub-control circuit]
Next, the control contents of the sub-control circuit 300 that performs control based on various commands and the like transmitted from the main control circuit 200 will be described.

[11-5-1. Sub control circuit processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 368, the contents of various processes executed by sub CPU 301 of sub control circuit 300 will be described. FIG. 368 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-control circuit processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 368, the sub CPU 301 first performs initialization processing (S9500). In this initialization process, for example, initialization processes such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, etc. are performed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9510.

Note that the above-mentioned initialization process (S9500) is a process that is executed when the power is turned on or when the backup is cleared, and after the power is turned on, the processes of S9510 to S9580, which will be described later, are repeatedly executed.

In S9510, the sub-CPU 301 performs a data input process to input data. In this data input process, both the command input port 308 reading process and the effect button 54 input process are performed.

In the command input port 308 reading process, a command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 set in the command input port 308 is read.

In addition, in the input process of the effect button 54, operation information regarding the player's operation detected by the effect button 54 is input from the button control circuit 310. In addition, when the sub-CPU 301 inputs operation information from the button control circuit 310, it determines whether to validate the input operation information or discard it as invalid, and sets the acceptance time during which input of operation information is permitted, the validity time during which the input operation information is valid, and the invalidity period during which the input operation information is invalid, depending on the current situation such as the effect.

When the reading process of the command input port 308 and the input process of the effect button 54 are completed, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9520.

In S9520, the sub CPU 301 executes command analysis processing. In this process, the command read in the process of S9510 is analyzed. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9530.

In this command analysis process, if the read command is a winning command for the first special symbol, the sub CPU 301 sets the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the winning command for the first special symbol in the "sub side first special symbol reserved number counter" of the work RAM 303, and if the command is a winning command for the second special symbol, the sub CPU 301 sets the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the winning command for the second special symbol in the "sub side second special symbol reserved number counter" of the work RAM 303. Also, if the read command is a game state designation command, the sub CPU 301 sets game state information corresponding to the game state designation command in the "sub side game state area" of the work RAM 303.

In particular, in this embodiment, when the read command is a variable pattern command of the second special symbol, the sub CPU 301 first sets and holds (ON) the BONUS flag in the "BONUS status flag area" of the work RAM 303. do. Subsequently, in order to count the number of consecutive small win game states and jackpot game states in the BONUS state, which will be described later, 1 is added to the "continuous number counter" in the work RAM 303. In addition, the "BONUS flag" and the "consecutive number of times counter" are set when the last jackpot game state in the BONUS state ends (when the read command is the jackpot end display command, the sub-side second special symbol pending number counter = 0), the stored information is cleared (OFF or set to 0).

Furthermore, if the read command is the first large prize slot entry command or the second large prize slot entry command, the sub-CPU 301 adds the payout information (the number of paid-out game balls) corresponding to the first large prize slot entry command or the second large prize slot entry command to the "acquired game ball count counter" in the work RAM 303 so that the game balls are counted and displayed in the acquired game ball count image described below. The "acquired game ball count counter" is cleared when the sub-CPU 301 determines that the game status information in the "sub-side game status area" is the normal game status and the "sub-side second special symbol reserved number counter" is 0.

At S9530, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation mode determination process. In this process, for example, a presentation pattern is determined based on a command sent from the main CPU 201, and various requests for operating various presentation devices (for example, a drawing request, a sound request, a lamp request, a role request, a presentation button activation request, etc.) are generated based on the determined presentation pattern. Details of this presentation mode determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 369. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S9540.

At S9540, the sub-CPU 301 executes drawing control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transmits a drawing request to the display control circuit 304. The display control circuit 304 performs drawing control for displaying an image in the display area of the display device 7 based on the message (drawing request) transmitted from the sub-CPU 301. Upon completing this processing, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the processing to S9550.

In S9550, sub CPU 301 executes audio control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits a sound request to the audio control circuit 305. The audio control circuit 305 performs audio control to cause the speaker 32 to output audio based on a message (sound request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9560.

In S9560, sub CPU 301 executes LED control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 301 transmits an LED request to the LED control circuit 306. The LED control circuit 306 performs light emission control to turn on or blink all or some of the LEDs constituting the LED group 46 based on a message (LED request) transmitted from the sub CPU 301. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9570.

At S9570, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel control process. In this process, the sub-CPU 301 sends a reel request to the reel control circuit 307. Based on the message (reel request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the reel control circuit 307 performs drive control to operate the performance drive motors (not shown) for all or some of the reels that make up the performance reel group 58. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 moves the process to S9580.

At S9580, the sub-CPU 301 executes effect button control processing. In this processing, the sub-CPU 301 sends an effect button drive request to the button control circuit 310. Based on the message (effect button drive request) sent from the sub-CPU 301, the button control circuit 310 performs drive control such as changing the operation mode of the effect button 54 and vibrating the effect button 54. When this processing ends, the sub-CPU 301 ends the sub-control circuit processing.

[11-5-2. Performance mode determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 369, details of the performance mode determination process executed by the sub CPU 301 in the sub control circuit process (see FIG. 368) will be described. FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing an example of performance mode determination processing in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

At S9531, the sub-CPU 301 executes a presentation pattern determination process to determine a presentation pattern. In this presentation pattern determination process, a presentation pattern is determined based on the type of command received from the main CPU 201, the presentation pattern defining the display presentation of the characters and the like displayed on the display device 7, the sound presentation output from the speaker 32, the operation of the presentation button 54, and the like. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9532.

Here, the "production pattern" refers to information that defines the display production of characters, voice production, operation mode of the production button 54, etc., as described above, but the "design production pattern" refers to the production pattern Among them, during the variable display of special symbols or normal symbols, at least a predetermined decorative pattern is variably displayed in a predetermined variable manner (variable display and stop display) on the display device 7, and depending on the stop mode of the decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed. , refers to the information on the "variable performance" that notifies the predetermined lottery results. In addition, the predetermined decorative patterns include a "first decorative pattern (main pattern)" that is displayed in a large size that is easy for the player to recognize, and a "second decorative pattern (secondary pattern)" that is displayed in a small size that is difficult for the player to recognize. There are 2 types: ``Design)''. Note that, depending on the type of symbol production pattern, information for displaying a predetermined character in addition to variable display of a predetermined decorative pattern may also be included.

In addition, the "small hit performance pattern" refers to the information on the performance performed during the small win gaming state among the performance patterns, and the "jackpot performance pattern" refers to the information on the performance performed during the jackpot gaming state among the performance patterns. Refers to information about the performance that will be performed. In addition, various performance patterns etc. are provided in addition to the symbol performance pattern, the small hit performance pattern, and the jackpot performance pattern, and the performances of various performance patterns can be executed in a superimposed manner.

(An example of a process for determining a performance pattern when a command for changing a first special symbol is received)
In this embodiment, in the presentation pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a variation pattern command for the first special symbol, in the normal game state, a "first symbol presentation pattern" is determined in which the first decorative symbol (main symbol) and the second decorative symbol (sub-symbol) are variably displayed so that the presentation contents shown in the "remarks" column of the special symbol variation pattern table T1 in Fig. 344 are executed. Also, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a variation pattern command for the first special symbol, in the time-saving game state, a "second symbol presentation pattern" is determined in which the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is not displayed and the second decorative symbol (sub-symbol) is variably displayed so that the presentation contents shown in the "remarks" column of the special symbol variation pattern table J1 in Fig. 345 are executed.

In this way, when in the time-saving gaming state, as a variable effect regarding the lottery result of the first special symbol, the second decorative symbol (sub-design) is variably displayed without displaying the first decorative symbol (main symbol). Since the "second symbol presentation pattern" is determined, the presentation using the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is not performed, and the variable presentation regarding the lottery result of the first special symbol is changed to the sixth symbol presentation pattern described later. It is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance regarding the lottery results of the normal symbols from being inhibited.

(Example of performance pattern determination process when receiving the second special symbol fluctuation pattern command)
In addition, in the performance pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a second special symbol variation pattern command, when it corresponds to the "first special symbol variation pattern (0AH)", the command shown in FIG. , a BONUS entry effect that notifies entry into the BONUS state, which will be described later, is executed, and a "second decorative pattern" is executed that variably displays a second decorative pattern (secondary pattern) without displaying the first decorative pattern (main pattern). 3.Determine the 3rd symbol production pattern. In addition, when corresponding to the "second special symbol variation pattern (1AH)", as shown in FIG. 344, the BONUS continuous effect is executed, and the first decorative symbol (main symbol) is A "fourth symbol presentation pattern" for variably displaying the second decorative symbol (secondary symbol) is determined. In addition, in this embodiment, in an extremely rare case (1/65536), when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a special symbol variation pattern (00H) corresponding to a loss, the first decorative symbol (main symbol ) is not displayed, and a ``fifth pattern presentation pattern'' is determined in which a second decorative pattern (sub-pattern) is variably displayed.

In this way, the third symbol performance pattern (BONUS entry performance) or the fourth symbol performance pattern (BONUS continuous performance) is determined as a variable performance when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot or small hit, As shown in FIG. 372, which will be described later, performances related to the "small win performance pattern" and the "jackpot performance pattern" are executed, so the fluctuation performance regarding the lottery result of the second special symbol and the winning performed in the small win game state are performed. The performance and the winning performance performed in the jackpot game state can be made to look like a series of winning performances (BONUS performance), and the interest of the game can be further improved.

(An example of a process for determining a performance pattern when a normal symbol variation pattern command is received)
Also, in the presentation pattern determination process, if the command received from the main CPU 201 is a normal pattern variation pattern command, in the normal game state, the presentation pattern is not determined so that a presentation related to the normal pattern (first decorative pattern presentation) is not executed, but in the time-saving game state, a "sixth pattern presentation pattern" is determined that variably displays the first decorative pattern (main pattern) so that the presentation content shown in the "Remarks column" of the normal pattern variation pattern table in Figure 350 is executed based on the received normal pattern variation pattern command.

In this way, when in the normal game state, the variable performance regarding the normal symbols is not executed, but when in the time-saving gaming state, the sixth symbol performance pattern is determined as the variable performance regarding the lottery result of the normal symbols. A performance will be performed using the decorative pattern (main pattern).

Furthermore, when in the time-saving play state, the third or fourth pattern presentation pattern is determined as the variable presentation when the lottery result for the second special symbol is a big win or a small win, so that both the variable presentation related to the normal symbol and the variable presentation related to the lottery result for the second special symbol can be executed, further increasing the interest of the game in the time-saving play state.

(An example of the presentation pattern determination process when a small win start display command is received)
In addition, in the presentation pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a small win start display command, the "continuous number counter" in the work RAM 303 is referenced, and a "small win presentation pattern" in which the first BONUS presentation is executed is determined. In particular, in this embodiment, when the "continuous number counter" = 1 (when the first small win game state is entered from the BONUS state), a "first small win presentation pattern" in which the "first BONUS presentation (first time)" is executed as shown in FIG. 372 (b) described later is determined, and when the "continuous number counter" = 2 or more (when the second or subsequent small win game state is entered from the BONUS state), a "second small win presentation pattern" in which the "first BONUS presentation (second or subsequent time)" is executed as shown in FIG. 372 (f) described later is determined.

Further, as described above, in the small winning gaming state, when the passing of the game ball to the V winning hole 9156 is detected, the main CPU 201 sends a V passing command to the sub control circuit 300. In the performance pattern determination process, if the command received from the main CPU 201 is a V passing command, the sub CPU 301 determines a "V passing notification performance pattern" in which the V passing notification performance is executed. In addition, in this performance pattern determination process, if the command received from the main CPU 201 is a V passing command, the "continuous number counter" of the work RAM 303 is referred to, and when the "continuous number counter" = 1 (from the BONUS state In the first small winning game state), the "V passing notification performance pattern" is determined, and when the "continuous number counter" = 2 or more (in the second and subsequent small winning gaming state from the BONUS state), the "V passing notification performance pattern" is determined. , it is desirable not to determine the "V passing notification effect pattern".

(An example of a process for determining a presentation pattern when a jackpot start display command is received)
In addition, in the presentation pattern determination process, when the command received from the main CPU 201 is a jackpot start display command, the "consecutive number counter" in the work RAM 303 is referenced, and a "jackpot presentation pattern" in which the second BONUS presentation is executed is determined. In particular, in this embodiment, when the "consecutive number counter" = 1 (when the first jackpot game state is entered from the BONUS state), a "first jackpot presentation pattern" in which the "second BONUS presentation (start)" and "second BONUS presentation (opening)" are executed as shown in Figs. 372(c) and (d) described later is determined, and when the "consecutive number counter" = 2 or more (when the second or subsequent jackpot game state is entered from the BONUS state), a "second jackpot presentation pattern" in which the "second BONUS presentation (opening)" is executed as shown in Fig. 372(d) described later is determined.

In S9532, the sub CPU 301 executes animation request generation processing. In this process, an animation request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S9531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9533.

In S9533, the sub CPU 301 executes drawing request generation processing. In this process, a drawing request is generated based on the animation request generated in S9532. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9534.

At S9534, the sub-CPU 301 executes a sound request generation process. In this process, a sound request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S9531 above. Upon completing this process, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9535.

In S9535, the sub CPU 301 executes lamp request generation processing. In this process, a lamp request is generated based on the effect pattern determined in S9531 above. After completing this process, the sub CPU 301 moves the process to S9536.

At S9536, the sub-CPU 301 executes a reel request generation process. In this process, a reel request is generated based on the performance pattern determined at S9531 above. When this process ends, the sub-CPU 301 transfers the process to S9537.

In S9537, the sub CPU 301 executes production button drive request generation processing. In this process, a production button drive request is generated based on the production pattern determined in S9531 above. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 301 ends the production mode determination process and shifts the process to the drawing control process (see FIG. 368).

[11-6. Game state transition diagram]
The gaming states transferred through the various processes executed by the main CPU 201 of the main control circuit 200 as described above will be explained using a gaming state transition diagram. FIG. 370 is an example of a game state transition diagram showing the transition of the game state in the ninth pachinko gaming machine.

The ninth pachinko gaming machine has a normal gaming state in which the gaming nature is mainly related to the lottery of the first special symbol, and a time-saving gaming state which is mainly the gaming nature related to the lottery of the normal symbol as the gaming state. .

When distinguishing the normal gaming states in detail, the normal gaming state during the control period of the first special symbol performed based on the starting information of the first special symbol is referred to as the "first normal gaming state", and the second special symbol The normal gaming state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the starting information is referred to as the "second normal gaming state".

As described above, the "first normal game state" is the normal game state during the control period of the first special symbol that is performed based on the start information of the first special symbol, and is a normal game state in which hitting from the left is the normal game mode. Therefore, in the first normal game state, it is easy for a game ball to enter the first start hole 9120, but it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second start hole 9140.

The "second normal gaming state" is a normal gaming state during the control period of the second special symbol that is performed based on the start information of the second special symbol, and the number of variable display times of the normal symbol in the time-saving gaming state is the final one. When the number of times is shortened, the second starting port 9140 is opened based on the drawing of the normal symbol, and the normal game state during the control period of the second special symbol is performed when a game ball enters the second starting port 9140. It is. Here, in the second normal game state, left-handed play is prescribed as a regular game mode, but when the variable display of the second special symbol starts, the pull back is shifted to the time-saving game state again. Since the percentage is extremely high, right-handed playing may be specified as a regular game mode. In this way, since the second normal game state may specify left-handed play or right-handed play, in the second normal game state, the display device 7 displays information as a normal game mode. It is desirable to have the display device 7 notify left-handed hitting as a normal gaming mode when the second normal gaming state shifts to the first normal gaming state without causing the second normal gaming state to occur.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the start information of the second special symbol is also referred to as the "BONUS state", and the "BONUS state" is 2 normal gaming state, a time-saving gaming state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the start information of the second special symbol, a jackpot gaming state, and a small winning gaming state. .

As described above, the time-saving game state is distinguished from the viewpoint of the time-saving transition condition (time-saving occurrence condition), and includes the "A time-saving game state" which is transitioned to after the end of the jackpot game state triggered by a jackpot, and the "B time-saving game state" which is transitioned to after the variable display count of the special pattern reaches the ceiling value without being triggered by a jackpot. In addition, the "A time-saving game state" is distinguished from the viewpoint of the time-saving end condition and the operation mode during the time-saving game state (operation pattern of the normal power shutter 9147), and includes the "first time-saving game state", the "second time-saving game state" which is easier to transition to the next jackpot game state than the first time-saving game state, and the "third time-saving game state" which is practically guaranteed to transition to the next jackpot game state.

The "first time-saving game state" is a time-saving game state in which the state flag = 1 and the normal power operation pattern = 01 are set, and the first time-saving number (the number of times that the normal pattern is displayed = 100) is set as the time-saving number of times for the A time-saving end condition, and the time-saving game state in which right-hand hitting is the normal game mode. In the first time-saving game state, the normal power operation pattern = 01 is set, and the first long opening probability in which the long opening pattern is executed based on the normal pattern hit judgment process, normal pattern determination process, and second start hole opening pattern determination process (hereinafter referred to as "normal pattern lottery, etc.") shown in FIG. 364 is set to about 1/135.6 (see FIG. 349). As described above, even if the short opening pattern is executed, it is impossible (or difficult) for the game ball to enter the second start hole 9140, and even if it is determined that the normal pattern is a hit, it is configured to be treated as a loss.

The "second time-saving game state" is a time-saving game state in which the state flag = 1 and the normal power operation pattern = 02 are set, and the second time-saving number (the number of times that the normal symbol is displayed = 120) is set as the time-saving number of times for the A time-saving end condition, and the right hit is the normal game mode. In the second time-saving game state, the normal power operation pattern = 02 is set, and the second long opening probability based on the lottery of the normal symbol is set to about 1/68.5. In addition, the second time-saving game state is set to a second long opening probability higher than the first long opening probability of the first time-saving game state, and the second time-saving number is set to a number higher than the first time-saving number of the first time-saving game state, so that it is a time-saving game state that is easier to transition to the next big win game state than the first time-saving game state.

In the "third time saving game state", the state flag = 1 and the normal power operation pattern = 02 are set, and the third time saving number (the variable display number of normal symbols = 10,000 times) is set as the number of time saving times in the A time saving end condition. This is a set time-saving gaming state in which right-handed playing is a regular gaming mode. In the third time-saving game state, the normal power operation pattern=02 is set, so that the second long opening probability based on the normal symbol lottery etc. is set to about 1/68.5. In the third time saving game state, the third time saving number (variable display number of normal symbols = 10000 times) is set as the number of time saving times, which practically guarantees the transition to the next jackpot game state. This is a time-saving gaming state in which transition to a jackpot gaming state is virtually guaranteed.

In the "B time saving game state", the state flag = 2 and the normal power operation pattern = 02 are set, and the fourth time saving number (the variable display number of normal symbols = 600 times) is set as the number of time saving times in the B time saving end condition. This is a time-saving gaming state in which right-handed playing is the regular gaming mode. In the B time-saving game state, the normal power operation pattern=02 is set, so that the second long opening probability based on the normal symbol lottery etc. is set to about 1/68.5.

(First normal gaming state transition control)
As shown in FIG. 370, in the first normal game state, when a game ball enters the first starting port 9120, a "jackpot" or "loss" is determined based on the starting information of the first special symbol (see FIG. 339), when a "jackpot" is determined, the state shifts to a jackpot game state. Then, after the jackpot game state triggered by the start information of the first special symbol in the first normal game state ends, the "first time-saving game state" is entered with a selection rate of 90% according to the selected symbol of the special symbol. Then, with a selection rate of 10%, the state shifts to the "second time-saving gaming state" (see FIG. 343).

Further, in the first normal game state (including the second normal game state), after the number of variable displays of the special symbols reaches 600, the normal game state shifts to the "B time saving game state".

(Transition control of first time-saving gaming state)
In the first time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the normal symbol operation area 9126 and the first long opening probability (approximately 1/135.6) is won based on a normal symbol lottery, etc., the second starting hole 9140 opens, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140.

When a game ball enters the second starting hole 9140, the starting information of the second special symbol is acquired, and the acquired starting information of the second special symbol is stored in the special symbol determination storage area (0), the second special symbol starting It is stored in either the storage area (1) or the second special symbol start storage area (2) in FIFO format. That is, when a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, it is possible to store the starting information of the second special symbol for a maximum of three times, including the fluctuation amount and the number of reserved second special symbols (2 pieces). It becomes. Then, when a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, the "first time-saving game state" shifts to the "BONUS state".

In addition, in the first time-saving game state, when the variable display of the normal symbol of the first time-saving number ends without a game ball entering the second starting port 9140, the change from the "first time-saving game state" to the "first time-saving game state" is completed. The game will then transition to the normal gaming state.

(Second time saving game state transition control)
In the second time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern operating area 9126 and wins the second long opening probability (approximately 1/68.5) based on the normal pattern lottery, etc., the second starting port 9140 is opened, and a game ball can enter the second starting port 9140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, the starting information of the second special symbol for up to three times is stored, similar to the first time-saving game state, and the "second time-saving game state" is changed to the "BONUS state". will be transferred.

In addition, in the second time-saving game state, when the variable display of the normal symbol for the second time-saving number ends without a game ball entering the second starting port 9140, the change from the "second time-saving game state" to the "first time-saving game state" The game will then transition to the normal gaming state.

(Transition control of third time-saving game state)
In the third time-saving game state, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern operating area 9126 and wins the second long opening probability (approximately 1/68.5) based on the normal pattern lottery, etc., the second starting port 9140 is opened, and a game ball can enter the second starting port 9140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, the starting information of the second special symbol for up to three times is stored, similar to the first time-saving game state, and the "third time-saving game state" is changed to the "BONUS state". will be transferred.

In addition, in the third time-saving game state, the third time-saving number (the number of times that the normal symbols are variable displayed = 10,000 times) is the number of times that essentially guarantees a transition to the next big win game state, and there is essentially no transition from the "third time-saving game state" to the "first normal game state."

(Transition control of B time-saving gaming state)
In the B time-saving game state, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol operation area 9126 and the second long opening probability (approximately 1/68.5) is won based on a normal symbol lottery, etc., the second starting hole 9140 opens, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting hole 9140.

When a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, similarly to the first time-saving game state, the starting information of the second special symbol for up to three times is stored, and the "B time-saving game state" shifts to the "BONUS state". I will do it.

In addition, even in the B time-saving game state, the fourth time-saving number (the number of times that the normal symbols are variable displayed = 600 times) is the number of times that essentially guarantees a transition to the next big win game state, and there is essentially no transition from the "B time-saving game state" to the "first normal game state."

(BONUS State Transition Control)
In the BONUS state, first, a lottery for the second special symbol is performed based on start information for the second special symbol.

Here, in the lottery for the second special symbol, the probability of a big win is set to approximately 1/231.6, but the probability of a small win is set to approximately 1/1.004, and a big win or small win is determined with a combined probability of 65535/65536 (see Figure 339). In this embodiment, when a small win game state is played due to a small win being won, the game ball that enters the second big win opening 9151 is configured to be able to pass through the V win opening 9156 (see Figures 337 and 342), and when the game ball passes through the V win opening 9156, the game transitions to a big win game state from the second route.

For this reason, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 9140, it is configured so that the transition to the jackpot game state is possible at approximately 1/1 (65535/65536), and the second special The game state during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the starting information of the symbol is made to correspond to the BONUS state in the same way as the jackpot game state and the small win game state.

In the BONUS state, after the second special symbol is drawn, a jackpot game state from the first route triggered by a jackpot or a jackpot game state from the second route triggered by a small win is executed. will be done. In addition, in the BONUS state, the start information of the second special symbol for a maximum of three times is stored, so that a maximum of three jackpot game states can be executed consecutively.

In the BONUS state, when all jackpot game states triggered by the start information of the second special symbol have ended, depending on the selected symbol of the second special symbol, there is a 90% selection rate for transition to the "second time-saving game state," and a 10% selection rate for transition to the "third time-saving game state" (see Figure 343).

In this way, in this embodiment, the game is composed of a first game feature in which the player aims to enter a jackpot game state by drawing a first special symbol during normal game play, and a second game feature in which the player aims to open the second starting hole 9140 long by drawing a normal symbol during time-saving game play. This not only combines a so-called type 1 pachinko game machine with a so-called type 2 pachinko game machine, but also creates unprecedented gameplay and can increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of a long reel opening differs depending on the normal power operation pattern during the time-saving game state, so multiple time-saving game states with different long reel opening probabilities can be enjoyed, further increasing the excitement of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, by drawing the second special symbol (the game ball enters the second starting port 9140), it is possible to shift to the jackpot game state substantially (approximately 1/1). Therefore, when in the time-saving gaming state, the second game feature aims to open the second starting port 9140 long by drawing a normal symbol, and the result of transition to a plurality of time-saving gaming states , it is possible to provide even more interest and to further improve the interest of the game.

[11-7. Display contents]
The display contents of the effects executed under the control of the main control circuit 200, sub-control circuit 300, etc. described above will be explained using display images displayed in the display area of the display device 7.

(Basic configuration of display image)
First, the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 will be described with reference to Fig. 371. Fig. 371 is an example of an explanatory diagram of the basic configuration of a display image displayed in the display area of the display device 7 in the ninth pachinko gaming machine. Fig. 371(a) shows the basic configuration of a display image in the first normal gaming state, and Fig. 371(b) shows the basic configuration of a display image in a time-saving gaming state excluding the BONUS state.

(Basic configuration of display image in first normal gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 371(a), the basic configuration of the display image in the first normal game state is that the left side of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is placed in the center of the display area of the display device 7 as the main symbol. A pattern 9071L, a middle pattern 9071C, and a right pattern 9071R are configured to be displayable.

Also, in the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-symbol 9072 is displayed as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special pattern, and a second sub-symbol 9072 is displayed as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern. A sub-symbol 9073 and a third sub-symbol 9075 as a sub-symbol of a decorative pattern corresponding to the normal pattern are configured to be displayed in a small size.

In this embodiment, when variable display of the first special symbol is performed during the first normal game state, in addition to variable display of the main symbols of the left symbol 9071L, middle symbol 9071C, and right symbol 9071R, Variable display of the first sub-symbol 9072 will also be performed. In addition, when the normal symbol is variablely displayed during the first normal game state, only the third sub-symbol 9075 is variablely displayed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is not displayed. become. In addition, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed, only the second sub-symbol 9073 is variablely displayed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed as described later in the BONUS state production. will not be displayed.

In the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the first special symbol can be displayed. According to the reserved number of the first special symbol, a first reserved image 9074a indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (1), a second reserved image 9074b indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (2), a third reserved image 9074c indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (3), and a fourth reserved image 9074d indicating that start information is stored in the first special symbol start memory area (4) can be displayed. In addition, the reserved image 9075 indicating that the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed is displayed in response to the reserved image. In this embodiment, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbol is not displayed in the first normal game state, but a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of the second special symbol may be displayed.

(Basic configuration of display image in time-saving game state)
As shown in Figure 371 (b), the basic configuration of the display image in a time-saving game state excluding the BONUS state is such that a left pattern 9076L, a middle pattern 9076C and a right pattern 9076R can be displayed as main patterns of decorative patterns corresponding to normal patterns at the center of the display area of the display device 7.

In addition, in the right corner of the display area of the display device 7, a first sub-pattern 9072 corresponding to the first special pattern, a second sub-pattern 9073 corresponding to the second special pattern, and a third sub-pattern 9075 corresponding to the normal pattern can be displayed small, just as in the first normal game state.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of the normal symbol is performed during the time-saving gaming state, in addition to the variable display of the main symbol of the left symbol 9076L, the middle symbol 9076C, and the right symbol 9076R, the third sub symbol 9075 is Variable display will also be performed. In addition, when the first special symbol is variably displayed during the time-saving game state, only the first sub-symbol 9072 is variably displayed, and the main symbol of the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. It will not be done.

In the lower left of the display area of the display device 7, a reserved image corresponding to the reserved number of normal symbols can be displayed, and a first reserved image 9077a indicating that start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (1), a second reserved image 9077b indicating that start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (2), a third reserved image 9077c indicating that start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (3), and a fourth reserved image 9077d indicating that start information is stored in the normal symbol start memory area (4) can be displayed according to the reserved number of normal symbols. Also, the reserved image 9078 indicating that the variable display of the normal symbols is being performed is displayed in response to the reserved image. In this embodiment, reserved images corresponding to the reserved numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not displayed in the time-saving game state, but reserved images corresponding to the reserved numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be displayed.

At the upper right of the display area of the display device 7, a right-handed instruction image 9079 that instructs the player to play right-handed as a regular game mode is configured to be displayable.

The upper left corner of the display area of the display device 7 is configured to be able to display a time-saving count image 9080 indicating the remaining number of times the time-saving count is reached under the time-saving end condition. When the third time-saving count (the number of times the normal symbols are variable displayed = 10,000) is set in the third time-saving game state, the infinity symbol "∞" is displayed as the time-saving count image 9080 to indicate that a transition to the next big win game state is guaranteed.

In this way, in the first normal game state, the main symbol and the reserved image of the decorative symbols are the first special symbols so that it is easy to recognize the first game nature that aims at the jackpot game state by drawing the first special symbol. When in the time-saving game state, the main symbol of the decorative symbol and the reserved image are normal symbols so that it is easy to recognize the second game feature that aims to open the second starting port 9140 long by drawing the normal symbol. It corresponds to In the time-saving game state, a variation effect of the main symbols (left symbol 9076L, middle symbol 9076C, and right symbol 9076R) of the decorative symbols corresponding to the normal symbol is performed. That is, the first decorative pattern (main pattern) becomes a pattern corresponding to the first special pattern in the normal game state, and is replaced with a pattern corresponding to the normal pattern in the time-saving game state.

(BONUS state effect)
Next, referring to Figure 372, we will explain the game state during the control period of the second special pattern, which is carried out based on the start information of the second special pattern, and the presentation of the BONUS state, including the big win game state and the small win game state.

In addition, in the presentation of the BONUS state, the first sub-symbol 9072, second sub-symbol 9073, third sub-symbol 9075 and right hit instruction image 9079 explained in FIG. Since there is a possibility that this may occur, illustration of the reference numerals is omitted. In addition, the first sub-symbol 9072, second sub-symbol 9073, and third sub-symbol 9075 are used to control the gaming state (second normal game) during the control period of the second special symbol performed based on the start information of the second special symbol. In the state and time-saving game state), it is configured so that it can always be displayed, but in the jackpot game state and the small win game state, it is configured not to be displayed.

FIG. 372(a) shows that when a game ball enters the second starting port 9140 and the second special symbol start condition is met, the number of reserved second special symbols = 0, the "first special symbol" This is an example of a display image of a "BONUS entry performance" which can be executed during the initial variable display of the second special symbol after the "variation pattern (0AH)" has been determined.

As shown in FIG. 372(a), in the "BONUS entry effect", for example, a right hit instruction image 9079 and a blessing image notifying entry into the BONUS state are displayed in the display area. ing. This "BONUS entry effect" is based on the "first variable display time (for example, 10 seconds)" and "symbol confirmation time (for example, 540ms)" that are associated with the first special symbol variation pattern (0AH). It is possible to carry out over a period of time. In addition, in the "BONUS entry effect", only the second sub-symbol 9073 is displayed variably as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, and the main pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is It is configured not to be displayed.

FIG. 372(b) is an example of a display image of the "first BONUS performance (first time)" performed when the variable display of the second special symbol ends and the BONUS state shifts to the first small winning game state.

As shown in FIG. 372(b), in the "first BONUS effect (first time)", as an example, a right-handed batting instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a specific background image, and a right-handed batting instruction image are displayed in the display area. In addition, a V instruction image such as "Aim for V!", which instructs the game ball to pass through the V winning hole 9156 in the second big winning hole 9151, is displayed. Although not shown, in the "1st BONUS effect (first time)", when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156, a V passing notification effect is also executed to notify that the game ball has passed through the V winning hole 9156. It is possible.

Figure 372 (c) is an example of a display image of the "Second Bonus Presentation (at the start)" which is performed at the start of the first big win game state (the opening time of the first big win game state) after the game ball passes through the V winning port 9156 in the first small win game state.

As shown in FIG. 372(c), in the "second BONUS performance (at the start)", for example, a right-handed hitting instruction image 9079 is displayed in the display area and a "4500 BONUS" regarding the number of game balls that the player can acquire in the BONUS state. !!” is displayed.

As mentioned above, when the game transitions to the BONUS state, a maximum of three consecutive jackpot game states can be played. In this embodiment, the image of the number of game balls to be acquired shows the number of game balls that the player can acquire in a maximum of three jackpot game states (including the number of game balls that can be acquired in the small jackpot game state) (4,500 balls = 1,500 balls x 3 times).

The image of the number of game balls to be acquired displayed in this manner is configured to be able to display all combinations of the number of game balls to be acquired that correspond to the number of game balls that the player can acquire in a maximum of three jackpot game states. For example, in the case where the winning allocation of the second special pattern in the above-mentioned FIG. 343 is 10R in which 1500 balls can be acquired and 4R in which 600 balls can be acquired, an image corresponding to 4500 balls for three times per 10R, an image corresponding to 3600 balls for two times per 10R and one time per 4R, an image corresponding to 2700 balls for one time per 10R and two times per 4R, and an image corresponding to 1800 balls for three times per 4R are each configured to be able to be displayed.

If the player is unable to get the maximum three game balls to enter the second starting hole 9140 due to ball jamming or other reasons, an image corresponding to one win (an image corresponding to 1500 balls or an image corresponding to 600 balls) or an image corresponding to two wins (an image corresponding to 3000 balls, an image corresponding to 2100 balls, an image corresponding to 1200 balls) may be displayed. In this case, the player may lose interest because he or she is not awarded the maximum number of jackpots, but by accurately displaying the number of balls expected to be won, it is possible to prevent this loss of interest.

In this embodiment, the image of the number of game balls expected to be won is configured to be displayed in the "second BONUS presentation (start)" at the start of the first big win game state, but it may also be configured to be displayed in the "first BONUS presentation (first time)" after the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156 during the first small win game state.

FIG. 372(d) is an example of a display image of the "2nd BONUS performance (opening)" performed in the jackpot game state after the opening time of the first jackpot game state has elapsed (during the round of the jackpot game state). .

As shown in FIG. 372(d), in the "second BONUS effect (open)", as an example, a right-handed instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a specific background image, and the first large It is configured to display an acquired game ball number image that displays the cumulative number of game balls that the player has acquired by entering the game balls into the winning hole 9131 and the second large winning hole 9151.

In this embodiment, the acquired game ball number image is configured to display the cumulative number of game balls acquired by the player as a result of game balls entering the first large prize winning port 9131 and the second large prize winning port 9151 as the number of game balls acquired by the player in the small win game state and the big win game state, but it may be configured to display the cumulative number of game balls acquired by the player as a result of game balls entering the first large prize winning port 9131 as the number of game balls acquired by the player in the big win game state. Furthermore, the acquired game ball number image may be configured to display the cumulative number of game balls acquired by the player as a result of game balls entering the first large prize winning port 9131, the second large prize winning port 9151, and the general prize winning port 122.

FIG. 372(e) shows a case where the number of reserved second special symbols>0 when the start condition for the second special symbol is satisfied after the jackpot game state ends (that is, the second special symbol start storage area (1 ) or when the start information of the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (2)), the "fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol (1AH)" is determined, and the 2 is an example of a display image of a "BONUS continuation effect" that can be executed during variable display of special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 372(e), in the "BONUS continuation effect", for example, a right-handed batting instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a specific background image, and an acquired game ball number image are displayed in the display area. is displayed, and the BONUS performance performed in the jackpot game state or the small win game state is continued. This "BONUS continuous performance" is based on the "second variable display time (for example, 1 second)" and "symbol confirmation time (for example, 540ms)" that are associated with the second special symbol variation pattern (1AH). It is possible to carry out over a period of time. In addition, in the "BONUS continuous performance", only the second sub-symbol 9073 is displayed variably as a sub-symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern, and the main pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the second special pattern is It is configured not to be displayed.

FIG. 372(f) is an example of a display image of the "1st BONUS performance (second and subsequent times)" that is performed when the variable display of the second special symbol ends and the state shifts to the second and subsequent small winning game state. .

As shown in FIG. 372(f), in the "first BONUS performance (second and subsequent times)", for example, a right-handed instruction image 9079, a specific character image, a V instruction image, and an acquired game are displayed in the display area. It is configured so that a pitch count image is displayed. In addition, as described above, when the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156 while FIG. 372(b) is displayed, the V passing notification effect can be executed, but when FIG. 372(f) is displayed Even if the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156, it is desirable not to perform the V passing notification effect. When the V passing notification performance is not executed, a plurality of jackpot game states can be seamlessly shown to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the V-passing notification performance may be executed when FIG. 372(f) is displayed, but when executing the V-passing notification performance when FIG. 372(f) is displayed, it is desirable to execute the V-passing notification performance in an execution time that is shorter than the execution time of the V-passing notification performance executed when FIG. 372(b) is displayed.

After the game ball passes through the V winning hole 9156 in the second or subsequent small win game state, the game state transitions to the big win game state. However, at the start of the second or subsequent big win game state, the "second BONUS effect (at the start)" as shown in FIG. 372(c) is not performed, and even during the opening time of the big win game state, the "second BONUS effect (during opening)" as shown in FIG. 372(d) is performed.

In this way, as the effect of the BONUS state, a "BONUS entry effect" or a "BONUS continuation effect" is executed as a variable effect during the variable display of the second special symbol, a "first BONUS effect" is executed in a small win game state, and a "second BONUS effect" is executed in a big win game state. And, because the effects executed in the "BONUS entry effect", "first BONUS effect", "second BONUS effect" and "BONUS continuation effect" are related to each other, a group of cohesive effects can be executed as an effect of one BONUS state, which can further increase the interest of the game.

In particular, during the variable display of the second special symbol from the second time onward, in the small hit game state, and in the jackpot game state, the special effects shown in FIGS. 372(a) to 372(c) are not performed. Since a performance similar to the "second BONUS performance (opening)" in the jackpot gaming state shown in d) is performed, multiple jackpot gaming states can be made to appear seamlessly (like a group of jackpot gaming states). This makes it possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Also, during the variable display of the second special symbol for the first time, in the small hit game state, and in the jackpot game state, special performances as shown in FIGS. In addition, the number of game balls that the player can acquire in the BONUS state can be notified in advance, increasing the player's joy and making the game more interesting.

<Ninth modified example of pachinko game machine>
The technology described in the embodiment of the ninth pachinko game machine may be applied to a slot machine. When applied to a slot machine, the various effects executed in the ninth pachinko game machine may be replaced with effects by a display device, reels, etc. provided in the slot machine. In addition, the time-saving game state (A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, first time-saving game state, second time-saving game state, and third time-saving game state) may be replaced with any of the following states: replay time (RT state) in which the replay probability of replay is improved, assist time (AT state) in which a predetermined small role or the operation content of the stop button is notified, and assist replay time (ART state) in which the replay time and assist time are controlled simultaneously. In addition, the big win and small win may be replaced with any of the following: winning a specific role, a specific combination of symbols being stopped and displayed (a specific combination of symbols being awarded), winning an entry win in the RT state, winning an entry win in the AT state, and winning an entry win in the ART state.

(others)
In the above-described ninth pachinko game machine, the techniques of each embodiment can be applied to each other, including modifications. The above-described embodiments do not limit the content of the present invention, and changes can be made without departing from the scope of the claims.

Further, the effects described in the ninth pachinko gaming machine are merely a list of the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in each embodiment of the present invention. It's not something you can do.

Furthermore, the above [4. Expansion Example] can also be applied to the ninth pachinko gaming machine, as long as there is no inconsistency in its gameplay or control.

The following additionally describes techniques related to the present invention.
<Additional Note: The Fourth Pachinko Machine>
2. Background Art
Conventionally, there are known gaming machines that, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole, display a variable special pattern on a pattern display device, and control the jackpot gaming state on the condition that the display result becomes a predetermined specific display mode (so-called Type 1 pachinko gaming machines), and gaming machines that, based on the gaming ball entering the starting hole, change a movable member of a variable winning device (large winning hole) from a state in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter to a state in which it is easier, and control the jackpot gaming state on the condition that the gaming ball that entered the variable winning device enters a specific area provided within the variable winning device (so-called Type 2 gaming machines).

In addition to the jackpot and starting hole, the game area is also provided with a gate for activating a normal symbol, and when the game ball passes through the gate, a lottery for a normal symbol is held. If the lottery for a normal symbol is won, a movable member (a so-called electric tulip) provided at a specific starting hole opens.
In order to increase the interest of the game, most gaming machines equipped with such movable members have a time-saving game state in which the movable members are more likely to open per unit time, and a non-time-saving game state in which the movable members are less likely to open per unit time (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art documents]
[Patent documents]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2009-273866

[Summary of the invention]
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, regarding the operation of the movable member provided at a specific starting port, whether the game ball passes through the passing gate when in the time-saving gaming state or the gaming ball passes through the passing gate when in the non-time-saving gaming state. The players were only interested in passing the game, and further improvements were needed to make the game more interesting.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can further improve the interest of gaming.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a gaming board (for example, gaming panels 3100, 4100) in which a gaming area in which a gaming ball flows down, and a starting area ( For example, a starting area detection means (for example, a first starting opening switch 3121) that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 3120), and a passing area (first passing gate 3126A) provided in the gaming area. a passage area detection means (for example, a first passage gate switch 3127A) for detecting the entry of a game ball; and a variable start device that is provided in the game area and can change between an open state where it is easy to accept game balls and a closed state where it is difficult to accept them. Opening/closing determination of whether or not to change the start variable prize winning device from a closed state to an open state on the condition that a winning device (for example, a normal electric accessory 3146) and a game ball are detected by the passage area detection means. A normal game determining means (for example, the main CPU 201) that performs the above, and a control that causes the normal symbol display device to start variable display of the normal symbols, and after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, causes the normal symbol display device to stop displaying the normal symbols. a normal symbol display control means (e.g., main CPU 201) that performs normal symbol display; When a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed by the symbol display control means, opening/closing control is performed to change the start variable prize winning device between the open state and the closed state according to the opening mode determined by the opening mode determining means. By establishing a special condition triggered by the detection of a game ball by the starting opening/closing control means (for example, the main CPU 201) and the starting area detection means (for example, the C time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed), A gaming state control means (for example, main CPU 201) that shifts to a predetermined gaming state (for example, C time-saving gaming state) and controls the shifted gaming state,
The normal game determining means performs the opening/closing determination based on the gaming state when variable display of the normal symbols is started by the normal symbol display control means, and the opening mode determining means performs the opening/closing determination based on the gaming state when variable display of the normal symbols is started by the normal symbol display control means. The opening mode can be determined based on the gaming state when a specific normal symbol is stopped and displayed.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a start variable winning device detection means (e.g., a second start port switch 3141) for detecting the entry of a gaming ball into the start variable winning device; a first special game control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for controlling a special game advantageous to a player when a first transition condition (e.g., when a stop display mode indicating a "jackpot" is derived) is established in response to the detection of a gaming ball by the start area detection means; and a second special game control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for controlling the special game when a second transition condition (e.g., when a gaming ball that has entered the V attacker 3152 passes through the V winning port) is established in response to the detection of a gaming ball by the start variable winning device detection means.
It is desirable that the second transition condition is set to be more likely to be satisfied than the first transition condition.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a special game determination for determining whether or not to control a special game advantageous to the player on the condition that a game ball is detected by the starting area detection means. means (for example, the main CPU 201), and a special symbol display control that causes the special symbol display device to start variable display of the special symbol, and after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, controls the special symbol display device to stop displaying the special symbol. means (for example, main CPU 201),
The game state control means determines that the special game is not controlled by the special game determination means, and when the special symbol display control means stops displaying a specific special symbol (for example, C time-saving symbol, etc.). , it is desirable to be able to control the specific gaming state by transitioning to a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state consisting of the A-time-saving gaming state, the B-time-saving gaming state, and the C-time-saving gaming state).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first variable display time of the special symbol is longer than the variable display time of the regular symbol, and the second variable display time of the special symbol is shorter than the variable display time of the regular symbol. At least a plurality of variable time tables (for example, the special symbols shown in FIGS. 113 to 116 The fluctuation time table is changed according to the fluctuation time table storage means (for example, main ROM 202) that stores the fluctuation pattern table (variation pattern table of Variable time table determining means (for example, main CPU 201) that determines one variable time table from among a plurality of variable time tables stored in the storage means, and special symbol variable time determining means that determines the variable display time of the special symbol. (for example, main CPU 201);
It is preferable that the special symbol fluctuation time determining means is capable of determining the variable display time of the special symbol based on the fluctuation time table determined by the fluctuation time table determining means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a special symbol determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for determining the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device according to the result of the determination by the special game determination means;
The special symbol determination means is capable of determining a first special symbol (e.g., a big win symbol) when it is determined by the special game determination means that a first special game capable of providing a first benefit is to be controlled, and is capable of determining a second special symbol (e.g., a "hit symbol for opening a special device" corresponding to small win symbol switching information) when it is determined by the special game determination means that a second special game capable of providing a second benefit having a lower profit rate than the first benefit is to be controlled, and it is desirable that the variable time table determination means is capable of determining a special variable time table from among a plurality of variable time tables (e.g., variable pattern tables T1 to T3 of special symbols in a normal game state shown in Figs. 113(1) to (3), and variable pattern tables C1 to C3 of special symbols in a C-time-saving game state shown in Figs. 114(1) to (3)) stored in the variable time table storage means when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means, in determining the variable display time of the special symbol from the next time onwards.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes special game number counting means (for example, main CPU 201) that counts the number of times the special game is controlled under specific conditions (A time-saving game state). ,
The game state control means is capable of shifting to a normal game state which is disadvantageous for the player when the special game number counting means counts a specific number of times (for example, a limiter number of times), and the variable time table determining means is configured to , when a specific number of games is counted by the special game number counting means, the second variable display time of the special symbol is set to be longer than the first variable display time of the special symbol until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. It is desirable to be able to determine a specific variation time table (for example, special symbol variation pattern tables Z1 and Z2 shown in FIG. 116) that has a high execution rate.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the specific special symbol (e.g., C time-saving symbol) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means, the game state control means transitions to the specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state consisting of A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state, mainly C time-saving game state), and terminates control of the specific game state after a first termination condition is established (e.g., one variable display of a special symbol), and when the first special special symbol (e.g., a jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed by the special symbol display control means, the game state transitions to the specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state consisting of A time-saving game state, B time-saving game state, and C time-saving game state, mainly A time-saving game state), and terminates control of the specific game state after a second termination condition is established (e.g., 100 variable displays of a special symbol), and it is preferable that the first termination condition and the second termination condition are different termination conditions.

Preferably, in the game machine according to the present invention, the game board is provided in the game area so that the starting area is in the traveling direction of the game ball that has passed through the passing area, and is close to the passing area. It is desirable that the game ball that has passed through the passage area is configured to be able to pass through the starting area.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Additional Note: The Fifth Pachinko Machine>
2. Background Art
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big prize hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a lottery for a special symbol is held, and when the lottery for the special symbol is won, the big prize game state is controlled (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the big prize hole is changed to an open state, and the big prize game state is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the big prize hole enters a specific area (so-called type 2 game machine). When controlled to such a big prize game state, the big prize hole is opened in an advantageous opening mode (for example, opening time 29 seconds x 10 rounds, etc.) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter, and prize balls corresponding to the game ball that entered the big prize hole are paid out, so that the player can acquire the game ball.

In addition to the big prize opening and the starting opening, the game area is also provided with a passing opening that activates normal symbols, and when a game ball passes through the passing opening, a lottery for normal symbols is held. If the lottery for the normal symbol is won, a movable member (a so-called electric tulip) provided at a specific starting opening opens. To increase the interest of the game, most gaming machines equipped with such movable members have a time-saving game state in which the movable member is more likely to open per unit time, and a non-time-saving game state in which the movable member is less likely to open per unit time, and in the time-saving game state, the chances of drawing special symbols are increased (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art documents]
[Patent documents]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2009-273866

Summary of the Invention
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, even in a gaming machine equipped with a time-saving game mode as in Patent Document 1, if the only opportunity for a player to win a game ball is through a lottery for a special symbol, the gameplay becomes monotonous, and there is still room for improvement in order to increase the interest of the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

[Means for solving the problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises a gaming board (e.g., a gaming panel 5100) in which a gaming area through which gaming balls flow down is formed, normal area detection means (e.g., a first passing port switch 5127A, a second passing port switch 5127B) for detecting the entry of gaming balls into a normal area (e.g., a first passing port 5126A, a second passing port 5126B) provided in the gaming area, a first variable winning device (e.g., a normal electric device 5146) provided in the gaming area and changeable between an open state which makes it easy to receive gaming balls and a closed state which makes it difficult to receive gaming balls, and a second variable winning device (e.g., a special electric device 5133) provided in the gaming area and changeable between an open state which makes it easy to receive gaming balls and a closed state which makes it difficult to receive gaming balls, and an opening/closing determination as to whether or not to change the first variable winning device to an open state on the condition that a gaming ball is detected by the normal area detection means. a first variable winning device detection means (e.g., a start switch 5141) for detecting an entry of a game ball into the first variable winning device; a benefit awarding determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for determining whether or not to award one of a plurality of types of benefits including a special benefit (e.g., a small win) for opening the second variable winning device on the condition that a game ball has been detected by the first variable winning device detection means, and a status benefit (e.g., a time-saving win) for controlling a predetermined game status without opening the second variable winning device; and a game status control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for controlling the execution of a normal game status in which the first variable winning device is unlikely to be opened, or a specific game status (e.g., a time-saving game status) in which the first variable winning device is likely to be opened.
The advantage awarding determination means is more likely to determine that either the special advantage or the state advantage will be awarded than to determine that neither the special advantage nor the state advantage will be awarded, and the game state control means is characterized in that it becomes possible to execute the specific game state when the advantage awarding determination means determines that the state advantage will be awarded.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the benefit awarding determination means determines whether to award any of a plurality of types of benefits, including a first special game (e.g., a big win game state) that changes the second variable winning device between an open state and a closed state according to a first opening mode, a second special game (e.g., a small win game state) that changes the second variable winning device between an open state and a closed state according to a second opening mode that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first opening mode, and the state benefit, and it is desirable that the means is more likely to determine that the second special game should be awarded than the first special game.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the benefit awarding determination means judges a predetermined number of times (e.g., one time of time-saving), the normal gaming state can be executed from the specific gaming state, and if the benefit awarding determination means judges that the state benefit will be awarded before the predetermined number of judgments are made, it is desirable that the specific gaming state can be executed until the predetermined number of judgments are made again.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific game state includes a first specific game state (e.g., time-saving game state A) that can be executed after the benefit-granting determination means has determined that the special benefit will be granted, and a second specific game state (e.g., time-saving game state C) that can be executed after the benefit-granting determination means has determined that the state benefit will be granted, the first specific game state being a game state that is more advantageous to the player (e.g., has a greater number of time-saving plays) than the second specific game state, and it is desirable that the game state control means, when executing the first specific game state, is capable of continuing to execute the first specific game state without executing the second specific game state if the benefit-granting determination means has determined that the state benefit will be granted.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes presentation means (for example, a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46) for performing a predetermined presentation,
When the special benefit is granted, the performance means is capable of performing a common special performance (for example, a bonus time basic performance or a bonus time specialized performance) that can be executed across a plurality of special benefits. When it is determined by the benefit provision determination means that the state benefit is to be provided, it is possible to perform a continuation special performance (for example, a rewind performance) indicating that the special performance will be continued for a further extension. This is desirable.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Additional note: 6th pachinko machine>
[Background technology]
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole have been provided in the gaming area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is held. If you win, you will be able to control the jackpot gaming state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine), and when the ball enters the starting slot, the jackpot will be changed to the open state, and the jackpot will be turned into the jackpot. A gaming machine is known in which a jackpot gaming state is controlled on the condition that the entered game ball enters a specific area (a so-called two-type gaming machine). When controlled to such a jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened in an advantageous opening mode (for example, opening time 29 seconds x 10 rounds) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter, and the jackpot is opened in the jackpot. It is configured such that a prize ball (game ball) corresponding to the entered game ball can be paid out.

In addition, there is a known gaming machine that performs a first reach performance (long reach, SP reach) and then performs a second reach performance (SPSP reach) based on the results of a lottery for special symbols in order to increase the excitement of the game (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art documents]
[Patent documents]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-236850

Summary of the Invention
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, it has been desired to increase the relevance of the first reach effect, the second reach effect, and the like, and to further improve the reach effect and other effects, thereby further increasing the interest in the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can display a variable identification symbol when a predetermined starting condition is met,
Effect execution means (for example, a sub for controlling the display device 7, the speaker 32, the LED group 46, the effect accessory group 58, and the effect button device 6310) that performs a predetermined effect when the variable display of the identification symbol is performed control circuit 300, sub CPU 301),
The performance execution means executes a second performance (for example, when a first performance execution condition (for example, acquisition of a path to the final battle icon) is established by performing a first performance (for example, cherry blossom accumulation notice)). The road to the ultimate battle) can be performed, and by performing a third performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) that is different from the first performance, the second performance execution condition (for example, 5 character icons) can be executed. display) is established, a fourth production (for example, the road to the decisive battle) can be performed, and the second production and the fourth production are the same specific production (for example, 10 characters). It is characterized by being able to perform a performance that aims to collect icons.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance execution means may execute, as the first performance, a staged performance in which the performance progresses in stages (for example, a cherry blossom accumulation notice) and predetermined development information (for example, 1st development display effect that can display character icons (for example, displaying a text image indicating the number of character icons such as "One person gathering", etc., and icon display images lighting up in the Western Army icon display area, etc.) It is desirable that it be possible to do this with a display effect.

Preferably, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the effect execution means is capable of performing a pseudo consecutive effect multiple times as the third effect, in which the identification pattern that is being displayed in a varying manner is temporarily temporarily stopped and then the identification pattern that was temporarily stopped is again displayed in a varying manner, and it is also desirable that each time the pseudo consecutive effect is performed, a second development display effect that can display predetermined development information (e.g., a character icon) (e.g., an effect in which one or more character icons are displayed in a stopped state, or an icon display image is displayed lit up in the Western Army icon display section, etc.) can be performed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a performance operation unit (for example, a first performance operation unit 6311 and a second performance operation unit 6312 of a performance button device 6310) is provided, by which a player can perform operations for the performance,
The presentation execution means is capable of performing an operation presentation (for example, a one-operation presentation in the Road to the Final Battle or the Road to the Extreme Final Battle) as the specific presentation, which has the player perform a predetermined number of operations on the presentation operation unit, and it is desirable that the number of operations in the operation presentation in the second presentation be greater than the number of operations in the operation presentation in the fourth presentation.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance execution means satisfies a third performance execution condition (for example, less than 10 character icons) by performing the second performance or the fourth performance. If established, a fifth effect (for example, confrontation reach) can be executed, and as the specific effect, a development progress effect (for example, It is possible to carry out a performance in which the aim is to collect 10 character icons), and as the fifth performance, a development performance related to the development information progressed and displayed in the development progress performance (for example, support It is desirable that it be possible to perform (direction using icons).

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a start information acquisition means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for acquiring start information when the predetermined start condition is established, a first special game determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for determining whether or not to control a first special game (e.g., a big win game) that is advantageous to a player based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means, a second special game determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for determining whether or not to control a second special game (e.g., a small win game) that is less advantageous than the first special game based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means, and a special game control means (e.g., the main CPU 20 a reserve storage means (e.g., a main RAM 203 having a special symbol start storage area) capable of storing the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of reserved items when the predetermined start condition is established in a state in which the first special game determination means and the second special game determination means cannot make a determination; a pre-determination means (e.g., a main CPU 201) capable of determining whether or not to control the first special game or the second special game based on the start information stored in the reserve storage means before the first special game determination means and the second special game determination means make a determination; and a pre-effect execution means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 for controlling a display device 7, a speaker 32, an LED group 46, a performance accessory group 58, and a performance button device 6310) capable of performing a pre-effect (e.g., a lotus flower notice) for a predetermined effect period based on a determination result by the pre-determination means,
It is desirable that the pre-performance execution means be able to continue performing the pre-performance even if the special game control means controls the second special game during the specified performance period.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, there are provided a start information acquisition means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for acquiring start information when a first start condition or a second start condition is established, a special game determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) for determining whether or not to control a special game advantageous to a player based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means, a first reservation storage means (e.g., the main RAM 203 having first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4)) capable of storing the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means up to a first reservation number when the first start condition is established in a state in which the special game determination means is unable to make a determination, and a special game determination means (e.g., the main RAM 203 having first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4)) capable of storing the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means up to a first reservation number when the second start condition is established in a state in which the special game determination means is unable to make a determination. a second reserved storage means (e.g., a main RAM 203 having second special symbol start storage areas (1) and (2)) capable of storing the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means up to a second reserved number; a pre-judgment means (e.g., a main CPU 201) capable of making a judgment as to whether or not to control the special game based on the start information stored in the first reserved storage means or the second reserved storage means before the special game judgment means makes a judgment; and a pre-performance execution means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 for controlling a display device 7, a speaker 32, an LED group 46, a performance accessory group 58, and a performance button device 6310) capable of performing a reserved pre-performance (e.g., a folding fan notice) based on a judgment result by the pre-judgment means,
It is desirable that the pre-performance execution means is capable of performing a hold pre-performance based on the start information stored in the first hold memory means when a predetermined number of hold start information (e.g., two) is stored in the second hold memory means.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention further comprises a performance operation unit (e.g., a first performance operation unit 6311 and a second performance operation unit 6312 of the performance button device 6310) by which the player can operate the performance, operation detection means (e.g., first to third operation unit detection switches of the performance button device 6310) for detecting operations on the performance operation unit, and operation determination means (e.g., the sub-CPU 301) for determining whether the operations detected by the operation detection means are valid or invalid,
When there is a reception time during which multiple operations can be accepted on the performance operation unit, the operation judgment means judges the operation on the performance operation unit to be invalid during a start preparation period set at the start of the reception time, judges the operation on the performance operation unit to be invalid during an end preparation period set at the end of the reception time, and judges the operation on the performance operation unit to be valid during a valid operation period set from the end of the start preparation period to the start of the end preparation period, but it is desirable that an operation invalid period can be set from when an operation detected during the valid operation period is judged to be valid to when the next operation is judged to be valid, and that the operation invalid period be set to a different period depending on the performance based on the operation judged to be valid during the valid operation period.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a performance operation section (for example, a performance button device 6310) that allows a player to perform operations on a performance and that can execute a plurality of types of operation modes, and the performance operation section Operation display performance execution means (for example, display device 7, speaker 32, LED group 46, performance accessory group 58, and performance button A sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301) that control the device 6310,
It is desirable that the operation display performance execution means performs the operation display performance according to a change in the operation mode of the performance operation section to be operated.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a presentation operation unit (e.g., presentation button device 6310) that allows the player to operate the presentation and is capable of executing a plurality of types of operation modes, and an operation mode return means (e.g., button control circuit 310, sub-control circuit 300, and sub-CPU 301) that returns the operation mode of the presentation operation unit to the initial operation mode when a predetermined condition is met, including the passage of a predetermined time since the player performed a predetermined game.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first starting condition is satisfied, the first notification symbol (for example, the first special symbol) starts to be displayed in a variable manner, and when a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the first A first notification pattern display control means (for example, the main CPU 201) that stops and displays the notification pattern in a predetermined stop mode, and when a second starting condition is satisfied, a variable display of the second notification pattern (for example, the second special pattern). is started, and when a predetermined variable time has elapsed, a second notification pattern display control means (for example, the main CPU 201) stops and displays the second notification pattern in a predetermined stop mode, and the first notification pattern display control means specifies the When the first notification symbol is stopped and displayed in a stop mode, or when the second notification symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop mode by the second notification symbol display control means, a specific game state is controlled from a normal game state. Comprising a game state control means (for example, main CPU 201) and an external information output means (for example, external terminal board 184) for outputting external information regarding the game to a predetermined external device,
The variable display of the first notification pattern by the first notification pattern display control means and the variable display of the second notification pattern by the second notification pattern display control device can be executed in parallel, and the gaming state control device In the specific gaming state, when the first notification symbol and the second notification symbol are stopped and displayed a predetermined number of times, the external information output means controls the normal gaming state from the specific gaming state, and the external information output means controls the normal gaming state from the specific gaming state. In addition to continuously outputting specific external information (for example, external information 3) during the output period from when the specific gaming state is controlled by the state control means until the normal gaming state is controlled, When the state is controlled and the first notification pattern display control means starts variable display of the first notification pattern, a first additional period until the stop display of the first notification pattern is performed; If the second notification symbol display control means starts variable display of the second notification symbol when the specific gaming state is controlled, a second addition is performed until the second notification symbol is stopped and displayed. It is desirable to continuously output the specific external information even for a certain period of time.

In addition, "development information" is information that is displayed as the game or performance progresses, including textual information that indicates the content of the performance that will proceed from now on, character icon information that displays a predetermined character, Information such as number information that displays the number of character icons, number information that displays the number of pseudo-sequences that have already been performed, and time information until the next production progresses. It means something.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further increase the enjoyment of the game.

<Additional Note: 7th Pachinko Game Machine (Part 1)>
[Background technology]
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole have been provided in the gaming area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is held. If you win, the game machine that controls the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine) and the jackpot that changes to the open state when the ball enters the starting slot, and the jackpot opens. A gaming machine (a so-called two-type pachinko gaming machine) is known in which a jackpot gaming state is controlled on the condition that a game ball that enters the ball enters a specific area. Furthermore, by inserting a predetermined number of medals, etc. and operating the start lever, multiple reels are rotated, and based on the combination of symbols on the reels that are stopped and displayed, a specific number of medals, bonus games, etc. A gaming machine (a reel-type gaming machine called a so-called slot machine) that provides benefits is also known.

In addition, in order to improve the interest of the game, pachinko gaming machines have different gaming states (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state) with different lottery probabilities for special symbols, and different ball entry rates into the starting slot. A plurality of gaming states are provided, such as a gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a non-time-saving gaming state) (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art documents]
[Patent documents]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-59682

Summary of the Invention
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
It has been desired to provide appropriate effects according to the gaming state and game situation of the gaming machine, thereby further increasing the entertainment value of the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

[Means for solving the problems]
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, a seventh pachinko gaming machine) is a gaming machine capable of variably displaying identification symbols,
The game machine includes a performance execution means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46) that executes a predetermined performance, and a game state control means (e.g., a main CPU 201) that transitions the game state and controls the transitioned game state,
The game state control means is capable of transitioning to a special game state (e.g., a big win game state or a small win game state) in which a special benefit can be given to the player when the execution result of the variable display of the identification pattern satisfies a special condition, and is capable of controlling at least a normal game state (e.g., a first normal game state) and a specific game state (e.g., the first to third time-saving game states and the second normal game state) which are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state as game states in which the variable display of the identification pattern can be executed, and the performance execution means is capable of executing one normal performance (e.g., a normal reach performance or the like executed when hitting from the left) out of a plurality of types of normal performances in the normal game state, and is capable of executing one specific performance (e.g., a boss battle performance, a Sengoku time performance, a battle performance, or the like executed when hitting from the right) out of a plurality of types of specific performances in the specific game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of types of normal effects are a plurality of types of normal effects that can be executed with a variable display of the identification symbol that satisfies the special condition (for example, a window preview in the variation). , normal reach, etc.), and multiple types of advance normal performances that can be executed in the variable display of the identification symbol before the variable display of the identification symbol that satisfies the special conditions (for example, a look-ahead performance in advance variation). It is desirable to include at least .

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the plurality of types of advance normal effects include a first advance normal effect (for example, a flash notice when winning a prize at the starting slot, etc.) and a second advance normal effect (for example, a flash notice at the time of winning a prize at the starting slot). If a predetermined condition is satisfied at the start time of the advance normal performance (for example, when winning a prize in the starting slot), the performance execution means executes the It is desirable to be able to execute the second advance normal performance while not executing the first advance normal performance.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance executing means is configured to meet a specific condition different from the predetermined condition (for example, a common prohibition condition 1 "second special symbol") at the start time of the advance normal performance. When there is a pending number of items, etc.), it is desirable that neither the first advance normal performance nor the second advance normal performance be executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific gaming state (e.g., the second time-saving gaming state) is a gaming state in which a normal display state (e.g., a male character stage or a female character stage) and a special display state (e.g., a premier stage indicating the number of reserved consecutive stocks) whose display state is different from the normal display state can be executed, the specific effects include a first specific effect (e.g., an effect based on the background display mode of the male character stage) and a second specific effect (e.g., an effect based on the background display mode of the female character stage), and while the effect execution means is capable of executing either the first specific effect or the second specific effect in the normal display state, it is preferable that the effect execution means does not execute either the first specific effect or the second specific effect in the special display state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (for example, a second time-saving gaming state) that can be executed after the end of the special gaming state, and a first specific gaming state. a second specific game state (for example, a second normal game state) different from the state, and the performance execution means executes a performance mode that executes one of a plurality of types of performance modes that define the performance state. and performance mode selection means for selecting the performance mode to be executed by the performance mode execution means, and the performance mode execution means selects at least the first specific performance mode in the first specific gaming state. (for example, a male character stage) and a second specific presentation mode different from the first mode (for example, a female character stage). The performance mode selection means allows the player to select at least one of the first specific performance mode and the second specific performance mode when a predetermined selection condition is satisfied. is desirable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined selection condition can be established in the special gaming state transitioned to based on the special condition when the special condition is satisfied in the variable display of the identification pattern executed in the second specific gaming state, but it is preferable that the predetermined selection condition cannot be established in the special gaming state transitioned to based on the special condition when the special condition is satisfied in the variable display of the identification pattern executed in the first specific gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the special condition is satisfied by the variable display of the identification pattern executed in the first specific game state, the presentation mode execution means continues to execute the presentation mode executed when the special condition is satisfied in the first specific game state after the special game state ends.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a starting information acquisition means that acquires starting information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and a method that determines whether the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means satisfies the special condition. a special condition determining means for determining the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means for a predetermined number of pieces when the variable display of the identification symbol has already been executed or the variable display of the identification symbol cannot be executed; a retention storage means capable of storing up to
In the special game state, the performance execution means executes a special performance (for example, displaying the number of consecutive stock items on hold based on a V passing performance pattern) when starting information that satisfies the special condition is stored in the suspension storage unit. If the special condition is satisfied in the variable display of the identification symbol executed in the first specific gaming state, the special performance can be executed in the special gaming state to which the transition is based on the special condition. On the other hand, if the special condition is satisfied in the variable display of the identification symbol executed in the second specific gaming state, in the special gaming state shifted based on the special condition, Even if starting information that satisfies the special conditions is stored, it is desirable that the special effect is not executed.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes at least a first predetermined condition fulfillment pattern that can be fulfilled depending on the execution state of the variable display of the identification pattern being executed at the start of the pre-regular performance (e.g., first prohibited condition 3, "when the first start gate is won within 500 ms from the start of the variable display of the first special pattern"), and a second predetermined condition fulfillment pattern that can be fulfilled when the variable display of the identification pattern is not being executed at the start of the pre-regular performance (e.g., first prohibited condition 4, "when the first start gate is won during demo display").

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a first identification symbol variable display control means for variably displaying the first identification symbol up to a predetermined variation time and then stopping the first identification symbol in a predetermined stopped manner as execution of the variable display of the first identification symbol; a variation pattern table switching means for switching to one of a plurality of variation pattern tables in which a plurality of variation patterns for determining at least the variation time of the first identification symbol are defined; and a variation time determination means for determining a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern table switched by the variation pattern table switching means and determining the variation time of the first identification symbol based on the determined variation pattern,
It is desirable that the patterns in which the specific condition can be satisfied include a first specific condition satisfaction pattern which can be satisfied when a specified normal performance is being executed with the variable display of the identification pattern being executed at the start time of the pre-normal performance (for example, common prohibited conditions 4 and 5, ``when the same pre-reading performance is already being executed while a full rotation performance is being displayed''), and a second specific condition satisfaction pattern which can be satisfied when the specified number of times after or before the switching of the variable pattern table by the variable pattern table switching means is performed at the start time of the pre-normal performance (for example, common prohibited condition 3, ``when within five variable displays before and after the stage is switched'').

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time, and then the first identification symbol is stopped in a predetermined stopping manner. A first identification symbol variable display control means for displaying a first identification symbol; and after displaying the second identification symbol variably for a predetermined variation time, the second identification symbol is stopped in a predetermined stopping manner as execution of the variable display of the second identification symbol. A second identification pattern variable display control means for displaying,
As a pattern in which the specific condition can be satisfied, the variable display of the identification symbol being executed at the start time of the advance normal performance is such that the variable display of the second identification symbol is performed by the second identification symbol variable display control means. A third specific condition establishment pattern that can be established when It is desirable to include.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

<Additional Note: 7th Pachinko Game Machine (Part 2)>
[Background technology]
Conventionally, a starting hole and a big winning hole have been provided in the gaming area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a special symbol lottery is held. If you win, the game machine that controls the jackpot game state (so-called type 1 pachinko game machine) and the jackpot that changes to the open state when the ball enters the starting slot, and the jackpot opens. A gaming machine (a so-called two-type pachinko gaming machine) is known in which a jackpot gaming state is controlled on the condition that a game ball that enters the ball enters a specific area. Furthermore, by inserting a predetermined number of medals, etc. and operating the start lever, multiple reels are rotated, and based on the combination of symbols on the reels that are stopped and displayed, a specific number of medals, bonus games, etc. A gaming machine (a reel-type gaming machine called a so-called slot machine) that provides benefits is also known.

In addition, in order to improve the interest of the game, pachinko gaming machines have different gaming states (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state) with different lottery probabilities for special symbols, and different ball entry rates into the starting slot. A plurality of gaming states are provided, such as a gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a non-time-saving gaming state) (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art documents]
[Patent documents]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-59682

Summary of the Invention
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
It has been desired to maintain and improve gameplay by setting an appropriate game state according to the gameplay of the gaming machine and by carrying out appropriate processing.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can maintain and improve gaming performance.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes at least one of a first identification pattern (for example, a first special symbol) and a second identification symbol (for example, a second special symbol). identification symbol variable display control means (e.g., main CPU 201) that stops and displays the identification symbol in a predetermined stop mode after variably displaying it for a predetermined variable time; and effect execution means (e.g., display) that executes a predetermined effect. A sub-control circuit 300 that controls the device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46, a sub-CPU 301), and a gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 201) that shifts the gaming state and controls the shifted gaming state. Prepare,
The gaming state control means is capable of granting advantageous benefits to the player when a stopping mode of at least one of the first identification symbol and the second identification symbol satisfies a special condition. The game states in which it is possible to transition to a special game state (for example, a jackpot game state or a small win game state) and in which the variable display of the identification symbols can be executed include a normal game state (for example, a normal game state) and the normal game state. The game state includes at least a specific game state (for example, a time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state, and the normal game state is a first normal game state (for example, a first normal game state). and a second normal gaming state (for example, a second normal gaming state) different from the first normal gaming state, and the specific gaming state is a first specific gaming state (for example, a first time-saving game). a second specific gaming state (for example, a second time-saving gaming state) different from the first specific gaming state; and a third specific gaming state different from the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. state (for example, a third time-saving gaming state), and the gaming state control means controls the normal state when the number of fluctuations in which the identification symbol is displayed reaches a predetermined specific number of times. It is characterized in that it is possible to shift from the gaming state to the third specific gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the first identification symbol is primarily displayed in a variable manner, the second normal gaming state is a gaming state in which the second identification symbol is primarily displayed in a variable manner, and at least one of the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, and the third specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the second identification symbol is primarily displayed in a variable manner.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state control means is capable of shifting to the second normal gaming state after the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state ends; It is desirable to be able to shift to the first normal gaming state after the second normal gaming state ends.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the identification symbol variable display control means determines that the stopping manner of the first identification symbol does not satisfy the special condition (for example, a loss) in the first specific game state. When displaying the first identification symbol in a variable manner, the first identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a first variation time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the stop mode of the first identification symbol satisfies the special condition. When displaying the first identification symbol in a variable manner (for example, in the case of a jackpot or small win), the first identification symbol is When displaying the second identification symbol in a variable manner so that the stop mode of the second identification symbol satisfies the special condition (for example, in the case of a jackpot or small hit), the first variation time It is desirable that the second identification symbol can be displayed in a variable manner for a variable time (for example, 0.2 seconds) that is equal to or less than the second variable time.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the identification symbol variable display control means is configured such that the stop mode of the second identification symbol satisfies the special condition (for example, a jackpot or a small win) in the second specific gaming state. When displaying the second identification symbol in a variable manner (in case of a hit), a third variable time (for example, 2 seconds) and a fourth variable time longer than the third variable time (for example, 5 seconds or 12 seconds) are displayed. It is possible to cause the second identification symbol to be displayed in a variable manner according to any variable time including (seconds), and the stop mode of the first identification symbol satisfies the special condition (for example, a jackpot or a small hit). When displaying the first identification symbol in a variable manner, it is possible to display the first identification symbol in a variable manner by the third variation time, while the first identification symbol may be displayed in a variable manner by the fourth variation time. The effect execution means does not display the symbols in a variable manner, and when the second identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to the third variable time and when the first identification symbol is displayed in a variable manner according to the fourth variable time. , it is desirable to be able to perform the same effect (for example, a normal variable mode effect as a decorative pattern effect).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the identification pattern variable display control means variably displays the second identification pattern when the number of variations reaches the specific number, the identification pattern variable display control means is capable of variably displaying the second identification pattern using the same fifth variation time (e.g., 15 seconds) regardless of the stopping state of the second identification pattern, and when the second identification pattern variably displays when the number of variations reaches the specific number, the performance execution means is capable of executing different performances (e.g., a card performance or a door opening performance) when the second identification pattern is variably displayed using the fifth variation time and when the stopping state of the second identification pattern satisfies the special condition and when the special condition is not satisfied.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a start information acquisition means for acquiring start information when a predetermined start condition is established; a special condition determination means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means; and a reservation storage means for storing up to a predetermined reservation number of start information acquired by the start information acquisition means when the display of changes in the identification symbols has already been executed or the display of changes in the identification symbols cannot be executed;
It is desirable that, in the second normal game state, the presentation pattern determination means is capable of determining different presentation patterns depending on the number of start information items that satisfy the special condition stored in the pending memory means and the determination result by the special condition determination means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance execution means is capable of executing a special performance (for example, a door opening performance) in which the end time of the performance is not specified.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises: a start information acquisition means for acquiring start information when a predetermined start condition is established; a special condition determination means for determining whether or not the special condition is satisfied based on the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means; and a reservation storage means for storing up to a predetermined reservation number of start information acquired by the start information acquisition means when the display of changes in the identification symbols has already been executed or the display of changes in the identification symbols cannot be executed;
When the game state control means controls at least one of the first specific game state or the second specific game state, and the first identification pattern is variably displayed when an end condition for the first specific game state or the second specific game state being controlled is satisfied, it is desirable that the effect execution means executes a first transition effect (e.g., a continuous battle entry effect) for transitioning to the second normal game state if start information corresponding to the second identification pattern is stored in the pending memory means, and executes the special effect (e.g., a door opening effect) without executing the first transition effect if start information corresponding to the second identification pattern is not stored in the pending memory means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the game state control means controls the third specific game state and the first identification pattern is displayed in a variable manner when the end condition of the controlled third specific game state is satisfied, the effect execution means is capable of executing the special effect at the start of the variable display of the first identification pattern, and desirably ends the execution of the special effect together with the stationary display of the first identification pattern.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a starting information acquisition means that acquires starting information when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and the special condition is set based on the starting information acquired by the starting information acquiring means. special condition determining means for determining whether or not the above-mentioned identification symbols are satisfied; A reservation storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of reservations,
The performance execution means is configured to execute a game when the specific condition is not satisfied (for example, when the player does not pass through the V winning opening) while the special game state (for example, the small winning game state) is being controlled. , when the special performance is executable and the start information corresponding to the second identification symbol is stored in the suspension storage means, the second normal game state is executed after the special performance ends. If the first transition performance (for example, a continuous battle entry performance) is executed and the start information corresponding to the second identification symbol is not stored in the suspension storage means, the first normal game state is entered after the special performance ends. It is desirable to execute a first transition effect (for example, a stage change effect) for the transition.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to maintain and improve the gameplay.

<Additional Note: The 8th Pachinko Machine>
2. Background Art
Conventionally, a starting hole and a large prize hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a lottery for a special pattern is held, and when the lottery for this special pattern is won, the large prize hole is controlled, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the large prize hole is changed to an open state, and the large prize hole is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the large prize hole enters a specific area, and there are also known game machines (so-called type 2 pachinko game machines).

Furthermore, in order to improve the interest of the game, there are also so-called 1-type and 2-type pachinko game machines, which are a combination of a so-called 1-type pachinko game machine and a so-called 2-type pachinko game machine. known (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior Art Literature]
[Patent Documents]
[Patent Document 1] JP 2009-178259 A

Summary of the Invention
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, rather than merely mixing the so-called type 1 pachinko gaming machines with the so-called type 2 pachinko gaming machines, it was desired to create unprecedented gameplay and to increase the interest of the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

[Means for solving the problems]
In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention (e.g., an eighth pachinko gaming machine) is a gaming machine including a main control means (e.g., a main control circuit 200, a main CPU 201) capable of executing control related to the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300, a sub-CPU 301) capable of executing control related to presentation,
the main control means comprises: a game execution means capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition; a special condition determination means for determining whether or not a result of the execution of the game satisfies a special condition; a special game state control means for controlling a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to a player after the end of the game when it is determined that the special condition is satisfied; a game state control means for controlling a game state in which the game is executed; and a game execution mode determination means for determining an execution mode of the game (e.g., a variation pattern of a special symbol) to be executed based on the game execution means and to notify the result of the execution of the game,
The presentation control means is capable of executing any one of a plurality of presentations in a predetermined presentation execution means, and the game state control means is capable of controlling the game state to at least one of a normal game state and a specific game state (e.g., a time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special gaming state is a predetermined special gaming state (for example, a small winning gaming state) and a gaming value given to the player is higher than the predetermined special gaming state. A relatively high specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state), and the specific special gaming state includes a first specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z1); It is desirable to include a second specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z2) that is different from the first specific special gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the number of times the special gaming state has been executed (for example, the number of consecutive jackpots) or the number of gaming values given to the player (for example, the total number of jackpot balls issued) is a threshold determining means capable of determining whether a predetermined threshold has been reached; and a limiting means capable of controlling the gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means to the normal gaming state based on the determination by the threshold determining means. For example, it is desirable to include a main control circuit 200) that controls the number of times limiter function or the ball output limiter function.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a game state control means capable of controlling the game state to a non-playable state (e.g., a non-playable state) that disables the player from playing, a threshold determination means capable of determining whether the number of times the special game state has been executed (e.g., the number of consecutive jackpots) or the number of game values granted to the player (e.g., the cumulative number of jackpot balls) has reached a predetermined threshold, and a limiting means (e.g., a main control circuit 200 that controls a number-of-times limiter function or a ball-out limiter function) capable of controlling the game state controlled by the game state control means to the non-playable state based on the determination of the threshold determination means.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the presentation control means does not issue a notification related to the threshold before the threshold determination means determines that the predetermined threshold has been reached, but when the threshold determination means determines that the threshold has been reached, it is desirable for the predetermined presentation execution means to notify that the predetermined threshold has been reached (for example, by executing an ending presentation).

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a table storage means (e.g., a main ROM 202) for storing at least a first table (e.g., a special symbol variation pattern table J1) to which the game execution mode is associated, and a second table (e.g., a special symbol variation pattern table J2) different from the first table,
The game execution mode determination means is capable of determining an execution mode including an execution time of the game as an execution mode of the game by using any of the tables stored in the table storage means, and it is desirable that the second table is a table to which an execution mode including an execution time of the game that is relatively shorter than that of the first table (for example, a special pattern variation pattern 10H) is associated.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the remaining threshold value (for example, the remaining number of jackpot limiter times) until reaching the predetermined threshold value is a predetermined value, the game execution mode determining means: The execution mode of the game can be determined using the first table, and if the remaining threshold until reaching the predetermined threshold is a specific value different from the predetermined value, the second table can be used to determine the execution mode of the game. It is desirable to be able to determine how the game will be executed.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the first specific special gaming state is executed, the threshold value determining means determines that the predetermined threshold value is a first threshold value (for example, the limiter count is 98). times), and when the second specific special game state is executed, a second threshold value different from the first threshold value (for example, the limiter number of times is 100 times) can be set as the predetermined threshold value. Preferably configurable.

Preferably, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the gaming state control means is capable of controlling the gaming state to the normal gaming state after the end of the specified special gaming state when the specified special gaming state is executed a specified number of times (e.g., the number of small wins is 1 or 255, etc.) while controlled to the specific gaming state, and the threshold determination means is capable of executing a process of counting a specified count value (e.g., a value obtained by subtracting the number of limiter counts) on the threshold value based on the transition to the specified special gaming state, and then determining whether the counted threshold value has reached the specified threshold value.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the predetermined special game state is a first predetermined special game state (for example, a small winning game state of selected symbol z5) and a first predetermined special game state. includes a different second predetermined special game state (for example, a small winning game state of the selected symbol z6), and the threshold value determining means is configured to determine that when the transition to the first predetermined special game state occurs, the predetermined special game state A first counted value (for example, the subtracted value of the limiter count is 2) is counted to the threshold value, and when the second predetermined special gaming state is entered, the first counted value is a different value from the first counted value. It is desirable to count a certain second count value (for example, the subtraction value of the limiter count is 1) to the threshold value.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when the remaining threshold until reaching the predetermined threshold is a predetermined value, the gaming state control means sets a first predetermined number of times as the predetermined predetermined number of times ( For example, if the number of small winnings is set as 1) and the remaining threshold until reaching the predetermined threshold is a specific value different from the predetermined value, the first number of wins is set as the predetermined number of wins. It is desirable to set a second specified number of times that is larger than the specified number of times (for example, the number of small winnings is two).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific game state includes a first specific game state (e.g., time-saving game state A) that can be executed after the special game state ends, and a second specific game state (e.g., time-saving game state B) that can be executed without going through the special game state, and the threshold value determination means is capable of setting a third threshold value (e.g., a limiter count of 98 or 100) as the predetermined threshold value when the special game state (e.g., a first win) first transitioned to from a game state other than the first specific game state is a special game state transitioned to from the normal game state, and is capable of setting a fourth threshold value different from the third threshold value (e.g., a limiter count of 99) as the predetermined threshold value when the special game state (e.g., a first win) first transitioned to from a game state other than the first specific game state is a special game state transitioned to from the second specific game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific game state includes a first specific game state (e.g., time-saving game state A) that can be executed after the special game state ends, and a second specific game state (e.g., time-saving game state B) that can be executed without going through the special game state, and the game execution mode determination means is capable of determining the game execution mode (e.g., the special symbol fluctuation pattern according to special symbol fluctuation pattern tables J1 to J4) based on the threshold determined by the threshold determination means during the execution of the first specific game state, while being capable of determining the game execution mode (e.g., the special symbol fluctuation pattern according to special symbol fluctuation pattern table S1) regardless of the threshold determined by the threshold determination means during the execution of the second specific game state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes special game control mode determining means for determining the control mode of the special gaming state (for example, the opening mode of the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state),
It is desirable that the special game control mode determining means be able to determine the control mode of the special game state based on the remaining threshold until reaching the predetermined threshold.

In addition, in order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the eighth pachinko gaming machine) has main control means (for example, the main control circuit 200, the main control circuit 200, A gaming machine comprising a CPU 201) and a performance control means (for example, a sub-control circuit 300, a sub-CPU 301) that can execute control related to the performance executed by the performance execution means,
The main control means includes a game execution means capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, a special condition determination means that determines whether or not an execution result of the game satisfies a special condition; A special game state control means capable of controlling a special game state in which a predetermined game value can be awarded to a player after the end of the game when it is determined that the special condition is satisfied; and a game state in which the game is executed. controllable game state control means;
The gaming state control means is capable of controlling any gaming state including at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and The specific gaming state includes a normal specific gaming state (for example, a general time-saving gaming state) that can be ended when a first ending condition (for example, the number of small winnings is 1) is met, and the first ending condition. It is characterized by including at least a special specific gaming state (for example, a special time-saving gaming state) that can be ended when a second ending condition different from the above (for example, the number of small winnings is 255) is met. .

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special gaming state is a predetermined special gaming state (for example, a small winning gaming state) that can be transitioned to when a predetermined special condition is met, and a specific special condition. a specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that can be transitioned to when the game is established, and in which the gaming value given to the player is relatively higher than that of the predetermined special gaming state; The special gaming states include a first specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z2) and a second specific special gaming state that is different from the first specific special gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of the selected symbol z1). jackpot gaming state), and the gaming state control means is capable of controlling the gaming state to the normal specific gaming state after the end of the first specific special gaming state, and the gaming state control means is capable of controlling the gaming state to the normal specific gaming state after the end of the first specific special gaming state, and It is desirable that the gaming state can be controlled to the special specific gaming state after the end.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the first end condition is an end condition that is met relatively more frequently than the second end condition.

Preferably, the special game state of the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a predetermined special game state (e.g., a small win game state) to which a player can enter when a predetermined special condition is met, and a specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state) to which a player can enter when a specific special condition is met and in which the game value awarded to the player is relatively higher than that of the predetermined special game state, and the specific special game state includes a first specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state for the selected symbol z2) and a second specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state for the selected symbol z2) that is different from the first specific special game state. and a second specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state of selected symbol z1), and the first termination condition is a condition that is met when the specific special game state is executed a first specified number of times (e.g., one small win is won) during the execution of the normal specific game state, and the second termination condition is a condition that is met when the specific special game state is executed a second specified number of times that is greater than the first number of times (e.g., 255 small wins are won) during the execution of the special specific game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the game state control means is capable of terminating either the normal specific game state or the special specific game state that is being executed when a third termination condition different from either the first termination condition or the second termination condition (e.g., the number of time-saving times is 10,000) is met during execution of the normal specific game state or the special specific game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the third termination condition is an termination condition that is satisfied at a relatively lower rate than the first termination condition is satisfied during execution of the normal specific gaming state. It is desirable that

Preferably, the game machine according to the present invention includes a first game execution means capable of executing a first game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a first special symbol) when a first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established, and a second game execution means capable of executing a second game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a second special symbol) different from the first game when a second start condition different from the first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established,
It is desirable that a transition to the special game state based on the execution result of the first game execution means results in a relatively higher rate of transition to the special specific game state after the end of the special game state than a transition to the special game state based on the execution result of the second game execution means.

Preferably, the game machine according to the present invention includes a first game execution means capable of executing a first game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a first special symbol) when a first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established, and a second game execution means capable of executing a second game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a second special symbol) different from the first game when a second start condition different from the first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established,
It is desirable that a transition to the special game state based on the execution result of the second game execution means results in a relatively higher rate of transition to the normal specific game state after the end of the special game state than a transition to the special game state based on the execution result of the first game execution means.

Preferably, the game machine according to the present invention includes a first game execution means capable of executing a first game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a first special symbol) when a first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established, and a second game execution means capable of executing a second game (e.g., drawing a lottery for a second special symbol) different from the first game when a second start condition different from the first start condition among the predetermined start conditions is established,
When a transition to the special game state is made based on the execution result of the first game execution means, it is possible to transition to any of the normal game state, the normal specific game state, and the special specific game state at a predetermined rate after the special game state ends, while when a transition to the special game state is made based on the execution result of the second game execution means, it is desirable to transition to the normal specific game state after the special game state ends without transitioning to the normal game state or the special specific game state.

Preferably, the special game state of the gaming machine according to the present invention includes a predetermined special game state (e.g., a small win game state) to which a player can enter when a predetermined special condition is met, and a specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state) to which a player can enter when a specific special condition is met and in which the game value awarded to the player is relatively higher than that of the predetermined special game state, and the specific special game state includes a first specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state for the selected symbol z2) and a second specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state for the selected symbol z2) and a third specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state for the selected symbol z2) and a fourth specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state for the selected symbol z2). and a second specific special game state (e.g., a big win game state of the selected symbol z1) different from the special game state of the first specific game state. The specific special game state includes a first specific special game state (e.g., a small win game state of a small win of a small win of a falling game) which can be entered when a first specific condition (e.g., a small win of a falling game of the selected symbol z7) among the specific special conditions is satisfied, and a second specific special game state (e.g., a small V win of the selected symbols z5 and z6) different from the first specific condition among the specific special conditions is satisfied. , and a second predetermined special game state (for example, a small win game state of a V small win) that is more advantageous to the player than the first predetermined special game state, and the presentation control means has a predetermined presentation execution means capable of executing a predetermined presentation (for example, a continuation end presentation by a card presentation) related to the establishment of the first predetermined condition when the first predetermined condition is established, and a specific presentation execution means capable of executing a specific presentation (for example, a victory presentation by a battle presentation, or a door opening presentation) related to the establishment of the second predetermined condition when the second predetermined condition is established, and the specific presentation execution means is capable of executing the specific presentation when the second predetermined condition can be established in either the normal specific game state or the special specific game state, and it is preferable that the predetermined presentation execution means is capable of executing the predetermined presentation when the first predetermined condition can be established in the normal specific game state, but does not execute the predetermined presentation when the first predetermined condition can be established in the special specific game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific performance execution means is capable of executing the specific performance if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the normal gaming state is controlled. Preferably, the predetermined performance execution means is capable of not executing the predetermined performance if the first predetermined condition is satisfied while being controlled in the normal gaming state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the performance control means selects a special performance with a relatively high degree of expectation for transition to the special game state (for example, a preview performance based on a preview performance pattern B1 or a preview performance pattern B2). Equipped with a special performance execution means that can execute
The special performance execution means is capable of executing the special performance in any game, a game in which the special condition is satisfied and a game in which the special condition is not satisfied, when controlled in the normal specific game state; When controlled to the special specific game state, the special effect can be executed in a game where the special condition is met, while it is desirable that the special effect is not executed in a game where the special condition is not met.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the main control means includes a game execution time determination means capable of determining an execution time of the game executed based on the game execution means (for example, a variable display time of a special symbol);
It is preferable that the game execution time determination means is capable of determining a game in which the normal specific game state has a relatively longer variable time than the special specific game state in a game in which the special condition is not established.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further increase the enjoyment of the game.

<Additional Note: The 9th Pachinko Machine>
2. Background Art
Conventionally, a starting hole and a large prize hole are provided in the game area where the game ball flows down, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, a lottery for a special pattern is held, and when the lottery for this special pattern is won, the large prize hole is controlled, and when the game ball enters the starting hole, the large prize hole is changed to an open state, and the large prize hole is controlled on the condition that the game ball that entered the large prize hole enters a specific area, and there are also known game machines (so-called type 2 pachinko game machines).

Furthermore, in order to improve the interest of the game, there are also so-called 1-type and 2-type pachinko game machines, which are a combination of a so-called 1-type pachinko game machine and a so-called 2-type pachinko game machine. known (see Patent Document 1).

[Prior art documents]
[Patent documents]
[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2009-178259

Summary of the Invention
[Problem to be solved by the invention]
However, rather than merely mixing the so-called type 1 pachinko gaming machines with the so-called type 2 pachinko gaming machines, it was desired to create unprecedented gameplay and to increase the interest of the game.

The objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the enjoyment of gaming.

[Means to solve the problem]
In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention (e.g., the ninth pachinko gaming machine) provides a system for passing gaming media into the starting area (e.g., the first starting port 9120 or the second starting port 9140). a starting variation display game execution means (for example, main control circuit 200, sub control circuit 300, etc.) capable of executing a starting variation display game (for example, variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbols) based on the starting variation display game; A specific variable display game that can execute a specific variable display game (for example, variable display of normal symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the normal symbols) based on the passage of a game ball to a specific area (for example, the normal symbol operating area 9126) Execution means (for example, main control circuit 200 and sub-control circuit 300, etc.), special determination means (for example, main CPU 201 for performing lottery of special symbols) for determining whether or not the starting variation display game satisfies the special result. , a specific determination means for determining whether or not the specific variation display game satisfies a predetermined result (for example, the main CPU 201 that performs a lottery of normal symbols); and a specific determination means for determining whether the specific variation display game satisfies a predetermined result; If it is determined that the execution result satisfies the special result, the first displacement device (for example, the first special electric accessory unit 9130 or the second special electric accessory unit 9150) provided in the game area is moved to the game medium. a first displacement device operation control means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of displacing the player from a state in which it is difficult to win a prize to a state in which it is easy to win a prize, and execution of the specific fluctuation display game based on the determination result of the specific determination means When it is determined that the result satisfies the predetermined result, a second displacement device (for example, a normal electric accessory unit 9145) provided in the gaming area is displaced from a state where it is difficult to win a prize to a state where it is easy to win a prize. a second displacement device operation control means (for example, the main CPU 201) capable of controlling the game state; and a game state control means (for example, the main CPU 201) capable of controlling the game state;
The gaming state control means is capable of controlling any gaming state including at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state,
The special result includes at least a first special result (e.g., a jackpot) and a second special result (e.g., a small win) that provides relatively less gaming value to the player than the first special result. and the predetermined result includes a first predetermined result (for example, short-circuit opening of the second starting port 9140), and a second predetermined result that takes a relatively longer time to make the second displacement device easier to win than the first predetermined result. The method is characterized in that it includes at least a predetermined result (for example, long opening of the second starting port 9140).

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the gaming state control means, when controlled to the specific gaming state, is capable of controlling to the normal gaming state on the condition that the specific variable display game has been executed a specific number of times.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the specific gaming state is a first specific gaming state (for example, a first time-saving gaming state) and the second predetermined gaming state is determined by the specific determining means to be higher than the first specific gaming state. It is desirable to include at least a second specific game state (for example, a second time-saving game state or a third time-saving game state) in which the rate of determination as a result is relatively high.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, a suspending means (for example, a main RAM 203 having a special symbol starting storage area) capable of suspending execution of the starting variation display game for a predetermined number of times, and a holding means (for example, a main RAM 203 having a special symbol starting storage area); The starting variation display mode determining means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of determining the variation display mode (for example, the variation pattern of special symbols) of
The starting fluctuation display mode determining means determines the starting fluctuation display mode for a first period of time (for example, 10 seconds) if the starting fluctuation display game is not put on hold by the holding means when the starting condition for the starting fluctuation display game is satisfied. A first variation display mode (for example, a first special symbol variation pattern 0AH) that can be varied over a period of time is determined, and when the starting condition for the starting variation display game is satisfied, the starting variation display is set by the holding means. When the game is on hold, a second variable display mode (for example, a second special symbol variation) that can vary over a second time period (for example, 1 second) shorter than the first time period is displayed. It is desirable to be able to determine pattern 1AH).

Preferably, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the first time is a time longer (e.g., the first variable display time of 10 seconds) than the average time it takes for the gaming medium launched from the launching device to reach the second displacement device (e.g., the normal average arrival time of 5 seconds), and the second time is a time shorter (e.g., the second variable display time of 1 second) than the average time it takes for the gaming medium launched from the launching device to reach the second displacement device.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second displacement device is provided downstream of the first displacement device and upstream of the specific area, and the specific area The first displacement device and the second displacement device are provided below the gaming area, and when the first displacement device or the second displacement device enters the winning easy state, the frequency of passage to the specific area is relatively It is desirable that it be lower.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes specific variable display mode determining means (for example, main CPU 201) capable of determining a variable display mode (for example, a normal symbol variation pattern) of the specific variable display game, and The specific variation display mode determining means satisfies the second predetermined result based on the determination result of the specific determination means than when it is determined that the first predetermined result is satisfied based on the determination result of the specific determination means. When it is determined that, a variation display mode (for example, normal symbol variation pattern 13H, 15H or 16H) that can fluctuate over a relatively long time (for example, 15 seconds, 40 seconds or 60 seconds) is determined. It is desirable that this is possible.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a specific variable display mode determination means (e.g., the main CPU 201) capable of determining the variable display mode (e.g., the normal symbol variable pattern) of the specific variable display game, and the specific variable display mode determination means is capable of determining a third variable display mode (e.g., normal symbol variable pattern 13H to 15H) that can vary over a third time (e.g., 15 seconds, 12 seconds, or 40 seconds) when the execution result of the previously changed specific variable display game is a losing result that does not satisfy the predetermined result or the first predetermined result, and is capable of determining a fourth variable display mode (e.g., normal symbol variable pattern 16H) that can vary over a fourth time (e.g., 60 seconds) that is longer than the third time when the execution result of the previously changed specific variable display game is the second predetermined result.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a specific variable display mode determination means (e.g., main CPU 201) capable of determining the variable display mode (e.g., normal symbol variable pattern) of the specific variable display game, and the specific variable display mode determination means is capable of determining a variable display mode (e.g., normal symbol variable pattern 10H, 11H, etc.) that can vary over a relatively shorter variable time (e.g., 3 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) in the specific game state than in the normal game state, and it is desirable that the variable display mode (e.g., normal symbol variable pattern 01H) that can vary over the longest variable time (e.g., 30 seconds) that can be determined in the normal game state is a variable display mode with a shorter variable time than the variable display mode (e.g., normal symbol variable pattern 16H) that can vary over the longest variable time (e.g., 60 seconds) that can be determined in the specific game state.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a presentation execution means (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 for controlling the display device 7, the speaker 32 and the group of LEDs 46) capable of executing a predetermined presentation, and the presentation execution means is capable of executing a presentation relating to the variable display of the start variable display game in the normal gaming state while not executing a presentation relating to the variable display of the specific variable display game, and is capable of executing a presentation relating to the variable display of the specific variable display game in the specific gaming state, and is also capable of executing a presentation relating to the variable display of the start variable display game when the execution result of the specific variable display game becomes the predetermined result.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a presentation execution means capable of executing a predetermined presentation (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46) and a hold means capable of holding a predetermined number of executions of the start variation display game (e.g., a main RAM 203 having a special pattern start memory area), and the presentation execution means executes a first presentation (e.g., a BONUS entry presentation) if the start variation display game satisfies the special result and the start variation display game is not held by the hold means when the start condition of the start variation display game is established, and executes a second presentation (e.g., a BONUS continuation presentation) different from the first presentation if the start variation display game satisfies the special result and the start variation display game is held by the hold means when the start condition of the start variation display game is established.

Preferably, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance (e.g., a sub-control circuit 300 and a sub-CPU 301 that control the display device 7, the speaker 32, and the LED group 46), a hold means capable of holding a predetermined number of executions of the start variable display game (e.g., a main RAM 203 having a special pattern start memory area), and a special game state control means (e.g., the main CPU 201) that can control the start variable display game executed by the start variable display game execution means to a special game state (e.g., a jackpot game state) in which a predetermined number of game values can be awarded to the player after the special result is established when the special result is established, and the performance execution means controls the start variable display game when the special result is satisfied. If the start variable display game is not held by the holding means when the start condition of the start variable display game is satisfied, it is preferable that the start variable display game be capable of displaying the number of game media expected to be acquired (for example, displaying an image of the number of game balls expected to be acquired) relating to the number of game values that the player can acquire at the start of the special game state, and if the start variable display game is held by the holding means when the start condition of the start variable display game is satisfied, the start variable display game when the special result is satisfied be capable of displaying the number of acquired game media (for example, displaying an image of the number of acquired game balls) relating to the number of game values acquired in the special game state previously executed at the start of the special game state.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the start fluctuation display game execution means executes the first start fluctuation display game ( For example, a first start variable display game execution means capable of executing a first special symbol and a variable display of a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, etc. A second starting variable display game execution means capable of executing a second starting variable display game (for example, variable display of a second special symbol and a decorative pattern corresponding to the second special symbol) based on passage of the game medium. The performance execution means executes the second start by the holding means when the second start fluctuation display game satisfies the special result and the start condition of the second start fluctuation display game is satisfied. If the variable display game is not on hold, the first effect is executed, the second starting variable display game satisfies the special result, and the starting conditions for the second starting variable display game are If the second starting variable display game is put on hold by the holding means when the second starting variation display game is established, it is desirable to execute a second effect different from the first effect.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the start fluctuation display game execution means executes the first start fluctuation display game ( For example, a first start variable display game execution means capable of executing a first special symbol and a variable display of a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, etc. A second starting variable display game execution means capable of executing a second starting variable display game (for example, variable display of a second special symbol and a decorative pattern corresponding to the second special symbol) based on passage of the game medium. The special determination means is a first special determination means (for example, a first special symbol lottery) that determines whether the first starting variation display game satisfies the special result or is a loss that does not satisfy the special result. a second special determination means (for example, a main CPU 201 that performs a lottery for a second special symbol) that determines whether the second starting variable display game satisfies the special result or is a loss; The first special determination means has a relatively higher probability of determining the loss than the probability of determining that the special result is satisfied, and the second special determination means has a relatively higher probability of determining the loss than of determining that the special result is satisfied. It is desirable that the probability of determining that the special result is satisfied is relatively high.

Preferably, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the second time is set to a time (for example, 2 seconds) or less in which the first displacement device becomes in a state where it is easy to win a prize.

〔Effect of the invention〕
According to the present invention, it is possible to further increase the enjoyment of the game.

7 Display device 200 Main control circuit 201 Main CPU
202 Main ROM
203 Main RAM
300 Sub control circuit 301 Sub CPU
9010 Game board unit 9100 Game panel 9120 First start hole 9126 Normal play area 9130 First special electric accessory unit 9131 First large prize hole 9140 Second start hole 9145 Normal electric accessory unit 9150 Second special electric accessory unit 9151 Second large prize hole 9156 V prize hole

Claims (1)

a starting variation display game execution means capable of executing a starting variation display game based on passage of the game medium to the starting area;
a specific variable display game execution means capable of executing a specific variable display game based on passage of a game ball to a specific area;
determining means capable of determining the result of the starting fluctuation display game or the specific fluctuation display game;
When it is determined that the specific variable display game satisfies a predetermined result based on the determination result of the determination means, a displacement device provided in the gaming area is displaced from a state in which it is difficult for game media to win a prize to a state in which it is easy to win a prize. a displacement device operation control means capable of
a performance control means for controlling a performance execution means capable of executing the performance;
a gaming state control means capable of controlling the gaming state;
Suspension means capable of suspending execution of the start fluctuation display game for a predetermined number of times;
Starting variation display mode determining means capable of determining a variation display mode of the starting variation display game;
specific variation display mode determining means capable of determining a variation display mode of the specific variation display game;
When the starting variable display game satisfies a special result, a special game state control means capable of controlling to a special game state in which a predetermined number of game values can be awarded to the player after the special result is established;
Equipped with
The gaming state control means is capable of controlling any gaming state including at least a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that has a different degree of advantage for the player than the normal gaming state,
The predetermined result includes at least a first predetermined result and a second predetermined result that takes a relatively longer time to make the displacement device easier to win than the first predetermined result,
The specific fluctuation display mode determining means includes:
When the execution result of the specific variable display game that changed last time is the first predetermined result, it is possible to determine a first variable display mode that can change over a first time after deriving the first predetermined result. and
If the execution result of the specific fluctuation display game that fluctuated last time is the second predetermined result, the fluctuation occurs over a second time period that is longer than the first time period after the second predetermined result is derived. A possible second variation display mode can be determined,
The starting fluctuation display mode determining means includes:
If the starting variable display game is not put on hold by the holding means when the starting condition for the starting variable display game is satisfied, a third variable display mode that can vary over a third period of time is determined. ,
If the start fluctuation display game is put on hold by the suspension means when the start condition for the start fluctuation display game is satisfied, the start fluctuation display game may be changed over a fourth time period shorter than the third time period. It is possible to determine the variation display mode of 4.
The third time is longer than the average time it takes for the game medium fired from the firing device to reach the displacement device,
The fourth time is a time shorter than the average time it takes for the game medium fired from the firing device to reach the displacement device,
The performance control means is
When the game medium passes through the special area while the special game state is being controlled by the special game state control means, it is possible to execute a special passing effect,
In a case where a plurality of special game states can be executed, when the game medium passes through the special area while a previous special game state is being executed, it is possible to cause a special passing effect to be executed for a predetermined period of time,
If the game medium passes through the special area while a later special game state is being executed after the previous special game state has been executed, the special passing effect is not executed or the time is shorter than the predetermined time. It is possible to perform special passing effects over a period of time.
A gaming machine characterized by: